Mn00268e v12 WEB LCT ALCplus2e - 1.9 - Enh User Manual PDF

WEB LCT
ALCplus2e
Ethernet Enhanced functionality
ALS series equipment with ALCplus2e IDU
management software application
Release 1.9.0
User manual
MN.00268.E - 012
The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.

Property of SIAE MICROELETTRONICA. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the international regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from SIAE MICROELETTRONICA.
Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen displayed is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product.
MS-DOS, MS Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
HP, HP OpenView NNM and HPUX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks.
UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark.
Oracle is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark.
Mozilla Firefox is a Mozilla Foundation registered trademark.
Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system.
Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL).
Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.
WEB LCT ALCplus2e

Contents
MANUAL CONTENT ................................................................................................................. 19
WEB LCT APPLICATION.......................................................................................................... 20

FUNCTIONALITIES .............................................................................................................. 22
LIMITS.............................................................................................................................. 23
INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................... 24
WEB LOCAL CRAFT TERMINAL (WEB LCT) PAGE..................................................................... 25

OPEN/CLOSE THE WEB LCT PAGE ......................................................................................... 26
Open the WEB LCT page from Browser (Ethernet connection) ............................................. 26
Open the WEB LCT page from Browser (USB connection) ................................................... 27
Open the WEB LCT page from SCT/LMT ........................................................................... 27
Open more WEB LCT pages............................................................................................ 28
Close the WEB LCT page................................................................................................ 28
ELEMENTS OF THE WEB LCT PAGE ........................................................................................ 29
Equipment Menu area ................................................................................................... 30
Equipment info area...................................................................................................... 31
Users area ................................................................................................................... 33
User Profile parameter............................................................................................. 33
[Logged Users] parameter ....................................................................................... 33
Verify the users connected to the equipment ........................................................ 34
Force the logout of a user .................................................................................. 34
[Logout] parameter ................................................................................................ 35
[Open Far End] parameter ....................................................................................... 35
Open the WEB LCT page of equipment (Remote Link) ............................................ 35
[Help] parameter.................................................................................................... 35
Remote elements list area ............................................................................................. 36
Add a station to the list ........................................................................................... 37
Rename a station of the list ..................................................................................... 37
Remove a station of the list...................................................................................... 38
Add equipment to the list......................................................................................... 38
Remove equipment from the list ............................................................................... 39
WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012
Reset the remote equipment list ............................................................................... 39

Open the WEB LCT page of equipment of the list (Remote Link) .................................... 39
Remote equipment list (info) .................................................................................... 40
Contextual area............................................................................................................ 41
Equipment status area .................................................................................................. 42
Verify the active manual operations .......................................................................... 43
Verify/modify the manual operation timeout ............................................................... 43
MESSAGES DISPLAYED IN THE WEB LCT PAGE ....................................................................... 45
MENU AND COMMANDS (EQUIPMENT MENU) ......................................................................... 46

MAIN ................................................................................................................................ 47
Equipment Properties .................................................................................................... 48
Verify the equipment properties (type, ID, SNMP IP address, etc.) ................................ 48
Modify the equipment identifier ................................................................................ 48
Modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment .......................................... 48
Align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC .......... 49
Verify the equipment addresses ................................................................................ 49
Verify the equipment feature .................................................................................... 49
Enable a new equipment feature ............................................................................... 49
Verify the equipment units ....................................................................................... 50
Execute the equipment software reset ....................................................................... 50
Equipment Properties contextual area........................................................................ 51
General Info tab ............................................................................................... 51
Network tab ..................................................................................................... 52
Equipment Feature tab ...................................................................................... 52
Equipment Units tab.......................................................................................... 53
Port Configuration & ACL ............................................................................................... 54
Verify/modify the Ethernet port configuration ............................................................. 54
Verify/modify the LCT PPP port configuration .............................................................. 56
Verify/modify the Radio port configuration ................................................................. 57
Verify/modify the Radio 1A port configuration............................................................. 58
Verify/modify the Radio 2A port configuration............................................................. 58
Verify/modify the Line EOC port configuration............................................................. 59
Verify/modify the IP Over OSI port configuration ........................................................ 60
Verify the rules used by the IP Access Control List....................................................... 61
Add a rule to the IP Access Control List...................................................................... 61
Remove a rule from the IP Access Control List ............................................................ 62
Enable/disable the use of the IP Access Control List..................................................... 62
Execute the equipment software reset ....................................................................... 62
Port Configuration & ACL contextual area ................................................................... 63
Ethernet tab..................................................................................................... 63
LCT PPP tab ..................................................................................................... 64
Radio tab ......................................................................................................... 65
Radio 1A tab .................................................................................................... 66
Radio 2A tab .................................................................................................... 66
Line EOC tab .................................................................................................... 67
IP Over OSI tab ................................................................................................ 67
NSAP tab ......................................................................................................... 68

ACL tab ........................................................................................................... 69
Available of the communication port.......................................................................... 70
IP Access Control List (info) ..................................................................................... 72
Routing Table............................................................................................................... 73
Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway used by the equipment ...................... 73
Add an element to the Routing Table ......................................................................... 73
Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table ................................................ 74
Set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway .................................................... 74
Delete the IP Address used as Default Gateway .......................................................... 74
Routing Table contextual area .................................................................................. 75
Routing Table and Default Gateway (info) .................................................................. 76
Stored Routing Table .................................................................................................... 77
Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway present into the backup memory
of the controller...................................................................................................... 77
Add an element into the Stored Routing Table ............................................................ 77
Remove one or more elements from the Stored Routing Table ...................................... 78
Set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table .......... 78
Delete the IP address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table ................. 78
Stored Routing Table contextual area ........................................................................ 79
Performance Monitoring................................................................................................. 80
Verify the status of the PM measures......................................................................... 80
Activate a PM measure ............................................................................................ 81
Activate all PM measures in a group contemporaneously .............................................. 81
Deactivate a PM measure......................................................................................... 81
Deactivate all PM measure in a group contemporaneously ............................................ 82
Display the results and the threshold exceeding alarms................................................ 82
Reset the values of the records daily and primary ....................................................... 84
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms........................................................................ 85
Set the thresholds of the control parameters and of the alarms..................................... 85
Set the 2Mbit/s tributary used for the measure (G828 E1 Line Side/
G828 E1 Internal Side) ............................................................................................ 91
Modify the modality used to increase the counters (ACM Radio) .................................... 92
Performance Monitoring contextual area .................................................................... 93
PM measures ......................................................................................................... 94
G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number>.................................................................. 94
G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> ............................................................. 94
G828 Radio <radio branch> ............................................................................... 95
G828 E1 Line Side............................................................................................. 95
G828 E1 Internal Side ....................................................................................... 96
G828 Vc12 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12>....................... 96
ACM Radio <radio branch> ................................................................................ 97
RxPwr Radio <radio branch> .............................................................................. 98
TxPwr Radio <radio branch> .............................................................................. 98
PM measures (info) ................................................................................................. 99
Report & Loggers Maint. ...............................................................................................100
Save the configuration, the alarms and the operations executed by the users to file .......100
Delete the alarms stored into the equipment controller ...............................................100
Delete the operations list stored into the equipment controller .....................................101
Report & Loggers Maint. contextual area ...................................................................102

Report WEB page...................................................................................................103
SNTP & Wake Up Config. ..............................................................................................104
Verify the SNTP functionality ...................................................................................104
Set the execution parameters and activate the SNTP functionality ................................104
Disable the SNTP functionality .................................................................................105
Verify the Wake Up functionality status.....................................................................105
Set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality ...........................105
Disable the Wake Up functionality ............................................................................106
SNTP & Wake Up Config. contextual area ..................................................................107
SNTP tab ........................................................................................................107
Wake Up tab ...................................................................................................108
SNTP functionality (info) .........................................................................................109
Wake Up functionality (info) ....................................................................................110
SD Memory Management..............................................................................................111
Verify the status and the configuration of the SD .......................................................111
Execute the automatic equipment restart from SD in case of replacement of IDU ...........111
Execute the automatic update of the equipment software from SD ...............................113
Delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from the SD.............................114
Disable the automatic equipment restart from SD ......................................................114
Disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the StandBy memory bench after
an automatic sw update from SD .............................................................................114
Force the restore of the configuration data and of the equipment sw from the SD
to the controller.....................................................................................................114
Copy the equipment sw from the SD to the controller (Sw Dwl SD) ..............................114
SD Memory Management contextual area .................................................................115
SD memory card (info) ...........................................................................................117
Storing the equipment data into SD....................................................................117
Use of the SD for the equipment management .....................................................117
Commands for the management/maintenance of SD.............................................118
Warnings about the correct use of SD card ..........................................................119
Software Info & Maint. .................................................................................................120
Verify the firmware version of the equipment ............................................................120
Update the firmware of the equipment......................................................................120
Switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the controller.......................121
Verify the WEB LCT version present into the equipment ..............................................122
Update the WEB LCT application ..............................................................................122
Verify the communication stack in use ......................................................................122
Modify the communication stack in use .....................................................................122
Restore Factory Default of the equipment .................................................................123
Execute the equipment software reset ......................................................................123
Software Info & Maint contextual area ......................................................................124
Equipment Firmware tab ...................................................................................124
Web LCT tab ...................................................................................................125
IP/OSI stack switch tab ....................................................................................125
Equipment firmware (info) ......................................................................................126
Factory Default of the equipment (info) ....................................................................127
Backup/Restore Config. ................................................................................................128
Save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration) ..................................128
Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (restore configuration)...............128

Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before
the last operation of configuration restore (revert configuration) ..................................129
Backup/Restore Config. contextual area....................................................................130
Backup/restore of the equipment configuration (info) .................................................131
Security Config............................................................................................................132
Verify the security protocols of the equipment (SSH, SFTP, HTTPS, SNMPv3) .................132
Activate the equipment management in Secure Mode .................................................133
Activate the equipment management in Not Secure Mode ...........................................133
Activate the equipment management in mixed mode (Secure Mode/Not Secure Mode) ....134
Configure the SSH protocol .....................................................................................134
Migrate from HTTP protocol to HTTPS protocol ...........................................................135
Migrate from HTTPS protocol to HTTP protocol ...........................................................136
Update the certificates (HTTPS) ...............................................................................136
Migrate from FTP protocol to SFTP protocol ...............................................................136
Change the SFTP access credentials (SNMPv1/v2c) ....................................................137
Set the SFTP access credentials (SNMPv3) ................................................................137
Migrate from SFTP protocol to FTP protocol ...............................................................137
Change the FTP access credentials ...........................................................................138
Migrate from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol ..............................................138
Migrate from SNMPv3 protocol to SNMPv1/v2c protocol ..............................................139
Security Config. contextual area ..............................................................................140
Security (info) .......................................................................................................143
SSH protocol (info) ................................................................................................144
Installation and configuration of SSH server ........................................................144
HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info).....................................................................................146
FTP/SFTP protocol (info) .........................................................................................149
SNMP protocol (info) ..............................................................................................150
Alarm Severity Config. .................................................................................................152
Verify the severity level and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms .....................152
Enable/disable an alarm .........................................................................................152
Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm .................................................152
Change the severity level of an alarm .......................................................................153
Alarm Severity Config. contextual area .....................................................................154
Alarms (info).........................................................................................................155
User Manager .............................................................................................................156
Verify the user list .................................................................................................156
Add a user to the list..............................................................................................156
Modify a user into the list........................................................................................157
Delete a user from the list ......................................................................................157
Change the password and the timeout of the System user...........................................157
Change the network password and timeout ...............................................................158
Change the password and the timeout of the NMS5UX user .........................................158
Verify/modify the IP address of Permanent Login .......................................................159
User Manager contextual area .................................................................................160
User Manager SNMP-V3................................................................................................161
Verify the SNMPv3 user list .....................................................................................161
Add a SNMPv3 user................................................................................................161
Modify a SNMPv3 user ............................................................................................162
Delete a SNMPv3 user ............................................................................................163

User Manager SNMP-V3 contextual area ...................................................................164
User list (info) .......................................................................................................165
Users list management (SNMPv1/v2c) ................................................................165
Users list management (SNMPv3) ......................................................................166
EQUIPMENT ......................................................................................................................168
Configurator ...............................................................................................................169
Verify/modify the radio configuration........................................................................171
Verify/modify the management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality ...............................172
Verify/modify the management of the PWE3 function..................................................173
Verify/modify the management of synchronisation .....................................................173
Verify/modify the management of STM-1 ..................................................................174
Verify/modify the monitoring status of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH
and SDH ring ........................................................................................................174
Verify/modify the management of the East-West modality...........................................175
Verify/modify the LLF modality (equipment with two radio directions and Ethernet
traffic concatenation) .............................................................................................175
Verify/modify the belonging of the equipment to a node..............................................175
Verify/modify the number of elements of the node interconnected with Ethernet
nodal Bus (Ethernet elements) ................................................................................176
Verify/modify the number of elements of the node interconnected with TDM nodal Bus
(TDM elements).....................................................................................................176
Verify/modify the identifier of the equipment in the node ............................................177
Verify/modify the enabling of Spanning Tree at level of node .......................................177
Verify/modify the protection of the TDM nodal Bus in the node ....................................177
Verify/modify the mapping of tributaries A and B with Radio E1s ..................................178
Verify/modify the enabling status of the transit of the packets of the ports
(Ethernet Switch and CPU) of the local IDU to/from the ports (Ethernet Switch and CPU)
of the other IDUs of the node ..................................................................................178
Configurator contextual area ...................................................................................180
Configurator tab ..............................................................................................180
Tributary A-B Mapping tab ................................................................................183
Nodal Port Based VLan tab ................................................................................183
Monitoring of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH ring (info) .............185
BW & Mod./Link ID ......................................................................................................186
Verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration
parameters of the adaptive modulation.....................................................................186
Modify the reference band/modulation ......................................................................187
Modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation...............................................187
Modify the power profile of the RF transmitter (ACM enabled) ......................................187
Modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled) .....188
Enable/disable the ACM profile 4QAM Strong (ACM enabled) ........................................188
Modify the number of E1 permanently allocated (high priority streams).........................188
Modify the number of E1 assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams)....................188
Verify/modify the link identification number ..............................................................189
Verify/modify the priority of the dynamic E1..............................................................189
BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area ..........................................................................190
Modulation & Capacity tab.................................................................................190
Local Link ID tab..............................................................................................191
Extra TDM Priority tab ......................................................................................192
Adaptive modulation (info)......................................................................................194
Ethernet transport ...........................................................................................194

TDM transport .................................................................................................194
Priority of dynamic E1 Radio streams (TDM Capacity) ...........................................195
Multiple ACM profiles per modulation ..................................................................196
Reference modulation and power profile of the transmitter ....................................196
General Preset ............................................................................................................197
Verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception ..........................................197
Verify/modify the radio branch label .........................................................................197
Verify/modify the status of the local/remote synchronization protocol ...........................198
Verify/modify the enabling status of the switch in transmission ....................................198
Verify/modify the T and N parameters ......................................................................198
Reset the Transmitter Switch on Remote alarm..........................................................199
Verify the enabling status and the configuration of the MCM function ............................199
Enable/disable the MCM function for each LAN ...........................................................199
Modify the management parameters of the BW-VSM messages (MCM) ..........................199
General Preset contextual area ................................................................................201
General tab.....................................................................................................201
MCM tab .........................................................................................................202
Local/remote synchronization protocol (info) .............................................................203
MCM functionality (info)..........................................................................................204
Xpic ...........................................................................................................................205
Verify the configuration parameters of the XPIC function .............................................205
Disable temporarily the function XPIC for a single branch ............................................205
Restore the XPIC function of the single branch...........................................................205
Enable/disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP) .............................................206
Restore the function XPIC after a fault detection ........................................................206
Xpic contextual area...............................................................................................207
XPIC function (info) ...............................................................................................208
STM1 Bulk Config. .......................................................................................................209
Verify/modify the status of the STM-1 Bulk function ...................................................209
STM1 Bulk Config. contextual area ...........................................................................210
STM-1 Bulk function (info) ......................................................................................211
SYNCHRONISATION...........................................................................................................212
Verify the status and configuration of the T0 and T4 synchronism ......................................212
Force the status of the T0 synchronisation ......................................................................213
Set the modality from which the T4 synchronism is extracted ............................................213
Enable/disable the T4 Squelch.......................................................................................213
Set the Hold Off Time parameter ...................................................................................213
Set the WTR Time parameter ........................................................................................214
Set the threshold levels of the LTI alarm.........................................................................214
Enable/disable the use of the source quality into the choice criterion of the synchronism .......214
Set the minimum quality level of the source that generates the T4 synchronism ..................215
Verify the status and configuration of the synchronism sources..........................................215
Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source...............................................................215
Modify the use priority of a synchronism source ...............................................................216
Force the use of a synchronism source ...........................................................................216
Set a synchronism source as preferential ........................................................................217
Set the signal used as synchronism source for T2/T3-2 input.............................................217
Set the signal used as synchronism source for TE LAN-A or TE LAN-B input .........................218
Set the source used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL A or STM-1/NODAL B input...............218

Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source................................219
Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without waiting
for the expiry of Wait Time ...........................................................................................219
Manage the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and set the interface (output/input)
of tributary A/B ...........................................................................................................220
Re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation .............220
Verify/modify the spare bit used for the coding of quality for T2/T3 E1 synchronism sources..221
Verify/modify the modality to assign the role of the LANs (1000Base-T) used as
synchronism sources....................................................................................................221
Verify/modify the management of SSM protocol for every single LAN..................................222
Synchronisation contextual area ....................................................................................223
General tab...........................................................................................................223
T0/T4, T0 and T4 tab .............................................................................................225
E1 Source Type tab................................................................................................227
E1 Retiming tab.....................................................................................................228
T2/T3 E1 SA Bit / 1000Base-T Role tab.....................................................................228
LAN SSM Enabling tab ............................................................................................229
Synchronisation (info) ..................................................................................................230
Management of synchronisation...............................................................................230
Synchronism sources .............................................................................................230
Enabling of the synchronism sources ..................................................................234
Configuration of the synchronism sources ...........................................................234
Priority of the synchronism source......................................................................234
Quality of synchronism source ...........................................................................235
Forcing of a synchronism source ........................................................................237
Function of preferential synchronism source ........................................................237
Internal synchronism T0 .........................................................................................237
Synchronism in output T4 .......................................................................................237
Synchronism in output T12 .....................................................................................238
Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation ....238
Implementation of the function for the E1s of the base board (tributary A and B) .....238
Implementation of the function for the E1s of the expansion (tributary 1...n) ...........239
BASE BAND ......................................................................................................................241
Ethernet Switch (Enh.) .................................................................................................242
Common Parameters..............................................................................................243
Verify/modify the Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field ......................................243
Verify/modify the maximum size of the accepted packet .......................................243
Verify/modify the address learning modality in MAC Table .....................................244
Verify/modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table ...................244
Display the MAC Table ......................................................................................244
Reset the MAC Table ........................................................................................245
Restore Factory Default of the Ethernet Switch ....................................................245
Verify/modify the hysteresis of the Link Loss Forwarding modality ..........................246
Verify the existing virtual LANs ..........................................................................246
Create a virtual Lan..........................................................................................246
Modify the configuration of a virtual Lan..............................................................247
Delete a virtual Lan ..........................................................................................247
Verify/modify the status of fragmentation of Ethernet packets ...............................248
Verify/modify the status of the 1588 Pass Through functionality .............................248
Verify/modify the criterion used to analyse 1588 packets ......................................249

Common Parameters contextual area .................................................................250
General tab ...............................................................................................250
Virtual Lan Config. tab ................................................................................251
LLF tab .....................................................................................................252
Radio Packet Fragm. tab .............................................................................252
IEEE 1588 Pass Through tab........................................................................253
Virtual LAN (info) .............................................................................................254
1588 Pass Through functionality (info) ................................................................256
Priority towards LAN ports ......................................................................................257
Verify/assign the output queue (LANs) to a packet according to its 802.1p Tag ........257
Verify/assign the output queue (LANs) to a packet according to its PTOS/DSCP field .257
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from
the LANs to the output queue ............................................................................258
Verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from
the LANs which, in output, the Tag is added to.....................................................258
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the LANs ........................258
Verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue
of the LANs .....................................................................................................259
Priority towards LAN ports contextual area ..........................................................260
Native 802.1p tab ......................................................................................260
PTOS/DSCP Config. tab...............................................................................260
Priority Management tab .............................................................................261
Queue Mngt Radio to Lan tab.......................................................................262
Priority towards Radio ports ....................................................................................263
Verify/assign the output queue (Radio ports) to a packet according to its native
802.1p Tag .....................................................................................................263
Verify/assign the output queue (Radio ports) to a packet according to its native
MPLS priority Tag.............................................................................................263
Verify/modify the correspondence between MPLS priority and 802.1p priority
of the packets if input from LANs and in output from Radio ports............................264
Verify/assign the output queue (Radio ports) to a packet according to its
PTOS/DSCP field ..............................................................................................264
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input
from the LANs to the output queue of the Radio ports ...........................................264
Verify/modify the value for Port Default and 802.1p priority...................................265
Priority towards Radio ports contextual area ........................................................266
Native 802.1p/MPLS tab..............................................................................266
MPLS to 802.1p Rewrite tab ........................................................................267
PTOS/DSCP Config. tab...............................................................................267
Priority Management tab .............................................................................268
Compression .........................................................................................................269
Verify/modify the compression of the headers of Ethernet packets in input
from LANs.......................................................................................................269
Compression contextual area.............................................................................270
LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.), LAN 4 (Enh.) ...................................................272
Verify/modify the enabling status of the LAN .............................................................273
Verify/modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the LAN .............................274
Verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation
is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the LAN .............274
Verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the LAN ...................................274
Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the LAN .......275
Verify/modify the rule to forwarding the input packets from the LAN.............................275
Verify/modify the maximum throughput of data in output from LAN port .......................276
Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the LAN ....................................................276
Verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) for the LAN .............276
Verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles
of the line synchronism for the LAN ..........................................................................276
Verify/modify the interface type of the LAN ...............................................................277
Verify the existing PIRL instances for the LAN ............................................................277
Create a PIRL instance for the LAN...........................................................................277
Enable/disable a PIRL instance of the LAN .................................................................278
Modify a PIRL instance of the LAN ............................................................................278
Delete a PIRL instance of the LAN ............................................................................279
Verify/modify the modality and the criteria used to limit the traffic in input from
the LAN ................................................................................................................279
Verify the current management modality of protocol 802.1Q .......................................281
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LAN to the
output queue of the Radio ports...............................................................................282
Verify/modify the value for Port Default and 802.1p priority ........................................283
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the LAN ...............................283
Verify/modify the Service Tag List table ....................................................................283
Verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue
of the LAN ............................................................................................................284
Verify/modify the Default Vid value of the LAN...........................................................285
Force the value of VID of the LAN to the default value ................................................285
Verify/modify the management of the 802.1Q field on the messages in input
from the LAN ........................................................................................................285
Verify/modify the traffic transport modality (point-point or Bridge) ...............................286
Verify/modify the management of Provider Tag in the packets in input from the LAN in selective mode .............................................................................................................286
Verify/modify the management of Tag of the packets (in origin without Tag) in input from the
LAN .....................................................................................................................287
Verify/overwrite the C-VID value of the packets in input from the LAN and forwarded to the
Radio, with a different VID ......................................................................................287
Verify/modify the value of S-VID added to the packets in input to the LAN (independently from
the presence of the Tag).........................................................................................288
Verify the list of VIDs registered in VLAN Table Unit and associated to the LAN ..............288
Verify/modify the management of the LAN in Provider mode........................................289
Verify/modify the transit of Untagged packets via LAN (802.1q - Secure) ......................289
Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the LAN ...................289
Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol ...........................290
Enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the LAN ...............................................290
Verify/modify the priority of the LAN (STP/ELP) .........................................................290
Verify/modify the connection cost of the LAN (STP/ELP) ..............................................291
Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Ethernet Line Protection ..........................291
Enable/disable the Ethernet Line Protection for the LAN ..............................................291
Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Trunking mode.......................................292
Enable/disable the Trunking mode for the LAN ...........................................................292
Verify/modify the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality of the LAN .........293
Activate/deactivate the loop on line side of the LAN....................................................293
Verify the status and the configuration of the laser (LAN) ............................................293
Modify the enabling status of the laser (LAN).............................................................294
Modify the transmission mode of the laser (LAN)........................................................294
10
Enable manually the laser transmission (LAN)............................................................295

Execute the test laser functioning status (LAN) ..........................................................295
LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.), LAN 4 (Enh.) contextual area .......................296
Interface tab ...................................................................................................296
Rate Limiter tab...............................................................................................298
Input Filter Policing tab.....................................................................................299
Priority Management tab ...................................................................................301
802.1Q Management tab...................................................................................303
Queue Mngt Radio to Lan tab ............................................................................307
Port Based VLAN tab ........................................................................................307
STP/ELP Trunking tab .......................................................................................307
LLF tab ...........................................................................................................310
Line Loop tab ..................................................................................................310
Laser Control tab .............................................................................................310
PIRL function (info) ................................................................................................312
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (info) .........................................................................313
Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) (info) ........................................................................314
Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment (ELP equipment) ...................................314
Ethernet Line Protection of the node (ELP node)...................................................315
Trunking mode (info) .............................................................................................317
Ethernet Trunking mode (LANs) .........................................................................317
Radio Trunking mode (Radio port - Port A) ..........................................................317
Bidirectional LLF (info)............................................................................................318
Port A (Enh.), Port B (Enh.) ..........................................................................................319
Verify/modify the enabling status of the Radio port ....................................................320
Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for
the Radio port .......................................................................................................320
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the Radio port
to the output queue of the LANs ..............................................................................321
Verify/modify the value for Port Default ....................................................................321
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the Radio port.......................321
Verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the Radio port ..........................322
Verify/modify the enabling status of the S_Gentle functionality of the Radio port ............322
Verify/modify the integration constant on the drop possibility in a RED context (Radio port) .
322
Verify/modify the configuration of the output queues of the Radio port .........................322
Verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the Radio port ....325
Force the value of VID of the Radio port to the default value .......................................326
Verify/modify the Default Vid value of the Radio port..................................................326
Verify/overwrite the C-VID value of the packets in input from the Radio port and forwarded to
a LAN, with a different C-VID ..................................................................................326
Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the Radio port ..........327
Verify the status of the Radio port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol ..................327
Enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the Radio port.......................................328
Verify/modify the priority of the Radio port (STP) .......................................................328
Verify/modify the connection cost of the Radio port (STP) ...........................................328
Verify the status of the Radio port in relation to the Trunking mode ..............................328
Enable/disable the Trunking mode for the Radio port ..................................................329
Port A (Enh.), Port B (Enh.) contextual area ..............................................................330
Interface tab ...................................................................................................330
11
Priority Management tab ...................................................................................330

Queue Management Lan To Radio tab .................................................................331
802.1Q Management tab...................................................................................333
Port Based VLan tab .........................................................................................334
STP tab ..........................................................................................................334
STP/Trunking tab .............................................................................................335
Spanning Tree.............................................................................................................337
Verify/modify the STP version .................................................................................337
Verify/modify the transmission interval of the BPDU packets........................................337
Verify/modify the Forward Delay interval ..................................................................338
Verify/modify the maximum lifetime of the BPDU packets ...........................................338
Verify the status of the ports in relation to the STP or ELP ...........................................338
Verify the MAC Address of a Bridge ..........................................................................338
Verify/modify the priority of a Bridge........................................................................338
Spanning Tree contextual area ................................................................................339
Setting tab......................................................................................................339
Summary tab ..................................................................................................339
Bridges tab .....................................................................................................341
Ring Protection............................................................................................................342
Verify the configuration of the parameters common to the two ERP instances ................342
Change the configuration of the parameters common to the two ERP instances ..............342
Verify the configuration of the parameters relevant to every single ERP instance ............343
Change the configuration of the parameters relevant to every single ERP instance..........343
Enable/disable the Ring Protection modality for an ERP instance...................................344
Enable/disable the manual commands to block a port of an ERP instance ......................345
Restore manually the RPL link for an ERP instance .....................................................345
Restore the factory values for the parameters of an ERP instance .................................345
Verify to which ERP instance the traffic of each equipment VLAN is routed .....................346
Associate a VLAN to an ERP instance ........................................................................346
Ring Protection contextual area ...............................................................................347
Common tab ...................................................................................................347
Ring 1 and Ring 2 tabs .....................................................................................348
VLan/Ring Binding tab ......................................................................................349
TDM Tributaries...........................................................................................................350
E1 .......................................................................................................................351
Verify the status and configuration of the E1s ......................................................351
Modify the label of an E1...................................................................................351
Activate/deactivate the E1 use...........................................................................351
Activate/deactivate the E1 loops ........................................................................352
Modify the management status of LOS alarm .......................................................352
E1 contextual area ...........................................................................................353
STM-1 ..................................................................................................................354
Lim A STM-1 [x] ..............................................................................................355
Verify/modify the status of the STM-1...........................................................355
Verify/modify the status of the STM-1 loops (line side and internal side)............355
Verify/modify the enabling status of the J0 Trace Identifier byte .......................356
Verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J0 Trace
Identifier ..................................................................................................356
Verify the STM-1 alarms .............................................................................356
Verify/modify the B2 Signal Degrade alarm threshold......................................357
12
Verify/modify the B2 Excessive BER alarm threshold .......................................357

Verify the status and configuration of the laser ..............................................357
Modify the enabling status of the laser ..........................................................358
Modify the transmission mode of the laser .....................................................358
Enable manually the laser transmission.........................................................359
Execute the test laser functioning status .......................................................359
Verify/modify the transport status of the bytes of SOH frame on an E1
Radio channel............................................................................................359
Lim A STM-1 contextual area .......................................................................361
Settings tab ........................................................................................361
Thresholds tab ....................................................................................362
Laser Control tab ................................................................................362
SOH Transport tab ..............................................................................363
VC-4 ....................................................................................................................364
Lim A VC-4 [x] ................................................................................................365
Verify/modify the enabling status of the J1 Trace Identifier byte .......................365
Identifier ..................................................................................................365
Verify the VC-4 alarms................................................................................366
Verify/modify the B3 Signal Degrade alarm threshold......................................366
Verify/modify the B3 Excessive BER alarm threshold .......................................366
Verify/modify the Signal Label value .............................................................366
Lim A VC-4 contextual area .........................................................................368
J1/Alarms tab .....................................................................................368
B3/Signal Label tab ............................................................................. 368
VC-12 ..................................................................................................................370
VC-12 Thresholds ............................................................................................371
Verify/modify the VC-12 Signal Degrade alarm threshold.................................371
Verify/modify the VC-12 Excessive BER alarm threshold ..................................371
VC-12 Thresholds contextual area ................................................................372
Lim A VC-12 [x]...............................................................................................373
Verify the alarms status of the VC-12 ...........................................................373
Verify/modify the enabling status of the J2 Trace Identifier byte of a VC-12 .......373
Identifier of a VC-12...................................................................................373
Verify/modify the Signal Label value of a VC-12 .............................................374
Lim A VC-12 contextual area .......................................................................375
Lim A VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> window ...........................................375
Cross Connection.........................................................................................................377
Cross Connection ...................................................................................................378
Display the connections of the equipment ...........................................................378
Execute an unprotected Tributary-Radio connection..............................................378
Execute a protected Tributary-Radio connection ...................................................379
Execute a Pass Through connection ....................................................................379
Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection ............................................................380
Delete one or more connections .........................................................................380
Enable the closing of a channel on itself (Auto-Loop) ............................................381
Disable an Auto-Loop .......................................................................................381
Modify the connection label ...............................................................................381
Verify the status and the configuration of a protected connection ...........................382
Modify the modality used to manage the switch in the protected connection ............382
Modify the modality used to manage the preferential connection ............................383
13
Modify the Wait Time parameter (protected connection)........................................383

Force the switch on preferential connection without waiting for the Wait Time
expiration .......................................................................................................383
Modify the structure of the Radio E1 involved by a connection................................384
Cross Connection contextual area ......................................................................385
Matrix area ...............................................................................................385
List area ...................................................................................................388
Cross connection matrix (info) ...........................................................................390
TDM matrix ...............................................................................................390
Connection Type ........................................................................................390
E1 channels ..............................................................................................390
Display of the cross-connections ..................................................................394
Creation of a cross-connection .....................................................................395
Manual deletion of the cross-connections.......................................................395
Automatic deletion of the cross-connections ..................................................395
Cross Connection (PWE3 function enable) .................................................................396
Display the connections of the equipment (PWE3) ................................................396
Execute a Tributary-PWE3 connection (PWE3)......................................................396
Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection (PWE3) .................................................397
Delete one or more connections (PWE3) .............................................................397
Enable the closing of a tributary channel on itself (Auto-Loop) (PWE3) ....................397
Disable an Auto-Loop (PWE3) ............................................................................398
Modify the connection label (PWE3) ....................................................................398
Cross Connection contextual area (PWE3) ...........................................................399
Matrix area (PWE3) ....................................................................................399
List area (PWE3) ........................................................................................401
Cross connection matrix (PWE3) (info)................................................................403
Matrix (PWE3) ...........................................................................................403
Connection Type (PWE3).............................................................................403
E1 channels (PWE3) ...................................................................................403
Display of the cross-connections (PWE3) .......................................................404
Creation of a cross-connection (PWE3)..........................................................404
Manual deletion of the cross-connections (PWE3) ...........................................404
Automatic deletion of the cross-connections (PWE3) .......................................404
Radio E1 Framing ........................................................................................................406
Verify/modify the structure of the Radio E1s..............................................................406
Radio E1 Framing contextual area ............................................................................407
PWE3.........................................................................................................................408
Verify the existing PWE3 Bundles and PWE3 channels .................................................408
Create a PWE3 Bundle ............................................................................................408
Activate the Provider modality for all the Bundles.......................................................409
Deactivate the Provider modality for all the Bundles ...................................................410
Modify the configuration of a PWE3 Bundle ................................................................410
Delete a PWE3 Bundle ............................................................................................411
Associate one or more PWE3 channels to a Bundle .....................................................411
Modify the configuration of a PWE3 channel...............................................................412
Delete one or more PWE3 channel ...........................................................................413
PWE3 contextual area ............................................................................................414
PWE3 function (info) ..............................................................................................418
RADIO .............................................................................................................................421
14
Radio Branch ..............................................................................................................422

Verify/modify the RF channel on which it is tuned the transmitter of the equipment ........422
Verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier .................................................423
Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter ...........................................................423
Verify/modify the operation of the RT power supply....................................................423
Verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx) .............................................424
Verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx) .........................................424
Verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC ........................................................424
Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter...............................425
Verify/modify the range of the ATPC regulation..........................................................425
Verify/modify the threshold of the ATPC device ..........................................................425
Display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/reception for every
ACM profile ...........................................................................................................426
Radio Branch contextual area ..................................................................................427
Settings tab ....................................................................................................427
Powers tab......................................................................................................428
MAINTENANCE ..................................................................................................................429
Lan Statistics ..............................................................................................................430
Verify the counters of the Ethernet ports subdivided by each port ................................430
Reset the counters results ......................................................................................430
Activate/deactivate the division by 1000 of the counter results ....................................430
Lan Statistics contextual area ..................................................................................431
Lan Stat. Summary......................................................................................................433
Verify the summary of the main counters of the Ethernet ports ....................................433
Reset the counters results ......................................................................................433
Lan Stat. Summary contextual area .........................................................................434
PWE3 Statistics ...........................................................................................................435
Verify the counters of the PWE3 channels .................................................................435
Reset the counters results of the PWE3 channels .......................................................435
PWE3 Statistics contextual area ...............................................................................436
Advanced Stat. Mon. ....................................................................................................437
Verify/manage the main counters of an Ethernet port whose traffic is filtered according to the
Internal Priority value.............................................................................................437
C-VID identifier .....................................................................................................439
S-VID and C-VID identifiers.....................................................................................441
Advanced Stat. Mon. contextual area........................................................................443
Fade Margin................................................................................................................444
Execute the calculation of the Fade Margin and check/delete the results........................444
Alarms stopping the Fade Margin .......................................................................445
Messages displayed during the execution of the Fade Margin .................................446
Verify the values of the power parameters stored into the equipment and used for the calculation of the Fade Margin ........................................................................................446
Fade Margin contextual area ...................................................................................447
Calculation of the Fade Margin (info) ........................................................................448
RMon .........................................................................................................................449
Verify the collection status of the statistic counters of the Ethernet ports.......................449
Activate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port ..............................449
Deactivate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port...........................449
15
Display the values of statistical counters of an Ethernet port........................................450

RMon contextual area.............................................................................................451
Remote Monitoring window ...............................................................................451
RMon standard (info) .............................................................................................453
RMon Standard................................................................................................453
Outline on the operation of RMon standard ..........................................................453
Management from Web LCT of the statistics counters foreseen by RMON standard ....453
Ethernet counters (RMon) .................................................................................454
OAM ..........................................................................................................................455
Verify the characteristics of the OAM-FM Domain of the equipment...............................455
Define an OAM-FM Domain for equipment .................................................................456
Remove the OAM-FM Domain of equipment ...............................................................456
Verify the status of the VLANs as regards the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality .................456
Associate a MA to a VLAN .......................................................................................457
Associate a MEP to a VLAN ......................................................................................457
Remove a MA/MEP from a VLAN ..............................................................................458
Enable/disable the transmission of CCM messages for a MEP .......................................458
Modify the time interval used for the transmission of the CCM messages for a MEP .........458
Verify the table of remote MEPs (RMep table) ............................................................459
Insert a remote MEP in the RMep table .....................................................................459
Enable a remote MEP of the RMep table ....................................................................459
Disable a remote MEP of the RMep table ...................................................................460
Remove a remote MEP from RMep table....................................................................460
Send one or more LoopBack messages (LBM) to a remote MIP/MEP..............................460
Trace the path, through the LTM messages, between local MEP and remote MEP of the same
VLAN ...................................................................................................................461
OAM contextual area ..............................................................................................462
OAM-FM Domain area.......................................................................................462
OAM-FM MA/MEP table .....................................................................................462
RMEP tab ........................................................................................................464
LBM tab..........................................................................................................465
LTM tab ..........................................................................................................466
OAM-FM Ethernet functionality (info) ........................................................................467
OAM-FM Ethernet functionality...........................................................................467
OAM-FM Ethernet functionality implemented in equipment managed by WEB LCT .....467
OAM-FM Domain ..............................................................................................468
MA.................................................................................................................468
MEP ...............................................................................................................468
MIP ................................................................................................................469
Remote MEPs ..................................................................................................470
CCM...............................................................................................................472
LBM ...............................................................................................................472
LTM ...............................................................................................................473
Example of configuration of a OAM-FM Domain for a set of ALCplus2e equipment .....474
S/N Meas ...................................................................................................................476
Verify the value of the S/N measure .........................................................................476
Update the value of the S/N measure .......................................................................476
S/N Meas. contextual area ......................................................................................477
PRBS .........................................................................................................................478
16
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the PRBS measure ......................478
Activate/reset the PRBS measure.............................................................................478
Deactivate the PRBS measure .................................................................................478
Modify the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure................................................478
Enable/disable the used E1 signal for the measure .....................................................479
PRBS contextual area .............................................................................................480
Radio Loop .................................................................................................................481
Verify the radio loops status ....................................................................................481
Activate a radio loop ..............................................................................................481
Deactivate a radio loop...........................................................................................482
Execute the test (RF Loop) for ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN .............................482
Radio Loop contextual area .....................................................................................483
Radio loop (info)....................................................................................................484
Test (RF Loop) for ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN (info) .....................................485
Radio Switch ...............................................................................................................486
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switches .......................486
Modify the management of the switching in reception (Rx Forced Switch)......................486
Modify the management of the switching in transmission (Tx Forced Switch) .................487
Modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential) ..............487
Modify the Wait Time parameter ..............................................................................487
Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration .488
Radio Switch contextual area...................................................................................489
Radio switch (info) .................................................................................................490
Management of the radio switch ........................................................................490
Forcing a radio branch to operate (switch in reception and switch in transmission)....490
Preferential radio branch (switch in transmission).................................................490
SWITCH ...........................................................................................................................491
STM-1........................................................................................................................492
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the STM-1 switch ........................492
Modify the management of the STM-1 switch.............................................................492
Modify the logic of STM-1 switch ..............................................................................493
Set the primary STM-1 as preferential ......................................................................493
Force the switch on preferential STM-1 without waiting for the Wait Time expiration .......493
STM-1 contextual area ...........................................................................................494
STM-1 switch (info)................................................................................................495
Management of the STM-1 switch.......................................................................495
STM-1 switching criteria....................................................................................495
Forcing of the STM-1 to operation ......................................................................495
Preferential primary STM-1 ...............................................................................495
Nodal.........................................................................................................................497
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the nodal switch .........................497
Modify the management of the nodal switch ..............................................................497
Force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for the Wait Time expiration...................................................................................................................498
Nodal contextual area ............................................................................................499
Nodal switch (info).................................................................................................500
Management of the nodal switch ........................................................................500
17
Forcing of the Nodal Bus to operation .................................................................500

Preferential NBUS (Nodal Bus) connection ...........................................................500
USER INPUT .....................................................................................................................501
Local User Input ..........................................................................................................502
Verify the local User Input status and configuration ....................................................502
Modify the name of a local User Input.......................................................................502
Modify the rest condition of a local User Input ...........................................................502
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a local User Input ...............503
Local User Input contextual area..............................................................................504
Enabling the User Input alarms (info) .......................................................................505
Remote User Input ......................................................................................................506
Verify the remote User Input status and configuration ................................................506
Modify the name of a remote User Input ...................................................................506
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a remote User Input............506
Remote User Input contextual area ..........................................................................508
USER OUTPUT...................................................................................................................509
Verify the User Output status and configuration ...............................................................509
Modify the name of an User Output ................................................................................509
Modify the functioning mode of the relay contacts of an User Output ..................................509
Verify/modify the signals coupled to the User Output........................................................510
Force the User Output activation....................................................................................510
Remove the forcing of the User Output ...........................................................................511
User Output contextual area .........................................................................................512
ALARMS LIST ....................................................................................................................... 513
OPERATIONS LIST ............................................................................................................... 521
PARAMETERS LIST ............................................................................................................... 535
ASSISTANCE SERVICE.......................................................................................................... 545
18
MANUAL CONTENT
Equipment of series ALS with ALCplus2e IDU can operate with Ethernet Enhanced functionality active or
inactive (see Verify/modify the management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality).
In the first case, the GUI will contain the commands for the management of functionality Ethernet Enhanced; while in the second case the commands for the management of Ethernet functionality compatible
with ALCplus2 (Radio side) will be available.
This manual describes the commands and the functionalities of the WEB Local Craft Terminal application
(release 1.9.0) present in the equipment ALCplus2e when the management of Ethernet Enhanced is
active.
For the description of the available commands and functionalities when the management of Ethernet Enhanced is not active, refer to user manual WEB LCT ALCplus2e code MN.00274.E.
The WEB LCT release present in the equipment can be verified opening the relevant WEB Local Craft Terminal page and selecting, in the Equipment Menu area, one of the following commands:
Main > Equipment Properties - General Info tab - WEB LCT Version parameter.
Main > Software Info & Maint. - Web LCT tab - Current Version parameter.
In this manual, to make the writing easier, the wording:
ALCplus2e identifies the equipment of series ALS with ALCplus2e IDU.
WEB LCT identifies the WEB Local Craft Terminal application for ALCplus2e.
WEB LCT page identifies the WEB Local Craft Terminal page for ALCplus2e.
19
WEB LCT APPLICATION

The WEB LCT application allows a user connecting to equipment via his own machine (PC, Workstation,
etc.) using the operating system and the Web browser at his disposal.
WEB LCT is an application resident in the equipment controller. It does not require any additional module
installed on the user PC (see Installation).
At start-up of WEB LCT, the browser displays the WEB Local Craft Terminal (WEB LCT) page that is the
application graphical interface (GUI).
The WEB LCT page can be opened directly from browser or from SCT/LMT program (see Open/close the
WEB LCT page).
In the first case, the WEB LCT interface of the equipment, whose IP is entered in the address bar of the
browser, is opened (see Fig.1).
In the second case, the WEB LCT interface of the equipment selected from SCT/LMT is opened (see Fig.2).
Through WEB LCT application, the user can check the equipment operating status and directly intervene
to manage it, verifying/modifying the configuration parameters (see Functionalities and Menu and commands (Equipment Menu).
Fig.1 WEB LCT application (start-up of the WEB LCT page from browser)
User PC
Equipment
(e.g. 172.18.60.33)
Controller
Supervision
port
WEB LCT
application
NE management
(HTTP/
HTTPS)
Internet
SFTP/SHH
FTP
WEB LCT
application
Help file
SSH Server
Help Web Server
FTP Server
Web Lct Console
Browser
Supervision
port
NE management
(HTTP/
HTTPS)
USB (PPP)
connection
SFTP/SHH
FTP
20
WEB LCT page

equipment
(172.18.60.33)
User PC
Equipment
(e.g. 172.18.60.33)
Controller
Browser
WEB LCT page

equipment
(172.18.60.33)
Help file
SSH Server
Help Web Server
FTP Server
Web Lct Console
Fig.2 WEB LCT application (start-up of the WEB LCT page from SCT/LMT)
User PC
FTP
Equipment
(e.g. 172.18.60.33)
Controller
NE
management
(SNMP)
Supervision
port
WEB LCT
application
FTP Server
Help Web
Server
SFTP/SHH
Browser
WEB LCT page

equipment
(172.18.60.33)
Help file
SSH Server
User PC
Equipment
(e.g. 172.18.60.33)
WEB LCT
application
Equipment
(172.18.60.33)
Internet
NE
management
(HTTP/HTTPS)
Controller
SCT/LMT
FTP
Supervision
port
USB (PPP)
connection
NE
management
(SNMP)
SCT/LMT
Equipment
(172.18.60.33)
FTP Server
Help Web
Server
Browser
NE management
(HTTP/HTTPS)
SFTP/SHH
WEB LCT page

equipment
(172.18.60.33)
Help file
SSH Server
21
FUNCTIONALITIES
Through the WEB LCT application, it is possible to manage:
22
The properties (identifier, addresses, reference date/time, hardware, features key, etc.) and to
execute the reset of the equipment software (Equipment Properties).
The communication ports reserved to the local and remote supervision of the equipment and the
IP Access Control List (Port Configuration & ACL).
The stating Routing Table and the Default Gateway address currently used by the equipment
(Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway) (Routing Table).
The static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address stored in the equipment (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway) (Stored Routing Table).
The measures of Performance Monitoring (Performance Monitoring).
The saving to file of the equipment configuration, of the status/alarm signals and of the operations executed by the users (Report & Loggers Maint.).
The automatic acquisition of the reference date/time of the equipment from a network element
and the Wake Up trap (SNTP & Wake Up Config.).
The SD memory card for the backup/restore of the equipment configuration and software (SD
Memory Management).
The equipment firmware, the WEB LCT software present in the equipment, the communication
stack used by the equipment and the restore of the default equipment settings (Software Info
& Maint.).
The backup/restore of the whole equipment configuration (Backup/Restore Config.).
The equipment security protocols (SSH, SFTP, HTTPS and SNMPv3) (Security Config.).
The forward status of the alarms and their severity level (Alarm Severity Config.).
The equipment users list (User Manager/User Manager SNMP-V3).
The equipment general configuration (radio configuration, modulation/capacity, adaptive modulation, etc.) (Equipment).
The sources and the outputs of synchronism (Synchronisation).
The Ethernet Switch, Ring Protection mode (G.8032), TDM tributary, PWE3 function and cross
connection matrix (TDM) (Base Band).
The radio parameters (Radio).
The LAN and PWE3 statistics, Fade Margin, RMon, OAM, S/N, PRBS, radio loop and radio switch
(Maintenance).
The switch of the STM-1 protected and of the Nodal Bus protected (Switch).
The local and remote User Input (User Input).
The User output (User Output).
The remote element list (Remote elements list area)
The manual operations and the relevant timeout (Equipment status area).
The users connected to the equipment ([Logged Users] parameter).
LIMITS
Maximum number of...
Limit
Equipment into the remote equipment list
100
Stations into the remote equipment list
30
Equipment which can be connected contemporarily via a single WEB

LCT page
Users (WEB LCT, SCT/LMT and NMS5UX) contemporarily connected to

equipment via the WEB LCT page
Signals into the Events area
400
23
INSTALLATION
WEB LCT
WEB LCT is an application resident in the equipment controller.

It does not require any installation on the user PC.
At the first equipment switch-on, the user can immediately connect to it via WEB LCT because
the application is already present in the controller.
Then you can Update the WEB LCT application.
Add-ins
The program SCT/LMT or WEB Lct Console must be used as help for the WEB LCT application,
in order to:
Manage the transfer of files between PC and equipment (FTP)
Manage the USB connection (PPP)
Manager the help online of WEB LCT (Help Web Server).
The instructions for the installation of the SCT/LMT and Web Lct Console are reported in the relevant manuals.
WARNING SCT/LMT and WEB LCT Console work in MS Windows environment. For operating
systems different from MS Windows, the user must install a FTP server and a PPP management
module on ones PC.
WEB LCT, for a correct display in its own browser, needs Adobe Flash Player version 9 or higher.
If you wish to use the equipment in security mode Exclusive or Available (see Security Config.)
for the correct management of SSH protocol and SFTP protocol, it is necessary to install a SSH
server on ones PC (see Installation and configuration of SSH server).
Help online
WEB LCT is equipped with a help on-line which can be opened selecting the option [Help] or
in WEB LCT page.
The help on-line must be installed on ones PC using the installation file specific for the WEB LCT
of the equipment you wish to use.
24
WEB LOCAL CRAFT TERMINAL (WEB LCT) PAGE

Open/close the WEB LCT page
Elements of the WEB LCT page
Messages displayed in the WEB LCT page
25
OPEN/CLOSE THE WEB LCT PAGE
Open the WEB LCT page from Browser (Ethernet connection)

Open the WEB LCT page from Browser (USB connection)
Open the WEB LCT page from SCT/LMT
Open more WEB LCT pages
Close the WEB LCT page
Open the WEB LCT page from Browser (Ethernet connection)

WARNING If Ethernet connection is used, checks or settings are not generally necessary. Only if more network cards are equipped, it will be necessary to select the card you wish to use (Host Adapter) (see Web
Lct Console user manual).
When the equipment is connected to the PC via LAN network, the relevant WEB LCT page can be opened
also selecting the equipment from the address book of Web Lct Console (see relevant documentation).
The following procedure requires that:
The relevant WEB LCT application is present on the equipment which you are connecting to.
The user, you wish to use to open the WEB LCT page, is valid. With valid user (username and
password) we mean a user present in the users list stored in the controller (see User list (info).
For equipment using the protocol SNMPv3:
Opening the WEB LCT page from Browser is allowed only to SNMPv3 users of type AuthNoPriv,
with MD5 authentication (see Tab.5).
Opening the WEB LCT page is supported with Internet Explorer 9 or later.
The fields used to set the user name/password are Case Sensitive; pay attention to uppercase
and lowercase characters.
The opening of the WEB LCT page via HTTPS protocol is supported with Internet Explorer 9 or later.
The WEB Lct Console program must be used as help for the WEB LCT application, in order to manage the
FTP, PPP and Help Web Server
1. Run a browser.
2. Type in the address box:
<IP address of the equipment>
With IP address we mean the address of the equipment supervision port from which you wish to reach
the equipment itself.
WARNING If the use of HTTPS protocol is active on the equipment (see Security Config.), an error page
could be displayed, indicating that the connection you are activating is not secure because troubles
have been detected with the security certificates.
For the detailed description of the error messages of the browser, refer to the relevant documentation.
To update the equipment certificates (C.A./SSL), see Update the certificates (HTTPS).
Generally, the browser asks the user to accept or refuse the connection. If you decide to accept however the connection with the equipment, the confidential transfer of the data is nor ensured.
The WEB LCT login page opens.
3. Type the name of the user, in the Username box.
4. Type the password, in the Password box.
5. Check the Remember Me box if you wish that, on the next opening of the application, the current user
name and password are automatically displayed; otherwise uncheck the considered box.
6. Press Login.
If the typed values are correct, the system displays the WEB LCT page of the equipment (see Fig.3).
As regards the messages that can be displayed during the start procedure of WEB LCT see Messages
displayed in the WEB LCT page.
26
Open the WEB LCT page from Browser (USB connection)

WARNING If USB connection is used, before activating the connection, the USB driver must be installed
and configured (see Web Lct Console user manual). Then, if you think the USB driver does not operate
correctly, execute the controls pointed out in the Web Lct Console user manual.
When the equipment is connected to PC via an USB connection, the connection management is implemented by WLC program.
The following procedure requires that:
The relevant WEB LCT application is present on the equipment which you are connecting to.
For equipment using the protocol SNMPv3:
Opening the WEB LCT page from Browser is allowed only to SNMPv3 users of type AuthNoPriv,
with MD5 authentication (see Tab.5).
Opening the WEB LCT page is supported with Internet Explorer 9 or later.
The fields used to set the user name/password are Case Sensitive; pay attention to uppercase
and lowercase characters.
The opening of the WEB LCT page via HTTPS protocol is supported with Internet Explorer 9 or later.
1. Connect the equipment to ones PC by means of the USB cable.
2. Run WEB Lct Console program (see relevant documentation).
The WLC program must be used as help for the WEB LCT application, in order to manage the FTP, PPP
and Help Web Server.
3. In the Web LCT Console window, press Options.
4. Select the Connect using direct serial cable option in the PPP area and press Ok.
5. Execute one of the following operations:
In the Web Lct Console window, press Connect.
Select
, press the right mouse button and select Connect in the pop-up menu.
If the connection operation is successful, the default browser is opened with the WEB LCT login page.
6. Type the name of the user, in the Username box.
7. Type the password, in the Password box.
8. Check the Remember Me box if you wish that, on the next opening of the application, the current user
name and password are automatically displayed; otherwise uncheck the considered box.
9. Press Login.
If the typed values are correct, the system displays the WEB LCT page of the equipment (see Fig.3).
Open the WEB LCT page from SCT/LMT

WARNING The following procedure requires that:
The relevant WEB LCT application is present on the equipment you are connecting to.
27
The SCT/LMT is installed on the PC. More information about the SCT/LMT program is reported
in the relevant documentation.
1. Run SCT/LMT program (see relevant documentation).

2. Activate the connection with the wished equipment (see relevant documentation).
Double click on the record representing the equipment in the SCT/LMT window.
Select the record of the equipment and then the Equipment > LCT Interface command.
4. Only if the equipment uses the SNMPv3 protocol, it is necessary to set again the name (box Username)
and the access code (box Password) of the user. Press Login.
The system displays the WEB LCT page of the equipment (see Fig.3).
At the opening of the WEB LCT page, the user will be connected to the equipment with the user/profile
of the equipment in the SCT/LMT window.
In any moment, it is possible to execute the logout and re-execute the login using the same or a different user with respect to that used for the login.
For equipment using the protocol SNMPv3 and/or HTTPS, the opening the WEB LCT page is supported
with Internet Explorer 9 or later.
In this case, there is no need to differentiate the opening of the WEB LCT page according to the connection
type, as the connection management is executed by the SCT/LMT program itself. For more information,
refer to the relevant documentation.
Open more WEB LCT pages
It is possible to open:
More WEB LCT pages on more machines or on the same machine, using the same user or different users.
Only one WEB LCT page relevant to the same equipment.
More WEB LCT pages relevant to different equipment.
For more information about the limits of the application, refer to the Limits paragraph.
Close the WEB LCT page
Select the [Logout] parameter.
28
ELEMENTS OF THE WEB LCT PAGE
1 - Equipment Menu area

2 - Equipment info area
3 - Users area
4 - Remote elements list area
5 - Contextual area
6 - Equipment status area
Fig.3 shows an example of WEB LCT page on an ALCplus2e equipment.
Fig.3 Elements of the WEB LCT page (ALCplus2e)
29
Equipment Menu area
This area contains the commands to manage the equipment configuration (see Fig.3).
Commands
The commands are subdivided in groups:

Main. Commands to manage the general equipment parameters: supervision ports,
Routing Table, Performance Monitoring measures, etc.
Equipment, Synchronisation, etc. Commands to manage the configuration parameters typical of the equipment type which the WEB LCT page refers to.
For the description of every group/command see Menu and commands (Equipment Menu).
The selection of a group expands or compresses the list of the underlaying commands. At each
selection, the list takes the status complementary to the previous one (if compressed it becomes
expanded, or vice versa). The symbol:
identifies an expanded group.
identifies a compressed group.
It is possible:
Expand all the groups at the same time, pressing
Compress all the groups at the same time, pressing
The symbol
identifies a command which, once selected, displays the parameters associated
to it in the context area (see Contextual area).
Display/hide area
When the WEB page is opened, the Equipment Menu area is displayed.
Press
30
to hide the area. Press
to display the area again.
Equipment info area
This area shows the equipment general properties.

Parameters
Equipment Type. Equipment type.

Equipment ID. Equipment identifier.
Radio System. Radio configuration:
Unequipped. Equipment without radio.
1+0. Equipment with radio in unprotected configuration.
1+1 Freq. Div. Equipment with radio in protected configuration of heterofrequential

type.
1+1 Hot Standby. Equipment with radio in protected configuration of isofrequential

type.
2x1+0 Single Pipe. Equipment with two radio directions in unprotected configuration
and Ethernet traffic concatenation.
2x1+0 Dual Pipe. Equipment with two independent radio directions in unprotected
configuration and two Ethernet channels.
2x1+0 XPIC Single Pipe. Equipment with two radio directions in XPIC configuration
and Ethernet traffic concatenation.
2x1+0 XPIC Dual Pipe. Equipment with two radio directions in XPIC configuration and
two Ethernet channels.
Agent IP. IP Address assigned to the agent SNMP of the equipment.

Tables
LEFT
TABLE
(see Fig.3). Status and radio parameters of the transmitter and receiver.
Every row of the table corresponds to a radio branch for which is displayed:
Branch which the data present in the relevant row refer to:
Tx Status and radio parameters of the branches (1 and 2) relevant to transmission.
Rx Status and radio parameters of the branches (1 and 2) relevant to reception.
The Tx2A and Rx2A boxes are present only for the equipment in 1+1 or 2x(1+0) configuration.
The operating status of the branch is represented by the colour of the box:
Green. Working branch.
White. StandBy branch.
In the equipment in 1+1 heterofrequential configuration, the branches 1 and 2 transmit

at the same time; in this case both the Tx1A and Tx2A boxes will be green.
RF channel frequency. The wording:
Channel Not Set. RF channel is not set.
ODU Hardware Failure. Hardware problem. E.g. check that the connection cable between the IDU and the ODU is not failure or missing.
RF channel number.
Power in input to the receiver (lines Rx) and in output to the transmitter (lines Tx).
In the equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration, the wording Std-by is present in
the line Tx relevant to the StandBy branch.
Both the powers are measured at the antenna flange.
The wording Tx Off (row Tx1A/Tx2A) indicates that the transmitter is off due to an action
by the user (see Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter - selection of option Off
or Permanent Off) or due to the activation of one or more alarms which cause the switchoff of the transmitter (for instance, ...RT Vco Fail Alarm).
If the radio is not equipped (Radio System: [Unequipped]) the parameters present in this table
are not meaningful. In the area the Data Unavailable wording is displayed.
31
RIGHT TABLE. Current ACM profile and the radio transport (Tx/Rx) subdivision between Ethernet
and E1:
ACM Profile. Current ACM profile.
TDM Capacity. Radio capacity reserved to the TDM tributaries (E1, STM-1)
ETH Capacity. Radio capacity reserved to the Ethernet tributaries.
The Tx2A and Rx2A boxes are present only for the equipment in 1+1 or 2x(1+0) configuration.
Update data
Press
to update the information in the Equipment Info area.
Display/hide area
When the WEB page is opened, the Equipment Info area is displayed.
Press
32
Users area
User Profile parameter

[Logged Users] parameter
[Logout] parameter
[Open Far End] parameter
[Help] parameter
User Profile parameter

Login status and profile of the user who has opened the WEB LCT page.
Options
System. The equipment is in connected/login status and the user has System profile.
The user with this profile can both verify the parameters and send commands or change the
equipment configuration with no exception.
Station Op. The equipment is in connected/login status and the user has Station Operator profile.
The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or execute changes
to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying the user list,
aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the logout of a user and all those operations available only to the System user.
Read & Write. The equipment is in connected/login status and the user has Read & Write profile.
The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only maintenance operations
(MAN OP).
Monitor. The equipment is in connected/monitor status or in connected/login status and the
user has Read Only profile.
The user with this profile can check the parameters but it can not forward commands or execute
changing to the equipment configuration.
Login/Logout
At the opening of the WEB LCT page, the user will be connected to the equipment with the user/
profile entered during the login request.
In any moment it is possible to execute the logout and re-execute the login using the same or
a different user with respect to that used for the login.
NMS
If the equipment is managed also by the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system, the supervisory system considers the connection of a SCT/LMT user with Read Only or Read & Write profile
a WEB LCT connection in Monitoring mode.
While the supervisory system considers the connection to the equipment of a SCT/LMT user with
Station Operator or System profile a WEB LCT connection in Configuration mode.
[Logged Users] parameter

WARNING Parameter available only for equipment which use protocol SNMPv1/v2c.
This parameter manages the users connected to the equipment.
33
Operations
Verify the users connected to the equipment

Force the logout of a user
Verify the users connected to the equipment

User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for equipment using the protocol SNMPv1/v2c.
1. Select the [Logged Users] parameter.

The Current Logged User window displays the list of the users connected to the equipment when the
command is selected.
For each users, is pointed out in the column:
User. User name.

The wording NMS5UX shows the user of the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system or a remote
user (different from WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX user) who has the possibility to be connected to the equipment (Permanent Login).
The other wordings identify the WEB LCT or SCT/LMT users connected to the equipment.
Profile. User profile.
Timeout. Timeout of the WEB LCT session:
No Timeout. Session timeout disabled. WEB LCT session opened by the user (even if disconnected) will be kept for an indefinite period of time.
<number> Seconds. Session timeout enabled. WEB LCT session opened by the user, if
disconnected, will be automatically ended once reached the set time limit.
With disconnected session we mean a WEB LCT session whose relevant WEB LCT has been
closed but for which the disconnection from the equipment has not been executed (user logout).
User IP Address. Machine IP address.

With the wording machine, it is intended the PC (for the WEB LCT and SCT/LMT users) or the
server/workstation (for the NMS5UX users and remote users) on which the application used by
the user is actually running.
Press Refresh to update the data present in the window.
Force the logout of a user

User Profile | System
WARNING Logging out oneself is not possible.
If the logout of a NMS5UX user is forced, the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system automatically executes the restore of the user login.
Operation available only for equipment using the protocol SNMPv1/v2c.
1. Select the [Logged Users] parameter.
2. Select the wished user.
3. Press Force Logout and confirm.
The system removes the line relevant to the selected user.
If the push-button is not available, this means that the record relevant to ones user has been selected.
34
[Logout] parameter
This parameter executes the logout of the current user.
When selected, the WEB LCT page to login to the equipment is displayed.
To reconnect equipment, set Username and Password and press Login.
[Open Far End] parameter

This parameter opens the WEB LCT page of remote equipment to contained in the Remote Element Table.
Operations
Open the WEB LCT page of equipment (Remote Link)
Open the WEB LCT page of equipment (Remote Link)

1. Select the [Open Far End] parameter.

If the remote equipment list contains:
Only one item of equipment of type Remote Link, the WEB LCT login page of the remote equipment is displayed.
Type the name (Username box) and the access code (Password box) of the SCT/LMT user to use
to activate the connection and press Login. In a new page the WEB LCT of the remote equipment is displayed.
If the WEB LCT login page is not displayed when the login is required, this means that the remote
equipment is unreachable.
No equipment of type Remote Link, a message is displayed pointing out the absence of the remote equipment.
More equipment of type Remote Link, the Available Remote Elements window is displayed, containing the list of equipment configured as Remote Link present in the remote equipment list.
For each equipment, the following characteristics are reported:
Station. Station name.
IP Address. IP address.
Select the remote equipment and press Open or double click on the equipment.
The WEB LCT page to login to the remote equipment opens.
Type the name (Username box) and the access code (Password box) of the SCT/LMT user to use
to activate the connection and press Login. In a new page the WEB LCT of the remote equipment is displayed.
[Help] parameter
This parameter opens the help online of application.
35
Remote elements list area
In this area, you can manage the remote equipment list stored in the equipment controller.
Parameters
Station/Equip. Name of the station and equipment in the list.

STATION (
Equipment is subdivided into stations.

Selecting the symbol of a station expands or compress the list of underlaying equipment.
At each selection, the list takes the status complementary to the previous one (if compressed it becomes expanded and vice versa).
The name of the station is assigned by the user during the creation of the station itself.
The stations are displayed in the same order as they are inserted in the list
An empty station, that is a station without associated equipment, cannot be stored in the
list.
EQUIPMENT (
or
The
symbol represents the equipment of type Managed by SCT, Elem. Manager, Not
Managed or Node X; the
symbol represents the equipment of type Remote Link (see
column Type).
The name of the equipment is automatically assigned by the application during the creation of the equipment itself: Equipment <progressive number>.
Within the station, the equipment are listed in increasing order with respect to the IP address.
IP Addr. IP address (Agent SNMP) of the equipment.
Type. Type of equipment:
Managed by SCT. Equipment managed by WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application.
Remote Link. Equipment, managed by WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application, constituting the equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to
the local equipment (equipment which the user is connected to by WEB LCT).
Elem. Manager. Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where
the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system resides).
Not Managed. Element not managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application.
This option can be used to insert into the remote equipment list for instance the coupling between the IP address and the NSAP (Gosip) one piece of equipment inserted
into an OSI network.
Nodal X. Equipment belonging to the local node.

With local node we mean a set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 equipment (ALCplus2/
ALCplus2e) interconnected by a Ethernet nodal Bus and/or by a TDM nodal Bus,
where the considered equipment is an element. The X value correspond to a number
between 1 and 8 and indicates the subset.
2x1+1-Xpic-Main. IDU Master belonging to an ALCplus2e equipment in XPIC 1+1

configuration.
2x1+1-Xpic-Res. IDU Reserve belonging to an ALCplus2e equipment in XPIC 1+1

configuration.
OSI. Equipment NSAP (GOSIP) Address.

Parameter available only for the equipment managed with the OSI protocol.
Push-button
GENERAL
AREA
Apply. Confirm the changes.

Refresh. Update the list.
Clear. Reset the remote equipment list
Open. Open the WEB LCT page of equipment of the list (Remote Link)
36
STATION
AREA
Add. Add a station to the list

Remove. Remove a station of the list
Rename. Rename a station of the list
ELEMENT
AREA
Add. Add equipment to the list

Remove. Remove equipment from the list
Display/hide area
When the WEB page is opened, the Remote elements list area is hidden.
Press
See also
Remote equipment list (info)
Add a station to the list

User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING It is possible to insert a maximum of 30 stations into a list.
1. In the Remote elements list area, press Add (Station group).

2. Type, into the text box, the name to be assigned to the station (alphanumeric string with minimum 1
and maximum 11 characters).
The program does not create two stations with the same name in the same list. Moreover, a digit cannot
be used as first character and the space character cannot be used at the beginning or within the name
string.
3. Press OK.
The application displays the new station into the Remote elements list area, at the end of the list relevant to the already existing stations.
4. Press Apply and confirm.
An empty station, that is a station without associated equipment, is not saved in the list.
Rename a station of the list

1. In the Remote elements list area, select the station to be renamed.

2. Press Rename.
3. Type, into the text box, the new name (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 11 characters).
The program does not create two stations with the same name in the same list. Moreover, a digit cannot
be used as first character and the space character cannot be used at the beginning or within the name
string.
4. Press OK.
The application displays the new name of the station into the Remote elements list area.
37
Remove a station of the list

WARNING The deleting of the station causes also the removal of all pieces of equipment coupled with such
a station.
1. In the Remote elements list area, select the station to be removed.
2. Press Remove (Station group).
The application removes the station from the Remote elements list area.
Add equipment to the list

WARNING It is possible to add to the list a maximum of 100 equipment.
Equipment cannot be created if at least one station has not been created before.
1. In the Remote elements list area, select the station to which the equipment has to be coupled.
If the user does not select any station, the application will automatically couple the equipment with the
last selected station.
2. Press Add (Element group).
3. Into the IP Address box, type the IP address of the equipment.
The program does not create two pieces of equipment with the same IP Address in the same list (even
if in different stations).
4. Only if the equipment is inserted into an OSI network, set the NSAP address (Gosip Address box) opening the popup menu and setting in the box:
AFI, IDI, Ver, Auth and Reserv. the value of the corresponding byte/s.
Domain, the values of the bytes that represent the Domain.
Area, the values of the bytes that represent the area.
Sys. ID, the value of the wished System ID.
The Sel parameter is read only.

5. Press OK.
6. Set the Type of element box, selecting the option relevant to the element type to be inserted:
Managed By SCT. Equipment managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application.
Remote Link. Equipment managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application that constitutes
the equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to the local equipment.
Element Manager. Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where the
NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system resides).
Not Managed. Element not managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application.
This option can be used to insert into the remote equipment list for instance the coupling between the IP address and the NSAP (Gosip) one piece of equipment inserted into an OSI network.
2x1+1-Xpic-Main. IDU Master belonging to an ALCplus2e equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration.

Option to use only if problems have occurred regarding the automatic configuration of the remote equipment list during the creation of a XPIC 1+1 system.
2x1+1-Xpic-Res. IDU Reserve belonging to an ALCplus2e equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration.

Option to use only if problems have occurred regarding the automatic configuration of the remote equipment list during the creation of a XPIC 1+1 system.
7. Press OK.
In the Remote elements list area, under the selected station, a record named Equipment <progressive
number> is displayed with the characteristics of the new equipment.
38
Remove equipment from the list

1. In the Remote elements list area, select the equipment to be removed.

2. Press Remove (Equipment group).
The application removes the station from the Remote elements list area.
Reset the remote equipment list

1. In the Remote elements list area, press Clear.

The application clears all the records (stations and equipment) present into the Remote elements list
area.
Open the WEB LCT page of equipment of the list (Remote Link)
1. In the Remote elements list area select the equipment of Remote Link type to be opened the WEB LCT
page.
2. Press Open.
The WEB LCT page to login to the remote equipment opens.
3. Type the name (Username box) and the access code (Password box) of the SCT/LMT user to use to
activate the connection and press Login.
In a new page the WEB LCT of the remote equipment is displayed.
39
Remote equipment list (info)

Each equipment has a remote equipment list stored in its own controller.
With remote equipment list we mean a list containing all the network remote equipment which you wish
to connect to.
For a better vision of the equipment during the setting of the list, it is possible to subdivide the equipment
into stations, in such a way that, at the selection of a station, the application will display only the detail of
the equipment associated with such a specific station. The station does not have any particular meaning;
it has been simply introduced to help the user during the localization of the equipment.
Into each remote equipment list, it is possible to create a maximum of 100 equipment and 30 station.
The remote equipment list can be used to connect, at the same time, to more equipment only if the program SCT/LMT is available.
When the user requests the connection to a generic equipment present into the network (local equipment),
at the connection of such equipment, the SCT/LMT program reads its remote equipment list and automatically forwards the connection command to all pieces of equipment present into the list.
In such a way, the application displays, into the Station List area of the SCT/LMT window, all the stations
that group the equipment and, into the Equipment List area (selecting the relevant station), it displays the
functional status of the local equipment (that results in connected/login status) and the functional status
of all the remote equipment present into the list. The equipment that have answered to the connection
request of the application will result in connected/monitor status.
The application will cyclically forward the connection command, to the equipment that have not answered
to the connection request, until to:
It is deactivated the connection with the local equipment.
The user disables the equipment.
The equipment is deleted from the remote equipment list of the local equipment.
More information concerning the SCT/LMT program are reported into the relevant manuals.
40
Contextual area
This area is the part of the WEB LCT page where the equipment parameters are displayed.
Its content changes accordingly to the selected command in the Equipment Menu area, which is indicated
in the top part of the contextual area.
Push-button
Apply. Selecting it makes the changes, executed on the parameters present in the contextual
area, effective.
Its selection opens a confirmation window. The confirmation windows are timed. When this period is elapsed (pointed out by the progress bar), if the user has not confirmed the operation,
the window is closed and the operation cancelled.
If the push-button is not available:
It is not possible to execute changes because the user profile does not allow this or
the equipment is in connected/monitor status.
No parameter present in the window has been modified. In this case, the push-button
becomes available when the value of a parameter is changed.
Another push-button is present in the contextual area for the confirmation of the operation or the change of the parameters.
Refresh. Force the reading of the data from equipment.

If the push-button is not available, the connection with the equipment is not active.
Help. Open the help on-line.
WARNING For some commands, other push-buttons are displayed relevant only to the context
which contains them. These push-buttons are described in the paragraph relevant to the specific
command.
Tabs
For some commands, the parameters are subdivided in tabs. The selection of a tab dynamically
changes the content of the contextual area.
Parameters
The parameters present in the contextual area can be read-only or set or modified.
The description of the single commands (see Menu and commands (Equipment Menu) indicates
the parameters which can be modified and modalities to do that.
Generally, for the parameter setting, the following rules are valid:
Entering a value (alphanumeric string) in a text box.

If a red line is displayed below the text box, the entered value is not allowed because,
for example, a number of characters greater than the allowed one or an invalid value
has been entered (for example, entering of value 172.18.70.334 as IP address).
Box with possible values displayed in a drop-down menu.

When the value is changed, a red triangle is displayed in the top left edge of the box.
It signals that the value has been changed, but the change has not been communicated yet to the equipment (pressure of push-button Apply).
41
Equipment status area
This area shows the functional status of the equipment.

Parameters
URGENT <alarms number>. Number of Critical and/or Major alarms. Colour box:
Orange. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Major severity
Red. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Critical severity.
Grey. The equipment has no active alarms with Critical or Major severity.
Select the box to display the active alarm.

NOT URG. <alarms number>. Number of Minor and/or Warning alarms. Colour box:
Light blue. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Warning severity.
Yellow. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Minor severity.
Grey. The equipment has no active alarms with Minor or Warning severity.
Select the box to display the active alarm.

RADIO 1A. Status of the radio connection with branch 1A. Equipment configuration:
1+0 or 2x(1+0). Colour box:
Green. The radio connection works properly.
Red. There is loss of radio connection on branch 1A.
1+1. Color box:
Orange. There is loss of radio connection on branch 1A (the branch 2A works

correctly).
Red. There is loss of radio connection on branch 1A (the branch 2A does not
correctly work).
RADIO 2A. Status of the radio connection with branch 2A. Equipment configuration:
1+0. Colour box: Grey. Parameter not meaningful.
1+1 Colour box:
Orange. There is loss of radio connection on branch 2A (the branch 1A works

correctly).
Red. There is loss of radio connection on branch 2A (the branch 1A does not
correctly work).
2x(1+0). Colour box:
Red. There is loss of radio connection on branch 2A.
DOWNLOAD. Update of the equipment firmware. Colour box:
Light blue. The firmware update is in progress.
Grey. The firmware update is not in progress.
MAN. OP. Activation of the manual operations. Colour box:
Light blue. A manual forcing is enabled (e.g. a loop).
Grey. No manual forcing is active.
<number> C. Operating temperature of the equipment. Colour box:
Green. The operating temperature of the equipment is lower than 75C.
Orange. The operating temperature of the equipment is between 75C and 80C.
Red. The operating temperature of the equipment is higher than 80C.
Events (area). List of the status/alarm signals of the equipment.

Each signal corresponds to a record that is displayed:
42
Coloured box. Signal type and alarm gravity:
Green/Status. Status signal.
Light blue/Warning. Alarm detected with Warning severity.
Yellow/Minor. Alarm detected with Minor severity.
Orange/Major. Alarm detected with Major severity.
Red/Critical. Alarm detected with Critical severity.
White/Cleared. Alarm detected/cleared.
Alphanumeric string which details the nature of the signal.
Logic group which the signal belongs to: COMMON, etc.
Date/time of the signal detection.

If the row refers to a detected/cleared alarm, the date/time of alarm detection will be
pointed out under the date/time of alarm clearing.
The date/time is set by the network element that has generated the signal. The format of date/time changes depending on the setting made in the operating system.
Operations
Verify the active manual operations

Verify/modify the manual operation timeout
Update data
The information displayed in the Equipment status area are updated at regular intervals depending on the timeout set by the user.
The progress of the bar (
) indicates the time between two successive updates.
Select the bar to display the current timeout.

To change the parameter, move the cursor to the new value (number between 5 and 30 seconds).
Press
to dynamically update information of the Events area and remove the detected and
cleared alarms (box White/Cleared).
Display/hide area
When the WEB page is opened, the Events area is displayed.

Press
See also
Alarms (info)
Verify the active manual operations

1. Select the MAN. OP box.

A window displays the manual operations actually activated into the equipment.
The wording None active manual operation shows that no manual operation is active.
The information are not dynamically updated. Press
to update the information.
Verify/modify the manual operation timeout

User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING The timeout setting is common for all the manual forcing operations of the equipment.
1. Select the MAN. OP box.

The Manual Operation Timeout box displays the current timeout of the manual operations.
43
Value 0 indicates that the timeout has not been activated, this means that the activation of a manual
operation remains active until when the user deactivates it. The activation of a manual forcing (for instance a loop) affects the traffic.
2. To change the parameter, set a value between 0 and 172800 sec. (48 hours).
The setting of the value 0 corresponds to the disabling of the timeout.
3. Press Change and confirm.
44
MESSAGES DISPLAYED IN THE WEB LCT PAGE
Opening page
Welcome in the WebLct Software upload utility The WEB LCT program is not present on the
equipment you wish to connect to. Update the WEB LCT application.
Invalid User!. It means that the typed username is wrong and/or not present in the equipment
user list or that the user password is wrong.
The equipment is update protected by element manager, retry to login as Read Only user. It
means that the equipment is managed also by the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system and
the NMS5UX user has prevented the possibility, for the SCT/LMT user, to be able to execute the
login of the equipment. In this case, it is necessary that the NMS5UX user enables again the
SCT/LMT user for the execution of the operation.
Too many WEB users!. It means that the equipment has been connected to the maximum number of allowed users (see Limits).
Compatibility issue found. The Equipment software version is greater/lower than WebLct version. This may cause unpredictable problems, means that the firmware version present on the
equipment is not compatible with the version of WEB LCT. Update the firmware of the equipment
Open page
When the page is open, self-explanatory messages are usually displayed about the result of an operation or the impossibility to carry out an action because of the incongruence of the selected parameters.
Moreover, one of the following messages can be displayed:
SYSTEM OFFLINE. The equipment is in disconnected status. In this condition, the parameters
cannot be verified/modified.
The browser sends the command of reconnection at regular intervals (timeout: 20 seconds) until
when the equipment returns in connected status or the WEB LCT page is closed. The Status parameter indicates the operation in progress:
Wait next attempt. The equipment has not replied to the first reconnection attempt.
When timeout is expired, the browser will attempt again.
Reconnection failed. The equipment has not replied to next reconnection attempts.
When timeout is expired, the browser will attempt again.
Reconnection in progress. The equipment is transmitting the re-connection command.
The Info: New attempt in parameter shows the period (expressed in seconds) between a connection attempt and the next one. In any moment, it is possible to execute an immediate connection attempt, pressing Retry.
WARNING. Access enabled only for SYSTEM users. The selected command is available only to
the user with profile System.
You are forcing a manual operation. Operation timeout: <value>. The setting you wish to execute is a manual operation subjected to timeout.
For each equipment, a timeout can be set after which the relevant active manual operations are
automatically deactivated. The wording No Timeout indicates that the timeout is disabled; this
means that a manual operation remains active until when the user deactivates it.
Loading The request of data is in progress between the PC and the equipment.
Updating, Applying Changes The sending of data is in progress between the PC and the equipment.
Operation Fail! Unable to Get or Update parameter(s). Wrong user profile or not logged yet! The
operation cannot be executed because the user profile in use is not enabled to execute the action
or is not logged to the equipment yet.
Not Implemented Yet!. The command is not available for the current version of the program.
45
MENU AND COMMANDS (EQUIPMENT MENU)

Main. It manages the general equipment parameters: supervision ports configuration, Routing Table,
Performance Monitoring measures, etc.
Equipment. It manages the equipment general configuration: radio configuration, modulation, capacity, etc.
Synchronisation. It manages the sources and the outputs of synchronism.
Base Band. It manages the base band parameters.
Radio. It manages the Radio parameters.
Maintenance. It manages the LAN statistics, Fade Margin, RMon, OAM, S/N, PRBS, radio loop and radio
switch.
Switch. It manages the switch of the STM-1 protected and of the Nodal Bus protected.
User Input. It manages the local and remote User Input.
User Output. It manages the User Output.
The description of every single command indicates the status of login/user profile (User Profile parameter)
necessary to use the command or execute the relevant procedures.
46
MAIN
Equipment Properties. It manages the properties (identifier, addresses, reference date/time, etc.) and
executes the equipment software reset.
Port Configuration & ACL. It manages the communication ports reserved to the local and remote supervision of the equipment and the IP Access Control List.
Routing Table. It manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address currently used by
the equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway).
Stored Routing Table. It manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address stored in
the equipment (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway).
Performance Monitoring. It manages the Performance Monitoring measures.
Report & Loggers Maint. It saves to file the equipment configuration, the status/alarm signals and the
operations executed by the users.
SNTP & Wake Up Config. It manages the automatic acquisition of the reference date/time of the equipment from a network element and the Wake Up trap.
SD Memory Management. It manages the SD memory card for the backup/restore of the equipment
configuration and software.
Software Info & Maint. It manages the equipment firmware, the WEB LCT software present in the equipment, the communication stack used by the equipment and the restore of the default equipment settings.
Backup/Restore Config. It manages the backup/restore from file of the whole equipment configuration.
Security Config.. It manages the equipment security protocols (SSH, SFTP, HTTPS and SNMPv3).
Alarm Severity Config. It manages the alarm transmission and their severity level.
User Manager. It manages the users list of the equipment when the protocol SNMPv1/v2c is active.
User Manager SNMP-V3. It manages the users list of the equipment when the protocol SNMPv3 is active.
47
Equipment Properties
The Equipment Properties command manages the equipment properties and executes the equipment
software reset.
Operations
Verify the equipment properties (type, ID, SNMP IP address, etc.)

Modify the equipment identifier
Modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment
Align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC
Verify the equipment addresses
Verify the equipment feature
Enable a new equipment feature
Verify the equipment units
Execute the equipment software reset
GUI
Equipment Properties contextual area
Verify the equipment properties (type, ID, SNMP IP address, etc.)

1. Select Main > Equipment Properties.

The General Info tab displays the equipment general properties.
Modify the equipment identifier

WARNING If the selected equipment is configured as element of a node, the relevant identifier can NOT be
modified through this procedure. To change it refer to ALCplus2/ALCplus2e Node Manager manual.
2. Press Change at the side of the Equipment ID parameter.
3. Type an alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 50 characters.
Modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment

WARNING If the selected equipment is configured as element of a node, the relevant IP address of the
SNMP agent can NOT be modified through this procedure. To change it refer to ALCplus2/ALCplus2e Node
Manager manual.
2. Press Change at the side of the Agent IP Address parameter.
48
3. Type the new IP address.

Align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC
WARNING The operation could cause the logout of the user.

The Equipment Date/Time parameter shows the reference date/time of the equipment.
2. Press Align to PC time and confirm.
The value present in the box Equipment Date/Time is updated by the value of ones PC.
Verify the equipment addresses


2. Select the Network tab.
The tab displays the equipment addresses (Ethernet port, LCT port, MAC address, IP Over OSI port,
NSAP)
Verify the equipment feature


2. Select the Equipment Feature tab.
The tab displays the equipment feature enabled on demand.
Enable a new equipment feature

WARNING In order to enable one or more feature, IT IS NECESSARY to require the enabling certificate,
represented by a file (with sfc extension), to the company that provides the equipment.
For each equipment you wish to enable one or more feature, a specific enabling certificate is required, because there is an univocal link between each certificate and each specific equipment.
2. Select the Equipment Feature tab.
3. Press Browse.
4. Select the certificate (file with sfc extension).
5. Press Open.
The selected file is indicated in the File name box.
6. Press Send Certificate File.
A message indicates the end and the result of the operation:
49
Operation Done. The operation has been executed with success.
Invalid operation for this equipment. The selected certificate and equipment are not compatible (wrong serial number or wrong MIB version, etc.).


2. Select the Equipment Units tab.
The tab displays the characteristics of the equipment units.

WARNING After the reset, all the values activated before the operation result as valid ones.

2. Press Restart Equip. and confirm.
50
Equipment Properties contextual area

The contextual area displays the equipment properties.
Tabs
General Info tab. Equipment properties: type, ID, SNMP IP address, firmware version, WEB LCT
ID and version, date/time, communication stack.
Network tab. Equipment addresses: Ethernet port, LCT port, MAC address, IP Over OSI port,
NSAP.
Equipment Feature tab. Functionalities enabled for the equipment.
Equipment Units tab. Equipment units.
Push-button

Refresh. Update the context.
Restart Equip. Execute the equipment software reset
General Info tab

The tab displays the general equipment properties.
Parameters
Equipment Type. Equipment type.

Select the Change option to Modify the equipment identifier.
If the equipment is an element of a node parameter is read-only.
Agent IP Address. IP Address assigned to the agent SNMP of the equipment.
Select the Change option to Modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment.
If the equipment is an element of a node parameter is read-only.
Firmware Version. File name and version of the equipment firmware present on the memory
bench in use.
WEB LCT Version. WEB LCT ALCplus2e version present into the equipment.
WEB LCT Product Code. Identification code of the WEB LCT ALCplus2e application present into
the equipment.
Equipment Date/Time. Reference date/time of the equipment.
The format of date/time changes according to the setting made in the operating system.
Select the Align to PC time option to Align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC.
IP/OSI Stack. Communication stack in use.
See also
Update the firmware of the equipment

Update the WEB LCT application
Modify the communication stack in use
51
Network tab
The tab displays the equipment addresses.
Parameters
Ethernet IP Address. IP Address of the communication port with the LAN network (Ethernet
port).
Ethernet IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition of the Ethernet port.
Ethernet MAC Address. Physical address of the equipment.
LCT PPP IP Address. IP/PPP Address of the port for the connection to the PC (LCT port).
LCT PPP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition of the LCT port.
IP Over OSI. IP address of the internal communication port of the equipment for the interfacing
with the OSI router.
Gosip Address. Equipment NSAP (GOSIP) Address.
See also
Verify/modify the Ethernet port configuration

Verify/modify the LCT PPP port configuration
Verify/modify the IP Over OSI port configuration
Equipment Feature tab

The tab displays the list of the equipment feature enabled on demand.
Parameters
Feature name
52
Upgrade up to 8PSK. Maximum equipment modulation up to 8 PSK.
Upgrade up to 16QAM. Maximum equipment modulation up to 16 QAM.
Upgrade up to 14M. Channel spacing up to 14 MHz.
Upgrade up to 28M. Channel spacing up to 28 M Hz.
XPIC activation. XPIC functionality.
Built-in Fade Margin facility. Fade Margin functionality (calculation of the link margin).
SDH overhead and VC12 quality management. Monitoring of the alarms of 2Mbit/s
signal through PDH and SDH rings and transport of SOH bytes on one E1 Radio.
ETH OAM functionality. OAM-FM functionality for Ethernet network.
Sync eth support. Use of Ethernet synchronism sources.
OSPF functionality. OSPF protocol.
Sync quality management. Synchronisation quality management.
Enhanced Eth processing. Ethernet Enhanced functionality management.
Ieee1588 support. Enabling of PTP IEEE1588 protocol for the synchronisation of

Ethernet traffic.
Header compression inhibit. Disables the management of headers of the Ethernet

packets.
Eth ring protection. Ring Protection modality management.
Security package. Equipment security protocols management.
STM-1 transport. STM-1 Bulk functionality management.
E1 transport (PWE3). PWE3 functionality management.
Feature status
Enabled. The functionality is enabled.
Disabled. The functionality is not enabled.
File name. Path and name of the certificate which you wish to enable.
The Select .sfc file wording indicates that no certificate is selected
Push-button
Browse. Open the window of the O.S. for the selection of the certificate.
Send Certificate File. Enable a new equipment feature
Equipment Units tab

The tab displays the characteristics of the equipment units.
Every row of the table corresponds to an unit.
Parameters
Real Type. Unit type really present into the equipment. The wording Unequipped indicates that
the unit is not physically present into the equipment.
Expected Type. Foreseen unit type. The wording Unequipped indicates that the unit is not foreseen.
HW Ver. Unit version.
Part Number. Part Number of the unit.
Par. Part Number. Part Number of the group that contains the unit. Usually the group represents the equipment part that can be replaced. Not all the unit are into a group. In this case the
field will result empty and the part that can be replaced will correspond to the unit itself.
Serial Number. Series Number of the group that contains the unit. If the unit is not contained
into a group (Par Part Num field empty), the Series Number refers to the unit.
Unit Alarms. Functional status of the unit. Each box identifies an alarm:
Fail. The units is affected by a serious malfunctioning.
Missing. The unit is not present into the equipment (Unequipped wording - Real Type
parameter) also if it is foreseen (unit name - Expected Type parameter).
Not Resp. The unit does not answer to the program interrogations.
HW Mism. The real unit (Real Type parameter) is different from the foreseen one (Expected Type parameter).
SW Mism. The firmware version present into the controller of the peripheral unit (Actual Release) is different from the one of the memory bench in Running status (Release Bench) (see Verify the firmware version of the equipment).
The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:
Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.
Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.
White. Alarm deactivated.
53
Port Configuration & ACL

The command Port Configuration & ACL manages the communication ports reserved to local and remote
supervision of the equipment, the control list of IP accesses (IP Access Control List) and allows resetting
the equipment software.
Operations
SUPERVISION
PORTS

Verify/modify the Radio port configuration
Verify/modify the Radio 1A port configuration
Verify/modify the Line EOC port configuration
IP ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL)
Verify the rules used by the IP Access Control List
Add a rule to the IP Access Control List
Remove a rule from the IP Access Control List
Enable/disable the use of the IP Access Control List
SOFTWARE
RESET

GUI
Port Configuration & ACL contextual area

See also
Available of the communication port

IP Access Control List (info)

1. Select Main > Port Configuration & ACL.

The Ethernet tab displays the configuration of the communication port with the LAN network.
The description and the modality to change the parameters are pointed out here below.
IP Address. IP address of the communication port with the LAN network.

To change the parameter, type the new IP address in the box.
The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant Net Mask field.
If the selected equipment is configured as element of a node, the relevant IP address of the LAN
can NOT be modified through this procedure. To change it refer to ALCplus2/ALCplus2e Node
Manager manual.
Net Mask. Mask for the network address definition.

To change the parameter, type the new value in the box.
54
Alarm Severity - MNGT/<LAN management number>. Enabling/severity status of the alarm of

missing/fault of the connection cable (MNGT/ Cable Fail) relevant to the specific LAN management:
Disable. Disabled alarm.
Status. Enabled alarm - Associated severity level: status signal.
Warning, Minor, Major, Critical. Enabled alarm - Associated severity level respectively:
Warning, Minor, Major or Critical.
To change the parameter selects the box and then the option from the list.
Enable - MNGT/<LAN management number>. Enabling status of the specific LAN management:
mdi. LAN management enable; the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network
Interface Card modality).
mdi-x. LAN management enable; the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch
modality).
auto. LAN management enable; the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic
modality.
disable. LAN management disable.
Speed/Duplex - MNGT/<LAN management number>. Enabling status of the auto negotiation

and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used
by the specific LAN management:
full duplex 10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex
and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.
half duplex 10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex
half duplex 100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex
auto speed duplex. The auto negotiation is enabled.
In Band Management - LAN. Activation status of the in band supervision (the connection to the
supervision is achieved by means of the traffic LANs and/or the Radio ports of the Ethernet
Switch). If the LAN/Port boxes:
Not active (
Active (
). The in band supervision on the specific Ethernet port is not active.
). The in band supervision on the specific Ethernet port is active.
To change the parameter, activate/deactivate the specific boxes.

The availability of the Radio ports (Port) depends on the equipment configuration (see Tab.13).
Ports where in-band supervision is enabled must have option 802.1Q enabled, in order to properly manage the single VLANs.
Parameter available only if the Tagging procedure of management packets is not active (see
MNGT VLan Tagging).
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node:
When the in band supervision is enabled, it is SUGGESTED to execute the backup of the
configuration of all the node elements. This is necessary because a possible replacement
of a node element needs a partial re-configuration in order to ensure the correct operation of the in band supervision.
The in-band supervision is not forwarded to the management LANs (MNGT/1 and MNGT/
2).
In Band Management - VLan ID. VLan identifier reserved for the in band supervision:
0. No VLan is reserved for the in band supervision.
Value different from 0. For the in band supervision, the VLan with the specific ID is reserved.
A VLan for this management MUST be reserved when the in band supervision is active (at least
one LAN/Port box active).
To change the parameter, set a value between 1 and 4095; the activation of In Band Management is immediately enabled when the box relevant to the port is activated (restart is not necessary).
It is not possible to set, as ID, a value already used by a reserved VLAN (see Virtual Lan Config.
tab).
MNGT VLan Tagging).
MNGT VLan Tagging - MNGT/<LAN management number>. Activation status of the Tagging procedure of management packets in input/output from the specific LAN management:
55
Disable. The Tagging procedure is not active: the TAG is not managed for the management packets in input to/output from the LAN.
Enable. The Tagging procedure is active: the TAG is managed for the management packets in input to/output from the LAN.
All the management packets in output from the equipment controller are tagged with the
VID value reserved for the Tagging procedure.
Enable Secure. The Tagging procedure is active: only the management packets with VID
value reserved for the Tagging procedure are accepted from the LAN.
Parameter available only if the in band supervision is not active (see In Band Management).
MNGT VLan Tagging - VLan ID. VLan identifier reserved for the Tagging procedure:
0. No VLan is reserved for the Tagging procedure.
Value different from 0. For the Tagging procedure, the VLan with the specific ID is reserved.
When the Tagging procedure is active (at least one box MNGT... active), a VLan for this management MUST be reserved.
To change the parameter, set a value between 1 and 4095. The Tagging procedure is immediately activated when the box relevant to a port is enabled (restart is not necessary).
If the message Warning! VLAN ID already defined in Virtual Lan list or Mac Learning disable is displayed, it means that at least one of the following condition is present:
The identifier set for the in-band supervision corresponds to that already used by a reserved
VLAN. Change the value in the VLan ID box.
The Ethernet port selected for the in-band supervision has not the MAC Address automatic learning enabled in the MAC Table. For this port, set the parameter MAC Learning to the value or
Learn on port basis.
3. Press Store and confirm.

4. Press Restart and confirm.


2. Select the LCT PPP tab.
The tab displays the configuration of the communication port for the connection to the PC where resides
the SCT/LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
IP PPP Address. IP/PPP address of the port for the connection with the PC where resides the SCT/
LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant IP PPP NetMask field.
IP PPP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.

IP Unnumbered. The selection of this push-button allows using the address/mask of the Ethernet
port (if the equipment is managed by IP protocol) or IP Over OSI (if the equipment is managed
by OSI protocol) as IP PPP Address and IP PPP NetMask of the considered port. As consequence,
the IP/PPP address is reset while the network mask displays the acquired value, which can be
modified by the user.
PC IP Address. IP address of the remote device:
Port IP Address + 1. The IP address of the considered port increased by 1 is assigned to

the remote device.
For example, if the IP PPP Address 10.10.10.8 is assigned to the port, the address
10.10.10.9 will be automatically assigned to the remote device.
56
Ethernet Broadcast Ip Address - 1 or IP Over OSI Broadcast Address - 1. The last IP address valid for the IP subnetwork connected to the considered port is assigned to the remote device.
For example, if the IP PPP Address 10.10.10.8 with mask 255.255.255.0 is assigned to
the port, the address 10.10.10.254 will be automatically assigned to the remote device.
It is suggested to use this setting if you wish to use only one IP address, within the IP
subnetwork, for the connection to the PC.
If the equipment is managed with protocol:
IP, the value Ethernet Broadcast Ip Address - 1 is present.
OSI, the value IP Over OSI Broadcast Address - 1 is present.
Choose IP Address. The address set by the user in the box is assigned to the remote device.
To change the parameter, select the wished option and, only for the last option, type the wished
IP.
The PPP operating mode is automatic: the port self-configures in Server mode and, when the connection is set up, assigns the IP address to the remote device (see parameter PC IP Address).

WARNING The available of the Radio depends on the equipment protocol/configuration (see Tab.1).

2. Select the Radio tab.
The tab displays the configuration of the communication port represented by the radio signal.
IP Address. IP/PPP address of the 64Kbit/s communication channel of the EOC radio frame.
The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant IP NetMask field.
IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.

port as IP Address and IP NetMask of the considered port. As consequence, the IP/PPP address
is reset while the network mask displays the acquired value, which can be modified by the user.
PPP Mode. Operating mode:
Client. PPP operation Client: the port has an active role in the connection, sets up and
keeps active the connection to the remote device.
Server. PPP operation Server: the port has a passive role in the connection, waits for the
remote device sets up the connection.
Bridge. Bridge connection (same IP network) between local and remote element.
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

57

WARNING The available of the Radio 1A depends on the equipment protocol/configuration (see Tab.1).

2. Select the Radio 1A tab.
The tab displays the configuration of the communication port represented by the Radio 1 A signal.



WARNING The available of the Radio 2A depends on the equipment protocol/configuration (see Tab.1).

2. Select the Radio 2A tab.
The tab displays the configuration of the communication port represented by the Radio 2A signal.
IP Address. IP/PPP address of the communication port represented by the Radio 2A signal.

PPP Mode. PPP operating mode:
58


WARNING The available of the Line EOC depends on the equipment protocol/configuration (see Tab.1).

2. Select the Line EOC tab.
The tab displays the configuration of the communication port represented by the EOC signal.
IP Address. IP/PPP address of the communication port represented by the EOC signal.

Signal Input. Interface type to be used for the port under examination:
Not Used. No interface.
E1. A timeslot relevant to A or B tributary (2Mbit/s).
To change the parameter select the wished option.
EOC. Setting of the E1/timeslot used for the connection with the remote terminal:
2Mb Selector. Used tributary (Trib A or Trib B). The wording No 2Mb Used indicates that
the system does not use any tributary.
If a value is not available, this means that the relevant tributary is used as output of the
synchronism (see Synchronisation).
Slot Selector. Number of the used timeslot.

The wording Not Assigned indicates that no timeslot has ever been selected.
To change the parameter, type the number of the timeslot (value between 1 and 31).
Area available only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal Input area.
59

WARNING The available of the IP Over OSI port (IP Over OSI and NSAP tabs) depends on the equipment
protocol (see Tab.1).

The availability of the parameters present in the IP Over OSI tab depends on the equipment configuration
(see Tab.2).
2. Select the IP Over OSI tab.
The tab displays some configuration parameters of the internal communication port for the interfacing
IP Address. IP address of the internal port of the equipment, for the interfacing with the OSI
router.
IP Net Mask. Mask for the internal network address definition.

Line EOC. Usage modality of the timeslot relevant to an E1:
User. The LAP D protocol is configured as User side.
Network. The LAP D protocol is configured as Network side.
Disable. The channel is not used.

Parameter meaningful only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal Input box.
Not used. No interface.

Parameter meaningful only if it has been selected the User or Network value into the Line EOC
box.
2Mb Slot Selector. Used tributary (Trib A or Trib B). The wording No 2Mb Used indicates
that the system does not use any tributary.
Slot Selector. Number of the used timeslot.

The wording Not Assigned indicates that no timeslot has ever been selected.
To change the parameter, type the number of the timeslot (value between 1 and 31).
Area available only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal Input area.
Radio. Usage modality of the Radio channel:
Bridge. The radio channel is used in Bridge Mode.
Disable. The radio channel is not used.
Radio 1A. Usage modality of the Radio 1A channel:
60

3. Select the NSAP tab.
The tab displays the remnant parameters for the configuration of the internal communication port which
interfaces with OSI router.

To change the parameter, open the cascade menu and type in the box:

Press OK.
Press Set as Mac Address to set, into the Sys. ID box, the physical address of the equipment (MAC
Address).
Verify the rules used by the IP Access Control List


2. Select the ACL tab.
3. The tab displays the IP Access Control List (ACL) of the specific IDU.
Add a rule to the IP Access Control List

WARNING A maximum of 32 rules can be inserted in the list.
Adding two rules with the same IP address/mask is not allowed.

3. Press Add.
4. In the Name box, set the name of the rule (alphanumeric string of maximum 31 characters).
5. In the IP Address box, set the IP subnetwork or the single IP address which the rule refers to.
6. In the Mask box set the netmask relevant to the IP subnetwork/IP address which the rule refers to (if
a single IP is set, the mask is 255.255.255.255).
7. In the Permission box, set the usage condition of the rule:
Deny Access. The IP subnetwork/IP address is not allowed accessing the equipment.
Allow Access. The IP subnetwork/IP address is allowed accessing the equipment.
8. If you wish the equipment allows or denies the access to any IP address, activate the check-box Any.
If you activates the check-box Any with selected the option:
Deny Access, the equipment will refuse packets sent by any IP address (with the exception
pointed out in par. IP Access Control List (info).
61
Allow Access, the equipment will accept packets sent by any IP address.
Selecting the check-box Any is equivalent to setting IP address to 0.0.0.0 and netmask to 0.0.0.0.
9. Press Apply.
The rule is inserted in the list in alphanumerical order with respect to the name (Name column).
10.Press Apply and confirm.
Remove a rule from the IP Access Control List


3. Select the row relevant to the rule you wish to delete from the list.
Multiple selections can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys.
4. Press Remove and confirm.
The rule is removed from the list and communicated to the equipment.


3. In the Status box, select the option:
Disable, to disable the use of the IP Access Control List.
Enable, to enable the use of the IP Access Control List.


62
Port Configuration & ACL contextual area

The contextual area displays the communication ports reserved to local and remote supervision of the
equipment, the control list of IP accesses (IP Access Control List).
Tabs
Ethernet tab. Configuration of the communication port with the LAN network.
LCT PPP tab. Configuration of the communication port for the connection to the PC where resides
Radio tab. Configuration of the communication port represented by the radio signal.
Radio 1A tab. Configuration of the communication port represented by the Radio 1A signal.
Radio 2A tab. Configuration of the communication port represented by the EOC signal or Radio
2A signal.
Line EOC tab. Configuration of the communication port represented by the EOC signal.
IP Over OSI tab / NSAP tab. Configuration of the internal communication port for the interfacing
ACL tab. IP Access Control List (ACL).
Push-button

Restart. Execute the equipment software reset.
Store. Store the values into the equipment controller.
Retrieve. Read again the values set into the equipment controller.
Ethernet tab
The tab displays the configuration of the communication port with the LAN network.
Parameters
IP Address. IP address of the communication port with the LAN network.

Net Mask. Mask for the network address definition.
Alarm Severity - MNGT/<LAN management number>. Enabling/severity status of the
alarm of missing/fault of the connection cable (MNGT/ Cable Fail) relevant to the specific LAN
management:
Disable. Disabled alarm.
Status. Enabled alarm - Associated severity level: status signal.
Warning, Minor, Major, Critical. Enabled alarm - Associated severity level respectively: Warning, Minor, Major or Critical.
Enable - MNGT/<LAN management number>. Enabling status of the specific LAN management:
mdi. LAN management enable; the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card modality).
mdi-x. LAN management enable; the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch
modality).
auto. LAN management enable; the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic modality.
disable. LAN management disable.
Speed/Duplex - MNGT/<LAN management number>. Enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed
used by the specific LAN management:
63
half duplex 10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.
full duplex 100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.
half duplex 100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.
auto speed duplex. The auto negotiation is enabled.
In Band Management - LAN. Activation status of the in band supervision (the connection to
the supervision is achieved by means of the traffic LANs and/or the Radio ports of the Ethernet
Switch). If the LAN/Port box is:
Not active (
Active (
). The in band supervision on the specific Ethernet port is not active.
). The in band supervision on the specific Ethernet port is active.
MNGT VLan Tagging).
In Band Management - VLan ID. VLan identifier reserved for the in band supervision:
0. No VLan is reserved for the in band supervision.
Value different from 0. For the in band supervision, the VLan with the specific ID is
reserved.
MNGT VLan Tagging).
MNGT VLan Tagging - MNGT/<LAN management number>. Activation status of the Tagging procedure of management packets in input/output from the specific LAN management:
Disable. The Tagging procedure is not active: the TAG is not managed for the management packets in input to/output from the LAN.
Enable. The Tagging procedure is active: the TAG is managed for the management
packets in input to/output from the LAN.
All the management packets in output from the equipment controller are tagged with
the VID value reserved for the Tagging procedure.
Enable Secure. The Tagging procedure is active: only the management packets with
VID value reserved for the Tagging procedure are accepted from the LAN.
MNGT VLan Tagging - VLan ID. VLan identifier reserved for the Tagging procedure:
0. No VLan is reserved for the Tagging procedure.
Value different from 0. For the Tagging procedure, the VLan with the specific ID is
reserved.
See also
LCT PPP tab

The tab displays the configuration of the communication port for the connection to the PC where resides
Parameters
IP PPP Address. IP/PPP address of the port for the connection with the PC where resides the
SCT/LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
IP PPP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.
PC IP Address. IP address of the remote device:
64
Port IP Address + 1. The IP address of the considered port increased by 1 is assigned

to the remote device.
For example, if the IP PPP Address 10.10.10.8 is assigned to the port, the address
10.10.10.9 will be automatically assigned to the remote device.
Ethernet Broadcast Ip Address - 1 or IP Over OSI Broadcast Address - 1. The last IP

address valid for the IP subnetwork connected to the considered port is assigned to
the remote device.
For example, if the IP PPP Address 10.10.10.8 with mask 255.255.255.0 is assigned
to the port, the address 10.10.10.254 will be automatically assigned to the remote
device.
If the equipment is managed with protocol:
IP, the value Ethernet Broadcast Ip Address - 1 is present.
OSI, the value IP Over OSI Broadcast Address - 1 is present.
Choose IP Address. The address set by the user in the box is assigned to the remote
device.
The PPP operating mode is automatic: the port self-configures in Server mode and, when the
connection is set up, assigns the IP address to the remote device (see parameter PC IP Address).
Push-button
IP Unnumbered. The selection of this push-button allows using the address/mask of the Ethernet port (if the equipment is managed by IP protocol) or IP Over OSI (if the equipment is managed by OSI protocol) as IP PPP Address and IP PPP NetMask of the considered port. As
consequence, the IP/PPP address is reset while the network mask displays the acquired value,
which can be modified by the user.
See also
Radio tab
WARNING The available of the tab depends on the equipment protocol/configuration (see Tab.1).
The tab displays the configuration of the communication port represented by the radio signal.
Parameters
Server. PPP operation Server: the port has a passive role in the connection, waits for
the remote device sets up the connection.
Push-button
IP Unnumbered. The selection of this push-button allows using the address/mask of the Ethernet port as IP Address and IP NetMask of the considered port. As consequence, the IP/PPP address is reset while the network mask displays the acquired value, which can be modified by the
user.
See also
65
Radio 1A tab
Parameters
Push-button
IP Unnumbered The selection of this push-button allows using the address/mask of the Ethernet port as IP Address and IP NetMask of the considered port. As consequence, the IP/PPP address is reset while the network mask displays the acquired value, which can be modified by the
user.
See also
Radio 2A tab
Parameters
IP Address. IP/PPP address of the communication port represented by the Radio 2A signal.
Push-button
user.
See also
66
Line EOC tab

The tab displays the configuration of the communication port represented by the EOC signal.
Parameters
IP Address. IP/PPP address of the communication port represented by the EOC signal.
Not Used. No interface.
2Mb Selector. Used tributary (Trib A or Trib B). The wording No 2Mb Used indicates
that the system does not use any tributary.
Slot Selector. Number of the used timeslot. The wording Not Assigned indicates that
no timeslot has ever been selected.
Parameter available only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal Input area.
Push-button
user.
See also
IP Over OSI tab
WARNING The available of the tab depends on the equipment protocol (see Tab.1).
The availability of the parameters present in the tab depends on the equipment configuration (see Tab.2).
The tab displays some configuration parameters of the internal communication port for the interfacing with
the OSI router.
Parameters
IP Address. IP address of the internal port of the equipment, for the interfacing with the OSI
router.
IP Net Mask. Mask for the internal network address definition.
Line EOC. Usage modality of the timeslot relevant to an E1:
Disable. The channel is not used.
Parameter meaningful only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal Input box.
67
Not used. No interface.
Parameter meaningful only if it has been selected the User or Network value into the Line EOC
box.
2Mb Slot Selector. Used tributary (Trib A or Trib B). The wording No 2Mb Used indicates that the system does not use any tributary.
Slot Selector. Number of the used timeslot. The wording Not Assigned indicates that
no timeslot has ever been selected.
Parameter available only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal Input area.
Radio. Usage modality of the Radio channel:
See also
NSAP tab
WARNING The available of the tab depends on the equipment protocol (see Tab.1).
The tab displays the remnant parameters for the configuration of the internal communication port which
interfaces with OSI router.
Parameters

Push-button
Set as Mac Address. Set, into the Sys. ID box (Gosip Address), the physical address of the
equipment (MAC Address).
See also
68
ACL tab
The tab displays the IP Access Control List (ACL).
Parameters
Status parameter indicates the use status of the IP Access Control List:
Enable. The use of the IP Access Control List is enabled: the access to the equipment
by other elements (equipment, PC, etc.) is allowed only if the IP address of the element matches the rules pointed out in the list.
Disable. The use of the IP Access Control List is disabled: the access to the equipment
by other elements (equipment, PC, etc.) is not defined by the rules pointed out in the
list.
Table. Rules used by the IP Access Control List. Each line identifies a rule:
Name. Name of the rule.
IP Address. IP subnetwork or single IP network which the rule refers to.
Mask. Netmask relevant to the IP subnetwork or to the IP address which the rule refers to.
Permission. Usage conditions of the rule:
Allow Access. The IP subnetwork/address is allowed accessing the equipment.
Deny Access. The IP subnetwork/address is not allowed accessing the equipment.
The rules are sorted in alphanumeric order with respect to their name (Name column).
Push-button
Add. Add a rule to the IP Access Control List.

Remove. Remove a rule from the IP Access Control List.
See also

69
Available of the communication port

Depending on the type of configuration and protocol (IP/OSI) managed by the equipment, only the tabs
relevant to the communication ports managed by this configuration and/or protocol will be available as
shown in Tab.1.
For the IP Over OSI port the availability of the parameters present in the IP Over OSI tab depends on the
equipment configuration (see Tab.2).
Tab.1 Available of the communication ports
IP
Radio configuration
(1)
PROTOCOL
In Band Management
option
Unequipped
Enable/Disable
Ethernet
LCT PPP
Line EOC
1+0
1+1 Freq. Div
1+1 Hot Standby
2x(1+0) Eth. Single Pipe
2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe
2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe
2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe with East-West
option disable
Disable
Ethernet
LCT PPP
Radio
Line EOC
Enable
Ethernet
LCT PPP
Line EOC

option enable
Disable
Ethernet
LCT PPP
Radio 1
Radio 2
Enable
Ethernet
LCT PPP
OSI
Radio configuration
(1)
Unequipped
1+0
1+1 Freq. Div
1+1 Hot Standby
option disable/enable
(1)
70
Available
communication ports
PROTOCOL
In Band Management
option
Available
communication ports
Enable/Disable
Ethernet
LCT PPP
IP Over OSI (IP Over OSI
and NSAP tabs)
See Configurator.
Tab.2 Available parameters of the IP Over OSI tab

Radio configuration (1)
Unequipped
In Band Management
option
Parameters present in the

IP Over OSI tab
Enable/Disable
IP Address
IP Net Mask
Line EOC
Signal Input
EOC
1+0
1+1 Freq. Div
1+1 Hot Standby
option disable
Disable
IP Address
IP Net Mask
Line EOC
Signal Input
EOC
Radio
Enable
IP Address
IP Net Mask
Line EOC
Signal Input
EOC

option enable
Disable
IP Address
IP Net Mask
Radio 1
Radio 2
Enable
IP Address
IP Net Mask
(1)
See Configurator.
71

The IP Access Control List is a mechanism used to control and filter the source IP addresses which are allowed accessing to equipment.
This mechanism consists in a list of rules (Access Control Entry) which determine if an IP subnetwork or a
single IP address is allowed accessing to the selecting equipment.
Every rules are composed by a descriptive part and a decision-making part. The descriptive part of the rule
is represented by the IP address (or by a set of IP addresses) source of the packet. The decision-making
part is the action to execute: making the packet passes (Allow Access) or refusing it (Deny Access).
For an ALCplus2e equipment, the analysis of the packet consists in considering the following conditions:
1. The rules present in ACL are considered only if the use of ACL itself is enabled.
2. The control is applied only to the packets destined to the local equipment.
3. The access to the equipment is always allowed by the LCT PPP port (see Port Configuration & ACL).
4. The access is always allowed if the IP address coincides with that of a user who has executed a Login
procedure. The user is allowed modifying ACL without involving the loss of the connection with the
equipment.
5. The access is allowed only if the source IP address of the packet is not contained in any Deny Access
rule.
6. The access is allowed only if the source IP address of the packet is contained in, at least, one Allow
Access rule.
7. If ACL does not contain rules, enabling it is equivalent to forbidding the access to the equipment from
the Ethernet ports to every IP address.
72
Routing Table
WARNING When all pieces of equipment belongs to the same IP network and sending packets to other networks is not necessary, the Routing Table and the address of the Gateway equipment must not be necessarily defined because the network can manage its own internal traffic.
Setting the Routing Table and Default Gateway is necessary when equipment must send packets between
two different networks, then the traffic must be re-routed from a network to another one (routing functionality of the equipment).
The Routing Table command manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address currently used by the equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway).
Operations
Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway used by the equipment
Add an element to the Routing Table
Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table
Set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway
Delete the IP Address used as Default Gateway
GUI
Routing Table contextual area

See also
Routing Table and Default Gateway (info)
Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway used by the equipment
1. Select Main > Routing Table.

The Routing Table contextual area displays the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address
currently used by the equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway).
Add an element to the Routing Table


2. Press Add.
3. Into the Destination box, type the IP Address of the IP network or of the destination element.
4. Into the NetMask box, type the mask for the destination IP network
5. Into the Hop box, type the IP Address of the equipment acting as Gateway for the destination network.
6. Press Apply.
The new element is inserted into the table. The system records the new element into the currently used
Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing
Table).
73
Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table


2. Select the element of the Routing Table.
Items automatically inserted by the controller (items with Local protocol) cannot be deleted.
The system deletes the element into the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into
the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).
Set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway


2. Into the Default Gateway box, type the IP Address of the equipment used as Default Gateway.
In the next box is automatically indicates the supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway
equipment corresponds to.
3. Press Apply (next to Delete push-button) and confirm.
The system inserts the new Default Gateway IP address into the currently used Routing Table (Running
Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).
The insertion of a new IP address used as Default Gateway can fail if the new IP address does not belong
to an IP network directly connected to the equipment interface.
Delete the IP Address used as Default Gateway


2. Press Delete and confirm.
The system deletes the Default Gateway IP address into the currently used Routing Table (Running
Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).
74
Routing Table contextual area

The contextual area shows the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address currently used by the
equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway).
Each row of the table corresponds to an item of the Routing Table.
Parameters
Destination. IP address of the IP network or of the destination element.

Net Mask. IP NetMask of the IP network or of the destination element.
Hop. IP address of the equipment that acts as Gateway.
Interface. Supervision port of the local equipment which the Gateway equipment is connected
to:
Lan. Communication port with the LAN network.
Lan/OSI. Communication port that interfaces itself with the router OSI.
Lct. Port for the connection with the PC where resides the SCT/LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
Radio 1A. Communication port represented by the radio signal.
Radio 2A/Line EOC. Communication port represented by the 2A radio signal or 2Mb
EOC communication port.
<no wording>. internal port (internal loopback).
The available values change according to the protocol managed by the equipment (IP/OSI). The
current setting of the parameters relevant to each port can be verified selecting Main > Port
Configuration & ACL.
Protocol. Modality of connection (direct or indirect) between specific port (Interface) and destination IP network:
Local. The IP network or the element are directly connected to the equipment interface. The IP network or the element are automatically inserted by the equipment software.
NetMgmt. The IP network or the element are not directly reachable from the equipment interfaces. The IP network or the element have been manually inserted by the
user (static element).
Ospf. The IP network or the element are not directly reachable from the equipment
interfaces. The IP network or the element have been manually inserted by the OSPF
protocol (dynamic element).
Other. All the other situations that are not comprised into one of the previous cases
(this label generally does not shown; it has been anticipated for future uses).
Default Gateway. IP address of the equipment that acts as Running Default Gateway. The following box indicates the supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway equipment corresponds to.
Push-button
Apply. Not available in this context.

Add. Add an element to the Routing Table.
Remove. Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table.
Apply. Set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway.
Delete. Delete the IP Address used as Default Gateway.
See also
75
Routing Table
The function of the Routing Table is the one to check the routing of the supervisory messages
exchanged among the elements (PCs, equipment, etc.), that use the TCP/IP protocol, from one
network to the other one.
Running Routing Table
Each equipment at its initialization (start-up operation) automatically sets the elements
of the Routing Table that identify the supervisory ports of the equipment (communication
ports provided with the equipment for the input/output of the supervisory signal).
These elements are set according to the IP addresses assigned to each port.
If the user changes the IP address of a supervisory port, the system does not dynamically
change it into the equipment Routing Table. It is necessary to execute a reset of the
equipment, because the elements of the Routing Table are set at the equipment start-up.
If it is necessary, the user can add to these elements (automatically set) some other
ones.
The system records each new element (manually set) into the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment controller
(Stored Routing Table); the system does not record the elements (automatically set) into
the backup memory of the controller because they are newly set at every equipment
start-up.
The Running Routing Table is a static one. The system updates such a table, through the
elements present into the Stored Routing Table, at every equipment start-up.
Stored Routing Table
The equipment does not currently use the Stored Routing Table. This table becomes operative on the equipment restart.
In fact, in this case, the system inserts the elements of the Stored Routing Table into the
Routing Table used by the equipment (Running Routing Table). What just said is valid
only for the elements whose router equipment (Hop) is associated to an active interface.
The setting of the Stored Routing Table id necessary, for instance, when the user wants
to change an address of the equipment supervisory ports.
In such a case, it is not possible to change the currently used Routing Table (Running
Routing Table).
The changes have to be inserted into the Stored Routing Table. At the next equipment
start-up, the system inserts the elements of the Stored Routing Table into the Routing
Table used by the equipment.
Default Gateway
The system forwards to the equipment with the Default Gateway function the data that have a
receiver unreachable through the routes present into the Routing Table.
76

The Stored Routing Table command manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address
stored in the equipment (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway).
Operations
Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway present into the backup memory of the controller
Add an element into the Stored Routing Table
Remove one or more elements from the Stored Routing Table
Set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table
Delete the IP address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table
GUI
Stored Routing Table contextual area

See also
Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway present into the backup memory
of the controller
1. Select Main > Stored Routing Table.

The Stored Routing Table contextual area displays the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway
address present in the backup memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table and Stored
Default Gateway).
Add an element into the Stored Routing Table


2. Press Add.
3. Into the Destination box, type the IP Address of the IP network or of the destination element.
4. Into the NetMask box, type the mask for the destination IP network.
5. Into the Hop box, type the IP Address of the equipment acting as Gateway for the destination network.
6. Into the Interface box, set the supervisory port of the local equipment which the Gateway equipment
is connected to:
Lct. Port for the connection with the PC where resides the SCT/LMT management program or
the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
Radio 2A/Line EOC. Communication port represented by the 2A radio signal or 2Mb EOC communication port.
The available values change according to the protocol managed by the equipment (IP/OSI).
7. Press Apply.
The system inserts the new element into the table.
77
8. Press Save and confirm.

The system saves the new element into the backup memory of the equipment.
The system records the new element ONLY into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing
Table). At the next equipment start-up, the system will insert this new element also in the current routing table (Running Routing Table). What just said is valid only for the elements whose equipment (Hop)
is associated to an active interface.
Remove one or more elements from the Stored Routing Table


2. Select the element of the Stored Routing Table.
The system removes the element from the backup memory of the equipment.
The system deletes the element ONLY from the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table). At the next equipment start-up, the system will delete such an element also into the current Routing Table (Running Routing Table).
Set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table

2. Into the Default Gateway box, type the IP Address of the equipment used as Default Gateway.
3. Into the next box, set the supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway equipment corresponds
to:
Lct. Port for the connection with the PC where resides the SCT/LMT management program or
the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
Radio 2A/Line EOC. Communication port represented by the 2A radio signal or 2Mb EOC communication port.
The available values change according to the protocol managed by the equipment (IP/OSI).
4. Press Apply (next to Delete push-button) and confirm.
The system saves the new IP address of Default Gateway into the backup memory of the equipment.
The system records the IP address of Default Gateway ONLY into the backup memory of the equipment
(Stored Routing Table). The equipment will display such an IP address only at the next restart procedure of the equipment itself.
Delete the IP address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table

2. Press Delete and confirm.
The system removes the IP address of Default Gateway from the backup memory of the equipment.
78
Stored Routing Table contextual area

The contextual area shows the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address present in the backup
memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway).
Each row of the table corresponds to an item of the Routing Table.
Parameters
Destination. IP address of the IP network or of the destination element.

Net Mask. IP NetMask of the IP network or of the destination element.
Hop. IP address of the equipment that acts as Gateway.
Interface. Supervision port of the local equipment which the Gateway equipment is connected
to:
Lct. Port for the connection with the PC where resides the SCT/LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
Radio 2A/Line EOC. Communication port represented by the 2A radio signal or 2Mb
EOC communication port.
The available values change according to the protocol managed by the equipment (IP/OSI). The
current setting of the parameters relevant to each port can be verified selecting Main > Port
Configuration & ACL.
Protocol. Parameter not meaningful in this context.
Default Gateway. IP address of the equipment that acts as Stored Default Gateway. The next
box indicates the supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway equipment corresponds
to.
Push-button

Refresh. Read again the data from the memory of the equipment after a Retrieve command.
For instance, if the user wants updating the Stored Routing Table displaying the elements manually added by the user into the Running Routing Table, he has to press Retrieve and later the
Refresh one.
Add. Add an element into the Stored Routing Table.
Remove. Remove one or more elements from the Stored Routing Table.
Retrieve. Read again the data from the backup memory and load them into the equipment
memory.
Save. Save the elements of the table into the backup memory of the equipment.
Apply. Set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table.
Delete. Delete the IP address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table.
See also
79
Performance Monitoring
The Performance Monitoring command manages the Performance Monitoring measures.

Operations
Verify the status of the PM measures

Activate a PM measure
Activate all PM measures in a group contemporaneously
Deactivate a PM measure
Deactivate all PM measure in a group contemporaneously
Display the results and the threshold exceeding alarms
Reset the values of the records daily and primary
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms
Set the thresholds of the control parameters and of the alarms
Set the 2Mbit/s tributary used for the measure (G828 E1 Line Side/G828 E1 Internal Side)
Modify the modality used to increase the counters (ACM Radio)
GUI
Performance Monitoring contextual area

See also
PM measures
PM measures (info)
Verify the status of the PM measures

1. Select Main > Master or Reserve > Performance Monitoring.

The Performance Monitoring contextual area displays the PM measures available.
The measures are subdivided in groups. Selecting a group, the list of the measures associated to the
group can be expanded. The measures of only one group at a time can be displayed:
G828 group
G828 Radio <radio branch> measure, checks the quality of the received signal at radio
side.
G828 E1 Line Side measure, checks the quality of the received signal from one of the IDU
board E1 (tributary A or B) at line side.
G828 E1 Internal Side measure, checks the quality of the received signal from one of the
IDU board E1 (tributary A or B) at internal side.
RxPwr group
RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure, checks the power of the signal at reception.
TxPwr group
TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure, checks the power of the signal at transmission.
ACM group
ACM Radio <radio branch> measure, traces the trend of the ACM profiles in the time.
G829 RstB1 group
G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure, checks the quality of the received signal
at line side (STM-1).
G829 MstB2M1 group
80
G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure, checks the quality of the received signal at line side (STM-1).
G828 Vc12 group
G828 Vc12 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> measure, checks
the quality of the received VC-12 into the STM-1.
Next to every measure, the relevant status is displayed:
Stopped. The measure is not on progress.
Running. The measure is on progress.
1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.

2. Select the group that contains the measure.
Press Start at the side of the measure in Stopped status to be activated and confirm.
The measure is started-up and its status switches from Stopped to Running.
Press Show at the side of the measure in Stopped status to be activated.

In the <PM measure name> window, select the Start command and confirm.
The measure is started-up.
Activate all PM measures in a group contemporaneously


2. Select the group.
3. Press Start Current and confirm.
The not active measures are started and their status passes from Stopped to Running.

2. Select the group that contains the measure.
Press Stop at the side of the measure in Running status to be deactivated and confirm.
Press Show at the side of the measure in Running status to be deactivated.
The measure is stopped and its status switches from Running to Stopped.
In the <PM measure name> window, select the Stop command and confirm.
The measure is stopped.
81
Deactivate all PM measure in a group contemporaneously


2. Select the group.
3. Press Stop Current and confirm.
The active measures are stopped and their status passes from Running to Stopped.


2. Press Show at the side of the wished measure.
The window displays the results of the measures and the status of the alarms relevant to the exceeding
of the threshold limits (see Fig.4).
Fig.4 Window (PM measure)
3
(1)
Commands:
Refresh. Update the data.
Clear Counters. Reset the values contained into the records (daily or primary).
Clear Alarms. Execute the reset of the alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding.
Start. Active the measure. Command displayed in alternative to the Stop.
Stop. Deactive the measure. Command displayed in alternative to the Start.
Chart View. Not available for the current version of the application.
Commons. Set the thresholds of the alarms relevant to the parameters.
(2)
Measuring unit of the parameters in the table. The option changes according to the measures:
G828 and G829 measures
Seconds. Into the table there are the parameters that use the seconds as measuring unit.
Blocks. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the blocks as measuring
unit.
ACM Radio measure
82
Seconds. The counters relevant to the ACM profiles are present in the table.
UpDownShift. The counters DownShift and UpShift are present in the table.
RxPwr Radio measure
Rlts. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the seconds as measuring
unit.
TM. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the dBm as measuring unit.
TxPwr Radio measure
Tlts. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the seconds as measuring
unit.
TM. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the dBm as measuring unit.
To change the type of the displayed parameters, select the arrow present on the side of the label
and choose from the list the new value.
(3)
Status of the threshold exceeding alarms and configuration parameters. These fields change according to the selected measure:
G828 and G829 measures
15M <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter
into one of the primary observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window.
24H <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter
into one of the daily observation periods (24 hours) present into the window.
UAS. Unavailability alarm.
2Mb Selection. Tributary used for the measure. The No 2Mb Used wording indicates that
no tributary is set for the measure.
Parameter available only for the G828 E1 Line Side and G828 E1 Internal Side measure.
ACM Radio measure
15M <counter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific counter into one of the primary observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window.
24H <counter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific counter into one of the daily
observation periods (24 hours) present into the window.
Policy. Modality used to increase the counters:
Active Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile
is equal to the one currently active.
Not Avail. Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM
profile is higher than the current one and lower than or equal to the upper modulation threshold (Upper Modulation).
Example. Suppose the ACM profile 128 QAM has been defined as Upper Modulation and
the current modulation is 16 QAM. If the active modality is:
Active Mod, each second only the counter 16QAM is increased.
Not Avail. Mod, each second the counters 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM are increased.
RxPwr Radio measure
Rlt Thresh. Threshold levels of the received power actually set. These parameters can
be configured by the user.
TxPwr Radio measure
Tlt Thresh. Threshold levels of the transmitted power actually set. These parameters
can be configured by the user.
The colour of the alarm boxes represents the alarm status and severity:
Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical,
Major, Minor, Warning severity.
Grey. Alarm deactivated.
83
(4)
Table representation of the measure results. For every parameter, the result of the measure is
pointed out relevant to a given observation period (daily or primary record):
Type. According to the selected measure this field indicates:
G828, G829, RxPwr Radio and TxPwr Radio measures: Control parameters (see
PM measures).
Into the table, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the parameters. Such results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit (see
note 2).
ACM Radio measure: Counters. One counter is foreseen for every ACM profile (see
PM measures).
For every counter, the column of the specific observation period indicates (expressed
in seconds) the number of times the counter is increased. The rule used to increased
a counter changes according to the currently active modality (see Policy parameter).
Besides one counter per modulation, two further counters are foreseen:
DownShift. Number of times the profile, during the specific observation period,
has changed assuming a profile lower than the previous one.
UpShift. Number of times the profile, during the specific observation period,
has changed assuming a profile higher than the previous one.
Into the table, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the counters.
Such results have been subdivided according to the counter type (see note 2).
Curr. Day. Current daily record (24 hours).
Last Day. Preceding daily record.
Curr. 15m. Current primary record (15 minutes).
15m 4h. 16 preceding primary records (each record is of 15 minutes).
What just said is valid from the second row of the table on, because the first row indicates the status
of the records (Counters Status):
Mean.less. The record has been completely acquired and the measure is not affected by
errors.
Meaningful. The record has been completely acquired and it detected some performance
errors. If one or more alarms are active (see note 3) means that the counter(s) have
exceeded their threshold value.
Incomplete. The record has not been completely acquired during the corresponding observation period. The measure starting record is always in this status. The daily record
gets this status also when only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status. The daily record of the current date will be always an incomplete one because the daily records are acquired at 23.59 of each day.
Lost. The record has not reached the main controller of the equipment for instance because the corresponding peripheral card has been physically extracted before it could
have forwarded the record itself or for generic hardware/software troubles.
Restarted. The record has been lost after a reset of the equipment. When the equipment
has a software restart and checks that the measure is activated for a certain measure
point, all the record coupled with such a measure point will result in this status.
---. The record is not an available one because, during the observation period under examination, the measure was not activated.


3. Select the Clear Counters command and confirm.
The values displayed into table are reset.
84


3. Select Clear Alarms and confirm.
All the active alarm status boxes are deactivated, except for the unavailability alarms (present only for
G828 and G829).


3. Select Commons.
The Commons window displays a list of options on the left side. The selection of each option displays,
in the right part of the window, the relevant parameters. If the:
G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number>, G828 Radio <radio branch>, G828 E1 Line Side or G828 E1 Internal Side measure is selected, the following parameters are present in the window:
General. Threshold levels of the UAS and SES parameters:
N Ses Set UAS (P). Threshold - expressed as number of consecutive seconds with SES over which starts the UAS unavailability period.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 10 sec (default 10).
N Ses Reset UAS (Q). Threshold - expressed as number of consecutive seconds without
SES - over which ends the UAS unavailability period.
N BBE Set Ses. Threshold - expressed as percentage of the errored blocks - over which
it is declared a SES.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 100% (default 30%).
15M Es. Severity and threshold of the 15M Es alarm:
Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
15M Es Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.
24H Es. Severity and threshold of the 24H Es alarm:
24H Es Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,

when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
15M Ses. Severity and threshold of the 15M Ses alarm:
15M Ses Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
85
24H Ses. Severity and threshold of the 24H Ses alarm:
24H Ses Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
15M Sep. Severity and threshold of the 15M Sep alarm:
15M Sep Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of SEP events within a 15 minute
period - over which it is activated the alarm.
24H Sep. Severity and threshold of the 24H Sep alarm:
24H Sep Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of SEP events within a 24 hour period - over which it is activated the alarm.
UAS. Severity of the UAS alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> or G828 Vc12 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - VC-12 <TUG3TUG2-TUG12> measure is selected, the following parameters are present in the window:
86
General. Threshold levels of the UAS and SES parameters:
N Ses Set UAS (P). Threshold - expressed as number of consecutive seconds with SES over which starts the UAS unavailability period.
N Ses Reset UAS (Q). Threshold - expressed as number of consecutive seconds without
SES - over which ends the UAS unavailability period.
N BBE Set Ses. Threshold - expressed as percentage of the errored blocks - over which
it is declared a SES.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 100% (default 30%).
15M Es. Severity and threshold of the 15M Es alarm:
15M Es Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
15M Es FE. Severity and threshold of the 15M Es FE alarm:
15M Es FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute

period, when ES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
24H Es. Severity and threshold of the 24H Es alarm:
24H Es Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,

when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 rep-
resents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

24H Es FE. Severity and threshold of the 24H Es FE alarm:
24H Es FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when ES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
15M Ses. Severity and threshold of the 15M Ses alarm:
15M Ses Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
15M Ses FE. Severity and threshold of the 15M Ses FE alarm:
15M Ses FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute

period, when SES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
24H Ses. Severity and threshold of the 24H Ses alarm:
24H Ses Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
24H Ses FE. Severity and threshold of the 24H Ses FE alarm:
24H Ses FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour

period, when SES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
15M Sep. Severity and threshold of the 15M Sep alarm:
15M Sep Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of SEP events within a 15 minute
period - over which it is activated the alarm.
15M Sep FE. Severity and threshold of the 15M Sep FE alarm:
15M Sep FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of SEP FE events within a 15

minute period - over which it is activated the alarm.
24H Sep. Severity and threshold of the 24H Sep alarm:
87
24H Sep Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of SEP events within a 24 hour period - over which it is activated the alarm.
24H Sep FE. Severity and threshold of the 24H Sep FE alarm:
24H Sep FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of SEP FE events within a 24

hour period - over which it is activated the alarm.
UAS. UAS alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
UAS FE. UAS FE alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
UAS Bidi. UAS BIDI alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
ACM Radio <radio branch> measure is selected, the following parameters are present in the window:
88
15M 4QAMS. Severity and threshold of the 15M 4QAM Strong alarm:
15M 4QAMS Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute

period, when the counter 4QAM Str has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
15M 4QAM. Severity and threshold of the 15M 4QAM alarm:
15M 4QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute

period, when the counter 4QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
15M 8PSK. Severity and threshold of the 15M 8PSK alarm:
15M 8PSK Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute

period, when the counter 8PSK has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.





24H 4QAMS. Severity and threshold of the 24H 4QAM Strong alarm:
24H 4QAMS Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour

period, when the counter 4QAM Str has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
24H 4QAM. Severity and threshold of the 24H 4QAM alarm:
24H 4QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the counter 4QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
24H 8PSK. Severity and threshold of the 24H 8PSK alarm:
24H 8PSK Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the counter 8PSK has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
24H 16QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour


To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 rep-
89
resents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.


period, when the counter 64QAM has increased- over which it is activated the alarm.


RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure is selected, the following parameters are present in the window:
15M Rlts. Threshold and severity of the 15M Rlts alarms:
Rlts 1, Rlts 2, Rlts 3, Rlts 4, Rlts 5 (Thresholds area). Threshold levels - expressed as
number of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when the received power is lower than
the RLT1, RLT2, RLT3, RLT4, RLT5 threshold levels - over which the system activates the
relevant alarms.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between 1 and 900 (default
0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
Severity. Alarms severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
24H Rlts. Threshold and severity of the 24H Rlts alarms:
Rlts 1, Rlts 2, Rlts 3, Rlts 4, Rlts 5 (Thresholds area). Threshold levels - expressed as
number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the received power is lower than the
RLT1, RLT2, RLT3, RLT4, RLT5 threshold levels - over which the system activates the relevant alarms.
Rlt. Threshold levels of the received power:
Rlt 1 <current value> dBm, Rlt 2 <current value> dBm, Rlt 3 <current value> dBm, Rlt
4 <current value> dBm, Rlt 5 <current value> dBm. Respectively the first, the second,
the third, the fourth and the fifth threshold level of the received power.
To change a threshold, move the cursor over a value comprised between -100dBm and
-20dBm.
To restore the default of a parameter press the relevant Default push-button and confirm.
In equipment in protected configuration the variations of the thresholds executed on a branch
are not automatically reported even on the other branches.
TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure is selected, the following parameters are present in the window:
15M Tlts. Threshold and severity of the 15M Tlts alarms:
90
Tlts 1, Tlts 2, Tlts 3, Tlts 4 (Thresholds area). Threshold levels - expressed as number of
seconds, within a 15 minute period, when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT1,
TLT2, TLT3, TLT4 threshold levels - over which the system activates the relevant alarms.
24H Tlts. Threshold and severity of the 24H Tlts alarms:
Tlts 1, Tlts 2, Tlts 3, Tlts 4 (Thresholds area). Threshold levels - expressed as number of
seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT1,
TLT2, TLT3, TLT4 threshold levels - over which the system activates the relevant alarms.
Tlt. Threshold levels of the transmitted power:
Tlt 1 <current value> dBm, Tlt 2 <current value> dBm, Tlt 3 <current value> dBm, Tlt
4 <current value> dBm. Respectively the first, the second, the third and the fourth
threshold level of the transmitted power.
To change a threshold move the cursor over a value comprised between -40dBm and
35dBm.
To restore the default of a parameter press the relevant Default push-button and confirm.
In equipment in protected configuration the variations of the thresholds executed on a branch
are not automatically reported even on the other branches.
Press Refresh to restore the values set at the opening of the window.
Set the 2Mbit/s tributary used for the measure (G828 E1 Line Side/G828 E1 Internal
Side)
WARNING The operation is not available when the system uses as supervisory port (EOC) equipment tributary (see Port Configuration & ACL). In such a case, the system automatically uses for the PM measures,
the same tributary used for the supervisory operations.
The change of the tributary for the G828 E1 Line Side measure automatically changes the value of the
tributary for the G828 E1 Internal Side measure and vice versa.
2. Press Show at the side of the wished G828 E1... measure.
3. Select Commons.
4. In the Commons window, select the 2Mb Selection option.
The 2Mb Selector parameter indicates the 2Mbit/s used for the calculation oft he measure control parameters. The selected value:
Trib A, the tributary A is used for the measure.
Trib B, the tributary B is used for the measure.
No 2Mb Used, no tributary is set for the measure.
To change the parameter, select the wished value from the list (Trib A or Trib B).
If a value is not available, this means that the relevant tributary is used as output of the synchronism
(see Synchronisation).
Press Refresh to restore the values set at the opening of the window.
91

WARNING This operation stops the measure ACM Radio, if active.

2. Press Show at the side of the ACM Radio <radio branch> measure (ACM group).
3. Press Change.
4. In the Policy window, select the option:
Active Modulation. Each second the counters, whose ACM profile is equal to the currently active
one, are increased.
Not Available Modulation. Each second the counters, whose ACM profile is higher than the current one and lower than or equal to the upper modulation threshold (Upper Modulation), are
increased.
92
Performance Monitoring contextual area

The contextual area shows the PM measures.
The measures are subdivided in groups. Selecting a group, the list of the measures associated to the group
can be expanded. The measures of only one group at a time can be displayed.
PM measures
G828 group
G828 Radio <radio branch> measure checks the quality of the received signal at radio
side.
G828 E1 Line Side measure checks the quality of the received signal from one of the IDU
board E1 (tributary A or B) at line side.
G828 E1 Internal Side measure checks the quality of the received signal from one of the
IDU board E1 (tributary A or B) at internal side.
RxPwr group
RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure checks the power of the signal at reception.
TxPwr group
TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure checks the power of the signal at transmission.
ACM group
ACM Radio <radio branch> measure traces the trend of the ACM profiles in the time.
G829 RstB1 group
G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure checks the quality of the received signal
at line side (STM-1).
G829 MstB2M1 group
G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure checks the quality of the received signal at line side (STM-1).
G828 Vc12 group
G828 Vc12 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> measure checks the
quality of the received VC-12 into the STM-1.
Next to every measure the relevant status is pointed out:
Stopped. The measure is not on progress.
Running. The measure is on progress.
Push-button

Start Current. Activate all PM measures in a group contemporaneously.
Stop Current. Deactivate all PM measure in a group contemporaneously.
Start. Active the specific measure. Push-button displayed in alternative to the Stop.
Stop. Deactive the specific measure. Push-button displayed in alternative to the Start.
Show. Display the results and the threshold exceeding alarms of the specific measure.
See also
Set the 2Mbit/s tributary used for the measure (G828 E1 Line Side/G828 E1 Internal Side)
PM measures
PM measures (info)
93
PM measures
G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number>

G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number>
G828 Radio <radio branch>
G828 E1 Line Side
G828 E1 Internal Side
G828 Vc12 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12>
ACM Radio <radio branch>
RxPwr Radio <radio branch>
TxPwr Radio <radio branch>
G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number>

WARNING Measure available only if the management of STM-1(s) is active (see Configurator).
The measure checks the quality of the received signal at line side (STM-1).
The check consists of measuring, by means of the B1 byte, the following quality parameters:
BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one errored bit not belonging to SES.
ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks.
SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored
blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm
equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame
Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, etc.).
SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised
between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES.
UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds
starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of
Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period.
The Q and P values can be configured.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS parameters are implemented according to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP parameter is
implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.
G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number>

The measure checks the quality of the received signal at line side (STM-1).
The check consists of measuring, by means of the B2 and M1 bytes, the following quality parameters:
Byte B2
94
Byte M1
BBE FE (Background Block Error Far End). Number of remote blocks, where it has been detected
at least one errored bit, not belonging to SES.
ES FE (Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been one or more errored remote
blocks.
SES FE (Severely Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been a percentage of
errored blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated
an alarm equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Ms Rdi Alarm).
SEP FE (Severely Errored Period Far End). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES
FE comprised between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES FE.
UAS FE (UnAvailable Seconds Far End). Number of remote unavailability seconds. The counting
of the seconds starts after P consecutive seconds with SES FE presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of Q consecutive seconds without SES FE. The P seconds are counted into
the unavailability period. The Q and P values can be configured.
Byte B2 and M1
UASBIDI (UnAvailable Seconds Bidirectional). Number of local (UAS) or remote (UAS FE) unavailability seconds.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS, BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI parameters are implemented according
to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP, SEP FE parameters are implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.
G828 Radio <radio branch>

WARNING Measure available only if the equipment is provided with the radio.
The G828 Radio 2A measure is available only for equipment in 1+1 or 2x(1+0) radio configuration.
The measure checks the quality of the received signal at radio side.
The check consists of measuring the following quality parameters:
G828 E1 Line Side

WARNING To execute this measure, it is necessary to use a tributary framed according the G.704 Rec.
Measure not available if the PWE3 function is enable (see Configurator).

The measure checks the quality of the received signal from one of the IDU board E1 (tributary A or B) at
line side.
95
G828 E1 Internal Side

To execute this measure, it is necessary to use a tributary framed according the G.704 Rec.
Measure not available if the PWE3 function is enable (see Configurator).
The measure checks the quality of the received signal from one of the IDU board E1 (tributary A or B) at
internal side.
G828 Vc12 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12>

Measure not available if the STM-1 Bulk function is active (see STM1 Bulk Config.).
The measure checks the quality of the received VC-12 into the STM-1.
96
BBE FE (Background Block Error Far End). Number of remote blocks, where it has been detected
at least one errored bit, not belonging to SES.
ES FE (Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been one or more errored remote
blocks.
SES FE (Severely Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been a percentage of
errored blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated
an alarm equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Ms Rdi Alarm).
SEP FE (Severely Errored Period Far End). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES
FE comprised between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES FE.
UAS FE (UnAvailable Seconds Far End). Number of remote unavailability seconds. The counting
of the seconds starts after P consecutive seconds with SES FE presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of Q consecutive seconds without SES FE. The P seconds are counted into
the unavailability period. The Q and P values can be configured.
UASBIDI (UnAvailable Seconds Bidirectional). Number of local (UAS) or remote (UAS FE) unavailability seconds.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS, BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI parameters are implemented according
to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP, SEP FE parameters are implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.
ACM Radio <radio branch>

Measure meaningful only if the adaptive modulation is active.

The ACM Radio 2A measure is available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) radio configuration.
The measure traces the trend of the ACM profiles (transmitter) in the time.
The trend is traced using one counter for each ACM profile and two further counters (UpShift and DownShift):
4QAM Str. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 4QAM Str. The rule used to increase the counter
changes according to the active increase mode*.
4QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 4QAM. The rule used to increase the counter changes according to the active increase mode*.
8PSK. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 8PSK. The rule used to increase the counter changes
according to the active increase mode*.
16QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 16QAM. The rule used to increase the counter
DownShift. Number of times the ACM profile, during the specific observation period, has
changed assuming an ACM profile lower than the previous one.
UpShift. Number of times the ACM profile, during the specific observation period, has changed
assuming an ACM profile higher than the previous one.
* The counters relevant to the ACM profiles can be increased according to the following modes:
Active Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile is equal to
the one currently active.
Not Avail. Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile is higher
than the current one and lower than or equal to the upper modulation threshold (Upper Modulation).
97
Example. Suppose the ACM profile 128 QAM has been defined as Upper Modulation and the current modulation is 16 QAM. If the active modality is:
Active Mod, each second only the counter 16QAM is increased.
Not Avail. Mod, each second the counters 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM are increased.
The mode used to increase the counters of the ACM profiles is common to all the counters and must be
selected by the user.
RxPwr Radio <radio branch>

The RxPwr Radio 2A measure is available only for equipment in 1+1 or 2x(1+0) radio configuration.
The measure checks the power of the signal at reception.
TMMax (Tide Mark Max). Maximum value reached by the power at reception (RL) during the
observation period (15 min or 24 hours).
TMMin (Tide Mark Min). Minimum value reached by the power at reception (RL) during the observation period (15 min or 24 hours).
Average Level. Average level of the power at reception (RL) during the observation period (15
min or 24 hours).
Rlts (Received Level Threshold Second). Number of seconds where it has been detected that
the value of the power at reception (RL - Received Level) is lower than the pre-defined threshold
level. It is possible to define up to a maximum of 5 threshold levels.
The parameters are implemented according to the Standard EN 301 129 of the ETSI.
TxPwr Radio <radio branch>

The TxPwr Radio 2A measure is available only for equipment in 1+1 or 2x(1+0) radio configuration.
The measure checks the power of the signal at transmission.
TMMax (Tide Mark Max). Maximum value reached by the power at transmission (TL) during the
TMMin (Tide Mark Min). Minimum value reached by the power at transmission (TL) during the
Average Level. Average level of the power at transmission (TL) during the observation period
(15 min or 24 hours)
Tlts (Transmitted Level Threshold Second). Number of seconds where it has been detected that
the value of the power at transmission (TL - Transmitted Level) is higher than the pre-defined
threshold level. It is possible to define up to a maximum of 4 threshold levels.
The parameters are implemented according to the Standard EN 301 129 of the ETSI.
98
PM measures (info)
A PM measure consists of recording, during a pre-defined time range (observation period), the values of
specific parameters.
Some threshold limits have been assigned to such control parameters (the setting of the thresholds can
be changed).
The exceeding of the threshold limit indicates a more or less serious degradation of the signal. This condition generates an alarm.
The alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding are treated by the equipment and by the application as
normal alarms. The only exception is that the alarm is not automatically reset at the return into the threshold limit but the user has to execute the reset of this kind of alarms.
The control parameters under examination change according to the equipment type and to the measure
type supported by that type of equipment. Usually, all the executed measures refer to ITU-T Recommendations (for instance G.828, G.826, etc.).
The activation (and the deactivation) of the PM measures can be executed only after a command forwarded
by the user.
When it has been activated a PM measure, the main controller of the equipment starts the storing of the
values relevant to the control parameters. The results of the measures are sub-divided into records. Each
record contains the values recorded into a specific time range (observation period).
If at the end of the observation period, the measure has not yet been deactivated the system starts another
observation period and so on until when the operator stops the measure.
The equipment group the results of the PM measures into observation period of 15 minutes (primary records) and of 24 hours (daily records).
The observation periods can not be synchronized with the instant when the measure is activated but such
records refer, for the primary records, to the quarter of an hour (00.00, 00.15, 00.30, etc.) and, for the
daily records, to the time 00.00 UTC (Universal Time, Coordinated).
For instance, if a measure starts at 11.40, the first primary record will have as observation period the time
11.4011.45 (corresponding to the time range 11.3011.45), while the first daily record will have as observation period 11.4000.00.
When the user requires the display of the results of the PM measures, the daily and primary records relevant to the running PM measures are displayed in the WEB LCT page of the equipment.
For each type of measure, the equipment keeps stored the current records and also the last 16 primary
records (corresponding to the last 4 hours) and the last daily one (corresponding to the preceding day).
The preceding records are overwritten.
When the operator stops a measure, the system stores the uncompleted current record.
If the operator activates and deactivates the measure more times during the same observation period, the
system will store the record that contains the results of the last executed measure.
For instance if the measure has been activated at 9.02 and deactivated at 9.07, then it has been newly
activated at 9.09, the record relevant to the observation period 9.009.15 will contain the results of the
measures relevant to the period 9.099.15, while the ones relevant to the period 9.029.07 will not be
stored.
If equipment has some PM measures on progress and it is re-started up or turned off, when it will successively restarted or turned on the measures activated before the turning off will be automatically re-started.
The records (primary and daily), relevant to the period when measure has been stopped, will result empty
and when it has been reached the limit of 16 primary records and 1 daily one, they will overwrite the preceding records.
99
Report & Loggers Maint.

The Report & Loggers Maint. command saves to file the equipment configuration, the status/alarm signals and the operations executed by the users.
Operations
Save the configuration, the alarms and the operations executed by the users to file
Delete the alarms stored into the equipment controller
Delete the operations list stored into the equipment controller
GUI
Report & Loggers Maint. contextual area
Save the configuration, the alarms and the operations executed by the users to file
User Profile | Read Only, Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING In order to execute this operation, the display of menu bar in the browser must be active.
1. Select Main > Report & Loggers Maint.

2. Activate, in the Report Options area, the information you wish to save to file:
Inventory report. Whole equipment configuration: WEB LCT version, properties, list of units, status/version of the firmware, addresses, routing table, default gateway, remote equipment list,
User Inputs, User Outputs, operating parameters, etc.
Fault report. List of status/alarm signals currently active on the equipment (current alarms) and
signals stored in the equipment controller (alarm history).
Command Log. List of the operations, executed by the WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX users,
stored in the equipment controller.
It is possible to select one or more options. Depending on the activated options, a file will be created
containing the relevant data.
3. Press Generate Report.
In sequence, are displayed:
Report WEB page, where the information, which will be saved to file depending on the activated
options, are pointed out.
A window displaying the save mode of the file according to the browser currently in use.
4. Follow the instructions in the window to save the file.

The format, used to save the data to file, is the same displayed in the Report WEB page.
Delete the alarms stored into the equipment controller


2. Press Delete all alarm logger events and confirm.
A message indicates the end and the result of the operation.
100
Delete the operations list stored into the equipment controller


2. Press Delete all command logger items and confirm.
A message indicates the end and the result of the operation.
101
Report & Loggers Maint. contextual area

The contextual area allows to save to file the equipment configuration, the status/alarm signals and the
operations executed by the users.
Parameters
Inventory report. Whole equipment configuration: WEB LCT version, properties, list of units,
status/version of the firmware, addresses, routing table, default gateway, remote equipment
list, User Inputs, User Outputs, operating parameters, etc.
Fault report. List of status/alarm signals currently active on the equipment (current alarms)
and signals stored in the equipment controller (alarm history).
Command Log. List of the operations, executed by the WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX users,
It is possible to select one or more options. Depending on the activated options, a file will be created
containing the relevant data.
Push-button

Generate Report. Save the configuration, the alarms and the operations executed by the users
to file
Delete all alarm logger events. Delete the alarms stored into the equipment controller
Delete all command logger items. Delete the operations list stored into the equipment controller
102
Report WEB page

The WEB page Report, depending on the activated options, shows:
Web LCT Version. WEB LCT ALCplus2e version present into the equipment.
Equipment Configuration, BW & Mod./link ID, ACM Table, General Preset, etc. Equipment parameters. The whole equipment parameters are subdivided in groups. The format of the parameters
present in each group is self-explicative and changes according to the type of represented data.
Command Logger. Operations list. To each operation, it is devoted a record that shows the following
information:
Date/Time. Date and time when it has been executed the operation. The format of date/time
changes according to the setting made in the operating system.
Source address. IP address of the machine from which it has been executed the operation.
User. Name of the user who has executed the operation.
Object. Object to which the operation refers.
Instance. Name of the equipment instance to which the operation refers.

The instances relevant to the OAM-FM objects (see OAM) refer to numeric indicators having the
following meaning:
OAM CFM MA. The instance relevant to this object have 2 formats: one with two field and
one with three fields. The format with:
2 fields is equivalent to <Domain identifier>.<MA identifier> (for example 1.500).
3 fields is equivalent to <Bridge identifier>.<Domain identifier>.<MA identifier>

(for example 1.1.500).
OAM CFM MEP. The instance is equivalent to <Domain identifier>.<MA identifier>.<MEP

identifier> (for example 1.500.602).
In the equipment managed by WEB LCT/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX:
<MA identifier> corresponds to the VLAN identifier (VLAN ID).
<Bridge identifier> corresponds to 1.
Value Set. Set value.
The presence of the symbol shows that the information is not available because it is a not significant
one for the type of operation to which it refers.
Current Alarm. To each signal, it is devoted a record that indicates the following information:
Severity. Type of signal:
Status. Status signal
Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. Alarm detected coupled respectively with the Warning,
Minor, Major or Critical severity.
Date/Time. Detection or reset date and time of the signal. The format of date/time changes according to the setting made in the operating system.
Description. Alphanumeric string that specify the type of the signal.
Alarm Log. Alarms history. To each signal, it is devoted a record that indicates the following information:
Severity. Type of signal:
Disable. Alarm signal reset
Status. Status signal
Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. Alarm detected coupled respectively with the Warning,
Minor, Major or Critical severity.
Date/Time. Detection or reset date and time of the signal. The format of date/time changes according to the setting made in the operating system.
Description. Alphanumeric string that specify the type of the signal. If:
The wording CLEARED is absent, the record refers to a detected alarm.
The wording CLEARED is present, the record refers to a cleared alarm.
103
SNTP & Wake Up Config.

The SNTP & Wake Up Config. command manages the automatic acquisition of the reference date/time
of the equipment from a network element (SNTP functionality) and the Wake Up trap (Wake Up functionality).
Operations
Verify the SNTP functionality

Set the execution parameters and activate the SNTP functionality
Disable the SNTP functionality
Verify the Wake Up functionality status
Set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality
Disable the Wake Up functionality
GUI
SNTP & Wake Up Config. contextual area

See also
SNTP functionality (info)

Wake Up functionality (info)

1. Select Main > SNTP & Wake Up Config.

The SNTP tab displays the activation status of SNTP functionality and the current setting of the relevant
execution parameters.

WARNING The execution parameters (Main Server IP Address, Reserve Server IP Addr, etc.) can be modified even when the SNTP functionality is already active.

2. Set the IP address of the main element present in the network, from which the equipment automatically
gets the reference date/time, in the Main Server IP Address box.
Typing a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0) involves the activation of the automatic acquisition of the
reference date/time.
3. Set the IP address of the secondary element present in the network, from which the equipment automatically gets the reference date/time, in the Reserve Server IP Address box.
4. Set the time interval between a request of refresh of the reference date/time and the next one in the
Polling Interval (Sec.) box.
Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 1 and 16777215 seconds.
5. Set the time interval (t) the equipment must wait for, before re-attempting the transmission of a request to the main or secondary element in the Polling Timeout (Sec.) box.
Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 1 and 30 seconds.
104
6. Set the number of times that the equipment must re-attempt the transmission of a request to the main
or secondary element in the Polling Retries box.
Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 1 and 10.


2. Reset the value present in the Main Server IP Address box.
The value can be reset deleting the IP address present in the box or setting the value 0.0.0.0.
3. Reset the value present in the Reverse Server IP Address box.
The value can be reset deleting the IP address present in the box or setting the value 0.0.0.0.

WARNING Operation meaningful only for equipment which use protocol SNMPv1/v2c.

2. Select the Wake Up tab.
The tab displays the sending status of the Wake Up trap and the current setting of the relevant sending
parameters.

WARNING The execution parameters (NMS IP Address, Timeout, etc.) cannot be modified when the Wake
Up functionality is already active. To modify them, it is necessary Disable the Wake Up functionality and
them modify them.
Operation meaningful only for equipment which use protocol SNMPv1/v2c.

3. Set the IP address of the server, which the Wake Up trap must be sent to, in the NMS IP Address box.
4. Only if the equipment and the server are inserted into an OSI network, set the NSAP address (Gosip
Address box) opening the cascade menu and typing in the box:

5. Press OK.
6. Set the time interval, for which the Wake Up trap is sent at the end of which it is automatically disabled,
in the Timeout (Minutes) box.
105
Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 0 and 1440 minutes.
The setting of the value 0 indicates that the trap is sent until when the user manually disables it or the
NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it.
7. Set the physical location (for example, the name of the site) of the equipment in the NE Location box.
The setting of the parameter is optional.
8. Select the Enable option.

WARNING Operation meaningful only for equipment which use protocol SNMPv1/v2c.

3. Select the Disable option or reset the value present in the NMS IP Address box (value 0.0.0.0).
106

The contextual area displays the parameters to configure the automatic acquisition of the reference date/
time of the equipment from a network element (SNTP functionality) and the Wake Up trap (Wake Up functionality).
Tabs
SNTP tab. SNTP functionality configuration.

Wake Up tab. Wake Up functionality configuration.
Push-button

SNTP tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the SNTP functionality.
Parameter
Main Server IP Address / Reserve Server IP Addr. Activation status and IP address of the
main NE (Main) and of the secondary NE (Reserve) present in the network which the equipment
automatically gets the reference date/time from. The automatic acquisition of the reference
date/time of the equipment is:
Active, when a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0) is present in the Main Server IP
Address and/or Reverse Server IP Address box.
Inactive, when the value 0.0.0.0 (IP address reset) is present in the boxes Main Server IP Address and Reverse Server IP Address.
Polling Interval (Sec.). Time interval (expressed in seconds) between a request of reference
date/time update and the next one.
Polling Timeout (Sec.). Time interval (expressed in seconds) that the equipment must wait
before re attempting the transmission of a request to the main or secondary element.
Polling Retries. Number of times that the equipment must re attempt the transmission of a
request to the main or secondary element.
NTP Server Lost Alarm. The activation of the NTP Server Lost Alarm indicates that none of the
set network elements is reachable, as consequence the reference date/time of the equipment is
not aligned. The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:
See also

107
Wake Up tab
WARNING Tab meaningful only for equipment which use protocol SNMPv1/v2c.
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the Wake Up functionality.

Parameter
Status. Transmission status of Wake Up trap. The sending of the Wake Up trap is:
Active, when the Enable option is selected and a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0)
is set as IP address of the server (option NMS IP Address).
Inactive, when the Disable option is selected and the value 0.0.0.0 is set as IP address of the server (option NMS IP Address).
NMS IP Address. IP address of the server which the Wake Up trap must be sent to. With server
we mean the machine where the supervision system NMS5UX-B or NMS5LX or a different management system, able to manage the reception of the Wake Up trap, is installed.
Gosip Address. NSAP address (Gosip) of the server which the Wake Up trap must be sent to.
Parameter meaningful and available only if the equipment is inserted into an OSI network.
Timeout (Minutes). Time interval for which the Wake Up trap, when enabled, is sent to the
server. The setting of the value 0 indicates that the trap is sent until when the user manually
disables it or the NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it.
NE Location. Optional parameter. The user can insert the physical location (for example the
name of the site) of the equipment in this field. This information is communicated to the remote
manager together with the characteristics of the equipment. The supervision system NMS5UXB or NMS5LX does not use this information.
See also

108

The ALCplus2e equipment, via SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) protocol, can update its date/time
using an element within the network as reference (SNTP functionality).
Via WEB LCT (or SCT/LMT) application, it is possible to define a maximum of two elements, one main (set
in the Main Server IP Address box) and one secondary (set in the Reserve Server IP Addr box) from which
the equipment automatically gets the reference date/time each n seconds (set in the Polling Interval box).
Entering a valid value for the main and/or secondary element causes the activation of the functionality.
If the main element does not answer to the request of updating of the equipment reference date/time, this
request is sent for n times (set in the Polling Retries box) each t seconds (set in the Polling Timeout box).
At the end of this requests, if the main element does not answer, the equipment requires the updating of
the date/time to the secondary element.
If the secondary element does not answer to the request of updating of the equipment reference date/
time, this request is sent for n times each t seconds. At the end of this request, if the secondary element
does not answer the equipment, the system activates the NTP Server Lost Alarm and requires the update
of the date/time of the main element and so on.
If no network element set can be reached, the reference date/time of the equipment is not updated. This
condition is signalled by the activation of NTP Server Lost Alarm (SNTP tab).
To deactivate the automatic acquisition of the reference date/time, it is necessary to reset the IP address
of the main and secondary elements.
See also

109

WARNING What reported here below is valid when the equipment uses the SNMPv1/v2c protocol (see SNMP
protocol (info).
The Wake Up functionality allows the user enabling the spontaneous forward, from the equipment to a remote server, of a SNMP trap for the notification of the equipment commissioning (Wake Up trap).
This functionality has been implemented as help to the Auto Discovery modality available in the supervision
systems NMS5UX-B and NMS5LX.
The Auto Discovery mode has the purpose to point out new equipment in the network, not managed by
the supervision system yet. More information about the Auto Discovery modality is reported in the relevant
documentation.
This chapter shows only the management of the Wake Up trap by the equipment. The implementation of
the Wake Up functionality is the following.
Via WEB LCT (or SCT/LMT) application, it is possible:
Define the IP address and the NSAP address (meaningful only if equipment and server are inserted within an OSI network) of the server where the supervision system, which the trap must
be sent to (NMS IP Address option - Wake Up tab) is installed.
Define the time interval for which the trap must be sent, after which the sending of the trap is
automatically disabled (Timeout option).
If the value 0 is set for the Timeout option, the Wake Up trap will be sent until when the user
manually disables it or the NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it.
Activate and deactivate the sending of the trap.

To activate the Wake Up functionality, it is necessary to set a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0)
as IP address of the server (NMS IP Address option) and select the Enable option.
To deactivate the functionality, it is necessary to select the Disable option or reset the NMS IP
Address option (value 0.0.0.0).
When the Wake Up functionality is activated, the equipment starts sending the Wake Up trap every minute
for the time interval defined by the user (Timeout option). For example, if the value 60 has been set as
timeout, the trap is sent each 60 minutes. At the end of 60 minutes, the sending of the trap is automatically
disabled.
If, in the period when the sending of the trap is enabled, the supervision system intercepts the Wake Up
notification records the presence of the new equipment in its database and disables the sending of the
Wake Up trap by the equipment (trap switch-off).
See also

110
SD Memory Management
The SD Memory Management command manages the SD memory card (Secure Digital Memory Card)
for the backup/restore of the equipment software and configuration.
Operations
Verify the status and the configuration of the SD

Execute the automatic equipment restart from SD in case of replacement of IDU
Execute the automatic update of the equipment software from SD
MANAGEMENT
AND MAINTENANCE OF THE
SD
Delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from the SD

Disable the automatic equipment restart from SD
Disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the StandBy memory bench after an automatic sw update from SD
Force the restore of the configuration data and of the equipment sw from the SD to the controller
Copy the equipment sw from the SD to the controller (Sw Dwl SD)
GUI
SD Memory Management contextual area

See also
SD memory card (info)
Verify the status and the configuration of the SD

1. Select Main > SD Memory Management.

The SD Memory Management contextual area displays the status and the configuration of the SD present in the IDU unit.

WARNING In case of replacement of the IDU unit of equipment, it is possible to use the SD, where the
equipment configuration and software (Boot SD) have been previously saved, to restart the new controller
based on the data present in SD.
This operation is very important because it avoids the equipment re-configuration necessary after a change
of the IDU unit.
Here below the whole procedure is described, which must be applied so that the automatic equipment restart from SD is successful.
1. Save the equipment configuration and software to the SD:
a. Insert the SD in the equipment.
b. Open the WEB LCT page relevant to the equipment.
c. Select Main > SD Memory Management.
d. Press Create BOOT SD and confirm.
The operation takes several minutes during which, in the SD, the following operations are executed in this order:
111
Deletion of all the files present in the SD.
Creation of the file structure of type Boot SD.
Copy of all the files relevant to the version of a running equipment sw (status Running).
Copy of the backup files (configuration parameters).
If the operation has been successful, the parameter Status assumes the value Loaded, while the
parameter Type assumes the value Boot SD.
e. Press:
Enable automatic restore (all) and confirm, to enable the automatic equipment restart from SD: at the restart, both the configuration data and the equipment software
will be pasted from the SD to the new controller.
Enable automatic restore (Data only) and confirm, to enable the automatic equipment restart from SD: at the restart, only the configuration data will be pasted from the
SD to the new controller.
If the operation has been successful and, in the previous step, the selected command was:
Enable automatic restore (all), the parameters Automatic data restore from SD and Automatic SW download from SD assume the value Enabled.
Enable automatic restore (Data only), the parameter Automatic data restore from SD assumes the value Enabled.
At this point, if the SD is not removed from the equipment, the controller activates the automatic synchronisation of the data: this means that every configuration change is automatically saved even to the
SD.
If the equipment software is updated, this is not automatically saved into the SD. Moreover, the procedure for the automatic restart is aborted (the parameters Enable automatic restore (all) and/or Enable automatic restore (Data only) assume the value Disabled). In this case, it is suggested to execute
again this procedure in order to enable again the SD to the automatic restart.
2. As soon as the equipment becomes faulted and the IDU unit needs to be replaced, switch off the malfunctioning IDU, remove the SD card and insert it in the new IDU unit.
3. Install and switch the new IDU unit on.
Before copying the equipment and sw configuration into the new controller, the following checks are
executed:
The status of the equipment controller must be Replaced Controller.
The data structure of the SD must be of type Boot SD.
The value of EC serial number (present in the descriptor file of SD) must be different from that
In the descriptor file of the SD, the automatic restart from SD must be active (parameter Automatic SW download from SD and/or Automatic data restore from SD - value Enabled).
In case of automatic restart enabled only for the configuration data (selection of the Enable automatic restore (Data only) command - see step 1e), the configuration data stored in the SD
must be referred to equipment sw version older than or equal to that currently active in the controller.
If the above mentioned checks were successful:

a. The backup configuration files are copied from the SD to the controller.
b. The controller sw is updated overwriting the inactive memory bench (status Loaded). This operation is executed only if:
The Enable automatic restore (all) command has been selected at step 1e.
The running version of the equipment software (Running) is different from that present
in the SD.
c. The Serial Number of the controller present in the descriptor file of the SD is updated.
d. The Serial Number of the equipment controller is updated.
e. The controller with change of the memory bench in use (Bench Switch) is forced to restart if
even the sw update (selection of the Enable automatic restore (all) command - see step 1e) has
been required.
f. The controller restarts with the updated sw (if required) and applying the configuration data read
from the SD.
112
If at least one of the above mentioned checks was not successful, the automatic restart is not executed
and the controller stays in status Replaced Controller waiting for an intervention of the user.

WARNING If the equipment software must be updated on different equipment, the SD can be used to execute the operation automatically without the use of the management software (WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or
NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX).
Here below the whole procedure, which must be applied in order that the automatic update of the equipment sw from SD is successful, is described.
1. Save the equipment software master to the SD:
a. Insert the SD into the equipment where the new sw version is present.
b. Open the WEB LCT page relevant to the equipment
c. Select Main > SD Memory Management.
d. Press Create Sw DWL SD and confirm.
The operation takes several minutes during which, in the SD, the following operations are executed in this order:
Deletion of all the files present in the SD
Creation of the file structure of type Sw Dwl SD.
Copy of all the files relevant to the version of a running equipment sw (status Running).
If the operation was successful, the parameter Status assumes the value Loaded, while the parameter Type assumes the value Sw download SD.
e. Press Enable automatic restore and confirm, in order to enable the automatic update of the
equipment sw from SD on the equipment restart.
If the operation was successful, the parameter Automatic SW download from SD assumes the
value Enabled.
f. Press Enable Not running Sw delete and confirm, if you wish that, once the update and the
change of the memory bench of the controller are ended, the sw present in the bench StandBy
(bench where the old sw is present), is automatically deleted.
If the operation was successful, the parameter Not running Sw delete assumes the value Enabled.
2. Switch the equipment off, remove the SD card and insert it into another equipment whose software you
wish to update.
The removal of the SD card can be executed even with equipment on. In this case, the integrity of the
data present on the memory is not ensured, because when the equipment is on, the system performs
writing operations in background on SD card. The removal of the memory during one of these operations could damage the data present in the memory itself.
3. Switch the IDU unit on.
Before copying the equipment sw into the new controller, the following checks are executed:
The data structure of the SD must be of type Sw Dwl SD.
The automatic update from SD must be active in the descriptor file of the SD (parameter Enable
automatic restore).
The sw version stored in the SD must be different from both the versions present in the memory
benches of the controller.
If the above mentioned checks were successful:

a. The controller sw is updated overwriting the inactive memory bench (status Loaded).
b. The restart of the controller with change of the memory bench in use is forced (Bench Switch)
and, then, if set (see step 1.f), the sw present in the StandBy bench is deleted.
c. The controller restarts with the updated software.
If at least one of the above mentioned checks was not successful, the operation is not executed.
113

WARNING This operation deletes ALL the files of the structure Boot SD or Sw Dwl SD. The deletion of a
single file os not foreseen.

2. Press Delete SD files and confirm.
If the operation was successful, the parameter Status assumes the value Not formatted.


2. Press Disable automatic restore and confirm.
Once ended, if the operation was successful, the parameters Automatic data restore from SD and Automatic SW download from SD assume the value Disabled.
Disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the StandBy memory bench after
an automatic sw update from SD
WARNING Operation meaningful only for SD memories where data of type Sw Dwl SD are present.

2. Press Disable Not running Sw delete and confirm.
Once ended, if the operation was successful, the parameter Not running Sw delete assumes the value
Disabled.
Force the restore of the configuration data and of the equipment sw from the SD to
the controller
WARNING Operation meaningful only for SD memories where data of type Boot SD are present.

2. Press Force automatic restore and confirm.
WARNING Operation meaningful only for SD memories where data of type Sw Dwl SD are present.

2. Press Copy Sw from SD and confirm.
The equipment sw is copied from the SD to the controller, overwriting the inactive memory bench
(Loaded status).
114
SD Memory Management contextual area

The contextual area displays the status and the configuration of the SD present in the equipment.
Parameters
Status. SD status:
SD status
Presence of SD in
the equipment
Compatibility SD data
structure - equipment
Compatibility SD data equipment type
Loaded
Yes
Yes
Yes
Equipment Type
Mismatch
Yes
Yes
No
Not formatted
Yes
No
No
Not Present
No
Type. Type of data present in SD:
Boot SD. The SD contains the equipment configuration parameters and the equipment software.
Sw download SD. The SD contains only the equipment software.
Not loaded. Information not available (SD not present or memory data structure not
recognized/compatible with the equipment, etc.).
Automatic data restore from SD. Enabling of automatic update of the configuration data from
SD:
Enabled. The automatic update of the data from SD is enabled.
Disabled. The automatic update of the data from SD is not enabled.
Not loaded. Information not available (SD not present, etc.).
Parameter meaningful only for SD memories containing data of type Boot SD.
Automatic SW download from SD. Enabling of automatic update of the equipment software
from SD:
Enabled. The automatic update of the equipment software from SD is enabled.
Disabled. The automatic update of the equipment software from SD is not enabled.
Not running Sw delete. Enabling of the automatic deletion of the equipment software present in the StandBy memory bench (status Loaded - see Software Info & Maint.) after an automatic sw update from SD:
Enabled. The automatic deletion of the equipment software is enabled.
Disabled. The automatic deletion of the equipment software is not enabled.
Parameter meaningful only for SD memories containing data of type Sw Dwl SD.
EC serial number. Serial number of the controller which has generated the version of the data
and equipment software present in SD.
The empty field indicates that the parameter is not available (SD not present, etc.).
EC system version. File name and version of the equipment software currently used by the
controller which has generated the version of Boot SD present in the SD.
The empty field shows that the parameter is not available (SD not present, etc.).
SW system version. File name and version of the equipment sw present in the SD.
The empty field shows that the parameter is not available (SD not present, etc.).
In the left part of the contextual area, the commands for the management of SD are displayed. Tab.3 lists the commands. For every command, the use, depending on the data present
in the SD, and the mean times for the execution of the operation are pointed out.
The No actions available! wording shows that the SD is not present.
115
Push-button

See also

116
Storing the equipment data into SD

Use of the SD for the equipment management
Commands for the management/maintenance of SD
Warnings about the correct use of SD card
Storing the equipment data into SD

ALCplus2e equipment is provided with a reader, which allows storing the following equipment data on SD
(Secure Digital) memory cards:
Equipment configuration parameters and equipment software. Saving these data generates a
data structure named Boot SD into the SD.
Equipment software. Saving these data generates a data structure named Sw Dwl SD into the
SD.
WARNING Both the data structures cannot be saved at the same time in the same SD. The creation of the
structure Boot SD automatically deletes the data structure Sw Dwl SD and vice versa.
What just said is valid only for the information with data structure recognized by ALCplus2e equipment and
relevant management programs (WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX). Any other type of data
stored in SD (user file) is not deleted or damaged by the commands described in this chapter.
When the user saves the configuration parameters and/or the equipment software on SD, the following file
data structure is automatically created:
Root
Descriptor.txt. Descriptor file of text type, where the characteristics of the data present in the
SD are present: type of equipment the data refer to, type of data in SD (Boot SD or Sw Dwl SD),
etc.
This information is used by the management software to execute the compatibility checks between the data of the SD and the equipment where the SD is inserted.
Backup. Backup file of the equipment configuration parameters
Software. Files of equipment software (equipment Sw/Fw + WEB LCT)
If SD is of type Sw Dwl SD, the directory Backup will be empty.
ALCplus2e equipment supports the following cards:
SD memory card (Secure Digital).
SDHC memory card (Secure Digital High Capacity).
Use of the SD for the equipment management

The SD can be used to make the following operations easy and fast:

This operation allows saving the whole equipment configuration, sw/fw included, on the SD and
keeping it constantly updated.
In fact, after the creation of the data structure of type Boot SD in the SD, the controller, after
any configuration change, updates the data present in the in the SD, keeping them constantly
updated.
When the equipment is faulted, it is sufficient to extract the SD card from the faulted IDU unit
and insert it into the new IDU unit.
When the IDU unit is switched on and if some compatibility checks are passed, the data and the
sw present in the SD are copied into the controller returning the equipment configuration to the
condition before the fault.
117

This operation allows saving, on the SD, the new equipment sw/fw which will result to be the
master sw to use for the updating of other equipment.
At this point, it is sufficient to extract the SD card from the IDU and to insert into a different IDU.
When the IDU unit is switched on and if some compatibility checks are passed, the sw present
in the SD is copied into the controller.
As help for the management of SD, by means of the SD Memory Management contextual area, the following can be executed:
Commands for the management/maintenance of SD

The commands available to the user for the management/maintenance of the SD are listed in Tab.3.
The table shows, for every command, the use depending on the type of data structure present in the SD
and the mean execution times of the operations.
Tab.3 Commands for the management of SD
Command
Create BOOT SD
Create Sw DWL SD
SD without data structure
SD with data structure Boot SD
SD with data structure Sw Dwl SD
Time
(1)
It creates the structure and copies the files of the equipment configuration parameters and
equipment sw (Boot SD) from the controller to the SD
5 min.
It creates the structure and copies the files of the equipment sw (Sw Dwl SD)
from the controller to the SD
5 min.
It deletes all the files of the structure Boot SD or Sw Dwl SD
1/2 min.
Delete SD files
Copy Sw from SD
It copies the equipment sw from SD

to controller overwriting the inactive
memory bench (status Loaded).
5 min.
Enable automatic
restore (all)
It enables the automatic equipment

restart from SD: when the equipment
restarts, both the configuration data
and the equipment sw will be copied
from the SD.
1/2 sec.
Enable automatic
restore (Data only)

restarts, only the configuration data
will be copied from the SD to the new
controller
1/2 sec.
Enable automatic
restore

restarts, the equipment sw will be
copied from the SD to the controller.
1/2 sec.
Disable automatic
restore
It disables the automatic update of

the equipment sw from SD
1/2 sec.
118
It disables the automatic restart of

the equipment from SD
Command
SD with data structure Boot SD
SD with data structure Sw Dwl SD
Enable
Not running
Sw delete
It enables the automatic deletion of

the equipment sw present in the
StandBy memory bench (status
Loaded - see Software Info & Maint.)
after an automatic update of the sw
from SD
1/2 sec.
Disable
Not running
Sw delete
It disables the automatic deletion of

the equipment sw present in the
StandBy memory bench after an automatic update of the sw from SD
1/2 sec.
Force automatic
restore
It forces the restore, from SD to controller, of the configuration data and

of the equipment sw
5 min.
(1)
Time
(1)
SD without data structure
Mean execution time of the operation.
Warnings about the correct use of SD card
Deletion of data
The SD card supplied with the equipment is ready for use (formatting not needed).
Once used for the first time, the data stored in the SD card can be deleted using the commands
present in WEB LCT (see Commands for the management/maintenance of SD).
It is suggested never to format the card, because a wrong formatting (unknown format) will prevent the SD card to work correctly.
Removal of SD card
It is suggested to remove the SD card from the equipment only after it has been switched off.
Only in this way, we are sure not to damage the data stored in the card because, when the
equipment is on, writing operations are performed in background on SD card.
The removal of the memory during one of these activities could damage the data present in the
memory itself.
119
Software Info & Maint.

The Software Info & Maint. command manages the equipment firmware, the WEB LCT software present
in the equipment, the communication stack used by the equipment and the restore of the default equipment settings.
Operations
EQUIPMENT
FIRMWARE
Verify the firmware version of the equipment

Switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the controller
WEB LCT
Verify the WEB LCT version present into the equipment
COMMUNICATION
STACK/FACTORY
DEFAULT
Verify the communication stack in use

Restore Factory Default of the equipment
SOFTWARE
RESET

GUI
Software Info & Maint contextual area

See also
Equipment firmware (info)

Factory Default of the equipment (info)
Verify the firmware version of the equipment

1. Select Main > Software Info & Maint.

The Equipment Firmware tab shows version, status and composition of the equipment firmware.

WARNING The application automatically updates the firmware of the memory bench not on progress or not
present (Bench Status parameter - Loaded or Not Loaded value).
This operation cannot be executed when the firmware update is already in progress (Download Status parameter - Downloading value).
The firmware update procedure could change the equipment functions.
Depending on the protocol set for the file transfer (see Security Config.), check out that:
120
Protocol FTP. The program WEB LCT Console or the program SCT/LMT is active, otherwise start
them.
Protocol SFTP. A SSH server is installed on ones PC (see Installation and configuration of SSH
server).
Moreover, if the protocol SNMPv1/v2c is used, the default SFTP credentials are the same of the
SCT user, used to access the WEB LCT page. If the protocol SNMPv3 is used, the equipment is
not provided with default SFTP credentials. In this case, the credentials must be set (see Migrate
from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol).
2. Press Upgrade.
3. In the box Download file path, type the path and the name of the file you wish to use for update.
The file you wish to use for the operation must be on the local PC (PC where the browser used for the
display of WEB LCT is running).
4. Set the download type to be executed, selecting the option:
Forced, if you are updating the firmware of main controller of the equipment.
Only difference or not present / peripheral, if you are updating the firmware of peripheral units
(FPGA file and/or application code).
5. Activate the Bench Switch? box, if at the end of the download, the system has automatically to execute
a switching of the memory bench in such a way to use the bench with the firmware that has been updated.
6. Press Start and confirm.
Before executing the updating, the system executes a compatibility check between the file to be forwarded to the equipment and the one present on the terminal.
The check consists of comparing the technology type of the equipment.
If the parameters are incompatible, the application does not executes the firmware update: the wording
Interrupted is displayed in the Download Status box of the bench whose firmware you are updating.
If the parameters are compatible, the operation is started and the Download Status box of the bench
whose firmware you are updating dynamically updates the progress of the operation, which requires
some minutes:
Downloading. The operation is running.

The Abort push-button, present in the Download Status box during the firmware update, can
be used to stop the operation. Its selection requires the confirmation.
During the updating, the system deletes the firmware present into the bench memory and it updates the firmware of the equipment one component at a time.
If the operation is stopped, into the memory bench there will be only the already updated components. In this case, the new version can result unusable because it is not an integral one (the
bench will be in Not Loaded status).
In this case, the controller keeps the minimum functions necessary to allow a new updating of
the firmware.
Complete. The update operation is ended.

The Software Version box shows the new firmware version.
Switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the controller

WARNING Memory benches cannot be switched during the firmware update (Download Status parameter
- Downloading value) and when the firmware of the equipment is not present on a bench (Bench Status
parameter - Not Loaded value).
Usually, the switch of the memory benches of main controller does NOT interrupt the traffic. This operation
can temporarily interrupt the traffic if the new loaded version contains a new FPGA version.
2. Press Bench Switch and confirm.
The equipment is restarted; on the reconnection, the bench in Running status is forced to Loaded status
and vice versa.
121
Verify the WEB LCT version present into the equipment


2. Select the Web LCT tab.
The tab displays the characteristics of the WEB LCT application present in the equipment.


2. Select the Web LCT tab.
3. Press Browse.
4. Select the file you wish to use for the update.
The File name box displays the selected file.
5. Press Upload and the confirm.
Before starting the update, the compatibility between the WEB LCT which must be sent to the equipment and the one present in the terminal is checked.
The check consists in comparing the type of equipment.
If the parameters are not compatible, the application does not execute the update of WEB LCT (the
system displays the message Upload aborted. Probable cause wrong).
If the parameters are compatible, the operation is started. The update requires some minutes.
At the end of the operation, to avoid the misalignment between the displayed data and the new application, the WEB LCT page is closed and the page Login is displayed.
Verify the communication stack in use


2. Select the IP/OSI stack switch tab.
The tab displays the communication stack in use.


3. Select the option relevant to the new communication stack: IP or OSI.
4. Activate the Factory Default check-box if you wish that the change of communication stack restores the
default equipment settings.
122
The operation, if executed on equipment subjected to the radio supervision, could cause the loss of the
link because the restore of the factory settings involves the re-channelling of the radios to the default
values.
5. If the equipment uses the protocol:
SNMPv1/v2c. Press Apply. Into the Please insert system password box, type the access code of
System user and press OK.
SNMPv3. Press Apply and confirm.
At the end of the operation, the message The new settings will be active after a software restart is displayed.
6. Press OK to close the window.
If the Factory Default check-box has been activated at step 4, the default configuration will be automatically applied at the equipment restart (see Factory Default of the equipment (info).
Restore Factory Default of the equipment

WARNING The operation, if executed on equipment subjected to the radio supervision, could cause the loss
of the link because the restore of the factory settings involves the re-channelling of the radios to the default
values.
3. Activate the Factory Default check-box.
4. If the equipment uses the protocol:
SNMPv1/v2c. Press Apply. Into the Please insert system password box, type the access code of
System user and press OK.
SNMPv3. Press Apply and confirm.
At the end of the operation, the message The new settings will be active after a software restart is displayed.
5. Press OK to close the window.
The default configuration will be automatically applied at the equipment restart (see Factory Default of
the equipment (info).


123
Software Info & Maint contextual area

The contextual area displays the equipment firmware, the WEB LCT present in the equipment, the communication stack used by the equipment.
Tabs
Equipment Firmware tab. Version and status of the equipment firmware.

Web LCT tab. Version of the WEB LCT application present in the equipment.
IP/OSI stack switch tab. Communication stack in use.
Push-button

Equipment Firmware tab

The tab shows the version, the status and the composition of the equipment firmware.
Parameters
FIRST
TABLE.
Version and status of the equipment firmware.
Software Version. File name and version of the equipment firmware respectively present on
the memory bench 1 (Bench 1 column) and 2 (Bench 2 column).
Bench Status. Functioning status of the memory bench 1 (Bench 1 column) and 2 (Bench 2
column):
Running. It is on progress the firmware relevant to the subject memory bench.
Loaded. The firmware is present into the bench but actually it is not on progress
(StandBy).
Not Loaded. The firmware is not present into the memory bench.
Downloading Status. Status of the update operation of the firmware respectively present on
memory bench 1 (Bench 1 column) and 2 (Bench 2 column):
---. Firmware update is not in progress.
Downloading. It is on progress the updating of the firmware relevant to the memory

bench.
Interrupted. The update of the firmware has been interrupted.
Complete. The update operation is ended.
SECOND TABLE. List of the codes and of the FPGA files that compose the equipment firmware. Every row
corresponds to a firmware element (code or FPGA) for which is pointed out in the column:
Unit. Name of the unit or of the equipment part where there is the controller (code) or the programmable device (FPGA file).
Software. Firmware name. Usually the name shows the component type:
FW_Boot. Boot code. This part of code can not be updated in fact it is not provided
with a version of the memory benches.
FW_appl. Application code.
Conf or FPGA Configuration file of the programmable devices.
Actual Release. Version of the code or of the FPGA file present into the controller.
For some elements, the system shows the version and also the relevant identification code composed by the letter E or N followed by a number (each number identifies a different code type).
Release Bench 1. Firmware version present into the memory bench 1 of the controller.
Release Bench 2. Firmware version present into the memory bench 2 of the controller.
124
Push-button
Upgrade. Update the firmware of the equipment.

Bench Switch. Switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the controller.
See also
Web LCT tab
The tab displays the characteristics of the WEB LCT application present in the equipment.
Parameters
Description. Application type present into the equipment (WEB LCT).

Code. Identification code of the WEB LCT application present into the equipment.
Current version. WEB LCT version present into the equipment.
Push-button
Browse. Open the window of the O.S. for the selection of the file you wish to use for the update.
Upload. Update the WEB LCT application.
IP/OSI stack switch tab

WARNING Tab available only to System.
The tab displays the communication stack in use of the equipment.

Parameters
Current Stack. Communication stack in use:
IP. Communication stack Full IP.
OSI. Communication stack IP Over OSI.
Push-button
Apply. Modify the communication stack in use and/or Restore Factory Default of the equipment.
Restart. Execute the equipment software reset.
See also
125

The firmware of the equipment is the assembly of all the firmware necessary for the management of the
entire equipment (firmware of the main controller and firmware of the peripheral units).
The firmware of the equipment is present into the main controller that is provided with two memory benches (bench) the first one on service and the other one in waiting status.
Each bench can contain one firmware version (also different from the other one) of the equipment.
It is possible to update the sw/fw of the equipment, relevant to a memory bench, at a time. The application
automatically updates the firmware of the memory bench not on progress or not present (Bench Status
parameter - Loaded or Not Loaded value).
126

Through the WEB LCT application, the Factory Default settings of equipment can be restored.
This operation can be executed during the change of the equipment communication stack (see Modify the
communication stack in use) or as independent operation (see Restore Factory Default of the equipment).
In both cases, at the restart or at the new switch-on of the equipment, the Factory Default configuration
will be applied.
All the settings executed until then by the user will be deleted (for example, user list, remote equipment
list, cross connections, etc.).
In order to login to the equipment, the default user must be used. Username: SYSTEM - Password: siaemicr.
The communication ports of the equipment will be restored to the addresses pointed out in Tab.4.
These addresses differ depending on the type (High or Low) of ODU of branch 1. The equipment keeps
always in memory the type (High or Low) of the last connected ODU. If no ODU has never been connected
to the IDU, the addresses of ODU Low must be used. If an ODU of High type is connected to equipment
configured with ODU of Low type (and vice versa), the equipment automatically changes its own default
addresses.
Tab.4 Factory Default - ALCplus2e
IF
Parameter
Ethernet port
LCT PPP port
Line EOC port
Radio 1A port
Default Gateway
Agent IP Address
IP Over OSI port
Default Gateway
Agent IP Address
NETWORK
IP Address
NetMask
ODU
172.20.254.14
255.255.255.0
Low
172.20.255.15
255.255.255.0
High
172.20.1.2
255.255.255.248
Low
172.20.1.9
255.255.255.248
High
172.20.2.2
255.255.255.248
Low
172.20.2.9
255.255.255.248
High
172.20.3.2
255.255.255.248
Low
172.20.3.4
255.255.255.248
High
172.20.3.4
Low
172.20.3.2
High
THE EQUIPMENT IS INSERTED INTO AN
Parameter
LCT PPP port
IP
As IP Address of the LCT PPP port

IF
Ethernet port
THE EQUIPMENT IS INSERTED INTO AN
IP Address
OSI
NETWORK
NetMask
ODU
172.20.254.14
255.255.255.0
Low
172.20.255.15
255.255.255.0
High
172.20.1.2
255.255.255.248
Low
172.20.1.9
255.255.255.248
High
172.20.9.2
255.255.255.0
Low
172.20.9.4
255.255.255.0
High
172.20.9.4
Low
172.20.9.2
High
As IP Address of the LCT PPP port
127
Backup/Restore Config.
The Backup/Restore Config. command manages the backup/restore from file of the whole equipment
configuration.
Operations
Save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration)

Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (restore configuration)
Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last operation of configuration restore (revert configuration)
GUI
Backup/Restore Config. contextual area

See also
Backup/restore of the equipment configuration (info)

WARNING Depending on the protocol set for the file transfer (see Security Config.), check out that:
them.
server).
1. Select Main > Backup/Restore Config.

2. Type, in the Backup file name box, the path where you wish to save the file and the name of the file
with bak extension.
It is possible to set a name already existing for the file in the chosen path. In this case, the data present
in the file will be overwritten.
WARNING If the equipment uses the SFTP protocol you must set the path defined during the configu-
ration of the SSH server (see Installation and configuration of SSH server - SFTP tab).
3. Press Backup and confirm.
A window shows the progress of the operation.
To stop the operation, press Abort and confirm.
A message displays the result of the operation.

128
them.
server).
If equipment uses SNMPv3 protocol, the operation will allow retrieving the list of SNMPv3 users only if executed on the same IDU which has generated the backup file.
If the configuration restore is made on a different IDU, the list of SNMPv3 users is not retrieved and the
IDU will be restarted with SNMPv1/v2c protocol active.
2. Set, in the Restore file name box, the name of the file you wish to use to restore the configuration.
3. Press Restore and confirm.
Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the
last operation of configuration restore (revert configuration)
them.
server).

The Reverte parameter shows the date/time of the backup file automatically created by the program
before the last restore operation.
The format of date/time changes according to the setting made in ones operating system.
The wording --- shows that the file is not available.
2. Press Revert and confirm.
129

The contextual area contains the items to manage the backup/restore of the file of the whole equipment
configuration.
Parameters
Backup file name. Path and name of the file which you wish to save the whole equipment configuration to.
Restore file name. Path and name of the file which you wish to use for the restore of the previously saved configuration.
Reverte. Date/time of the backup file automatically created by the program before the last restore operation.
The format of date/time changes according to the setting made in ones operating system. The
wording --- shows that the file is not available.
Push-button

Backup. Save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration).
Restore. Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (restore configuration).
Reverte. Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the
last operation of configuration restore (revert configuration).
See also
130
Backup
The WEB LCT program allows save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration).
The saved file is in binary format and can be saved on PC or external support according to the
user needs.
Restore
In any moment, the user can restore the equipment configuration saved to file transferring the
data of the file to the same equipment (configuration restore).
Before restoring the configuration, the equipment saves its own current configuration and keeps
it available until the successive restore operation.
Revert
In any moment, the user can retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the
program before the last operation of configuration restore (revert configuration).
In this way, two backup versions will be always available for equipment: one executed by the
user and the other automatically executed by the program before the last restore operation.
See also

Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last operation of configuration restore (revert configuration)
131
Security Config.
WARNING Command available only if the Security package functionality is enabled (see Equipment Feature
tab).
The Security Config. command manages the equipment security protocols (SSH, SFTP, HTTPS and
SNMPv3).
Operations
Verify the security protocols of the equipment (SSH, SFTP, HTTPS, SNMPv3)
Activate the equipment management in Secure Mode
Activate the equipment management in Not Secure Mode
Activate the equipment management in mixed mode (Secure Mode/Not Secure Mode)
SSH
Configure the SSH protocol
HTTP/HTTPS
Migrate from HTTP protocol to HTTPS protocol
Migrate from HTTPS protocol to HTTP protocol
Update the certificates (HTTPS)
FTP/SFTP
Migrate from FTP protocol to SFTP protocol
Change the SFTP access credentials (SNMPv1/v2c)
Set the SFTP access credentials (SNMPv3)
Migrate from SFTP protocol to FTP protocol
Change the FTP access credentials
SNMP
Migrate from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol
Migrate from SNMPv3 protocol to SNMPv1/v2c protocol
GUI
Security Config. contextual area

See also
Security (info)
SSH protocol (info)
HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info)
FTP/SFTP protocol (info)
SNMP protocol (info)
Verify the security protocols of the equipment (SSH, SFTP, HTTPS, SNMPv3)
1. Select Main > Security Config.

The Security Config. contextual area displays the active security functions of the equipment.
132

WARNING In order to create a secure equipment network, it is necessary to execute this operation for all
the pieces of equipment in the network.

For the correct management of SSH protocol, it is necessary to install a SSH server on ones PC (see Installation and configuration of SSH server).
The migration HTTP > HTTPS and the migration SNMPv1/v2c > SNMPv3 can be executed only by the user
with SYSTEM profile.
2. Set the parameter Secure Protocols to value Exclusive in order to activate the management of SSH/
SFTP protocols.
3. Press Apply.
A message informs the operator that the operation involves the equipment restart and asks if apply the
change or not.
4. Press:
Yes and confirm if you wish not to apply the protocol change but to apply possible changes to
other configuration parameters.
No and confirm if you wish to apply the protocol change. The operation restarts the equipment.
5. Configure the SSH protocol

6. Migrate from HTTP protocol to HTTPS protocol
7. Migrate from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol
8. Migrate from FTP protocol to SFTP protocol
Activate the equipment management in Not Secure Mode

WARNING The migration HTTPS > HTTP and the migration SNMPv3 > SNMPv1/v2c can be executed only
by users with SYSTEM profile.

2. Set the parameter Secure Protocols to value Unavailable in order to activate the management of Telnet/
FTP protocols.
3. Press Apply.
change or not.
4. Press:
5. Migrate from HTTPS protocol to HTTP protocol

6. Migrate from SNMPv3 protocol to SNMPv1/v2c protocol
7. Migrate from SFTP protocol to FTP protocol
133
Activate the equipment management in mixed mode (Secure Mode/Not Secure

Mode)
WARNING It is suggested to use the mixed mode only during the migration of the network equipment from
Secure Mode to Not Secure Mode or vice versa.

2. Set the parameter Secure Protocols to value Available in order to activate the management of the security protocols (SSH/SFTP, etc.) and of the protocols which do not ensure security (Telnet, FTP).
3. Press Apply.
change or not.
4. Press:
5. Activate or deactivate the security protocols according to ones security need.

The activation of a security protocol ensures the security only for the functionality relevant to the protocol.

WARNING Operation meaningful only if the equipment is in Secure Mode (see Security (info).

2. To set the version of the SSH (Secure SHell) protocol managed by the equipment in Secure Mode, select
the box (parameter SSH Version):
v1. Version 1 of SSH protocol.

Option meaningful only if the equipment works as SSH server.
Option not available when the value None is selected for the Cipher Algorithm parameter.

Option meaningful only if the equipment works as SSH client.
The active box ( ) indicates that the specific version 2 of the SSH protocol is managed by the equipment; the inactive box indicates that the version is not managed.
3. To set the public key asymmetrical cypher algorithm managed by the equipment in Secure Mode, select
the box (parameter SSH Host Key):
DSA (only v2). DSA (Digital Signature Algorithm) key cypher algorithm.
Option meaningful only if the equipment manages the version 2 of SSH protocol.
RSA. RSA key cypher algorithm.
The active box (

aged.
) indicates that the specific key is manage; the inactive box that the key is not man-
It is not possible to deactivate both the keys.

4. To set the algorithm for the authentication of the messages managed by the equipment in Secure Mode,
select the box (parameter Authentication):
134
None. No authentication algorithm.
HMAC - SHA-1. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) based on hash code
(HMAC).
HMAC - SHA1 - 96. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 with 96 bit digest based on hash code
(HMAC).
HMAC - MD5. Authentication algorithm MD5 (Message Digest version 5) based on hash code.
The active box ( ) indicates that the specific algorithm is managed; the inactive box that the algorithm
is not managed.
If the None box is active, no algorithm is managed.
The activation of None box automatically deactivates all the other boxes. The activation of at least one
box HMAC... automatically deactivates the box None.
5. To set the symmetrical cypher algorithm managed by the equipment in Secure Mode, select the box
(parameter Cipher Algorithm):
None. No cypher algorithm.
3DES - CBC. 3DES (Triple Data Encryption Standard) block cypher algorithm based on the repetition of DES algorithm for three times.
AES 128, 192, 256 (only v2) - CBC. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) block cypher algorithm
with 128 bit key (AES 128), 192 bit key (AES 192) or 256 bit key (AES 259).
Option meaningful only if the equipment manages the version 2 of the SSH protocol.
The active box ( ) indicates that the specific algorithm is managed; the inactive box that the algorithm
is not managed.
If the None box is active, no algorithm is managed.
The activation of None box automatically deactivates all the other boxes. Moreover it deactivates the
option V1 (parameter SSH Version).
The activation of at least one 3DES.../AES...box automatically deactivates the box None.

WARNING Operation available only if the equipment is in Secure Mode (see Security (info).
First time you execute this operation, it is necessary to have the files relevant to the SSL certificate of the
equipment which you are connected to. To generate them, see HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info).
2. If the files relevant to SSL (Certificate Status parameter - Present value) certificate are already present
on the equipment, go directly to step 9.
If the files (Certificate Status parameter - Not present value) are not present on the equipment, execute
the next step.
3. In the Certificate Upload Manager area, select the C.A. Certificate option.
4. Press Browse, select the file containing the intermediate SSL certificate (CA Root Certificate) (extension .pem or .crt) and press Open.
5. Press Send Certificate File and confirm.
The message Operation failed due to connection problem, certificate corrupted or invalid indicates that
the operation has not been executed due to connection problems, corrupted certificate or certificate
format not supported.
6. In the Certificate Upload Manager area, select the SSL Certificate option.
7. Press Browse, select the file containing the private key + final SSL certificate (extension pem or crt)
and press Open.
9. Activate the HTTP Secure Server (HTTPS) box.
The current page is closed and the WEB LCT login page is opened in HTTPS mode.
The message Invalid certificate file, please upload new file indicates that the loaded certificates are not
reciprocally compatible, for example because SSL certificate has been loaded instead of CA or because
135
the Certificate Authority which has signed the SSL certificate is not the same present in CA certificate.
Repeat the operation loading certificates reciprocally compatible.
If a browser encounters a certificate whose Certificate Authority is not present in its own list, an error
page is displayed and the browser asks the user to accept or to refuse the connection.
If you decide to activate however the connection wit the equipment, the confidential transfer of the
data is not ensured.
For the detailed description of the error messages, see the browser documentation.

WARNING Operation available only if the equipment is in Not Secure Mode (see Security (info).

2. Deactive the HTTP Secure Server (HTTPS) box (WEB LCT Security area).
The current page is closed and the WEB LCT login page is opened in HTTP mode.
Update the certificates (HTTPS)

WARNING Operation available only if HTTPS protocol is active (see Security (info) and the files relevant to
the SSL (Certificate Status parameter - Present value) certificate are already present on the equipment.
For the generation of the new certificates, see HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info).
2. Depending on the file you wish to update, select the option:
C.A. Certificate. File containing the intermediate SSL certificate (CA Root Certificate).
SSL Certificate. File containing the private key + final SSL certificate.
3. Press Browse, select the wished file (.pem or .crt extension) and press Open.
The message Operation failed due to connection problem, certificate corrupted or invalid indicates that
the operation has not been executed due to connection problems, corrupted certificate or certificate
format not supported.
The parameter Certificate Status gets the value To Update.
5. Press Update to new Certificate and confirm.
The new certificate is now in use.
The parameter Certificate Status gets the value Present.

WARNING Operation available only if the equipment is in Secure Mode (see Security (info).

2. Select SFTP option (Mode parameter, File transfer area).
136

4. If the equipment use the:
SNMPv1/v2c protocol, you can Change the SFTP access credentials (SNMPv1/v2c).
SNMPv3 protocol, you can Set the SFTP access credentials (SNMPv3)
Change the SFTP access credentials (SNMPv1/v2c)

WARNING Operation available when the equipment uses the SNMPv1/v2c protocol.
Operation meaningful only if the management of the SFTP protocol is active and when the equipment works
as SSH client.
The default SFTP credentials are the same used by the SCT user to access to the WEB LCT page.
The change of the SFTP credentials is valid only for the current WEB LCT session. When the WEB LCT page
will be re-opened, the default credentials will be used.
2. Press Reset SFTP Credentials.
3. Into the User box, type the new user name: alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1
up to 8.
4. Into the Password box, type the new access code: alphanumeric string with a number of characters
from 1 up to 8.
Set the SFTP access credentials (SNMPv3)

WARNING Operation available when the equipment uses the SNMPv3 protocol.
Operation meaningful only if the management of the SFTP protocol is active and when the equipment works
as SSH client.
The setting of the credentials is valid only for the current WEB LCT session. When the WEB LCT page will
be opened again, the credentials shall be set again.
2. Press Set SFTP Credentials.
up to 16.
from 1 up to 16.

WARNING Operation available only if the equipment is in Not Secure Mode (see Security (info).

2. Select FTP option (Mode parameter, File transfer area).
137

4. If you want you can Change the FTP access credentials
Change the FTP access credentials

WARNING Operation meaningful only if the management of the FTP protocol is active and when the equip-
ment works as SSH client.

The default FTP credentials are: user Anonymous, no password.
The change of FTP credentials is valid only for the current WEB LCT session. When the WEB LCT page will
be re-opened, the default credentials will be used.
2. Press Reset FTP Credentials.
up to 8 (SNMPv1/v2c) or 16 (SNMPv3).
from 1 up to 8 (SNMPv1/v2c) or 16 (SNMPv3).
Migrate from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol

WARNING This operation deletes the current user list and automatically restarts the equipment.
Operation meaningful only if the equipment is in Secure Mode (see Security (info).
2. Press Current SNMP stack is SNMP-V1/V2 Click to switch in SNMP-V3.
3. Into the Please insert system password box, type the access code of System user and press OK.
4. Create the SNMPv3 user who will be used for the first connection to the equipment:
a. Set the user name (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum 30 characters) in the User
box.
b. In Auth. Password and Confirm Auth. Password boxes, type the authentication password associated to the user (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum 30 characters).
The fields are Case Sensitive; pay attention to uppercase and lowercase characters.
The user you are creating will have profile System, authentication algorithm MD5 (Message Digest version 5) and no algorithm and encryption password associated. These parameters are automatically defined by the system and cannot be changed.
It is recommended to memorize the user credentials, because they will be useful to execute
the first access to the equipment after the restart.
5. Press Create user, switch in SNMPv3 and restart and confirm.
After the restart, the SNMPv3 protocol will be active for the equipment.
It is strongly recommended to create immediately the list of SNMPv3 users for the equipment (see Add
a SNMPv3 user and Users list management (SNMPv3)).
If the equipment is managed even by NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX, create the user necessary to the supervision
system for the connection to the equipment. This user must have profile System and be the same for
all the pieces of equipment managed by the same NMS system.
138
Migrate from SNMPv3 protocol to SNMPv1/v2c protocol

WARNING This operation deletes the current list of SNMPv3 users and automatically restarts the equip-
ment.
Once the equipment is restarted, the pre-defined users SYSTEM and NMS5UX and the SNMPv1/v2c user
list defined before the migration to SNMPv3 will be valid (see Users list management (SNMPv1/v2c).
2. Press Current SNMP stack is SNMP-V3 Click to switch in SNMP-V1/V2 and confirm.
Once the equipment is restarted, the SNMPv1/v2c protocol will be active.
139
Security Config. contextual area

The contextual area displays the parameters relevant to the security functions available on the equipment.
Parameters
PROTOCOLS
AREA
Secure Protocols. Management of the security protocols of the equipment:
Available. The equipment manages the FTP and Telnet protocols (Not Secure Mode)
and the SFTP and SSH protocols (Secure Mode).
Unavailable. The equipment manages only the FTP and Telnet protocols (Not Secure
Mode).
Exclusive. The equipment manages only the SFTP and SSH protocols (Secure Mode).
SSH Version. Version of the SSH (Secure SHell) protocol managed by the equipment in Secure
Mode:

Option meaningful only if the equipment works as SSH server.

Option meaningful only if the equipment works as SSH client.
The active box ( ) indicates that the specific version of the SSH protocol is managed by the
equipment; the inactive box indicates that the version is not managed.
SSH Public Key. Public key algorithm used for the authentication (equipment in Secure Mode):
Group 1 SHA 1. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 (Secure Hash Algorithm).
Read only parameter.

SSH Host Key. Public key asymmetrical cypher algorithms managed by the equipment in Secure Mode:
DSA (only v2). DSA (Digital Signature Algorithm) key cypher algorithm.
Option available only if the equipment manages the version 2 of SSH protocol.
RSA. RSA key cypher algorithm.
The active box (

managed.
) indicates that the specific key is managed; the inactive box that the it is not
Authentication. Authentication algorithm of the messages managed by the equipment in Secure Mode:
None. No authentication algorithm.
HMAC - SHA-1. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) based on

hash code (HMAC).
HMAC - SHA1 - 96. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 with 96 bit digest based on hash
code (HMAC).
HMAC - MD5. Authentication algorithm MD5 (Message Digest version 5) based on

hash code.
If the None box is active ( ), no algorithm is managed. The activation of the other boxes indicates that the specific algorithm is managed; the inactive box that the it is not managed.
Cipher Algorithm. Symmetrical cypher algorithm managed by the equipment in Secure Mode:
None. No cypher algorithm.
3DES - CBC. 3DES (Triple Data Encryption Standard) block cypher algorithm based
on the repetition of DES algorithm for three times.
AES 128, 192, 256 (only v2) - CBC. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) block cypher algorithm with 128 bit key (AES 128), 192 bit key (AES 192) or 256 bit key (AES
259).
Option meaningful only if the equipment manages the version 2 of the SSH protocol.
If the None box is active ( ), no algorithm is managed. The activation of the other boxes indicates that the specific algorithm is managed; the inactive box that the it is not managed.
WEB LCT SECURITY
AREA
HTTP Secure Server (HTTPS). Management of HTTP or HTTPS protocol.
140
The active box ( ) indicates that the equipment manages the HTTPS protocol, the inactive box
indicates that the equipment manages the HTTP protocol.
Certificate Status. Status of the certificate:
Not present. The certificates are not present on the equipment.
Present. If the active protocol is:
HTTP, the value indicates that the CA and SSL certificates are already present
on the equipment and the you can activate the HTTPS protocol.
HTTPS, the value indicates that valid CA and SSL certificates are present and
in use on the equipment.
To Update. New certificates have been loaded on the equipment, but they are not in
use yet. To complete the update, press Update to new certificate.
Value meaningful only if the HTTPS protocol is active.
File name. Path and name of the certificate you wish to load.
The wording Select certificate file (.pem or .crt) indicates that no file is selected.
C.A Certificate. Option to select to load the file containing the intermediate SSL certificate (CA
Root Certificate) on the equipment.
SSL Certificate. Option to select to load the file containing the private key + final SSL certificate
on the equipment.
FILE
TRANSFER AREA
Mode. Network protocol for the file transfer used by the equipment:
FTP. Network protocol for the file transfer: File Transfer Protocol.
SFTP. Network protocol for the secure file transfer: SSH File Transfer Protocol.
Push-button

WEB LCT SECURITY
AREA
Update to new Certificate. Update the certificates (HTTPS)

Browse. Open the window of the O.S. for the selection of the certificate.
Send Certificate File. Transfer the selected certificate to the equipment.
FILE
TRANSFER AREA
Reset FTP Credentials. Change the FTP access credentials.

Reset SFTP Credentials. Change the SFTP access credentials (SNMPv1/v2c).
Push-button present when the equipment uses the SNMPv1/v2c protocol.
Set SFTP Credentials. Set the SFTP access credentials (SNMPv3).
Push-button present when the equipment uses the SNMPv3 protocol.
Current SNMP stack is SNMP-V1/V2 Click to switch in SNMP-V3. SNMPv1/v2c protocol
active. Press the push-button to Migrate from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol.
Current SNMP stack is SNMP-V3 Click to switch in SNMP-V1/V2. SNMPv3 protocol active.
Press the push-button to Migrate from SNMPv3 protocol to SNMPv1/v2c protocol.
See also

Activate the equipment management in mixed mode (Secure Mode/Not Secure Mode)
Security (info)
141
SSH protocol (info)

142
Security (info)
ALCplus2e equipment can operate in Secure Mode, in Not Secure Mode and in mixed mode (Secure Mode/
Not Secure Mode).
First time the equipment is switched-on or after the restore of the Factory Default, the equipment is configured in Not Secure Mode (used protocols: SNMPv1/v2c, FTP and HTTP).
WARNING To create a secure equipment network, it is necessary to configure ALL the pieces of equipment
in the network in Secure Mode.
Secure Mode
Equipment in Secure Mode ensures management sessions protected by the use of the protocol:
SSH for the secure and encrypted access (see SSH protocol (info).
SFTP for the management of the secure data transfer (see FTP/SFTP protocol (info).
SNMPv3 for the management of the authenticated and encrypted SNMP messages (see
SNMP protocol (info).
HTTPS for the protected access to WEB LCT page (see HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info).
To activate this mode, it is necessary to set the parameter Secure Protocols to value Exclusive
and activate the management of the security protocol (see Activate the equipment management
in Secure Mode).
Not Secure Mode
Equipment in this mode does not ensure protected management sessions because it uses protocols which do not ensure the security of the information transmitted on the network: Telnet
and FTP protocols.
To activate this mode, it is necessary to set the parameter Secure Protocols to value Unavailable
and deactivate the management of the security protocols (see Activate the equipment management in Secure Mode.
WARNING In Not Secure Mode, the security protocols SNMPv3 and HTTPS can be activates. Activating them ensures the security only for the functionality relevant to the protocol.
Secure Mode/Not Secure Mode
The equipment can operate in mixed mode, managing both the security protocols (SSH/SFTP,
etc.) and the protocols which do not ensure the security (Telnet, FTP).
To activate the mixed mode, it is necessary to set the parameter Secure Protocols to value Available (see Activate the equipment management in mixed mode (Secure Mode/Not Secure Mode))
and activate or deactivate the single security protocols according to ones need.
WARNING It is suggested to use the mixed mode only during the migration of the network equipment from Not Secure Mode to Secure Mode or vice versa.
143
SSH protocol (info)

SSH (Secure SHell) protocol allows implementing secure connections between two system, using a client/
server architecture.
SSH protocol is available in two versions: version 1 (SSH1) and version 2 (SSH2).
Documents defining the protocol can be found at http://www.ietf.org.
ALCplus2e
The equipment can operate with protocol SSH1 and/or SSH2.

Besides the choice of the protocol, you can define the authentication and encryption algorithms
managed by the equipment (see Configure the SSH protocol).
In order to ensure the file transfer is secure mode, SFTP protocol must be used together with
SSH protocol (see FTP/SFTP protocol (info).
For the correct management of SSH protocol, it is necessary to install a SSH server on ones PC
(see Installation and configuration of SSH server).
Installation and configuration of SSH server
1. Install the free SSH server freeSSHd.

a. Execute the guided installation of freeSSHd.exe.
b. When asked Do you want to run FreeSSHd as a system service? press No.
2. Verify that, during the program installation, a service has not been installed in Windows.
a. Open the Windows Task Manager window.
b. Select the Services tab.
c. Press Services.
d. Verify that the list does not contain the option FreeSSHDServices.
e. If present, select it, open the Properties window and set the parameter Startup type -> Manual.
3. Configure the SSH server.
a. Open the freeSSHd settings window.
b. Select the SSH tab.
c. Activate the Start SSH server on free SSHd startup box and press Apply.
d. Select the Telnet tab.
e. Deactivate the Start Telnet server on free SSHd startup box and press Apply.
f. Select the Authentication tab and verify the setting of the following parameters:
Password authentication -> Allowed.
Public key authentication -> Allowed.
If the parameters are set in different way, set them as displayed and press Apply.
g. Select the Encryption box and verify the setting of the parameter:
Allowed ciphers -> Any.
If the parameter is set in different way, set it as displayed and press Apply.
h. Select the Tunneling tab and verify the setting of the following parameters:
Allow local port forwarding -> inactive box.
Allow remote port forwarding -> inactive box.
i.
144
Select the SFTP tab, in the SFTP home path set the path of the home directory for the file transfer (equipment in Secure Mode) and press Apply.
The file path must be in C:\. It is suggested NOT to save the files in C:\, but to create a subfolder
in C and set it to save the files (for instance, C:\ftps or C:\backup).
This, when the equipment is in Secure Mode (Secure Protocols -> Exclusive), allows saving the
backup files without being Administrator user (in some version of Windows, in order to save the
files in C:\, it is necessary to be Administrator user).
j.
Select the Automatic updates tab and verify the setting of the following parameters:
Check for new version on startup -> inactive box.
Update without asking me for confirmation -> inactive box.
Show info messages from freeSSHd.com -> inactive box.
k. Select the Logging tab, in the Log file box set the path/filename to save the log file and press
Apply.
l.
Select the Host restrictions tab and verify the setting of the parameter:
Refuse these IP addresses -> active box.
If the parameter is set in different way, set it as displayed and press Apply.
m. Select the Users tab, press Add and create the SFTP users setting the following characteristics
and press OK.
Login -> User name
Authorization -> Password stored as SHA1 hash.
Password/Password (again) -> Access code.
User can use -> Shell, SFTP.
WARNING If the equipment uses the protocol:
SNMPv1/v2c, it is suggested to create the pre-defined user SYSTEM (Login -> SYSTEM,
Default password -> SIAEMICR) and/or the users presents in the user list of the equipment because the equipment uses, as default SFTP credentials, the same of the SCT user
used to access the WEB LCT page.
SNMPv3, create the wished users because the equipment has not the default SFTP credentials. For the credentials (username and password), set an alphanumeric string of
minimum 1 and maximum 16 characters.
4. Restart the SSH server and verify its status.

a. Open the freeSSHd settings window.
b. Select the Server status tab and verify that:
The Telnet server is not running (Telnet server is not running).
the SSH server is running (SSH server is running).
WARNING After the configuration of SSH server, if the one or more parameters must be changed, to make
the change operative, restart the server selecting the Unload command present in the contextual menu of
the FreeSSHD Service application.
145

HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol) is used to transfer hypertext pages within WEB.
All HTTP traffic takes place via the TCP/IP protocol on port 80 of PC.
HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over SSL) is a variation of HTTP and uses, besides TCP/IP protocol,
SSL layer (Secure Sockets Layer) which implements the encryption and the authentication of the transmitted data. All HTTPS traffic takes place on port 443 of PC.
In web browsers, URI which refers to this technology is named https.
For more information about RFC 2818 specification (HTTP Over TLS).
ALCplus2e
Equipment can operate with HTTP protocol or HTTPS protocol.

Protocols are implemented in exclusive mode in such a way that, when a user connects via HTTPS, HTTP requests will be re-addressed to HTTPS and vice versa.
WARNING First time equipment is switched-on or after the restore of the Factory Default, equipment uses HTTP protocol.
In order to preserve the security, HTTPS protocol must be used.

You can migrate from HTTP to HTTPS protocol and vice versa in any moment (see Migrate from
HTTP protocol to HTTPS protocol/Migrate from HTTPS protocol to HTTP protocol).
The opening of the WEB LCT page via HTTPS protocol is supported with Internet Explorer 9 or
later.
SSL certificate - ALCplus2e
The migration from HTTP protocol to HTTPS protocol is possible only if you have a digital certificate SSL for WEB Server.
Main aim of this certificate is to authenticate the server (for example, ALCplus2e equipment) at
the customers (e.g., user PC where the WEB LCT page relevant to equipment is opened).
SSL foresees that, on connection, the server provides its certificate; if the certificate is signed
by a recognised certification Authority (Trusted certificates), then a secure communication can
be started.
From the physical point of view, the certificate is a file containing the information relevant to the
issuing authority, to the subject of certificate and additional information indicating the use which
the certificate has been released for.
WARNING ALCplus2e equipment is not provided with SSL certificates when it is put in field.
Moreover, the restore of Factory Default deletes possible certificates already loaded on equipment.
How to get a SSL Trusted certificate
You can get a SSL certificate requiring it to a recognised certification authority (Certification Authority - CA), that is a public authority enable to the univocal emission of certificates.
The Certification Authority ensures the identity of the owner of the certificate signing the public
and private keys by its own private key.
The procedure to request the certificate can change from CA to CA depending on the required
information and on the procedure for the generation and the communication of the pair of key
(see documentation of specific CA).
Generally, all CAs will require to provide a CSR (Certificate Signing Request), that is a request
containing the data which shall be certificated.
The generation of CSR includes also the generation of a Private Key, which will not be included
in CSR itself will be used only to sign the request of certificate. This key shall be kept with great
care and secrecy because, as explained hereinafter, it will be necessary during the server configuration.
The information to include in CSR changes depending on the context for which you request the
certification. CA will define which information is useful.
In any case the name/address of server (Common Name), which you require the certificate for,
will be required.
For the generation of SSL certificates relevant to ALCplus2e equipment, the Common Name of
the certificate must correspond to the IP address of the equipment for which you wish to use
146
the certificate (for more information, see Certificate license - ALCplus2e hereinafter in the chapter).
With IP address we mean the address of the supervision port which you wish to use to reach the
equipment, that is the address entered in the URL of browser to open the WEB LCT page.
WARNING SSL certificates can be provided in different formats. ALCplus2e equipment accepts
certificates in PEM format (file with extension .pem or .crt).
As result of the certification request, CA will provide the files relevant to:
Final SSL certificate.
Intermediate SSL certificate (CA Root Certificate). This certificate defines the Certification Authority responsible for the issue of the SSL certificate.
Now, it is necessary to add the private key (generated at the same time of CSR) and the relevant
SSL certificate into a single file.
When composing the file, you shall paste the private key at the top, immediately followed by
the relevant final SSL certificate. Both for the private key and the certificate, the block between
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- and -----END CERTIFICATE----- (ends included) must be inserted.
An example is reported here below:
-----BEGIN RSA PRIVATE KEY----Content of private key
-----END RSA PRIVATE KEY---------BEGIN CERTIFICATE----Content of final SSL certificate
-----END CERTIFICATE----It is suggested to verify that even the file of the intermediate SSL certificate (CA Root Certificate) has the following format:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----Content of CA certificate
-----END CERTIFICATE----These actions will create the following files to load on the server, that is in ALCplus2e equipment:
File containing the private key + final SSL certificate.

In WEB LCT, this file must be loaded on the equipment selecting the option SSL certificate
(see Migrate from HTTP protocol to HTTPS protocol/Update the certificates (HTTPS).
File containing the intermediate SSL certificate (CA Root Certificate).

In WEB LCT, this file must be loaded on the equipment selecting the option C.A. Certificate.
SSL UnTrusted certificates - ALCplus2e
It is possible to create, and load on the equipment, certificates self-generated by the user (e.g.
via OpenSSL).
The self-signed certificates (UnTrusted certificates) are not generally considered trustworthy by
browsers. They are useful for verification purpose, but the standard use of them does not ensure
the security of server-client connection.
To ensure the security within an equipment network, it is necessary to use certificates signed
by a certification authority (Trusted certificates).
Certificate license - ALCplus2e
The certificate license is valid for only one piece of equipment, because SSL certificates are specific with respect to the Common Name for which they are required and released.
During the authentication of a server (equipment) at a client (user PC), one of the first executed
check consists in comparing the value of the field Common Name present in the certificate with
the URL of the web page you are opening.
The equipment WEB LCT page is opened at URL //<equipment IP address>. This involves that
the Common Name of the certificate must correspond to the equipment IP address.
So, if you wish to migrate a whole network of ALCplus2e equipment from HTTP protocol to HTTPS protocol, it is necessary to have a SSL certificate for every equipment where the relevant
Common Name corresponds to the equipment IP address.
147
Certificate expiry - ALCplus2e
Generally, SSL certificates have a quite long expiry.

When the certificates on the equipment expiry, they must be replaced with new valid certificates
by means of the procedure Update the certificates (HTTPS).
148

FTP (File Transfer Protocol) and SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol) are two protocols for the file transfer
based on TCP.
Main difference between FTP and SFTP is the management of security.
The FTP protocol does not foresee the data encryption, while the SFTP protocol is based on SSH protocol
for the data encryption and the secure file transfer.
ALCplus2e
The equipment can be used for the file transfer (download/upload) the FTP protocol or the SFTP
protocol.
When the equipment is switched-on for the first time after the restore of the Factory Default
setting or after the recovery of the whole equipment configuration from file (see Backup/Restore
Config.), the equipment uses the FTP protocol.
The protocol can be changed from FTP to SFTP and vice versa in any moment (see Migrate from
FTP protocol to SFTP protocol and Migrate from SFTP protocol to FTP protocol).
FTP protocol- ALCplus2e
WARNING The FTP protocol is available when the equipment is in Not Secure Mode (see Security
(info).
The default FTP credentials of the equipment are: user Anonymous, no password.
The FTP credentials can be changed at ones wish (see Change the FTP access credentials).
The change of FTP credentials is valid only for the current WEB LCT session. When the WEB LCT
page will be re-opened, the default credentials will be used.
The program SCT/LMT or WEB Lct Console must be used as help for the WEB LCT application,
in order to manage the FTP protocol.
The instructions for the installation and use of the SCT/LMT and Web Lct Console are reported
in the relevant manuals.
SFTP protocol - ALCplus2e
WARNING The SFTP protocol is available when the equipment is in Secure Mode (see Security
(info).
If the equipment uses the protocol:
SNMPv1/v2c, the default SFTP credentials are the same used by the SCT user to access
to the WEB LCT page.
The SFTP credentials can be changed at ones wish (see Change the SFTP access credentials (SNMPv1/v2c).
The change of credentials is valid only for the current WEB LCT session. When the WEB
LCT page will be re-opened, the default credentials will be used.
SNMPv3, the equipment has not default SFTP credentials.
In this case, it is necessary to set the credentials (see Set the SFTP access credentials
(SNMPv3).
The setting of the credentials is valid only for the current WEB LCT session. When the
WEB LCT page will be open newly, the credentials shall be set again.
In both cases, for a correct management of the data transfer, the SFTP credentials shall correspond to the user (or to one of the users) defined during the installation of the SSH server.
As help for the management of SFTP protocol through the WEB LCT application, the SSH server
must be installed and configured (see Installation and configuration of SSH server).
The modalities for the installation and the use of SCT/LMT and Web Lct Console are reported in
the relevant manuals.
149

The SNMP protocol is available in 3 versions: SNMPv1, SNMPv2c and SNMPv3.
The main differences between SNMPv1/v2c and SNMPv3 are the management of message security and the
control of the accesses.
SNMPv1/v2c
The versions 1 and 2 of SNMP have the security model based on the community: messages are
passed not-encrypted and can be copied or modified.
SNMPv3
The version 3 of SNMP, instead, foresees a security model based on the user for the protection
of the messages and the control of the access.
In SMNMPv3, every user has his own authentication password and encryption password for the
packets.
In order to authenticate the packets, SNMPv3 utilizes the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA1 algorithm.
The secret key used to calculate the HMAC code is the user password; in order to be authenticated, the packet must contain even the user name besides the HMAC code.
Moreover, the SNMPv3 protocol foresees the possibility to cipher the part of the packet containing the OID of the MIB objects and the relevant values using the cipher algorithm DES56; the
key used for the cipher procedure is different from the key used for HMAC authentication.
This allows defining if allowing the user an access:
Without authentication (noAuthNoPriv).
With authentication (AuthNoPriv).
With authentication and encryption (AuthPriv).
For more information, refer to RFC 3410, 3411, 3412, 3413, 3414, 3415, 3584 specifications.
ALCplus2e
The equipment can work with SNMPv1/v2c protocol or with SNMPv3 protocol.
When the equipment uses the SNMPv1/v2c protocol, only SNMPv1/v2c packets are accepted and
processed.
When the equipment uses the SNMPv3 protocol, only SNMPv3 packets are accepted and processed. Possible received SNMPv1/v2c packets are discarded.
In order to ensure the security, it is necessary to use SNMPv3 protocol.
When the equipment uses SNMPv3, the opening of the page WEB LCT is supported with Internet
Explorer 9 or later.
WARNING First time equipment is switched-on or after the restore of the Factory Default, equipment uses SNMPv1/v2c protocol.
It is possible to pass from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol and vice versa in any moment (see Migrate from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol/Migrate from SNMPv3 protocol to SNMPv1/v2c protocol).
The operation can be executed only by a user with profile System and involves the automatic
restart of the equipment.
The migration:
SNMPv1/v2c -> SNMPv3, deletes the SNMPv1/v2c user list and requires the creation
of the first SNMPv3 user (with security level AuthNoPriv - see Tab.5).
SNMPv3 -> SNMPv1/2, deletes the SNMPv3 user list. When the equipment is restarted, the pre-defined users SYSTEM and NMS5UX and the SNMPv1/v2c user list defined
before the migration to SNMPv3 will be valid (see User list (info).
Tab.5 displays, for every SNMP version, the security levels supported by the equipment and the
description of the provided security mechanisms.
150
Tab.5 Security mechanisms in SNMPv1/v2c and SNMPv3

Security
model
Security level
Authentication
Encryption
Description
Notes
SNMPv1/v2c
noAuthNoPriv
Community
String
No
WEB LCT allows creating up to 12

Community-based authentication: the passwords are transmit- users with this security level.
ted not encrypted and displayed
in the traces
SNMPv3
noAuthNoPriv
Username
No
Authentication based on user

name
With WEB LCT, the creation of users with this security level is not
foreseen
AuthNoPriv
MD5 or SHA
No
Authentication based on algorithms HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA
With WEB LCT it is possible to create an unlimited number of users

with this security level.
These users can connect to the
equipment via WEB LCT*, SCT/
LMT and/or NMS.
AuthPriv
MD5 or SHA
DES 56
Authentication based on algorithms HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA

and encryption with algorithm
CBC-DES (DES-56) in addition to
authentication
With WEB LCT it is possible to create an unlimited number of users

with this security level.
These users can connect to the
equipment via WEB LCT, SCT/LMT
and/or NMS.
* The connection to equipment via WEB LCT is allowed only to user AuthNoPriv with authentication MD5.
151
Alarm Severity Config.

The Alarm Severity Config. command manages the alarm transmission and their severity level.
Operations
Verify the severity level and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms
Enable/disable an alarm
Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm
Change the severity level of an alarm
GUI
Alarm Severity Config. contextual area

See also
Alarms (info)
Verify the severity level and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms
1. Select Main > Alarm Severity Config.

The Alarm Severity Config. contextual area displays the alarms configuration.
Enable/disable an alarm

2. Select the alarm and press Edit Alarm Config or double click on the alarm.
3. Set the Severity parameter, selecting:
Disable, to disable the alarm.
Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical to enable the alarm. Select the option relevant to the
severity level to be assigned to the alarm
4. Press Ok.
The settings are reported in the Alarm Severity Config. contextual area. The symbol [*] is displayed
next to the name of the changed alarm.
Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm

WARNING It is possible to change the forwarding status of the trap only if it has been enabled the alarm
(see Enable/disable an alarm).

152
3. Set the Trap parameter, selecting:
Enable, to enable the forwarding of the alarm trap to the management system.
Disable, to disable the forwarding of the alarm trap to a possible management system external
to the equipment (for example SCT/LMT and/or NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX).
4. Press Ok.
Change the severity level of an alarm


3. Set the Severity parameter, selecting the severity you wish to associate to the alarm: Status, Warning,
Minor, Major or Critical.
If the alarm was disabled (Disable option selected), the selection of a different option, besides modifying the alarm severity level, automatically enables it.
4. Press Ok.
153
Alarm Severity Config. contextual area

The contextual area displays the alarms configuration.
Alarms are subdivided into groups.
When contextual area is opened, only the groups are displayed (Group/Alarm column).
To expand and compress the list of alarms associated to a group, select the symbol
next to the name
of the group. Every selection of the symbol makes the list assumes the status complementary to the previous one (if compress it is expanded and vice versa).
When a group is expanded, for every alarm is displayed the characteristics.
The groups and the alarms change according to the equipment configuration.
Parameters
Group/Alarm. Alarm name.

A coloured box is before the name, pointing out the alarm status and severity:
White box with red X. Alarm disabled.
Green box. Alarm enabled with severity equivalent to a status signal.
Light blue box. Alarm enabled with Warning severity.
Yellow box. Alarm enabled with Minor severity.
Orange box. Alarm enabled with Major severity.
Red box. Alarm enabled with Critical severity.
The presence of an asterisk [*] between the box and the alarm name shows that at least one
characteristic of the alarm has been changed.
Severity. Enabling status of the alarm and, if it is enabled, the relevant seriousness level:
Disabled. Alarm disabled.
Status. Alarm enabled with severity equivalent to a status signal.
Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. Alarm enabled with severity respectively Warning,
Minor, Major or Critical.
Not available in this SW version. Alarm not supported by the current firmware version
present into the equipment controller.
Trap Notification. Forwarding status of the trap:
Enabled. The transmission of the alarm trap to the management system is enabled.
Disabled. The transmission of the alarm trap to a possible external management system is disabled (for example SCT/LMT and/or NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX).
---. Information not meaningful because the alarm is disabled.
Push-button

Edit Alarm Config. Enable/disable an alarm, Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an
alarm or Change the severity level of an alarm
See also
Alarms (info)
154
Alarms (info)
The term alarm defines the fault signal generated by an error or malfunction of the equipment or of any
component that composes it.
The signals referring to any event that does not indicates a malfunction but a status change, an operation
in progress or an operating indication are defined status signals.
Instead the term event defines each signal of status, detected alarm and cleared alarm.
A maximum of 400 events are recorded in the equipment controller. When this limit is exceeded, each new
event will overwrite the oldest event.
Enabling/disabling alarms
The equipment alarms can be disabled and re-enabled by the user according to the needs.
Disabling an alarm means that, on the detection of the alarm itself, this is not registered in the
equipment controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program: as the alarm had never occurred.
On the contrary, enabling an alarm (default condition) means that, when the alarm is detected,
this is registered in the equipment controller and, if the forwarding of the relevant trap is enabled (see next item), the alarm is communicated to the management system and displayed in
the current alarms and the history alarms.
WARNING The enabling/disabling of the alarm is independent for each alarm and local to the
equipment which the operation is executed for. This means that the setting must be executed
for each alarm of each equipment.
Enabling/disabling traps
The trap is a message (in this case of detection or clearing of an alarm) spontaneously sent by
the equipment to a possible external management system, for example SCT/LMT and/or
NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX.
The forwarding of the trap of each alarm can be disabled and re-enabled by the user according
to his own needs.
Disabling a trap means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is not registered in the equipment controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program.
On the contrary, enabling a trap (default condition) means that, on the detection of the alarm,
this is registered in the equipment controller and communicated to the management system,
which displays it in the current alarms and the history alarms.
WARNING The enabling/disabling of the forwarding of the trap is independent for each alarm
and local to the equipment which the operation is executed for. This means that the setting must
be executed for each alarm of each equipment.
Alarm severity
Each alarm acknowledged and managed by the management program has an associated severity level which determinates the importance of the alarm.
This severity is not fixed, but can be changed by the user as he likes.
155
User Manager
WARNING Command available only if the SNMPv1/v2c protocol is active.
The User Manager command manages the SNMPv1/v2c users list of the equipment.
Operations
Verify the user list

Add a user to the list
Modify a user into the list
Delete a user from the list
Change the password and the timeout of the System user
Change the network password and timeout
Change the password and the timeout of the NMS5UX user
Verify/modify the IP address of Permanent Login
GUI
User Manager contextual area

See also
User list (info)
Verify the user list

1. Select Main > User Manager.

The User Manager contextual area displays the user list currently stored in the equipment.
Add a user to the list

WARNING Into each list, it is possible to define up to a maximum of 4 users for each profile (up to a maximum of 12 users).

2. Select Add.
3. Into the User box, type the user name (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to
8).
It is not possible to assign the same name to two different users present into the same list. Then, when
the user name has been assigned, it can not be changed later.
4. Into the Password and Confirm Password box, type the access code of the (alphanumeric string with a
number of characters from 1 up to 8).
5. Into the User Profile box, set the profile to be assigned to the user:
156
Read Only. The user with this profile can check the parameters but it can not forward commands
or execute changing to the equipment configuration.
Read & Write. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only maintenance
operations (MAN OP).
Station Op. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or execute
changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying the user
list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the logout of a user and all those operations
available only to the System user (or NMS5UX).
It is not possible to create a user with System profile.

6. Set the timeout of the WEB LCT session opened by the user. If you wish:
The session of WEB LCT opened by the user (even if disconnected) is kept for an undefined period (session timeout disabled), deactivate the box Login Timeout.
The session of WEB LCT opened by the user, if disconnected, is automatically terminated once
reached a specific time limit (session timeout disabled), activate the box Login Timeout and type
a value between 1 and 43200 sec. (12h) in the box User Keep Alive (Sec.).
With disconnected session we mean a WEB LCT session whose relevant WEB LCT has been

The new user is inserted in the list and communicated to the equipment.
Modify a user into the list


2. Select the user and press Modify or double click on the user.
3. Execute the changing.
The setting modes of the parameters are the same ones above pointed out into the par. Add a user to
the list.
Each time even a single parameter is changed, the access code (parameter Password, Confirm password) must be inserted.
The user name (parameter User) cannot be modified.
Delete a user from the list


2. Select the user.
Change the password and the timeout of the System user

WARNING If you wish to change only the timeout, it is necessary to input the current password of the System user in the Password and Confirm Password fields.

2. Press System.
3. To change the password, into the Password and Confirm Password box, type the new access code of
System user (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to 8).
4. To change the timeout of the WEB LCT session opened by System user:
157
Disable the Login Timeout box. The WEB LCT session opened by the System user (even if disconnected) will be kept for an indefinite period of time (session timeout disabled).
Enable the Login Timeout box. The WEB LCT session opened by the System user, if disconnected, will be automatically ended once reached the set time limit (Session timeout enabled).
To set time limit type, in the User Keep Alive (Sec.) box, a value between 1 and 43200 sec.
(12h).
With disconnected session we mean a WEB LCT session whose relevant WEB LCT has been closed but
for which the disconnection from the equipment has not been executed (user logout).
Change the network password and timeout

WARNING If you wish to change only the timeout, it is necessary to input the current network password in
the Password and Confirm Password fields.

2. Press Network.
3. To change the password, into the Password and Confirm Password box, type the new network password
(alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to 8).
4. To change the timeout of the WEB LCT session of the remote equipment:
Disable the Login Timeout box. The WEB LCT session of the remote equipment (even if disconnected) will be kept for an indefinite period of time (session timeout disabled).
Enable the Login Timeout box. The WEB LCT session of the remote equipment, if disconnected,
will be automatically ended once reached the set time limit (Session timeout enabled).
(12h).
Change the password and the timeout of the NMS5UX user

WARNING The changing of the NMS5UX user (CEM password) has to be executed only if it is changed the
default password used by the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system.

If you wish to change only the timeout, it is necessary to type the current NMS5UX user password into the
Password and Confirm Password fields.
2. Press CEM.
3. To change the password, into the Password and Confirm Password box, type the new NMS5UX user
password (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to 8).
4. To change the timeout of the WEB LCT session opened by NMS5UX user:
Disable the Login Timeout box. The WEB LCT session opened by the NMS5UX user (even if disconnected) will be kept for an indefinite period of time (session timeout disabled).
Enable the Login Timeout box. The WEB LCT session opened by the NMS5UX user, if disconnected, will be automatically ended once reached the set time limit (Session timeout enabled).
(12h).
158
Verify/modify the IP address of Permanent Login

WARNING The remote user has the same characteristics of the NMS5UX user with the only exception that
he does not need for a login password.
It is possible to set a maximum of 2 remote users.

2. Press Permanent Login.
The box:
Manager IP Address 1 shows the IP address of the machine relevant the first remote user.
Manager IP Address 2 shows the IP address of the machine relevant the second remote user.
Value 0.0.0.0 indicates the parameter is disabled.

The setting of the Trap Version 2 box present below every box indicates the version of SNMP protocol
used for the trap sending. If the box is:
Active. For the specific remote user, the sending of trap in version 2 is enabled.
Inactive. For the specific remote user, the sending of trap in version 1 is enabled.
3. To change the IP address of the machine relevant the first remote user, type a valid IP address in the
Manager IP Address 1 box.
4. To change the IP address of the machine relevant the second remote user, type a valid IP address in
the Manager IP Address 2 box.
5. Activate the Trap Version 2 option, under the relevant Manager IP Address box, to set the trap management of version 2 (SNMPv2).
If the option is not activated, the version 1 (SNMPv1) of the traps is used.
159
User Manager contextual area

The contextual area displays the user list currently stored in the equipment when the SNMPv1/v2c protocol
is active.
The System and NMS5UX users are not pointed out into the list.
Parameters
User name. User name.

Profile. User profile:
Read Only. The user with this profile can check the parameters but it can not forward
commands or execute changing to the equipment configuration.
Read & Write. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only
maintenance operations (MAN OP).
Station Op. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands
or execute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the logout of a user and all those operations available only to the System user (or NMS5UX).
User Keep Alive. Timeout of WEB LCT session opened by the user:
No Timeout. Session timeout disabled. WEB LCT session opened by the user (even if
disconnected) will be kept for an indefinite period of time.
<number> Seconds. Session timeout enabled. WEB LCT session opened by the user,
if disconnected, will be automatically ended once reached the set time limit.
With disconnected session we mean a WEB LCT session whose relevant WEB LCT page has been
Push-button

Add. Add a user to the list.
Modify. Modify a user into the list.
Remove. Delete a user from the list
System. Change the password and the timeout of the System user
Network. Change the network password and timeout
CEM. Change the password and the timeout of the NMS5UX user
Permanent Login. Verify/modify the IP address of Permanent Login
See also
User list (info)
160
User Manager SNMP-V3

WARNING Command available only if the SNMPv3 protocol is active.
The User Manager SNMP-V3 command manages the SNMPv3 users list of the equipment.
Operations
Verify the SNMPv3 user list

Add a SNMPv3 user
Modify a SNMPv3 user
Delete a SNMPv3 user
GUI
User Manager SNMP-V3 contextual area

See also
User list (info)

Verify the SNMPv3 user list

1. Select Main > User Manager SNMP-V3.

The User Manager SNMP-V3 contextual area displays the user list currently stored in the equipment
which uses the SNMPv3 protocol.
Add a SNMPv3 user

WARNING It is possible to define the number of wished users.
The parameters for the setting of the user name and of the relevant password are Case Sensitive; pay
attention to uppercase and lowercase characters.
2. Press Add.
3. Into the User box, type the user name (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to
30).
It is not possible to assign the same name to two different users present into the same list.
The parameter can not be changed later.
4. Set, in Authorization Protocol box, the authentication algorithm associated to the user:
MD5. Authentication algorithm MD5 (Message Digest version 5) based on hash code.
SHA. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) with 96 bit digest based on hash
code (HMAC).
The parameter can not be changed later.

5. Into the User Profile box, set the profile to be assigned to the user:
System. The user with this profile can create/modify/delete users in the user list, verify/modify
the equipment configuration.
161
Station Operator. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or
execute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying
the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment force the logout of a user and all those
operations available only to the user with System profile.
6. Set, in Auth. Password and Confirm Auth. Password boxes, the authentication password associated to
the user (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to 30).
7. Set, in Privacy Protocol box, the cypher algorithm associated to the user:
No Privacy. No cypher algorithm.
DES. 3DES (Triple Data Encryption Standard) block cypher algorithm based on the repetition of
DES algorithm for three times.
The parameter cannot be changed later.

8. Only if in the previous step you have selected the value DES, set, in Privacy Password and Confirm Privacy Password boxes, the cypher password associated to the user (alphanumeric string with a number
of characters from 1 up to 30).
9. Press OK.
The new user is inserted in the list and communicated to the equipment.
Modify a SNMPv3 user

WARNING The name (parameter User), the authentication algorithm (parameter Authorization Protocol)
and the cypher algorithm (parameter Privacy Protocol) associated to the user can NOT be changed. To
change them, it is necessary to delete the user and create him again with the wished characteristics.
The user profile (parameter User Profile) of the user currently in use cannot be changed.
The fields for the setting of the keys are Case Sensitive; pay attention to uppercase and lowercase characters.
2. Select the user and press Modify.
3. To change the user profile, into the User Profile box, set the new value:
System. The user with this profile can create/modify/delete users in the user list, verify/modify
the equipment configuration.
Station Operator. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or
execute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying
the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment force the logout of a user and all those
operations available only to the user with System profile.
4. To change the authentication password associated to the user:

a. Activate the Change Auth. Password box.
b. Set the current authentication password in the Old Auth. Password box.
c. Set the new password (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to 30) in the
Auth. Password and Confirm Auth. Password boxes.
5. If a cypher algorithm (box Privacy Protocol, value DES) is associated to the user, the relevant password
can be changed:
a. Activate the Change Priv. Password box.
b. Set the current cypher password in the Old Privacy Password box.
162
c. Set the new password (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to 30) in the
Privacy Password and Confirm Privacy Password boxes.
6. Press OK.
Delete a SNMPv3 user

WARNING The user currently in use cannot be removed.

2. Select the user.
The message The current profile cannot be removed indicates that the current user has been selected.
163
User Manager SNMP-V3 contextual area

The contextual area displays the SNMPv3 user list currently stored in the equipment.
Each table row corresponds to a user.
Selecting the heading of a column, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing alphanumeric order with
respect to the considered column and an arrow is displayed with the tip directed upwards. The next selection sorts the rows in decreasing order (an arrow is displayed with the tip directed downwards) and so on.
Parameters
User. User name.

Profile. User profile:
System. The user with this profile can create/modify/delete users in the user list, verify/modify the equipment configuration.
Station Operator. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or execute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following
operations: modifying the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment force the
logout of a user and all those operations available only to the user with System profile.
Authorization Protocol. Authentication algorithm associated to the user:
MD5. Authentication algorithm MD5 (Message Digest version 5) based on hash code.
SHA. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) with 96 bit digest
based on hash code (HMAC).
Privacy Protocol. Cypher algorithm associated to the user:
No Privacy. No cypher algorithm.
DES. 3DES (Triple Data Encryption Standard) block cypher algorithm based on the
repetition of DES algorithm for three times.
Push-button

Add. Add a SNMPv3 user.
Modify. Modify a SNMPv3 user.
Remove. Delete a SNMPv3 user
See also
User list (info)

164
User list (info)

The users list is a list of users that can be connected and ask for the login to the equipment via the WEB
LCT application, the SCT/LMT program or the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system.
If a user is not present into the users list memorized into the controller on equipment, such a user will not
be able to connect and/or to execute the login of that equipment.
The management of the user list changes depending on the version of the SNMP protocol used by the
equipment:
Users list management (SNMPv1/v2c)
Users list management (SNMPv3)
Users list management (SNMPv1/v2c)

WARNING What reported here below is valid when the equipment uses the SNMPv1/v2c protocol (see SNMP
protocol (info).
The migration from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol involves the automatic deletion of the user
list.
The equipment has two predefined users.
Besides these users, for every piece of equipment it is possible to create up to 12 different users which can
be utilized to connect to the equipment via WEB LCT or SCT/LMT (see Add a user to the list).
Once a user is created, you can change his configuration (see Modify a user into the list) or delete him (see
Delete a user from the list).
The users of the user list of a piece of equipment (except for predefined ones) can be created via WEB LCT,
SCT/LMT or NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX.
Predefined users
SYSTEM. User of the WEB LCT application or SCT/LMT program with the following features:
User name: System (unchangeable parameter).
Timeout: No Timeout (changeable parameter).
Profile: System (unchangeable parameter).
Password: Siaemicr (default) (changeable parameter - see Change the password and
the timeout of the System user).
The System user is single one for every equipment and he can not be deleted.
This user can create/modify/delete users in the user list, verify/modify the equipment configuration.
NMS5UX. User of the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system, with the following features:
User name: NMS5UX (unchangeable parameter).
Timeout: No Timeout (changeable parameter).
Profile: System (unchangeable parameter).
Password: Pre-define (changeable parameter - see Change the password and the
timeout of the NMS5UX user).
The NMS5UX user can not be deleted.
More information about the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system is reported in the relevant documentation.
User characteristics
User/Password. User name and password for the access which allow the program acknowledging the user as user authorized to start WEB LCT or SCT/LMT.
The same user can open more WEB LCT pages relevant to different equipment.
Once assigned, the user name cannot be changed.
The System user can modify his password and the passwords of all the other users of the list.
If the System user forgets his own password, it is necessary to call the assistance service of the
product provider.
165
User profile. User profile which allows opening the program and having determinate commands
and features available.
The profile of a user, once assigned, cannot be changed by the System user.
The program WEB LCT allows creating a user with one of the following profiles:
Timeout of WEB LCT session opened by the user. It is possible to:
Disable the timeout: the WEB LCT session opened by the user (even if disconnected)
will be kept for an undefined period.
Enable the timeout: the WEB LCT session opened by the user, if disconnected, will be
automatically terminated once the set timeout is reached.
With disconnected session we mean one WEB LCT session for which the relevant
WEB LCT page has been closed but the disconnection from the piece of equipment
has not been executed (logout of the user).
Users list management (SNMPv3)

WARNING What reported here below is valid only if the equipment uses the SNMPv3 protocol (see SNMP
protocol (info).
The migration from SNMPv3 protocol to SNMPv1/v2c protocol involves the automatic deletion of the user
list.
When the equipment uses the SNMPv3 protocol, it has not predefined users.
During the migration from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol, the system requires the creation of
a SNMPv3 user with security level AuthNoPriv (see Migrate from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol).
This user will be utilized for the first connection with the equipment after the migration.
Then, through the WEB LCT application, it will be possible to create all the wished SNMPv3 users.
With a SNMPv3 user, it is possible to connect to the equipment via WEB LCT or SCT/LMT.
If the equipment is managed even by NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX, it is necessary to create the SNMPv3 user utilized by the supervision system for the connection to the equipment. This user must have profile System
and be the same for all the pieces of equipment managed by the same system NMS.
User characteristics
User. user name.

Once assigned, the user name cannot be changed.
User Profile. User profile which allows opening the program and having determinate commands
and features available.
The user profile can be changed by a user with System profile, except for the user currently in
use. In this case, it is necessary to connect with a different System user and execute the change.
The WEB LCT program allows creating a user with one of the following profiles:
166
System. The user with this profile can create/modify/delete users in the user list, verify/modify the equipment configuration.
Authorization Protocol/Password. Algorithm for the authentication of the packets and relevant password associated to the user.
The available authentication algorithms are:
MD5 (Message Digest version 5) based on hash code.
SHA-1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) with 96 bit digest based on hash code (HMAC).
The authentication algorithm, once assigned, cannot be changed. The authentication password
can, instead, be changed by a user with profile System.
Privacy Protocol/Password. Algorithm for the cypher of the packets and relevant password
associated to the user.
It is possible not to associate any cypher algorithm to one user or to associate the block cypher
algorithm 3DES (Triple Data Encryption Standard) based on the repetition of the DES algorithm
for three times. In this case, even a cypher password shall be defined.
The cypher mode (no cypher or DES), once assigned, cannot be changed. The cypher password
(if defined), instead, can be changed by a user with profile System.
167
EQUIPMENT
Configurator. It manages the equipment configuration.

BW & Mod./Link ID. It manages the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity, adaptive modulation
and link identification number.
General Preset. It manages the modem and radio parameters.
Xpic. It manages the XPIC function.
STM1 Bulk Config.. It manages the STM-1 Bulk function (transparent transport of the STM-1).
168
Configurator
The Configurator command manages the equipment configuration.

The configurator parameters change depending on the type or on the expansion present in the equipment.
Operations
IDUBOARD ONLY 1+0

IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD XPIC
Verify/modify the radio configuration (Radio)
Verify/modify the management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality (Ethernet Enh.)
Verify/modify the management of synchronisation (Sync Enable)
Verify/modify the management of the East-West modality (East-West)
Verify/modify the LLF modality (equipment with two radio directions and Ethernet traffic
concatenation) (Pipe los Forwarding)
Verify/modify the belonging of the equipment to a node (Node Type)
Verify/modify the number of elements of the node interconnected with Ethernet nodal
Bus (Ethernet elements) (Nbr of Eth. Elements)
Verify/modify the identifier of the equipment in the node (Node Element ID)
Verify/modify the enabling of Spanning Tree at level of node (STP Mode)
Verify/modify the mapping of tributaries A and B with Radio E1s
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
EXP.
EXP.
EXP.
EXP.
EXP.
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
2XSTM-1 32E1
2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0
2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 ONLY 1+0
EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1
EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0
EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3

Verify/modify the management of the PWE3 function (PWE3)
Verify/modify the management of STM-1 (STM-1 MST Mode)
Verify/modify the monitoring status of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and
SDH ring (Translate PDH Into SDH Alarms)
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
EXP.
EXP.
EXP.
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1

NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0
NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1
EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0
EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1

169
Verify/modify the monitoring status of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and
SDH ring (Translate PDH Into SDH Alarms)
Verify/modify the number of elements of the node interconnected with TDM nodal Bus
(TDM elements) (Nbr of TDM Elements)
Verify/modify the protection of the TDM nodal Bus in the node (TDM Nodal Bus Protection)
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
EXP.
EXP.
EXP.
EXP.
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
16E1 ONLY 1+0

16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
16E1 PWE3
16E1 PWE3 ONLY 1+0
EXP. 16E1 ONLY 1+0
EXP. 16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
EXP. 16E1 PWE3

Verify/modify the enabling status of the transit of the packets of the ports (Ethernet
Switch and CPU) of the local IDU to/from the ports (Ethernet Switch and CPU) of the other IDUs of the node (Nodal Port Based VLAN)
GUI
Configurator contextual area

See also
Monitoring of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH ring (info)
PWE3 function (info)
170
Verify/modify the radio configuration

WARNING The change of the radio configuration can determine the deletion of the Ethernet Switch config-
uration (see Tab.6) and the deletion of the Bundles/PWE3 channels (see Tab.18).
1. Select Equipment > Configurator.
The Radio parameter indicates the equipment radio configuration:
1+0. Equipment with radio unprotected configuration.
1+1 Freq. Div. Equipment with radio in protected configuration of heterofrequential type.
1+1 Hot Standby. Equipment with radio in protected configuration of isofrequential type.
2x(1+0) Eth. Single Pipe. Equipment with two radio directions in unprotected configuration and
Ethernet traffic concatenation.
2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe. Equipment with two independent radio directions in unprotected configuration and two Ethernet channels.
2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe. Equipment with two radio directions in XPIC configuration and
Ethernet traffic concatenation.
2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe. Equipment with two radio directions in XPIC configuration and two
Ethernet channels.
The availability of the values changes depending on the IduBoard type as depicted in Tab.7.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
WARNING The radio configuration 1+1 Freq. Div is not supported when the equipment has bandwidth
56MHz.
The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the Xpic activation functionality is not enabled
(see Equipment Feature tab).
Tab.6 Radio configuration change
Change
From
Unequipped
1+0
1+1 FD (1)
1+1 HS (2)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1+0
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
1+1 FD (1)
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
1+1 HS (2)
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
2x(1+0) SP (3)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2x(1+0) DP (4)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Unequipped
To
2x(1+0) SP (3) 2x(1+0) DP (4)
Yes. The Switch configuration is restored to default. All the VLANs are deleted, except for those reserved
(management).
No. The Switch configuration is not changed.
(1)
1+1 Freq. Div.
(2)
1+1 Hot Standby.
(3)
2x(1+0) Eth. Single Pipe / 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe.
(4)
2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe / 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe.
171
Tab.7 Available of the general parameters

IDU Board type
(1)
Radio configuration
Management
1+0
1+1
2x(1+0)
(3)
2x(1+0)
Xpic (4)
STM-1
Nodal
Bus
Matrix
PWE3
IduBoard Only 1+0
IduBoard
IduBoard Xpic
IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1
IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0
IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0/1+1
IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 Only 1+0
IduBoard Xpic Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1
IduBoard Xpic Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0
IduBoard Xpic Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0/1+1
IduBoard Xpic Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
IduBoard Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1
IduBoard Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0
IduBoard Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1
IduBoard Xpic Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1
IduBoard Xpic Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0
IduBoard Xpic Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1
IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0
IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1
(5)
(5)
IduBoard Exp. 16E1 PWE3
(2)
IduBoard Exp. 16E1 PWE3 Only 1+0
IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0
IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1
(5)
IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1 PWE3
(1)
(2)
1+1 Freq. Div / 1+1 Hot Standby.
(3)
2x(1+0) Eth. Single Pipe / 2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe.
(4)
2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe / 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe.
(5)
With the PWE3 function active, the matrix is not available (see Tab.14).
Verify/modify the management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality

WARNING The management of the Ethernet Enhanced functionality cannot be deactivated in one or both
the following conditions:
172
2x(1+0) Eth. Single Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe radio configuration.
PWE3 function enable.
In this situation, the values Absent (Remember Enh Values) and Absent (Reset Enh Values) will not be
present in the list. In order to execute the operation, it is first necessary to change the radio configuration
and/or deactivate the PWE3 function.
The Ethernet Enh. parameter indicates the management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality:
Present. Management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality is active.
Absent (Remember Enh Values). Management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality is not active.
In the case, the equipment uses the Ethernet interface (Radio side) compatible with ALCplus2.
If you have changed from an Enhanced Ethernet management to a not Enhanced Ethernet management, the controller keeps in memory all the settings relevant to Enhanced Ethernet.
Absent (Reset Enh Values). Management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality is not active. In the
case, the equipment uses the Ethernet interface (Radio side) compatible with ALCplus2.
If you have changed from an Enhanced Ethernet management to a not Enhanced Ethernet management, the controller have not kept in memory all the settings relevant to Enhanced Ethernet.

The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the Enhanced Eth processing functionality is
not enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).
Verify/modify the management of the PWE3 function

WARNING Operation available only for equipment provided with PWE3 function (see Tab.7).
In order to activate the PWE3 function, the equipment must be configured in the following way:
Ethernet Enh. > Present
Node Type > No Nodal
STM-1 Bulk function disable (see STM1 Bulk Config.).

The PWE3 parameter indicates the enabling status of the PWE3 function (see PWE3):
Enabled. PWE3 function enable.
Disabled. PWE3 function disable.

The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the E1 transport (PWE3) functionality is not
enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).
Verify/modify the management of synchronisation

WARNING The synchronisation cannot be disabled if the STM-1 Bulk function is active for, at least, one
STM-1 (see STM1 Bulk Config.).

The Sync Enable parameter indicates the management of synchronisation:
Disabled. Synchronisation disable.
Enabled. Synchronisation enable.

173
Verify/modify the management of STM-1

WARNING Operation available only for equipment provided with STM-1 (see Tab.7).

The STM-1 MST Mode parameter indicates the management of the STM-1:
None. The management of STM-1 is deactive.
1+0. The management of one unprotected STM-1 is active (MST mode).
1+1 MSP. The management of one protected STM-1 is active (MSP mode).
2 x (1+0) MST. The management of two unprotected STM-1 is active (MST mode).
1+1 MSP No ALS. The management of one protected STM-1 is active (MSP mode). For STM-1
with optical interface, the Automatic Laser Shutdown function is permanently disabled.

If the STM-1 Bulk function is active (see STM1 Bulk Config.) and the equipment is in radio configuration:
1+0 or 1+1, the parameter is automatically set to 1+0. The value cannot be modified.
2x(1+0), the values 1+0 and 2 x (1+0) MST are available.
Verify/modify the monitoring status of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH
and SDH ring
WARNING Operation available only for equipment provided with STM-1 (see Tab.7) and if the management
of STM-1 is active.
Operation common to all the 2Mbit/s tributary.

Operation not available if the STM-1 Bulk function (see STM1 Bulk Config.) or the PWE3 function (see
PWE3) is active.
The Translate PDH Into SDH Alarms parameter indicates the monitoring status of the alarms of the
2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH ring in input to a SDH ring where the ALCplus2e equipment acts
as connection elements:
Disabled. The monitoring of the 2Mbit/s signal (PDH) is not active.
Enabled. The monitoring of the 2Mbit/s signal (PDH) is active.

Activating the monitoring (selection of option Enabled) forbids the execution of protected TributaryRadio connections in TDM matrix (see Cross Connection).
Moreover, if no protected Tributary-Radio connection is present in the TDM matrix, the existing connections are not deleted. Otherwise, if at least one protected Tributary-Radio connection is present, all
the connections are deleted.
The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the SDH overhead and VC12 quality management functionality is not enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).
174
Verify/modify the management of the East-West modality

WARNING Operation available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration (see
Tab.7).
When the East-West modality is enabled, the equipment takes the Ring Ethernet modality configuration.
In this modality, the Switch Ethernet must have the following configuration in order to ensure the correct
traffic management:
LAN in Fallback modality.
Radio port in Fallback modality.
All the VLAN of the Ring registered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU).

The East-West parameter indicates the management of the East-West modality:
No. The management of the East-West modality is not active.
Yes. The management of the East-West modality is active: the radio signal is routed in two different direction named, for accepted custom, East and West.

Verify/modify the LLF modality (equipment with two radio directions and Ethernet
traffic concatenation)
WARNING Operation available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) Eth. Single Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single
Pipe radio configuration (see Tab.7).
Operation meaningful when the Link Loss Forwarding modality is active (see LLF tab).
The parameter Pipe los forwarding indicates the modality of forwarding of the link loss for equipment
with two radio direction and concatenation of the Ethernet traffic:
Single link. The block of the local port due to LLF takes place for the disconnection of a single
radio.
Dual link. The block of the local port due to LLF takes place for the disconnection of both radios.

Verify/modify the belonging of the equipment to a node

WARNING Equipment cannot be configured as belonging to one node if the PWE3 function is active (see
PWE3).
In this situation, the value Nodal will not be present in the list. In order to execute the operation, it is first
necessary to deactivate the PWE3 function.
The Node Type parameter indicates if the equipment is element of a node:
No Nodal. The equipment does not belong to a node.
Nodal. The equipment belongs to a node.

With node we mean a set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 equipment (ALCplus2 and/or
ALCplus2e) interconnected by a Ethernet nodal Bus and/or TDM nodal Bus.
175

Verify/modify the number of elements of the node interconnected with Ethernet nodal Bus (Ethernet elements)
WARNING Operation available only if the equipment belongs to a node (Node Type parameter - Nodal val-
ue).
The Nbr of Eth. Elements parameter indicates the number of elements of the node interconnected with
Ethernet nodal Bus:
No Elements. No element of the node is interconnected with the Ethernet nodal Bus.
2, 38. The first two, threeeight elements of the node are interconnected by the Ethernet nodal
Bus.
For example, if the value 3 is set, this means that the equipment occupying the first three logic
positions within the node are interconnected by the Ethernet nodal Bus. The logic position of the
equipment is given by its identifying number: the equipment with identifying number 1 will be
considered in first position, 2 in second position and so on.
The value 1 is not available because the nodal interconnection is realized among minimum two
and maximum eight equipment.

Verify/modify the number of elements of the node interconnected with TDM nodal
Bus (TDM elements)
WARNING Operation available only for equipment that manage the nodal Bus (see Tab.7) and belonging
to a node (Node Type parameter - Nodal value).

The Nbr of TDM Elements parameter indicates the number of elements of the node interconnected with
TDM nodal Bus:
No Elements. No element of the node is interconnected by the TDM nodal Bus.
2, 38. The first two, threeeight elements of the node are interconnected by the TDM nodal
Bus.
For example, if the value 4 is set, this means that the equipment occupying the first four logic
positions within the node are interconnected by the TDM nodal Bus. The logic position of the
equipment is given by its identifying number: the equipment with identifying number 1 will be
considered in first position, 2 in second position and so on.
The value 1 is not available because the nodal interconnection is realized among minimum two
and maximum eight equipment.

176
Verify/modify the identifier of the equipment in the node

WARNING Operation available only for equipment belonging to a node and for which the number of Ether-
net elements and/or TDM elements has been already defined (Nbr of Eth Elements and/or Nbr of TDM Elements parameter - value different from No Elements).
The Node Element ID parameter indicates the number identifying the equipment in the node: 1 8.
2. To change the parameter, select the option relevant to the number you wish to assign to the equipment.
The values available in the list change depending on the maximum number of Ethernet elements (see
Nbr of Eth. Elements parameter) and/or by TDM elements (see Nbr of TDM Elements parameter) composing the node. For example, if a node with 4 Ethernet elements and 3 TDM elements has been defined, the values 1, 2, 3 and 4 will be available in the list.
The identifying number represents even the logic position assumed by the equipment in the node. This
position is important in the definition of the Ethernet elements and/or TDM elements.
Verify/modify the enabling of Spanning Tree at level of node

WARNING Operation available only for equipment belonging to a node, for which the number of Ethernet
elements has been already defined and the equipment, which the WEB LCT page refers to, is an Ethernet
element.

The STP Mode parameter indicates the enabling status of the protocol Spanning Tree (STP) at level of
node:
Disable. STP at level of node disabled.
bridge1-pro. STP at level of node enabled: the equipment belongs to Bridge 1.
bridge2-pro. STP at level of node enabled: the equipment belongs to Bridge 2.
all-pro. STP at level of node enabled: the equipment belongs both to Bridge 1 and Bridge 2.
The STP Mode parameter is available only if a value different from No Elements is set for the Nbr of Eth
Elements parameter and the value of the Node Element ID parameter is a number lower than or equal
to the number set for the Nbr of Eth. Elements parameter.
Verify/modify the protection of the TDM nodal Bus in the node

WARNING Operation available only for equipment belonging to a node, for which the number of TDM elements has been already defined and the equipment, which the WEB LCT page refers to, is a TDM element.

The TDM Nodal Bus Protection parameter indicates the protection of the TDM nodal Bus in the node:
Not Protected. The TDM nodal Bus is not protected.
Protected. The TDM nodal Bus is protected.
The TDM Nodal Bus Protection parameters available only if a value different from No Elements is set
for the Nbr of TDM Elements parameter and the value of the Node Element ID parameter is a number
lower than or equal to the number set for the Nbr of TDM Elements parameter.
177


WARNING Operation available only for equipment of IduBoard Only 1+0, IduBoard or IduBoard Xpic type.
For all other equipment see Cross Connection.

2. Select the Tributary A-B Mapping tab.
The parameter Tributary A Mapping indicates the mapping of first E1 of base board:
Unmapped. Tributary A is not connected to any Radio E1.
Radio A E1-1. Tributary A is connected to the first Radio channel (E1-1).
Radio A E1-2. Tributary A is connected to the second Radio channel (E1-2).
The parameter Tributary B Mapping indicates the mapping of second E1 of base board:
Unmapped. Tributary B is not connected to any Radio E1.
Radio A E1-1. Tributary B is connected to the first Radio channel (E1-1).
Radio A E1-2. Tributary B is connected to the second Radio channel (E1-2).
3. To change the parameters, select the wished option.

The same Radio channel cannot be set for the tributaries of base board. For instance, if the value Radio
A E1-1 is set for tributary A, the value Radio A E1-2 must be set for tributary B and vice versa.
Verify/modify the enabling status of the transit of the packets of the ports (Ethernet
Switch and CPU) of the local IDU to/from the ports (Ethernet Switch and CPU) of the
other IDUs of the node
WARNING Operation available only for equipment belonging to a node, for which the number of Ethernet
elements has been already defined and the equipment, which the WEB LCT page refers to, is an Ethernet
element.

2. Select the Nodal Port Based VLan tab.
The tab displays the enabling status of the transit of the packets of the ports (Ethernet Switch and CPU)
of the local IDU to/from the ports (Ethernet Switch and CPU) of the other IDUs of the node interconnected by the Ethernet nodal Bus.
The tab is available only if a value different from No Elements is set for the Nbr of Eth Elements parameter in the Configurator tab, and the value of the Node Element ID parameter is a number lower than
or equal to the number set for the Nbr of Eth. Elements parameter.
3. To modify the enabling status of a port:
a. Select the bar relevant to the IDU of the node for which you wish to change the status of the
ports.
b. Select, in the table, the check-box corresponding to the combination: port (Ethernet Switch or
CPU) local IDU - port (Ethernet Switch or CPU) of node element.
At each selection, the check-box assumes the status complementary to the previous one (if the
check sign is present, it is removed and vice versa).
The presence of the check sign means that the transit between the two ports is allowed. Its absence means that the transit is forbidden.
178
The transit of the packets of the LAN 1 and LAN 2 of the local Ethernet Switch from/to the ports of the
Ethernet Switch of the specific node element is automatically enabled by the system.
If you wish to disable one of this check-box, the message Changing these settings may result in loss
of Ethernet traffic through the node. Continue? is displayed, warning that the change of the setting can
cause the loss of traffic of the Ethernet nodal Bus.
179
Configurator contextual area

The contextual area displays the equipment configuration.
Tabs
Configurator tab. General configuration of the equipment.

Tributary A-B Mapping tab. Mapping of tributaries A and B with Radio E1.
Nodal Port Based VLan tab. Enabling status of the transit of the packets of the ports (Ethernet
Switch and CPU) of the local IDU to/from the ports (Ethernet Switch and CPU) of the other IDUs
of the node interconnected by the Ethernet nodal Bus.
Push-button

Configurator tab
The tab displays the general configuration parameters of the equipment.
The configuration parameters change depending on the type or on the equipped expansion.
Parameters
Radio. Equipment radio configuration:
1+0. Equipment with radio in unprotected configuration.
1+1 Freq. Div. Equipment with radio in protected configuration of heterofrequential

type.
1+1 Hot Standby. Equipment with radio in protected configuration of isofrequential

type.
2x(1+0) Eth. Single Pipe. Equipment with two radio directions in unprotected configuration and Ethernet traffic concatenation.
2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe. Equipment with two independent radio directions in unprotected configuration and two Ethernet channels.
2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe. Equipment with two radio directions in XPIC configuration and Ethernet traffic concatenation.
2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe. Equipment with two radio directions in XPIC configuration and two Ethernet channels.
The availability of the values changes depending on the IduBoard type as depicted in Tab.7.
Ethernet Enh. Management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality:
Present. Management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality is active.
Absent (Remember Enh Values). Management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality is

not active. In the case, the equipment uses the Ethernet interface (Radio side) compatible with ALCplus2.
If you have changed from an Enhanced Ethernet management to a not Enhanced
Ethernet management, the controller keeps in memory all the settings relevant to Enhanced Ethernet.
Absent (Reset Enh Values). Management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality is not active. In the case, the equipment uses the Ethernet interface (Radio side) compatible
with ALCplus2.
If you have changed from an Enhanced Ethernet management to a not Enhanced
Ethernet management, the controller have not kept in memory all the settings relevant to Enhanced Ethernet.
180
Translate PDH Into SDH Alarms. Monitoring status of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal
through PDH and SDH ring in input to a SDH ring where the ALCplus2e equipment acts as connection elements:
Disabled. The monitoring of the 2Mbit/s signal (PDH) is not active.
Enabled. The monitoring of the 2Mbit/s signal (PDH) is active.
Parameter not available if the value None is set for STM-1 MST Mode and/or the STM-1 Bulk
function (see STM1 Bulk Config.) or the PWE3 function (see parameter PWE3) is active.
Node Type. Belonging of the equipment to a node:
No Nodal. The equipment does not belong to a node.
Nodal. The equipment belongs to a node.
With node we mean a set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 equipment (ALCplus2 and/or
ALCplus2e) interconnected by a Ethernet nodal Bus and/or TDM nodal Bus.
Pipe los forwarding. Modality of forwarding of the link connection for equipment with two radio
directions and concatenation of the Ethernet traffic:
Single link. The block of the local port due to LLF takes place for the disconnection of
one single radio.
Dual link. The block of the local port due to LLF takes place for the disconnection of
both radios.
Parameter available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) Eth. Single Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single
Pipe radio configuration (see Tab.7).
Parameter meaningful when the Link Loss Forwarding modality is active (see LLF tab).
PWE3. Management of PWE3 function:
Enabled. Function enable.
Disabled. Function disable.
Parameter available only for equipment that support the PWE3 function (see Tab.7).
Sync Enable. Management of synchronisation:
Disabled. Synchronisation disable.
Enabled. Synchronisation enable.
STM-1 MST Mode. Management of the STM-1:
None. The management of STM-1 is deactive.
1+0. The management of one unprotected STM-1 is active (MST modality).
1+1 MSP. The management of one protected STM-1 is active (MSP modality).
2 x (1+0) MST. The management of two unprotected STM-1 is active (MST modality).
1+1 MSP No ALS. The management of one protected STM-1 is active (MSP modality).
For STM-1 with optical interface, the Automatic Laser Shutdown function is permanently disabled.
Parameter available only for equipment provided with STM-1 (see Tab.7).
East-West. Management of the East-West modality:
No. The management of the East-West modality is not active.
Yes. The management of the East-West modality is active: the radio signal is routed
in two different direction named, for accepted custom, East and West.
Parameter available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration (see
Tab.7).
Nbr of Eth. Elements. Number of elements of the node interconnected by Ethernet nodal Bus
(Ethernet elements):
No Elements. No element of the node is interconnected by the Ethernet nodal Bus.
2, 38. The first two, threeeight elements of the node are interconnected by the
Ethernet nodal Bus.
For example, if the value 3 is set means that the equipment occupying the first three
logic positions within the node are interconnected by the Ethernet nodal Bus. The logic position of the equipment is given by its identifying number: the equipment with
identifying number 1 will be considered in first position, 2 in second position and so
on.
Parameter available only if the value Nodal is set for the Node Type parameter.
181
Nbr of TDM Elements. Number of elements of the node interconnected by the TDM nodal Bus
(TDM elements):
No Elements. No element of the node is interconnected with the TDM nodal Bus.
2, 38. The first two, threeeight elements of the node are interconnected by the
TDM nodal Bus.
For example, if the value 4 is set, this means that the equipment occupying the first
four logic positions within the node are interconnected by the TDM nodal Bus. The logic position of the equipment is given by its identifying number: the equipment with
identifying number 1 will be considered in first position, 2 in second position and so
on.
Parameter available only for equipment that manage the nodal Bus (see Tab.7) and belonging
to a node (Node Type parameter - Nodal value).
Node Element ID. Identifying number of the equipment in the node:
1. In node, the equipment is identified by number 1.
The identifying number represents even the logic position assumed by the equipment in the
node. This position is important in the definition of the Ethernet elements and/or TDM elements.
Parameter available only if a value different from No Elements is set for the Nbr of Eth. Elements
and/or Nbr of TDM Elements parameter.
STP Mode. Enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol at level of node (STP node):
Disable. STP node disabled.
bridge1-pro. STP node enabled: the equipment belongs to Bridge 1.
bridge2-pro. STP node enabled: the equipment belongs to Bridge 2.
all-pro. STP node enabled: the equipment belongs both to Bridge 1 and Bridge 2.
Parameter available only if a value different from No Elements is set for the Nbr of Eth. Elements
parameter and the equipment, which the WEB LCT page refers to, is an Ethernet element.
This means that the value of Node Element ID must be a number lower than or equal to the
number set for the parameter Nbr of Eth. Elements.
TDM Nodal Bus Protection. Management of the protection of the TDM nodal Bus in the node:
Not Protected. The TDM nodal Bus is not protected.
Protected. The TDM nodal Bus is protected.
Parameter available only if a value different from No Elements is set for the Nbr of TDM Elements
parameter and the equipment, which the WEB LCT page refers to, is a TDM element.
This means that the value of Node Element ID must be a number lower than or equal to the
number set for the parameter Nbr of TDM Elements.
See also

Verify/modify the monitoring status of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH
ring (Translate PDH Into SDH Alarms)
Verify/modify the LLF modality (equipment with two radio directions and Ethernet traffic concatenation) (Pipe los Forwarding)
Verify/modify the number of elements of the node interconnected with Ethernet nodal Bus
(Ethernet elements) (Nbr of Eth. Elements)
Verify/modify the number of elements of the node interconnected with TDM nodal Bus (TDM elements) (Nbr of TDM Elements)
182
Verify/modify the protection of the TDM nodal Bus in the node (TDM Nodal Bus Protection)
PWE3 function (info) (PWE3)
Tributary A-B Mapping tab

WARNING Tab available only for equipment of IduBoard Only 1+0, IduBoard or IduBoard Xpic type.
The tab displays the mapping of tributaries A and B with Radio E1.
Parameters
Tributary A Mapping. Mapping of first E1 of base board:
Unmapped. Tributary A is not connected to any Radio E1.
Radio A E1-1. Tributary A is connected to the first Radio channel (E1-1).
Radio A E1-2. Tributary A is connected to the second Radio channel (E1-2).
Tributary B Mapping. Mapping of second E1 of base board:
Unmapped. Tributary B is not connected to any Radio E1.
Radio A E1-1. Tributary B is connected to the first Radio channel (E1-1).
Radio A E1-2. Tributary B is connected to the second Radio channel (E1-2).
See also
Nodal Port Based VLan tab

WARNING Tab available only if a value different from No Elements is set for the Nbr of Eth Elements pa-
rameter in the Configurator tab, and the value of the Node Element ID parameter is a number lower than
or equal to the number set for the Nbr of Eth. Elements parameter.
The tab displays the enabling status of the transit of the packets of the ports (Ethernet Switch and CPU)
of the local IDU to/from the ports (Ethernet Switch and CPU) of the other IDUs of the node interconnected
by the Ethernet nodal Bus.
The tab contains a series of bars.
Each bar corresponds to an element of the node interconnected by Ethernet nodal Bus (Ethernet element).
The number reported in the bar after the prefix IDU indicates the equipment identifying number.
The selection of a bar expands the below which displays a table.
In the table:
The rows Lan... and Port... represent the ports of the Ethernet Switch of the local IDU.
The row InBand represents the port towards the CPU of the local IDU.
The columns Lan... and Port... represent the ports of the Ethernet Switch of the node element
pointed out in the bar (IDU...).
The column InBand represents the port towards the CPU of the node element pointed out in the
bar (IDU...).
In the table each check-box represents a different combination: local IDU port (Ethernet Switch/CPU) node element port ((Ethernet Switch/CPU).
The presence of the check sign in a check-box indicates that, for this combination of ports, the transit of
the packets is allowed. The absence of the check sign indicates that the transit is not allowed.
The colour of the Lan 1 and Lan 2 of the local IDU is different with respect to the others to point out that
the ports are used for the Ethernet nodal interconnection.
183
The activation of the transport from/to the Inband ports (CPU) allow activating the inband supervision
among the IDUs of the node without need to use a VLAN dedicated for this function.
It is possible to display the table of one IDU at a time.
See also
Verify/modify the enabling status of the transit of the packets of the ports (Ethernet Switch and
CPU) of the local IDU to/from the ports (Ethernet Switch and CPU) of the other IDUs of the node
184
The networks with traffic protection of end to end type foresee that the duplication of the path is made on
the whole network, both SDH and PDH.
In these networks, it is then necessary that the Switch in reception is made not only depending on the
quality of the SDH network, but also depending on the quality of the signal incoming in the network itself.
To execute this operation, it is foreseen, in the ALCplus2e equipment, to monitor the 2Mbit/s signal incoming in the SDH network and to report the alarm conditions as alarms of VC12 causing the switching of the
path also in presence of alarms or degradation of the PDH signal (see Verify/modify the monitoring status
of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH ring).
185
BW & Mod./Link ID
WARNING Command available only for equipment provided with the radio.
For the equipment in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration is present the BW & Mod./Link ID command. For the
equipment in 2x(1+0) configuration are present the BW & Mod./Link ID 1A (radio branch 1 parameters)
and BW & Mod./Link ID 2A (radio branch 2 parameters) commands.
The BW & Mod./Link ID command manages the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity, adaptive
modulation and link identification number.
Operations
Verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters of
the adaptive modulation
Modify the reference band/modulation
Modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation
Modify the configuration parameters of the adaptive modulation. These parameters change depending on the operating status of the adaptive modulation itself.
ADAPTIVE
MODULATION
ACTIVE
Modify the power profile of the RF transmitter (ACM enabled) (Tx Power Ramp)
Modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled)
(Upper Modulation/Lower Modulation)
Enable/disable the ACM profile 4QAM Strong (ACM enabled) (Exclude 4QAM Strong)
Modify the number of E1 permanently allocated (high priority streams) (Permanent TDM
Traffic)
Modify the number of E1 assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams) (TDM Capacity)
ADAPTIVE
MODULATION INACTIVE
Modify the number of E1 permanently allocated (high priority streams) (Permanent TDM
Traffic)
Modify the number of E1 assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams) (TDM Capacity)
Verify/modify the link identification number
Verify/modify the priority of the dynamic E1
GUI
BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area

See also
Adaptive modulation (info)
Verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration
parameters of the adaptive modulation
1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.

The Modulation & Capacity tab displays the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the
configuration parameters of the adaptive modulation.
186

WARNING In 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration the change
is automatically done also on the other branch.

The Bandwidth & Modulation parameter indicates the current reference band/modulation. For each one
of the radio channelling, the modulation and the consequent capacity can be configured.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the Upgrade up to... functionality is not enabled
(see Equipment Feature tab).

WARNING In 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration the change
is automatically done also on the other branch.

The ACM Engine parameter indicates the operating status of the adaptive modulation.
2. To change the parameter, select the option:
Disabled. Adaptive modulation disabled.
Enabled. Adaptive modulation enabled.
Modify the power profile of the RF transmitter (ACM enabled)

WARNING Operation available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.
The profile is used only if a modulation equal to the minimum modulation has been selected as reference.
In 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration the change is automatically done also on the other branch.
The Tx Power Ramp parameter indicates the power profile of the RF transmitter.
2. To change the parameter, select the value:
Disabled. Mean power constant when the modulation changes.
Ramp to Ref. Modulation. Mean power constant up to a reference modulation. For the next modulations: power increasing when the modulation decreases.
Ramp to Max. Power. Maximizes the power in every modulation depending on ODU type.
Parameter available only for equipment with ODU ASN version 2.1.0 and higher and ODU AS03 version 1.5.0 and higher.
187
The Upper Modulation and Lower Modulation parameters respectively indicates the upper threshold and
the lower threshold of the modulation.
2. To change the parameters Upper Modulation and Lower Modulation, select the value relevant to the
wished modulation.
Enable/disable the ACM profile 4QAM Strong (ACM enabled)


The Exclude 4AQM Strong parameter indicates the enabling status of the ACM profile 4QAM Strong.
Disabled. The ACM profile 4QAM Strong is available: the profile is present in the ACM Table.
Enabled. The ACM profile 4QAM Strong is not available: the profile is not present in the ACM
Table.
Modify the number of E1 permanently allocated (high priority streams)

WARNING Operation available only for equipment which manage static E1s (see Tab.9).
When the STM-1 Bulk function is active (see STM1 Bulk Config.), the number of permanently allocated E1
is 0. The Permanent TDM Traffic parameter cannot be modified.
When the PWE3 function is active (see Configurator), the number of permanently allocated E1 is 0. The
Permanent TDM Traffic parameter is not available.
The Permanent TDM Traffic parameter indicates the number of E1 permanently allocated (high priority
streams).
Modify the number of E1 assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams)

WARNING Operation not available if the PWE3 function is active (see Configurator).
188

The TDM Capacity parameter indicates the number of E1 which must be kept active for the specific ACM
profile.
2. To change the parameter, double click on the relevant box and type the wished value.
Maximum number of low priority E1 you can assign to the specific profile is pointed out in brackets.


2. Select the Local Link ID tab.
The Local Link ID parameter indicates the link identification number.
3. To change the parameter, move the cursor to the new number (value between 1 and 255).
The setting of the 0 value corresponds to the non-selection of the identification number.
The setting so executed does NOT automatically modify also the identification number of the remote
equipment.

WARNING In order to modify the native priority of Extra E1 (e.g. from 1-18 to 3-16, 1-2) in a connection
between equipment IduBoard Xpic... and equipment without TDM matrix (see Tab.7), it is necessary to
disable the Local/remote synchronization protocol (info).
Operation not available if the PWE3 function is active (see Configurator).

2. Select the Extra TDM Priority tab.
The tab displays the priority of the dynamic E1 (TDM Capacity).
3. To change the sequence, press a push-button present in the tab (see Tab.8).
189
BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area

WARNING For equipment in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration, the BW & Mod./Link ID command is available
which opens the BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area.
For equipment in 2x(1+0) configuration, the commands BW & Mod./Link ID 1A, which opens the BW &
Mod./Link ID 1A contextual area containing the parameters relevant to radio 1, and BW & Mod./Link ID
2A, which opens the BW & Mod./Link ID 2A contextual area containing the parameters relevant to radio
2, are available.
The contextual area displays the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity, adaptive modulation and link
identification number.
Tabs
Modulation & Capacity tab. Reference band/modulation, operating status and configuration of
the adaptive modulation.
Local Link ID tab. Link identification number.
Extra TDM Priority tab. Priority of the dynamic E1 (TDM Capacity).
Push-button

Modulation & Capacity tab

The tab displays the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters of
the adaptive modulation.
Parameters
ACM Engine. Operating status of the adaptive modulation:
Enabled. The adaptive modulation is enabled.
Disabled. The adaptive modulation is disabled.
Bandwidth & Modulation. Channelling - Modulation. For each one of the radio channelling, the
modulation and the consequent capacity can be configured.
Lower Modulation / Upper Modulation. Respectively upper and lower thresholds of the Tx
modulation.
Parameter available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.
Exclude 4QAM Strong. Enabling status of the ACM profile 4QAM Strong:
Disabled. The ACM profile 4QAM Strong is available: the profile is present in the ACM
Table.
Enabled. The ACM profile 4QAM Strong is not available: the profile is not present in
the ACM Table.

Tx Power Ramp. Power profile of the RF transmitter:
Disabled. Mean power constant when the modulation changes.
Ramp to Ref. Modulation. Mean power constant for modulations lower than or equal
to the reference modulation. For higher modulations, power increases when modulation decreases.
Ramp to Max. Power. Maximizes the power in every modulation depending on ODU
type.
Parameter available only for equipment with ODU ASN version 2.1.0 and higher and
ODU AS-03 version 1.5.0 and higher.
190
Permanent TDM Traffic. Number of E1 assigned permanently (high priority streams). These
streams cannot be never discarded by the adaptive modulation. The maximum number of E1
which can be assigned permanently is pointed out next to the box.
Parameter available only for equipment which manage static E1s (see Tab.9).
When the STM-1 Bulk function is active (see STM1 Bulk Config.) the number of permanently allocated E1 is 0. The parameter cannot be modified.
Parameter not available if the PWE3 function is active (see Configurator).
ACM Table. This table shows, for each ACM level, the number of E1 which can be used.
Depending on the operating status of the adaptive modulation, one or more profile will be available. If the adaptive modulation is:
Disabled. The table contains only the ACM profile relevant to the reference modulation
(Bandwidth & Modulation).
Enabled. The table contains all the ACM profiles. Among these, the profile included
between the minimum and the maximum modulation are available.
Profile (ACM Table). 8 profiles ACM are available from 4QAM to 256QAM. An additional profile
on 4QAM with low rate FEC (4QAM Strong) is present too.
Max TDM Cap (ACM Table). Maximum number of (high and low priority) E1 which can be assigned to the TDM traffic for every ACM profile.
Parameter not meaningful if the PWE3 function is active (see Configurator).
TDM Capacity (ACM Table). Number of (low priority) E1 assigned to each ACM profile. These
streams will be discarded by adaptive modulation according to the order configured by the user.
Maximum number of low priority E1 you can assign to the specific profile is pointed out in brackets.
Parameter not available if the PWE3 function is active (see Configurator).
Global Capacity (ACM Table). Global capacity associated to the ACM profile.
The value is given by: Ethernet Capacity (including the bandwidth used by PWE3) + TDM High
Priority + TDM Low Priority + Maintenance Channel.
Ethernet Capacity (ACM Table). Capacity dedicated to Ethernet traffic.
WARNING When the contextual area is opened, the values present in the tab refer to the currently selected
reference band/modulation.
If the currently selected reference band/modulation is modified, some parameters are disabled.
In order to display the parameters relevant to the new selected band, it is necessary to confirm (pushbutton Apply) the new reference band/modulation.
See also

Modify the power profile of the RF transmitter (ACM enabled)
Enable/disable the ACM profile 4QAM Strong (ACM enabled)
Modify the number of E1 permanently allocated (high priority streams)
Modify the number of E1 assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams)
Local Link ID tab

The tab displays the link identification number.
Parameters
Local Link ID. Link identification number.

The 0 value corresponds to the non-selection of the identification number.
191
See also
Extra TDM Priority tab

WARNING Parameter not available if the PWE3 function is active (see Configurator).
The tab displays the priority of the dynamic E1 (TDM Capacity).

Parameters
E1
LIST
The sorting sequence of TDM Capacity, goes from highest priority (first position in the list) to
lowest one (last position in the list).
This means that the E1 at the bottom of the list will be the first stream to be discarded by the
adaptive modulation, the penultimate E1 in the list will be the second to be discarded and so on
until reaching the E1 at the top of the list which will be the last stream to be discarded by the
adaptive modulation.
When an E1 is grey, this means that this stream is available but is not included within the maximum number of TDM Capacity E1 carried by the configured radio frame.
Every Extra E1 Radio channel is represented by the relevant number (121).
For equipment IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0, IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1, IduBoard Xpic
Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0 or IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1 the tab displays the following parameters:
Radio Extra E1. Radio Extra E1 channels.
Tributary. Labels of the E1 tributary. The mapping of the channels is hard-wired:
Radio Extra E1-1 -> Tributary A
Radio Extra E1-2 -> Tributary B
Radio Extra E1-3 -> E1-1 expansion
...
Radio Extra E1-18-> E1-16 expansion
E1 channels of expansion are available only for IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0 and IduBoard Exp.
16E1 Only 1+0/1+1.
Push-button
The push-buttons change according to the equipment type as shown in Tab.8.

See also
192
Tab.8 Push-buttons (Extra TDM Priority tab)

ALCplus2e equipment
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
2xSTM-1 32E1
2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0
2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0/1+1
2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 Only 1+0
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1
16E1 PWE3 Only 1+0
16E1 PWE3
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
2xSTM-1 32E1
2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0/1+1
2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1
16E1 Only 1+0
16E1 Only 1+0/1+1
16E1 PWE3

Push-buttons
Up
Move a single E1 upwards by one place

(higher priority)
Down
Move a single E1 downwards by one

place (lower priority)
1-21
Sort the E1s (from top to bottom) in the

following way: 1, 2, 321
21-1

3-18 1-2

following way: 3, 4, 518, 1, 2, 19, 20,
21
Up

(higher priority)
Down

Up

(higher priority)
Down

1-18

18-1

3-18 1-2

following way: 3, 4, 518, 1, 2
193
Ethernet transport
TDM transport
Priority of dynamic E1 Radio streams (TDM Capacity)
Multiple ACM profiles per modulation
Reference modulation and power profile of the transmitter
Ethernet transport
ALCplus2e equipment assigns all the capacity not assigned to the TDM transport to the Ethernet interface.
Then, in absence of TDM traffic, the Ethernet capacity coincides with the total available capacity.
TDM transport
WARNING This chapter is not meaningful for equipment with IduBoard...PWE3 with the PWE3 function ac-
tive (see Configurator ).

In this condition, the TDM traffic is not made directly available for the Radio channels (the number of static
and dynamic E1s is 0). It is encapsulated into PWE3 channels (see PWE3).
The distribution of TDM traffic depends on the equipment type/configuration, as pointed out in Tab.9.
Tab.9 Distribution of TDM traffic
ALCplus2e equipment
Static E1
(Permanent
TDM Traffic)
Dynamic E1
(TDM Capacity)
E1 by
direction
E1 by
polarization
IduBoard Only 1+0

IduBoard
IduBoard Xpic
80
21
82
2x80
2x21
82
2x80
2x18
82
80
82
2x80
2x2
164
82
18
18
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.

2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0/1+1
2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 Only 1+0 (1)
IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1

IduBoard Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1
(2)
(1) (2)
(2)
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.

2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0/1+1
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
2xSTM-1 32E1
2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1
16E1 PWE3 (2)

(2)

194
(1) (2)
(1)
For this equipment type, when the STM-1 Bulk function is active, the number of static E1 is 0. The parameter cannot be modified. The number of dynamic E1s is automatically limited to allow the transport of
the STM-1 (see STM1 Bulk Config.).
(2)
With PWE3 function inactive (see Configurator). For this type of equipment, when the PWE3 function is
active, the number static and dynamic E1s is 0.
In ALCplus2e equipment of type IduBoard Only 1+0, IduBoard, IduBoard Xpic, IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only
1+0, IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1, IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0 or IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1
Only 1+0/1+1 the TDM traffic is assigned to every ACM profile selecting the number of E1 which must be
transported.
The rules to respect for the setting of TDM traffic are the following:
a. For each ACM profile, the value TDM Capacity must be lower than or equal to Max TDM Cap and
cannot be never greater than 2 or 18 (see Tab.9).
b. When the user sets a value TDM Capacity for an ACM profile, the application automatically
checks and possibly modifies the values TDM Capacity of the higher modulation ACM profiles, in
such a way they result higher than or, at most, equal to the value TDM Capacity set by the user.
In the remaining types of equipment (see Tab.9) the TDM band can be subdivided in two parts: one not
subjected to ACM, destined to the privileged traffic (high priority) (Permanent TDM Traffic), and one subjected to ACM and destined to the lower priority traffic, (TDM Capacity).
The rules to respect for the setting of TDM traffic are the following:
a. The number of high priority E1 traffic channels must be lower than or equal to value displayed
next to the Permanent TDM Traffic box.
b. The value of Permanent TDM Traffic fixes the minimum allowed modulation as it blocks all the
modulations for which Max TDM Cap is lower than Permanent TDM Traffic (the application highlights the minimum allowed modulation as consequence of the value Permanent TDM Traffic set
disabling all the not allowed modulations).
c. For each ACM profile, the value TDM Capacity must be lower than or equal to Max TDM Cap Permanent TDM Traffic and cannot be never greater than 21 or 2 (equipment with XPIC functionality).
d. When the user sets a value TDM Capacity for an ACM profile, the application automatically
checks and possibly modifies the values TDM Capacity of the higher modulation ACM profiles, in
such a way they result higher than or, at most, equal to the value TDM Capacity set by the user.
e. A change of Permanent TDM Traffic can cause a violation of rule c. In this case, the application
only highlights which are the out-of-range values of Max TDM Cap (the wordings of the row of
the ACM profile become red) and the restore of the correct values is at users charge.
Key:
Max TDM Cap. Maximum number of (high and low priority) E1 which can be assigned to the TDM
traffic for each ACM profile.
TDM Capacity Number of (low priority) E1 assigned to each ACM profile.
Permanent TDM Traffic. Number of E1 permanently assigned (high priority streams).
Priority of dynamic E1 Radio streams (TDM Capacity)

WARNING This chapter is not meaningful for equipment with IduBoard...PWE3 with PWE3 function active
(see Configurator ).
The user, via the application, can define the priority of dynamic Radio E1s (TDM Capacity).
This priority determines the modality used to discard the dynamic Radio E1s when the ACM profile changes.
195
Multiple ACM profiles per modulation

When more than one ACM profile (different FEC redundancy) is available at the selected reference modulation (i.e.: 4 QAM and 4 QAM strong), the maximum throughput profile will be automatically selected (i.e.:
4 QAM).
When more than one ACM profile (different FEC redundancy) is available at the selected lower modulation
(i.e.: 4 QAM and 4 QAM strong), the minimum throughput profile will be automatically included (i.e.: 4
QAM strong).
When more than one ACM profile (different FEC redundancy) is available at the selected upper modulation
(i.e.: 4 QAM and 4 QAM strong), the maximum throughput profile will be automatically included (i.e.: 4
QAM).
Reference modulation and power profile of the transmitter

The choice of the reference modulation and of the power profile depends on the license type owned by the
network operator.
The reference modulation determines the emission spectrum to be in compliance with the current laws.
The power profile increasing when the modulation decreases can be enabled according to the standard
ETSI EN 302 217-2-2: the power as function of the modulation can be only lower then or equal to the power
of the reference modulation.
More information is reported in the equipment manual ALCplus2e.
In case of mixed links (ALCplus2e - ALCplus2), the selection of the parameters relevant to modulation and
power profile must match the following requirements:
196
Reference modulation (Bandwidth & Modulation), upper and lower thresholds of Tx modulation
(Lower Modulation, Upper Modulation) must be set to the same values in both the equipment.
The power profile of RF transmitter of ALCplus2e equipment must be set depending on the profile currently in use (which can differ from that set) in equipment ALCplus2 according to what
pointed out here below.
ALCplus2
Tx Power Mode
ALCplus2e
Tx Power Ramp
Average
Disabled
Peak
Ramp to Ref. Modulation
General Preset
For the equipment in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration is present the General Preset command. For the equipment in 2x(1+0) configuration are present the General Preset 1A (radio branch 1 parameters) and General Preset 2A (radio branch 2 parameters) commands.
The General Preset command manages the modem and radio parameters.
Operations
Verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception

Verify/modify the radio branch label
Verify/modify the status of the local/remote synchronization protocol
Verify/modify the enabling status of the switch in transmission
Verify/modify the T and N parameters
Reset the Transmitter Switch on Remote alarm
Verify the enabling status and the configuration of the MCM function
Enable/disable the MCM function for each LAN
Modify the management parameters of the BW-VSM messages (MCM)
GUI
General Preset contextual area

See also
Local/remote synchronization protocol (info)

MCM functionality (info)

1. Select Equipment > General Preset.

The Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold: <current value> dBm parameter indicates the threshold level of
the signal at reception. Under this threshold level, it is activated the relevant alarm.
2. To change the parameter, move the cursor to the wished level.


The Radio Branch Label parameter indicates the label that identifies the radio branch.
2. To change the parameter, type the new label (alphanumeric string with maximum 30 characters).
197


The Synchronization Setup Protocol parameter indicates the state of the local/remote synchronization
protocol.
Enable. The local/remote synchronization protocol is active.
Disable. The local/remote synchronization protocol is inactive.


WARNING Operation available only for the equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration.
For the 1+1 etherofrequential configuration, the operation is not available because the two branches (1
and 2) transmit at the same time as the selection of the signal is made in reception.
The Tx Switch on remote Alarms parameter indicates the enabling of the switch in transmission:
Enable. The switch in transmission as consequence of alarms (BER Alarm, Demodulator Fail
Alarm) in reception of the remote equipment is enabled.
Disable. The switch in transmission as consequence of alarms (BER Alarm, Demodulator Fail
Alarm) in reception of the remote equipment is not enabled.


WARNING Operation available only for the equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration.
For the 1+1 etherofrequential configuration, the operation is not available because the two branches (1
and 2) transmit at the same time as the selection of the signal is made in reception.
When the enabling status of the switch in transmission is active (Tx Switch on remote Alarms - Enable),
this switch is executed when the number of alarmed seconds is > N within a time interval T. With number of alarmed seconds we mean the seconds when an alarm condition takes place contemporarily on
both the Rx of the remote equipment.
The box:
Check Period indicates the time interval T (expressed in seconds) when the number of alarmed
seconds must be > N so that the switch in transmission takes place.
Alarm Thres indicates the number of alarmed seconds N.
2. To change the parameters, type the new values in the relevant boxes (Check Period box: value between
1 and 300; Alarm Thres: value between 1 and 60).
198
Reset the Transmitter Switch on Remote alarm

WARNING Operation available only for the equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration. For the 1+1
etherofrequential configuration, the operation is not available because the two branches (1 and 2) transmit
at the same time as the selection of the signal is made in reception.

2. Press Alarm Reset and confirm.
The alarm is reset.
The Transmitter Switch on Remote alarm notifies the switch in transmission as consequence of alarms
on the signal received from the remote equipment.

2. Select the MCM tab.
The tab displays the enabling status and the configuration of the MCM function.


The MCM Enable area displays the enabling status of the MCM function for the each LAN.
The active box ( ) indicates that the BW-VSM messages are managed by the LAN, the inactive box
indicates that the messages are not managed.
3. To change a parameter, check or uncheck the relevant box.


3. Set the Tag 802.1Q VLAN value in the TX VLan ID box (value between 2 and 4094). By default, the
BW-VSM message is sent untagged (value 0).
4. Set the Maintenance Level of the OAM domain in the TX OAM Maint. Level box (value between 0 and
7). Default 0.
This setting involves even the change of the destination MAC address of the BW-VSM message because
this address corresponds to the CCM multicast address for the associated OAM maintenance level.
5. In the Fading Hold Off (s) box, set the waiting period (in seconds) before declaring Fading and starting
the transmission of BW-VSM messages (value between 10 and 60). Default 10 seconds.
6. In the TX Period box, set the transmission period (in seconds) between one BW-VSM message and the
next one (1, 10 or 60 seconds). Default 10 seconds.
199
7. In the BW Tx Type box, set the criterion used to calculate the band value available within every transmission period (Tx Period):
Average. The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the average value of the available
band within the observation period.
Min. The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the minimum value of the available band
within the observation period.
Max. The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the maximum value of the available band
within the observation period.
200
General Preset contextual area

WARNING For equipment in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration, the General Preset command is available which
opens the General Preset contextual area.
For equipment in 2x(1+0) configuration, the commands General Preset 1A, which opens the General Preset 1A contextual area containing the parameters relevant to radio 1, and General Preset 2A, which
opens the General Preset 2A contextual area containing the parameters relevant to radio 2, are available.
The contextual area displays the modem and radio parameters.
Tabs
General tab. Modem and radio parameters.

MCM tab. MCM function configuration.
Push-button

General tab
The tab displays the modem and radio parameters.
Parameters
Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the signal at reception.
Radio Branch Label. Label that identifies the radio branch.
Synchronization Setup Protocol. Status of the local/remote synchronization protocol:
Enable. The local/remote synchronization protocol is active.
Disable. The local/remote synchronization protocol is inactive.
If the equipment is in 1+1 isofrequential configuration, the context contains even the following
parameters.
Tx Switch on remote Alarms. Enabling status of the switch in transmission as consequences
of alarms (BER Alarm, Demodulator Fail Alarm) on the signal received from the equipment
located at the other side of the link (remote equipment):
Disable. The switch is not enabled.
Enable. The switch is enabled.
In this condition the switch is executed when the number of alarmed seconds is > N within a
time interval T.
With number of alarmed seconds we mean the seconds when an alarm condition takes place
contemporarily on both the Rx of the remote equipment.
Check Period Time interval T (expressed in seconds) when the number of alarmed seconds
must be > N so that the switch in transmission takes place.
Alarm Thres Number of alarmed seconds N.
Push-button
Alarm Reset. Reset the Transmitter Switch on Remote alarm.

The Transmitter Switch on Remote alarm notifies the switch in transmission as consequence
of alarms on the signal received from the remote equipment.
Push-button present only if for equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration.
201
See also

MCM tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the MCM (MW Capacity Management) function.
Parameters
LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4 (MCM Enable area). Respectively enabling status of the MCM function for the LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 and LAN 4.
The active box ( ) indicates that the BW-VSM messages are managed by the LAN, the inactive
box indicates that the messages are not managed.
TX VLan ID. Tag 802.1Q VLAN value. By default, the BW-VSM message is sent untagged (value
0).
TX OAM Maint. Level. Maintenance Level of the OAM domain. By default, the BW-VSM message is associated with Maintenance Level 0.
Fading Hold Off (s). Waiting period (in seconds) before declaring Fading and starting the
transmission of BW-VSM messages Default 10 seconds.
TX Period (s). Transmission period (in seconds) between one BW-VSM message and the next
one. Default 10 seconds.
BW Tx Type. Criterion used to calculate the band value available within every transmission period (Tx Period):
Average. The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the average value of the
available band within the observation period.
Min. The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the minimum value of the available band within the observation period.
Max. The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the maximum value of the
available band within the observation period.
Default Average.
See also

202

The local/remote synchronization protocol (Synchronization Setup Protocol) is a functionality allowing the
management the change of radio configuration between two pieces of equipment connected by link, in such
a way to reduce the out-of-service time at each repartition of the available radio band and to keep the
supervision on the remote equipment active.
This management works in the following way.
When a parameter is changed is the local (or remote) equipment, the change is not immediately executed,
but it is freezed.
The system raises the alarm RADIO Local-Remote Terminal Setup Mismatch to signal to the user that a
mismatch is present between the radio configuration of the local equipment and that of the remote equipment.
The alarm remains active until the operator executes the same change in the equipment located at the
other side of the link.
When the change is executed in the remote equipment, the same change is automatically executed even
in the local equipment, becoming then effective on both the equipment of the link.
The radio parameters, whose change is managed by the local/remote synchronization protocol as described above, are the following (see BW & Mod./Link ID):
Reference modulation (Bandwidth & Modulation).
Profile mask (Lower Modulation - Upper Modulation).
ACM (ACM Engine).
Number high-priority channels (Permanent TDM Traffic).
Number of low-priority channels of every profile (TDM Capacity).
Priority of Extra TDM channels (Extra TDM Priority).
The local/remote synchronization protocol, when active, besides the management of the change of the radio parameters, allows managing the radio configuration of the equipment in the link when the alarm RADIO Link Telemetry Fail is present.
This alarm, if it is the only radio alarm active, indicates a mismatch on the band repartition between the
two pieces of equipment.
In this condition, the modality called Rescue setup is automatically activated, which forces both the equipment to the following condition:
Modulation: 4QAM (respecting ETSI spectral masks)
Radio traffic: all Ethernet
The activation of the Rescue setup modality is pointed out by the activation of the alarm RADIO Rescue
Setup Active.
The alarm is removed when the operator realigns the radio parameters in both the equipment of the link.
The synchronization protocol can be enabled and disabled by the user (see Verify/modify the status of the
local/remote synchronization protocol).
By default, the protocol is enabled.
If the user disables it, it remains disabled until the user re-enables it.
In equipment in 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration, enabling/
disabling executed on a branch is automatically reported even on the other branch.
The local/remote synchronization is implemented by a proprietary protocol. It is meaningful and available
for the radio equipment of type ALCplus2e, ALCplus2 or ALplus2.
203

The transmission capacity of a radio equipment depends on the propagation condition of the radio channels.
In case of Ethernet ring, the signal degradation can affect one side of the ring, while the other side continues working at rated capacity.
In case of network congestion, the radio will give priority to Ethernet traffic, reducing or eliminating the
low priority traffic.
Similar situation can be found even in other network typologies where the changes of the bandwidth must
be communicated to the upstream Ethernet Switches/Routers in order to adjust the relevant traffic.
By knowing the capacity of the radio link, external equipment can optimize the transport on ring networks
or select additional criteria for the quality management.
The Capacity Management MW (MCM) function allows achieving optimized performances even in the worst
conditions of radio propagation, because it allows forwarding traffic on the Ethernet ring according to the
bandwidth available for every ring branch.
The function is based on a protocol used by the equipment to notify the changes in the capacity to connect
the Ethernet Switch/Router which, on its time, applies the relevant forwarding rules.
The notifications take place by means of OAM (Ethernet-Operations, Administration and Maintenance) type
messages which signal the changes in the band availability (BW-VSM messages).
Through the management (transmission and reception) of these messages and the proper configuration of
the forwarding rules, the ring will be able to change the traffic profile to take the degraded path in consideration.
As regards the MCM function, through the WEB LCT page, it is possible to:
Enable/disable the management of the BW-VSM messages at level of single LAN.
Define the parameters for the forwarding of the BW-VSM messages:
Tag 802.1Q VLAN value (TX VLan ID parameter). By default, the BW-VSM message is
sent untagged (value 0).
Maintenance Level of the OAM domain (TX OAM Maint. Level parameter). By default, the
BW-VSM message is associated with Maintenance Level 0.
This setting involves the change of the destination MAC address of the BW-VSM message
because this address corresponds to the CCM multicast address for the associated OAM
maintenance level.
Waiting period (in seconds) before declaring Fading and starting the transmission of the
BW-VSM messages (Fading Hold Off (s) parameter). The default waiting period is 10 seconds.
Transmission period between one BW-VSM message and the next one (TX Period (s) parameter). The default waiting period is 10 seconds.
Criterion used to calculate the band value available within every transmission period (Tx
Period): average, minimum or maximum value (BW Tx Type parameter). By default, the
BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the average value of the band available during the observation period (Average).
See also
204
Xpic
WARNING Command available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth.
Dual Pipe radio configuration.

The Xpic command manages the XPIC function.
Operations
Verify the configuration parameters of the XPIC function

Disable temporarily the function XPIC for a single branch
Restore the XPIC function of the single branch
Enable/disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP)
Restore the function XPIC after a fault detection
GUI
Xpic contextual area

See also
XPIC function (info)
Verify the configuration parameters of the XPIC function

1. Select Equipment > Xpic.

The Xpic contextual area displays the configuration parameters of the XPIC function.

User Profile | Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

2. To disable temporarily the function XPIC of:
Branch 1, select the Disable value (Radio 1A parameter).
Branch 2, select the Disable value (Radio 2A parameter).
3. Press Apply.
A message warns that you are executing a forcing and shows the current setting of timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.
The activation of the forcing activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from the previous setting.

205
2. To restore the XPIC function of the:
Branch 1, select the Enable value (Radio 1A parameter).
Branch 2, select the Enable value (Radio 2A parameter).


2. To ENABLE the fault management procedure (FMP), select the value Enable (Fault Management Procedure parameter).
To DISABLE the fault management procedure (FMP), select the value Disable (Fault Management Procedure parameter).
Restore the function XPIC after a fault detection


2. Press Reset Procedure and confirm.
206
Xpic contextual area

WARNING Contextual area available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic
Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration.
The contextual area displays the configuration parameters of the XPIC function.
Parameters
Radio 1A (area Xpic). Activation of XPIC function for branch 1:
Enable. Function active.
Disable. Function temporarily deactivated (manual operation).
Radio 2A (area Xpic). Activation of XPIC function for branch 2:
Enable. Function active.
Disable. Function temporarily deactivated (manual operation).
Fault Management Procedure. Status of XPIC fault management procedure (FMP):
Enable. FMP procedure is active.
Disable. FMP procedure is inactive.
When XPIC fault management procedure is active, the detection of a fault on a branch and the consequent action automatically executed by FMP procedure to save the other branch are pointed out
by the faults present in the Fault Management Procedure area.
If a box becomes red, orange, yellow, light blue or green (depending on the severity of the relevant
to the relevant alarm), the box:
Remote Xpic Proc. Radio 1A Tx Off, indicates that, as consequence of the detection of a fault
on receiver of branch 1 of remote terminal, FMP procedure has switched off the transmitter of
branch 1 of local terminal.
Xpic Proc. Block on Radio 1A, indicates that, as consequence of the detection of a fault on
receiver of branch 2 of remote terminal or on receiver of branch 2 of local terminal, FMP procedure has forced the disabling of XPIC function of branch 1 of local terminal.
Remote Xpic Proc. Radio 2A Tx Off, indicates that, as consequence of the detection of a fault
on receiver of branch 2 of remote terminal, FMP procedure has switched off the transmitter of
branch 2 of local terminal.
Xpic Proc. Block on Radio 2A, indicates that, as consequence of the detection of a fault on
receiver of branch 1 of remote terminal or on receiver of branch 1 of local terminal, FMP procedure has forced the disabling of XPIC function of branch 2 of local terminal.
When the box is grey, this means that the specific fault has not been detected.
Push-button

Reset Procedure. Restore the function XPIC after a fault detection
See also

207

The function XPIC (Crosspolar Interference Canceller) is a modem functionality which allows using the double polarization (vertical and horizontal) in the transmission system.
In this way, exploiting two polarizations, the transmission capacity of the radio link can be double using a
single frequency.
In relation to XPIC function, through WEB LCT page it is possible:
To disable temporarily the function XPIC for every single branch (Disable temporarily the function XPIC for a single branch) and then to re-enable it (Restore the XPIC function of the single
branch).
Disabling the function XPIC is a manual operation (MAN. OP). Remember that, if the timeout of
the manual operations is inactive, the function XPIC remains disabled until when it is restored
by the user.
To enable and disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP) (see Enable/disable XPIC fault
management procedure (FMP).
In case of detection and signalling of a fault, the function XPIC can be restored (see Restore the
function XPIC after a fault detection).
Purpose of the FMP (Fault Management Procedure) procedure is to identify a malfunction caused
by equipment faults and by equipment faults and to preserve the horizontal or vertical branch
where there are not problems
The procedure differentiates the alarms due to external causes (e.g., fading) from those due to
equipment faults.
The activation of the FMP procedure involves the switch-off of a transmitter and the disabling of
the Xpic inputs.
The condition is permanent and only an operator by means of WEB LCT or NMS5UX-B/
NMS5LX can restore the condition.
208
STM1 Bulk Config.

WARNING Command available only for equipment with a specific type of IDU/configuration (see STM-1
Bulk function (info)) and if STM-1 transport function is enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).
The STM1 Bulk Config. command manages the STM-1 Bulk function which allows transporting the equipment STM-1 transparently.
Operations
Verify/modify the status of the STM-1 Bulk function

GUI
STM1 Bulk Config. contextual area

See also
STM-1 Bulk function (info)

WARNING This function can be enabled only for equipment with a specific configuration (see
STM-1 Bulk
function (info).
1. Select Equipment > STM1 Bulk Config.
The Radio 1A and Radio 2A parameters respectively point out the status of the STM-1 Bulk function of
the radio branch 1 and radio branch 2:
Disable. Function disable.
STM-1 1. Function enable for the first STM-1.
STM-1 2. Function enable for the second STM-1.

Value available only if the management of the two STM-1 in MST mode is enabled.
The Radio 2A parameter is available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) radio configuration.
2. To change a parameter, select the relevant box and then the wished option.
If a value is set for the Radio 1A parameter this value will not be available for the Radio 2A parameter
and vice versa.
209
STM1 Bulk Config. contextual area

The contextual area displays the configuration of the STM-1 Bulk function.
Parameters
Radio 1A. Enabling status of the STM-1 Bulk function for radio branch 1:

Radio 2A. Enabling status of the STM-1 Bulk function for radio branch 2:

Parameter available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) radio configuration.

Push-button

See also

210

The STM-1 Bulk function allows the transparent transport of a STM-1 in Radio.
With transparent transport we mean the transport of the whole STM-1. The user cannot execute changes
or configurations on the single virtual containers of the stream.
For equipment in radio configuration 2x(1+0), the transport of the STM-1 can be enabled on radio branch
1 or on radio branch 2. Moreover, if two STM-1 streams are managed, it is possible to enable the transport
of the first STM-1 on one branch and the transport of the second STM-1 on the other branch.
The STM-1 Bulk function is available only with equipment type (see Equipment Units tab):
The STM-1 Bulk function can be activated only if the equipment has the following configuration:
Radio equipped in 1+0 or 1+1 configuration (see Configurator tab)
Band/modulation which allows the transport of the STM-1 (see Modulation & Capacity tab).
ACM disable:
28MHz - 256 QAM
ACM enable:
40MHz - 64 QAM
40MHz - 128 QAM
40MHz - 256 QAM
56MHz - 16 QAM
56MHz - 32 QAM
56MHz - 64 QAM
56MHz - 128 QAM
56MHz - 256 QAM
STM-1 in MST modality (see Configurator tab, STM-1 MST Mode: 1+0).
Synchronisation management enabled (see Configurator tab).
PWE3 function disable (see Configurator tab).
Local/remote synchronization protocol disabled (see General tab).
The activation of the STM-1 Bulk function determines that:
For the STM-1 for which the function has been activated, the following items will be not available
any more:
The relevant PM measure (G828 Vc12 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2TUG12>).
The command for the management of the relevant VC-4 (see VC-4).
The command for the management of the relevant VC-12 (see VC-12).
The management of the stream in the Cross-Connection matrix (see Cross Connection).
Moreover, it will not be possible to:
Force the quality level in input and/or output of the specific synchronism source (see Synchronisation).
For the radio which the transport of the STM-1 is assigned to:
The static Radio E1 channels (Permanent TDM Traffic) are automatically reset.
The dynamic Radio E1 channels are limited to allow the transport of the STM-1.
If the equipment is in radio configuration 2x(1+0), for the parameter STM-1 MST Mode only the
values 1+0 and 2 x (1+0) MST are available (see Configurator).
The monitoring of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH ring, if active, is automatically deactivated (see Configurator).
211
SYNCHRONISATION
WARNING Command available only if the synchronisation management is enabled (see Configurator).
The Synchronisation command manages the sources and the outputs of synchronism
Operations
T0
AND
T4
SYNCHRONISM
Verify the status and configuration of the T0 and T4 synchronism

Force the status of the T0 synchronisation
Set the modality from which the T4 synchronism is extracted
Enable/disable the T4 Squelch
Set the Hold Off Time parameter
Set the WTR Time parameter
Set the threshold levels of the LTI alarm
Enable/disable the use of the source quality into the choice criterion of the synchronism
Set the minimum quality level of the source that generates the T4 synchronism
SYNCHRONISM
SOURCES
Verify the status and configuration of the synchronism sources

Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source
Modify the use priority of a synchronism source
Force the use of a synchronism source
Set a synchronism source as preferential
Set the signal used as synchronism source for T2/T3-2 input
Set the signal used as synchronism source for TE LAN-A or TE LAN-B input
Set the source used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL A or STM-1/NODAL B input
Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source
Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without waiting for the expiry of Wait Time
Manage the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and set the interface (output/input) of
tributary A/B
Re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation
Verify/modify the spare bit used for the coding of quality for T2/T3 E1 synchronism sources
Verify/modify the modality to assign the role of the LANs (1000Base-T) used as synchronism
sources
Verify/modify the management of SSM protocol for every single LAN
GUI
Synchronisation contextual area

See also
Synchronisation (info)
Verify the status and configuration of the T0 and T4 synchronism

1. Select Synchronisation.
The General tab displays the configuration parameters and the alarms status of the T0 and T4 synchronism.
212

The Status Control parameter indicates the status of T0 synchronism:
Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is generated by the equipment internal reference - Internal Source).
Hold Over. The status of Hold Over is forced.
Locked. The synchronism is locked to an external source.

3. Press Apply.
Only if you are activating the forcing (selection of the Free Running or Hold Over option) a message
warns that you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.

The T0-T4 parameter indicates the modality which the T4 synchronism is taken from:
T4-NE-T0. Synchronism T4 is taken from one of the synchronism sources because two independent locking devices are used to generate T0 and T4.
T4-EQ-T0. Synchronism T4 is taken from synchronism T0 because only one locking device is
used to generate T0 and T4.


The T4 Squelch parameter indicates the status of the T4 squelch:
Disabled. The squelch of the T4 synchronism is disabled
Enabled. The squelch of the T4 synchronism is enabled. This function becomes active when
source T2/T3 1 has been selected for T0/T4 management.


213
The Hold Off Time parameter indicates the time (expressed in ms) during which the system keeps the
evaluated frequency of an invalid synchronism source (absent or degraded).
At the end of the Hold Off time, the invalid source will be rejected and it will be used the first input
source having a valid signal.
2. To change the parameter, set into the box a value between 300 and 1800 msec.

The WTR Time parameter indicates the time (expressed in minutes) that has to pass in such a way to
allow to the selected input source having a valid signal to be really used within the process for the selection of T0 synchronism.
2. To change the parameter, set a value between 0 and 12 min.

The LTI Set Time and LTI Reset Time parameters point out the threshold level of LTI alarm (Timing
Synk Loss Alarm):
LTI Set Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds with the presence
of the LTI alarm - over which the system activates the alarm itself.
LTI Reset Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds without the
presence of the LTI alarm - over which the system deactivates the alarm itself.
2. To change the parameter, set the new values in the specific boxes (allowed interval between 0 and 60
seconds).
Enable/disable the use of the source quality into the choice criterion of the
synchronism
The parameter Enabled indicates the status of use of the source quality level as synchronism selection
criterion.
Active box (
) means the use is enabled; inactive box means the use is disabled.
Parameter available only if the Sync quality management functionality is enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).
2. To change the parameter, check or uncheck the relevant box.
214
WARNING Operation available only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism,
is enabled.
The T4 Minimum Quality indicates the minimum quality level of the source that generates the T4 synchronism so that the Squelch does not occur.
PRC. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.
SSUT. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that
defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.
SSUL. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that
defines the parameters of the local synchronism units.
SEC. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the equipment clock.
Verify the status and configuration of the synchronism sources

Depending on the used locking devices, the tabs T0/T4, T0 and T4 are available.
Tab T0/T4 is available when only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4
(T4-EQ-T0). In this case, the status and the configuration of the sources present in the tab is valid for
both synchronisms T0 and T4.
Tab T0 and tab T4 are available when two locking devices are used to generate the synchronisms T0
and T4 (T4-NE-T0). In this case, the status and the configuration of the sources present in the tab T0
is valid only for synchronism T0; while those present in tab T4 are valid only for synchronism T4.
The content of T0/T4, T0 and T4 tab, described here below, is the same.

The presence of the tab:
T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.
T0 and T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. In this case, the operation
executed in tab T0 is valid only for synchronism T0 and that executed in tab T4 is valid only for
synchronism T4.
2. Select the T0/T4, T0 or T4 tab.

The Priority column shows the usage status of each source.
3. To enable the use of a source, select the specific Priority box and then a number between 1 and 9 according to the desired priority level to be assigned to the source (1: maximum priority, 9: minimum
priority).
215
To disable the use of the source, select the specific Priority box and then the Dis. value.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

WARNING Operation available only if the use of the synchronism source is active.
synchronism T4.
synchronism T4.

The Priority column shows the priority level of each source.
3. To change the priority level of a source, select the specific Priority box and then a number between 1
and 9 according to the desired priority level to be assigned to the source (1: maximum priority, 9: minimum priority).

Operation meaningful only if the use of the synchronism source is active.

synchronism T4.
synchronism T4.

The Forced Switch column shows the forcing status of each source.
3. To change the forcing status of a source, select the specific Forced Switch box and then the option:
Off, not to force the use of the source for the generation of the synchronism.
On, to force the use of the source for the generation of the synchronism.

4. Press Apply changes.
Only if you are activating the forcing a message warns that you are executing a forcing and displays
the current setting of timeout.
216

WARNING Operation meaningful only if the use of the synchronism source is active.
synchronism T4.
synchronism T4.

The Preferential Switch column shows if the source is used as preferential.
3. To change the preferential status of a source, select the specific Preferential Switch box and then the
option:
Off. The synchronism source is not preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism
sources.
On. The synchronism source is preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism sources and (in absence of alarms causing its degrade or forced sources) is used for the generation
of the synchronism.


synchronism T4.
T0 e T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. Even in this case the operation
is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and synchronism T4 because the selection of the
source type is made upstream with respect to locking devices. This means that the setting made,
for example, in tab T0 is automatically reported in tab T4 and vice versa.

The box Source of source T2/T3-2 indicates the type of source currently in use:
Trib. B. Second E1 of the base board (tributary B) (T3 or T2).
Trib. <number>. E1 of the expansion (T2).
3. To change the parameter, select the Source box and then the wished option.
217
synchronism T4.

The box Source of the source TE LAN-A and TE LAN-B indicates the currently used LAN of Ethernet
Switch for every specific source: LAN-1, LAN-2, LAN-3, LAN-4.
Sources available only if the Sync eth support functionality is enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).
If a value is set for the source TE LAN-A this value will not be available for the source TE LAN-B and
vice versa.
Set the source used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL A or STM-1/NODAL B

input
WARNING Operation available only for equipment with the management of the STM-1 and/or the management of the nodal configuration is active (see Configurator).
synchronism T4.

The box Source of source STM-1/NODAL A or STM-1/NODAL B indicates the type of source currently in
use:
STM-1 [1] or STM-1. First STM-1.
STM-1 [2]. Second STM-1.
Nodal 1. First Nodal Bus.
Nodal 2. Second Nodal Bus.
The availability of the values changes depending on the type and on the configuration of the equipment
as depicted in Tab.10.
If a value is set for the source STM-1/NODAL A, this value will not be available for the source STM-1/
NODAL B and vice versa.
218

WARNING Operation available only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism,
is enabled.
Operation not available for the STM-1 source if the STM-1 Bulk function is active for the specific stream
(see STM1 Bulk Config.).
synchronism T4.
synchronism T4.

For every synchronism source, the parameter Ovw Rx Qlty indicates the forcing status of the quality
level in reception; while the parameter Ovw Tx Qlty indicates the forcing status of the quality level in
transmission.
3. To change the parameters, select the Ovw Rx Qlty or Ovw Tx Qlty box and than the option:
none. The quality of the synchronism source is not forced. The quality is that taken from the
SSM protocol or, for the sources that do not use the SSM protocol (T2/T3 1 and T2/T3 2 sources), the default one (SEC).
PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.
SSUT. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.
SSUL. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the local synchronism units.
SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the equipment clock.
DNU. The source has not to be used for the synchronization.

Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism

without waiting for the expiry of Wait Time
synchronism T4.
synchronism T4.

3. Select the source, with valid signal, whose availability you wish to restore for the generation of T0 synchronism.
4. Press Wtr Clear and confirm.
The source is immediately used for the generation of T0 synchronism. The period Wtr Time is considered elapsed.
219
Manage the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and set the interface (output/input) of tributary A/B
WARNING The setting of the tributary (A or B) as output of synchronism T12 compromises the use of the
tributary (A or B) as traffic tributary.

2. Select the E1 Source Type tab.
The Trib. A and Trib. B boxes respectively point out the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A and B.
3. To change the parameters select, in the box relevant to the wished tributary, the option:
T2 (NORMAL TRAFFIC). The tributary (A or B) is used for the transport of the traffic only or for
the contemporary transport of synchronism and traffic if properly set (see Re-timing the E1s set
for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation).
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2Mbit/s as interface for
the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source.
T3 (2Mb/s). The tributary (A or B) is used as output of synchronism T12 with interface 2Mbit/s.
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2Mbit/s as interface for
the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source.
T3 (2MHz). The tributary (A or B) is used as output of synchronism T12 with interface 2MHz.
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2MHz as interface for the
tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source.
WARNING Here below only the operation of re-timing of the E1s of equipment is described. For the correct
configuration of the functionality for a radio link see Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation.
2. Select the E1 Retiming tab.
The table present in the tab displays the activation status of the function E1 re-timing for every E1
equipment tributary.
Every row of the table corresponds to a tributary for which is displayed in the column:
Name. Tributary label:
E1 A. First E1 of base board (tributary A).
E1 B. Second E1 of base board (tributary B).
E1 <number>. E1 of expansion.
E1 Retiming. Status of E1 re-timing function of the tributary:
Off. The E1 re-timing function is inactive.
On. The E1 re-timing function is active.
Sync Alarm. Sync Alarm status. The Sync Alarm, when the E1 re-timing function is active, indicates whether the operation failed (alarm activated) or it was successful (alarm deactivated).
220
3. To change status of E1 re-timing function of a tributary, select the specific E1 Retiming box and then
the wished option.
Pressing Revert changes cancels the change executed.
WARNING Operation meaningful only:
If the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism, is enabled.
For framed E1 (2Mbit/s).
2. Select the T2/T3 E1 SA Bit/1000Base-T Role tab.
In the E1 Time Slot 0 Spare Bits area, the T2/T3 1 and T2/T3 2 boxes respectively point out the spare
bit of timeslot 0 of the E1 frame used for the coding of the quality level of the sources T2/T3 1 and T2/
T3 2: Sa4, Sa5, Sa6, Sa7 or Sa8.
3. To change the parameters, select the T2/T3 1 or T2/T3 2 box and then the Sa4, Sa5, Sa6, Sa7 or Sa8
option.
Verify/modify the modality to assign the role of the LANs (1000Base-T) used
as synchronism sources
WARNING Operation meaningful only:
If the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism, is enabled.
For LANs with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is active and the active configuration is 1000Base-T.
2. Select the T2/T3 E1 SA Bit/1000Base-T Role tab.
In the 1000Base-T Role area, the boxes TE LAN-A and TE LAN-B respectively point out the modality
used to assign the role (Master or Slave) of the LANs set for the synchronism sources TE LAN-A and TE
LAN-B:
According to synch direction. The assignment of role Master or Slave of the line synchronism is
automatically managed by SSM protocol independently from the port parameter.
As set up for source LAN. The assignment of role Master or Slave of the line synchronism is defined at level of LAN (see Verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) for
the LAN).

The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the Sync eth support functionality is not enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).
221

WARNING Operation meaningful only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchro-
nism, is enabled.
2. Select the LAN SSM Enabling tab.
The parameters LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 and LAN 4 respectively point out the enabling status of the management of the SSM messages for the LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 and LAN 4.
The active box ( ) indicates that the SSM messages are managed by the LAN, the inactive box indicates that the messages are not managed.
3. To change a parameter, check or uncheck the relevant box.
222
Synchronisation contextual area

The contextual area displays status and configuration of the sources and the outputs of synchronism.
Tabs
General tab. Configuration and alarms status of the T0 and T4 synchronism.

T0/T4, T0 and T4 tab. Configuration and status of the synchronism sources.
E1 Source Type tab. Parameters to manage the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and
set the interface (output/input) of tributary A/B.
E1 Retiming tab. Parameters to re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic
and synchronisation.
T2/T3 E1 SA Bit / 1000Base-T Role tab. Parameters for the management of the sources T2/T3
1, T2/T3 2, TE LAN-A and TE LAN-B when the use of the source quality level as criterion for the
selection of the synchronism is active.
LAN SSM Enabling tab. Enabling status of the SSM messages for the LANs.
Push-button

See also
General tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters and the alarms status of the T0 and T4 synchronism.
Parameters
Alarms area. Alarms status of the T0 synchronism (Free Running, Hold Over and T0 boxes) and
T4 synchronism (T4 box). The colour of each box displays the status of the specific alarm:
Status Control (Settings area). Status of T0 synchronism:
Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is generated by

the equipment internal reference - Internal Source).
T4 Squelch (Settings area). Status of the T4 squelch:
Disabled. The squelch of the T4 synchronism is disabled.
Enabled. The squelch of the T4 synchronism is enabled. This function becomes active
when source T2/T3 1 has been selected for T0/T4 management.
T4-T0 (Settings area). Modality which the T4 synchronism is taken from:
T4-NE-T0. Synchronism T4 is taken from one of the synchronism sources because two
independent locking devices are used to generate T0 and T4.
T4-EQ-T0. Synchronism T4 is taken from synchronism T0 because only one locking

device is used to generate T0 and T4.
Hold Off Time (area Time). Time (expressed in ms) during which the system keeps the evaluated frequency of an invalid synchronism source (absent or degraded). At the end of the Hold
Off time, the invalid source will be rejected and it will be used the first input source having a
valid signal.
223
WTR Time (area Time). Time (expressed in minutes) that has to pass in such a way to allow to
the selected input source having a valid signal to be really used within the process for the selection of T0 synchronism.
LTI Set Time / LTI Reset Time (area Time). Threshold level of LTI alarm (TimingSynkLossAlarm):
LTI Set Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds with the
presence of the LTI alarm - over which the system activates the alarm itself.
LTI Reset Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds without the presence of the LTI alarm - over which the system deactivates the alarm itself.
T0 Current (Quality area). Current quality level of the T0 synchronism:
UNK. The quality level is unavailable or unknown.
PRC. The quality of the T0 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.
SSUT. The quality of the T0 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.
SSUL. The quality of the T0 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the local synchronism units.
SEC. The quality of the T0 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the equipment clock.
Generally, the quality of the T0 synchronism corresponds to the quality of the synchronism
which T0 is derived from.
T4 Current (area Quality). Current quality level of the T4 synchronism.
DNU. The source has not to be used for the synchronization (equivalent to condition
of T4 squelch).
Enabled (Quality area). Status of use of source quality level as synchronism selection criterion.
Active box ( ) means the source quality level is used as synchronism selection criterion; inactive box means the quality level is used as selection criterion.
T4 Minimum Quality (area Quality). Minimum quality level of the source that generates the T4
synchronism so that the Squelch does not occur:
WARNING The T0 Current, T4 Current and T4 Minimum Quality parameters are meaningful only if the use
of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism, is enabled.
Quality area is available only if the Sync quality management functionality is enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).
See also

224

T0/T4, T0 and T4 tab

The tabs display the configuration parameters and the status of the synchronism sources.
Depending on the used locking devices, the tabs T0/T4, T0 and T4 are available.
Tabs
T0/T4. Tab available when only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0
and T4 (T4-EQ-T0). In this case, the status and the configuration of the sources present in the
tab is valid for both synchronisms T0 and T4.
T0 and T4. Tabs available when two locking devices are used to generate the synchronisms T0
and T4 (T4-NE-T0). In this case, the status and the configuration of the sources present in the
tab T0 is valid only for synchronism T0; while those present in tab T4 are valid only for synchronism T4.
The content of tabs T0/T4, T0 and T4 is the same.
The table present in the specific tab displays the sources for the synchronism T0 and/or T4. Every
row corresponds to one source.
Parameters
Name. Synchronism source name:
T2/T3 1 [Interface]. Source extracted from the tributary A. The interface is pointed
out between square brackets. It can be T3 or T2.
T2/T3-2 [Interface]. Source extracted from tributary B or from one of the E1 of the
expansion. The interface is pointed out between square brackets. It can be T3 (tributary B only) or T2.
TE LAN-A. First source extracted from one of LANs of Ethernet Switch.
TE LAN-B. Second source extracted from one of LANs of Ethernet Switch.
STM-1/NODAL A. First source extracted from the STM-1 (1 or 2) or from the Nodal
Bus (1 or 2).
STM-1/NODAL B. Second source extracted from the STM-1 (1 or 2) or from the Nodal
Bus (1 or 2).
STM-1 [1] or STM-1. Source extracted from the first STM-1 tributary.
STM-1 [2]. Source extracted from the second STM-1 tributary.
Nodal 1. Source extracted from the Nodal Bus 1.
Nodal 2. Source extracted from the Nodal Bus 2.
RADIO 1A. Source extracted from the Radio 1A.
RADIO 2A. Source extracted from the Radio 2A.
Internal. Source extracted from an its own internal reference (12,8MHz STRATUM 3).
This source is valid only for synchronism T0, so it will be present only in tabs T0/T4
or T0. The Internal source has not configuration parameters.
The detail of the signal/configuration relevant to every single s source and the availability of the
source depending on the type/configuration of the equipment is pointed out in Tab.10.
TE LAN-A and TE LAN-B sources are available only if the Sync eth support functionality is enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).
Source. Source type used as synchronism:
Trib. A. First E1 of the base board (tributary A) (2MHz or 2Mb/s).
Trib. B. Second E1 of the base board (tributary B) (2MHz or 2Mb/s).
225
Trib. <number>. E1 of the expansion (2Mb/s interface).
LAN-1, LAN-2, LAN-3, LAN-4. Respectively first, second, third and fourth LAN of the
Ethernet Switch. LAN 3 and LAN 4 are available when configured both with electrical
and optical interface.
STM-1 [1] or STM-1. First STM-1.
STM-1 [2]. Second STM-1.
Nodal 1. First Nodal Bus.
Nodal 2. Second Nodal Bus.
Priority. Status and priority use of the source:
Dis. The synchronism source is not used.
<1 9>. The synchronism source is enabled and has a priority level pointed out by
the number (1: maximum priority, 9: minimum priority).
Forced Switch. Forced use of the source:
Off. The source has not been manually forced for the generation of the T0 and/or T4
synchronism.
On <light blue box>. The source has been manually forced for the generation of the
T0 and/or T4 synchronism (Manual Operation).
Preferential Switch. Status of preferential usage of the source:
Off. The synchronism source is not preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism sources.
On. The synchronism source is preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism sources and (in absence of alarms causing its degrade or forced sources) is used
for the generation of the synchronism.
Sync Loss / Sync Drift. Respectively status of the alarm Timing Synk Loss Alarm and Timing
Synk Drift Alarm relevant to the source. The colour of each box displays the status of the specific
alarm:
Rx Quality. Quality level in reception of the source:
PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the primary reference clock.
SSUT. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the transit synchronism units.
SSUL. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the local synchronism units.
SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the equipment clock.
The quality level in reception for STM-1 is in compliance with the SSM protocol, while for E1
(2Mbit/s and 2MHz) it is SEC.
Tx Quality. Quality level in transmission of the source.
The quality level in transmission of the synchronism source in input is the result of the protocol
calculation.
The displayed values are the same described for the Rx Quality parameter.
The transmission quality level for STM-1 when the STM-1 Bulk function is active (see STM1 Bulk
Config.) is UNK.
Ovw Rx Qlty. Forcing status of the quality level in reception of the source:
226
PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the primary reference clock.
SSUT. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the transit synchronism units.
SSUL. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the local synchronism units.
SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the equipment clock.
UNK. The quality level is unavailable or unknown
none. The quality of the synchronism source is not forced. The quality is that taken
from the SSM protocol or, for the sources that do not use the SSM protocol (T2/T3 1
and T2/T3 2 sources), the default one (SEC).
Ovw Tx Qlty. Forcing status of the quality level in transmission of the source.
The displayed values are the same described for the Ovw Rx Qlty parameter.
The Rx Quality, Tx Quality, Ovw Rx Qlty and Ovw Tx Qlty parameters are present only if the use of
the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism, is enabled.
The source of synchronism whose row has red border indicates the source which the equipment extracts the synchronization T0 and/or T4 from.
When the source, which the synchronization is extracted from, changes, the row relevant to the new
source will become yellow and will blink before becoming of color sky-blue with red border.
Push-button

Apply changes. Confirm the changes.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes not confirmed yet.
Wtr clear. Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without
waiting for the expiry of Wait Time.
See also

Set the source used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL A or STM-1/NODAL B input
E1 Source Type tab

The tab displays the parameters to manage the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and set the
interface (output/input) of tributary A/B.
Parameters
Trib. A / Trib. B. Output of synchronism T12, respectively on tributary A and B:
T2 (NORMAL TRAFFIC). The tributary (A or B) is used for the transport of the traffic
only or for the contemporary transport of synchronism and traffic if properly set (see
pag.213To re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation).
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2Mbit/s as interface for the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source.
T3 (2Mb/s). The tributary (A or B) is used as output of synchronism T12 with interface

2Mbit/s.
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2Mbit/s as interface for the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source.
T3 (2MHz). The tributary (A or B) is used as output of synchronism T12 with interface

2MHz.
227
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2MHz as interface for the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source.
WARNING The setting of the tributary (A or B) as output of synchronism T12 compromises the use of the
tributary (A or B) as traffic tributary.

See also
Manage the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and set the interface (output/input) of
tributary A/B
E1 Retiming tab
WARNING Tab not available if the PWE3 function is active (see Configurator).
The tab displays the parameters to re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation.
Parameters
Name. Tributary label:
E1 A. First E1 of base board (tributary A).
E1 B. Second E1 of base board (tributary B).
E1 <number>. E1 of expansion.
E1 Retiming. Status of E1 re-timing function of the tributary:
Off. The E1 re-timing function is inactive.
On. The E1 re-timing function is active.
Sync Alarm. Sync Alarm status. The Sync Alarm, when the E1 re-timing function is active, indicates whether the operation failed (alarm activated) or it was successful (alarm deactivated).
Push-button

See also
T2/T3 E1 SA Bit / 1000Base-T Role tab

The tab displays the parameters for the management of the sources T2/T3 1, T2/T3 2, TE LAN-A and TE
LAN-B when the use of the source quality level as criterion for the selection of the synchronism is active.
Parameters
T2/T3 1, T2/T3 2 (E1 Time Slot 0 Spare Bits area). Respectively spare bit of timeslot 0 of E1
frame used for the coding of the quality level of the source T2/T3 1 and T2/T3 2: Sa4, Sa5, Sa6,
Sa7 or Sa8.
TE LAN-A, TE LAN-B (1000Base-T Role area). Respectively modality to assign the role (Master
or Slave) of the LANs (1000Base-T) set for the synchronism sources TE LAN-A and TE LAN-B:
228
According to synch direction. The assignment of role Master or Slave of the line synchronism is automatically managed by SSM protocol independently from the setting
of the port parameters.
As set up for source LAN. The assignment of role Master or Slave of the line synchronism is defined at level of LAN (see Verify/modify the operating modality of the line
synchronism (role) for the LAN).
See also
Verify/modify the modality to assign the role of the LANs (1000Base-T) used as synchronism
sources
LAN SSM Enabling tab

The tab displays the enabling status of the SSM messages.
Parameters
LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4. Respectively enabling status of the management of the SSM
messages for the LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 and LAN 4.
The active box ( ) indicates that the SSM messages are managed by the LAN, the inactive box
indicates that the messages are not managed.
See also
229
Management of synchronisation
Synchronism sources
Enabling of the synchronism sources
Configuration of the synchronism sources
Priority of the synchronism source
Quality of synchronism source
Forcing of a synchronism source
Function of preferential synchronism source
Internal synchronism T0
Synchronism in output T4
Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation
Management of synchronisation
ALCplus2e equipment can be configured to operate with synchronisation enabled or disabled.
When the synchronisation is disable, the synchronisation is not managed: the clocks are generated by the
local internal reference.
When the synchronisation is enabled, the synchronism source, enabled with the highest priority, is used
to synchronise the equipment (if a forcing or a preferential is not active).
If the quality is active as criterion for the selection of the synchronism, the enabled source with highest
quality is used to synchronize the equipment (if no forcing is active).
The user can enable or disable the management of synchronisation as he wishes (see Configurator) and
enable/disable the use of the source quality into the choice criterion of the synchronism.
The equipment makes a synchronization signal available to other equipment (synchronism T4), common
or independent from the synchronism used by the equipment (synchronism T0).
Access to T4 synchronism is possible through a special setting of the outputs of tributaries A and/or B (T12
synchronism).
Synchronism sources
The equipment has more synchronism sources.
The number/type of synchronism sources depends on the type/expansion/configuration of equipment as
depicted in Tab.10.
Tab.10 Synchronism sources
IDUBOARD ONLY 1+0
Name
Configuration
T2/T3 1
E1
Tributary A with interface T2 or T3
(1)
T2/T3 2
E1
Tributary B with interface T2 or T3
(1)
TE LAN-A
(2)
LAN Eth
LAN of Ethernet Switch
TE LAN-B
(2)
LAN Eth
Radio
Synchronism from the remote terminal (Radio 1A)

Source available only if the radio is equipped
RADIO 1A
230
Type
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD XPIC
Name
Type
Configuration
T2/T3 1
E1
(1)
T2/T3 2
E1
Tributary B with interface T2 or T3
(1)
TE LAN-A
(2)
LAN Eth
TE LAN-B
(2)
LAN Eth
RADIO 1A
Radio

RADIO 2A
Radio
Synchronism from the remote terminal (Radio 2A) (3)

Source available only in 2x(1+0) radio configurator
IDUBOARD EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0

IDUBOARD EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
IDUBOARD EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
Name
Type
Configuration
(1)
T2/T3 1
E1
T2/T3 2
E1
Source configurable as:

Tributary B with interface T2 or T3 (1)
E1 of expansion (132) with interface T2
TE LAN-A
(2)
LAN Eth
TE LAN-B
(2)
LAN Eth
STM-1 (4)
STM-1
STM-1.
Source available only if the management of STM-1 is enabled
RADIO 1A
Radio

IDUBOARD EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1

IDUBOARD EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
Name
Type
Configuration
(1)
T2/T3 1
E1
T2/T3 2
E1

E1 of expansion (132) with interface T2E1
TE LAN-A
(2)
LAN Eth
TE LAN-B
(2)
LAN Eth
STM-1
STM-1.
Source available only if the management of STM-1 is enabled
RADIO 1A
Radio

RADIO 2A
Radio

STM-1
(4)
231
IDUBOARD EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0

IDUBOARD EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
Name
Type
Configuration
(1)
T2/T3 1
E1
T2/T3 2
E1

TE LAN-A
(2)
LAN Eth
TE LAN-B
(2)
LAN Eth
Radio

RADIO 1A
The name and the configuration of the sources in input for the STM-1 and for the Nodal Bus change depending on the configuration of the equipment and are pointed out in Tab.11
IDUBOARD EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1

IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. NOD. 2XSTM-1 16E1
Name
Type
Configuration
(1)
T2/T3 1
E1
T2/T3 2
E1

TE LAN-A
(2)
LAN Eth
TE LAN-B
(2)
LAN Eth
RADIO 1A
Radio

RADIO 2A
Radio

The name and the configuration of the sources in input for the STM-1 and for the Nodal Bus change depending on the configuration of the equipment and are pointed out in Tab.11
IDUBOARD EXP. 16E1 ONLY 1+0

IDUBOARD EXP. 16E1 PWE3 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD EXP. 16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 16E1 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
Name
Configuration
(1)
T2/T3 1
E1
T2/T3 2
E1

TE LAN-A
(2)
LAN Eth
TE LAN-B
(2)
LAN Eth
Radio

RADIO 1A
232
Type
IDUBOARD EXP. 16E1 PWE3

IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 16E1 PWE3
Name
Type
Configuration
(1)
T2/T3 1
E1
T2/T3 2
E1

TE LAN-A
(2)
LAN Eth
TE LAN-B
(2)
LAN Eth
RADIO 1A
Radio

RADIO 2A
Radio

(1)
The type of interface depends on the setting made by the user for the management of the synchronism
in output T12 (see Manage the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and set the interface (output/
input) of tributary A/B).
(2)
LAN 1
LAN 2
LAN 3 (electrical or optical interface)
LAN 4 (electrical or optical interface)
If a value is set for the source TE LAN-A this value will not be available for the source TE LAN-B and
vice versa.
Source available only if the Sync eth support functionality is enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).
(3)
Source not available for equipment in 2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration with East-West option
disable.
(4)
If the management of two STM-1 is active, the values STM-1 [1] and STM-1 [2] will be available, which
respectively point out the source relative to the first STM-1 and second STM-1.
233
Tab.11 Availability synchronism sources (STM-1/Nodal Bus)

Equipment Configuration
STM-1 management
Synchronism sources for STM-1/Nodal Bus
Nodal Bus management
Name
Type
Configuration
Disable
Enable
1 STM-1
Enable
2 STM-1
Disable
Enable
Nodal 1
Nodal Bus
Nodal Bus 1
Nodal 2
Nodal Bus
Nodal Bus 2
STM-1
STM-1
First STM-1
STM-1/
NODAL A
STM-1 or
Nodal Bus
Source configurable as (1):

STM-1 (STM-1)
Nodal Bus 1 (Nodal 1)
STM-1/
NODAL B
STM-1 or
Nodal Bus

STM-1 (STM-1)
STM-1 [1]
STM-1
First STM-1
STM-1 [2]
STM-1
Second STM-1
STM-1/
NODAL A
STM-1 or
Nodal Bus

First STM-1 (STM-1 [1])
Second STM-1 (STM-1 [2])
STM-1/
NODAL B
STM-1 or
Nodal Bus

First STM-1 (STM-1 [1])
Second STM-1 (STM-1 [2])
(1)
If a value is set for the source STM-1/NODAL A this value will not be available for the source STM-1/
NODAL B and vice versa.
Enabling of the synchronism sources

A synchronism source, in order to be used, must be enabled by the user (see Enable/disable the use of a
synchronism source).
Configuration of the synchronism sources

For some synchronism sources, the type of signal to use can be set (see Tab.10).
Priority of the synchronism source

A priority level can be associated to every synchronism source (see Modify the use priority of a synchronism
source).
234
When the quality is not active as criterion for the selection of the synchronism, the source with the highest
priority level and whose signal is valid, is used to synchronize the equipment (if a forcing or a preferential
source is not active).
The priority level of the synchronism source is pointed out by a number between 1 and 9, where 1 indicates
the highest priority and 9 the lowest one.
Generally the equipment takes the synchronism from the source with the highest priority level: if this
source is missing or is degraded, the synchronism is taken from the source with priority level immediately
lower.
When the source with highest priority level returns to be valid, the equipment after the WTR time will automatically start to use it to take the synchronism. If all the synchronism sources (set by the user) become
unavailable, the equipment automatically takes the synchronism from its own internal reference.
The degradation of the signal is caused by the presence of, at least, one of the following conditions:
The source is not physically present.
The difference between the source frequency and the internal reference source (STRATUM 3) is
greater than 7 ppm.
If two or more sources with the same priority are activated, these sources will be inserted into a circular
and not Revertive list.
Quality of synchronism source

Every synchronism source is characterized by a quality level.
Through WEB LCT page, it is possible Enable/disable the use of the source quality into the choice criterion
of the synchronism.
When the use of quality is enabled, it concurs in the selection of the source to use for the synchronisation
in the following way: the source with higher quality level, and whose signal is valid, is used to synchronize
the equipment (if a forcing is not active).
The source quality level is given by the synchronisation status messages (SSM - Synchronisation Status
Message).
The availability quality levels, from higher to lower level, are listed here below:
PRC (Primary Reference Clock). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-T G.781 with
extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the primary reference
clock.
SSUT (Synchronisation Supply Unit Transit). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITUT G.781 with extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the
transit synchronism units.
SSUL (Synchronisation Supply Unit Local). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-T
G.781 with extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the synchronism local units.
SEC (SDH Equipment Clock). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-T G.781 with
extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the equipment clock.
Depending on the type of synchronism source, the modality used to insert and extract the SSM messages
changes as pointed out here below.
Synchronism sources T2/T3 1 and T2/T3 2 (E1)
For the synchronism sources T2/T3, the management of the quality depends on the tributary used as synchronism source, on the configuration of the synchronism in output T12 and on the E1 re-timing function
as displayed here below.
235
Synchronism
sources
T2/T3 1
Configuration
Tributary A
T2/T3 2
Tributary B
Output of
synchronism T12
E1 re-timing
function
Quality management in output Quality management in input

(Tx)
(Rx)
T2
(NORMAL TRAFFIC)
Enable
Quality value of T0 is inserted

in the spare bits (1)
Disable
Quality not managed
(2)
T3 (2Mb/s)

T3 (2MHz)
Quality not managed
T2
(NORMAL TRAFFIC)
(2)
Enable

Disable
Quality not managed

T3 (2MHz)
Quality not managed
(2)
Enable

Disable
Quality not managed
(1)
Value equivalent to DNU if T0 is derived from the considered tributary.
(2)
Value UNK.
Quality value (SSM) is extracted from the spare bits
(2)
T3 (2Mb/s)
Tributary E1
expansion
Quality value (SSM) is extracted from the spare bits
(2)
Synchronism sources TE LAN-A and TE LAN-B (Ethernet)

The management of the SSM messages can be enabled for every single LAN.
This setting affects the transmission and the reception of the SSM messages as displayed here below.
LAN configuration
LAN used as
synchronism source
(1)
LAN not used

as synchronism source
SSM messages
management
Quality management in input

(Rx)
Quality management in output

(Tx)
Enable
Quality value (SSM) is extracted from Quality value of T0 is inserted in the

the received packet
transmitted packet (value equivalent to
DNU if T0 is derived from the considered
tributary)
Disable
Quality value is DNU
SSM messages are not transmitted
Enable
SSM messages are not managed
Quality value of T0 is inserted in the

transmitted packet
Disable
SSM messages are not managed
SSM messages are not transmitted
(1)
LAN connected to the TE LAN-A or TE LAN-B input (see Set the signal used as synchronism source for
TE LAN-A or TE LAN-B input).
As regards the quality management via the WEB LCT page, it is possible:
Set the minimum quality level of the source that generates the T4 synchronism.
Verify/modify the modality to assign the role of the LANs (1000Base-T) used as synchronism sources
WARNING The quality of the synchronism sources is a feature subjected to enabling (Sync quality management equipment feature).
If this feature is not enabled, all the parameters relevant to the quality management will not be available
(see Verify the equipment feature).
236
Forcing of a synchronism source

This function foresees the user can force the selection of one synchronism source (see Force the use of a
synchronism source).
This forcing is made without considering the status, the quality level and the priority of the source.
This function must not be used for the normal operation of the synchronism. It is a maintenance operation
and remains active until the user disables it or the Timeout period of the manual operations expires (if set).
Function of preferential synchronism source

This function foresees the choice of a source to use as preferential among those enabled (see Set a synchronism source as preferential).
When the function of preferential source is not active, the internal synchronism is taken from the enabled
source with highest quality level or highest priority (if the quality is not active).
When the function of preferential source is activated for a source, this source will be used (in absence of
alarms causing its degradation or forced sources) to take the internal synchronism independently from its
priority level.
This condition is maintained until when the user disables the function of preferential source or the source
signal becomes degraded.
This applies only if the quality is not enabled as criterion for the selection of the synchronism.
Internal synchronism T0
The synchronism source, which the internal synchronism T0 is extracted from, is determined by the SETS
of the equipment according to the following order of criteria:
Status of the source (enabled/disabled)
Forcing of the source
Status of the signal (valid/degraded)
Quality level of the source (if the quality management is enabled)
Preferential source
Source priority
The internal synchronism T0 can assume one of the following statuses:
Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is generated by the equipment internal reference - Internal Source).
The user can force the status of the internal synchronism T0 (see Force the status of the T0 synchronisation).
The forcing of the status Hold Over or Free Running is not the normal operation of the synchronism T0.
These forcings are maintenance operations and remain active until when the user does not disable them
or the Timeout period of the manual operation expires (if set).
The equipment makes a synchronization signal available to other equipment (synchronism T4), common
or independent from the synchronism used by the equipment (synchronism T0) (see Set the modality from
which the T4 synchronism is extracted).
This because the synchronization unit is composed by two independent locking devices (Phase Locked
Loop):
A device for the generation of equipment circuit (T0)
237
A device for the generation of synchronism output (T4)
The selection of the references which the devices are locked to can be independent (T4T0) or associated
(T4=T0) to the use of a single device.
For every device, as told before, a set of sources can be set which, depending on their priority, are selected
to generate the equipment synchronisation.

The user can set that the synchronism in output is provided to tributaries A and/or B (see par. Manage the
output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and set the interface (output/input) of tributary A/B). In this
case the use of the tributary (A and/or B) as traffic tributary is compromised.
The use of the tributary A and/or B as output of synchronism T12 determinates the type of the interface
of the tributary (A and/or B) used as synchronism source (see Tab.12).
Tab.12 Synchronism in output (T12)
Value set as output of
synchronism T12
(parameter Trib. A)
T2 (NORMAL TRAFFIC)
Output of Synchronism
T12 on tributary A
Yes
(1)
Interface of tributary A
(output/input)
Use of tributary A
as traffic tributary
2Mbit/s
Yes
T3 (2Mb/s)
Yes
2Mbit/s
No
T3 (2MHz)
Yes
2MHz
No
Output of Synchronism
T12 on tributary B
Interface of tributary B
(output/input)
Use of tributary B
as traffic tributary
2Mbit/s
Yes
Value set as output of

synchronism T12
(parameter Trib. B)
T2 (NORMAL TRAFFIC)
Yes
(1)
T3 (2Mb/s)
Yes
2Mbit/s
No
T3 (2MHz)
Yes
2MHz
No
(1)
For the contemporary transport of synchronism and traffic (see Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation).
Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation
The function called Re-timing of E1s allows re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic
and synchronisation, to increase the requirements of jitter and wander even in case of operation with adaptive modulation (ACM).
WARNING This function is not available if the PWE3 function is active (see Configurator).
Implementation of the function for the E1s of the base board (tributary A and B)
The tributaries of the base board can be set for the transport only of the traffic or as output of T12 synchronism.
If the user wishes to use the tributary A or B for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation,
in any condition of operation of the radio transport (ACM enabled), it is necessary to execute the operations
described in the following example.
Suppose you want to re-timing the tributary A used for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation between the local equipment and the remote equipment (see Fig.5).
238
Fig.5 Example of re-timing of tributary A (synchronisation)

LOCAL equipment
REMOTE equipment
SETS
management
SETS
management
Tributary A
Tributary A
Operations to execute for the LOCAL equipment by means of WEB LCT page:
a. Activate the management of the synchronisation (see Configurator).
b. Activate the use of the tributary A (see E1).
c. Set the source T2/T3 1 (tributary A) as synchronism source (see Synchronisation).
d. Set the value T2 (NORMAL TRAFFIC) as output of synchronism T12 for the parameter Trib. A
Operations to execute for the REMOTE equipment by means of WEB LCT page:
b. Activate the use of the tributary A (see E1).
c. Set the source RADIO 1A as synchronism source (see Synchronisation).
For equipment in radio configuration 2x(1+0), set the source RADIO 1A or RADIO 2A depending
on the Radio E1 which the tributary A is cross-connected.
d. Activate the re-timing of tributary A (see Synchronisation).
e. Set the value T2 (NORMAL TRAFFIC) as output of synchronism T12 for the parameter Trib. A
Implementation of the function for the E1s of the expansion (tributary 1...n)
Generally the tributaries of the expansion transport traffic.
If the user wants to use their frequency for synchronisation purposes in any condition of operation of the
radio transport (ACM enabled), it is necessary to execute the operations described in the following example.
Suppose you want to re-timing the tributary 1 used for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation between the local equipment and the remote equipment (see Fig.6).
Fig.6 Example of re-timing of tributary 1 (synchronisation)
LOCAL equipment
REMOTE equipment
SETS
management
SETS
management
Tributary 1
Tributary 1
239
Settings to execute for the LOCAL equipment by means of WEB LCT page:
b. Activate the use of the tributary 1 (see E1).
c. Set the tributary 1 as source T2/T3 2 (see Synchronisation).
d. Set the source T2/T3 2 as synchronism source (see Synchronisation).
Settings to execute for the REMOTE equipment by means of WEB LCT page:
b. Activate the use of the tributary 1 (see E1).
c. Set the source RADIO 1A as synchronism source (see Synchronisation).
For equipment in radio configuration 2x(1+0), set the source RADIO 1A or RADIO 2A depending
on the Radio E1 which the tributary A is cross-connected.
d. Activate the re-timing of tributary 1 (see Synchronisation).
WARNING In case you want to use this function (contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation) on
more E1, all the tributaries must be synchronous, moreover the re-timing must be activated for all the
tributaries and not only for the tributary used as synchronous source.
240
BASE BAND
Ethernet Switch (Enh.). It manages the configuration of the Ethernet Switch (Enhanced).
LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.), LAN 4 (Enh.). It manages the specific LAN of the Ethernet
Switch (Enhanced).
Port A (Enh.), Port B (Enh.). It manages the specific Radio port of the Ethernet Switch (Enhanced).
Spanning Tree. It manages the spanning tree in the network.
Ring Protection. It manages the Ring Protection mode (G.8032).
TDM Tributaries. It manages the TDM tributaries.
Cross Connection. It manages the cross-connection matrix.
Radio E1 Framing. It manages the structure of the Radio E1s.
PWE3. It manages the PWE3 Bundle and the PWE3 channels.
241
Ethernet Switch (Enh.)
Common Parameters. It manages the Ethernet Switch (Enhanced) configuration and the virtual LANs.
Priority towards LAN ports. It manages the correspondence between the priority (802.1p, PTOS/DSCP)
of the packets, in input to any Ethernet port, and the output queues of the LANs.
Priority towards Radio ports. It manages the correspondence between the priority (802.1p, MPLS,
PTOS/DSCP) of the packets, in input to any LAN, and the output queues of the Radio port of Ethernet
Switch.
Compression. It manages the compression of the level-2 and level-3 headers present into an Ethernet
packet, in output from the Switch, before the traffic is inserted in the radio frame.
242
Common Parameters
The Common Parameters command manages the Ethernet Switch (Enhanced) configuration and the virtual LANs.
Operations
GENERAL
SETTINGS OF THE
ETHERNET SWITCH (ENHANCED)
Verify/modify the Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field

Verify/modify the maximum size of the accepted packet
Verify/modify the address learning modality in MAC Table
Verify/modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table
Display the MAC Table
Reset the MAC Table
Restore Factory Default of the Ethernet Switch
Verify/modify the hysteresis of the Link Loss Forwarding modality
VIRTUAL LAN
Verify the existing virtual LANs
Create a virtual Lan
Modify the configuration of a virtual Lan
Delete a virtual Lan
RADIO PACKET FRAGM.
Verify/modify the status of fragmentation of Ethernet packets
1588 PASS THROUGH
Verify/modify the status of the 1588 Pass Through functionality
Verify/modify the criterion used to analyse 1588 packets
GUI
Common Parameters contextual area

See also
Virtual LAN (info)

1588 Pass Through functionality (info)

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Common Parameters.
The QinQ ETH Type parameter indicates the Eth Type value in the S_Tag (Service Tag) QinQ field.
2. To change the parameter, type the new value.

WARNING When the Provider modality is enabled (see LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.), LAN 4
(Enh.)/Port A (Enh.), Port B (Enh.)), for the correct transit of the supervision packets it is suggested to set
the value 2048 as maximum packet size.
243
Moreover, if the Radio port (or at least one of the Radio ports, see Tab.13)is configured in Fallback modality, the value 1522 cannot be set.
The Max Packet size (Byte) parameter indicates the maximum size of the accepted packet:
1522. Maximum size for standard Ethernet (IEEE Tagged Frame).
2048. Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 2048.
10240 (Jumbo). Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 10240 (Jumbo).


WARNING If some VLANs have been already created, when the partition and the indexing on VID (VLAN
Identifier) basis of the addresses in MAC Table (selection of option Enable), IT IS NECESSARY to execute
a software reset.
The parameter MAC Learning Vid basis indicates the address learning modality of MAC address in the
relevant table:
Disable. Learning of MAC Address in MAC Table is never partitioned in presence of VLAN 802.1Q
registered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU).
Enable. The partition and the indicization on VID basis of MAC Addresses in MAC Table are enabled. Their learning is registered in a segment of MAC Table whose index is the value of VID
contained in the VLANs entering the Switch and registered in VTU.

The MAC Addr Aging Time parameter indicates the validity period of the MAC addresses, dynamically
acquired and stored in the specific table.
2. To change the parameter, set the wished value (numeric value between 15 and 3825 seconds).
Display the MAC Table

2. Press Show Mac Table.
The MAC Table window shows the content of the MAC Table at the moment when the window has been
opened. To update the list, press Refresh.
Every row of the table corresponds to one address with the indication of:
244
Mac Address. Registered MAC address, expressed in hexadecimal format.
FID. Number of the MAC Table partition, which the address is associated to.
Port. Output port relevant to the respective registered address:
CPU. Internal port.
LAN-1. First LAN of the Ethernet Switch.
LAN-2. Second LAN of the Ethernet Switch.
LAN-3. Third LAN of the Ethernet Switch.
LAN-4. Fourth LAN of the Ethernet Switch.
RADIO-1. First Radio port of the Ethernet Switch (Port A).
RADIO-2. Second Radio port of the Ethernet Switch (Port B).
The availability of the Radio ports depends on the equipment radio configuration (see Tab.13).
TTL. Priority in the deletion of the packet from the MAC Table:
1. The address will be the first to be deleted.
2. The address will be the second to be deleted.
3. The address will be the third to be deleted.
4. The address will be the fourth to be deleted.
5. The address will be the fifth to be deleted.
6. The address will be the sixth to be deleted.
7. The address will be the last to be deleted.
Value meaningful only for Unicast aging packets.
Description. Type of address:
Unicast aging. Dynamic Unicast address (removed from MAC Table at the expiry of Aging
Time).
Unicast static. Static Unicast address (not removed from MAC Table at the expiry of Aging
Time).
Unicast Mng static. Static Unicast address for management.
Multicast static. Static Multicast address.
Multicast Mng static. Static Multicast address for management.
Protocol Type. Type of packets:
OAM. OAM (Operations, Administration and Maintenance) packets.
RSTP. Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol packets.
SLOW. service packets used for the equipment management.
---. Packets with protocol or use different from those listed above.
Reset the MAC Table

2. Press Mac Table clear and confirm.
The system reset the MAC Table.
Restore Factory Default of the Ethernet Switch

WARNING The operation is traffic affecting and restart the equipment.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, this operation is not available.

2. Press Switch default and confirm.
245
At the equipment restart, the default configuration (Factory Default) will be automatically applied only
for the Ethernet Switch.
All the settings executed until that moment by the user (for example the configuration of the Ethernet
ports, of the VLANs and of OAM-FM) and the statistics (Lan Statistics and RMon) will be deleted.

2. Select the LLF tab.
The LLF Hysteresis parameter indicates the time interval (hysteresis) after which the Link Loss Forwarding modality is activated and deactivated.
3. To change the parameter move the cursor to the wished value.
Verify the existing virtual LANs

2. Select theVirtual Lan Config. tab.
The tab displays the existing virtual LANs.
Create a virtual Lan

2. Select the Virtual Lan Config. tab.
3. Press Add.
4. Type, into the VLan ID box, the identifier (within 2 and 4094) you wish to assign to the virtual LAN.
The parameter cannot be modified later.
It is not possible to set, as ID, a value already present in the list (column VLan ID). It is instead possible
to set, as ID, the default VID of any Ethernet port (see area Default VLan ID).
5. If you wish to create more VLANs at the same time, type in the End Block box the identifier of the last
VLAN of the group (between 2 and 4094).
The value of End Block must be greater than the value of VLan ID and no VLAN with identifier within
the range End Block - VLan ID must be present in the list.
The system creates a number of VLANs (and inserts the relevant rows in the table) equal to the difference between the values of the parameters End Block and VLan ID, with identifiers in progression from
the lowest to the higher value, and automatically assigns the relevant Label using the format <Label>
<identifier>.
All the VLANs created at the same time get the same policy regarding the transit of packets through
the ports of the Ethernet switch.
6. Type, into the Label box, the name (alphanumeric string up to 20 characters) you wish to assign to the
virtual LAN.
The system automatically suggest, as name of the virtual Lan, Vlan <identifier>. This name can be
changed as you wish.
7. In the box relevant to each port (Lan, Port), select the option:
246
Disable, not to enable the port for the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual Lan.
Tagged, to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan. To the packets without Tag, in output from this port, is automatically added the Tag composed by the information:
Of priority; the value is defined in the Default Priority box of the origin port of the packet
itself.
Of Vlan ID which corresponds to the default Vlan ID (Default Vid box) of the origin port
of the packet.
The Vlan Table can be used, in case of traffic without Tag, only if the default Vlan ID of the input
port is contained as routing row in the table itself. If this condition is not satisfied, the Vlan Table
is not meaningful for all the traffic without Tag.
Untag., to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan. The Tag 802.1Q (information of priority and VLAN identifier) is removed to the packets in
output from the port.
Unmodif., to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) are not removed or added to the packets in
output from the port.
The availability of the Radio ports (Port) depends on the equipment radio configuration (see Tab.13).
In order to create the VLAN, the transit of the packets must be enabled at least for one port (a value
different from Disable is set).
The Virtual Lan Config. tab displays the row relevant to the new virtual Lan.
The message VLAN ID... already in the list indicates that the set identifier corresponds to that of an
already existing VLAN. Change the value in the VLan ID box.

3. Double click on the box relevant to the parameter of VLan you wish to change.
Except for the identifier (VLAN ID), all the parameters of a VLan can be modified (Label, Lan 1, Lan 2,
Lan 3, Lan 4, Port A, Port B).
The parameter setting modes are the same pointed out in par. Create a virtual Lan.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed and not communicated yet to the equipment.
The availability of the Radio ports (Port) depends on the equipment radio configuration (see Tab.13).
The changes are confirmed in Virtual Lan Config tab.
If the displayed message is:
An OAM MA and/or a MEP are bound on this VLAN. Please remove them before modifying it. To
the VLAN is associated at least a MA and/or a MEP of the OAM-FM Domain defined for the equipment. Before changing the VLAN is necessary to dismiss all the relevant MA/MEP (see OAM).
Delete a virtual Lan

WARNING A static VLAN cannot be deleted from the list (see Virtual LAN (info)).
247
3. Select the virtual Lan you wish to delete.

The multiple selection can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys.
The virtual Lan is removed from the list.

2. Select the Radio Packet Fragm. tab.
The Status parameter indicates the fragmentation status of the Ethernet packets, incoming from LANs
and sent to the Radio port, whose size is greater than the set value:
Disabled. Fragmentation disabled: all Ethernet packets keep their size unchanged.
Enabled 256 Byte. Fragmentation enabled: all Ethernet packets with size greater than 256 bytes
are fragmented into bursts whose size is limited to the specific value.
Enabled 512 Byte. Fragmentation enabled: all Ethernet packets with size greater than 512 bytes
are fragmented into bursts whose size is limited to the specific value.
3. To change the parameter, set the wished value.

If the message Command rejected: incompatible 1588 Pass Through status is displayed, this means
that the management of 1588 Pass Through functionality (info) is enabled.
With this functionality active, the setting of parameter Status cannot be changed from Enabled 256
Byte to Enabled 512 Byte or to Disable.
To change the parameter, it is first necessary to disable the 1588 Pass Through functionality.

2. Select the IEEE 1588 Pass Through tab.
Tab available only if the Ieee1588 support functionality is enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).
The Interface Aware parameters shows the enabling status of the 1588 Pass Through functionality (info):
Disable. Functionality disabled.
Enable Master PPS. Functionality enabled: the Radio port of the equipment acts as Master element for the propagation of 1588 messages.
Enable Slave PPS. Functionality enabled: the Radio port of the equipment acts as Slave element
for the propagation of 1588 messages.
If the equipment is in 2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration with
East-West option enable, the list shows the following values:
248
Enable B1 Master - B2 Master PPS. Functionality enabled: the Radio 1A port (Port A) and the
port Radio 2A (Port B) of the equipment act as Master elements for the propagation of 1588
messages.
Enable B1 Slave - B2 Slave PPS. Functionality enabled: the Radio 1A port and the Radio 2A port
of the equipment act as Slave elements for the propagation of 1588 messages.
Enable B1 Master - B2 Slave PPS. Functionality enabled: the Radio 1A port of the equipment acts
as Master element, while the Radio 2A port acts as Slave element for the propagation of 1588
messages.
Enable B1 Slave - B2 Master PPS. Functionality enabled: the Radio 1A port of the equipment acts
as Slave element, while the Radio 2A port acts as Master element for the propagation of 1588
messages.

If the message Command rejected: incompatible packet fragmentation status is displayed, this means
that the fragmentation of the Ethernet packets is not enabled in the modality compatible with the propagation of 1588 messages.
In order to enable the 1588 Pass Through functionality, it is first necessary to enable the fragmentation
status of the Ethernet packets with a maximum size 256 bytes (Enabled 256 Byte) (see Verify/modify
the status of fragmentation of Ethernet packets).

WARNING Operation meaningful only if the 1588 Pass Through functionality (info) is active.
2. Select the IEEE 1588 Pass Through tab.
Tab available only if the Ieee1588 support functionality is enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).
The Filter Type parameter shows the criterion used to analyse 1588 packets:
CTag. PTP based VLAN: the 1588 packet is identified through the dedicated VLAN with C-VID
identifier (Customer VLAN Identifier) displayed in C Vid box.
STag. PTP based VLAN: the 1588 packet is identified through the dedicated VLAN with S_VID
identifier (Service VLAN Identifier) displayed in S Vid box.
CTag + STag. PTP based: the 1588 packet is identified through the dedicated VLAN with C_VID
and S_VID identifiers, displayed respectively in C Vid and S Vid boxes.
Ethernet Type. PTP over Ethernet: the system checks the Ether Type field of the Ethernet protocol and verifies the presence of Ether Type standard for PTP.
UDP. PTP over UDP: the packet is analysed up to UDP (User Datagram Protocol) protocol and
the system verifies the presence of the standard port for PTP in the Destination Port field.

Only if you selects the value:
CTag, in the C Vid box, set the C-VID identifier of the VLAN.
STag, in the S Vid box, set the S-VID identifier of the VLAN.
CTag + STag, in the C Vid box, set the C-VID identifier and in the S Vid box, set the S-VID identifier of the VLAN.
249
Common Parameters contextual area

The contextual area displays the Ethernet Switch (Enhanced) configuration.
Tabs
General tab. Ethernet Switch (Enhanced) configuration.

Virtual Lan Config. tab. Existing virtual LANs.
LLF tab. Hysteresis of the Link Loss Forwarding modality.
Radio Packet Fragm. tab. Status of fragmentation of Ethernet packets.
IEEE 1588 Pass Through tab. Configuration of the 1588 Pass Through functionality.
Push-button

General tab
The tab displays the Ethernet Switch (Enhanced) configuration.
Parameters
QinQ ETH type 0x. Eth Type value in the S_Tag (Service Tag) QinQ field
Max Packet size (Byte). Maximum size of the accepted packet:
1522. Maximum size for standard Ethernet (IEEE Tagged Frame).
2048. Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 2048.
10240 (Jumbo). Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 10240 (Jumbo).
MAC Learning Vid basis. Address learning modality of MAC address in the relevant table:
Disable. The learning of MAC Address in MAC Table is never partitioned in presence
of VLAN 802.1Q registered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU).
Enable. The partition and the indicization on VID (VLAN Identifier) basis of MAC Addresses in MAC Table are enabled. Their learning is registered in a segment of MAC
Table whose index is the value of VID contained in the VLANs entering the Switch and
registered in VTU.
MAC Addr. Aging Time. Validity period of the MAC addresses, stored in the MAC Table.
Push-button
Show Mac Table. Display the MAC Table.

Mac Table clear. Reset the MAC Table.
Switch default. Restore Factory Default of the Ethernet Switch.
See also

250
Virtual Lan Config. tab

The table present in the tab, displays the existing virtual LANs.
Every row corresponds to a VLAN.
Parameters
VLan ID. VLAN identifier.

The VLans automatically created by the system are indicated as follows:
<identifier> Used. VLAN that use as ID, the default VLan ID of any Ethernet (see Default VLan ID area) and has no connection with the Radio ports (Port... > Disable).
<identifier> res. (static). VLan which uses, as ID, the default VLan ID of any Ethernet
port and is connected with at least one of the Radio ports (Port... > any value different
from Disable).
<identifier> res. (management). VLan reserved for the in-band supervision (see
Ethernet tab).
<identifier> res. (g8032). VLan associated to one ERP instance (see Ring Protection).
<identifier> res. (pwe3). VLan associated to PWE3 Bundles (see PWE3). If for the
PWE3 packets:
The Provider modality is active (S-VID + C-VID), the list will contain a single
VLAN named Vlan-PWE3 with ID equal to the value S-VID. In this condition,
all the Bundles are forwarded towards the same ports of the Switch.
The Provider modality is inactive (C-VID), the list will contain one single VLAN
for every PWE3 Bundle created. Every VLAN will be named Vlan-PWE3 Bundle
<progressive number in the creation of the Bundle> with ID equal to the specific C-VID.
Label. Name assigned to the virtual Lan by the user during its creation or modification.
Parameter not available for the reserved VLan (res...) except for PWE3 VLANs (see parameter
Vlan ID).
Lan1. Enabling of the LAN 1 to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
LAN:
Disable. The port is not enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to
that of the virtual Lan.
Untag. The port allows the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual Lan. The Tag 802.1Q (information of priority and VLAN identifier) is removed
to the packets in output from the port.
Tagged. The port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that
of the virtual Lan. To the packets without Tag, in output from this port, is automatically added the Tag composed by the information:
Of priority; the value is defined in the Default Priority box of the origin port of
the packet itself.
Of Vlan ID which corresponds to the default Vlan ID (Default Vid box) of the
origin port of the packet.
The Vlan Table can be used, in case of traffic without Tag, only if the default Vlan ID
of the input port is contained as routing row in the table itself. If this condition is not
satisfied, the Vlan Table is not meaningful for all the traffic without Tag.
Unmodif. The port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that
of the virtual Lan. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) are not removed or
added to the packets in output from the port.
LAN. For the description of the values, refer to the Lan1 note.
PortA. Enabling of the Radio port A to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual LAN. For the description of the values, refer to the Lan1 note.
251
PortB. Enabling of the Radio port B to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual LAN. For the description of the values, refer to the Lan1 note.
The availability of the Radio ports (Port) depends on the equipment radio configuration (see
Tab.13).
Default VLan ID. Default VLan identifier of each Ethernet port of the equipment.
Push-button
Add. Create a virtual Lan.

Remove. Delete a virtual Lan.
Apply changes. Confirm the changes made to VLANs.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes made to VLANs and not confirmed yet.
See also

Virtual LAN (info)
LLF tab
The tab displays the hysteresis of the Link Loss Forwarding modality.
Parameters
LLF Hysteresis. Time interval (hysteresis) after which the Link Loss Forwarding modality is activated and deactivated.
See also
Radio Packet Fragm. tab

The tab displays the status of fragmentation of Ethernet packets.
Parameters
Status. fragmentation status of the Ethernet packets, incoming from LANs and sent to the Radio
port, whose size is greater than the set value:
Disabled. Fragmentation disabled: all Ethernet packets keep their size unchanged.
Enabled 256 Byte. Fragmentation enabled: all Ethernet packets with size greater than
256 bytes are fragmented into bursts whose size is limited to the specific value.
Enabled 512 Byte. Fragmentation enabled: all Ethernet packets with size greater than
512 bytes are fragmented into bursts whose size is limited to the specific value.
See also
252
IEEE 1588 Pass Through tab

WARNING Tab available only if the Ieee1588 support functionality is enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the 1588 Pass Through functionality.
Parameters
Interface Aware. Enabling status of the 1588 Pass Through functionality:
Enable Master PPS. Functionality enabled: the Radio port of the equipment acts as
Master element for the propagation of the 1588 messages.
Enable Slave PPS. Functionality enabled: the Radio port of the equipment acts as
Slave element for the propagation of the 1588 messages.
If the equipment is in 2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration
with East-West option enable, the list shows the following values:
Enable B1 Master - B2 Master PPS. Functionality enabled: the Radio 1A port (Port A)
and the Radio 2A port (Port B) of the equipment act as Master elements for the propagation of the 1588 messages.
Enable B1 Slave - B2 Slave PPS. Functionality enabled: the Radio 1A port and the Radio 2A port of the equipment act as Slave elements for the propagation of the 1588
messages.
Enable B1 Master - B2 Slave PPS. Functionality enabled: the Radio 1A port of the
equipment acts as Master element, while the Radio 2A port acts as Slave elements
for the propagation of the 1588 messages.
Enable B1 Slave - B2 Master PPS. Functionality enabled: the Radio 1A port of the
equipment acts as Slave element, while the Radio 2A port acts as Master elements
for the propagation of the 1588 messages.
Filter Type. Criterion used to analyse 1588 packets:
CTag. PTP based VLAN: the 1588 packet is identified through the dedicated VLAN with
C-VID identifier (Customer VLAN Identifier) displayed in the C Vid box.
STag. PTP based VLAN: the 1588 packet is identified through the dedicated VLAN with
S_VID identifier (Service VLAN Identifier) displayed in the S Vid box.
CTag + STag. PTP based: the 1588 packet is identified through the dedicated VLAN
with C_VID and S_VID identifiers displayed respectively in C Vid and S Vid boxes.
Ethernet Type. PTP over Ethernet: the system checks the Ether Type field of the
Ethernet protocol and verifies the presence of the standard Ether Type for PTP.
UDP. PTP over UDP: the system analyses the packet up to UDP (User Datagram Protocol) protocol and checks the presence of the standard port for PTP in the Destination
Port field.
C Vid. C-VID identifier.

Parameter available only if the CTag or CTag + STag value is set for the Filter Type parameter.
S Vid. S-VID identifier.
Parameter available only if the STag or CTag + STag value is set for the Filter Type parameter.
See also

253
Virtual LAN (info)

The word VLAN (Virtual LAN) indicates a set of technologies which allow subdividing a network of equipment (Switch) into more local networks, not in communication from the logical point of view, but sharing
the same physical infrastructure.
Every VLAN is identified by one number, called VLan ID.
ALCplus2e
In ALCplus2e equipment, it is necessary to define in the VLAN Table the VLANs you wish are
managed by the Ethernet Switch of the equipment (see Create a virtual Lan).
As rule, before creating a VLAN, it is suggested to execute the following procedures for the
Ethernet ports interested by the VLAN itself:
To enable the Ethernet ports (see Verify/modify the enabling status of the LAN/Verify/
modify the enabling status of the Radio port).
To enable the transit of the packets from the ports (Port Based VLAN) (see Verify/modify
the ports through which the messages in input from the LAN/Verify/modify the ports
through which the messages in input from the Radio port).
These operations can be executed even after having created a VLAN, but are necessary for the
correct operation of the VLAN itself.
Once the VLAN has been created, the user can modify (except for VLan ID) and delete it (see
Modify the configuration of a virtual Lan/Delete a virtual Lan).
Reserved VLAN
The VLAN Table, besides the VLans defined by the user, displays even the VLans automatically
created by the system and reserved:
Static VLANs, pointed out by the label res. (static) in the VLAN Table.
If one of the following cases occurs:
A LAN and an Radio port are configured to allow the transit of the packets (Port
Based VLAN).
These ports are active.
The Radio port is in Fallback mode.
The LAN is in Fallback or Secure mode.
The system automatically creates, in the VLAN Table, a static VLAN having the Default
VLan ID of the LAN as VLan ID.
If more LANs are enabled to the transit of packets from the Radio port, more static VLANs
will be created, one per each LAN, having the relevant default VLan ID as VLan ID.
The static VLANs cannot be deleted by the user. They are automatically deleted when any
of the conditions reported above fails.
The static VLAN can be modified by the user, except for VLan ID. Moreover, the transit
of the packet through a port of the VLAN cannot be disabled (setting of Disable value).
VLANs reserved to in-band supervision, indicated by the name res. (management) in

VLAN Table.
The system automatically creates, in the VLAN Table, the management VLAN when the
in-band supervision is activated (see Ethernet tab).
The management VLAN cannot be removed nor modified by the user. It is automatically
deleted when the in-band supervision is deactivated.
VLANs reserved to function G.8032, indicated by the name res. (g8032) in VLAN Table.
The system automatically creates, in the VLAN Table, one G.8032 VLAN when the Ring
Protection mode is enabled for one ERP instance (see Ring Protection).
The VLAN G.8032 cannot be removed or changed by the user. It is automatically removed when the Ring Protection modality is deactivated.
VLANs reserved to function PWE3, indicated by the name res. (pwe3) in VLAN Table.
The system automatically creates, in the VLAN Table, one PWE3 VLAN when the PWE3
Bundle is created (see PWE3).
The VLAN PWE3 cannot be removed or changed by the user. It is automatically removed
when the PWE3 Bundle is deleted or when the PWE3 function is deactivated (see Configurator).
254
VLAN Used
VLANs defined by the user in the VLAN Table with identifier different from Default VLAN ID of
the port.
These VLans, as a normal VLAN, can be modified or deleted by the user.
255

The synchronization protocol PTP (Precision Time Protocol) defined in standard IEEE 1588 is a Master/Slave
protocol based on the exchange of a series of packets (called 1588 packets) between one Master clock and
more Slave clocks with the aim to allow the synchronization of the clocks of the equipment within the network.
Typically, a clock exists within the network, called GrandMaster (GM), which transmits the synchronism to
the other clocks, called Slave (S), initially asynchronous with respect to all the other network clocks.
There are other devices within the network which are not the real addresses of the synchronisation process,
but which interpose between GM and S: one of these is the Transparent Clock (TC)
A Transparent Clock device adds, to the 1588 packets in transit, the information of correction of the Time
Stamp which the Slave will receive at the end of the chain of passage through the different TCs.
The 1588 Pass Through functionality is a simplified and proprietary implementation of the PTP protocol
which allows defining an ALCplus2e radio link as Transparent Clock device.
In fact, in an ALCplus2e link where the 1588 Pass Through functionality is active, the 1588 packet is not
processed but simply identified and treated in privileged way, in such a way to ensure a preset and constant
delay in passing through this link for this packet.
This involves that the possible correction made by the other TC devices in the network is always the same.
To implement this function, it is necessary:
To enable the 1588 Pass Through functionality for the equipment of the link (see Verify/modify
the status of the 1588 Pass Through functionality).
When equipment is enabled, it is even defined if the Radio port (Port A) of this equipment (only
within the ALCplus2e link) acts as Master element or Slave element.
With Master element, we mean the element which forwards the synchronization information
(synchronism pulse - PPS).
With Slave element, we mean the element which receives the synchronization information.
The ALCplus2e equipment connected in radio link MUST be configured one as Master and the
other as Slave. A wrong configuration (for example, both of them are defined as Master) generates the alarm IEEE 1588 PTP Configuration Mismatch.
To define the criterion used to analyse the 1588 packets transiting through the ALCplus2e radio
link (see Verify/modify the criterion used to analyse 1588 packets).
The available criteria are:
256
PTP over UDP: the system analyses the packet up to UDP (User Datagram Protocol) protocol and checks the presence of the standard port for PTP (319 and 320) in the Destination Port field.
PTP over Ethernet: the system checks the Ether Type field of the Ethernet protocol in the
packet and checks the presence of standard Ether Type for PTP (0x88F7).
PTP based VLAN: the PTP packet is identified by a VLAN dedicated and defined by the
user. The user can set, for the control, the C-TAG or S-TAG identifier or the pair CTAG+S-TAG.
Priority towards LAN ports

The Priority towards LAN ports command manages the correspondence between the priority (802.1p,
PTOS/DSCP) of the packets, in input to any Ethernet port, and LAN output queues.
Operations
Verify/assign the output queue (LANs) to a packet according to its 802.1p Tag
Verify/assign the output queue (LANs) to a packet according to its PTOS/DSCP field
IF
THE EQUIPMENT IS AN
ETHERNET
ELEMENT OF THE NODE
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LANs
to the output queue
Verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the LANs
which, in output, the Tag is added to
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the LANs
Verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue of the
LANs
GUI
Priority towards LAN ports contextual area
WARNING The setting of the parameter is common to all the LANs of the Ethernet Switch.
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Priority towards LAN ports.
The 802.1p Priority table indicates the output queue of the LANs (Internal Priority (Queue) which a
packet, in input to any Ethernet port, is assigned to, depending on its 802.1p priority Tag (802.1p Priority) (see Native 802.1p tab).
2. To change the parameter, select the option corresponding to the wished combination output queue Tag 802.1p.
For the same value of Tag 802.1p, it is possible to select only one queue at a time.
WARNING The setting of the parameters is common to all the LANs of the Ethernet Switch.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the level 3 priority (analysis of field PTOS/DSCP) is not
managed when the transit of the packets takes place through the nodal interconnection.
2. Select the PTOS/DSCP Config. tab.
The tab displays the correspondence between the priority PTOS/DSCP of the packets, in input to any
Ethernet port, and the LAN output queues (Internal Priority (Queue).
3. To modify the output queue which a PTOS/DSCP value is associated to, select in the Filter box, the IP
format which the DSCP field refers to.
4. Select the box relevant to the output queue you wish to change (column Internal Priority (Queue) and
select the wished option.
257
5. Repeat the previous step to change the output queue of all the wished PTOS/DSCP value.
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LANs to the
output queue
WARNING Operation available only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
2. Select the Priority Management tab.
The Priority Selection parameter indicates the priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input
to the LANs, to the output:
Disable. The priority management is disabled.
802.1P. The value of the 802.1p priority (level 2) is analysed for the choice of the output queue.
IpTOS. The value of TOS (Type Of Service) is analysed (level 3) for the choice of the output
queue.
802.1P-IpTOS. The value of the 802.1p priority is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value of
TOS for the choice of the output queue.
IpTOS-802.1P. The value of TOS is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value of 802.1p priority
for the choice of the output queue.

Verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the LANs which,
in output, the Tag is added to
The Default Priority parameter indicates the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input
from the LANs which, in output, the Tag is added to (0: lowest priority, 7: highest priority).
WARNING Operation available only if the analysis of the priority 802.1p is active.
The tab, if the analysis of the priority 802.1p is active, displays a table pointing out the mapping of
priority 802.1p within Tag VLan (priority 802.1p present into a packet in input to a port can be remapped in output from the Switch with a different priority value).
258
3. To change a value, select in the table the option corresponding to the wished combination: values of
Tag 802.1p in input to the Switch (802-1p INPUT Priority) - value of Tag 802.1p in output from the
Switch (802.1p OUTPUT Priority Remapping).
Verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue of the LANs
2. Select the Queue Mngt Radio to Lan tab.
The Egress Priority Policy parameter indicates the emptying algorithm of the output queues of the
LANs:
8421 WRR, a part (8 messages) of the queue with highest priority is empties, then a part of the
queue with lower priority (4 messages), then a part of the queue with further lower priority (2
messages), then a part of the queue with lowest priority (1 message) and so on restarting from
the queue with highest priority.
Strict Priority, the queue with highest priority is completely emptied (sending of all the messages) before sending a message of the queue with lower priority.
Strict 3, the high priority queue 3 is completely emptied (sending of all the messages). The other
queues (2, 1, 0) are managed with a WRR 421 mechanism.
Strict 3 and 2, the high priority queue 3 and queue 2 are completely emptied. The other queues
(1, 0) are managed with a WRR 21 mechanism.

259
Priority towards LAN ports contextual area

WARNING Priority Management and Queue Mngt Radio to Lan tab are available only if the equipment is an
Ethernet element of a node.

The contextual area displays the correspondence between the priority (802.1p, PTOS/DSCP) of the packets, in input to any Ethernet port, and LAN output queues.
Tabs
Native 802.1p tab. Output queue of the LANs which a packet, in input to any Ethernet port, is
assigned to, depending on its 802.1p priority Tag.
PTOS/DSCP Config. tab. Correspondence between the priority PTOS/DSCP of the packets, in input to any Ethernet port, and the LAN output queues.
Priority Management tab. Configuration of the LANs relevant to priority management.
Queue Mngt Radio to Lan tab. Emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue
of the LANs.
Push-button

Native 802.1p tab

The tab displays the output queue of the LANs which a packet, in input to any Ethernet port, is assigned
to, depending on its 802.1p priority Tag.
Parameters
802.1p Priority. The table indicates the output queue of the LANs which a packet, in input to
any Ethernet port, is assigned to, depending on its 802.1p priority Tag:
802.1p Priority. Each column correspond to a Tag 802.1p value of the packet in input
to a port: 0 7.
Internal Priority (Queue). Each row correspond to a output queue of the LANs:
0. Queue with 0 priority (low priority).
1. Queue with 1 priority.
3. Queue with 3 priority (high priority).
The active option indicates the combination output queue - Tag 802.1p.
The table is common to all the LANs of the Ethernet Switch.
See also
PTOS/DSCP Config. tab

The tab displays the correspondence between the priority PTOS/DSCP of the packets, in input to any Ethernet port, and the LAN output queues.
Parameters
List Filter. Filter the values of the table:
260
View All. The table displays all the values.
View Queue 0. The table displays only the values associated to the 0 output queue.
Filter. Set the IP format which the DSCP field refers to:
IP v4 DSCP. The DSCP column is meaningful for traffic incoming in the Switch in the
IPv4 format.
IPv6 format.
Table. Every row of the table corresponds to a possible value for the relevant PTOS/DSCP field:
Value. The value expressed in binary digits.
Precedence, Delay, Throug., Reliab., DSCP. For the description of the options see RFC
2474, 2597 and 2598 specifications.
Internal Priority (Queue). Queue which the packet in input to the specific port, whose
PTOS/DSCP has the value displayed in the row, is assigned to is displayed:

See also
Priority Management tab

WARNING Tab available only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
The tab displays configuration parameters of the LANs relevant to the priority management.
Parameters
Priority Selection. Priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input to the LANs port,
to the output:
Disable. The priority management is disabled.
802.1P. The value of the 802.1p priority (level 2) is analysed for the choice of the
output queue.
IpTOS. The value of TOS (Type Of Service) is analysed (level 3) for the choice of the
output queue.
802.1P-IpTOS. The value of the 802.1p priority is analysed and, if not evaluated, the
value of TOS for the choice of the output queue.
IpTOS-802.1P. The value of TOS is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value of 802.1p
priority for the choice of the output queue.
Default Priority. Value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the LANs port
which, in output, the Tag is added to:
0. Lowest priority
7. Highest priority.
Table. Mapping of priority 802.1p within Tag VLan (priority 802.1p present into a packet in input
to a port can be remapped in output from the Switch with a different priority value):
802-1p INPUT Priority. Each row correspond to Tag 802.1p value of the packet in output from the Switch: 7 0.
802.1p OUTPUT Priority Remapping. Each column correspond to Tag 802.1p value of
the packet in output from the Switch.
The active option indicates the combination: Tag 802.1p in input to the Switch - Tag 802.1p in
output from the Switch.
261
Table available only if the analysis of the priority 802.1p is active (see parameter Priority Selection).
See also
output queue
Verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the LANs which,
in output, the Tag is added to
Queue Mngt Radio to Lan tab

The tab displays the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue of the LANs.
Parameters
Egress Priority Policy. Emptying algorithm:
8421 WRR. A part (8 messages) of the queue with highest priority is empties, then a
part of the queue with lower priority (4 messages), then a part of the queue with further lower priority (2 messages), then a part of the queue with lowest priority (1 message) and so on restarting from the queue with highest priority.
Strict Priority. The queue with highest priority is completely emptied (sending of all
the messages) before sending a message of the queue with lower priority.
Strict 3. The high priority queue 3 is completely emptied (sending of all the messages). The other queues (2, 1, 0) are managed with a WRR 421 mechanism.
Strict 3 and 2. The high priority queue 3 and queue 2 are completely emptied. The
other queues (1, 0) are managed with a WRR 21 mechanism.
See also
Verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue of the LANs
262
Priority towards Radio ports

The Priority towards Radio ports command manages the correspondence between the priority (802.1p,
MPLS, PTOS/DSCP) of the packets, in input from LANs, and the output queues of the Radio ports of Ethernet Switch (Radio port).
Operations
Verify/assign the output queue (Radio ports) to a packet according to its native 802.1p Tag
Verify/assign the output queue (Radio ports) to a packet according to its native MPLS priority
Tag
Verify/modify the correspondence between MPLS priority and 802.1p priority of the packets if
input from LANs and in output from Radio ports
Verify/assign the output queue (Radio ports) to a packet according to its PTOS/DSCP field
IF
THE EQUIPMENT IS AN
ETHERNET
ELEMENT OF A NODE
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LANs
to the output queue of the Radio ports
Verify/modify the value for Port Default and 802.1p priority
GUI
Priority towards Radio ports contextual area
WARNING The setting of the parameter is common to all the Radio ports of the Ethernet Switch.
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Priority towards Radio ports.
Table 802.1p Priority indicates the correspondence between native 802.1p priority (802.1p Priority),
possible present in packets in input from LANs, and the output queues of Radio ports (Internal Priority
Queue) (see Native 802.1p/MPLS tab).
2. To change the parameter, select the option corresponding to the wished combination Tag 802.1p - output queue.
For the same value of Tag 802.1p, it is possible to select only one queue at a time.
Tag
Table MPLS Priority indicates the correspondence between native MPLS priority (MPLS Priority), possible
present in packets in input from LANs, and the output queues of Radio ports (Internal Priority Queue)
(see Native 802.1p/MPLS tab).
2. To change the parameter, select the option corresponding to the wished combination Tag MPLS - output
queue.
For the same value of Tag MPLS, it is possible to select only one queue at a time.
263
WARNING The setting of the parameter is common to all the LANs of the Ethernet Switch
2. Select the MPLS to 802.1p Rewrite tab.
The tab displays the correspondence between MPLS priority (Native MLPS) and 802.1p priority (802.1p
Priority) of packets in input from LANs and in output from Radio ports.
3. To re-map a MPLS priority, select the option corresponding to wished combination Tag MPLS - Tag
802.1p.
For a single value of Tag MPLS, only one value at a time of Tag 802.1p can be selected.
2. Select the PTOS/DSCP Config. tab.
The tab displays the correspondence between PTOS/DSCP priority of the packets, in input to any Ethernet ports, and the output queue of Radio ports (Internal Priority (Queue).
3. To modify the output queue, which a PTOS/DSCP value is associated to, select in the Filter box, the IP
format which the DSCP field refers to.
4. Select the box relevant to the output queue you wish to change (column Internal Priority (Queue) and
select the wished option.
5. Repeat the previous step to change the output queue of all the wished PTOS/DSCP value.
output queue of the Radio ports
The Internal Priority Selection parameter indicates the priority criterion used to associated the packets,
in input to the LANs, to the output of the Radio ports.
264
Port Default. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to the default value set by the user.
Native 802.1p (Outer Tag). The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to the priority value present in the outer Tag (C-VID or S-VID, depending on the port
setting).
Native TOS/DSCP. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to
the TOS/DSCP value present in the native IP field.
Native MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to the
priority value present in native MPLS field.
802.1p (C_PCP) rewrite with MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio
port according to the priority value present in native MPLS field and this value will be rewritten
in the field 802.1p of C-VID.


The parameter Default Priority indicates the value used to define the output queue of the Radio port
when the selected priority criteria is Port Default (see parameter Internal Priority Selection) and value
used as priority 802.1p added to the untagged packets entering in the considered LAN and they will
exit tagged from the corresponding remote LAN (0: lowest priority, 7: highest priority).
265
Priority towards Radio ports contextual area

WARNING Priority Management tab is available only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
The contextual area displays the correspondence between the priority (802.1p, MPLS, PTOS/DSCP) of the
packets, in input from LANs, and the output queues of the Radio ports of Ethernet Switch (Radio port).
Tabs
Native 802.1p/MPLS tab. Correspondence between native 802.1p priority and/or MPLS, possible
present in packets in input from LANs, and the output queues of the Radio ports of the Ethernet
Switch.
MPLS to 802.1p Rewrite tab. Correspondence between MPLS priority and 802.1p priority of packets in input from LANs and in output from Radio ports.
PTOS/DSCP Config. tab. Correspondence between PTOS/DSCP priority of the packets, in input
to any Ethernet ports, and the output queue of Radio ports.
Priority Management tab. Configuration of the LANs relevant to priority management.
Push-button

Native 802.1p/MPLS tab

The tab displays the correspondence between native 802.1p and/or MPLS priority and the output queues
of Radio ports.
Parameters
802.1p Priority. The table indicates the correspondence between native 802.1p priority, possible present in packets in input from LANs, and the output queues of Radio ports:
802.1p Priority. Each column correspond to a Tag 802.1p value: 0 7.
Internal Priority (Queue). Each row correspond to a output queue of the Radio ports:
The active option indicates the combination Tag 802.1p - output queue.
The table is common to all the Radio ports of the Ethernet Switch.
MPLS Priority. The table indicates the correspondence between native MPLS priority, possible
present in packets in input from LANs, and the output queues of Radio ports.
266
MPLS Priority. Each column correspond to a Tag MPLS value: 0 7.
Internal Priority (Queue). Each row correspond to a output queue of the Radio ports:
The active option indicates the combination Tag MPLS - output queue.
See also
Tag
MPLS to 802.1p Rewrite tab

The tab indicates the correspondence between MPLS priority and 802.1p priority of packets in input from
LANs and in output from Radio ports.
Parameters
Native MPLS. The columns point out the value of MPLS priority (Native MLPS); while the rows
point out value of 802.1p priority (802.1p Priority).
The active option indicates which 802.1p priority every single native MPLS priority is re-mapped
to.
Correspondence can be 1 to 1, that is same priority in two fields, or arbitrary according to the
function chosen by the user. For instance, the priority MPLS 7 can be re-mapped as priority 0 in
field 802.1p.
See also
PTOS/DSCP Config. tab

The tab displays the correspondence between PTOS/DSCP priority of the packets, in input to any Ethernet
ports, and the output queue of Radio ports.
Parameters
List Filter. Filter the values of the table:
View All. The table displays all the values.
Filter. Set the IP format which the DSCP field refers to:
IPv4 format.
IPv6 format.
Table. Every row of the table corresponds to a possible value for the relevant PTOS/DSCP field:
Value. The value expressed in binary digits.
267
Precedence, Delay, Throug., Reliab., DSCP. For the description of the options see RFC
2474, 2597 and 2598 specifications.
Internal Priority (Queue). Queue which the packet in input to the specific port, whose
PTOS/DSCP has the value displayed in the row, is assigned to is displayed:
See also

The tab displays configuration parameters of the LANs relevant to the priority management.
Parameters
Internal Priority Selection. Priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input to the
LANs, to the output of the Radio Ports:
Port Default. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according
to the default value set by the user.
Native 802.1p (Outer Tag). The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio
port according to the priority value present in the outer Tag (C-VID or S-VID, depending on the port setting).
Native TOS/DSCP. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to the TOS/DSCP value present in the native IP field.
Native MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according
to the priority value present in native MPLS field.
802.1p (C_PCP) rewrite with MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the
Radio port according to the priority value present in native MPLS field and this value
will be rewritten in the field 802.1p of C-VID.
Default Priority. Value used to define the output queue of the Radio port when the selected
priority criteria is Port Default (see parameter Internal Priority Selection) and value used as priority 802.1p added to the untagged packets entering in the considered LAN and they will exit
tagged from the corresponding remote LAN:
0. Lowest priority
The table on the tab is not meaningful in this context.

See also
268
Compression
WARNING Command available only if:
The compression function is supported by equipment hardware.
The Header compression inhibit functionality is disabled (see Equipment Feature tab).
The Compression command manages the compression of the level-2 and level-3 headers present into an
Ethernet packet, in output from the Switch, before the traffic is inserted in the radio frame.
Operations
Verify/modify the compression of the headers of Ethernet packets in input from LANs
GUI
Compression contextual area
WARNING Operation available only if the compression function is supported by equipment hardware.
For equipment whose management is executed in band (see Ethernet tab - In Band Management), in order
to preserve the link with the remote equipment, the change of the configuration of the compressor must
be executed following the steps listed here below:
1. Disable the compression function on the remote terminal.
2. Disable the compression function on the local terminal.
3. Modify the configuration and enable the compression function on the remote terminal.
4. Modify the configuration and enable the compression function on the local terminal.
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Compression.
The Compression contextual area displays the possible headers which could be compressed if present
in the incoming traffic.
2. To modify the compression status of one or more fields, activate or deactivate the relevant box.
When necessary, set the configuration parameters of a field as pointed out in the previous step.
269
Compression contextual area

The contextual area displays the fields of Ethernet packet which could be compressed if present in the incoming traffic.
Parameters
Ethernet. Compression of header of Ethernet packet (header).

Active box (
) indicates that compression is enabled; inactive box means compression disabled.
When compression is active, the following parameters are present in the area below:
Bytes Header. Number of bytes in the header which are compressed depending on the settings made for the options below. Maximum number of byte: 124. Parameter is read-only.
Bytes Context+Dynamic. Number of bytes used by the co/decompression process and calculated by a proprietary algorithm. These bytes can be used depending on the settings made
for the options below. Maximum number of byte: 118. Parameter is read-only.
Number of Labels and Tags. Number of MPLS label + Tag Ethernet enabled. Maximum number of label MPLS + Tag Ethernet: 8. Parameter is read-only.
C_TAG (802.1Q). Compression of field 802.1Q (priority and identifier of VLAN). Active box
indicates that compression is enabled; inactive box means compression disabled. When
compression is active, the following parameters are present in the area below:
Q-in-Q (802.1ad). Compression of field S_Tag (Service Tag) QinQ. Active box indicates that compression is enabled; inactive box means compression disabled. When
Max Number of S-TAG. Maximum number of inserted Provider Tags which can
be compressed. The parameter can be set to values 1 or 2.
MPLS. Compression of MPLS priority field. Active box indicates that compression is enabled;
inactive box means compression disabled. When compression is active, the following parameters are present in the area below:
Max Number of Labels. Maximum number of inserted MPLS Labels which can be compressed.
Control Word (RFC4385). Compression of field Control Word. Active box indicates that
compression is enabled; inactive box means compression disabled.
EoMPLS (Ethernet over MPLS). Compression of EoMPLS protocol. Active box indicates that compression is enabled; inactive box means compression disabled. When
C_TAG (802.1Q). Compression of field 802.1Q (priority and identifier of VLAN)

for EoMPLS. Active box indicates that compression is enabled; inactive box means
compression disabled. When compression is active, the following parameters are
present in the area below:
Q-in-Q (802.1ad). Compression of field S_Tag (Service Tag) QinQ for EoMPLS. Active box indicates that compression is enabled; inactive box means
compression disabled. When compression is active, the following parameters
are present in the area below:
Max Number of S-TAG. Maximum number of inserted Provider Tags which

can be compressed for EoMPLS. The parameter can be set to values 1 or 2.
It is suggested to activate the EoMPLS compression only if the MPLS traffic on the
radio equipment is Ethernet over MPLS.
IP+. Compression of level-3 header (if present). Active box indicates that compression is
enabled; inactive box means compression disabled. When compression is active, the area
below indicates the format of the traffic in input to the Switch:
IPv4. Format IPv4.
IPv4 or IPv6. Format IPv4 or IPv6.
Tunneling IPv4 - IPv4/IPv6. Compression of IP field possibly inserted in an IP frame.

In Tunneling mode the format is IPv4 + UDP + GTP-U + IPv4/IPv6 + UDP + RTP.
The format currently in use is pointed out by the active option. The parameter can be modified.
If the option IPv4 or IPv4 or IPv6 is active, even the following parameter is displayed:
270
UDP. Compression of field UDP (if present). If the active option is:
Disable. Compression inactive.
Enable. Compression of field UDP (if present) active.
Enable+RTP. Compression of fields UDP and RTP (if present) active.
The parameter can be modified.

Push-button

See also
271
LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.), LAN 4 (Enh.)

The LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) and LAN 4 (Enh.) commands manage the LANs of the
Ethernet Switch (Enhanced).
On the choice of one of the commands, the LAN <selected Lan number> (Enh.) contextual area opens,
where it is possible to manage the specific LAN.
Operations
STATUS
AND COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS
Verify/modify the enabling status of the LAN

Verify/modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the LAN
Verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is
inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the LAN
Verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the LAN
Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the LAN
Verify/modify the rule to forwarding the input packets from the LAN
Verify/modify the maximum throughput of data in output from LAN port
Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the LAN
Verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) for the LAN
Verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line
synchronism for the LAN
Verify/modify the interface type of the LAN
PORT INGRESS RATE LIMITER (PIRL)
Verify the existing PIRL instances for the LAN
Create a PIRL instance for the LAN
Enable/disable a PIRL instance of the LAN
Modify a PIRL instance of the LAN
Delete a PIRL instance of the LAN
INPUT FILTER POLICING
Verify/modify the modality and the criteria used to limit the traffic in input from the LAN
PRIORITY
PARAMETERS
Verify the current management modality of protocol 802.1Q

Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LAN
to the output queue of the Radio ports
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the LAN
Verify/modify the Service Tag List table
Verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue of the
LAN
VIRTUAL LAN
PARAMETERS
Verify/modify the Default Vid value of the LAN

Force the value of VID of the LAN to the default value
Verify/modify the management of the 802.1Q field on the messages in input from the
LAN
Verify/modify the traffic transport modality (point-point or Bridge)
Verify/modify the management of Provider Tag in the packets in input from the LAN in
selective mode
Verify/modify the management of Tag of the packets (in origin without Tag) in input from
the LAN
Verify/overwrite the C-VID value of the packets in input from the LAN and forwarded to
the Radio, with a different VID
Verify/modify the value of S-VID added to the packets in input to the LAN (independently
from the presence of the Tag)
272
Verify the list of VIDs registered in VLAN Table Unit and associated to the LAN
Verify/modify the management of the LAN in Provider mode
Verify/modify the transit of Untagged packets via LAN (802.1q - Secure)
Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the LAN
SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL
PARAMETERS
Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol
Enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the LAN
Verify/modify the priority of the LAN (STP/ELP)
Verify/modify the connection cost of the LAN (STP/ELP)
ETHERNET LINE PROTECTION (ELP)
PARAMETERS
Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Ethernet Line Protection
Enable/disable the Ethernet Line Protection for the LAN
TRUNKING
MODE PARAMETERS
Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Trunking mode

Enable/disable the Trunking mode for the LAN
LLF
PARAMETERS
Verify/modify the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality of the LAN
LOOP
Activate/deactivate the loop on line side of the LAN
LASER
PARAMETERS
Verify the status and the configuration of the laser (LAN)

Modify the enabling status of the laser (LAN)
Modify the transmission mode of the laser (LAN)
Enable manually the laser transmission (LAN)
Execute the test laser functioning status (LAN)
GUI
LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.), LAN 4 (Enh.) contextual area
See also
PIRL function (info)

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (info)
Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) (info)
Trunking mode (info)
Bidirectional LLF (info)

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
The Rate Control parameter indicates the enabling status of the port:
Disable. The LAN is not enabled to the use.
Full Rate. The LAN is enabled to the use of the maximum bit rate relevant to the port.
Kb/Mb. The LAN is enabled to the use with bit rate limited to the specific value.

273

WARNING Operation available only for ports with electrical interface for which the use of the LAN is enabled
(see Verify/modify the enabling status of the LAN).
The Cable Crossover parameter indicates the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines:
MDI (NIC). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card modality).
MDIX (switch). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch modality).
Auto. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic modality.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished option

Verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation
is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the LAN
The Speed/Duplex parameter indicates the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the LAN.
For LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3, LAN 4 configured with electrical interface, the following values are available:
Full-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the
data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.
Half-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and the
Half-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and
the data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.
Auto FD up to 10M. The auto negotiation is enabled: the speed and the transmission type are
negotiated with a maximum of speed of 10Mbit/s and with modality Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex.
Auto FD up to 100M. The auto negotiation is enabled: the speed and the transmission type are
negotiated with a maximum of speed of 100Mbit/s and with modality Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex.
Auto FD up to 1G. The auto negotiation is enabled: the speed and the transmission type are
negotiated with a maximum of speed of 1Gbit/s and with modality Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex.
For LAN 3 and LAN 4 configured with optical interface, the following values are available:
Full-Duplex-1G. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the
data transmission speed through the LAN is 1GMbit/s.


WARNING If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the flow control must be DISABLED. If it was
enabled, at the opening of the contextual area a message is displayed asking to disable the parameter. If
already disabled, the setting cannot be changed.
274
The Flow Control Full Dplx/Back Pressure Half Dplx parameter indicates the activation status of the flow
control of the LAN:
Disable. The flow control is forced inactive.
Enable. The flow control is forced active.
Auto. The flow control is auto-negotiated and, if the remote equipment can manage the flow
control, it is automatically activated on the local equipment.
In Full-Duplex modality, the flow control is regulated according to the 802.3x normative. In Half-Duplex
modality, the flow control is regulated according to the Back Pressure technique.
WARNING The MAC-based routing functionality in the Ethernet Switch is available only if enabled this func-
tion.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the automatic learning of the MAC Addresses must be
ENABLED. If it was disabled, at the opening of the contextual area a message is displayed asking to enable
the parameter (Enable or Learn. on port basis option).
The MAC Learning parameter indicates the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table (MAC Table):
Disable. The automatic learning of the MAC Address is disabled.
Enable. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the addresses in the table
takes place analysing only the field MAC Address and is registered in a single MAC Table.
Learn. on port basis. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the addresses in the table takes place associating the MAC Address to the segment of MAC Table indicized
by the Default Vid value associated to the port which the traffic is income from.

WARNING Parameter meaningful only if the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the MAC Table is
enabled (Mac Learning).
The Forwarding Rule parameter indicates the rule to forwarding the input packets from the LAN:
Dest. Addr. Vid Basis. The port forwards the traffic on VLAN basis (Port Based VLAN) and with
destination MAC address present in MAC Table.
Vid Basis. The port forwards the traffic only on VLAN basis without checking the presence of destination MAC in MAC Table.

275

The parameter Egress Shaping indicates the maximum Throughput of data in output from LAN port:
Disable. No maximum throughput is set for LAN port.
Full Rate. The value of maximum bit rate of the port is set as maximum throughput for LAN port.
...Kb/...Mb. The specific value is set as maximum throughput for LAN port.
The throughput is the real index of utilization of the link capacity, that is the amount of data transmitted
in the unit of time.
Available values changes depending on the port transmission speed (see parameter Speed/Duplex).
Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the LAN

WARNING Operation available only if the auto negotiation is enabled (Speed/Duplex and/or Flow Control
box - Auto option).
2. Press Restart Autonegotiation and confirm.
WARNING Operation available only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is active
and the 1000Base-T configuration is active (see Verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation
and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the
LAN).
The Master/Slave parameter indicates the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) of the LAN:
Master. The line synchronism is generated starting from the local clock.
Slave. The line synchronism is generated with the clock retrieved from the line (Loop Time).

Verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the
line synchronism for the LAN
WARNING Operation available only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is active
and the 1000Base-T configuration is active (see Verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation
and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the
LAN).
276
The M/S Autoneg. parameter indicates the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles
of the line synchronism of the LAN:
Enable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is automatic.
Disable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is
forced. In this case, the role defined in the Master/Slave box is used.


WARNING Operation available only for LAN 3 and LAN 4.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).

The Interface Type parameter indicates the interface type of the LAN:
Electrical. The LAN is configured with electrical interface.
Optical. The LAN is configured with optical interface.


WARNING Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2 if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a
node.
2. Select the Rate Limiter tab.
The tab displays the existing PIRL instance for the specific LAN.

WARNING For each LAN, it is possible to create a maximum of 3 PIRL instance.
In order to use a PIRL instance for the traffic limitation, after its creation, it must be enabled (see Enable/
disable a PIRL instance of the LAN).
Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2 if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
3. Press Add.
4. Set, in the Rate box, the band threshold over which the traffic is limited.
The type of traffic to limit will be set in the next steps.
5. In the Broadcast box, select the option:
Enable. The transit of the Broadcast packets in input from the port is limited to the specific band.
Disable. The transit of the Broadcast packets is not limited.
277
6. In the Unknow Multicast box, select the option:
Enable. The transit of the Multicast Unknown packets (Multicast packets with destination MAC
addresses not present in the MAC Table) in input from the port is limited to the specific band.
Disable. The transit of the Multicast Unknown packets is not limited.
7. In the Unknow Unicast box, select the option:
Enable. The transit of the Unicast Unknown packets (Unicast packets with destination MAC addresses not present in the MAC Table) in input from the port is limited to the specific band.
Disable. The transit of the Unicast Unknown packets is not limited.
8. In the Unicast box, select the option:
Enable. The transit of the Unicast packets in input from the port is limited to the specific band.
Disable. The transit of the Unicast packets is not limited.
9. In the ARP box, select the option:
Enable. The transit of the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) packets in input from the port is
limited to the specific band.
Disable. The transit of the ARP packets is not limited.

The Rate Limiter tab displays the row relevant to the new PIRL instance.

node.
3. To enable the use of an instance, select the specific Status box and then the Active option: the Switch
will use the instance as rule for the traffic limitation.
To disable the use of an instance, select the specific Status box and then the Not Active option: the
Switch will not use the instance as rule for the traffic limitation.

node.
3. Double click on the box relevant to the parameter of PIRL instance you wish to change.
All the parameters of an instance can be modified.
The parameter setting modes are the same pointed out in par. Create a PIRL instance for the LAN.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed and not communicated yet to the equipment.
The changes are confirmed in Rate Limiter tab.
278

node.
3. Select the PIRL instance you wish to delete.
The PIRL instance is removed from the list.
Verify/modify the modality and the criteria used to limit the traffic in input from the
LAN
WARNING Operation not available if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
2. Select the Input Filter Policing tab.
The Mode parameter shows the modality to use to limit the traffic in input from LAN and forwarded to
Radio port:
Disable. Option disabled: the traffic in input is not limited according to specific criteria.
UNI Port based. Option enabled: all the traffic in input is limited on port basis.
EVC C_Vid Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the packets with C-VID
(Customer VLAN Identifier) defined by the user and pointed out in the table below.
COS C_Vid + Internal Priority Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the
packets with C-VID values and priority defined by the user and pointed out in the table below.
EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the packets with
S-VID (Service VLAN Identifier) and C-VID values defined by the user and pointed out in the
table below.
COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Internal Priority Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only
for the packets with S-VID and C-VID values and priority defined by the user and pointed out in
the table below.
EVC S_Vid Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the packets with S-VID
values defined by the user and pointed out in the table below.
COS S_Vid + Internal Priority Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the
packets with S-VID values and priority defined by the user and pointed out in the table below.
COS Internal Priority Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the packets
with priority defined by the user and pointed out in the table below.
The Not Registered Traffic Default Color parameter shows the colour preset for the packets not associated to any traffic profile defined by the user (Bandwidth Profile):
Green (MEF Compliant). The packets are treated as belonging to the green profile.
Red. The packets are discarded.
The table present in the tab will point out, according to the set modality, the criteria for the traffic limitation defined by the user (Bandwidth Profile).
Every row of the table corresponds to one criterion. The configuration parameters (pointed out in the
table columns) of the criterion change depending on the setting of the parameter Mode. If the active
value is:
UNI Port Based the table contains the columns:
CIR (Committed Information Rate). Transmission rate (expressed in Mbit/s) ensured in

normal operating condition of the network (throughput).
279
EIR (Extended Information Rate). Band exceeding that set by CIR.
CBS. (Committed Burst Size). Traffic burst which the network ensures to store.
EBS (Excessive Burst Size). Quantity of data, besides CBS, the network can store.
CF (Coupling Flag). Modality to control the traffic declared Yellow.
Enabled. The average value, in the long period, of the traffic declared Yellow is
limited by the value CIR+EIR as function of the traffic declared Green.
Disabled. The average value, in the long period, of the traffic declared Yellow is
limited by the value EIR.
In both cases, the Burst Size of the traffic declared Yellow is limited by the value if EBS.
EVC C_Vid Based the table contains the columns:
C_Vid. Identifier C-VID of the packet in input.
CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS and CF. The description is the same reported for the value UNI Port
Based, but only for the traffic with identifier C-VID set by the user, and not on the whole
traffic incoming from LAN.
COS C_Vid + Internal Priority Based the table contains the columns:
Internal Priority. Levels of priority (range of values between minimum and maximum) of
the packet in input.
Based, but only for the traffic with identifier C-VID and 802.1p priority set by the user,
and not on the whole traffic incoming from LAN.
EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based the table contains the columns:
S_Vid. Identifier S-VID of the packet in input.
CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS e CF. The description is the same reported for the value UNI Port
Based, but only for the traffic with identifiers S-VID and C-VID set by the user, and not
on the whole traffic incoming from LAN.
COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Internal Priority Based the table contains the columns:
Based, but only for the traffic with identifiers S-VID and C-VID and with 802.1p priority
set by the user, and not on the whole traffic incoming from LAN.
EVC S_Vid Based the table contains the columns:
Based, but only for the traffic with identifier S-VID set by the user, and not on the whole
traffic incoming from LAN.
COS S_Vid + Internal Priority Based the table contains the columns:
Based, but only for the traffic with identifier S-VID and 802.1p priority set by the user,
COS Internal Priority Based the table contains the columns:
Based, but only for the traffic with priority set by the user, and not on the whole traffic
incoming from LAN.
3. To modify the Mode parameter select the wished option, press Apply and confirm.
The values EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based and COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Internal Priority Based, EVC S_Vid Based
and COS S_Vid + Internal Priority Based can be set only if, in the tab 802.1Q Management, the parameter 802.1q Setting is set to the value Secure and the parameter Provider is active.
280
The passage from modality UNI Port based, EVC C_Vid Based, COS C_Vid + Internal Priority Based or
COS Internal Priority Based to modality EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based or COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Internal Priority
Based, EVC S_Vid Based or COS S_Vid + Internal Priority Based and vice versa deletes all the elements
present in the table.
The passage from any modality to the value Disable deletes all the items present in the table and disable it. Moreover, the value Green (MEF Compliant) is automatically forced for the parameter Not Registered Traffic Default Color.
4. To modify the Not Registered Traffic Default Color parameter select the wished option, press Apply and
confirm.
If the value Red is selected, a message warns that the packets without an associated band profile will
be discarded.
The parameter is not available if the Disable value is set for the Mode parameter.
5. To add a criterion to the list:
a. Press Add.
b. Set all the parameters present in the window.
Meaning and values of the parameters are pointed out in step 2.
c. Press Apply and confirm.
If, for the parameter Mode, the active value is:
Disable. No element can be added to the table.
UNI Port based. Only one element can be added to the table.
EVC C_Vid Based, COS C_Vid + Internal Priority Based, EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based, COS S_Vid/
C_Vid + Internal Priority Based, EVC S_Vid Based, COS S_Vid + Internal Priority Based, COS
Internal Priority Based. More elements can be added to the table.
6. To modify a criterion of the list:

a. Double click on the box relevant to the parameter you wish to change and set the new value.
Meaning and values of the parameters are pointed out in step 2.
b. Press Apply changes and confirm.
If, for the parameter Mode, the active value is:
Disable. No element in the table is available to be modified.
UNI Port based. All the parameters can be modified.
EVC C_Vid Based. All the parameters can be modified, except C_Vid.
COS C_Vid + Internal Priority Based. All the parameters can be modified, except C_Vid and Internal Priority.
EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based. All the parameters can be modified, except S_Vid and C_Vid.
COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Internal Priority Based. All the parameters can be modified, except S_Vid,
C_Vid and Internal Priority.
EVC S_Vid Based. All the parameters can be modified, except S_Vid.
COS S_Vid + Internal Priority Based. All the parameters can be modified, except S_Vid and Internal Priority.
COS Internal Priority Based. All the parameters can be modified, except Internal Priority.
7. To delete a criterion from the list:

a. Select the criterion you wish to delete.
b. Press Remove and confirm.

281
The parameter Current 802.1Q Setting indicates the current status of the management modality of protocol 802.1Q:
Disabled. The LAN does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input. They will be sent
only to the ports pointed out in the Port Based VLAN area.
Fallback. The traffic in input from the port is subjected both to port based routing (Port Based
VLAN) and to VLAN Table Unit (VTU) based routing.
Secure (C_vid Filtering). The traffic in input from the port is subjected only to the routing defined
by VTU.
Secure (Service Provider Port). The traffic in input from the port can be only of type Provider
and will be subjected only to the routing defined by VTU.
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the
LAN to the output queue of the Radio ports
The Internal Priority Selection parameter indicates the priority criterion used to associated the packets,
in input to the LAN, to the output of the Radio ports.
If the parameter Current 802.1Q Setting has value:
282
Disabled the following options are present:
Port Default. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to
the default value set by the user.
Native MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to
the priority value present in native MPLS field.
Fallback or Secure (C_vid Filtering) the following options are present:
Native 802.1p (C_Vid). The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to the value of native 802.1p priority.
Radio port according to the priority value present in native MPLS field and this value will
be rewritten in the field 802.1p of C-VID.
Secure (Service Provider Port) the following options are present:
Native 802.1p (S_Vid). The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to the value of native 802.1p priority.
be rewritten in the field 802.1p of C-VID.
802.1p (S_PCP) rewrite with MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the
be rewritten in the field 802.1p of S-VID.


The parameter Default Internal Priority indicates the value used to define the output queue of the Radio
port when the selected priority criteria is Port Default (see parameter Internal Priority Selection) and
value used as priority 802.1p added to the untagged packets entering in the considered LAN and they
will exit tagged from the corresponding remote LAN (0: lowest priority, 7: highest priority).
Operation available only if the analysis of the priority 802.1p is active.


Operation available only if the parameter Current 802.1Q Setting has value:
Secure (Service Provider Port).
Secure (C_vid Filtering) with the corresponding Radio port in Secure and the transit of packets
is enabled (Port Based VLan).
283
The table Service Tag List allows managing the exceptions on the priority criteria used on port basis
and seen before for the single VID (S-VID or C-VID) according to the enabling of Provider modality.
Each row of the table corresponds to an exception. For every item, is pointed out in the column:
S_Vid or C_Vid. VLAN identifier where exception is applied (S-VID: Service VLAN Identifier, CVID: Customer VLAN Identifier).
Header S_Vid is present if port is Provider, while C_Vid if the port is not Provider.
Default Priority. Only for set VLAN (S-VID or C-VID): value used to define the output queue of
Radio port when the selected priority criterion is TAG Default (see parameter Priority Sel) and
value used as priority 802.1p added to untagged packets which enter in the considered LAN and
will exit tagged from the corresponding remote LAN (0: lowest priority; 7: highest priority).
Priority Sel. Only for set VLAN (S-VID or C-VID): priority criterion used to associate the packets,
in input from the LAN, to the output queues of the Radio port:
TAG Default. The traffic will be sent on the output queues of Radio port according to the
default value set by the user.
802.1p. The traffic will be sent on the output queues of Radio port according to the value
of native 802.1p priority.
TOS/DSCP. The traffic will be sent on the output queues of Radio port according to the
TOS/DSCP value present in native IP field.
MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to the priority value present in native MPLS field.
be rewritten in the field 802.1p of C-VID. Option available only for C-VID.
802.1p (S_PCP) rewrite with MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the
be rewritten in the field 802.1p of S-VID. Option available only for S-VID.
3. To add an element to the list:

a. Press Add.
b. Set the S_Vid or C_Vid, Default Priority and Priority Selection filed as described above.
c. Press Apply and confirm.
4. To modify an element of the list:
a. Double click on the box relevant to the Default Priority or Priority Selection parameter you wish
to change and set the new value.
b. Press Apply Changes and confirm.
5. To delete an element from the list:
a. Select the element.
Verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue of
the LAN
2. Select the Queue Mngt Radio to Lan tab.
The Egress Priority Policy parameter indicates the emptying algorithm of the output queues of the LAN:
284
8421 WRR, a part (8 messages) of the queue with highest priority is empties, then a part of the
queue with lower priority (4 messages), then a part of the queue with further lower priority (2
messages), then a part of the queue with lowest priority (1 message) and so on restarting from
the queue with highest priority.
Strict Priority, the queue with highest priority is completely emptied (sending of all the messages) before sending a message of the queue with lower priority.
Strict 3, the high priority queue 3 is completely emptied (sending of all the messages). The other
queues (2, 1, 0) are managed with a WRR 421 mechanism.
Strict 3 and 2, the high priority queue 3 and queue 2 are completely emptied. The other queues
(1, 0) are managed with a WRR 21 mechanism.


2. Select the 802.1Q Management tab.
The Default Vid parameter indicates the default VLAN Identifier value of the port.
The Default Vid of a port is used as VID in the field 802.1Q of the packets came from the port in subject
without Tag and destined to exit with Tag from any port of the Switch.
3. To change the parameter, type a numeric value between 2 and 4094.
It is not possible to set, as ID, a value already used as Default Vid by another port or already used by
a reserved VLAN (see Virtual Lan Config. tab).
If the message Default Vid already assigned to VLan in list. Continue anyway? is displayed, this means
that the entered value is used even as ID of a traffic VLAN. To continue the operation, press Yes and
confirm.

The Force Def. Vid parameter indicates if the forcing of native CTag of the traffic in input to the LAN
with the corresponding default VID is active.
Active box (
) indicates the forcing is active; inactive box indicates forcing is not active.

If at least one of the Radio ports (Port A/Port B) is in Fallback modality (Ingress Filtering Check parameter) a warning message is displayed. Press OK to continue the operation.
Verify/modify the management of the 802.1Q field on the messages in input from the
LAN
The 802.1q Setting parameter indicates the management of the 802.1Q field on the messages in input
from the LAN:
285
Disabled. The LAN does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input. They will be sent
only to the ports indicated in the Port Based VLAN area.
Fallback. Packets are not discarded if the VLAN is not registered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU).
If VID (VLAN Identifier) of incoming packet is registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the
ports belonging to the VLANs registered in VTU and included in VLAN on port basis.
If VID of incoming packet is NOT registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the ports included in VLAN on port basis.
Secure. VID must be contained in VTU and the input pot must be member of this VLAN, otherwise the packet is discarded.
A packet can exit from the ports belonging to the VLAN registered in VTU and are included in
VLAN on port basis.
For each configuration (selection of the Disabled, Fallback or Secure option) the table of Port Based
VLAN must be ALWAYS configured even if the traffic management is executed only on Tag base (see
Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the LAN).
If you wish to obtain a bidirectional traffic routed according the Vlan Table, the control of the Tag
802.1Q (Fallback or Secure) must be activated on all the ports.

Operation available only if the parameter 802.1q Setting has value Disabled or Fallback (see Fig.7).
The Traffic Treatment parameter indicates the traffic transport modality (point-point or Bridge):
Transparent Port to Port Transport. The traffic entering from a local LAN will automatically exit
only from the equivalent remote LAN, unless the single VLANs registered in VLAN Table Unit
(VTU) and routed by the user in different mode.
Transparent Bridge Port Based. The traffic entering from a local LAN will automatically exit from
all the remote LANs enabled by VLAN per port, unless the single VLANs registered in VTU and
routed by the user in different mode.

Verify/modify the management of Provider Tag in the packets in input from the LAN
in selective mode
The parameter Selective Provider Tag indicates the insertion modality of Provider Tag in the packets in
input from the LAN.
If the parameter 802.1q Setting has value:
Disabled or Secure the following options are present:
286
Disable. Option disabled: the Provider Tag is not inserted in the packets in selective
mode.
Port-Based. Option enabled: the Provider Tag is inserted in the packets in selective mode
on port basis.
Fallback and the parameter Untag to Tag is not active, the following options are present:
Disable. Option disabled: the Provider Tag is not inserted in the packets in selective
mode.
C Vid Based. Option enabled: the Provider Tag is inserted in the packets in selective mode
on C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) basis.
C Vid + Internal Priority. Option enabled: the Provider Tag is inserted in the packets in
selective mode on C-VID and Internal Priority basis.

Verify/modify the management of Tag of the packets (in origin without Tag) in input
from the LAN
Operation available only if the parameter 802.1q Setting has value Fallback.
The parameter Untag to Tag indicates the possibility to insert a Tag in the packets, in origin without
Tag, in input from the LAN.
Active box (
) means that the Tag insertion is enabled; inactive box means it is disabled.

Verify/overwrite the C-VID value of the packets in input from the LAN and forwarded
to the Radio, with a different VID
Operation available only if the parameter 802.1q Setting has value Fallback.
Operation not available if the parameter Untag to Tag is active.
The Lan to Radio C_Vid Rewrite table indicates the correspondence between the C-VID value of the
packets in input from the LAN and the identifier used to replace C-VID in the packets forwarded to the
Radio port.
The name and the column of the table change according to the value set for the parameter Selective
Provider Tag. If for the parameter Selective Provider Tag the set value is:
Disable, the tab contains the table Lan to Radio C_Vid Rewrite. In the column:
Input C Vid. Value C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) of the packets in input from the LAN
you wish to overwrite.
Output C Vid. New value of C-VID you wish to forward to Radio port.
To add a value to the list press Add. Set the Input C Vid and Output C Vid parameters with the
wished value. Press Apply and confirm.
To delete a value select the relevant row. Press Remove and confirm.
C Vid Based, the tab contains the table Lan to Radio C_Vid Rewrite & Selective QinQ. In the column:
287
Input C Vid. C-VID value of the packets in input from the LAN which you wish to add
S_TAG to.
Output C Vid. New value of C-VID you wish to forward to Radio port. This value can be
equal to or different from the native C-VID incoming from LANs.
Output S Vid. New value of S-TAG added to the set C-VID value.
To add a value to the list press Add. Set the Input C Vid, Output C Vid and Output S Vid parameters with the wished value. Press Apply and confirm.
C Vid + Internal Priority, the tab contains the table Lan to Radio C_Vid Rewrite & Selective QinQ.
In the column:
Input C Vid. C-VID value of the packets in input from the LAN which you wish to add
S_TAG to.
Internal Priority. Value of priority associated to the packets incoming from the considered
LAN with the specific C-VID selected, which you wish to add a S-TAG to.
Output S Vid. New value of S-TAG added to set C-VID value and priority.
To add a value to the list press Add. Set the Input C Vid, Internal Priority e Output S Vid parameters with the wished value. Press Apply and confirm.
Verify/modify the value of S-VID added to the packets in input to the LAN (independently from the presence of the Tag)
Operation available only if the parameter802.1q Setting has value Disabled or Secure and the parameter
Selective Provider Tag has value Port-Based.
The table LAN To Radio Rewrite displays the new S-TAG value (Output S Vid) added to the packets in
input to the LAN (independently from the presence of the Tag) and forwarded to the Radio port.
3. To add a value to the list press Add.
Set the Output S Vid parameters with the wished value.
Press Apply and confirm.
4. To delete a value select the relevant row.
Press Remove and confirm.
WARNING Operation available only if the parameter 802.1q Setting has value Fallback or Secure.
3. Press Show Table.
The table Port C_Vid displays the list of C-VIDs (Customer VLAN Identifier) registered in VLAN Table
Unit (VTU) and associated to the LAN. In the column:
288
C_Vid. C-VID value registered in VTU.
VLan Label. Possible name associated to the registered C-VID value.
Frame Forwarding. Modality used to manage the registered C-VID.
Table available when the parameter 802.1q Setting has value Fallback or Secure (box Provider Port
inactive).
The table Port S_Vid displays the list of S-VIDs (Service VLAN Identifier) registered in VTU and associated to the LAN. In the column:
S_Vid. S-VID value registered in VTU.
VLan Label. Possible name associated to the registered S-VID value.
Frame Forwarding. Modality used to manage the registered S-VID.
Table available when the parameter 802.1q Setting has value Secure (box Provider Port active).

WARNING Operation available only if the parameter 802.1q Setting has value Secure.
The parameter Provider Port indicates the management of the LAN in Provider Mode.
Active box ( ) means that for the LAN the Provider mode (Double Tag active) is set; inactive box indicates that for the LAN the Provider mode (Double Tag inactive) is not set.
3. To change the parameter, check or uncheck the relevant box

WARNING Operation available only if the parameter 802.1q Setting has value Secure.
The parameter Enable Untagged Frame indicates the management of Untagged packets.
The active box ( ) points out that the LAN port is enabled to transit of Untagged packets; the inactive
box indicates that the LAN is not enabled to the transit of Untagged packets.
3. To change the parameter, check or uncheck the relevant box
WARNING Enabling the parameter changes the port condition from Trusted to Untrusted.
2. Select the Port Based VLan tab.
The Port Based VLAN area indicates the enabling status of the ports through which can transit the messages in input from the LAN which the contextual area refers to:
Disable. The packets, in input from the LAN which the contextual area refers to, are not enabled
to transit from the specific LAN or Radio port.
Enable. The packets, in input from the LAN which the contextual area refers to, are enabled to
transit from the specific LAN or Radio port (bidirectional connection).
289
The availability of the Radio ports depends on the equipment configuration (see Tab.13).
Enabling a port involves the automatic enabling of the corresponding port. For example, if you enable
the LAN 4 in the LAN 3 (Enh.) contextual area, the LAN 3 is automatically enabled in the LAN 4 (Enh.)
contextual area.
Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol
node.
2. Select the STP/ELP Trunking tab.
The tab displays the status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol, the Ethernet Line Protection or to the Trunking modality.

WARNING The Spanning Tree protocol cannot be enabled when the Trunking modality or Ring Protection
mode is enabled.
The STP/ELP parameter indicates the enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol for the port.
Disable. Spanning Tree protocol disabled
Enable-Bridge1. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1).
Enable-Prot1, Enable-Prot2. Spanning Tree protocol disabled. The Ethernet Line Protection of
the equipment is enabled.
Enable-node-Prot1, Enable-node-Prot2, Enable-node-Prot3, Enable-node-Prot4. Spanning Tree

protocol disabled. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled.

node.
The Priority parameter indicates the priority of the LAN (0: highest priority, 15: lowest priority).
290


node.
The Value parameter indicates the cost of the network part directly connected to the LAN.
This cost determines, priority being equal among two or more redundant connections, the preference
of a port with respect to the others.
This cost must be inversely proportional to the bit rate of the port
3. To change the parameter, type the new value in the box.
It is suggested to set a value belonging to the Recommended Range according to what pointed out in
the Standard IEEE 802.1w.
Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Ethernet Line Protection
node.

WARNING The Ethernet Line Protection cannot be enabled when the Trunking modality or Ring Protection
mode is enabled.
The STP/ELP parameter indicates the enabling status of Ethernet Line Protection for the port.
Disable. Ethernet Line Protection disabled.
Enable-Bridge1 - Enable-Bridge2. Ethernet Line Protection disabled. Spanning Tree protocol enabled.
Enable-Prot1. The Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment is enabled between the considered
LAN and the other LANs of the equipment whose parameter value is Enable-Prot1.
291
Enable-Prot2. The Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment is enabled between the considered
LAN and the other LANs of the equipment whose parameter value is Enable-Prot2.
Enable-node-Prot1. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node (ELP node) is enabled between the
considered LAN and the other LANs of the node elements whose value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot1.
Enable-node-Prot2. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled between the considered
LAN and the other LANs of the node elements whose value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot2.
The values Enable-node-Prot1, Enable-node-Prot2, Enable-node-Prot3 and Enable-node-Prot4 are

available only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node
Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Trunking mode

node.

WARNING The Trunking modality cannot be enabled when the Spanning Tree protocol, the Ethernet Line
Protection or Ring Protection mode is enabled.
To enable the Trunking modality, it is first necessary to disable the LAN.

The Trunk/LACP parameter indicates the enabling status of the Trunking mode for the selected port.
Disable. Trunking mode disabled.
Enable-Trunk1. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN is aggregated to the equipment
LANs, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk1.
292
For the correct configuration of the bidirectional LLF functionality for a radio link se Bidirectional LLF (info).
2. Select the LLF tab.
The LLF parameter indicates the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality:
Disable. The LLF modality is disabled.
Local. The LLF modality is enabled: the port is disabled in presence of radio alarms (IDU
BRANCH Demodulator Fail Alarm, RADIO Link Id. Alarm) or if the Radio port is disabled.
Only if the Local option is active, the activation of the check-box:
Bidirectional, indicates that the block of the local LAN port due to LLF is communicated even to
the remote equipment (activation of bidirectional LLF functionality).
Rem. LAN-1, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the remote
LAN 1 (Enh.) port associated to it.
3. To change the parameter, select the wished option(s).


2. Select the Line Loop tab.
The Line Loop parameter displays the status of the loop on line side of the LAN:
Enable. Loop on line side active.
Disable. Loop on line side inactive.

4. Press Apply.
Only if you are activating the loop a message warns that you are executing a forcing and displays the
current setting of timeout.
The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the loop is inactive, independently from the previous setting.
Verify the status and the configuration of the laser (LAN)

WARNING Operation available only for LAN 3 and LAN 4 when configured as optical interfaces.
293

2. Select the Laser Control tab.
The tab displays the current status and the configuration parameters of the laser.

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

In the Transmitter Control area the enabling status of the laser is pointed out:
On. The laser is enabled for transmission.
Off. The laser is not enabled for transmission.

4. Press Apply.
Only if you are disabling the laser (selection of the Off option), a message warns that you are executing
a forcing and displays the current setting of the timeout.
The laser disabling activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and switched off, the
laser is enabled to transmit independently from the previous setting.


The Mode parameter indicates the transmission mode of the laser:
Disable. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the real presence of the optical signal.
Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal: when the
signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the laser does not transmit.
In this last condition, the controller automatically turns on the laser for 2 seconds every x seconds (adjustable into the Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote transmitter: if the signal
at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit, while if it is not present, after x seconds, the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on.
To modify the Auto Restart Time interval set into the relevant box a value comprised between
60 and 300 sec. (default 120 sec.). Select the Apply and confirm.
Manual. The laser transmission is manually enabled by the operator.
Test. The laser transmits for x seconds (operation of laser functioning status).

4. Press Apply.
Only if you are setting Disable, Manual or Test as transmission modality for the laser, a message warns
that you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of the timeout.
294
The selection of a modality different from Auto activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the user turns off the
equipment and then turns it on again, without taking into any account the preceding setting, the transmission mode of the laser is Auto.


3. Select the Manual option.
4. Press Apply.
The setting of the Manual modality, activates the MAN. OP alarm.
The laser transmits for 2 seconds and then stops itself.


3. Set, into the Test Time box, the number of seconds during which the user wants to turn on the laser
(value comprised between 1 and 100 sec. - default 90 sec.).
4. Select the Test option.
5. Press Apply.
A message warns that you are executing a forcing and shows the current setting of timeout
The setting of the Test modality, activates the MAN. OP alarm.
The laser transmits for the number of seconds set into the Test Time box and then it stops itself.
295
LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.), LAN 4 (Enh.) contextual area
The contextual area displays the configuration of the specific LAN of the Ethernet Switch (Enhanced).
Tabs
Interface tab. General configuration of the LAN.

Rate Limiter tab. Existing PIRL instances for the LAN.
Input Filter Policing tab. Modality to use to limit the traffic in input from LAN.
Priority Management tab. Configuration of the LAN relevant to priority management.
802.1Q Management tab. Configuration of the LAN relevant to VLAN management.
Queue Mngt Radio to Lan tab. Emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue
of the LAN.
Port Based VLAN tab. Ports through which can transit the messages in input from the LAN.
STP/ELP Trunking tab. Status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol, the Ethernet
Line Protection or to the Trunking modality.
LLF tab. Enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality.
Line Loop tab. Status of the loop on line side of the LAN.
Laser Control tab. Configuration of the LAN with optical interface.
Push-button

Interface tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the LAN.
Parameters
Master/Slave. Operating modality of the line synchronism:
Master. The line synchronism is generated starting from the local clock.
Slave. The line synchronism is generated starting from the clock retrieved from the
line (Loop Time).
Parameter available only for the ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is
active (box Speed/Duplex - value Auto) and the 1000Base-T configuration is active.
M/S Autoneg. Activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line synchronism:
Enable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is automatic.
Disable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is forced. In this case, the role defined in the Master/Slave box is used.
Parameter available only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is active
(box Speed/Duplex value Auto) and the 1000Base-T configuration is active.
Rate Control. Enabling status of the port:
Disable. The LAN is not enabled to the use.
Full Rate. The LAN is enabled to the use of the max bit rate relevant to the port.
Kb/Mb. The LAN is enabled to the use with bit rate limited to the specific value.
Forwarding Rule. Rule to forwarding the input packets from the LAN:
296
Dest. Addr. Vid Basis. The port forwards the traffic on VLAN basis (Port Based VLAN)
and with destination MAC address present in MAC Table.
Vid Basis. The port forwards the traffic only on VLAN basis without checking the presence of destination MAC in MAC Table.
Parameter meaningful only if the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the MAC Table is
enabled (Mac Learning).
Flow Control Full Dplx / Back Pressure Half Dplx. Activation status of the flow control of
the port:
Auto. The flow control is auto-negotiated and, if the remote equipment can manage
the flow control, it is automatically activated on the local equipment.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the flow control must be DISABLED. If it was
enabled, at the opening of the contextual area a message is displayed asking to disable the parameter. If already disabled, the setting cannot be changed.
Interface Type. Type of the interface:
Electrical. The LAN is configured with electrical interface.
Optical. The LAN is configured with optical interface.
Parameter available only for the LAN 3 and LAN 4.

Cable Crossover. Inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines:
MDI (NIC). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card
modality).
MDIX (switch). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch modality).
Auto. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic modality.
Parameter available only for ports with electrical interface for which the use of LAN is enabled
(box Rate Control value Full Rate or Kb/Mb).
Mac Learning. Enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table (MAC Table):
Enable. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the addresses
in the table takes place analysing only the field MAC Address and is registered in a
single MAC Table.
Learn. on port basis. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of
the addresses in the table takes place associating the MAC Address to the segment
of MAC Table indicized by the Default Vid value associated to the port which the traffic
is income from.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the automatic learning of the MAC Addresses
must be ENABLED. If it was disabled, at the opening of the contextual area a message is displayed asking to enable the parameter (Enable or Learn. on port basis option). If already enabled, the setting cannot be changed.
Speed/Duplex. Activation status of the autonegotiation and, if the autonegotiation is deactivated, operating modalities and transmission speed of the port.
For LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3, LAN 4 configured with electrical interface, the following values are
available:
Full-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.
Half-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.
Half-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.
Auto FD up to 10M. The auto negotiation is enabled: the speed and the transmission
type are negotiated with a maximum of speed of 10Mbit/s and with modality HalfDuplex or Full-Duplex.
Auto FD up to 100M. The auto negotiation is enabled: the speed and the transmission
type are negotiated with a maximum of speed of 100Mbit/s and with modality HalfDuplex or Full-Duplex.
Auto FD up to 1G. The auto negotiation is enabled: the speed and the transmission
type are negotiated with a maximum of speed of 1Gbit/s and with modality Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex.
297
For LAN 3 and LAN 4 configured with optical interface, the following values are available:
Full-Duplex-1G. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex

and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 1GMbit/s.
Egress Shaping. Maximum Throughput of data in output from LAN port:
Disable. No maximum throughput is set for LAN port.
Full Rate. The value of maximum bit rate of the port is set as maximum throughput
for LAN port.
Kb/Mb. The specific value is set as maximum throughput for LAN port.
The throughput is the real index of utilization of the link capacity, that is the amount of data
transmitted in the unit of time.
Available values changes depending on the port transmission speed (see parameter Speed/Duplex).
Speed. Data transmission speed.
Duplex. Transmission modality.
Port Role. Current status of the line synchronism.
Parameter available only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is active
(box Speed/Duplex value Auto) and the 1000Base-T configuration is active.
Alarms. Status of the alarms relevant to the port. The colour of the boxes represents the alarm
status and severity:
Push-button
Restart Autonegotiation. Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the LAN.
See also

Verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive,
the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the LAN
Verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line synchronism for the LAN
Rate Limiter tab

WARNING Tab not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2 if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
The tab displays the existing PIRL instances for the LAN.
Every row corresponds to an instance.
Parameters
Status. PIRL instance status:
298
Not Active. The instance is not used by the Switch as rule for the traffic limitation.
Status of the instance at creation or when it is disabled by the user.
Active. The instance is used by the Switch as rule for the traffic limitation.
Status of the instance after the enabling by the user.
Rate. Band threshold over which the traffic is limited.

The type of traffic to limit is listed in the following columns (types of packets with value Enable
active).
Broadcast. Limitation of the Broadcast packets in input from the port:
Enable. The transit of the Broadcast packets is limited to the specific band.
Disable. The transit of the Broadcast packets is not limited.
Unknown Multicast. Limitation of the Multicast Unknown packets (Multicast packets with destination MAC addresses not present in the MAC Table) in input from the port:
Enable. The transit of the Multicast Unknown packets is limited to the specific band.
Disable. The transit of the Multicast Unknown packets is not limited.
Unknown Unicast. Limitation of the Unicast Unknown packets (Unicast packets with destination MAC addresses not present in the MAC Table) in input from the port:
Enable. The transit of the Unicast Unknown packets is limited to the specific band.
Disable. The transit of the Unicast Unknown packets is not limited.
Unicast. Limitation of the Unicast packets in input from the port:
Enable. The transit of the Unicast packets is limited to the specific band.
Disable. The transit of the Unicast packets is not limited.
ARP. Limitation of the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) packets in input from the port:
Enable. The transit of the ARP packets is limited to the specific band.
Disable. The transit of the ARP packets is not limited.
Push-button
Add. Create a PIRL instance for the LAN.

Remove. Delete a PIRL instance of the LAN.
Apply changes. Confirm the changes made to the PIRL instances.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes made to the PIRL instances and not confirmed yet.
See also

Input Filter Policing tab

WARNING Tab not available if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
The tab displays the modality to use to limit the traffic in input from LAN.
Parameters
Mode. Modality to use to limit the traffic in input from LAN and forwarded to Radio port:
Disable. Option disabled: the traffic in input is not limited according to specific criteria.
UNI Port based. Option enabled: all the traffic in input is limited on port basis.
EVC C_Vid Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the packets
with C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) defined by the user and pointed out in the table below.
299
COS C_Vid + Internal Priority Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited
only for the packets with C-VID values and priority defined by the user and pointed
out in the table below.
EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the
packets with S-VID (Service VLAN Identifier) and C-VID values defined by the user
and pointed out in the table below.
COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Internal Priority Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the packets with S-VID and C-VID values and priority defined by the user
and pointed out in the table below.
EVC S_Vid Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the packets
with S-VID values defined by the user and pointed out in the table below.
COS S_Vid + Internal Priority Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited
only for the packets with S-VID values and priority defined by the user and pointed
out in the table below.
COS Internal Priority Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the
packets with priority defined by the user and pointed out in the table below.
Not Registered Traffic Default Color. Colour preset for the packets not associated to any
traffic profile defined by the user (Bandwidth Profile):
Green (MEF Compliant). The packets are treated as belonging to the green profile.
Red. The packets are discarded.
The parameter is not available if the Disable value is set for the Mode parameter.
Table. The table will point out, according to the option enabled, the criteria for the traffic limitation defined by the user (Bandwidth Profile).
Every row corresponds to one criterion. The configuration parameters (pointed out in the table
columns) of the criterion change depending on the setting of the parameter Mode. If the active
value is:
UNI Port Based the table contains the columns:
CIR (Committed Information Rate). Transmission rate (expressed in Mbit/s)

ensured in normal operating condition of the network (throughput).
EIR (Extended Information Rate). Band exceeding that set by CIR.
CBS. (Committed Burst Size). Traffic burst which the network ensures to
store.
EBS (Excessive Burst Size). Quantity of data, besides CBS, the network can
store.
CF (Coupling Flag). Modality to control the traffic declared Yellow.
Enabled. The average value, in the long period, of the traffic declared Yellow is limited by the value CIR+EIR as function of the traffic declared
Green.
Disabled. The average value, in the long period, of the traffic declared Yellow is limited by the value EIR.
In both cases, the Burst Size of the traffic declared Yellow is limited by the value if
EBS
300
EVC C_Vid Based the table contains the columns:
CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS and CF. The description is the same reported for the value UNI Port Based, but only for the traffic with identifier C-VID set by the user,
COS C_Vid + Internal Priority Based the table contains the columns:
Internal Priority. Levels of priority (range of values between minimum and

maximum) of the packet in input.
CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS and CF. The description is the same reported for the value UNI Port Based, but only for the traffic with identifier C-VID and 802.1p priority set by the user, and not on the whole traffic incoming from LAN.
EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based the table contains the columns:
COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Internal Priority Based the table contains the columns:
CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS and CF. The description is the same reported for the value UNI Port Based, but only for the traffic with identifiers S-VID and C-VID set
by the user, and not on the whole traffic incoming from LAN.

CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS and CF. The description is the same reported for the value UNI Port Based, but only for the traffic with identifiers S-VID and C-VID and
with 802.1p priority set by the user, and not on the whole traffic incoming from
LAN.
EVC S_Vid Based the table contains the columns:
CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS and CF. The description is the same reported for the value UNI Port Based, but only for the traffic with identifier S-VID set by the user,
COS S_Vid + Internal Priority Based the table contains the columns:

CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS and CF. The description is the same reported for the value UNI Port Based, but only for the traffic with identifier S-VID and 802.1p priority set by the user, and not on the whole traffic incoming from LAN.
COS Internal Priority Based the table contains the columns:

CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS and CF. The description is the same reported for the value UNI Port Based, but only for the traffic with priority set by the user, and not
on the whole traffic incoming from LAN.
The table is not available if the Disable value is set for the Mode parameter.
Push-button
Add. Add an element to the table.

Remove. Delete an element from the table.
Apply changes. Confirm the changes made to the elements of the table.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes made to the elements of the table and not confirmed yet.
See also
Verify/modify the modality and the criteria used to limit the traffic in input from the LAN

The tab displays configuration parameters of the LAN relevant to the priority management.
Parameters
Current 802.1Q Setting. Current status of the management modality of protocol 802.1Q:
Disabled. The LAN does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input. They
will be sent only to the ports pointed out in the Port Based VLAN area.
Fallback. The traffic in input from the port is subjected both to port based routing
(Port Based VLAN) and to VLAN Table Unit (VTU) based routing.
Secure (C_vid Filtering). The traffic in input from the port is subjected only to the
routing defined by VTU.
301
Secure (Service Provider Port). The traffic in input from the port can be only of type
Provider and will be subjected only to the routing defined by VTU.
Internal Priority Selection. Priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input to the
LAN, to the output of the Radio Ports:
If the parameter Current 802.1Q Setting has value:
Disabled the following options are present:
Native TOS/DSCP. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio
port according to the TOS/DSCP value present in the native IP field.
Native MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port
according to the priority value present in native MPLS field.
Fallback or Secure (C_vid Filtering) the following options are present:
Native 802.1p (C_Vid). The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to the value of native 802.1p priority.
802.1p (C_PCP) rewrite with MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output
queues of the Radio port according to the priority value present in native MPLS
field and this value will be rewritten in the field 802.1p of C-VID.
Secure (Service Provider Port) the following options are present:
Native 802.1p (S_Vid). The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to the value of native 802.1p priority.
field and this value will be rewritten in the field 802.1p of C-VID.
802.1p (S_PCP) rewrite with MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output
field and this value will be rewritten in the field 802.1p of S-VID.
Default Internal Priority. Value used to define the output queue of the Radio port when the
selected priority criteria is Port Default (see parameter Internal Priority Selection) and value
used as priority 802.1p added to the untagged packets entering in the considered LAN and they
will exit tagged from the corresponding remote LAN:
0. Lowest priority
802.1p OUTPUT Priority Remapping table. Mapping of priority 802.1p within Tag VLan (priority 802.1p present into a packet in input to a port can be remapped in output from the Switch
with a different priority value):
Table available only if the analysis of the priority 802.1p is active (see parameter Internal Priority Selection).
Service Tag List table. If the parameter Current 802.1Q Setting has value:
302
Secure (Service Provider Port).
Secure (C_vid Filtering) with the corresponding Radio port in Secure and the transit
of packets is enabled (Port Based VLan).
The tab display the Service Tag List table. The table allows managing the exceptions on the priority criteria used on port basis and seen before for the single VID (S-VID or C-VID) according
to the enabling of Provider modality.
Each row corresponds to an exception. For every item, is pointed out in the column.
S_Vid or C_Vid. VLAN where exception is applied (S-VID: Service VLAN Identifier or
C-VID: Customer VLAN Identifier).
Header S_Vid is present if port is Provider, while C_Vid if the port is not Provider.
Default Priority. Only for set VLAN (S-VID or C-VID): value used to define the output queue of Radio port when the selected priority criterion is TAG Default (see parameter Priority Sel) and value used as priority 802.1p added to untagged packets
which enter in the considered LAN and will exit tagged from the corresponding remote
LAN (0: lowest priority; 7: highest priority).
Priority Sel. Only for set VLAN (S-VID or C-VID): priority criterion used to associate
the packets, in input from the LAN, to the output queues of the Radio port:
TAG Default. The traffic will be sent on the output queues of Radio port according to the default value set by the user.
802.1p. The traffic will be sent on the output queues of Radio port according
to the value of native 802.1p priority.
TOS/DSCP. The traffic will be sent on the output queues of Radio port according to the TOS/DSCP value present in native IP field.
MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according
to the priority value present in native MPLS field.
field and this value will be rewritten in the field 802.1p of C-VID. Option available only for C-VID.
802.1p (S_PCP) rewrite with MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output
field and this value will be rewritten in the field 802.1p of S-VID. Option available only for S-VID.
In the Service Tag List table the push-button:

Apply changes. Confirm the changes made to the elements of the table.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes made to the elements of the table and not confirmed yet.
See also

Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LAN to the
802.1Q Management tab

The tab displays the configuration parameters of the LAN relevant to VLAN management.
Parameters
Default Vid. Default Vid value of the port.

The Default Vid of a port is used as VID in the field 802.1Q of the packets came from the port
in subject without Tag and destined to exit with Tag from any port of the Switch.
303
Force Def. Vid. Forces the over-writing of the native CTag of the traffic in input to the LAN with
the corresponding default VID.
Active box (
) indicates the forcing is active; inactive box indicates forcing is not active.
802.1q Setting. Management of the 802.1Q field on the messages in input from the LAN:
Disabled. The LAN does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input. They
will be sent only to the ports indicated in the Port Based VLAN area.
Fallback. Packets are not discarded if the VLAN is not registered in VLAN Table Unit
(VTU).
If VID of incoming packet is registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the ports
belonging to the VLANs registered in VTU and included in VLAN on port basis.
If VID of incoming packet is NOT registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the
ports included in VLAN on port basis.
Secure. VID must be contained in VTU and the input pot must be member of this
VLAN, otherwise the packet is discarded.
A packet can exit from the ports belonging to the VLAN registered in VTU and are included in VLAN on port basis.
Traffic Treatment. Traffic transport modality (point-point or Bridge):
Transparent Port to Port Transport. The traffic entering from a local LAN will automatically exit only from the equivalent remote LAN, unless the single VLANs registered in
VTU and routed by the user in different mode.
Transparent Bridge Port Based. The traffic entering from a local LAN will automatically
exit from all the remote LANs enabled by VLAN per port, unless the single VLANs registered in VTU and routed by the user in different mode.
The availability of the parameter is shown in Fig.7.

Selective Provider Tag. Insertion modality of Provider Tag in the packets in input from the
LAN. If the parameter 802.1q Setting has value:
Disabled o Secure the following options are present:
Disable. Option disabled: the Provider Tag is not inserted in the packets in selective mode.
Port-Based. Option enabled: the Provider Tag is inserted in the packets in selective mode on port basis.
Fallback and the parameter Untag to Tag is not active, the following options are present:
Disable. Option disabled: the Provider Tag is not inserted in the packets in selective mode.
C Vid Based. Option enabled: the Provider Tag is inserted in the packets in selective mode on C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) basis.
C Vid + Internal Priority. Option enabled: the Provider Tag is inserted in the
packets in selective mode on C-VID and Internal Priority basis.

Untag to Tag. Active box ( ) means that the Tag insertion in the packets in origin without Tag
in input from the LAN, is enabled; inactive box means it is disabled.
Provider Port. Active box ( ) means that for the LAN the Provider mode (Double Tag active)
is set; inactive box indicates that for the LAN the Provider mode (Double Tag inactive) is not set.
Enable Untagged Frames. The active box ( ) points out that the LAN port is enabled to transit of Untagged packets; the inactive box indicates that the LAN is not enabled to the transit of
Untagged packets.
Lan to Radio C_Vid Rewrite. Table of correspondence between the C-VID value of the packets
in input from the LAN and the identifier used to replace C-VID in the packets forwarded to the
Radio port. Column:
304
Input C Vid. C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) value of the packets in input from the
LAN you wish to overwrite.
Output C Vid. New value of C-VID you wish to forward to Radio port.
The Add push-button adds a new value to the list. The Remove push-button removes a value
from the list.
LAN To Radio Rewrite. The table displays the S-TAG value added to the packets in input to
the LAN (independently from the presence of the Tag) and forwarded to the Radio port.
The Output S Vid column indicates the new value of S-TAG added.
from the list.
Lan to Radio C_Vid Rewrite & Selective QinQ. If the parameter Selective Provider Tag has
value:
C Vid Based. Table indicates the correspondence between the C-VID value of the
packets in input from the LAN and the identifier (C-VID and S-VID) used to replace
C-VID in the packets forwarded to the Radio port. The column:
Input C Vid. C-VID value of the packets in input from the LAN which you wish
to add S_TAG.
Output C Vid. New value of C-VID you wish to forward to Radio port. This value
can be equal to or different from the native C-VID incoming from LANs.
Output S Vid. New value of S-TAG added to the set C-VID value.
C Vid + Internal Priority. Table indicates the correspondence between the C-VID value
and priority 802.1p of the packets in input from the LAN and the S-TAG value added
to the packets forwarded to the Radio port. The column:
Input C Vid. C-VID value of the packets in input from the LAN which you wish
to add S_TAG to.
Internal Priority. Value of priority associated to the packets incoming from the
considered LAN with the specific C-VID selected, which you wish to add a STAG to.
Output S Vid. New value of S-TAG added to set C-VID value and priority.
from the list.
Port C_Vid. Table displays the list of C-VIDs (Customer VLAN Identifier) registered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU) and associated to the LAN. Column:
C_Vid. C-VID value registered in VTU.
VLan Label. Possible name associated to the registered C-VID value.
Frame Forwarding. Modality used to manage the registered C-VID.
The Show Table push-button displays the list of C-VID.

Port S_Vid. Table displays the list of S-VIDs (Service VLAN Identifier) registered in VTU and
associated to the LAN. Column:
S_Vid. S-VID value registered in VTU.
VLan Label. Possible name associated to the registered S-VID value.
Frame Forwarding. Modality used to manage the registered S-VID.
The Show Table push-button displays the list of S-VID.

305
Fig.7 Parameters availability (802.1Q Management tab)

802.1q Settings
Disabled
Traffic Treatment
(1)
Transparent Port to Port Transport

Transparent Bridge Port Based
Selective Provider Tag
(2)
Disable
Port-Based
Fallback
Traffic Treatment
LAN To Radio Rewrite (2)
(1)
Transparent Port to Port Transport

Transparent Bridge Port Based
(2) (3)
Disable
LAN To Radio C_Vid Rewrite (2) (3)
Vid Based
LAN To Radio C_Vid Rewrite & Selective QinQ (2) (3)
C Vid + Internal Priority
Untag to Tag (2)

Port C_Vid
Secure
Enable Untagged Frames

Provider Port
Port S_Vid
Port C_Vid
Disable
Port-Based
(2)
LAN To Radio Rewrite (2)
(1)
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the Transparent Bridge Port Based value is set. The
value can not be changed.
(2)
Parameter not available if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
(3)
Parameters disabled if the Untag to Tag parameter is enabled (
).
See also

Verify/modify the management of the 802.1Q field on the messages in input from the LAN
Verify/modify the management of Provider Tag in the packets in input from the LAN in selective
mode
Verify/modify the management of Tag of the packets (in origin without Tag) in input from the
LAN
Verify/overwrite the C-VID value of the packets in input from the LAN and forwarded to the Radio, with a different VID
Verify/modify the value of S-VID added to the packets in input to the LAN (independently from
the presence of the Tag)
306
Queue Mngt Radio to Lan tab

The tab displays the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue of the LAN.
Parameters
Egress Priority Policy. Emptying algorithm:
8421 WRR. A part (8 messages) of the queue with highest priority is empties, then a
part of the queue with lower priority (4 messages), then a part of the queue with further lower priority (2 messages), then a part of the queue with lowest priority (1 message) and so on restarting from the queue with highest priority.
Strict 3. The high priority queue 3 is completely emptied (sending of all the messages). The other queues (2, 1, 0) are managed with a WRR 421 mechanism.
Strict 3 and 2. The high priority queue 3 and queue 2 are completely emptied. The
other queues (1, 0) are managed with a WRR 21 mechanism.
See also
Verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue of the LAN
Port Based VLAN tab

The tab displays the ports through which can transit the messages in input from the LAN which the contextual area refers to.
Parameters
LAN/Port For each Ethernet port, if the set option is:
Disable. The packets, in input from the LAN which the contextual area refers to, are
not enabled to transit through the specific LAN or Radio port.
Enable. The packets, in input from the LAN which the contextual area refers to, are
enabled to transit through the specific LAN or Radio port (bidirectional connection).
See also
STP/ELP Trunking tab

WARNING Tab not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2 if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
Parameters
STP/ELP. Enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol or of the of the Ethernet Line Protection
for the port:
Disable. Spanning Tree protocol and Ethernet Line Protection disabled.
307
Enable-Prot1. The Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment is enabled between the
considered LAN and the other LANs of the equipment whose parameter value is Enable-Prot1.
Enable-Prot2. The Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment is enabled between the
considered LAN and the other LANs of the equipment whose parameter value is Enable-Prot2.
Enable-node-Prot1. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled between the
The values Enable-node-Prot1, Enable-node-Prot2, Enable-node-Prot3 and Enable-node-Prot4

are available only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
If the Trunking modality or Ring Protection mode is enabled, the value Disable is automatically
forced for the parameter.
Role (STP/ELP area). This parameter has a different meaning depending on the enabled protocol/modality:
STP ENABLED. Role assigned by the STP to each port of a Bridge/Switch. The role defines the behaviour of the port according to the status of the Bridge in the network:
ELP
Disable. Port disabled.
root-port. Port offering the best path (lowest cost) towards the Bridge selected as
root. Each Bridge can have only one root port. When the Spanning Tree algorithm is
at steady state, each root port is in port-forwarding status.
alternate-port. Port in alternative to the root port, as it offers an alternative path towards the Bridge Root with cost higher than that of the root port. Normally the Alternate port is in port-blocking status.
designated-port. Port which does not offer paths towards the Bridge Root and is used
to propagate the information of the Bridge Root to the other bridges. Each Designated
port is in port-forwarding status.
backup-port. Port physically connected on a Lan where a Designated port of the same
Bridge is connected. The Backup port is in port-blocking status.
ENABLED.
Role assigned by the ELP to each port. The role defines the behaviour of the port:
alternate-port. Port in stand-by status, as it offers an alternative path with higher cost
as opposed to the Designated port. Normally the Alternate port is in port-blocking status.
designated-port. Port active. Each Designated port is in port-forwarding status.
Status (area STP/ELP). Current status of the port:

Port status
Receive
traffic
Forward
traffic
No
No
port-blocking
No
port-learning
Yes
port-forwarding
Yes
Yes
Update the
Address Table Unit
Receive/process BPDU
Re-transmit
BPDU
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
STP
port-disable
ELP
308
ENABLED
ENABLED
port-blocking
No
No
No
port-forwarding
Yes
Yes
Yes
Version (STP/ELP area). Version of the Spanning Tree protocol or protection group of the port:
rapid-stp-802-1w. Rapid Spanning Tree protocol standard IEEE 802.1w. Protocol

characterized by a greater speed (lower convergence time).
stp-802-1d. Spanning Tree Protocol standard IEEE 802.1d.
ELP-1. Protection 1 group (ELP equipment).
Parameter not meaningful when Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled (STP/ELP parameter - Enable-node-Prot... value).
Priority. Port priority:
0. Highest priority
15. Lowest priority
Parameter not meaningful when Trunking modality is enabled.

Value (Path Cost area). Cost of the network part directly connected to the port.
Recommended Max / Recommended Min (Path Cost area). Cost interval recommended according to what pointed out in Standard IEEE 802.1w.
Trunk/LACP. Enabling status of the Trunking mode for the port:
Enable-Trunk1. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN is aggregated to the

equipment LANs, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk1.



It is possible to aggregate up to 4 LANs for each group (Trunk).

If the STP, the Ethernet Line Protection or the Ring Protection mode is enabled, the value Disable
is automatically forced for the parameter.
Status (Trunk/LACP area). Status of the port as regards the LACP (Link Aggregation Control
Protocol):
Up. Protocol active.
Down. Protocol inactive.
Partner Id (Trunk/LACP area). MAC Address of the remote equipment located at the other end
of the Ethernet connection (remote Switch).
Tx Pck Cnt (Trunk/LACP area). LACP packets transmitted to the remote Switch.
Rx Pck Cnt (Trunk/LACP area). LACP packets received from the remote Switch.
Push-button
Refresh (area STP/ELP). Update the values present in the specific area.
Refresh (area Trunk/LACP). Update the values present in the specific area.
See also

309
LLF tab
The tab displays the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality.
Parameters
LLF. Enabling status of the LLF modality:
Disable. The LLF modality is disabled.
Local. The LLF modality is enabled: the port is disabled in presence of radio alarms
(IDU BRANCH Demodulator Fail Alarm, RADIO Link Id. Alarm) or if the Radio port
is disabled.
Only if the Local option is active, the activation of the check-box:
Bidirectional, indicates that the block of the local LAN port due to LLF is communicated
even to the remote equipment (activation of bidirectional LLF functionality).
Rem. LAN-1, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on
the remote LAN 1 (Enh.) port associated to it.
See also
Line Loop tab

The tab displays the status of the loop on line side of the LAN.
Parameters
Line Loop. Status of the loop on line side of the LAN:
Enable. Loop on line side active.
Disable. Loop on line side inactive.
See also
Laser Control tab

WARNING Tab available only for LAN 3 and LAN 4 when configured as optical interfaces.
The tab displays the configuration of the LAN with optical interface.
Parameters
Transmitter Control. Enabling status of the laser:
310
<Box>. Current status of the laser:
Status On / green box. The laser is on transmission.
Status Off / gray box. The laser is not on transmission.
Module Type. Laser module type:
optical-100baseFX. Laser module of type 100 Base FX (Fiber).
optical-1000baseSX. Laser module of type 1000 Base SX (Short WaveLength).
optical-1000baseLX. Laser module of type 1000 Base LX (Long WaveLength).
optical-cwdm. Laser module of type CWDM (Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing).
optical-cwdm-ge. Laser module of type CWDM Gbit/s Ethernet (Coarse Wavelength

Division Multiplexing).
Unknown. The laser module is not among those listed above (possible anomaly of the
laser module).
For more information relevant to laser module refer to IEEE standard 802.3.
Wave Length. Wave length (in nanometres) of the SFP optical module (Small Form-factor Pluggable).
Link Length. Maximum distance (in meters) of the optical fiber supported by the SFP optical
module.
Mode. Transmission mode of the laser. If active, the option:
Disable. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the
real presence of the optical signal.
Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal:
when the signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the
laser does not transmit.
In this last condition, the controller automatically turns on the laser for 2 seconds
every x seconds (adjustable into the Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote
transmitter: if the signal at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit,
while if it is not present, after x seconds, the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on.
Test. The laser transmits for x seconds (operation of test laser operation status).
Auto Restart Time. Time (expressed by means of seconds) waited by the equipment controller
before trying again the laser turning-on (when the transmission mode of the laser is Auto).
Test Time. Time (expressed in seconds) during which the equipment controller turns on the
laser during the testing operation.
Push-button
Restart. Restart the laser.

See also

311

The PIRL (Port Ingress Rate Limiter) function available in the ALCplus2e equipment is a mechanism used
to control and filter the traffic in input from every single LAN of the Ethernet Switch.
This mechanism is composed by a list of rules (PIRL instances) which determine:
The threshold over which the traffic is limited (traffic bit rate available with respect to the total
band).
Type of traffic to limit, choosing between:
Broadcast traffic.
Multicast Unknown traffic (Multicast packets with destination MAC address not present in
the MAC Table).
Unicast Unknown traffic (Unicast packets with destination MAC address not present in the
MAC Table).
Unicast traffic.
ARP traffic.
One or more traffic types can be associated to the threshold creating the wished criterion.
A maximum of 2 PIRL instances can be created for every single LAN.
Every instance must be created by the user.
After the creation, a PIRL instance must be enabled by the user in order to be used as rule for the traffic
limitation.
In any moment, the instance can be disabled, changed in its setting or deleted.
See also

312

Spanning Tree is a protocol for the management of the connections, which supports the redundancy of the
path avoiding the creation of unwished loops in the network. In order that an Ethernet network operates
correctly, only an active path must exist between two stations. Multiple active paths cause loops in the
network and, as consequence, the possible replication of the messages to infinity.
The Spanning Tree protocol constitutes a tree logic network which pass through all the bridges into a complex physical network forcing the possible duplicated paths (possible loops) into a stand-by status
(Blocked).
If a network segment becomes unreachable or if the cost of a path changes, the algorithm of Spanning
Tree reconfigures the topology of the network activating an alternative path.
For more information, refer to the standard IEEE:
802.1d (Spanning Tree Protocol).
802.1w (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol).
WARNING The use of the Spanning Tree protocol must be enabled at level of single port.
The use of the Spanning Tree protocol for the LANs is alternative to the use of the Ethernet Line Protection,
Trunking modality or Ring Protection modality.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the use of the Spanning Tree protocol can be enabled/
disabled for the Ethernet traffic ports (LAN 3, LAN 4, Port A).
The management of the Ethernet nodal interconnection ports (LAN 1 and LAN 2) is responsibility of the
system which ensures that no data loop is created.
Even in this case, the use of the Spanning Tree protocol for the LAN 3, LAN 4, Port A is alternative to the
use of the Ethernet Line Protection (only LANs), Trunking modality or Ring Protection modality.
313

The Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) is a function which allows implementing a protection at physical level
(Level 2) between two or more LANs.
When the user enables the Ethernet Line Protection, even the management of the ELP switch is enabled.
The switch operates in automatic mode: the equipment executes the switch when the LOS alarm is present
on the LAN in service. When the alarm clears, the controller does not execute the switch again.
The Ethernet Line Protection is implemented by means of proprietary protocol. As consequence, the ELP
switch is managed without considering alarms or settings executed on the equipment on the other side of
the LAN connection.
In ALCplus2e equipment, the Ethernet Line Protection can be enabled at equipment level (ELP equipment)
or at node level (ELP node).
This last chance is available only for the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment (ELP equipment)
Ethernet Line Protection of the node (ELP node)
Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment (ELP equipment)

The Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment allows setting in mutual protection more LANs of the same
equipment.
The functionality manages up to two different protection groups: Protection 1 and Protection 2.
In this way, it is possible to setting in mutual protection two, three or four LANs or setting in protection
the LANs in pairs of two.
The same protection group (Protection1) will be enable for the two, three or four LANs. In the second case,
a protection group (Protection1) will be enable for two LANs and the other protection group (Protection2)
for the remnant two.
The parameters, which determine which LAN among those in protection must be set as operating, are the
port parameters foreseen for the management of the Rapid Spanning Tree protocol:
1. Cost. A connection cost can be assigned to every port.
When the ELP equipment function is enabled for two or more LANs, the port currently active for the
transport will be the enabled port with valid signal and lowest cost.
Example. For the LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3 the ELP equipment function is enabled. The LAN 1 is enabled,
has a valid signal and cost 200.000, the LAN 2 is enabled, has a valid signal and cost 250.000, the LAN
3 is enabled, has a valid signal and cost 300.000. The LAN 1 is used for the transport.
2. Priority. A priority value between 1 and 9 can be assigned to every port.
When the ELP equipment function is enabled for two or more LANs and the ports have the same cost,
the port currently active for the transport will be the enabled port with valid signal and lowest priority
value.
Example. For the LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3 the ELP equipment function is enabled. The ports are all
enabled, have a valid signal and cost 200.000. The LAN 1 has priority 1, the LAN 2 has priority 2, the
LAN 3 has priority 3. The LAN 1 is used for the transport.
WARNING Only if the ELP function is enabled for one port when more ports are operating (status Desig-
nated), cost and priority being equal, the port with the lower physical position is keep active.
The values of Role and Port Status foreseen for the management of the Rapid Spanning Tree protocol have
been used to represent in WEB LCT page the status of the ports involved in the ELP switch:
314
LAN
Role
Port status
Operating
Designated
Forwarding
Reserve
Alternate
Blocking
The user can manage the criteria for the choice of the operating/reserve port executing the following operations:
To enable/disable the use of the LANs (Rate Control parameter)
To enable/disable the ELP equipment functionality on the LANs you wish to protect (STP/ELP parameter - Enable-Prot1 or Enable-Prot2 value).
To set the port priority (Priority - parameter)
To set the port cost (Path Cost - parameter)
WARNING The use of the equipment ELP functionality for each LAN is alternative to the use of Spanning
Tree, Trunking modality or Ring Protection modality.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the use of the equipment ELP functionality can be enabled/disabled only for the Ethernet traffic ports (LAN 3 and LAN 4).
In this case, the use of the equipment ELP functionality (besides the use of the Spanning Tree protocol,
Trunking modality or Ring Protection modality) is alternative to the use of the node ELP functionality.
Ethernet Line Protection of the node (ELP node)

Only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, it is possible to enable the Ethernet Line Protection
at node level (node ELP).
This functionality, in fact, allows setting in mutual protection the Ethernet traffic ports (LAN 3 and LAN 4)
of the equipment belonging to the node and interconnected by the Ethernet nodal Bus.
Up to 4 different protection groups can be created: Node Protection1, Node Protection2, Node Protection3
and Node Protection4.
For example, with reference to Fig.8, if you wish to set in mutual protection the LAN 3 of A.1, A.2 and A.3,
you must enable the node ELP functionality (Node Protection1) for all the three ports.
At the same time, if you wish to set in mutual protection the LAN 4 of A.1, A.2 and A.3, you must enable
the node ELP functionality for all the above mentioned ports but not using the protection group Node
Protection1, which would insert the LAN 4 ports in the same protection group of the LAN 3 ports, but using
instead the group Node Protection2. In this way, a second node protection group is created, independent
from the first one.
The parameters, which determine which LAN among those in protection must be set as operating, are the
port parameters foreseen for the management of the Rapid Spanning Tree protocol:
1. Cost. A connection cost can be assigned to every port.
When the ELP node function is enabled for two or more LANs, the port currently active for the transport
will be the enabled port with valid signal and lowest cost.
Example. With reference to Fig.8. For the LAN 3 port of the equipment A.1 and for the LAN 4 port of
the equipment A.2, the node ELP function is enabled. The LAN 3 port of A.1 is enabled to the use, has
valid signal and has cost 200.000, the LAN 4 port of A.2 is enabled to the use, has valid signal and cost
250.000. For the transport, the LAN 3 of A.1 is used.
2. Priority. A priority value between 1 and 9 can be assigned to every port.
When the ELP node function is enabled for two or more LANs and the ports have the same cost, the
port currently active for the transport will be the enabled port with valid signal and lowest priority value.
Example. With reference to Fig.8. For the LAN 3 port of A.1 and the LAN 4 port of A.2 the node ELP
function is enabled. The ports are all enabled to use, have valid signal and cost 200.000. The LAN 3
port of A.1 has priority 1, the LAN 4 port of A.2 has priority 2. For the transport, the LAN 3 port of A.1
is used.
WARNING Only if the ELP function is enabled for one port when more ports have the node ELP function
enabled and are operating (status Designated), cost and priority being equal, the port with the lower physical position is keep active.
The physical position of the traffic LANs of a node is the following:
LAN 3 of the first element of the node (lowest logic position)
LAN 4 of the first element of the node
LAN 3 of the second element of the node
315
LAN 4 of the second element of the node

and so on.
The values of Role and Port Status foreseen for the management of the Rapid Spanning Tree protocol have
been used to represent in WEB LCT page the status of the ports involved in the ELP switch:
LAN
Role
Port status
Operating
Designated
Forwarding
Reserve
Alternate
Blocking
The user can manage the criteria for the choice of the operating/reserve port executing the following operations:
To enable/disable the use of the LANs (Rate Control parameter)
To enable/disable the ELP node functionality on the LANs you wish to protect (STP/ELP parameter - Enable-Node-Prot1, Enable-Node-Prot2, Enable-Node-Prot3 or Enable-Node-Prot4 value).
To set the port priority (Priority - parameter)
To set the port cost (Path Cost - parameter)
WARNING The use of the node ELP function for the LAN 3 and LAN 4 ports is alternative to the use of the
equipment ELP functionality, Spanning Tree protocol, Trunking mode or Ring Protection modality.
Fig.8 ELP of node (example)
Node A
Lan 3
Lan 4
Lan 3
Ethernet
traffic
Lan 4
Lan 3
Lan 4
Lan 3
Lan 4
(1)
316
(1)
A.1
(1)
A.2
Lan 1 and Lan 2

(Ethernet nodal
interconnection)
(1)
A.3
(1)
A.4
A.1, A.2, A.3 and A.4. Respectively first, second, third and fourth equipment of the node interconnected to the Ethernet nodal Bus.

The Trunking mode is a functionality which allows aggregating two or more Ethernet ports.
In this way, the ports belonging to the same group (Trunk) will be considered as a single entity.
The subdivision of the traffic is made on MAC Address (Source and Destination) basis.
In ALCplus2e equipment, it is possible to enable the Trunking mode for the LANs (Trunking Ethernet) and
for the Radio port (Trunking radio).
This possibility is available only for the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
Ethernet Trunking mode (LANs)

The Ethernet Trunking mode allows aggregating two or more physical ports (LAN) of the same equipment
to achieve a single logic channel.
The functionality manages up to 4 different aggregation groups (Trunk/LACP): Enable-Trunk1, EnableTrunk2, Enable-Trunk3 and Enable-Trunk4.
In this way, it is possible to aggregate two, three or four LANs or to aggregate the LANs at pair of two.
In the first case, the same aggregation group (Enable-Trunk1) will enable for the two, three or four LANs
of the Switch. In the second case, an aggregation group (Enable-Trunk1) will enable for the two LANs and
the other aggregation group (Enable-Trunk2) for the remnant two.
Up to 4 LANs for each Trunk can be aggregated.
The enabling of the Ethernet Trunking mode is in compliance with the standard LAG (Link Aggregation
Group) and the relevant LACP protocol (Link Aggregation Control Protocol).
It is suggested, when this modality is active, to configure the ports in transmission modality Full Duplex
and to the same data transmission rate.
For more information, refer to the standard IEEE 802.3ad (Link Aggregation).
WARNING The use of the Trunking Ethernet mode must be enabled at level of single LAN and is in alternative to the use of the Ethernet Line Protection, Spanning Tree protocol or Ring Protection modality.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the use of the Trunking mode can be enabled/disabled
only for the LAN 3, LAN 4 (Ethernet traffic ports).
Even in this case, the use of the Trunking mode is alternative to the use of the Ethernet Line Protection,
Spanning Tree protocol or Ring Protection modality.
If the Trunking modality is active for an LAN and you wish to disable it, before executing the operation it
is necessary to disable the port itself.
Radio Trunking mode (Radio port - Port A)

WARNING Mode available only for equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
The modality is furthermore available when the equipment is in 1+0, 1+1 Freq. Div, 1+1 Hot Standby or
2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration with active East-West modality. In this last configuration, the
radio Trunking modality is not available for the Radio port B (Port B).
The radio Trunking mode allows aggregating more radio of a nodal system.
The functionality manages an aggregation group (Trunk): Enable-Trunk1.
To insert a radio port of a Switch in the Trunk, it is necessary to enable the radio Trunking mode for this
port (Enable-Trunk1).
In this mode, up to 4 radio ports can be aggregated.
WARNING The use of the radio Trunking mode is alternative to the use of the Spanning Tree protocol or
Ring Protection modality.
317

The bidirectional LLF functionality allows interrupting the connection with the remote equipment (in both
directions) after a block of the LAN ports of the local equipment due to Link Loss Forwarding.
For the correct configuration of the bidirectional LLF functionality in a radio link, execute the operations
described in the following example.
Suppose to wish blocking the LAN-1 ports (on local and remote equipment) after the detection of LLF on
local LAN-1 port.
Operations to execute for the LOCAL equipment by means of WEB LCT page:
a. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.)
b. Select LLF tab.
c. Select the Local option.
d. Active the Bidirectional option.
e. Press Apply and confirm.
Operations to execute for the REMOTE equipment by means of WEB LCT page:
a. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.)
b. Select LLF tab.
c. Select the Local option.
d. Active the REM. LAN-1 option.
e. Press Apply and confirm.
In this configuration, a reception alarm on the local terminal causes the activation of LLF alarm and the
consequent switch-off of the associated LAN-1 port on both terminals.
318
Port A (Enh.), Port B (Enh.)

WARNING The availability of the Radio ports depends on the equipment configuration as shown in Tab.13.
The Port A (Enh.) and Port B (Enh.) commands manage the Radio ports of the Ethernet Switch.
On the choice of one of the commands, the <port name> contextual area opens, where it is possible to
manage the specific Radio port.
Operations
STATUS
AND COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS
Verify/modify the enabling status of the Radio port

Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the Radio port
PRIORITY
PARAMETERS
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the Radio
port to the output queue of the LANs
Verify/modify the value for Port Default
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the Radio port
OUTPUT
QUEUES PARAMETERS
Verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the Radio port
Verify/modify the enabling status of the S_Gentle functionality of the Radio port
Verify/modify the integration constant on the drop possibility in a RED context (Radio
port)
Verify/modify the configuration of the output queues of the Radio port
VIRTUAL LAN
PARAMETERS
Verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the Radio port
Force the value of VID of the Radio port to the default value
Verify/modify the Default Vid value of the Radio port
Verify/overwrite the C-VID value of the packets in input from the Radio port and forwarded to a LAN, with a different C-VID
Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the Radio port
SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL (STP)
PARAMETERS
Verify the status of the Radio port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol
Enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the Radio port
Verify/modify the priority of the Radio port (STP)
Verify/modify the connection cost of the Radio port (STP)
TRUNKING
MODE PARAMETERS
Verify the status of the Radio port in relation to the Trunking mode
Enable/disable the Trunking mode for the Radio port
GUI
Port A (Enh.), Port B (Enh.) contextual area

See also

319
Tab.13 Availability Radio ports (Enhanced Ethernet Switch)

Equipment configuration
Radio
Ethernet Enh
Ethernet Radio
ports
Unequipped
Present
Port A (Enh.)
1+0
Present
Port A (Enh.)
1+1 Hot Standby

1+1 Freq. Div.
Present
Port A (Enh.)

Present
Port A (Enh.)
2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe

Present
Port A (Enh.)
Port B (Enh.)

1. Select Base Band > Port A (Enh.) or Port B (Enh.).

The Port parameter indicates the enabling status of the Radio port:
Disable. The Radio port is not enabled to the use.
Enable. The Radio port is enabled to the use.

Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the Radio
port
WARNING The MAC-based routing functionality in the Ethernet Switch is available only if enabled this func-
tion.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the automatic learning of the MAC Addresses must be
ENABLED. If it was disabled, at the opening of the contextual area a message is displayed asking to enable
the parameter (Enable or Learn. on port basis option).
The MAC Learning parameter indicates the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table (MAC Table):
Enable. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the addresses in the table
takes place analysing only the field MAC Address and is registered in a single MAC Table.
Learn. on port basis. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the addresses in the table takes place associating the MAC Address to the segment of MAC Table indicized
by the Default Vid value associated to the port which the traffic is income from.

320
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the
Radio port to the output queue of the LANs

The Priority Selection parameter indicates the priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input
to the Radio port, to the output:
Port Default. The traffic will be sent to the output queues according to the default value set by
the user on the Radio port.
Native 802.1P. The traffic will be sent to the output queues according to the value of native
802.1p priority in input to Radio port.
Native TOS/DSCP. The traffic will be sent to the output queues according to the TOS/DSCP value
present in the native IP field in input to Radio port.
Native MPLS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues according to the value of native MPLS
priority in input to Radio port.
Value available only if the equipment is in 2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration with active
East-West modality (Ethernet Ring).



The Default Priority parameter indicates the value used to define the output queue when the selected
priority criteria is Port Default (see parameter Priority Selection) (0: lowest priority, 7: highest priority).
Operation available only if the analysis of the priority 802.1p is active.

321

2. Select the Queue Management Lan To Radio tab.
The Flow Control parameter indicates the activation status of the flow control of the Radio port:


The S-gentle parameter indicates the enabling status of the S_Gentle functionality in Drop Type modality equal to RED (see Verify/modify the configuration of the output queues of the Radio port):
Disable. The S_Gentle functionality is inactive.
Enable. The S_Gentle functionality is active.

Verify/modify the integration constant on the drop possibility in a RED context (Radio port)

The parameter Exp. Weighting Constant indicates the integration constant on the drop possibility in a
RED context (see Verify/modify the configuration of the output queues of the Radio port). The trend of
traffic before the moment a packet should be dropped affects the drop algorithm.
3. To change the parameter, set a value between 0 and 15.


The table, present in the tab, indicates the configuration parameters of the output queues of the Radio
port:
322
Queue. Output queues of the Radio port:
7. Output queue with 7 priority (high priority)
6. Output queue with 6 priority.
0. Output queue with 0 priority (low priority).
Queue Length. Length of output queue:
128 kbit. The considered queue is 128 Kbit in depth.
1 Mbit. The considered queue is 1 Mbit in depth.
To change the parameter, select the box and then the wished option. Press Apply and confirm.
The message You have exceeded the available queue memory indicates that the available memory has been filled.
Type. Management algorithm of the output queues of the Radio port:
Strict Priority. The queue with highest priority is completely emptied (sending of all the
messages) before sending a message of the queue with lower priority.
WFQ (Weighted Fair Queue). The output queue of WFQ type are managed in such a way
to ensure a mutual ratio of radio band equal to the value WFQ Weight set for each queue.
To change the parameter, select the box and then the wished option. Press Apply and confirm.
WFQ Weight. Theoretical value of WFQ Weight set by the user (minimum 1, maximum 100).
The parameter is meaningful and can be set/changed only if the value WFQ is present in the
Type field.
To change the parameter, select the box and then set a value between 1 and 100. Press Apply
and confirm.
Actual WFQ. Real value of WFQ Weight calculated by the firmware rounding the theoretical value
set by the user.
Parameter meaningful only if the value WFQ is set in the Type field and a value from 1 to 100
is set in the WFQ Weight field.
Drop Type. Criterion used to remove (drop) the packets from the queue in case of full queue:
Tail. When the queue is full, only the last packet is dropped.
Queue. When the queue is full, all its content is dropped.
Red. Mode Random Early Detection active. The packet drop mode follows the trend defined by the curves set through the parameters S min (G), S max (G) and P max (G)
(traffic Green).
WRed. Mode Weighted Random Early Detection active. The packet drop mode follows the
trend defined by the curves set by the user through the parameters S min (G), S max
(G) and P max (G) for the Green traffic and by S min (Y), S max (Y) and P max (Y) for
the Yellow traffic.
Value meaningful only if a value different from Disable is set for the parameter Mode
(LANs - tab Input Filter Policing).
To change the parameter, select the relevant box and then the wished option. Press Apply and
confirm.
The colour of a packet (as reported in the technical specification MEF Bandwidth Profiles for
Ethernet Services) is used to identify the compliance level of the packet with respect to the band
profile associated to the service. Colour:
Green. The frame is compliance with both the parameters CIR and CBS of the band profile
associated to the service (Frame CIR-conformant).
323
Yellow. The frame is not compliance with the parameters CIR and CBS, but is compliance
with the parameters EIR and EBS of the band profile associated to the service (Frame
EIR-conformant).
The association of colour Green and Yellow applied to the traffic incoming from the LAN from
module Input Filter Policing (if active) is implemented with the following criterion:
All the traffic marked CIR/CBS is considered Green.
All the traffic marked EIR/EBS is considered Yellow.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node:
The WRed value is not available.
Only the parameters associated to the traffic defined Green can be set.
Green Tokens. Drop profile for the Green traffic:
Profile 1. First drop profile set for the Green traffic. Fields S min (G): 30, S max (G): 60,
S gentle (G): 90 and P max (G): 10.
Profile 2. Second drop profile set for the Green traffic. Fields S min (G): 20, S max (G):
40, S gentle (G): 80 and P max (G): 10.
Custom. Drop profile defined by the user for the Green traffic. Fields S min (G), S max
(G), S gentle (G) and P max (G) which can be set by the user.
The parameter is meaningful and can be set/modified only if the value Red or WRed is present
in the Drop Type field.
confirm.
Yellow Tokens. Drop profile for the Yellow traffic:
Profile 1. First drop profile set for the Yellow traffic. Fields S min (Y): 30, S max (Y): 60,
S gentle (Y): 90 and P max (Y): 10.
Profile 2. Second drop profile set for the Yellow traffic. Fields S min (Y): 20, S max (Y):
40, S gentle (Y): 80 and P max (Y): 10.
Custom. Drop profile defined by the user for the Yellow traffic. Fields S min (Y), S max
(Y), S gentle (Y) and P max (Y) which can be set by the user.
The parameter is meaningful and can be set/modified only if the value WRed is present in the
Drop Type field.
confirm.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node the Yellow Tokens parameter is not available.
S min (G). Minimum threshold of queue filling (percentage) under which the drop probability is
zero.
Parameter meaningful only if the Red or WRed value is present in the Drop Type field. Moreover,
it can be set/changed only if the Custom value is present in the Green Tokens field.
To change the parameter, select the relevant box and then set a value between 0 and 100; the
value must be lower than the one already present in the S max (G) field. Press Apply and confirm.
S max (G). Maximum threshold of queue filling (percentage) over which the drop probability is
100% with functionality S_Gentle disabled.
Parameter meaningful only if the Red or WRed value is present in the Drop Type field and the
value Disable in the S-gentle field. Moreover, it can be set/modified only if the value Custom is
present in the Green Tokens field.
To change the parameter, select the relevant box and then insert a value between 0 and 100;
the value must be greater than the one already present in the S min (G) field. Press Apply and
confirm.
S gentle (G). Maximum threshold of queue filling (percentage) over which the drop probability
is 100% with functionality S_Gentle enabled.
Parameter meaningful only if the Red or WRed value is present in the Drop Type field and the
value Enable in the S-gentle field. Moreover, it can be set/modified only if the value Custom is
present in the Green Tokens field.
the value must be greater than the one already present in the S max (G) field. Press Apply and
confirm.
P max (G). Drop probability in correspondence of S max.

Parameter meaningful only if the Red or WRed value is present in the Drop Type field. Moreover,
it can be set/modified only if the value Custom is present in the Green Tokens field.
324
To change the parameter, select the relevant box and then insert a value between 0 and 100.
S min (Y). Minimum threshold of queue filling (percentage) under which the drop probability is
zero.
Parameter meaningful only if the WRed value is present in the Drop Type field. Moreover, it can
be set/changed only if the value Custom is present in the Yellow Tokens field.
To change the parameter, select the relevant box and then set a value between 0 and 100; the
value must be lower than the one already present in the S max (Y) field. Press Apply and confirm.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node the S min (Y) parameter is not available.
S max (Y). Maximum threshold of queue filling (percentage) over which the drop probability is
Parameter meaningful only if the WRed value is present in the Drop Type field and the value
Disable in the S-gentle field. Moreover, it can be set/modified only if the value Custom is present
in the Yellow Tokens field.
the value must be greater than the one already present in the S min (Y) field. Press Apply and
confirm.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node the S max (Y) parameter is not available.
S gentle (Y). Maximum threshold of queue filling (percentage) over which the drop probability
Parameter meaningful only if the WRed value is present in the Drop Type field and the value
Enable in the S-gentle field. Moreover, it can be set/modified only if the value Custom is present
in the Yellow Tokens field.
the value must be greater than the one already present in the S max (Y) field. Press Apply and
confirm.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node the S gentle (Y) parameter is not available.
P max (Y). Drop probability in correspondence of S max.

Parameter meaningful only if the WRed value is present in the Drop Type field. Moreover, it can
be set/modified only if the value Custom is present in the Yellow Tokens field.
To change the parameter, select the relevant box and then insert a value between 0 and 100.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node the P max (Y) parameter is not available.
Press View RED Curve to display the curve of RED (Random Early Detection) algorithm.
WARNING In IDUs of type ALCplus2e, the option Fallback (Provider Enable) set for the Radio port automatically inserts, in every packets in output from the Radio port, a proprietary Tag which identifies the source
LAN, so that all the advanced operation foreseen for IDU ALCplus2e can be executed in selective mode.
The considered Tag will be automatically removed by the corresponding remote Radio port.
The proprietary Tag which identifies the LAN is not inserted if the modality Secure (Provider Disable) is set,
because the traffic source is implicitly known observing the VLANs enabled in VTU Table.
The Ingress Filtering Check parameter indicates, if active, the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages
in input from the port:
Fallback (Provider Enable). Packets are not discarded if the VLAN is not registered in VLAN Table
Unit (VTU).
If VID of incoming packet is registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the ports belonging
to the VLANs registered in VTU and included in VLAN on port basis.
If VID of incoming packet is NOT registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the ports included in VLAN on port basis.
325
Secure (Provider Disable). VID must be contained in VLAN Table Unit (VTU) and the input pot
must be member of this VLAN, otherwise the packet is discarded.
A packet can exit from the ports belonging to the VLAN registered in VTU and are included in
VLAN on port basis.
For each configuration (selection of the value Fallback... and Secure...) the table of Port Based VLAN
must be ALWAYS configured even if the traffic management is executed only on Tag base (see Verify/
modify the ports through which the messages in input from the Radio port).
If you wish to obtain a bidirectional traffic routed according the Vlan table, the control of the Tag 802.1Q
(Fallback... or Secure...) must be activated on all the ports.

The Force default ID parameter indicates if the forcing of the VID value of the Radio port to the default
value is active:
Disable. Forcing is not active.
Enable. Forcing is active.



The Default Vid parameter indicates the Default Vid value of the port.
The Default Vid of a port is used as VID in the field 802.1Q of the packets came from the port in subject
without Tag and destined to exit with Tag from any port of the Switch.
3. To change the parameter, type a numeric value between 2 and 4094.
It is not possible to set, as ID, a value already used as Default Vid by another port or already used by
a reserved VLAN (see Virtual Lan Config. tab).
If the message Default Vid already assigned to VLan in list. Continue anyway? is displayed, the entered
value is used even as ID of a traffic VLAN. To continue the operation, press Yes and confirm.
Verify/overwrite the C-VID value of the packets in input from the Radio port and forwarded to a LAN, with a different C-VID

326
The table C Vid/S Vid Rewrite indicates the correspondence between the C-VID value of the packets in
input from the Radio port and the identifier used to replace C-VID in the packets forwarded to a LAN.
Every row of the table corresponds to a rule for which is pointed out in the column:
Input C Vid. Identifier C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) you wish to overwrite.
Output C Vid. New value of C-VID you wish to forward to LAN.
Output Lan (S Vid). LAN which you wish to forward the new C-VID to.
3. To add an element to the list:

a. Press Add.
b. Set the Input C Vid, Output C Vid and Output Lan filed as described above.
c. Activate the Remove C Tag box if you wish to remove the C-VID value from the packets forwarded to a LAN.
In this case, the parameter Output C Vid must not be set (field disabled).
d. Press Apply and confirm.
4. To delete an element from the list:
a. Select the element.

2. Select the Port Based VLan tab.
The Port Based VLAN area indicates the enabling status of the ports through which can transit the messages in input from the Radio port which the contextual area refers to:
Disable. The packets, in input from the Radio port, are not enabled to transit from the specific
LAN or Radio port.
Enable. The packets, in input from the Radio port, are enabled to transit from the specific LAN
or Radio port (bidirectional connection).

Enabling a port involves the automatic enabling of the corresponding port. For example, if you enable
the LAN 4 in the LAN 3 (Enh.) contextual area, the LAN 3 is automatically enabled in the LAN 4 (Enh.)
contextual area.
Verify the status of the Radio port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol

2. Select the STP or STP/Trunking tab.
If the equipment is not a node element or is a TDM element, the STP tab is present. The tab indicates
the status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the STP/Trunking tab is present. The tab indicates
the status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol or to the Trunking modality.
327

WARNING The Spanning Tree protocol cannot be enabled when the Trunking modality or Ring Protection
mode is enabled.

The STP parameter indicates the enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol for the port.
Disable. Spanning Tree protocol disabled


The Priority parameter indicates the priority of the Radio port (0: highest priority, 15: lowest priority).


The Value parameter indicates the cost of the network part directly connected to the Radio port.
This cost determines, priority being equal among two or more redundant connections, the preference
of a port with respect to the others.
This cost must be inversely proportional to the bit rate of the port
3. To change the parameter, type the new value in the box.
It is suggested to set a value belonging to the Recommended Range according to what pointed out in
the Standard IEEE 802.1w.
Verify the status of the Radio port in relation to the Trunking mode
1. Select Base Band > Port A (Enh.).

2. Select the STP/Trunking tab.
The tab indicates the status of the port in relation to the Trunking modality or to the Spanning Tree
protocol.
328

The modality can be activated when the equipment is in 1+0, 1+1 Freq. Div, 1+1 Hot Standby or 2x(1+0)
Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration with active East-West modality. In this last configuration, the radio
Trunking modality is not available for the Radio port B (Port B).
The Trunking modality cannot be enabled when the Spanning Tree protocol or Ring Protection mode is enabled.
1. Select Base Band > Port A (Enh.).
2. Select the STP/Trunking tab.
The Trunk/LACP parameter indicates the enabling status of the Trunking mode for the selected port.
enable-trunk1. Trunking mode enabled at radio port level.
329
Port A (Enh.), Port B (Enh.) contextual area

The contextual area displays the configuration of the specific Radio port of the Ethernet Switch.
Tabs
Interface tab. General configuration of the Radio ports.

Priority Management tab. Configuration of the Radio port relevant to priority management.
Queue Management Lan To Radio tab. Management of the output queues of the Radio port.
802.1Q Management tab. Configuration of the Radio port relevant to VLAN management.
Port Based VLan tab. Ports through which can transit the messages in input from the Radio port.
STP tab. Status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol. Tab available only if the
equipment is not a node element or is a TDM element.
STP/Trunking tab. Status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol or to the Trunking
modality. Tab available only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
Push-button

Interface tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the Radio ports.
Parameters
Port. Enabling status of the port:
Disable. The Radio port is not enabled to the use.
Enable. The Radio port is enabled.
Mac Learning. Enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table (MAC Table):
Enable. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the addresses
in the table takes place analysing only the field MAC Address and is registered in a
single MAC Table.
Learn. on port basis. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of
the addresses in the table takes place associating the MAC Address to the segment
of MAC Table indicized by the Default Vid value associated to the port which the traffic
is income from.
If the if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the automatic learning of the MAC Addresses must be ENABLED. If it was disabled, at the opening of the contextual area a message
is displayed asking to enable the parameter (Enable or Learn. on port basis option).
See also

Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the Radio port

WARNING Tab not available if the if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the LAN relevant to priority management.
330
Parameters
Priority Selection. Priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input to the Radio port,
to the output:
Port Default. The traffic will be sent to the output queues according to the default value set by the user on the Radio port.
Native 802.1P. The traffic will be sent to the output queues according to the value of
native 802.1p priority in input to Radio port.
Native TOS/DSCP. The traffic will be sent to the output queues according to the TOS/
DSCP value present in the native IP field in input to Radio port.
Native MPLS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues according to the value of
native MPLS priority in input to Radio port.
Value available only if the equipment is in 2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration
with active East-West modality (Ethernet Ring).
Default Priority. Value used to define the output queue when the selected priority criteria is
Port Default (see parameter Priority Selection):
0. Lowest priority
Table. Mapping of priority 802.1p within Tag VLan (priority 802.1p present into a packet in input
to a port can be remapped in output from the Switch with a different priority value):
Table available only if the analysis of the priority 802.1p is active (see parameter Priority Selection).
See also
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the Radio port to
the output queue of the LANs
Queue Management Lan To Radio tab

The tab displays the management of the output queues of the Radio port.
Parameters
Flow Control. Activation status of the flow control of the Radio port:
S-gentle. Enabling status of the S_Gentle functionality in Drop Type modality equal to RED:
Disable. The S_Gentle functionality is inactive.
Enable. The S_Gentle functionality is active.
Exp. Weighting Constant. Integration constant on the drop possibility in a RED context (the
trend of traffic before the moment a packet should be dropped affects the drop algorithm).
Queue. Output queues of the Radio port:
7. Output queue with 7 priority (high priority)
331
0. Output queue with 0 priority (low priority).
Queue Length. Length of output queue:
Type. Management algorithm of the output queues of the Radio port:
WFQ (Weighted Fair Queue). The output queue of WFQ type are managed in such a
way to ensure a mutual ratio of radio band equal to the value WFQ Weight set for
each queue.
WFQ Weight. Theoretic value of WFQ Weight set by the user (minimum 1, maximum 100).
Actual WFQ. Real value of WFQ Weight calculated by the firmware rounding the theoretic value
set by the user.
Drop Type. Criterion used to remove (drop) the packets from the queue in case of full queue:
Tail. When the queue is full, only the last packet is dropped.
Queue. When the queue is full, all its content is dropped.
Red. Mode Random Early Detection active. The packet drop mode follows the trend
defined by the curves set through the parameters S min (G), S max (G) and P max
(G) (traffic Green).
WRed. Mode Weighted Random Early Detection active. The packet drop mode follows
the trend defined by the curves set by the user through the parameters S min (G), S
max (G) and P max (G) for the Green traffic and by S min (Y), S max (Y) and P max
(Y) for the Yellow traffic.
Value not available if the if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
Green Tokens. Drop profile for the Green traffic:
Profile 1. First drop profile set for the Green traffic. Fields S min (G): 30, S max (G):
60, S gentle (G): 90 and P max (G): 10.
Profile 2. Second drop profile set for the Green traffic. Fields S min (G): 20, S max
(G): 40, S gentle (G): 80 and P max (G): 10.
Custom. Drop profile defined by the user for the Green traffic. Fields S min (G), S max
(G), S gentle (G) and P max (G) which can be set by the user.
Yellow Tokens. Drop profile for the Yellow traffic:
Profile 1. First drop profile set for the Yellow traffic. Fields S min (Y): 30, S max (Y):
60, S gentle (Y): 90 and P max (Y): 10.
Profile 2. Second drop profile set for the Yellow traffic. Fields S min (Y): 20, S max
(Y): 40, S gentle (Y): 80 and P max (Y): 10.
Custom. Drop profile defined by the user for the Yellow traffic. Fields S min (Y), S max
(Y), S gentle (Y) and P max (Y) which can be set by the user.
Parameter not available if the if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

S min (G). Minimum threshold of queue filling (percentage) under which the drop probability is
zero.
S max (G). Maximum threshold of queue filling (percentage) over which the drop probability is
332
S gentle (G). Maximum threshold of queue filling (percentage) over which the drop probability
P max (G). Drop probability in correspondence of S max.
S min (Y). Minimum threshold of queue filling (percentage) under which the drop probability is
zero.
S max (Y). Maximum threshold of queue filling (percentage) over which the drop probability is
S gentle (Y). Maximum threshold of queue filling (percentage) over which the drop probability
P max (Y). Drop probability in correspondence of S max.
Current Queue Memory Usage. Value of memory used by the output with respect to the available value.
Push-button
View RED Curve. Display the curve of RED (Random Early Detection) algorithm.
See also
Verify/modify the integration constant on the drop possibility in a RED context (Radio port)
802.1Q Management tab

The tab displays the configuration parameters of the Radio port relevant to VLAN management.
Parameters
Ingress Filtering Check. Control status of Tag Vlan ID on the messages in input from the port:
Fallback (Provider Enable). Packets are not discarded if the VLAN is not registered in
VLAN Table Unit (VTU).
If VID of incoming packet is registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the ports
belonging to the VLANs registered in VTU and included in VLAN on port basis.
If VID of incoming packet is NOT registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the
ports included in VLAN on port basis.
Secure (Provider Disable). VID must be contained in VLAN Table Unit (VTU) and the
input pot must be member of this VLAN, otherwise the packet is discarded.
A packet can exit from the ports belonging to the VLAN registered in VTU and are included in VLAN on port basis.
Force default ID. Forcing of the VID value of the Radio port to the default value:
Disable. Forcing is not active.
Enable. Forcing is active.
Default Vid. Default Vid value of the port.

The Default Vid of a port is used as VID in the field 802.1Q of the packets came from the port
in subject without Tag and destined to exit with Tag from any port of the Switch.
C Vid/S Vid Rewrite. Table of correspondence between the C-VID value of the packets in input
from the Radio port and the identifier used to replace C-VID in the packets forwarded to a LAN.
333
Every row of the table corresponds to a rule for which is pointed out in the column:
Input C Vid. Identifier C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) you wish to overwrite.
Output C Vid. New value of C-VID you wish to forward to LAN.

The wording Removed indicates that the C-VID value is removed from the packets
forwarded to the LAN.
Output Lan (S Vid). LAN which you wish to forward the new C-VID to.

Push-button

See also
Verify/overwrite the C-VID value of the packets in input from the Radio port and forwarded to
a LAN, with a different C-VID
Port Based VLan tab

The tab displays the ports through which can transit the messages in input from the Radio port which the
contextual area refers to.
Parameters
LAN/Port For each Ethernet port, if the set option is:
Disable. The packets, in input from the Radio port which the contextual area refers
to, are not enabled to transit through the specific LAN or Radio port.
Enable. The packets, in input from the Radio port, are enabled to transit through the
specific LAN or Radio port (bidirectional connection).
The availability of the Radio port (Port) depends on the equipment configuration (see Tab.13).
See also
STP tab
WARNING Tab available only if the equipment is not a node element or is a TDM element.
The tab displays the status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol.
Parameters
STP. Enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol for the port:
Disable. Spanning Tree protocol disabled.
If the Ring Protection mode is enabled, the value Disable is automatically forced for the parameter.
Role (STP area). Role assigned by the STP to each port of a Bridge/Switch. The role defines the
behaviour of the port according to the status of the Bridge in the network:
334
Status (STP area). Current status of the port:

Port status
port-disable
Receive
traffic
Forward Update the Address

traffic
Table Unit
Receive/
process BPDU
Re-transmit BPDU
No
No
No
No
No
port-blocking
No
No
No
Yes
No
port-learning
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
port-forwarding
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Version (STP area). Version of Spanning Tree protocol:

0. Highest priority
15. Lowest priority
Push-button
Refresh (STP area). Update the value present in the specific area.
See also

STP/Trunking tab
The tab displays the status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol r to the Trunking modality.
Parameters
STP. Enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol for the port:
If the Trunking modality or Ring Protection mode is enabled, the value Disable is automatically
forced for the parameter.
335
Role (STP area). Role assigned by the STP to each port of a Bridge/Switch. The role defines the
behaviour of the port according to the status of the Bridge in the network:
Status (STP area). Current status of the port:

Port status
port-disable
Receive
traffic
Forward Update the Address

traffic
Table Unit
Receive/
process BPDU
Re-transmit BPDU
No
No
No
No
No
port-blocking
No
No
No
Yes
No
port-learning
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
port-forwarding
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Version (STP area). Version of Spanning Tree protocol:

0. Highest priority
15. Lowest priority

Trunk/LACP. Enabling status of the Trunking mode for the port:
enable-trunk1. Trunking mode enabled at radio port level.
If the STP or Ring Protection mode is enabled, the value Disable is automatically forced for the
parameter.
The modality can be activated when the equipment is in 1+0, 1+1 Freq. Div, 1+1 Hot Standby
or 2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration with active East-West modality. In this last configuration, the radio Trunking modality is not available for the Radio port B (Port B).
Push-button
Refresh (STP area). Update the value present in the specific area.
See also

336
Spanning Tree
WARNING The change of the default values of the configuration (Hello Time, Forward Delay, Max Age) of
the Spanning Tree protocol could damage the correct operation of the Spanning Tree protocol itself.
The Spanning Tree command manages the spanning tree in the network.
Operations
Verify/modify the STP version

Verify/modify the transmission interval of the BPDU packets (Hello Time)
Verify/modify the Forward Delay interval
Verify/modify the maximum lifetime of the BPDU packets (Max Age)
Verify the status of the ports in relation to the STP or ELP
Verify the MAC Address of a Bridge
Verify/modify the priority of a Bridge
GUI
Spanning Tree contextual area

See also


1. Select Base Band > Spanning Tree.

The Force Version parameter indicates the version of the Spanning Tree protocol to use:
rapid-stp-802-1w. Rapid Spanning Tree protocol standard IEEE 802.1w. Protocol characterized
by a greater speed (lower convergence time).

Verify/modify the transmission interval of the BPDU packets


The Hello Time parameter indicates the time interval that passes between two consecutive transmissions of the BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) packet from the Ethernet ports with the Spanning Tree
function enabled.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished option (default: 2 sec.).
337


The Forward Delay parameter indicates the time interval which passes between the passage between
the port-blocking status and the port-learning status and between the port-learning status and the
port-forwarding status of the port.
Verify/modify the maximum lifetime of the BPDU packets


The Max Age parameter indicates the maximum number of switches which the packet can pass through
before expiring. The passage from a Switch to another one involves the decrease of 1 second per equipment.
Verify the status of the ports in relation to the STP or ELP


2. Select the Summary tab.
The tab for every Ethernet port displays the parameters relevant to the Spanning Tree protocol or to
the Ethernet Line Protection (only LANs).
Verify the MAC Address of a Bridge


2. Select the Bridges tab.
The MAC Address parameter indicates the physical address of the Bridge 1 (Bridge 1 area) and Bridge
2 (Bridge 2 area).


2. Select the Bridges tab.
The Priority parameter indicates the priority of the Bridge 1 (Bridge 1 area) and of the Bridge 2 (Bridge
2 area) to use in the auto negotiation of the root: 0 (maximum priority), 15 (minimum priority).
If two bridges have the same priority, the Bridge with lower MAC Address is chosen as root.
338
Spanning Tree contextual area

The contextual area displays the spanning tree configuration and the Ethernet Line Protection configuration.
Tabs
Setting tab. General configuration of the Spanning Tree protocol.

Summary tab. Status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol or to the Ethernet
Line Protection (only LANs).
Bridges tab. MAC Address and priority of the Bridge 1 and Bridge 2.
Push-button

See also

Setting tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the Spanning Tree protocol.
Parameters
Force Version. Version of the Spanning Tree protocol:

Hello Time. Time interval that passes between two consecutive transmissions of the BPDU
(Bridge Protocol Data Unit) packet from the Ethernet ports with the Spanning Tree function enabled.
Forward Delay. Time interval which passes between the passage between the port-blocking
status and the port-learning status and between the port-learning status and the port-forwarding status of the port.
Max Age. Maximum number of switches which the packet can pass through before expiring.
The passage from a Switch to another one involves the decrease of 1 second per equipment.
See also

Verify/modify the transmission interval of the BPDU packets (Hello Time)
Verify/modify the maximum lifetime of the BPDU packets (Max Age)
Summary tab
The tab displays the status of the Ethernet ports in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol or to the Ethernet
Line Protection (only LANs).
339
Parameters
LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4. Enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol or of the Ethernet
Line Protection for the specific LAN:
Disable. Spanning Tree protocol and Ethernet Line Protection disabled.
Enable Bridge1. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1).
Enable Bridge2. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2).
Enable Pro1. Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment (ELP equipment) enabled
(Protection1).
Enable Pro2. ELP equipment enabled (Protection2).
Enable Node Pro1. Ethernet Line Protection of the node (ELP node) enabled (Node
Protection1).
Enable Node Pro2. ELP node enabled (Node Protection2).
Port A, Port B. Enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol for the specific Radio port:
Bridge1. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1).
Bridge2. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2).
The availability of the Radio ports depends on the equipment radio configuration (see Tab.13).
Role. This parameter has a different meaning depending on the enabled protocol/modality:
STP ENABLED. Role assigned by the STP to each port of a Bridge/Switch. The role defines the behaviour of the port according to the status of the Bridge in the network:
ELP
Root. Port offering the best path (lowest cost) towards the Bridge selected as root.
Each Bridge can have only one root port. When the Spanning Tree algorithm is at
steady state, each root port is in port-forwarding status.
Alternate. Port in alternative to the root port, as it offers an alternative path towards
the Bridge Root with cost higher than that of the root port. Normally the Alternate
port is in port-blocking status.
Designated. Port which does not offer paths towards the Bridge Root and is used to
propagate the information of the Bridge Root to the other bridges. Each Designated
Backup. Port physically connected on a Lan where a Designated port of the same
ENABLED.
Role assigned by the ELP to each port. The role defines the behaviour of the port:
Alternate. Port in stand-by status, as it offers an alternative path with higher cost as
opposed to the Designated port. Normally the Alternate port is in port-blocking status.
Designated. Port active. Each Designated port is in port-forwarding status.
Status. Current status of the port:

Port status
Receive
traffic
Forward
traffic
Update the
Address Table Unit
STP
Receive/process BPDU
Re-transmit
BPDU
ENABLED
port-disable
No
No
No
No
No
port-blocking
No
No
No
Yes
No
port-learning
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
port-forwarding
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
port-blocking
No
No
No
port-forwarding
Yes
Yes
Yes
ELP
ENABLED
Version. Version of the Spanning Tree protocol or protection group of the port:
340

Parameter not meaningful when Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled (STP/ELP parameter - Enable-node-Prot... value).
Push-button
Refresh. Update the values present in the tab.
Bridges tab
The tab displays the MAC Address and the priority of the Bridge 1 and Bridge 2.
Parameters
MAC Address (Bridge 1 area). Physical address of the Bridge 1.

Priority (Bridge 1 area). Priority of the Bridge 1 to use in the auto negotiation of the root: 0
(maximum priority), 15 (minimum priority).
MAC Address (Bridge 2 area). Physical address of the Bridge 2.
Priority (Bridge 2 area). Priority of the Bridge 2 to use in the auto negotiation of the root: 0
(maximum priority), 15 (minimum priority).
See also
341
Ring Protection
WARNING Command available only if the Eth ring protection functionality is enabled (see Equipment Fea-
ture tab).
The Ring Protection modality implements, for ALCplus2e equipment, the standard G.8032 defined in Recommendation ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344 Ethernet Ring Protection Switching (03/2010), which you are referred
to for a detailed description of the modality.
The command Ring Protection manages the Ring Protection modality which allows managing the protection in ring Ethernet networks (ERPS - Ethernet Ring Protection Switching) and avoids the creation of loops
through a RPL connection (Ring Protection Link).
ALCplus2e equipment allows implementing, on the same physical ring, a maximum of two ERP instances
(Ethernet Ring Protection) which protects a set of VLANs.
Operations
Verify the configuration of the parameters common to the two ERP instances
Change the configuration of the parameters common to the two ERP instances
Verify the configuration of the parameters relevant to every single ERP instance
Change the configuration of the parameters relevant to every single ERP instance
Enable/disable the Ring Protection modality for an ERP instance
Enable/disable the manual commands to block a port of an ERP instance
Restore manually the RPL link for an ERP instance
Restore the factory values for the parameters of an ERP instance
Verify to which ERP instance the traffic of each equipment VLAN is routed
Associate a VLAN to an ERP instance
GUI
Ring Protection contextual area
Verify the configuration of the parameters common to the two ERP instances
1. Select Base Band > Ring Protection.

The Common tab displays the configuration parameters valid for both the ERP instances (OAM Domain
used for G.8032, protection recovery time after a failure detection, etc.).
WARNING When the Ring Protection modality is active for at least one ERP instance, the parameters cannot
be changed, except the fields WTR (min) and Guard (ms).

2. Set, in Name box, the name of the OAM Domain used for G.8032 (alphanumeric string of minimum 1
and maximum 20 characters).
3. Set, in Level box, the priority level you wish to assign to Domain (0: lowest priority, 7: highest priority).
4. Set, in WTR (min) box, the time which has to pass to restore the RPL link (block of Owner port) after
the clear of a failure (in absence of management commands executed by the operators and with ERP
Revertive operation enabled - see Ring 1 and Ring 2 tabs).
342
Value between 1 and 12 minutes (default 5).

RPL (Ring Protection Link) connection is the link of the ERP instance which, in normal operating conditions (absence of failure), is blocked (at one or both ends) for the traffic channel in order to avoid the
loop generation.
5. Set, in Guard (ms) box, the time waited by every port of the instance before changing its own status.
Value between 10 and 2000 milliseconds (default 500ms).
6. Set, in CFM/CCM Interval box, the forwarding interval of CCM messages (reserved to G.8032) which
allow monitoring the ERP instance by detecting any possible interruption (Signal Failure):
3.33 ms. 3,33 milliseconds (default value).
10 ms. 10 milliseconds.
7. Set, in Not Assigned Traffic box, the ERP instance which the traffic without Tag or the traffic with Tag,
but not assigned to any instance, must be routed to (see VLan/Ring Binding tab):
To Ring 1. The considered traffic is routed to instance 1.
To Ring 2. The considered traffic is routed to instance 2.
Verify the configuration of the parameters relevant to every single ERP instance

2. Select the tab Ring 1 or Ring 2 depending on the ERP instance for which you wish to execute the operation.
The Ring 1 and Ring 2 tabs displays the enabling status of the Ring Protection modality and the configuration parameters of the specific instance.
WARNING When the Ring Protection modality is active for a specific ERP instance, the parameters cannot
be changed, except for the fields Ring Name and Manual Command.

First time you set the parameters or after a restore of the factory default settings (see Restore the factory values for the parameters of an ERP instance), the tab is disabled.
To enable it, select the message Locked. To create the Ring...
3. Set, in the Ring Name box, the name of the instance (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum
40 characters).
Set the same name for all the pieces of equipment of the same ERP instance.
4. Set, in MA Name box, the name you wish to assign to the Maintenance Association associated to the
instance (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum 15 characters).
Set the same name for all the pieces of equipment of the same ERP instance.
5. Set, in the Vlan ID box, the identifier of the VLAN you wish to reserve for the specific ERP instance
(value between 2 and 4094).
WARNING Set a different VLAN identifier for tab Ring 1 and tab Ring 2. Moreover, the value must be
different from that set as default identifier of the Ethernet ports (Default Vid) and as identifier of the
management VLAN or of the VLANs used for the PWE3 function.
6. Set, in ERP Revertive box, the ERP Revertive modality for the specific ERP instance:
Disable. The modality is inactive.
343
After a failure and the consequent re-configuration of the ring links, once the failure signal is
cleared, the traffic channel continues using the RPL link. To restore the RPL link, it is necessary
to send a command of manual Revert (see Restore manually the RPL link for an ERP instance).
Enable. The modality is active.

After a failure and the consequent re-configuration of the ring links, once the failure signal is
cleared, after the WTR time is expired, the RPL link and the original traffic link are restored.
7. For each one of the two ports (areas Ethernet Port Binding) constituting the ends of the link belonging
to the specific ERP instance, set the following parameters:
a. Set, in Lan Port box, the Ethernet port where the links ends.
It is not possible to set the same Ethernet port in the two Lan Port fields.
If the Spanning Tree protocol, the Ethernet Line Protection (only LAN) or the Trunking modality
is enabled for the port, the Ring Protection modality cannot be set for the specific instance.
The selected port must have the option 802.1Q enabled in order to correctly manage the relevant VLAN.
b. Set, in RPL Role box, the port role:
None. The port is used for the links of the ERP instance, but it is not one of the ends of
the protection link RPL (Ring Protection Link). In normal operating conditions, the port
allows the transit of the traffic.
All the ports which end to the links of ERP instance where the traffic in routed must be
configured with this role.
Owner. The port is used for the links of the ERP instance and it is one of the ends of the
protection link (RPL). In normal operating conditions, the port is blocked to the transit of
the traffic. Moreover, the port with this role actuates the ERP Revertive modality (if active).
Neighbor. The port is used for the links of the ERP instance and it is one of the ends of
the protection link (RPL). In normal operating conditions, the port is blocked to the transit
of the traffic.
The value Owner or Neighbor cannot be set in both the RPL Role fields.
c. Set, in MEP ID field, the identifier of the MEP (for G.8032) associated to the port.
Value between 1 and 8191.
The MEP identifier must be assigned to all the ports which end to the links of ERP instance. The
value must be different for every port.

WARNING The Ring Protection modality cannot be enabled when the Spanning Tree protocol, the Ethernet
Line Protection or the Trunking modality is enabled for at least one of the Ethernet ports configured for the
ERP instance.

The parameter Status indicates the enabling status of the Ring Protection modality.
3. To change the parameters, select:
Enable. The Ring Protection modality is active for the specific ERP instance: the transmission of
CCM messages is enabled for the detection of a possible break in the ring.
Disable. The Ring Protection modality is not active for the specific ERP instance.
344

Operation meaningful only if the Ring Protection modality is active for the ERP instance.
It is possible to execute a single manual command at a time in the same ERP instance.
The Manual Command parameter indicates the enabling status of the maintenance manual commands
for the specific port.
3. To change the parameter select the option:
None. No forcing is active.
Forced Switch. The forced block of the port is activated. Command actuated even if there is a
break in the ring.
Manual Switch. The forced block of the port is activated. Command actuated only if there is not
a break in the ring.
4. Press Apply.
Only if you are activating a forcing (selection of Forced Switch or Manual Switch option), a message
warns you are executing a forcing and indicates the current setting of the relevant timeout.
The activation of the forcing activates the alarm MAN. OP. If the equipment is switched off and then
switched on, no forcing will be active on the port independently from the previous setting.
Restore manually the RPL link for an ERP instance

WARNING Operation available only if the ERP Revertive modality for the specific ERP instance is disabled
(parameter ERP Reverte - value Disable).
Operation to execute after a failure and consequent re-configuration of the ring links. When the failure signal is cleared, the Revert push-button will be available to restore the RPL link.
3. Press Revert.
Restore the factory values for the parameters of an ERP instance


3. Press Destroy and confirm.
345
Verify to which ERP instance the traffic of each equipment VLAN is routed

2. Select VLan/Ring Binding tab.
The tab displays, for each VLAN present in the VLAN Table, the ERP instance which the VLAN traffic is
routed to.


2. Select VLan/Ring Binding tab.
3. Set, in the Ring Binding field of the VLAN, the value:
Not Assigned. The traffic of the specific VLAN is not associated to a specific instance. It is routed
to the ERP instance set for the traffic without Tag (see parameter Not Assigned Traffic - Common
tab).
Ring 1. The traffic of the specific VLAN is routed to the first ERP instance.
Ring 2. The traffic of the specific VLAN is routed to the second ERP instance.
346
Ring Protection contextual area

The contextual area displays the configuration of the Ring Protection modality.
Tabs
Common tab. General configuration of the Ring Protection modality (OAM domain used for
G.8032, times of protection recovery after a failure detection, etc.).
Ring 1 and Ring 2 tabs. Enabling status of the Ring Protection modality and configuration parameters of the specific ERP instance.
VLan/Ring Binding tab. For every VLAN present in VLAN Table, the ERP instance to which the
VLAN traffic is routed is indicated.
Push-button
Apply. Confirms the changes.

Refresh. Updates the context.
Help. Opens the help on-line.
Common tab
The tab displays the general configuration parameters of the Ring Protection modality (OAM domain used
for G.8032, time of protection recovery after a failure detection, etc.)
Parameters
Name (area Domain). Name of the Domain used for G.8032.

Level (area Domain). Priority level of the Domain:
0. Lowest priority.
WTR (min) (area Delay). Period which must pass so the RPL link is restored (block of the Owner
port) after the failure clear (in absence of management commands actuated by the operator and
with ERP Revertive operation enabled - see Ring 1 and Ring 2 tabs).
Guard (ms) (area Delay). Period waited by every port of the instance before changing its own
status.
WTB (ms) (area Delay). Period which must pass before a manual command is really executed
(Forced Switch/Manual Switch).
Read-only parameter because the value is automatically set to 5000 ms more than the value set
in the Guard (ms) field.
CFM/CCM Interval. Interval for the transmission of the CCM messages (reserved to G.8032)
which allows monitoring the ERP instance detecting any possible interruption (Signal Failure):
3.33 ms. 3,33 milliseconds (default value).
10 ms. 10 milliseconds.
Not Assigned Traffic. ERP instance which the traffic without Tag, or the traffic with Tag but
not assigned to any instance, is routed to (see VLan/Ring Binding tab):
To Ring 1. The considered traffic is routed to the instance 1.
To Ring 2. The considered traffic is routed to the instance 2.
See also
347
Ring 1 and Ring 2 tabs
WARNING First time you set the parameters or after a restore operation of the factory settings, the tab is
disabled. To enable it, select the message Locked. To create the Ring...
Each tab displays the enabling status of the Ring Protection modality and the configuration parameters for
the specific ERP instance.
Parameters
Status. Enabling status of Ring Protection modality for the specific instance:
Enable. The Ring Protection modality is active for the specific ERP instance: the transmission of CCM messages is enabled for the detection of a possible break in the ring.
Disable. The Ring Protection modality is not active for the specific ERP instance.
UnAvailable. Unavailable modality because the parameters have never been configured or have been restored to the factory values.
Ring State. Functional status of the ERP instance.
---. Status not available because the Ring Protection modality is not active.
Idle. The ERP instance is in nominal conditions (no failure) and the traffic is transmitted according to the scheme defined for the ring.
Protection. The ERP instance is in protection: at least one failure has been detected
in the ring and the links have been reorganized to ensure the transit of the traffic in
the ring. All the ports are in status Forwarding.
Pending. The ERP instance is in transitory status between the status Protection and
the status Idle (for example, during WTR time).

Ring Name. Name of ERP instance.
MA Name. Name of the MA (Maintenance Association) associated to the instance.
VLan ID. Identifier of the VLAN reserved to the ERP instance.
ERP Revertive. Enabling status of the ERP Revertive modality for the ERP instance:
Disable. The modality is inactive.

After a failure and the consequent re-configuration of the ring links, once the failure
signal is cleared, the traffic channel continues using the RPL link. To restore the RPL
link, it is necessary to send a command of manual Revert (see push-button Revert).
Enable. The modality is active.

After a failure and the consequent re-configuration of the ring links, once the failure
signal is cleared, after the WTR time is expired, the RPL link and the original traffic
link are restored.
Lan Port. Port of the Ethernet Switch where the link ends.
RPL Role. Role of the specific port:
None. The port is used for the links of the ERP instance, but it is not one of the ends
of the protection link RPL (Ring Protection Link). In normal operating conditions, the
port allows the transit of the traffic.
Owner. The port is used for the links of the ERP instance and it is one of the ends of
the protection link (RPL). In normal operating conditions, the port is blocked to the
transit of the traffic. Moreover, the port with this role actuates the ERP Revertive modality (if active).
Neighbor. The port is used for the links of the ERP instance and it is one of the ends
of the protection link (RPL). In normal operating conditions, the port is blocked to the
transit of the traffic.
MEP ID. Identifier of the MEP (for G.8032) associated to the specific port.
Manual Command. Enabling status of the manual maintenance commands for the specific
port:
348
None. No forcing is active.
Forced Switch. The forced block of the port is activated. Command actuated even if
there is a failure in the ring.
Manual Switch. The forced block of the port is activated. Command actuated only if
there is not failure in the ring.
<box>. Operating status of the port:
Operative Status. Port for which the Ring Protection modality is not enabled.
Forwarding. Port which ends a link of the ERP instance where the traffic is routed. The
link is not alarmed (nominal condition).
Blocked. Port blocked because it ends to the RPL link or because a manual command
is active (Forced Switch/Manual Switch).
Blocked Alarmed. Port blocked because alarmed as consequence of a failure of the

link of the RPL instance where it ends.
Push-button
Revert. Restore manually the RPL link for an ERP instance.

Destroy. Restore the factory values for the parameters of an ERP instance
See also
VLan/Ring Binding tab

The tab displays, for each VLAN present in VLAN Table, the ERP instance which the VLAN traffic is routed to.
Every row of the table corresponds to one VLAN.
Parameters
VLan ID. VLan identifier.

Label. VLan name.
Ring Binding. ERP instance where the VLAN traffic is routed to.
Not Assigned. The traffic of the specific VLAN is not associated to any specific instance. It is routed to the ERP instance set for the traffic without Tag (see parameter
Not Assigned Traffic - Common tab).
Ring 1. The traffic of the specific VLAN is routed to the first ERP instance.
Ring 2. The traffic of the specific VLAN is routed to the second ERP instance.
See also
349
TDM Tributaries
E1. It manages the 2Mbit/s tributaries.

STM-1. It manages the STM-1 tributary.
VC-4. It manages the VC-4 virtual container.
VC-12. It manages the VC-12 virtual container.
350
E1
The E1 command manages the 2Mbit/s tributary.

Operations
Verify the status and configuration of the E1s

Modify the label of an E1
Activate/deactivate the E1 use
Activate/deactivate the E1 loops
Modify the management status of LOS alarm
GUI
E1 contextual area
Verify the status and configuration of the E1s

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > E1.

The E1 contextual area displays the status and the configuration of the E1.


The Tributary Label column displays the label of each tributary.
2. To modify the label of a tributary, select the relevant box and type an alphanumeric string of maximum
40 characters.

WARNING Operation not available for the tributaries A and/or B if already used for the synchronism in output (see Synchronisation).

The Enable column displays the tributary use status.
2. To modify the tributary use status, select the relevant box and then the option:
Disable. The tributary is not active (tributary not used). In this condition, the alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is raised or not depending on the setting of the Los Inversion box.
Enable. The tributary is active (tributary used). In this condition, the controller does not inhibit
the alarms.
Press Enable All to set the Enable value for all the tributaries.
Press Disable All to set the Disable value for all the tributaries.
351
If the tributary is enabled and you are disabling it, the message Do you want Los Inversion enable? is
displayed. Pressing:
Yes, the LOS alarm is raised if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however connected.
No, the LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however connected.


The column:
Line Loop indicates the loop status on line side for every single tributary: Line Loop Enabled
(loop active), ---- (loop inactive).
Internal Loop indicates the loop status on internal side for every single tributary: Int. Loop Enabled (loop active), ---- (loop inactive).
2. To modify the loop status, select the relevant box and then the option:
Disable, to disable the loop.
Enable, to enable the loop.
The activation of the loop on internal side automatically enables the tributary, if this is already enabled.
3. Press Apply.
If at least one loop is going to be activated, a message is displayed that warns that you are executing
a forcing and the current setting of the timeout.
The activation of, at least, one loop causes the activation of the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is
switched off and, then, switched on, independently from the previous setting, the loops are deactivated.

WARNING Operation available only if the tributary is disabled.

The Los Inversion column displays the management status of LOS alarm.
2. To modify the management status of LOS alarm, select the relevant box and then the option:
Los inversion. The alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is raised if, with tributary disabled,
the 2Mbit/s signal is however connected.
No Los Inversion. The alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with tributary
disabled, the 2Mbit/s signal is however connected.
352
E1 contextual area
The context displays the status and the configuration of the 2Mbit/s tributaries.
Every table row corresponds to a tributary.
The number of available tributaries changes according to the equipment type.
The first row of the box refers to the first tributary of expansion (E1-1), the second row to the second tributary of expansion (E1-2) and so on up to 16th or 32nd row (according to the type of equipped expansion)
representing the last tributary of the expansion.
The last 2 rows of the table represent the E1s of the base board (Tributary A and Tributary B).
Parameters
Tributary Label. Tributary label.

Enable. Tributary use status:
Disable (white box). Tributary not active (tributary not used). In this condition, the
alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is raised or not depending on the setting of
the Los Inversion box.
Enable (green box). Tributary active (tributary used). In this condition, the controller
does not inhibit the alarms.
If the tributary A and/or B is not available (Unavailable label - grey box), this means that the
tributary is not available for the traffic as already used as synchronism in output (see Synchronisation).
Line Loop. Line side loop status:
Line Loop Enabled (green box). Line loop active.
---- (white box). Loop not active.
Internal Loop. internal side loop status:
Int. Loop Enabled (green box). Internal loop active.
---- (white box). Loop not active.
Los Inversion. Management of LOS alarm when the tributary is not used:
Los inversion (green box). The alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is raised if,
with tributary disabled, the 2Mbit/s signal is however connected.
--- (white box). The alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with tributary disabled, the 2Mbit/s signal is however connected.
The status of the Los Inversion box IS MEANINGFUL ONLY if the tributary is not used.
LOS Alarm / AIS Alarm. The colour of box indicates the status of the relevant alarm:
White (no wording). The alarm is not active.
Red, orange, yellow or light blue (LOS or AIS wording). The alarm is active and has
severity, respectively, Critical, Major, Minor or Warning.
Push-button

Enable All. Set the Enable value (Enable column) for all E1s.
Disable All. Set the Disable value (Enable column) for all E1s.
See also

353
STM-1
Lim A STM-1 [x]. It manages the configuration of the specific STM-1.

The x value indicates the STM-1 which the command is referred to (1, 2).
354
Lim A STM-1 [x]

WARNING Command available only if the management of STM-1 is active (see Configurator).
The (Lim A STM-1 [2]) command is available only if the protection of STM-1 (MSP mode) is active or if the
management of two unprotected STM-1 is active (MST mode).
The Lim A STM-1 [x] command manages the configuration of the specific STM-1.
Operations
Verify/modify the status of the STM-1

Verify/modify the status of the STM-1 loops (line side and internal side)
Verify/modify the enabling status of the J0 Trace Identifier byte
Verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J0 Trace Identifier
Verify the STM-1 alarms
Verify/modify the B2 Signal Degrade alarm threshold
Verify/modify the B2 Excessive BER alarm threshold
Verify the status and configuration of the laser
Modify the enabling status of the laser
Modify the transmission mode of the laser
Enable manually the laser transmission
Execute the test laser functioning status
Verify/modify the transport status of the bytes of SOH frame on an E1 Radio channel
GUI
Lim A STM-1 contextual area

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x].
The STM-1 Status parameter indicates the status of the STM-1:
Not Active. The STM-1 is not active (unused stream). In this condition, the alarms are inhibited
and the LOS alarm is raised, with disabled stream the STM-1 signal is however connected.
Active. The STM-1 is active (used stream). In this condition, the controller does not inhibit the
alarms.

User Profile | Verify: Monitor. Modify: Read & Write, Station Operator, System
The Line Side Loop parameter indicates the status of the STM-1 loop on line side:
Open. The loop is inactive.
Closed. The STM-1 loop on line side is active.
355
The Internal Side Loop parameter indicates the status of the STM-1 loop on internal side:
Closed. The STM-1 loop on internal side is active.

The STM-1 loops on line side and on internal side cannot be activated at the same time.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are activating a loop a message warns that you are executing a forcing and displays the
current setting of timeout.
The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the loop is inactive, independently from the previous setting.

The Type parameter indicates the enabling status of the J0 byte used for the control of STM-1 signal:
Disable. The control of the J0 byte is disabled.
1 Byte Control. The control of the J0 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 1 byte. The
inconsistency between the waited byte and the received one creates an alarm signal (J0 Trace
Identifier Mismatch Alarm).
16 Bytes Control. The control of the J0 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 16 byte.
The inconsistency between the waited byte sequence and the received one creates an alarm signal (J0 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm).


Into the J0 Path Trace area the sequences of the characters at transmission and/or at reception relevant
to J0 byte used for the control of STM-1 signal is pointed out.
Sent box. Transmitted sequence of the control characters.
Expected box. Character sequence to be controlled at reception.
Received box. Character sequence in reception.
2. To change the parameter, type a new string of ASCII characters into the box:
Sent, to change the transmitted sequence of the control characters.
Expected, to change the sequence of the characters to be controlled at reception.
The number of characters that has to constitute the sequence depends on the selected option pushbutton into the Type area (1 or 16 bytes).
Verify the STM-1 alarms

356
In the Alarms area, for each STM-1 alarm, there is a box containing the alarm name. The colour of the
boxes represents the alarm status and severity:
Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major,
Minor, Warning severity.

2. Select the Thresholds tab.
The B2 Signal Degrade Threshold parameter indicates the threshold of the B2 Signal Degrade alarm
according to the error degree calculated on the byte B2 of the STM-1 signal:
E-5, at the detection of a BER > 10E-5 the alarm is activated.

4. Press Apply and then confirm.

2. Select the Thresholds tab.
The B2 Excessive BER Threshold parameter indicates the threshold of the B2 Excessive BER alarm according to the error degree calculated on the byte B2 of the STM-1 signal:

Verify the status and configuration of the laser

WARNING Operation not available if the equipment is equipped with STM-1 with electrical interface.
The tab displays the current status and the configuration parameters of the laser.
357

The Laser Control parameter indicates the enabling status of the laser:

4. Press Apply.
Only if you are disabling the laser (selection of the Off option), a message warns that you are executing
a forcing and displays the current setting of the timeout.
The laser disabling activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and switched off, the
laser is enabled to transmit independently from the previous setting.


The Automatic Shutdown parameter indicates the transmission mode of the laser:
Disabled. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the real presence of the optical signal.
Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal: when the
signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the laser does not transmit.
In this last condition, the controller automatically turns on the laser for 2 seconds every x seconds (adjustable into the Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote transmitter: if the signal
at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit, while if it is not present, after x seconds, the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on.
To modify the Auto Restart Time interval set into the relevant box a value comprised between
60 and 300 sec. Press Apply and confirm.
Test. The laser transmits for x seconds (test operation laser functioning status).
WARNING If the management of STM-1 is active in 1+1 MSP No ALS modality, Automatic Laser Shut-
down function is permanently disabled. This means that the laser transmission modality is forced to
Disable. In this case, the change operation here below is not available.
4. Press Apply.
Only if you are setting Disable, Manual or Test as transmission modality for the laser, a message warns
that you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of the timeout.
The selection of a modality different from Auto activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the user turns off the
equipment and then turns it on again, without taking into any account the preceding setting, the transmission mode of the laser is Auto.
358


If the management of STM-1 is active in 1+1 MSP No ALS modality, Automatic Laser Shutdown function is
permanently disabled. This means that the laser transmission modality is forced to Disable. In this case,
this operation is not available.
3. Select the Manual option.
4. Press Apply.
The setting of the Manual modality, activates the MAN. OP alarm.
6.
Press Restart Laser and confirm.

The laser transmits for 2 seconds and then stops itself.


If the management of STM-1 is active in 1+1 MSP No ALS modality, Automatic Laser Shutdown function is
permanently disabled (laser transmission modality is forced to Disable). In this case, this operation is not
available.
3. Set, into the Test Time box, the number of seconds during which the user wants to turn on the laser
(value comprised between 1 and 100 sec.).
4. Select the Test option.
5. Press Apply.
The setting of the Test modality, activates the MAN. OP alarm.
7. Press Restart Laser and confirm.
The laser transmits for the number of seconds set into the Test Time box and then it stops itself.
WARNING Operation available only if the management of STM-1 in MST mode is active.

2. Select the SOH Transport tab.
359
The Radio E1 Selection parameter indicates the high priority Radio E1 channel (Permanent) currently
used for the transport of the content of SOH frame in radio:
Permanent 1A <E1 Radio number>. The transport of the bytes of SOH frame on the specific Permanent E1 channel of Radio 1A is active.
Permanent 2A <E1 Radio number>. The transport of the bytes of SOH frame on the specific Permanent E1 channel of Radio 2A is active.
Not Selected. The transport in radio of the SOH frame is not active.
None available. Radio not available (radio unequipped or in failure) or the number of Permanent
channels is set to 0.

Operation available only if at least one high-priority Radio E1 channel is set (see Modulation & Capacity
tab).
The available values change according to the number of high priority channels set for each Radio.
The selected Radio E1 channel will not be available for the traffic any longer.
The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the SDH overhead and VC12 quality management functionality is not enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).
360
Lim A STM-1 contextual area

The contextual area displays the configuration of the specific STM-1.
Tabs
Settings tab. Status, loop, J0 Trace Identifier configuration and STM-1 alarms.
Thresholds tab. Threshold of the B2 Signal Degrade alarm and B2 Excessive BER alarm.
Laser Control tab. Configuration of the STM-1 with optical interface.
SOH Transport tab. Status of the transport of the SOH bytes on a Radio e1 channel.
Push-button

Restart Laser. Restart the laser. Push-button present only if the Laser Control tab is active.
Settings tab
The tab displays the configuration of the specific STM-1 (status, loop, J0 Trace Identifier configuration and
STM-1 alarms).
Parameters
Line Side Loop. Status of the STM-1 loop on line side:
Closed. The STM-1 loop on line side is active.
STM-1 Status. Status of the STM-1:
Not Active. The STM-1 is not active (unused stream). In this condition, the alarms are
inhibited and the LOS alarm is raised, with disabled stream the STM-1 signal is however connected.
Active. The STM-1 is active (used stream). In this condition, the controller does not
inhibit the alarms.
Internal Side Loop. Status of the STM-1 loop on internal side:
Closed. The STM-1 loop on internal side is active.
Type (J0 Path Trace). Enabling status of the J0 byte:
1 Byte Control. The control of the J0 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of

1 byte. The inconsistency between the waited byte and the received one creates an
alarm signal (J0 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm).
16 Bytes Control. The control of the J0 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence

of 16 byte. The inconsistency between the waited byte sequence and the received one
creates an alarm signal (J0 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm).
Sent (J0 Path Trace). Transmitted sequence of the control characters.

Expected (J0 Path Trace). Character sequence to be controlled at reception.
Received (J0 Path Trace). Character sequence in reception.
Alarms. Status of STM-1 alarms. For each alarm there is a box containing the alarm name. The
colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:
361
See also

Thresholds tab
The tab displays the configuration of the specific STM-1 (threshold of the B2 Signal Degrade alarm and B2
Excessive BER alarm).
Parameters
B2 Signal Degrade Threshold. Threshold of the B2 Signal Degrade alarm:
B2 Excessive BER Threshold. Threshold of the B2 Excessive BER alarm:
See also

Laser Control tab

WARNING Tab not available if the equipment is equipped with STM-1 with electrical interface
The tab displays the configuration of the specific STM-1 with optical interface.
Parameters
Laser Control. Enabling status of the laser:
<Box>. Current status of the laser:
Status ON / green box. The laser is on transmission.
Status OFF / gray box. The laser is not on transmission.
Module Type. Laser module type:
362
optical-S11. S type laser module (application: Inter office-Short-haul), 1 (STM level:

Stm-1), 1 (fibber type: according to G.652 Spec.).
optical-L11. L type laser module (application: Inter office-Long-haul), 1 (STM level:

Stm-1), 1 (fibber type: according to G.652 Spec.).
optical-L12. L type laser module (application: Inter office-Long-haul), 1 (STM level:

Stm-1), 2 (fibber type: according to G.652, G.654 Specifications).
optical-I1. I type laser module (application: Intra office), 1 (STM level: Stm-1).
optical-cwdm. Laser module of type CWDM (Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing).
Unknown. The laser module is not one of the above listed modules (possible anomaly
of the laser module).
Classification of the optical interface according to G.957 Specification.

Automatic Shutdown. Transmission mode of the laser:
Disable. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the
real presence of the optical signal.
Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal:
when the signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the
laser does not transmit.
In this last condition, the controller automatically turns on the laser for 2 seconds
every x seconds (adjustable into the Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote
transmitter: if the signal at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit,
while if it is not present, after x seconds, the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on.
Test. The laser transmits for x seconds (operation of test laser operation status).
If the management of STM-1 in 1+1 MSP No ALS modality is active, Automatic Laser Shutdown
function is permanently disabled. This means that, in the Automatic Shutdown area, the value
Disable (option not modifiable) is automatically set and the other items of the area are not available.
Auto Restart Time. Time (expressed by means of seconds) waited by the equipment controller
before trying again the laser turning-on (when the transmission mode of the laser is Auto).
Test Time. Time (expressed in seconds) during which the equipment controller turns on the
laser during the testing operation.
See also

SOH Transport tab

WARNING Tab available only if the management of STM-1 in MST mode is active.
Tab not available if the PWE3 function is active (see Configurator).

The tab displays the status of the transport of the SOH bytes on a Radio E1 channel.
Parameters
Radio E1 Selection. High priority Radio E1 channel (Permanent) currently used for the transport of the SOH frame in radio:
Permanent 1A <Radio E1 number>. The transport of the bytes of the SOH frame on
the specific Permanent E1 channel of the Radio 1A.
Permanent 2A <Radio E1 number>. The transport of the bytes of the SOH frame on
the specific Permanent E1 channel of the Radio 2A.
Not Selected. The transport in radio of the SOH frame is not active.
None available. Radio not available (radio unequipped or in failure) or the number of
Permanent channels is set to 0.
See also
363
VC-4
WARNING Command not available if the STM-1 Bulk function is active for the specific STM-1 (see STM1
Bulk Config.).
Lim A VC-4 [x]. It manages the specific VC-4 virtual container configuration.
364
Lim A VC-4 [x]

WARNING Command available only if the management of STM-1 is active (see Configurator) and the STM1 Bulk function is not active for the specific STM-1 (see STM1 Bulk Config.).
The Lim A VC-4 [2] command is available only if the management of two unprotected STM-1 is active (MST
mode).
The Lim A VC-4 [x] command manages the specific VC-4 virtual container configuration.
Operations

Verify the VC-4 alarms
Verify/modify the Signal Label value
GUI
Lim A VC-4 contextual area

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-4 > Lim A VC-4 [x].
The Type parameter indicates the enabling status of the overhead J1 byte used for the control of the
received signal:
16 Bytes Control. The control of the J1 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 16 byte.
The inconsistency between the waited byte sequence and the received one creates an alarm signal (J1 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm).


The tab displays the sequence of characters in transmission and/or reception relevant to the byte J1,
used for the control of the received signal:
Sent. Transmitted sequence of the control characters.
Expected. Character sequence to be controlled at reception.
Received. Character sequence in reception.
365
Verify the VC-4 alarms

The Alarms area displays, for each VC-4 alarm, a box containing the alarm name.
Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major,
Minor, Warning severity.

2. Select the B3/Signal Label tab.
The B3 Signal Degrade Threshold parameter indicates the threshold of the B3 Signal Degrade alarm
according to the error degree calculated on the byte B3 of the received signal:


The B3 Excessive BER Threshold parameter indicates the threshold of the B3 Excessive BER alarm according to the error degree calculated on the byte B3 of the received signal:


The Signal Label area displays the setting of the value of Signal Label (byte C2) used for the control of
the received signal:
366
Sent. Specification which the transmitted value of Signal Label refers to.
Expected. Specification which the received value of Signal Label refers to.
Received. Specification which the received signal refers to.
The mismatch between expected value and received value generates an alarm (VC-4 Signal Label Mismatch Alarm).
3. To change the parameter, set in the box:
Sent Label. The specification which the value of the transmitted C2 byte refers to.
Expected Label. The specification which the value of the expected C2 byte refers to.
The specifications which can be set, according to G.707 ITU-T Rec., are: Path Unequipped, TUG Structure.
367

The contextual area displays the configuration of the specific VC-4 virtual container.
Tabs
J1/Alarms tab. J1 Trace Identifier configuration and VC-4 alarms.

B3/Signal Label tab. Threshold of the B3 Signal Degrade alarm and B3 Excessive BER alarm;
Signal Label value.
Push-button

J1/Alarms tab
The tab displays the configuration of the specific VC-4 virtual container (J1 Trace Identifier configuration
and VC-4 alarms).
Parameters
Type (J1 Path Trace). Enabling status of the J1 byte:
16 Bytes Control. The control of the J1 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence

of 16 byte. The inconsistency between the waited byte sequence and the received one
creates an alarm signal (J1 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm).
Sent (J1 Path Trace). Transmitted sequence of the control characters.

Expected (J1 Path Trace). Character sequence to be controlled at reception.
Received (J1 Path Trace). Character sequence in reception.
Alarms. Status of VC-4 virtual container alarms. For each alarm there is a box containing the
alarm name. The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:
See also

B3/Signal Label tab

The tab displays the configuration of the specific VC-4 virtual container (threshold of the B3 Signal Degrade
alarm and B3 Excessive BER alarm; Signal Label value).
Parameters
B3 Signal Degrade Threshold. Threshold of the B3 Signal Degrade alarm:
368
B3 Excessive BER Threshold. Threshold of the B3 Excessive BER alarm:
Sent (Signal Label). Specification which the transmitted value of Signal Label refers to. The
specifications, according to G.707 ITU-T Rec. are: Path Unequipped, TUG Structure.
Expected (Signal Label). Specification which the received value of Signal Label refers to. The
specifications, according to G.707 ITU-T Rec. are: Path Unequipped, TUG Structure.
Received (Signal Label). Specification which the received signal refers to. The specifications,
according to G.707 ITU-T Rec. are: Path Unequipped, TUG Structure.
See also

369
VC-12
WARNING Command not available if the STM-1 Bulk function is active for the specific STM-1 (see STM1
Bulk Config.).
VC-12 Thresholds. It manages the thresholds of some VC-12 alarms.

Lim A VC-12 [x]. It manages the configuration parameters of each VC-12 channel.
370
VC-12 Thresholds
The VC-12 Thresholds command manages the thresholds of some VC-12 alarms.
Operations
Verify/modify the VC-12 Signal Degrade alarm threshold

Verify/modify the VC-12 Excessive BER alarm threshold
GUI
VC-12 Thresholds contextual area
Verify/modify the VC-12 Signal Degrade alarm threshold

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-12 > VC-12 Thresholds.
The Signal Degrade Threshold parameter indicates the threshold of the VC-12 Signal Degrade alarm:

Verify/modify the VC-12 Excessive BER alarm threshold

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-12 > VC-12 Thresholds.
The Excessive BER Threshold parameter indicates the threshold of the VC-12 Excessive BER alarm:

371
VC-12 Thresholds contextual area

The contextual area shows the setting of the thresholds of some VC-12 alarms.
Parameters
Signal Degrade Threshold. Threshold of the VC-12 Signal Degrade alarm:
Excessive BER Threshold. Threshold of the VC-12 Excessive BER alarm:
Push-button

372
Lim A VC-12 [x]

The Lim A VC-12 [2] command is available only if the management of two unprotected STM-1 is active
(MST mode).
The Lim A VC-12 [x] command manages the configuration parameter of each VC-12 channel.
Operations
Verify the alarms status of the VC-12

Verify/modify the enabling status of the J2 Trace Identifier byte of a VC-12
Verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J2 Trace Identifier of
a VC-12
Verify/modify the Signal Label value of a VC-12
GUI
Verify the alarms status of the VC-12

The Lim A VC-12 contextual area displays the alarms status of the VC-12.

2. Select the wished VC-12 channel.
The Status parameter indicates the enabling status of the byte J2 used for the control of the received
signal:
Disabled. The control of the byte J2 is disabled.
Enabled. The control of the byte J2 is enabled.


a VC-12
The J2 Path Trace area displays the sequence of characters in transmission and/or reception relevant
to the byte J2 used for the control of the received signal:
373
Sent. Transmitted sequence of the control characters.
Expected. Character sequence to be controlled at reception.
Received. Character sequence in reception.

The Signal Label area displays the setting of the value of Signal Label (byte C2) used for the control of
the received signal:
Sent. Specification which the value of the transmitted byte C2 refers to.
Expected. Specification which the value of the expected byte C2 refers to.
The mismatch between expected value and received value generates an alarm (VC-12 Signal Label Mismatch Alarm).
3. To change the parameter, set in the Sent and Expected box the new specification.
The specifications which can be set, according to G.707 ITU-T Rec. are: Path Unequipped, Asynchronous.
374

The contextual area shows the VC-12 channels.
VC-12 configuration
Each VC-12 is represented by a box and by the number of the channel reported into the box.
The position of the box identifies the TUG-3 and the TUG-2 which the VC-12 belongs to.
To verify the channel configuration (J2 Trace Identifier and Signal Label) select the wished VC12. The detail of the configuration is pointed out in Lim A VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> window.
VC-12 alarms
The total status of the channel alarms is displayed by the colour of the box:
If there are more alarms with different severity, the colour of the box will point out the most
serious alarm present in the VC-12 channel.
To verify the alarms of a single channel, select the wished VC-12 channel. The detail of the
alarms is pointed out in Lim A VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> window.
Push-button

Lim A VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> window

The window displays the configuration parameters (J2 Trace Identifier and Signal Label) and the status of
the alarms of a VC-12 channel.
Parameters
Status (J2 Path Trace). Enabling status of the byte J2 used for the control of the received signal:
Disabled. The control of the byte J2 is disabled.
Enabled. The control of the byte J2 is enabled.
Sent (J2 Path Trace). Transmitted sequence of the control characters (byte J2).
Expected (J2 Path Trace). Character sequence to be controlled at reception (byte J2).
Received (J2 Path Trace). Character sequence in reception (byte J2).
Sent (Signal Label). Specification which the transmitted value of Signal Label (byte C2) refers
to. The specifications, according to G.707 ITU-T Rec. are: Path Unequipped, Asynchronous.
Expected (Signal Label). Specification which the received value of Signal Label (byte C2) refers
to. The specifications, according to G.707 ITU-T Rec. are: Path Unequipped, Asynchronous.
Alarms. Status of VC-12 channel alarms. For each alarm there is a box containing the alarm
name. The colour of the box indicates the alarm status:
Push-button
Refresh. Update the window.
375

Cancel. Close the window.
See also

a VC-12
376
Cross Connection
WARNING Command available only for equipment that manage the matrix (see Tab.14).
The Cross Connection command it manages the cross-connection matrix.

The function of the matrix is, as rule, allowing the mapping of the E1 TDM channels to the Radio E1 channels.
For equipment provided with PWE3 function (see PWE3), when this is active, the matrix allows mapping
the E1 channels to PWE3 channels.
This change of function involves that the operations available by means of the considered command change
according to the type of equipment and to the activation or not of the PWE3 function.
Depending on the equipment type, refer to the chapter:
Cross Connection (PWE3 function not available or inactive)
Cross Connection (PWE3 function enable)
Tab.14 Matrix availability
IDU Board type
(1)
PWE3
function
Matrix
Notes
IduBoard Only 1+0

IduBoard
IduBoard Xpic
Not
available
Not
available
The mapping of the two E1 channels of base

board (tributaries A and B) with Radio E1s
can be executed in the Tributary A-B Mapping tab
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
Not
available
Available
Matrix for the mapping of E1 tributaries to

Radio E1s (see Cross Connection)
Disable
Available

Enable
Available

PWE3 E1s (see Cross Connection (PWE3
function enable)

Not
available
Not
available
The mapping of E1 tributaries is preset:

- Tributary A -> Radio Extra E1-1
- Tributary B -> Radio Extra E1-2
- E1-1 expansion -> Radio Extra E1-3
...
- E1-16 expansion -> Radio Extra E1-18

Not
available
Not
available

- Tributary A -> Radio Extra E1-1
- Tributary B -> Radio Extra E1-2
Disable
Available

Enable
Not
available

- E1-1 expansion -> PWE3 Link E1-1
...
- E1-16 expansion -> PWE3 Link E1-16
(2)
Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1

Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0
Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0/1+1
Xpic Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1
Xpic Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0
Xpic Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0/1+1
Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1
Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0
Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1
Xpic Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1
Xpic Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0
Xpic Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1


IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1 PWE3
(1)
(2)
See Configurator
377
Cross Connection
WARNING Chapter meaningful only for equipment managing the TDM matrix and with PWE3 function not
available or inactive (see Tab.14).

Operations
Display the connections of the equipment

Execute an unprotected Tributary-Radio connection
Execute a protected Tributary-Radio connection
Execute a Pass Through connection
Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection
Delete one or more connections
Enable the closing of a channel on itself (Auto-Loop)
Disable an Auto-Loop
Modify the connection label
UNPROTECTED TRIBUTARY-RADIO
CONNECTIONS
Verify the status and the configuration of a protected connection

Modify the modality used to manage the switch in the protected connection
Modify the modality used to manage the preferential connection
Modify the Wait Time parameter (protected connection)
Force the switch on preferential connection without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
Modify the structure of the Radio E1 involved by a connection
GUI
Cross Connection contextual area

See also
Cross connection matrix (info)
Display the connections of the equipment

1. Select Base Band > Cross Connection.

The Matrix area displays the existing connections in graphic format.
The List area displays the existing connections in table format (list of all the cross connection).

WARNING Operation available only for equipment with the radio.

2. Select the Tributary-Radio option.
3. Set, in the Tributary box the tributary stream you wish to use for the connection.
4. Only for the equipment in 2x(1+0) radio configuration, set in the 1st Radio and 2nd Radio box, the
radio streams you wish to use for the connection.
378
The list contains all the available radio streams with the exception of the stream set in the other Radio
box.
5. Select the unused channel on tributary side and drag-and-drop it on the unused channel on radio side.
The two channels are linked by a blue line and the name assigned by default to the connection is displayed. If you want, you can Modify the connection label
The number of E1 channels available for the connections changes depending on the equipment type
and on the equipped tributary streams (see Tab.15).
The confirmation makes effective all the changes on the cross-connection matrix.

WARNING Operation available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) radio configuration and if the monitoring status of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH ring is active (see Configurator).

3. Set, in the Tributary box, the tributary stream you wish to use for the connection.
4. Set, in the 1st Radio and 2nd Radio box, the radio streams you wish to use for the connection.
box.
To realize the protected connection, IT IS NECESSARY to set, in box 1st Radio, a stream relevant to a
radio direction and, in box 2nd Radio, a stream relevant to the other radio direction.
For instance, if the stream Radio 1A Permanent E1 has been set in box 1st Radio, you must set the
stream Radio 2A (Radio 2A Permanent E1 or Radio 2A Extra E1) in box 2nd Radio.
5. Select the unused channel on tributary side and drag-and-drop it on the unused channel on radio side
you wish to use for the first branch of the connection.
The two channels are linked by a blue line and the name assigned by default to the connection is displayed. If you want, you can Modify the connection label
6. Select the same tributary channel selected in the previous step, and drag and drop it on the unused
radio channel you wish to use for the second branch of the connection.
The two channels are linked by a blue line and the name assigned by default to the connection is displayed.

WARNING Operation available only for equipment with the radio.

3. Only for the equipment in 2x(1+0) radio configuration, set in the 1st Radio and 2nd Radio box, the
radio streams you wish to use for the connection.
box.
379
4. Select the unused E1 radio channel and drag-and-drop it over a different unused E1 radio channel.
It is possible to select two channels of two different radio streams or of the same radio stream.
The two channels are linked by an orange line and the name assigned by default to the connection is
displayed. If you want, you can Modify the connection label.
(see Tab.15).


2. Select the Tributary-Tributary option.
3. Set, in the 1st Trib and 2nd Trib box, the tributaries streams you wish to use for the connection.
The list contains all the available tributaries with the exception of the tributary set in the other Trib
box.
4. Select the unused tributary channel and drag-and-drop it over a different unused tributary channel.
It is possible to select two channels of two different tributaries or of the same tributary.
The two channels are linked by a blue line and the name assigned by default to the connection is displayed. If you want, you can Modify the connection label.


In the Matrix area, select a channel of the connection you wish to delete and drag-and-drop it
over the trash icon.
If the connection is of type:
Tributary-Tributary, unprotected Tributary-Radio or Pass Through, the connection is deleted.
Protected Tributary-Radio and one of the Radio E1 channel has been moved to the trash:
only the connection side, which the selected Radio E1 belongs to, is deleted.
Protected Tributary-Radio and the channel Tributary VC-12/E1 has been moved to the
trash: the whole connection is deleted.
Repeat the step to delete all the wished connections.

In the List area, active the boxes of the connections you wish to delete.
Press Select All to active all the rows in the table.
Press Delete Selected and confirm.
380


2. In the Matrix area, select the unused tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) or radio
channel (E1 Permanent/E1 Extra) for which you wish to execute the auto-loop.
3. Select the Auto Loop option.
4. Select the Enabled option and press Ok.
A blue line, which closes in loop on the selected channel, and the name assigned by default to the connection are displayed. If you want, you can Modify the connection label.

In the Matrix area, select the tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) or on the
radio channel (E1 Permanent/E1 Extra) with auto-loop enabled (light blue box) for which you
wish to disable the auto-loop.
Select the Auto Loop option.
In the Auto Loop <channel> window, select the Disabled option and press Ok.
The channel changes from used to free (light green box).
In the List area, active the boxes of the Auto-Loop you wish to delete.


2. In the Matrix area, select one of the channels that form the connection.
A box is displayed containing the option Link Label.
If a tributary channel of a protected connection is selected, two options will be available: Primary Link
Label and Secondary Link Label which allow modifying respectively the name of the primary and secondary connections.
3. Select the wished Link Label option.
The parameters Current Value and New Value point out the current name of the connection.
4. Set the new name in the New Value field (alphanumeric string of, at most, 45 characters) and press OK.
381


2. In the Matrix area, select the tributary channels that form the protected Tributary-Radio connection.
3. Select the Path Protection Policy option.
The Path Protection Policy window displays the status and the configuration of the connection:
Switch Status. Operating status of the protected connection.

As depicted in the key, the active link is pointed out by the blue line, the StandBy link by the
pink line.
Active Link Alarms / Standby Link Alarms. Respectively status of the alarms of the active connection and of the StandBy connection.
Preferential Switch. Modality used to manage the preferential connection function for the service:
Auto. In absence of alarms (which cause the switch) a connection is not used in preferential mode.
Radio 1A <E1 radio>.In absence of alarms (which cause the switch) the connection with
the E1 on radio side 1A pointed out by the option is used as preferential.
Radio 2A <E1 radio>. In absence of alarms (which cause the switch) the connection with
the E1 on radio side 2A pointed out by the option is used as preferential.
Forced Switch. Modality used to manage the switch between active and stand-by connections:
Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal
operating modality of the equipment).
Radio 1A <E1 radio>. The equipment is forced to use for the operation the connection
with the E1 on radio side 1A pointed out by the option.
Radio 2A <E1 radio>. The equipment is forced to use for the operation the connection
with the E1 on radio side 2A pointed out by the option.
Wtr Time (min). Time during which a no-alarm condition must persist on the preferential connection so that the service is restored on it.
Primary Radio E1 Type / Secondary Radio E1 Type. Respectively structure of the E1s for the primary and secondary connection:
Not Framed. The Radio E1s have not framed structure.
Framed. The Radio E1s have framed structure.

The Forced Switch parameter indicates the modality used to manage the switch between active and
stand-by connections.
382
Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal operating modality of the equipment).
Radio 1A <E1 radio>. The equipment is forced to use for the operation the connection with the
E1 on radio side 1A pointed out by the option.
Radio 2A <E1 radio>. The equipment is forced to use for the operation the connection with the
E1 on radio side 2A pointed out by the option.
5. Press Apply.
Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the Radio 1A or Radio 2A option) a message warns
that you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.
Forcing the switching activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned on
again, the functioning of the switch is an automatic one without taking into account the preceding setting.


The Preferential Switch parameter indicates the modality used to manage the preferential connection
function for the service.
Auto. In absence of alarms (which cause the switch) a connection is not used in preferential
mode.
Radio 1A <E1 radio>.In absence of alarms (which cause the switch) the connection with the E1
on radio side 1A pointed out by the option is used as preferential.
Radio 2A <E1 radio>. In absence of alarms (which cause the switch) the connection with the E1
on radio side 2A pointed out by the option is used as preferential.


The Wtr Time (Min) parameter indicates the time during which a no-alarm condition must persist on
the preferential connection so that the service is restored on it.
4. To change the parameter, set a value comprised between 0 and 100 minutes.

383

The main connection, after the clearing of the alarms that caused the switch, is immediately used for
the service. The Wtr Time period is considered elapsed.


The Primary Radio E1 Type and Secondary Radio E1 Type parameters point out respectively the structure of the E1s for the primary and secondary connection.
4. To change the parameters, select the specific option:
Not Framed. The Radio E1s have not framed structure.
Framed. The Radio E1s have framed structure.
When a configuration value is selected for the Radio E1s of the Primary Radio E1 Type area, the system
automatically assigns the same value even to the Radio E1s present on the other side of the connection
(Secondary Radio E1 Type) and vice versa.
384
Cross Connection contextual area


The contextual area shows the existing connections of the equipment.
The contextual area is subdivided into the Matrix area and the List area
See also

Matrix area
It is possible to display only one connection at a time moving the pointer on a channel used for the connection you wish to verify.
If are highlighted:
A tributary channel (E1/VC-12) and an E1 radio connected by a blue line, the connection is
of type unprotected Tributary-Radio.
A tributary channel (E1/VC-12) and an E1 radio connected by a blue line, the same tributary
channel and a different E1 radio connected by a blue line, the connection is of type protected
Tributary-Radio.
Two different radio channel connected by a blue line, the connection is of type Pass Through.
Two different tributary channel (E1/VC-12) connected by a blue line, the connection is of
type Tributary-Tributary.
The same tributary channel (E1/VC-12) with a blue line linking the channel itself, the connection is of Auto-Loop type.
The same radio channel with a blue line linking the channel itself, the connection is of AutoLoop type.
Fig.9 shows the description of all the elements present in the Matrix area.
385
Fig.9 Matrix area (Cross Connection contextual area)
(1)
CHANNELS area. This area displays the (tributary and radio) channels provided on the equipment
and grouped by membership streams.
Every channel is represented by a box.
For the E1 channels, the channel number is pointed out in the box.
For the VC-12 channels (Expansion STM-1) the TU12 number is pointed out in the box while the
position of the box identifies the TUG3 and the TUG2 of membership of VC-12.
The status of use of the channel is represented by the colour of the box (see note 3). The currently
selected channel is represented by the yellow box.
The streams displayed in this area change according to the settings made by the user in the View
area (see note 2).
When an used channel is selected, the connection is displayed represented by a blue line with a
yellow rectangle next where the connection name is reported.
If two blue lines ends to the same tributary channel, this means the channel is used for a protected
connection.
A connection is named on its creation by means of a default name composed by the names of the
channels composing the connection separated by /. The default name can be modified by the user.
(2)
VIEW area. The parameters present in the View area determine the streams displayed in the channels area.
If the selected option is:
Tributary-Radio. The Channels area contains two different radio stream ad one tributary
streams.
The top part displays the radio stream pointed out in the 1st Radio box. The bottom part
displays the radio stream pointed out in the 2nd Radio box.
The middle part displays the tributary stream pointed out in the Tributary box.
To change a stream, select the arrow of the specific box and select the new stream from the
list.
The value set in the box 1st Radio will not be available in the list of values of box 2nd Radio
and vice versa.
In the Channels area, the order used to display the Extra E1 Radio depends on the priority
defined by the user (see BW & Mod./Link ID).
386
Tributary-Tributary. The Channels area contains two different tributary streams.

The top part displays the tributary stream pointed out in the 1st Trib box. The bottom part
displays the tributary stream pointed out in the 2nd Trib box.
To change the tributary, select the arrow of the specific box and select the new stream from
the list.
The list contains all the available tributaries with the exception of the tributary set in the other Trib box.
In the Tributary, 1st Trib and 2nd Trib boxes the following values can be present:
E1 (Base+Exp.). E1 channel of the base (Trib. A and B) and expansion.
Expansion STM-1. VC-12 channel of STM-1.

If the management of two STM-1 is active, the values Expansion STM-1 [1] and Expansion
STM-1 [2] will be available, which respectively point out VC-12 channels of the first and of
the second STM-1.
NBUS E1 channel of Nodal Bus.

The available NBUS values change according to the equipment nodal configuration (see
Tab.16).
The availability of the above mentioned values depends on the type of equipment and on the
equipped tributary streams (see Tab.15).
In the 1st Radio and 2nd Radio boxes the following values can be present:
Radio 1A Permanent E1(<radio label>). High priority E1 channels of the Radio 1A.
If more than 63 high priority E1 channels are set, the values Radio 1A Permanent E1 [163]
(<radio label>) (E1 channels 163) and Radio 1A Permanent E1 [64x] (<radio label>) (E1
channels 64x, where x can assume a value between 65 and 80) will be available.
Radio 1A Extra E1(<radio label>). Low priority E1 channels Radio 1A.
Radio 2A Permanent E1(<radio label>). High priority E1 channels of the Radio 2A.
If more than 63 high priority E1 channels are set, the values Radio 2A Permanent E1 [163]
(<radio label>) (E1 channels 163) and Radio 2A Permanent E1 [64x] (<radio label>) (E1
channels 64x, where x can assume a value between 65 and 80) will be available.
Radio 2A Extra E1(<radio label>) Low priority E1 channels Radio 2A.
The Radio 2A value are available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) radio configuration.
If the user moves the pointer over a channel used for a connection and at least one of the (radio/
tributary) streams involved by the connection is not displayed in the cross-connection area, the
View area dynamically displays the connections existing between the channels and the type of connection.
If the equipment is not provided with the radio, the options Tributary-Radio and Tributary-Tributary
are not present in the View area, because in case of absence of the radio the Radio-Tributary or
Pass Through cross-connections cannot be realized as the Radio E1 channels are not available.
In this case, in the View area there will be only the 1st Trib and 2nd Trib boxes. The meaning of the
boxes and the values available for each box are the same described at the beginning of the note.
(3)
(4)
STATUS CHANNELS key. The key indicates the colours that determines the status of the channels:
Dark green (Auto loop req.). The channel has been selected for an Auto-Loop. The apply
command (selection of Apply push-button) has not been transmitted to the equipment yet
(Auto-Loop requested).
Light blue (Auto loop). The channel is used for an Auto-Loop executed on the equipment (real
Auto-Loop).
Light green (Unlinked). The channel is not used.
Purple (Link requested). The channel has been selected for a Tributary-Tributary, Pass
Through or Tributary-Radio connection. The apply command (selection of Apply push-button) has not been transmitted to the equipment yet (connection requested).
Blue (Linked). The channel is used for a Tributary-Tributary, Pass Through or Tributary-Radio
connection executed on the equipment (real connection).
Push-button:
Refresh. Force the reading of the data from the equipment.

If you have made at least one modification, to the choice of the push-button a confirmation
message is displayed. Pressing:
387
Ok. The data present in the area are updated and all the changes made to the connections and not confirmed yet (selection of Apply push-button) are lost.
No. The data present in the area are not updated.
Apply. Make the changes operating.

When it is selected, a confirmation message is displayed. Pressing:
Ok. All the changes made on the matrix are communicated to the controller.
No. The operation is not executed.
(5)
Trash.
(6)
SOH TRANSPORT key. Colour/parameter pointing out the Radio E1 channels (Permanent) when
used for the SOH transport:
Grey box containing

1.
[1].
The channel is used for the transport of SOH bytes of the first STM-
In this condition, the channel cannot be used for the cross-connection.
Grey box containing

STM-1.
[2]
. The channel is used for the transport of SOH bytes of the second
In this condition, the channel cannot be used for the cross-connection.
List area
Fig.10 shows the description of all the elements present in the List area.
Fig.10 List area (Cross Connection contextual area)
1
2
4
5
3
(1)
CONNECTIONS list. Every connection is assigned a row, where is pointed out in the column:
Name. Name of the connection.

On the creation of the connection, a default name is assigned which can be modified later by
the user. The format of the default name is the following: <Channel> / <Linked Channel 1>.
The values which Channel and Linked Channel 1 can assume are the same listed in the next
paragraph.
Channel, Linked Channel 1 and Linked Channel 2. Channels composing the connection:
E1 (Base+Exp.) <E1 number>. E1 channel of the base (Trib. A and B) and expansion.
Expansion STM-1 <TUG3-TUG2-TU12>. VC-12 channel of STM-1.

If the management of two STM-1 is active, the STM-1 which the channel refers to will
be specified:
Expansion STM-1 [1] <TUG3-TUG2-TU12>. VC-12 channel of the first STM-1.
Expansion STM-1 [2] <TUG3-TUG2-TU12>. VC-12 channel of the second STM1.
NBUS <E1 number>. E1 channel of Nodal Bus.

The available NBUS values change according to the equipment nodal configuration
(see Tab.16).
388
Radio <radio branch> Permanent... E1 <E1 number>. High priority Radio E1 channel
of the specific radio direction.
Radio <radio branch> Extra E1 <E1 number>. Low priority Radio E1 channel of the
specific radio direction.
Remember that the connection is a bidirectional path. The table considers a possible direction of the connection (Channel -> Linked Channel) only for clarity of explanation.
The column Linked Channel 2 is meaningful only for the protected Tributary- Radio connections.
(2)
Type. Type of connection:
Standard. Tributary-Tributary connection or unprotected Tributary-Radio connection.
Protection. Protected Tributary-Radio connection.
Pass Through. Pass Through connection.
Auto Loop. Loop of a tributary channel or a radio channel on itself.
When the heading of a column is selected, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing alphanumerical order with respect to the considered column and the arrow with the tip upwards is displayed.
On the next selection, the rows are sorted in decreasing order (the arrow with the tip downwards
is displayed) an so on.
(3)
Push-button:
Refresh. Update the data present in the List area.
Select All. Select all the connections present in the list.
Deselect All. Deselect all the connections present in the list.
Delete Selected. Delete the selected connections.
(4)
Selected connection.
(5)
Not selected connection.
389


TDM matrix
Connection Type
E1 channels
Display of the cross-connections
Creation of a cross-connection
Manual deletion of the cross-connections
Automatic deletion of the cross-connections
TDM matrix
Tab.14 lists the ALCplus2e equipment provided with the TDM matrix for the cross connection of the E1
channels with the Radio E1 channels.
Connection Type
The TDM matrix manages the following types of connection:
Unprotected Tributary-Radio. Single connection between a tributary channel (E1 base-expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) and a Radio E1 (Radio Permanent E1/Radio Extra E1).
In case of equipment without radio the connection is not available.
Pass Through. Single connection between two different E1 Radio channels (Radio Permanent E1/
Radio Extra E1).
In case of equipment without radio the connection is not available.
Tributary-Tributary. Single connection between two different tributary channels (E1 base-expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS).
Auto-Loop. Loop of a tributary channel (E1 base-expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) or a Radio E1
channel (Radio Permanent E1/Radio Extra E1) on itself.
If the equipment is in 2x(1+0) radio configuration the TDM matrix manages also the connection:
Protected Tributary-Radio. Connection between a tributary channel (E1 base-expansion/VC-12
STM-1/E1 NBUS) and one E1 of a radio direction (for instance, Radio 1A Permanent E1 or Radio 1A
Extra E1) and a second connection (acting as protection) between the same tributary channel and
one E1 of the other radio direction (for instance, Radio 2A Permanent E1 or Radio 2A Extra E1).
WARNING If a protected NBUS channel is used for a connection (Tributary-Tributary or Tributary-Radio),
the protection connection for this connection is automatically realized by the matrix.
The protected Nodal Bus is available in ALCplus2e equipment in protected nodal configuration (see Configurator).
E1 channels
The number of E1 channels available for the connections changes depending on the type of equipment and
on the equipped tributary streams (see Tab.15).
390
Tab.15 Ports of the cross-connection matrix
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0

IDUBOARD EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 ONLY 1+0 (PWE3 FUNCTION
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
Port
Stream
E1 (Base+Exp.)
Expansion STM-1
(1)
Configuration
Availability
E1
E1 of the base (tributary A

and B) + 32 E1 of the expansion
Always available
STM-1
63 VC-12 channels
Port/channels available when the

management of STM-1 is active
x E1
Radio 1A Permanent E1 Radio 1A
(<radio label>) (2)
(high priority E1 x = Value of the Permanent TDM Traffic paramechannels)
ter (Radio 1A)
Radio 1A Extra E1
(<radio label>)
Radio 1A
(low priority E1
channels)
Port
Stream
E1
FUNCTION DISABLE)
Configuration
x E1
(<radio label>) (2)
ter (Radio 1A)
Radio 1A Extra E1
(<radio label>)
Radio 1A
(low priority E1
channels)

equipment is provided with radio
and the value x is greater than 0
y E1
y = Value of the parameter equipment is provided with radio
TDM Capacity relevant to and the value y is greater than 0
the ACM profile with the
highest number of E1 (Radio 1A) (3)
IDUBOARD EXP. 16E1 PWE3 ONLY 1+0 (PWE3
E1 (Base+Exp.)
DISABLE)
Availability
Always available

y E1
IDUBOARD EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1

IDUBOARD EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 (PWE3 FUNCTION DISABLE)
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 (PWE3 FUNCTION DISABLE)
Port
Stream
E1 (Base+Exp.)
Expansion STM-1
(1)
Configuration
Availability
E1

Always available
STM-1
63 VC-12 channels

x E1
(<radio label>) (2)
ter (Radio 1A)

391
Port
Stream
Radio 1A Extra E1
(<radio label>)
Radio 1A
(low priority E1
channels)
Configuration
y E1
x E1
(<radio label>) (4)
ter (Radio 2A)
Radio 2A Extra E1
(<radio label>)
Radio 2A
(low priority E1
channels)
Availability
Port/channels available in
2x(1+0) radio configuration and
the value x is greater than 0
y E1
y = Value of the parameter 2x(1+0) radio configuration and
TDM Capacity relevant to the value y is greater than 0
IDUBOARD EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0

IDUBOARD EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
Port
Stream
Configuration
Availability
E1 (Base+Exp.)
E1

Always available
Expansion STM-1 (1)
STM-1
63 VC-12 channels

NBUS
Nodal Bus
The available NBUS ports change according to the equipment

nodal configuration (see Tab.16).
x E1
(<radio label>) (2)
ter (Radio 1A)
Radio 1A Extra E1
(<radio label>)
Radio 1A
(low priority E1
channels)

y E1
IDUBOARD EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1

IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. NOD. 2XSTM-1 16E1
Port
Stream
Configuration
E1 (Base+Exp.)
E1

Always available
Expansion STM-1 (1)
STM-1
63 VC-12 channels

NBUS
Nodal Bus
The available NBUS ports change according to the equipment

nodal configuration (see Tab.16).
x E1
(<radio label>) (2)
ter (Radio 1A)
392
Availability

Port
Radio 1A Extra E1
(<radio label>)
Stream
Radio 1A
(low priority E1
channels)
Configuration
y E1
x E1
(<radio label>) (4)
ter (Radio 2A)
Radio 2A Extra E1
(<radio label>)
Radio 2A
(low priority E1
channels)
Availability
y E1
IDUBOARD EXP. 16E1 PWE3 (PWE3 FUNCTION DISABLE)

IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 16E1 PWE3 (PWE3 FUNCTION DISABLE)
Port
E1 (Base+Exp.)
Stream
E1
Configuration
x E1
(<radio label>) (2)
ter (Radio 1A)
Radio 1A Extra E1
(<radio label>)
Radio 1A
(low priority E1
channels)
Radio 2A
(low priority E1
channels)
Always available

y E1
x E1
(<radio label>) (4)
ter (Radio 2A)
Radio 2A Extra E1
(<radio label>)
Availability
y E1
(1)
If the management of two STM-1 is active, the values Expansion STM-1 [1] and Expansion STM-1 [2]
will be available, which respectively point out VC-12 channels of the first and of the second STM-1.
WARNING The STM-1 is not available if the STM-1 Bulk function is active (see STM1 Bulk Config.).
(2)
If more than 63 high priority E1 channels are set, the values Radio 1A Permanent E1 [1...63] (<radio
label>) (E1 channels 163) and Radio 1A Permanent E1 [64...x] (<radio label>) (E1 channels 64x, where
x can assume a value between 65 and 80) will be available.
(3)
The order used to display the Radio Extra E1 channels depends on the priority defined by the user
(see BW & Mod./Link ID).
(4)
If more than 63 high priority E1 channels are set, the values Radio 2A Permanent E1 [1...63] (<radio
label>) (E1 channels 163) and Radio 2A Permanent E1 [64...x] (<radio label>) (E1 channels 64x, where
x can assume a value between 65 and 80) will be available.
393
Tab.16 NBUS ports of the cross-connection matrix

Nodal system
configuration
TDM nodal
bus
protection
No Nodal
Nodal
(1)
NBUS ports - Cross-connection matrix
NBUS port
Stream
Configuration
Not protected NBUS 1 [163]
Nodal Bus 1
NBUS 1 [64126]
NBUS 2 [163]
63 E1 channels (64126)
Nodal Bus 2
NBUS 2 [64126]
Protected
(1)
NBUS 1 [163]
Protected Nodal Bus 1
63 protected E1 channels
(2)
NBUS 2 [163]
Protected Nodal Bus 2
63 protected E1 channels
(3)
Node Type: Nodal - Nbr of TDM Elements: value different from No Element (see Configurator).
(2)
The first group of 63 E1 channels (163) of the Nodal Bus 1 is protected by the second group of 63 E1
channels (64126) of the Nodal Bus 2. The protection is hard-wired: the first channel of the first group
(E1-1) is protected by the first channel of the second group (E1-64); the second channel of the first group
(E1-2) is protected by the second channel of the second group (E1-65) and so on.
(3)
The first group of 63 E1 channels (163) of the Nodal Bus 2 is protected by the second group of 63 E1
channels (64126) of the Nodal Bus 1. The protection is hard-wired: the first channel of the first group
(E1-1) is protected by the first channel of the second group (E1-64); the second channel of the first group
(E1-2) is protected by the second channel of the second group (E1-65) and so on.
Display of the cross-connections

The user can display the cross-connections existing in equipment as graphic and as table.
In the first case, the tributary and radio streams are graphically displayed (Matrix area - see Fig.9).
When a channel involved by a connection is selected, a line is displayed representing the connection. The
edges of the line point out the channels composing the connection.
In the second case, a table is displayed with the list of the existing cross-connections (List area - see
Fig.10).
Each row of the table represents a connection where the name, the edge channels and the connection type
are pointed out.
Here below the operations which can be performed in the two displays:
394
GRAPHICAL display (Matrix area):
Verify the connections of the equipment (one at a time).
Execute a connection.
Delete one or more connections.
Enable the loop of a channel (Auto-Loop).
Disable an Auto-Loop.
Verify/modify the name of a connection.
TABLE display (List area):
Verify the list of the connections.
Delete one or more connections at the same time.
Disable one or more Auto-Loop.
Verify the name of the connections.
Creation of a cross-connection
All the connections in the TDM matrix must be created by the user (see Execute an unprotected TributaryRadio connection, Execute a protected Tributary-Radio connection, Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection, Enable the closing of a channel on itself (Auto-Loop).
It is possible to create a connection only in the graphical display (Matrix area).
Manual deletion of the cross-connections

It is possible to delete one or more cross-connections from the graphical display of the connections or from
the table display (see Delete one or more connections).
In both cases, the connections removed in a type of display are automatically removed even from the other
type.
Automatic deletion of the cross-connections

The following operations automatically delete the connections where the (tributary or radio) stream, object
of the change, is terminated:
STM-1 configuration change (STM-1 MST Mode parameter - see Configurator). Passage from
the:
1+0, 1+1 MSP, 2 x (1+0) MST or 1+1 MSP No ALS option to the None.
2 x (1+0) MST option to the 1+0, 1+1 MSP or 1+1 MSP No ALS.
TDM nodal Bus configuration change (see Configurator):
Node Type parameter. Passage from the Nodal option to the No Nodal.
Nbr of TDM Elements parameter. Passage from 28 option to the No Elements.
TDM Nodal Bus Protection parameter (node). Passage from the Not Protected option to
the Protected (only connection on NBUS 1 [64126] and NBUS 2 [64126] ports).
Radio configuration change (Radio parameter - see Configurator). Passage from the:
1+0, 1+1 or 2x(1+0) option to the Unequipped.

2x(1+0) option to the 1+0 or 1+1 (only connection on Radio 2).
Configuration change of the E1 Radio - Permanent channel.

All those operations, executed in the Modulation & Capacity tab, which decrease the number of
high priority E1 channels (Permanent TDM Traffic) (see BW & Mod./Link ID).
Configuration change of the E1 Radio - Extra channel.

All those operations, executed in the Modulation & Capacity tab, which decrease the maximum
number of low priority E1 channels (TDM Capacity) (see BW & Mod./Link ID).
All the operations, executed in the tab Extra TDM Priority, which change the order used to discard the dynamic E1 channels from the adaptive modulation (see BW & Mod./Link ID).
When the alarm monitoring for the 2Mbit/s signals is activated through PDH and SDH rings (see Configurator), if the TDM matrix does not contain any protected Tributary-Radio connections, the existing connections are not deleted.
Otherwise, if at least one protected Tributary-radio connection is present, all the connections are deleted.
395
Cross Connection (PWE3 function enable)

WARNING Chapter meaningful only for equipment managing the matrix and with PWE3 function active (see
Tab.14).
Operations
Display the connections of the equipment (PWE3)

Execute a Tributary-PWE3 connection (PWE3)
Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection (PWE3)
Delete one or more connections (PWE3)
Enable the closing of a tributary channel on itself (Auto-Loop) (PWE3)
Disable an Auto-Loop (PWE3)
Modify the connection label (PWE3)
GUI
Cross Connection contextual area (PWE3)

See also
Cross connection matrix (PWE3) (info)

Display the connections of the equipment (PWE3)


The Matrix area (PWE3) displays the existing connections in graphic format.
The List area (PWE3) displays the existing connections in table format (list of all the cross connection).


2. Set, in the 1st Trib or 2nd Trib box, the PWE3 Link value.
3. Set in the other Trib box, the tributary stream you wish to use for the connection (see Tab.17).
4. Select the unused channel on tributary side and drag-and-drop it on the unused channel on PWE3 side.
The two channels are linked by a blue line and the name assigned by default to the connection is displayed. If you want, you can Modify the connection label (PWE3)
396


2. Set, in the 1st Trib and 2nd Trib box, the tributaries streams you wish to use for the connection (see
Tab.17).
The list contains all the available tributaries with the exception of the tributary set in the other Trib
box.
3. Select the unused tributary channel and drag-and-drop it over a different unused tributary channel.
It is possible to select two channels of two different tributaries or of the same tributary.
The two channels are linked by a blue line and the name assigned by default to the connection is displayed. If you want, you can Modify the connection label (PWE3).


In the Matrix area, select a channel of the connection you wish to delete and drag-and-drop it
over the trash icon.
Repeat the step to delete all the wished connections.
In the List area, active the boxes of the connections you wish to delete.

WARNING Operation available only for the tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1).

2. In the Matrix area, select the unused channel for which you wish to execute the auto-loop.
3. Select the Auto Loop option.
4. Select the Enabled option and press Ok.
A blue line, which closes in loop on the selected channel, and the name assigned by default to the connection are displayed. If you want, you can Modify the connection label (PWE3).
397


In the Matrix area, select the tributary channel with auto-loop enabled (light blue box) for which
you wish to disable the auto-loop.
Select the Auto Loop option.
In the Auto Loop <channel> window, select the Disabled option and press Ok.
The channel changes from used to free (light green box).
In the List area, active the boxes of the Auto-Loop you wish to delete.


2. In the Matrix area, select one of the channels that form the connection.
3. Select the Link Label option.
The parameters Current Value and New Value point out the current name of the connection.
4. Set the new name in the New Value field (alphanumeric string of, at most, 45 characters) and press OK.
398
Cross Connection contextual area (PWE3)

Tab.14).
The contextual area shows the existing connections of the equipment.
The contextual area is subdivided into the Matrix area (PWE3) and the List area (PWE3).
See also

Matrix area (PWE3)

It is possible to display only one connection at a time moving the pointer on a channel used for the connection you wish to verify.
If are highlighted:
A tributary channel (E1/VC-12) and a PWE3 channel connected by a blue line, the connection
is of type Tributary-PWE3.
Two different tributary channel (E1/VC-12) connected by a blue line, the connection is of
type Tributary-Tributary.
The same tributary channel (E1/VC-12) with a blue line linking the channel itself, the connection is of Auto-Loop type.
Fig.11 shows the description of all the elements present in the Matrix area.
399
Fig.11 Matrix area (Cross Connection contextual area) (PWE3)
(1)
CHANNELS area. This area displays the (tributary and PWE3) channels provided on the equipment
and grouped by membership streams.
Every channel is represented by a box.
For the E1 and PWE3 channels, the channel number is pointed out in the box.
For the VC-12 channels (Expansion STM-1) the TU12 number is pointed out in the box while the
position of the box identifies the TUG3 and the TUG2 of membership of VC-12.
The status of use of the channel is represented by the colour of the box (see note 3). The currently
selected channel is represented by the yellow box.
The streams displayed in this area change according to the settings made by the user in the View
area (see note 2).
When an used channel is selected, the connection is displayed represented by a blue line with a
yellow rectangle next where the connection name is reported.
A connection is named on its creation by means of a default name composed by the names of the
channels composing the connection separated by /. The default name can be modified by the user.
(2)
VIEW area. The parameters present in the View area determine the streams displayed in the channels area.
The top part displays the tributary or PWE3 stream pointed out in the 1st Trib box. The bottom part
displays the stream pointed out in the 2nd Trib box.
To change the stream, select the arrow of the specific box and select the new value from the list.
The list contains all the available streams, except for that set in the other box.
In the 1st Trib and 2nd Trib boxes the following values can be present:
E1 (Base+Exp.). E1 channels of the base (Trib. A and B) and expansion.
Expansion STM-1. VC-12 channels of STM-1 stream.

If the management of two STM-1 is active, the values Expansion STM-1 [1] and Expansion
STM-1 [2] will be available, which respectively point out VC-12 channels of the first and of
the second STM-1.
PWE3 Link E1 channels of PWE3 stream.
If the user moves the pointer over a channel used for a connection and at least one of the (PWE3/
tributary) streams involved by the connection is not displayed in the cross-connection area, the
400
View area dynamically displays the connections existing between the channels and the type of connection.
(3)
(4)
STATUS CHANNELS key. The key indicates the colours that determines the status of the channels:
Dark green (Auto loop req.). The channel has been selected for an Auto-Loop. The apply
command (selection of Apply push-button) has not been transmitted to the equipment yet
(Auto-Loop requested).
Light blue (Auto loop). The channel is used for an Auto-Loop executed on the equipment (real
Auto-Loop).
Light green (Unlinked). The channel is not used.
Purple (Link requested). The channel has been selected for a Tributary-PWE3 or TributaryTributary connection. The apply command (selection of Apply push-button) has not been
transmitted to the equipment yet (connection requested).
Blue (Linked). The channel is used for a Tributary-PWE3 or Tributary-Tributary connection

executed on the equipment (real connection).
Push-button:
Refresh. Force the reading of the data from the equipment.

If you have made at least one modification, to the choice of the push-button a confirmation
message is displayed. Pressing:
Ok. The data present in the area are updated and all the changes made to the connections and not confirmed yet (selection of Apply push-button) are lost.
No. The data present in the area are not updated.
Apply. Make the changes operating.

When it is selected, a confirmation message is displayed. Pressing:
Ok. All the changes made on the matrix are communicated to the controller.
No. The operation is not executed.
(5)
Trash.
(6)
Area not meaningful in this context.
List area (PWE3)

Fig.12 shows the description of all the elements present in the List area.
Fig.12 List area (Cross Connection contextual area) (PWE3)
1
2
4
5
3
(1)
CONNECTIONS list. Every connection is assigned a row, where is pointed out in the column:
Name. Name of the connection.

On the creation of the connection, a default name is assigned which can be modified later by
the user. The format of the default name is the following: <Channel> / <Linked Channel 1>.
401
The values which Channel and Linked Channel 1 can assume are the same listed in the next
paragraph.
Channel, Linked Channel 1. Channels composing the connection:
E1 (Base+Exp.) <E1 number>. E1 channel of the base (Trib. A and B) and expansion.
Expansion STM-1 <TUG3-TUG2-TU12>. VC-12 channel of STM-1.

If the management of two STM-1 is active, the STM-1 which the channel refers to will
be specified:
Expansion STM-1 [1] <TUG3-TUG2-TU12>. VC-12 channel of the first STM-1.
Expansion STM-1 [2] <TUG3-TUG2-TU12>. VC-12 channel of the second STM1.
PWE3 Link <channel number>. E1 channel PWE3 stream.
Remember that the connection is a bidirectional path. The table considers a possible direction of the connection (Channel -> Linked Channel) only for clarity of explanation.
The column Linked Channel 2 is not meaningful in this context.
(2)
Type. Type of connection:
Standard. Tributary-PWE3 connection or Tributary-Tributary connection.
Auto Loop. Loop of a tributary channel on itself.
When the heading of a column is selected, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing alphanumerical order with respect to the considered column and the arrow with the tip upwards is displayed.
On the next selection, the rows are sorted in decreasing order (the arrow with the tip downwards
is displayed) an so on.
(3)
402
Push-button:
Refresh. Update the data present in the List area.
Select All. Select all the connections present in the list.
Deselect All. Deselect all the connections present in the list.
Delete Selected. Delete the selected connections.
(4)
Selected connection.
(5)
Not selected connection.

Tab.14 and PWE3 function (info).
Matrix (PWE3)
Connection Type (PWE3)
E1 channels (PWE3)
Display of the cross-connections (PWE3)
Creation of a cross-connection (PWE3)
Manual deletion of the cross-connections (PWE3)
Automatic deletion of the cross-connections (PWE3)
Matrix (PWE3)
For ALCplus2e equipment with one of the following expansions, when the PWE3 function is active, a
matrix is available for the cross connection of the tributary E1 channels to the E1 channels of the PWE3
stream:
WARNING For the same equipment, when the PWE3 function is inactive, a matrix is available for the
cross connection of the tributary E1 channels to the Radio E1 channels (see Tab.14).
Connection Type (PWE3)

The matrix manages the following types of connection:
Tributary-PWE3. Single connection between a tributary channel (E1 base-expansion/VC-12 STM1) and a PWE3 channel.
Tributary-Tributary. Single connection between two different tributary channels (E1 base-expansion/VC-12 STM-1).
Auto-Loop. Loop of a tributary channel (E1 base-expansion/VC-12 STM-1 on itself.
E1 channels (PWE3)
Tab.17 displays the number of E1 channels available.
Tab.17 Ports of the cross-connection matrix (PWE3)
Port
Stream
Configuration
Availability
E1 (Base+Exp.)
E1

Always available
Expansion STM-1
STM-1
63 VC-12 channels
Port/channels available when the management of one STM-1 is active (1)
Expansion STM-1 [1]
STM-1
63 VC-12 channels
Expansion STM-1 [2]
STM-1
63 VC-12 channels
Port/channels available when the management of 2 STM-1 is active (1)
PWE3 Link
PWE3
32 PWE3 E1 channels
(1)
Always available
See Configurator.
403
Display of the cross-connections (PWE3)

The user can display the cross-connections existing in equipment as graphic and as table.
In the first case, the tributary and PWE3 streams are graphically displayed (Matrix area - see Fig.11).
When a channel involved by a connection is selected, a line is displayed representing the connection. The
edges of the line point out the channels composing the connection.
In the second case, a table is displayed with the list of the existing cross-connections (List area - see
Fig.12).
Each row of the table represents a connection where the name, the edge channels and the connection type
are pointed out.
Here below the operations which can be performed in the two displays:
GRAPHICAL display (Matrix area):
Verify the connections of the equipment (one at a time).
Execute a connection.
Delete one or more connections.
Enable the loop of a channel (Auto-Loop).
Disable an Auto-Loop.
Verify/modify the name of a connection.
TABLE display (List area):
Verify the list of the connections.
Delete one or more connections at the same time.
Disable one or more Auto-Loop.
Verify the name of the connections.
Creation of a cross-connection (PWE3)

All the connections in the matrix must be created by the user (see Execute a Tributary-PWE3 connection
(PWE3), Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection (PWE3), Enable the closing of a tributary channel on itself (Auto-Loop) (PWE3).
It is possible to create a connection only in the graphical display (Matrix area).
Manual deletion of the cross-connections (PWE3)

It is possible to delete one or more cross-connections from the graphical display of the connections or from
the table display (see Delete one or more connections (PWE3).
In both cases, the connections removed in a type of display are automatically removed even from the other
type.
Automatic deletion of the cross-connections (PWE3)

The following operations automatically delete the connections where the (tributary or PWE3) stream, object of the change, is terminated:
404
STM-1 configuration change (STM-1 MST Mode parameter - see Configurator). Passage from
the:
1+0, 1+1 MSP, 2 x (1+0) MST or 1+1 MSP No ALS option to the None.
2 x (1+0) MST option to the 1+0, 1+1 MSP or 1+1 MSP No ALS.
Deletion of PWE3 channel or of the relevant Bundle PWE3 (see PWE3).
Disabling of PWE3 function (PWE3 parameter - see Configurator). In this case, all the connections are deleted.
Change of the radio configuration (Radio parameter - see Configurator) which determines the
deletion of bundles/PWE3 channels (see Tab.18).
Tab.18 Change of radio configuration which involves the deletion of the connections (PWE3)
From
Change
To
(1)
1+1 HS (2)
2x(1+0) SP (3) 2x(1+0) DP (4)
Unequipped
1+0
1+1 FD
Unequipped
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1+0
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
1+1 FD
(1)
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
1+1 HS
(2)
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
2x(1+0) SP
(3)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2x(1+0) DP
(4)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes. The Tributary-PWE3 connections are deleted after the deletion of Bundle/PWE3 channels.
No. The Tributary-PWE3 connections are not deleted.
(1)
1+1 Freq. Div.
(2)
1+1 Hot Standby.
(3)
(4)
405
Radio E1 Framing
WARNING Command available only for equipment in one of the following configurations:
Radio configuration 1+0, 1+1 Hot Standby or 1+1 Freq. Div., with the management of STM-1
active and with the transport of the PDH alarms in the SDH frame enabled (see Configurator).
Radio configuration 2x(1+0).
Command not available if the PWE3 function is enable (see Configurator).

The Radio E1 Framing command manages the structure of the Radio E1s.
Operations
Verify/modify the structure of the Radio E1s

GUI
Radio E1 Framing contextual area

1. Select Base Band > Radio E1 Framing.

The Radio E1 Framing contextual area displays the structure of the Radio E1s.
2. To change the structure of a E1 Radio group, in its area, press:
406
Set All E1 As Framed and confirm. The specific E1 Radio group is configured with the framed
structure.
Set All E1 As Unframed and confirm. The specific E1 Radio group is configured with the unframed structure.
Radio E1 Framing contextual area

The contextual area displays the structure of E1 radio.
Parameters
Radio 1A - Permanent E1. Structure of E1 Radio assigned permanently (high priority streams)
to the Radio 1A.
Area available when the equipment is provided with radio and the Permanent TDM Traffic parameter is greater than 0 (see BW & Mod./Link ID).
Radio 1A - Extra E1. Structure of E1 Radio (low priority) to the Radio 1A.
Area available when the equipment is provided with radio and the parameter TDM Capacity relevant to the ACM profile with the highest number of E1, is greater than 0.
Radio 2A - Permanent E1. Structure of E1 Radio assigned permanently (high priority streams)
to the Radio 2A.
Area available when the equipment is in 2x(1+0) radio configuration and the Permanent TDM
Traffic parameter is greater than 0.
Radio 2A - Extra E1. Structure of E1 Radio (low priority) to the Radio 2A.
Area available when the equipment is in 2x(1+0) radio configuration and the parameter TDM
Capacity relevant to the ACM profile with the highest number of E1, is greater than 0.
Status. In every area, the parameter indicates the number of available specific Radio E1. For
every channel, the:
Inactive box (
Active box (
) indicates that the Radio E1 has not the structure framed.

) indicates that the Radio E1 has the structure framed.
Push-button

Set All E1 As Framed. Configure with the framed structure, the specific E1 Radio group.
Set All E1 As Unframed. Configure with the unframed structure, the specific E1 Radio group.
See also
407
PWE3
WARNING Command available only if active the PWE3 function (see Configurator).
The PWE3 command manages the PWE3 Bundle and the PWE3 channels.
The term Bundle PWE3 stands for an entity used as CES profile (Circuit Emulation Service).
Operations
Verify the existing PWE3 Bundles and PWE3 channels

Create a PWE3 Bundle
Activate the Provider modality for all the Bundles
Deactivate the Provider modality for all the Bundles
Modify the configuration of a PWE3 Bundle
Delete a PWE3 Bundle
Associate one or more PWE3 channels to a Bundle
Modify the configuration of a PWE3 channel
Delete one or more PWE3 channel
GUI
PWE3 contextual area

See also
Verify the existing PWE3 Bundles and PWE3 channels

1. Select Base Band > PWE3.

The PWE3 contextual area shows the PWE3 Bundles and the PWE3 channels associated to every single
Bundle.
Create a PWE3 Bundle

WARNING A maximum of 16 or 32 PWE3 Bundles can be created depending on the IDU type (see PWE3
function (info).
2. Press Add next to the left of the area Bundle Properties (see Fig.13).
If the button is not available, this means that the maximum number of available Bundles has already
been created. In this case, it is first necessary to Delete a PWE3 Bundle.
3. Type, in the box Bundle Label, the name you wish to assign to the Bundle: alphanumeric string (0-9 AZ a-z - _) of 32 characters at most.
4. Type, in the box Destination MAC, the univocal address of the equipment which must receive the PWE3
packets of the specific Bundle (destination MAC address) in hexadecimal format, separating each octet
by colon (example 00:08:74:4C:7F:1D).
408
5. Set, in the box Transport Type, the technology used to transport the PWE3 packets of the Bundle in the
network:
mef8. Ethernet protocol (CES over Ethernet - MEF8).
mpls. MPLS protocol (CES over PSN RFC 5086).
ipv4-udp. IPv4 protocol with UDP (CES over PSN RFC 5086).
ipv6-udp. IPv6 protocol with UDP (CES over PSN RFC 5086).
6. Type, in the box CTag, the C-VID identifier (between 2 and 4094) present in the Tag VLAN of the Customer VLAN which transports the PWE3 packets of the specific Bundle.
Set an identifier different for each Bundle. Moreover the value must be different from that set as default
identifier of the Ethernet ports (Default Vid) and as identifier of the management VLANs, of the VLANs
used for the Ring Protection modality or of the traffic VLANs (see Virtual Lan Config. tab).
7. In the area VLAN Destination, activate the boxes ( ) relevant to the ports you wish to enable to the
transit of the PWE3 packets with identifier (S-VID and/or C-VID) equal to that of the VLAN reserved to
the specific PWE3 service.
8. Only if you are creating a Bundle with Transport Type equal to ipv4-udp or ipv6-udp, set in the box:
Destination IP, the IP address of the addressee of the PWE3 packet of the specific Bundle.
Source IP, the IP address of the sender of the PWE3 packets of the specific Bundle.
Set, in the boxes, a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0 if IPv4 or from 0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0 if IPv6) in the
format relevant to the selected type of transport (IPv4 o IPv6).
The same value cannot be set in both the boxes.
9. Press OK and confirm.
The new Bundle is inserted in the list.
The right part of the area (see Fig.13) indicates the Bundle configuration parameters which change according to the type of selected transport.
Some parameters are those defined at the creation, other parameters are automatically set to the default value which can be changed by the user (see Modify the configuration of a PWE3 channel).

WARNING The management of the Bundles in Provider modality must be activated if the local PWE3 traffic
must be sent into a Provider cloud. In this condition, all the PWE3 Bundles are forwarded into a single Service VLAN.
The operation involves the automatic creation, in the VLAN Table (see Common Parameters), of a single
VLAN with ID equal to the S-VID value which all the PWE3 Bundle are forwarded to (Service VLAN). If some
VLANs relevant to already existing PWE3S Bundles (Customer VLANs) are present in the VLAN Table, they
will be automatically deleted.
When the modality is active, the user can change, as he wishes, the S-VID identifier and the relevant priority.
2. Activate the check-box Enable STag (
).
3. Type, in the box STag, the S-VID identifier (between 2 and 4094) present in the Tag VLAN of the Service VLAN which transports the PWE3 packets of all the Bundles.
Set an identifier different from that set as default identifier of the Ethernet ports (Default Vid) and as
identifier of the management VLAN, of the VLANs used for the Ring Protection modality or of the traffic
VLANs (see Virtual Lan Config. tab).
4. Type, in the box S_PCP, the priority 802.1p present in the Tag VLAN of the Service VLAN which transports the PWE3 packets of all the Bundles.
409

User Profile | Station Operator, SystemAccess | Read & Write
WARNING The operation involves the automatic deletion from the VLAN Table (see Common Parameters)
of the Service VLAN and the automatic creation of one VLAN for each PWE3 Bundle with ID equal to the CVID value associated to every single Bundle (Customer VLAN).
1. Select the Base Band > PWE3.

2. Deactivate the check-box Enable STag (
).


2. Select the PWE3 Bundle you wish to modify (see Fig.13).
3. To modify the name of the Bundle, type in the box Bundle Label an alphanumeric string (0-9 A-Z a-z
- _) of 32 characters at most.
4. To modify the destination MAC address, type in the box Destination MAC the address in hexadecimal
format separating every octet by a colon (example 00:08:74:4C:7F:1D).
5. To modify the clock recovery modality for TMD service, set in the box Clock Recovery Type the value:
adaptive-noRtp. Modality Adaptive Recovery Mode. In this modality, the synchronization of the
packets is not made by means of a common clock. The clock for the TMD service is extracted
from DPLL processing the information on the packetss arrival.
differential-Rtp. Modality Differential Clock Recovery. In this modality, the synchronization of

the packets is made by means of a common clock. The clock for the TMD service is extracted
from DPLL processing the Time Stamp information contained in the heading RTP of the packets
in input and queued in the relevant Time Stamp of FIFO.
Parameter available only if the synchronization management is enabled (see Configurator).

6. To modify the size (expressed in bytes) of the payload of the PWE3 packet, type a value between 38
and 1024 into the box Payload Size (B).
The value must correspond to the size of the data field without the heading bytes and CRC.
7. To modify the technology used to transport the PWE3 packets of the Bundle, set in the box Transport
Type the value:
mef8. Protocol Ethernet (CES over Ethernet - MEF8).
mpls. Protocol MPLS (CES over PSN RFC 5086).
ipv4-udp. Protocol IPv4 with UDP (CES over PSN RFC 5086).
Before modifying the value from mef8 or mpls to ipv4-udp or ipv6-udp, verify that the identifier of the
channels associated to the Bundle (ECID or MPLS Inner Label) is not greater than 65535 (maximum
limit for UDP Dest Port). If this value exceeds the indicated limit, it is necessary to decrease it in order
to perform the operation.
8. To modify the priority 802.1p present in the Tag VLAN of the Customer VLAN which transports the
PWE3 packets of the specific Bundle, set in the box C_PCP a value between 0 and 7 (0 = lowest priority,
7 = highest priority).
WARNING The priority of VLAN PWE3 is managed on 802.1p basis independently from the used Transport Type and defined by the parameter C_PCP of the Bundle both on Radio side and on LAN side.
9. To modify the interval (expressed in ms) allowed as delay in the reception of the packet (PDV), set in
the box Packet Delay Variation (ms) a value between 1 and 16 ms.
10.To modify the identifier C-VID of the Customer VLAN which transports the PWE3 packets of the specific
Bundle, type a value between 2 and 4094 in the box CTag.
410
Set a different identifier for the different Bundles. Moreover the value must be different from that set
as default identifier of the Ethernet ports (Default Vid) and as identifier of the management VLAN, of
the VLANs used for the Ring Protection modality or of the traffic VLAN (see Virtual Lan Config. tab).
11.To modify the ports of the Ethernet Switch enabled to the transit of the PWE3 packets with identifier
(S-VID and/or C-VID) equal to that of the VLAN reserved to the specific PWE3 service, set the relevant
check-boxes in the area VLAN Destination:
Check-box active ( ), the port is enabled to the transit of the PWE3 packets with identifier
equal to that of the VLAN.
Check-box deactivated ( ), the port is not enabled to the transit of the PWE3 packets with identifier equal to that of the VLAN.
It is not possible to deactivate all the check-boxes.

12.Only for Bundles with Transport Type: mpls, to modify:
The external label (label of PSN tunnel) of the MLPS packets transported by the specific
PWE3 Bundle, set a value between 0 and 1048575 in the box MPLS Outer Label.
The value of the EXP field (Experimental bits) in the label MPLS used by the PWE3 packets
transported by the specific Bundle, set a value between 0 and 7 in the box MPLS Exp Priority.
Parameter available only if a Bundle with Transport Type: mpls is selected.
13.Only for Bundles with Transport Type: pv4-udp or ipv6-udp, to modify:
The DSCP value (Differentiated Services Code Point) inserted in the header of the IP packets
transported by the specific PWE3 Bundle, set a value between 0 and 63 in the box DSCP Priority.
The IP address of the addressee of the packet present in the header of the IP packet, set in
the box Destination IP a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0 if IPv4 or from 0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0 if
IPv6) in the format relevant to the type of selected transport (IPv4 or IPv6).
The IP address of the sender of the packet present in the heading of the IP packet, set in the
box Source IP a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0 if IPv4 or from 0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0 if IPv6) in the
format relevant to the type of selected transport (IPv4 or IPv6)
It is not possible to set the same value in the boxes Destination IP and Source IP.
The confirmation makes all the changes on the Bundle configuration effective.
WARNING If, before confirming the changes, a different Bundle is selected, a message asks if continuing the operation because the change of Bundle involves the loss of all the changes made and not confirmed yet.
Delete a PWE3 Bundle


2. Select the PWE3 Bundle you wish to delete.
The Bundle is removed from the list.
The channel(s) PWE3 associated to the Bundle will be available to be associated to a new Bundle.
Associate one or more PWE3 channels to a Bundle


WARNING More PWE3 channels can be associated to the same Bundle, from which they inherit the config-
uration parameters.
411
One PWE3 channel cannot be associated to two different Bundle.

On the whole, it is possible to associate to PWE3 Bundles a maximum number of channels equal to the
Ethernet capacity actually available.
2. Select the PWE3 Bundle which you wish to associate the channels to (see Fig.13).
The Bundle Channels area displays the channels already associated to the Bundle. If the table is empty,
it means that no channel is associated to the Bundle.
3. Press Add.
If the button is not available, it means that all the PWE3 channels are already associated to a Bundle.
In this case, it is first necessary to Delete one or more PWE3 channel
The Add Channels window lists the available channels (channels not associated to a Bundle yet). For
each channel, is indicated in the column:
Channel Label. The default channel name with the following format: PWE3 channel <channel
identifying number>.
<Identifier>. Channel identifying number.

The value and the heading of the column change according to the technology used to transport
the PWE3 packets relevant to the Bundle which the channel is associated to. Heading:
ECID. The channel is associated to a Bundle which uses the Ethernet protocol (MEF8).
The channel identifying number is equal to the value of the ECID (Emulated Circuit
Identifier) field of the Ethernet packets carried by the specific PWE3 channel.
MPLS Inner Label. The channel is associated to a Bundle which uses the MPLS protocol.
The channel identifying number is equal to the inner label (PW label) of the MLPS
packets carried by the specific PWE3 channel.
UDP Dest. Port. The channel is associated to a Bundle which uses the protocol IPv4
or IPv6 with UDP.
The channel identifying number is equal to the number of the port on the host of the
addressee present in the UDP packets carried by the specific PWE3 channel.
4. Activate (
) the check-boxes relevant to the channels you wish to associate to the Bundle.
Activating the check-box present in the table heading, all the channels in the list are automatically activated.
5. For each channel, modify the name and the identifier as indicated below:
Name of PWE3 channel:
Double click on the box (column Channel Label) relevant to the wished channel.
Type an alphanumeric string (0-9 A-Z a-z - _) of 32 characters at most in the box.
Identifier of PWE3 channel:
Double click on the box (column ECID, MPLS Inner Label or UDP Dest. Port) relevant to
the wished channel.
Type a value between 0 and 1048575 (ECID, MPLS Inner Label) or between 0 and 65535
(UDP Dest. Port) in the box.
The same value cannot be assigned to two different channels associated to the same Bundle.
6. Press OK and confirm.
The channels are inserted in the Bundle Channels area.
If the message New settings are failed, check if there are some classifiers duplicates or if the Bandwidth
not enough, the operation fails because an identifier already in use has been set or the number of PWE3
channels you wish to equip exceeds the Ethernet capacity actually available.


2. Select the PWE3 Bundle which the channel you wish to modify is associated to (see Fig.13).
412
It is possible to modify the name, the identifier and the Retiming function for every single channel, as
indicated below:
Name of PWE3 channel:
Double click on the box (column Channel Label) relevant to the wished channel.
Type an alphanumeric string (0-9 A-Z a-z - _) of 32 characters at most in the box.
Identifier of PWE3 channel:
Double click on the box (column ECID, MPLS Inner Label or UDP Dest. Port) relevant to
the wished channel.
Type a value between 0 and 1048575 (ECID, MPLS Inner Label) or between 0 and 65535
(UDP Dest. Port) in the box.
The same value cannot be assigned to two different channels associated to the same Bundle.
Activation status of the Retiming function of the tributary connected to PWE3 channel:
Double click on the box (column Retiming) relevant to the wished channel.
Select the value:
Disable to disable the Retiming function.
Enable to activate the Retiming function.
The Retiming function allows using the frequency of E1 tributary carrying the traffic for synchronization purpose in any operating condition of the radio transport (ACM enabled).
Press Revert changes to cancel all the changes made and not communicated to the equipment yet.
The changes are confirmed in the Bundle Channels area.
If the message New settings are failed, check if there are some classifiers duplicates... is displayed, the
operation has failed because an identifier already used has been set.
Delete one or more PWE3 channel


2. Select the PWE3 Bundle which the channels are associated to (see Fig.13).
3. In the Bundle Channels area, select the PWE3 channels you wish to delete.
The channel is removed from the list. It will be available to be associated to a new Bundle.
413
PWE3 contextual area

The contextual area displays the PWE3 Bundle and the PWE3 channels assigned to every single Bundle.
It is possible to display the configuration and the PWE3 channels relevant to one single Bundle at a time
(Bundle currently selected). To display the configuration of a different Bundle, it is sufficient to select it.
Fig.13 displays the description of all the items present in the contextual area.
Fig.13 PWE3 contextual area
1
2
3
(1)
(2)
Push-buttons:
Apply. Confirms the changes.
Refresh. Updates the context.
Help. Opens the help on line.
Area Bundle PWE3. This area shows the list of the created PWE3 Bundles.
Every row corresponds to a Bundle identified by the name assigned to the Bundle by the user.
The configuration of the currently selected Bundle is displayed in the Bundle Properties area, while
the channels associated to the Bundle are displayed in the Bundle Channels area.
The push-button:
(3)
Add, allows to Create a PWE3 Bundle.
Remove, allows to Delete a PWE3 Bundle.
Area Bundle Properties (common parameters). This area contains the parameters common to
the PWE3 Bundles:
414
Enable STag. Management of the Bundle PWE3 (VLAN res. pwe3) in Provider modality (modality to activate if the local PWE3 traffic must be sent into a Provider cloud). Check-box:
Active (
dles.
). The Provider modality (Double Tag active) is active for all the PWE3 Bun-
Deactivated ( ). The Provider modality (Double Tag active) is deactivated for all the
PWE3 Bundles.
(4)
STag. S-VID identifier present in Tag VLAN of the Service VLAN carrying all the PWE3 packets. Parameter meaningful when the Provider modality is active.
S_PCP. Value of priority 802.1p present in Tag VLAN of the Service VLAN carrying all the
PWE3 packets. Parameter meaningful when the Provider modality is active.
Source MAC. Source MAC address: univocal address of the local equipment which has generated the PWE3 packets. Read-only parameter.
Area Bundle Properties (selected Bundle parameters). This area contains only the parameters
relevant to the configuration of the selected PWE3 Bundle only:
Bundle Label. Name of the Bundle.
Destination MAC. Destination MAC address: univocal address of the equipment which has to
receive the PWE3 packet of the specific Bundle.
Clock Recovery Type. Clock recovery mode for the TMD service:
adaptive-noRtp. Modality Adaptive Recovery Mode. In this modality, the synchronization of the packets is not performed by means of a common clock. The clock for the
TMD service is extracted from DPLL processing the packet arrival information.
differential-Rtp. Modality Differential Clock Recovery. In this modality, the synchronization of the packets is performed by means of a common clock. The clock for the
TMD service is extracted from DPLL processing the Time Stamp information contained
in the RTP heading of the packets in input and queued in the relevant Time Stamp of
FIFO.
Parameter available and meaningful only if the synchronization management is enabled (see
Configurator).
Payload Size (B). Size (expressed in bytes) of the payload of PWE3 packet.
The value must match the size data field without the heading bytes and CRC.
Transport Type. Technology used to transport the PWE3 packets in the network:
mef8. Protocol Ethernet (CES over Ethernet - MEF8).
mpls. Protocol MPLS (CES over PSN RFC 5086).
C_PCP. Value of priority 802.1p present in Tag VLAN of the Customer VLAN carrying the
PWE3 packets of the specific Bundle.
The priority of PWE3 VLANs is managed on 802.1p basis independently from the used Transport Type and defined by the parameter C_PCP of the Bundle both on Radio side and on LAN
side.
Packet Delay Variation (ms). Interval (expressed in ms) allowed as delay in the reception of
the packet (PDV).
CTag. C-VID identifier (Customer VLAN Identifier) present in Tag VLAN of the Customer
VLAN carrying the PWE3 packets of the specific Bundle.
DSCP Priority. Value of DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) inserted in the heading of
the IP packets carried by the specific PWE3 Bundle.
Parameter available only if a Bundle with Transport Type: ipv4-udp or ipv6-udp is selected.
MPLS Outer Label. Outer label (PSN tunnel label) of the MLPS packets carried by the specific
PWE3 Bundle.
MPLS Exp Priority. Value of EXP (Experimental bits) field in the MPLS label used by the PWE3
packets carried by the specific Bundle.
VLAN Destination. Status of the ports of the Ethernet Switch in relation to the transit of the
PWE3 packets with identifier (S-VID and/or C-VID) equal to that of the VLAN reserved to the
specific PWE3 service. For each port, the check-box:
Active ( ), indicates that the port is enabled to the transit of the PWE3 packet with
identifier equal to that of the VLAN.
Deactivated ( ), indicates that the port is not enabled to the transit of the PWE3
packet with identifier equal to that of the VLAN.
Destination IP. IP address of the addressee of the packet, present in the header of the IP
packet.
415
Source IP. IP address of the sender of the packet, present in the header of the IP packet.
(5)
Area Bundle Channels. This area contains the PWE3 channels associated to the PWE3 Bundle currently selected.
Every channel corresponds to a table row, for which is indicated:
Channel Label. Name of the PWE3 channel.
<Identifier>. Channel identifying number.

The value and the heading of the column change according to the technology used to transport the PWE3 packets relevant to the Bundle which the channel is associated to. Heading:
ECID. The channel is associated to a Bundle which uses the Ethernet protocol (MEF8).
The channel identifying number is equal to the value of the ECID (Emulated Circuit
Identifier) field of the Ethernet packets carried by the specific PWE3 channel.
MPLS Inner Label. The channel is associated to a Bundle which uses the MPLS protocol.
The channel identifying number is equal to the inner label (PW label) of the MLPS
packets carried by the specific PWE3 channel.
UDP Dest. Port. The channel is associated to a Bundle which uses the protocol IPv4
or IPv6 with UDP.
The channel identifying number is equal to the number of the port on the host of the
addressee present in the UDP packets carried by the specific PWE3 channel.
Retiming. Activation status of Retiming function of the tributary connected to PWE3 channel.
The function allows using the frequency of E1 tributary carrying the traffic for synchronization purpose in any operating condition of the radio transport (ACM enabled). Value:
Disable. The Retiming function is deactivated.
Enable. The Retiming function is active.
Loc. TDM down. Status of the alarm PWE3: Local TDM Down channel <channel name> (local
alarm TDM-AIS on carried E1 tributary):
On - red, orange, yellow, light blue or green box. Active alarm which the severity Critical, Major, Minor, Warning is respectively associated to or signal Status.
Off - white box. Inactive or disabled alarm (see Alarm Severity Config.).
Loc. Psn down. Status of the alarm PWE3: Local PSN Down channel <channel name> (local
alarm on PSN tunnel):
Off - white box. Inactive or disabled alarm.
Rem. TDM down. Status of the alarm PWE3: Remote TDM Down channel <channel name>:
The alarm activates if the remote equipment receives the signal (via PWE3 packets) that the
local equipment has activated the alarm Local Tdm Down.
Rem. Psn down. Status of the alarm PWE3: Remote PSN Down channel <channel name>:
The alarm activates if the remote equipment receives the signal (via PWE3 packets) that the
local equipment has activated the alarm Local Psn Down.
Sync status. Synchronization status of the channel:
unlocked. Transitory status: the equipment is locking the synchronism.
locked. The equipment has found the synchronism and operates with frequency and
phase locked to PWE3 traffic.
unlocked-holdover. The equipment is not receiving PWE3 packets and cannot lock to
any data source; in this condition, it generates an AIS signal in output.
locked-holdover. The equipment is receiving correct PWE3 packets, but the payload
content is empty (AIS).
The push-button:
416
Add, allows to Associate one or more PWE3 channels to a Bundle.
Remove, allows to Delete one or more PWE3 channel.
Revert changes, allows to cancel the changes made and not confirmed yet.
See also

417

The PWE3 function allows implementing, in ALCplus2e equipment, a mechanism for the emulation of a native service through a Packet Switched Networks (PSN) according to the model PWE3 (PseudoWire Emulation Edge-to-Edge) as described in RFC 3985.
The supported native service is TDM (Time Division Multiplexing) according to RFC 4553 - Structure-Agnostic Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) over Packet (SAToP), while the packet network for the transport
of the PWE3 packet can be in accordance with standard Ethernet (MEF8), MPLS or IP with UDP (IPv4 or
IPv6).
IDU with PWE3 function
The PWE3 function is available only for equipment of type (see Equipment Units tab):
a. IduBoard Exp. 16E1 PWE3
b. IduBoard Exp. 16E1 PWE3 Only 1+0
c. IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1 PWE3
d. IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
e. IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 Only 1+0
f. IduBoard Xpic Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
Activate the PWE3 function
For the IDUs listed above, the PWE3 function must be activated by the user (see Verify/
modify the management of the PWE3 function).
It is possible to activate the PWE3 function only if the equipment has the following configuration:
Ethernet functionality of Enhanced type enabled (see Configurator tab).
Equipment not belonging to any node (see Configurator tab).
Function STM-1 Bulk inactive (see STM1 Bulk Config.).
The activation of PWE3 function involves that:
The PM measures G828 E1 Line Side and G828 E1 Internal Side are not longer available.
The command Radio E1 Framing is not longer available.
The command STM1 Bulk Config. is not longer available.
The static Radio E1 channels (Permanent TDM Traffic) are automatically reset.
The dynamic Radio E1 channels (TDM Capacity) are automatically reset.
The Extra TDM Priority tab to display/modify the priority of the dynamic E1 (TDM Capacity) is not longer available.
The monitoring of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signals through PDH and SDH rings, if
active, is automatically deactivated (see Configurator).
The transport of the SOH bytes on a Radio E1 channel (see Lim A STM-1 [x]), if active,
is automatically deactivated and the relevant SOH Transport tab will be not longer
available.
The E1 re-timing function, if active, is automatically deactivated (see Synchronisation) and the relevant E1 Retiming tab will be not longer available.
Deactivate the PWE3 function
The user can deactivate the PWE3 function in any moment (see Verify/modify the management
of the PWE3 function).
The operation involves the deletion of all the PWE3 Bundles.
Implement the PWE3 function
Once the PWE3 has been activated, it is necessary:

1. Define the PWE3 Bundles
The term PWE3 Bundle stands for an entity equivalent to CES (Circuit Emulation Service).
The PWE3 Bundles must be created by the user (see Create a PWE3 Bundle). A maximum of
16 or 32 PWE3 Bundles can be created depending on the IDU type (see step 4).
418
On the Bundle creation, the user must define the basic configuration of the Bundle: name,
destination MAC address, type of transport (MEF8, MPLS, IPv4 o IPv6), C-VID, ports of the
Switch enabled to the transit of the PWE3 packet and source and destination IP address (for
Bundles with IP transport only).
Then, the basic parameters and even the following parameters, set to the default value on
the Bundle creation, can be modified (see Modify the configuration of a PWE3 Bundle): clock
recovery mode, payload of PWE3 packet, Packet Delay Variation, value of DSCP (for Bundles
with IP transport only), PSN tunnel label and EXP priority (for Bundles with MPLS transport
only).
Moreover, it is possible to define the priority of the PWE3 VLANs, always managed on 802.1p
basis independently from the Transport Type used and defined by the parameter C_PCP of
the Bundle both on Radio side and on LAN side.
The user can delete one or more PWE3 Bundles in any moment (see Delete a PWE3 Bundle).
2. Associate the PWE3 channels to a Bundle
The term PWE3 channel stands for every single E1 channel of the device managing the Pseudo Wire (PWE3 interface).
The PWE3 channels must be associated to a Bundle by the user Associate one or more PWE3
channels to a Bundle.
More PWE3 channels can be associated to the same Bundle, from which they inherit the configuration parameters.
A PWE3 channel cannot be associated to two different Bundles.
On the whole, it is possible to associate to PWE3 Bundles a maximum number of channels
equal to the Ethernet capacity actually available.
The user can delete, that is remove the association Bundle - PWE3 channel, in any moment
(see Delete one or more PWE3 channel). This operation is automatically executed at the removal of a Bundle.
3. Provider mode
The PWE3 function allows connecting the TDM and PSN worlds at level of Provider network
(PE - Provider Edge) or at level of Customer network (CE - Customer Edge).
If the local PWE3 traffic must be transmitted into a Provider cloud, it is necessary to Activate
the Provider modality for all the Bundles.
In this condition, all the PWE3 Bundles are forwarded to a single Service VLAN.
If the local PWE3 traffic must be transmitted only at level of Customer network, it is necessary to Deactivate the Provider modality for all the Bundles.
In this condition, every Bundle will be forwarded to the VLAN with ID equal to the C-VID value associated to every single Bundle (Customer VLAN).
4. Map the TDM tributaries to the PWE3 channels
Depending on the type of IDU, the modality for the mapping of the TDM channels to the
PWE3 channels changes.
The IDUs of type a, b and c manage a maximum of 16 E1 (TDM tributaries). When the PWE3
function is active, the IDUs have a PWE3 interface which manages a maximum of 16 PWE3
channels.
In this case, the mapping of the E1 tributaries to the PWE3 channels is pre-defined: E1-1
expansion -> PWE3 Link E1-1, E1-2 expansion -> PWE3 Link E1-2, etc.
The IDUs of type d, e and f manage a maximum of 32 E1 + 2 STM-1 streams (TDM tributaries). When the PWE3 function is active, the IDUs have a PWE3 interface which manages
a maximum of 32 PWE3 channels.
In this case, the mapping of the TDM tributaries to the PWE3 channels takes place via a cross
connection matrix, which allows an arbitrary association (see Cross Connection (PWE3 function enable).
Automatic deletion of PWE3 Bundles
All the PWE3 Bundles are automatically deleted by the following operations:
Disabling of the PWE3 function (parameter PWE3 - see Configurator).
Change of the radio configuration (parameter Radio - see Configurator which involves
the deletion of PWE3 Bundles (see Tab.19).
419
Tab.19 Change of radio configuration involving the deletion of all the PWE3 Bundles
From
Change
1+1 FD
1+1 HS
(2)
2x(1+0) SP (3) 2x(1+0) DP (4)
1+0
1+1 FD
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
1+0
To
1+1 HS (2)
Unequipped
Unequipped
(1)
(1)
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
2x(1+0) SP
(3)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2x(1+0) DP
(4)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes. All the PWE3 Bundles are deleted.

No. The PWE3 Bundles are not deleted.
420
(1)
1+1 Freq. Div.
(2)
1+1 Hot Standby.
(3)
(4)
RADIO
Radio Branch. It manages the radio parameters.
421
Radio Branch
For the equipment in 1+0 configuration is present the Radio Branch 1A command. For the equipment in
1+1 or 2x(1+0) configuration are present the Radio Branch 1A (branch 1 radio parameters) and Radio
Branch 2A (branch 2 radio parameters) commands.
The Radio Branch command manages the radio parameters.
Operations
Verify/modify the RF channel on which it is tuned the transmitter of the equipment

Verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier (Carrier Only)
Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter (Tx Transmitter)
Verify/modify the operation of the RT power supply (RT PSU)
Verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx) (Measurements Resolutions)
Verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx) (Measurements Resolutions)
Verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC (Reference Modulation Tx Power Control)
Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter (Max Ptx)
Verify/modify the range of the ATPC regulation (ATPC Regulation)
Verify/modify the threshold of the ATPC device (Upper Modulation ATPC Thresholds on Local
PRx)
Display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/reception for every
ACM profile
GUI
Radio Branch contextual area

WARNING This operation does NOT automatically modify also the RF channel of the remote equipment.
In 1+1 Hot Standby, 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration the
change is automatically done also on the other branch.
1. Select Radio > Radio Branch.
The Frequency/Channel selection parameter indicates the RF channel expressed as channel number
and relevant frequency.
The wording:
Channel Not Set indicates that for the specific radio a channel is not planned.
Hardware Failure indicates a hardware problem. E.g. check that the connection cable between
the IDU and the ODU is not failure or missing.

The frequency values change according to the equipment connected with the program.
422
Verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier

WARNING Deactivating the modulation (option On) is a maintenance operation (MAN. OP).

The Carrier Only parameter indicates the modulation status of the RF carrier:
On. The carrier is not modulated.
Off. The carrier is modulated.

3. Press Apply.
Only if you are deactivating the modulation (selection of the On option) a message warns that you are
executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.
The modulation deactivation of the carrier activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched
off and, then, switched on, the modulation is active independently from the previous setting.
Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter

WARNING Switching the transmitter off (option Off) is a maintenance operation (MAN. OP).
The permanent switch-off of the transmitter (option Permanent Off) is NOT a maintenance operation, so
the selection of this value is not subjected to the Timeout of MAN OP and the setting is not lost after a
controller restart.
The Tx Transmitter parameter indicates the operation of the transmitter:
On. The transmitter is turned on.
Off. The transmitter is turned off.
Permanent Off. The transmitter is turned off in permanent mode.

3. Press Apply.
Only if you are switching off the transmitter (selection of the Off option) a message warns that you are
The turning off of the transmitter activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and,
then, switched on, the transmitter is on, independently from the previous setting.
Verify/modify the operation of the RT power supply

WARNING Switching the power supply off (option Off) is a maintenance operation (MAN. OP).

The RT PSU parameter indicates the operation of the RT power supply:
On. The RT power supply is on.
Off. The RT power supply is off.

3. Press Apply.
423
Only if you are switching off the RT (selection of the Off option) a message warns that you are executing
a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.
The deactivation of the RT power supply activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched
off and, then, switched on, the power supply of RT is active, independently from the previous setting.
Verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx)


The Prx: <current value> dB parameter indicates the resolution used to communicate the changes of
the power received by the equipment (Prx) to a possible external management program (trap Prx
change).
2. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the wished value.
Verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx)


The Ptx: <current value> dB parameter indicates the resolution used to communicate the changes of
the power transmitted by the equipment (Ptx) to a possible external management program (trap Ptx
change).
Verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC


2. Select the Powers tab.
The Reference Modulation Tx Power Control area indicates the functioning status of the ATPC:
Manual. The ATPC device is in manual functioning mode (ATPC function disable).
In this condition, it is possible to adjust the maximum output power (Max Ptx cursor).
Automatic. The ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode.

In this condition, the transmitted power is automatically adjusted according to the level of the
signal at reception.
The thresholds of the ATPC device can be configured (see Verify/modify the threshold of the
ATPC device). Then, it is possible to adjust the maximum output power (see Verify/modify the
maximum output power value at the transmitter).

424
Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter

WARNING In 1+1 Hot Standby configuration the change is automatically done also on the other branch.

The Max Ptx: <current value> dBm parameter indicates the maximum output power value at the transmitter (Ptx nominal value).
Verify/modify the range of the ATPC regulation

WARNING Operation available only if the ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode (Reference Modu-
lation Tx Power Control parameter - Automatic value).

In 1+1 Hot Standby, 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration the
change is automatically done also on the other branch.
The ATPC Regulation: <current value> dB parameter indicates the range of the ATPC regulation (expressed in dB) with respect to the current value of maximum Tx output, that is intended as the upper
limit of the range.
Verify/modify the threshold of the ATPC device

WARNING In 1+1 Hot Standby, 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration the change is automatically done also on the other branch.
In 1+1 Freq. Div. configuration the changes, to be active, must be set in both branches.
In the Upper Modulation ATPC Thresholds on Local PRx area the threshold of the ATPC is pointed out:
High: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the ATPC device to decrease the transmitted power
when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or higher than the set threshold
value.
Low: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the ATPC device to increase the transmitted power
when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or lower than the set threshold value.
3. To change the threshold move the High and/or Low cursor to the wished value.
425
Display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/reception for every ACM profile

In the Current ATPC Power area the table resuming the power in transmission/reception for every ACM
profile is displayed.
Every table row corresponds to a profile. For every profile is displayed in the column:
Active Modulation. ACM profile
Tx Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in output from the transmitter
RX Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in input to the receiver.
Press Refresh to update the table.
426
Radio Branch contextual area

WARNING For equipment in 1+0 configuration, the Radio Branch 1A command is present, which opens
the Radio Branch 1A contextual area.

For equipment in 1+1 or 2x(1+0) configuration, the Radio Branch 1A command, which opens the Radio
Branch 1A contextual area containing the parameters relevant to radio branch 1, and Radio Branch 2A
command, which opens the Radio Branch 2A contextual area containing the parameters relevant to radio
branch 2, are present.
The contextual area displays the radio parameters.
Tabs
Settings tab. Radio parameters: RF channel, measurements resolutions, carrier only, Tx transmitter and RT PSU.
Powers tab. Radio parameters: ATPC.
Push-button

Settings tab
The tab displays the radio parameters (RF channel, measurements resolutions, carrier only, Tx transmitter
and RT PSU).
Parameters
Frequency/Channel selection. RF channel: <frequency> MHz - Ch: <channel number>.

The wording:
Channel Not Set indicates that for the specific radio a channel is not planned.
Hardware Failure indicates a hardware problem. E.g. check that the connection cable
between the IDU and the ODU is not failure or missing.
Measurements Resolution. Resolution of the power received (Prx) and transmitted (Ptx):
Ptx. Resolution used to communicate the changes of the power transmitted by the
equipment (Ptx) to a possible external management program (trap Ptx change).
For instance, if the operator sets a resolution of 2 dB and the last communicated Ptx
value corresponds to 10 dBm, the equipment will communicate to the program the
changing of the transmitted power when the Ptx gets a value < 8 or > 12.
Prx. Resolution used to communicate the changes of the power received by the equipment (Prx) to a possible external management program (trap Prx change).
For instance, if the operator sets a resolution of 2 dB and the last communicated PRx
value corresponds to -70 dBm, the equipment will communicate to the program the
changing of the transmitted power when the PRx gets a value <-72 or > -68.
RT PSU. Operating status of the RT power supply:
On. The RT power supply is on.
Off. The RT power supply is off.
Tx Transmitter. Operating status of the transmitter:
On. The transmitter is turned on.
Off. The transmitter is turned off.
Permanent Off. The transmitter is turned off in permanent mode.
Carrier Only. Modulation status of the RF carrier:
On. The carrier is not modulated.
Off. The carrier is modulated.
427
See also

Verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier (Carrier Only)
Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter (Tx Transmitter)
Verify/modify the operation of the RT power supply (RT PSU)
Verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx) (Measurements Resolutions)
Verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx) (Measurements Resolutions)
Powers tab
The tab displays the radio parameters (ATPC).
Parameters
Reference Modulation Tx Power Control. Operating status of the ATPC device:
Manual. The ATPC device is in manual functioning mode (ATPC function disable).
Automatic. The ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode.
Max Ptx <current value> dBm. Maximum output power value at the transmitter. The parameter affects the ATPC device as when it is in manual functioning mode as in automatic one.
ATPC Regulation <current value> dB. Range of the ATPC regulation (expressed in dB) with
respect to the current value of maximum Tx output, that is intended as the upper limit of the
range.
Parameter available only if the ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode (Reference Modulation Tx Power Control parameter - Automatic value).
Upper Modulation ATPC Thresholds on Local PRx. ATPC thresholds:
High: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the ATPC device to decrease the transmitted power when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or higher than
the set threshold value
Low: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the ATPC device to increase the transmitted
power when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or lower than the
set threshold value.
Current ATPC Power. The table resuming the power in transmission/reception for every ACM
profile.
Every table row corresponds to a profile. For every profile is displayed in the column:
Active Modulation. ACM profile.
Tx Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in output from the transmitter
RX Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in input to the receiver.
Push-button
Refresh. Update the table.

See also
Verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC (Reference Modulation Tx Power Control)
Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter (Max Ptx)
Verify/modify the range of the ATPC regulation (ATPC Regulation)
Verify/modify the threshold of the ATPC device (Upper Modulation ATPC Thresholds on Local
PRx)
428
MAINTENANCE
Lan Statistics. It manages the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports, displaying all the counters of
packets/bytes in input/output, subdivided by single port.
Lan Stat. Summary. It manages the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports, displaying, at the same
time, the main counters of packets/bytes in input/output for each port.
PWE3 Statistics It manages the PWE3 counters of packets in input/output for each channel.
Advanced Stat. Mon. It manages the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports, displaying the main
counters of packets/bytes in input/output for each port. The trend of the traffic can be filtered according
to specific user-defined criteria.
Fade Margin. It manages the calculation of the link margin (Fade Margin).
RMon. It manages the statistic counters of the Ethernet ports of the equipment.
OAM. It manages the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality.
S/N Meas. It displays the measure of the signal/noise ratio (S/N).
PRBS. It manages the PRBS device.
Radio Loop. It manages the radio loops.
Radio Switch. It manages the radio switch.
429
Lan Statistics
The Lan Statistics command manages the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports displaying all the
counters of packets/bytes in input/output, subdivided by single port.
The count of a counter is cyclic and always active.
The depth of the events stored by each counter is equal to 2^32: when this limit is reached, the count
restarts from zero. In any moment, you can reset all the counters.
Counters are compliant to specification RFC 2819 except for the counter Byte Received which does not include the bytes belonging to packets with size over the Max Packet Size.
Operations
Verify the counters of the Ethernet ports subdivided by each port

Reset the counters results
Activate/deactivate the division by 1000 of the counter results
GUI
Lan Statistics contextual area
Verify the counters of the Ethernet ports subdivided by each port

1. Select Maintenance > Lan Statistics.

The Lan Statistics contextual area displays the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports, displaying all
the counters of packets/bytes in input/output, subdivided by single port.


2. Press Reset and confirm.
All the counters of all the Ethernet ports are set to zero.
Activate/deactivate the division by 1000 of the counter results


The parameter Divide by 1000 indicates if the results of the counters are divided by 1000 or not.
The active box ( ) indicates that the results are divided by 1000; the inactive box indicates that the
results are not divided by 1000.
2. To change a parameter, check or uncheck the box and confirm.
430
Lan Statistics contextual area

The contextual area shows the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports, displaying all the counters of packets/bytes in input/output.
Parameters
Box. Port which the counters refer with corresponding value.

It is possible to display the counters of a single port at a time. To display the counters of a different Ethernet port, set the wished port in the box.
The value of the each counter refers to the moment when the relevant port is selected or the
context is updated.
Divide by 1000. This box indicates if the results of the counters are divided by 1000. Box:
Active ( ). The results are divided by 1.000. Next to the counter name, whose result
is divided, the wording (x1000) is displayed.
Inactive. The results are not divided by 1000.
Dropped Frame. Total number of events (frames) in which packets were dropped by the probe
due to lack of resources. This value is not necessarily the absolute number of discarded packets,
as it represents only the number of times that this condition occurred after the exhaustion of
the memory resources; the packets can be discarded also for other causes.
Total Byte Received. Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received
on the network. This value includes 4 FCS octets.
Total Frame Received. Total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets,
and multicast packets) received.
Broadcast Frame Received. Total number of good packets received that were directed to the
broadcast address. This does not include multicast packets.
Multicast Frame Received. Total number of good packets received that were directed to a
multicast address. This number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.
CRC Align Errors. Total number of packets received that had a length of between 64 and n
(parameter Max Packet Size, it can be set to 1522 or 2048) octets with bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) and an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a no-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize Frame. Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long and
were otherwise well formed.
Oversize Frame. Total number of packets received that were longer than n (parameter Max
Packet Size, it can be set to 1522 or 2048) octets and were otherwise well formed.
Fragments. Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length and had
either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a
bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Jabbers. Total number of packets received that were longer than n (parameter Max Packet Size,
it can be set to 1522 or 2048) octets, and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with
an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a no-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Collisions. The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this EthLannet segment.
Frame 64 Oct.[Sent+Received]. Total number of packets (including bad packets) received
and transmitted that were 64 octets in length.
Frame 65 to 127 Oct.[Sent+Received]. Total number of packets (including bad packets) received and transmitted that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive.
Frame 128 to 255 Oct.[Sent+Received]. Total number of packets (including bad packets)
received and transmitted that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive.
431
Frame 1024 to max pck size [Sent+Received]. Total number of transmitted and received
packets with a length greater than 1024 octets (incorrect packets included).
Late Collisions. Evaluation relevant to the total number of collisions detected in this EthLannet
segment, after the transmission of more than 512 bits from the beginning of TXEnable.
Valid Byte Received. Total number of received bytes relevant to correct packets. This counter
is increased once for every data octet of good packets (Unicast + Multicast + Broadcast) received.
Byte Sent. Number of transmitted bytes. This counter is increased once for every data octet of
a transmitted good packet.
Valid Frame Received. Number of received correct frames. This counter is increased once for
every good packet (Unicast + Multicast + Broadcast) received.
Frame Sent. Number of transmitted frames. This counter is increased once for every transmitted good packet.
Out Multicast Frame. Number of Multicast frames sent. This counter does not include Broadcast packets.
Out Broadcast Frame. Number of Broadcast frames sent.
Out Unicast Frame. Number of Unicast frames sent. This is given by: Frame Sent - Out Multicast Frame - Out Broadcast Frame.
In Pause Frame. Number of good Flow Control frames received.
Out Pause Frame. Number of Flow Control frames sent.
Push-button
Refresh. Update the counters results.

Reset. Reset the counters results.
432
Lan Stat. Summary

The Lan Stat. Summary command manages the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports displaying, at
the same time, the main counters of packets/bytes in input/output for every port.
Operations
Verify the summary of the main counters of the Ethernet ports

GUI
Lan Stat. Summary contextual area
Verify the summary of the main counters of the Ethernet ports

1. Select Maintenance > Lan Stat. Summary.

The Lan Stat. Summary contextual area displays the summary of the main counters of the Ethernet
ports.

1. Select Maintenance > Lan Stat. Summary.

2. Press Reset All and confirm.
All the counters of all the Ethernet ports are set to zero.
433
Lan Stat. Summary contextual area

The contextual area, displays the summary of the main counters of the Ethernet ports.
Every table row corresponds to a counter.
Parameters
Parameter. Counter name:
Byte Received (Total Byte Received). Total number of octets of data (including those
in bad packets) received on the network. This value includes 4 FCS octets.
Frame Received (Total Frame Received). Total number of packets (including bad
packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets) received.
Byte Sent. Number of transmitted bytes. This counter is increased once for every data
octet of a transmitted good packet.
Frame Sent. Number of transmitted frames. This counter is increased once for every
transmitted good packet.
Dropped Frame. Total number of events (frames) in which packets were dropped by
the probe due to lack of resources. This value is not necessarily the absolute number
of discarded packets, as it represents only the number of times that this condition
occurred after the exhaustion of the memory resources; the packets can be discarded
also for other causes.
CRC Err. (CRC Align Errors). Total number of packets received that had a length of
between 64 and n (parameter Max Packet Size, it can be set to 1522 or 2048) octets
with bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) and an integral number of octets (FCS Error)
or a bad FCS with a no-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Lan 1, Lan 2, Lan 3, Lan 4, Port A, Port B. Value of the counters with respect to every single
port of the Ethernet Switch.
The value of each counter refer to the moment when the context is opened or updated.
The presence, next to the name of a port, of the wording:
(Brx), indicates that the Spanning Tree protocol is enabled for the specific port. The
value x indicates the Bridge which it belongs to.
(Elpx), indicates that the Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment (ELP equipment)
is enabled for the specific port (only LANs). The value x indicates the protection
group.
(ElpNx), indicates that the Ethernet Line Protection of the node (ELP node) is enabled
for the specific port (only LANs). The value x indicates the protection group.
(Trkx), indicates that the Trunking mode is enabled for the specific port (only LANs).
The value x indicates the aggregation group.
Push-button

Reset All. Reset the counters results.
See also

434
PWE3 Statistics
The PWE3 Statistics command manages the PWE3 counters of packets in input/output for each channel.
The count of the statistics is automatically activated on the creation of the specific PWE3 channel and is
automatically stopped on the deletion of the channel.
The count of a counter is cyclic. The depth of the events stored by each counter is equal to 2^32: when
this limit is reached, the count restarts from zero. In any moment, you can reset all the counters.
The counters are compliant to the requirements of Metro Ethernet Forum (MEF 8).
Operations
Verify the counters of the PWE3 channels

Reset the counters results of the PWE3 channels
GUI
PWE3 Statistics contextual area
Verify the counters of the PWE3 channels

1. Select Maintenance > PWE3 Statistics.

The PWE3 Statistics contextual area displays the list of the counters with the corresponding value.
Reset the counters results of the PWE3 channels

1. Select Maintenance > PWE3 Statistics.

2. Press Reset All and confirm.
All the counters of all the PWE3 channels are set to zero.
435
PWE3 Statistics contextual area

The contextual area shows the PWE3 counters of packets in input/output for each channel.
The count of the statistics is automatically activated on the creation of the specific PWE3 channel and is
automatically stopped on the deletion of the channel.
The count of a counter is cyclic. The depth of the events stored by each counter is equal to 2^32: when
this limit is reached, the count restarts from zero. In any moment, you can reset all the counters.
The counters are compliant to the requirements of Metro Ethernet Forum (MEF 8).
Parameters
Channel. PWE3 channel label which the values of the counters refer to.
The value of the each counter refers to the moment when the contextual area is displayed or
the context is updated.
Sent Packets. Total number of transmitted PWE3 Ethernet packets.
Received Packets. Total number of PWE3 Ethernet packets received and correctly classified as
belonging to that channel.
Malformed Packets. Total number of PWE3 Ethernet packets received with an unexpected format.
Oof Packets. Total number of PWE3 Ethernet packets received out of frame and not allocable
in FIFO because in advance or in delay with respect to expected sequence and then that cannot
be sorted.
Reordered Packets. Total number of PWE3 Ethernet packets received out of frame but allocable in FIFO because arrived in time to be sorted.
Lost Packets. Total number of lost PWE3 Ethernet packets.
Repeated Packets. Total number of PWE3 Ethernet packets received with Sequence Number
duplicated.
Time TDM Unavailable (s). Unavailable seconds of the output E1 channel.
Push-button

Reset. Reset the counters results.
436
Advanced Stat. Mon.

The Advanced Stat. Mon. command manages the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports displaying the
main counters of packets/bytes in input/output subdivided by every single port. The trend of the traffic can
be filtered according to specific user-defined criteria.
WARNING The counters are meaningful only for traffic coming from or going towards the Radio ports.
Operations
Internal Priority value
C-VID identifier
S-VID and C-VID identifiers
GUI
Advanced Stat. Mon. contextual area
Verify/manage the main counters of an Ethernet port whose traffic is filtered according to the Internal Priority value
1. Select Maintenance > Advanced Stat. Mon.

2. Press the push-button to relevant to the port you wish to verify/filter the traffic trend for.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the LANs are not present.
Press
to compress the Advanced Stat. Mon. window. Press
to expand the window.
More Advanced Stat. Mon. windows can be opened relevant to different Ethernet ports.
3. If not already present, set the value Internal Priority in the Select Group field.
The meaning of Internal Priority refers to its association with the possible manageable priorities
(802.1p, TOS/DSCP,MPLS) and the corresponding selected queue.
If the Select Group parameter cannot be changed, this means that the SCT/LMT or NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX
has activated the RMon count at service level.
If one of the LAN is selected, the following counters are displayed in the Counters column:
Dropped Frame. Total number of frames in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack
of resources. This value is not necessarily the absolute number of discarded packets, as it represents only the number of times that this condition occurred after the exhaustion of the memory resources; the packets can be discarded also for other causes.
Received Frame. Number of received correct frames. This counter is increased once for every
good packet (Unicast + Multicast + Broadcast) received.
Received Byte. Total number of received bytes relevant to correct packets. This counter is increased once for every data octet of good packets (Unicast + Multicast + Broadcast) received.
64 (Rx) Byte. Total number of packets received that were 64 octets in length.
65 to 127 (Rx) Byte. Total number of packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in
length inclusive.
128 to 255 (Rx) Byte. Total number of packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets
in length inclusive.
256 to 511 (Rx) Byte. Total number of packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets
in length inclusive.
512 to 1023 (Rx) Byte. Total number of packets received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive.
437
1024 to Max Pkt size (Rx) Byte. Total number of received packets with a length greater than
1024 octets.
If selected one Radio port of the Switch, the following counters are displayed in the Counters column:
Frame Sent. Number of transmitted frames. This counter is increased once for every transmitted
good packet.
a transmitted good packet
64 (Tx) Byte. Total number of transmitted packets that were 64 octets in length.
65 to 127 (Tx) Byte. Total number of transmitted packets that were between 65 and 127 octets
in length inclusive
128 to 255 (Tx) Byte. Total number of transmitted packets that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive.
256 to 511 (Tx) Byte. Total number of transmitted packets that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive
512 to 1023 (Tx) Byte. Total number of transmitted packets that were between 512 and 1023
octets in length inclusive.
1024 to Max Pkt size (Tx) Byte. Total number of transmitted packets with a length greater than
1024 octets.
Notes relevant to the counters

The depth of the events stored by each counter is equal to 2^32. The counters are in compliance
with the specification RFC 2819. The Received Byte counter, differently from what specified in
RFC 2819, does not include the bytes belonging to packets of sizes greater than the Max Packet
Size.
The Internal Priority columns display the values of the counters relevant only to Ethernet packets with
the specific priority.
The value of the each counter refers to the moment when the relevant port is selected or the context
is updated. To update the data, press Refresh.
The counter:
Total Dropped Frame indicates the total number of frames in which packets were dropped by
the probe due to lack of resources. This value is not necessarily the absolute number of discarded packets, as it represents only the number of times that this condition occurred after the exhaustion of the memory resources; the packets can be discarded also for other causes. Press
Refresh Dropped Frame to update the value.
Parameter available only for the LANs of the Switch.
Total Transmitted Frame indicates the total number of transmitted frames. Press Refresh
Transmitted Frame to update the value.
Parameter available only for the Radio ports of the Switch.
4. If the Advanced Stat. Mon. <Ethernet port> window contains only the Counters column or the Internal
Priority column is not present, it is necessary to add the column in the following way:
a. Press Add.
b. Set, in the Internal Priority field, the wished value of priority (number between 0 and 7).
If the Add All box becomes active, one column will be inserted for every value of Internal Priority
(Int.Prio. 1... Int.Prio. 7) in the Advanced Stat. Mon. <Ethernet port> window.
c. Press OK and confirm.
The Advanced Stat. Mon. <Ethernet port> window displays, next to the Counters column, the
Internal Priority <value> column.
Repeat the step 4 to create the columns relevant to the wished values of priority 802.1p.
The columns relevant to the priority values will remain set until when the user removes them or the
criterion used to filter the traffic is changed (change of the value for the Select Group parameter).
In the heading of the columns created by operator there is the symbol (
commands are displayed:
). Selecting it, the following
Sort Ascending. Sort in ascending order (from lowest to greatest value) the rows of the table
with respect to the value present in the specific column.
Command available when the column contains at least one value different from 0.
438
Sort Descending. Sort in descending order (from greatest to lowest value) the rows of the table with respect to the value present in the specific column.
Refresh. Update the values of the counters present in the specific column.
Remove. Remove the specific column.
Reset. Reset the values of the counters present in the specific column.
In the Advanced Stat. Mon. <Ethernet port> window, the push-button:
Remove All. Remove all the Internal Priority columns set by the user.
Refresh. Update the values of the counters present in all the Internal Priority columns.
Reset. Reset the values of the counters present in all the Internal Priority columns.
Verify/manage the main counters of an Ethernet port whose traffic is filtered according to the C-VID identifier
WARNING For the LAN this operation is not available if the port is in modality Secure - Provider Mode (pa-
rameter 802.1q Setting, value Secure - parameter Provider Port active).

2. Press the push-button to relevant to the port which you wish to verify/filter the trend of the traffic for.
Press
to compress the Advanced Stat. Mon. window. Press
More Advanced Stat. Mon. windows relevant to different Ethernet ports can be opened.
3. If not already present, set the value C Vid in the Select Group field.
The Counters column displays the following counters:
Counter available only for the LANs of the Switch.
Received Frame. Total number of received frames.
Received Byte. Total number of octets of data received on the network. This value includes 4
FCS octets.
good packet.
64 (Tx + Rx) Byte. Total number of transmitted and received packets that were 64 octets in
length.
65 to 127 (Tx + Rx) Byte. Total number of transmitted and received packets that were between
65 and 127 octets in length inclusive
128 and 255 octets in length inclusive.
512 to 1023 (Tx + Rx) Byte. Total number of transmitted and received packets that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive.
1024 to Max Pkt size (Tx + Rx) Byte. Total number of transmitted and received packets with a
length greater than 1024 octets.
439

Size.
The <C-VID identifier> columns (for example 6) point out the values of the counters relevant only to
Ethernet packets with the specific C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) identifier.
The counter:
the probe due to lack of resources. This value is not necessarily the absolute number of discarded packets, as it represents only the number of times that this condition occurred after the exhaustion of the memory resources; the packets can be discarded also for other causes. Press
4. If the Advanced Stat. Mon. <Ethernet port> window contains only the Counters column or the <C-VID
identifier> column relevant to the wished C-VID value is not present, it is necessary to add the column
in the following way:
a. Press Add.
b. Set, in the field C Vid, the wished C-VID value (number between 0 and 4094), press OK and
confirm.
The Advanced Stat. Mon. <Ethernet port> window displays the <C-VID identifier> column next
to Counters column.
Repeat the step 4 to create the columns relevant to the wished C-VID values.
The columns relevant to the C-VID values will remain set until when the user removes them or the criterion used to filter the traffic is changed (change of value for the parameter Select Group).
Remove All. Remove all the <C-VID identifier> columns set by the user.
Refresh. Update the values of the counters present in all the <C-VID identifier> columns.
Reset. Reset the values of the counters present in all the <C-VID identifier> columns.
440
Verify/manage the main counters of an Ethernet port whose traffic is filtered according to the S-VID and C-VID identifiers
WARNING For the LAN this operation is available only if the port is in modality Secure - Provider Mode (pa-
rameter 802.1q Setting, value Secure - parameter Provider Port active).

2. Press the push-button to relevant to the port which you wish to verify/filter the trend of the traffic for.
Press
to compress the Advanced Stat. Mon window. Press
More Advanced Stat. Mon. windows can be opened relevant to different Ethernet ports.
3. If not already present, set the value C Vid-S Vid in the Select Group field.
The following counters are displayed in the Counters column:
Counter available only for the LANs of the Switch.
Received Frame. Total number of received frames.
Received Byte. Total number of octets of data received on the network. This value includes 4
FCS octets.
good packet.
64 (Tx + Rx) Byte. Total number of transmitted and received packets that were 64 octets in
length.
128 and 255 octets in length inclusive.
512 to 1023 (Tx + Rx) Byte. Total number of transmitted and received packets that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive.
1024 to Max Pkt size (Tx + Rx) Byte. Total number of transmitted and received packets with a
length greater than 1024 octets.

Size.
The <C-VID S-VID identifiers> columns (e.g. 6-9) point out the values of the counters relevant only to
the Ethernet packets with the specific C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) and S-VID (Service VLAN Identifier) identifier.
The counter:
the probe due to lack of resources. This value is not necessarily the absolute number of discarded packets, as it represents only the number of times that this condition occurred after the ex-
441
haustion of the memory resources; the packets can be discarded also for other causes. Press
4. If the Advanced Stat. Mon. <Ethernet port> window contains only the Counters column or the <C-VID
S-VID identifier> column relevant to the wished C-VID and S-VID values is not present, it is necessary
to add the column in the following way:
a. Press Add.
b. Set the wished C-VID value (number between 2 and 4094) in the C Vid field.
c. Set the wished S-VID value (number between 2 and 4094) in the S Vid field.
d. Press OK and confirm.
The Advanced Stat. Mon. <Ethernet port> window displays the <C-VID S-VID identifier> column next to the Counters column.
Repeat the step 4 to create the columns relevant to the wished C-VID and S-VID values.
The columns relevant to the C-VID/S-VID values will remain set until when the user removes them or
the criterion used to filter the traffic is changed (change of value for the parameter Select Group).
Remove All. Remove all the <C-VID S-VID identifier> columns set by the user.
Refresh. Update the values of the counters present in all the <C-VID S-VID identifier> columns.
Reset. Reset the values of the counters present in all the <C-VID S-VID identifier> columns.
442
Advanced Stat. Mon. contextual area

This contextual area allows managing the traffic flow on the Ethernet ports, displaying the main counters
of the packets/bytes in input/output subdivided by single port.
Push-button

Refresh. Not meaningful in this context.
Help. Open the help on line.
Show <Ethernet port>. Open the Advanced Stat. Mon. <Ethernet port> window, where the
traffic flow on the specific port can be verified/filtered.
The traffic flow is filtered depending on specific criteria defined by the user.
The description of the available criteria and, depending on their setting, of the elements present
in the Advanced Stat. Mon. <Ethernet port> window is reported in the following procedures:
Verify/manage the main counters of an Ethernet port whose traffic is filtered according
to the Internal Priority value
to the C-VID identifier
to the S-VID and C-VID identifiers
443
Fade Margin
WARNING Command available only for equipment provided with the radio and if the Build-in Fade Margin
facility is enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).
For the equipment in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration is present the Fade Margin command. For the equipment
in 2x(1+0) configuration are present the Fade Margin 1A (calculation of the link margin for the radio
branch 1) and Fade Margin 2A (calculation of the link margin for the radio branch 2) commands.
The Fade Margin command manages the calculation of the link margin (Fade Margin).
Operations
Execute the calculation of the Fade Margin and check/delete the results
Verify the values of the power parameters stored into the equipment and used for the calculation
of the Fade Margin
GUI
Fade Margin contextual area

See also
Calculation of the Fade Margin (info)
WARNING The operation is traffic affecting.
In order to execute the operation, it is necessary that:
The remote equipment is inserted in the list of the remote equipment of the local equipment,
and it is configured as Remote Link (equipment type) (see Remote elements list area).
The user is connected, by WEB LCT, to both the terminals (local and remote) with profile System
or Station Operator.
In both the terminals, the adaptive modulation is not active (see BW & Mod./Link ID).
In both the terminals, there is not active alarms (see Alarms stopping the Fade Margin):
During the operation:
In the WEB LCT page of the local terminal, it is not possible to change the context (the selection
of the commands is forbidden).
In both the terminals, the manual operation Fade Margin evaluation active is active.
As regards the messages that can be displayed during the operation see Messages displayed during the
execution of the Fade Margin.
Operation supported with Internet Explorer 9 or later.
1. In the WEB LCT interface of the local equipment, select Maintenance > Fade Margin.
The Local IP box shows the IP address (agent SNMP) of the local equipment, while the Remote IP box
shows the IP address (agent SNMP) of the remote equipment.
If more equipment configured as Remote Link are present in the remote equipment list, the Remote
Link Selection window is displayed. Select, in the IP Address box, the remote equipment for which you
wish to calculate the fade margin and press OK.
2. Type the value of Fade Margin calculated by project into the Fade Margin (dB) box.
This value is normally present in the document related to the branch calculation (for example in LER Link Engineering Report).
3. A control on the typed value and the Ptx value, stored into the controller of the equipment, is executed.
444
If the difference between the two value is greater of the maximum capacity of the fader internal to the
equipment, the message Max available attenuation dB. An external attenuator is required. Continue
anyway? is displayed.
In this case, it is necessary to use an external attenuator and type, in the Ext. Attenuation (dB) box,
the value of attenuation externally provided, otherwise the calculation will be executed on the basis of
the attenuation made available by the equipment.
The calculation of the link margin is started.
The Fade Margin Operation Status window opens.
The Current PTx parameter indicates, step by step, the lowering of the transmission level.
In the window there is the Abort push-button, whose choice stops the operation.
For the systems in 1+1 configuration, the calculation is executed using the transmitter active at the
moment of the start of the measure and relevant to both the remote receivers (see Calculation of the
Fade Margin (info).
At the end of the check, the message Step <value> of <value> completed. Continue? is displayed on
each branch. Press:
No, if you wish to stop the procedure.
Yes, if you wish to continue.
The display of the message End of Fade Margin procedure indicates that the operation has been executed successfully.
5. Press View Log File to display the power levels and the calculations executed by the system during
the calculation of the link margin.
If you wish:
To save the result, it is necessary to select and copy them into a text editor.
To delete the result, press Reset Log File and confirm.

If the results of the Fade Margin are not deleted, at the next activation of the calculation of the
link margin (selection of the Start push-button) the data will be added to those already present.
Alarms stopping the Fade Margin

Here below the list (in alphabetical order) of the alarms which, if active, stops the execution of Fade Margin:
<unit name> Unit Fail Alarm
<unit name> Unit Hw Mismatch Alarm
<unit name> Unit Missing Alarm
<unit name> Unit Not Responding Alarm
<unit name> Unit Sw Mismatch Alarm
BRANCH- <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] XPIC Fail
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Local-Remote Terminal Setup Mismatch Alarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rescue Setup Active Alarm
Here below the list (in alphabetical order) of the alarms which, if active on the branch where the Fade Margin must be executed, stops the execution of the operation:
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] REMOTE RIM Alarm Synthesis
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] IDU-ODU Cable Open Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] IDU-ODU Cable Short Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] LOCAL RIM Alarm Synthesis
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Prx change
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Ptx change
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RIM Power Supply Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT IDU-ODU Communication fail Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT If Fail Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT Tx Power Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT Vco Fail Alarm
445
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx If Out Alarm

BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx Quality Low Alarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx Quality Low Warning
Fan Alarm
IDU BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Demodulator Fail Alarm
IDU BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Modulator Fail Alarm
IDU BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] ODU-IDU Communication fail Alarm
IDU Temperature
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Adaptive Modulation Reduced Capacity Notification
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Communication Radio EOC Data Link Alarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Link Id. Alarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Link Telemetry Fail Alarm
All the remnant alarms, even not active, DO NOT stop the calculation of Fade Margin.
Messages displayed during the execution of the Fade Margin
Remote Link Not Found!. In the remote equipment list there is not equipment configured as Remote
Link (equipment type). Add the remote equipment to the list (see Remote elements list area).
Local equipment is not probably logged or Check local login. The user is not connected to the local
equipment with profile System or Station Operator. Execute the login.
Remote login. The user is not connected to the local equipment with profile System or Station Operator.
Execute the login using the login window automatically displayed by the system.
Local equipment has one or more alarms. The procedure cant go on. The local equipment has at least
one alarm active that does not allow the execution of the Fade Margin. Verify the active alarms (see
Equipment status area) and operate on the equipment to clear these alarms.
Remote equipment has one or more alarms. The procedure cant go on. The local equipment has at
least one alarm active that does not allow the execution of the Fade Margin. Verify the active alarms
(see Equipment status area and Alarms stopping the Fade Margin) and operate on the equipment to
clear these alarms.
Remote link is unreacheable.... The remote equipment is unreachable. Restore the connection or wait
for the restore of the connection.
Fade Margin Procedure active on this equipment. The calculation of the link margin is already in progress.
Adaptive modulation is active on local equipment. Turn it off and restart procedure. In the local terminal
the adaptive modulation is active. Disable the adaptive modulation (see Modify the operating status of
the adaptive modulation).
Verify the values of the power parameters stored into the equipment and used for the
calculation of the Fade Margin
1. Select Maintenance > Fade Margin.

2. Press View Tables.
The Log File window displays the parameters stored in the controller of the local equipment are saved.
446
Fade Margin contextual area

WARNING For equipment in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration, the Fade Margin command is available which
opens the Fade Margin contextual area.
For equipment in 2x(1+0) configuration, the commands Fade Margin 1A, which opens the Fade Margin
1A contextual area containing the parameters for the calculation of the link margin relevant to radio 1, and
Fade Margin 2A, which opens the Fade Margin 2A contextual area containing the parameters for the calculation of the link margin relevant to radio 2, are available.
The contextual area shows the parameters relevant calculation of the link margin.
Parameters
Fade Margin (dB). Value of Fade Margin calculated by project to be inserted before the hop
calculation.
Ext. Attenuation (dB). Attenuation value, to be inserted before the hop calculation, if you use
an external attenuator.
Local IP. IP address (SNMP agent) of the local equipment.
Remote IP. IP address (SNMP agent) of the remote equipment.
Summary area. At the end of the operation, this area displays the results of the hop calculation.
Column:
Current Step. Transmitter and receiver (radio link) which the results of the operation
are referred to.
Real F.M. (dB). Fade Margin value, recalculated considering the really measured characteristics of the equipment.
Real F.M. Ver. (dB). Fade Margin value verified by the procedure (it is the result of
the procedure).
Push-button

Start. Active the calculation of the Fade Margin.
View Log File. Display the power levels and the calculations executed by the system during the
calculation of the Fade Margin.
Reset Log File. Delete the results of the Fade Margin.
View Tables. Verify the values of the power parameters stored into the equipment and used
for the calculation of the Fade Margin.
See also
447

With calculation of the link margin, we mean the calculation of the difference between the level normally
received by the equipment and the level received on the activation of the Rx Quality Low Alarm.
The operation is automatically executed by the program using the parameters set by the user (value of
Fade Margin calculated by project and possible external fading) and the power parameters (Ptx, rated Ptx,
etc.) stored in the equipment during the test of the equipment itself.
The calculation is executed on the radio link composed by the equipment which the Fade Margin contextual
area is referred to (local equipment) and by the equipment located on the other end of the link (remote
equipment).
For the system in configuration:
1+0, only the measure Tx1\Rx1 is executed, using the operating and attenuated PTx corrections.
1+1 Hot Stand By, the calculation is executed on both the branches: first the operation is executed on the working Tx branch and both the remote receivers, then the program forces the
switch in transmission and repeats the operation in such a way to calculate the link margin for
all the possible Tx/Rx combinations: Tx1-Rx1, Tx1-Rx2, Tx2-Rx1, Tx2-Rx2.
The measure is executed using the operating and attenuated PTx corrections and the alarms of
the corresponding branch.
During the measurement phases, the stand-by transmitter is automatically set to status Off and
then set in status On at the end of the specific operation.
1+1 Frequency Diversity, the measures Tx1\Rx1 and Tx2\Rx2 are executed, using the operating
and attenuated PTx corrections and the alarms of the corresponding branch.
Local equipment 1+0 - remote equipment 1+1 Hot StandBy, the measures Tx1 local\Rx1 remote
and Tx1 local\Rx2 remote are executed.
Local equipment 1+1 Hot StandBy - remote equipment 1+0, the measure Tx local working\Rx1
remote and, after the switch on the local terminal, the measure Tx local working\Rx1 are executed.
2x(1+0), two commands are available for the calculation of the fade margin: one for the radio
branch 1 (Fade Margin 1A) and the other for the radio branch 2 (Fade Margin 2A). For each
command, the execution modalities of the calculation are the same described for the system in
1+0 configuration.
When the calculation is activated, the Ptx level of the local equipment is automatically faded by 1dB at a
time. The Ptx level is faded step by step until the activation of the Rx Quality Low Alarm on the remote
terminal. At the end of the operation, the user can verify the power levels and the calculations executed
by the system displaying the specific file.
Before activating the calculation, the following operations are automatically executed (the operations are
executed only if the parameters are not in the indicated condition):
In the local terminal the operation of the device for the automatic control of the transmitted
power (ATPC) is forced to manual.
In both the terminals, the value of 1800 seconds is set as timeout for the manual operations.
At the end of the calculation, the following operations are automatically executed:
The level of power transmitted by the local equipment is reported to the initial value (before the
activation of the calculation).
In the local terminal the ATPC device is reported to the initial operating modality (before the
activation of the calculation).
The restore of the initial values of the above mentioned parameters is automatically executed even after
an interruption of the procedure.
448
RMon
The RMon command manages the statistic counters of the Ethernet ports of the equipment.
The managed counters are described in RFC 2819 (History Control Group) specification.
Operations
Verify the collection status of the statistic counters of the Ethernet ports
Activate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port
Deactivate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port
Display the values of statistical counters of an Ethernet port
GUI
RMon contextual area

See also
RMon standard (info)
Verify the collection status of the statistic counters of the Ethernet ports
1. Select Maintenance > RMon.

The RMon contextual area displays the status of the Ethernet ports in relation to the count of the statistics.


2. Execute one of the following actions:
Select the Ethernet port in Stopped status to be activated and press Show.
Double click on the Ethernet port in Stopped status to be activated.

If the selected port is inactive (Rate Control - Disable), a warning message is displayed.
The count is started-up.
After the start of the measure, the display of the data relevant to the first sampling range could take
more than one minute.

WARNING The deactivation of the count involves the loss of the collected data.

Select the Ethernet port in Running status to be deactivated and press Show.
449
Double click on the Ethernet port in Running status to be deactivated.
3. Press Stop and confirm.

The count is stopped.

WARNING Operation meaningful only for Ethernet ports for which the count of the RMon statistics is active.

Select the Ethernet port in Running status and press Show.
Double click on the Ethernet port in Running status.
The Remote Monitoring window displays the evolution in time (history) of the statistic counters from
the start of the count on the specific port.
More Remote Monitoring windows can be opened relevant to different Ethernet ports.
450
RMon contextual area

The contextual area displays the status of the Ethernet ports in relation to the count of the statistics.
Every row of the table corresponds to one port.
Parameters
Lan Port. Port of the Ethernet Switch.

Status. Port status in relation to the count of the statistics:
Stopped. The count is not on progress.
Running. The count is on progress.
Push-button

Show. Open the Remote Monitoring window.
See also

Remote Monitoring window

The window shows the statistics counting of the specific port.
Table
Every row of the table corresponds to a sampling period of 60 seconds (displayed in Time column).
The other columns display the value of the counter in the specific sampling period. For the description of the counter refer to par. Ethernet counters (RMon).
For the Octets (Rx) counter between brackets, the number of bytes within a second (kB/s) is
pointed out.
The statistic counters of the considered Ethernet port are freezed by the equipment each minute.
For each port, the equipment can store a maximum of 240 samples (corresponding to 4 hours).
When the maximum value is reached, the new data will overwrite the oldest ones.
At the end of a sampling interval, for each counter, the pointed out value corresponds to the
value registered during the measuring interval.
If the count is disable the table will be empty.
Selecting the heading of a column, the symbol (
mands are displayed:
) is displayed. Selecting it, the following com-
Sort Ascending. Not available in this context.

Sort Descending. Not available in this context.
Columns. Active (
) and deactive (
) the display of a column in the table.
Push-button
Start. Activate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port. Push-button displayed in alternative to the Stop.
451
Stop. Deactivate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port. Push-button displayed in alternative to the Start.
Refresh. Update the data.
Freeze. Interrupt the dynamic display of the values in the window (freezes the window). Pushbutton displayed in alternative to the Unfreeze. When the window is opened, the dynamic display of the values is active by default.
Unfreeze. Re-activates the dynamic display of the values in the window. Push-button displayed
in alternative to the Freeze.
Parameter
List Update in: x sec. Seconds (x value) missing to the end of the current sampling interval,
at the end of which the new row is displayed.
The wording List Update in: sec indicates that the window is freezed (see Freeze/Unfreeze
push-button).
452
RMon Standard
Outline on the operation of RMon standard
Management from Web LCT of the statistics counters foreseen by RMON standard
Ethernet counters (RMon)
RMon Standard
RMon (Remote Monitoring) is a standard whose function is providing a set of services of statistics count,
monitoring and alarm report with reference to the activity of a LAN network.
These services are defined in terms of MIB (Management Information Base) group described in the specification RFC2819 (Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base), which must be read for any
further detail.
Outline on the operation of RMon standard

The RMon standard is based on two components: an agent (RMon probe) and a client (remote management
station).
The agent saves the data within its own RMon tables present on the network devices (equipment, routers,
etc.).
The RMon probes can see only the traffic flowing through themselves and therefore are located on each
port of the Ethernet Switch of the device to monitor.
The remote management station communicates with the RMon agent to obtain and correlate the RMon data.
Generally, the station is equipped with an interface (graphic or textual) which allows the display and the
analysis of the collected RMon data.
Management from Web LCT of the statistics counters foreseen by RMON standard
With reference to what depicted in the previous paragraph, the RMon functionality allows the analysis of
the data collected by the probes present on each port of the Ethernet Switch of the equipment in compliance with the RMon standard (RMon MIB group: History).
In order to store in the equipment and display the statistics history of a port, it is necessary to activate the
measure on the port (see Activate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port). The collection of the statistic counters on this port will remain active until when a user (WEB LCT or SCT/LMT) does
not deactivate it (see Deactivate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port).
Once the measure is activated, the probes collect the statistic data, which are stored in the RMon table of
the equipment. The storing takes place each 60 seconds (sampling range).
The equipment stores these data into a rotation buffer where, when full, the new information overwrites
the old ones (value set to 240 samples which allow storing 4 hours in the equipment).
The data relevant to the statistics are available to the user and displayed, in form of table, subdivided by
single Ethernet port (see Display the values of statistical counters of an Ethernet port).
WEB LCT displays the history of the last two hours with intervals of 1 minute.
During the count, the display of the data in the Remote Monitoring <porta Ethernet> window can be interrupted.
This operation does not interrupt the count, but freezes only the data present in the window. In fact, when
the data update is re-activated, the window displays the values of all the sampling ranges (up to a maximum of 120), even those stored in the equipment while the window was freezed.
453
Ethernet counters (RMon)

The description of the counters is the same reported for the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output
from an Ethernet port (see Lan Statistics).
The only difference is the name of the counter which, in some cases, change from the RMon counters with
respect to the Lan Statistics counters.
Ethernet counters denomination (RMon) reports the correspondence of the names for the Ethernet RMon
counters.
The counter Utilization is meaningful only as RMon counter and has the following definition: estimate of
the average utilization of the port in the sampling interval expressed as hundredths of percentage.
The percentage of usage of the radio port refers to the bit rate of the port at the Switch (1Gbit/s) and not
to the available radio band.
The percentage of usage of the LANs instead refers to the real bit rate of the port (10Mbit/s, 100Mbit/s or
1Gbit/s).
Tab.20 Ethernet counters denomination (RMon)
Ethernet counters denomination
RMon - History
454
Ethernet counters denomination

Lan Statistics
Drop Events
Dropped Frame
Octects (Rx) (kB/s)
Total Byte Received
Pkts (Rx)
Total Frame Received
Broadcasts (Rx)
Broadcast Frame Received
Multicasts (Rx)
Multicast Frame Received
CRC Align Errors
CRC Align Errors
Undersize Pkts
Undersize Frame
Oversize Pkts
Oversize Frame
Fragments
Fragments
Jabbers
Jabbers
Collisions
Collisions
Utilization (Rx) (%)
Octects (Tx) (kB/s)
Byte Sent
Pkts (Tx)
Frame Sent
Broadcasts (Tx)
Out Broadcast Frame
Multicasts (Tx)
Out Multicast Frame
Utilization (Tx) (%)
OAM
WARNING Command available only if the ETH OAM Functionality is enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).
The OAM command manages the OAM-FM Domain of the equipment, the maintenance points of the OAMFM Domain, which the equipment belongs to, and allows monitoring the path of a service instance (VLAN)
by using the Continuity Check (CCM), LoopBack (LBM) and Link Trace (LTM) messages.
Operations
OAM-FM DOMAIN
Verify the characteristics of the OAM-FM Domain of the equipment
Define an OAM-FM Domain for equipment
Remove the OAM-FM Domain of equipment
WARNING ALCplus2e equipment manages a single Domain. The name or the level of an
OAM-FM Domain associated to equipment cannot be modified. To change one or both the
parameters, it is necessary to remove the current Domain and to define a new one.
MAINTENANCE POINTS
Verify the status of the VLANs as regards the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality
Associate a MA to a VLAN
Associate a MEP to a VLAN
Remove a MA/MEP from a VLAN
WARNING The definition of a MIP takes place after the definition of the MA. In fact, the
definition of a MA in a VLAN, which a MEP is not defined for, corresponds to the automatic
definition of a MIP for every Switch port which the specific VLAN is enabled for.
CCM
MESSAGES MANAGEMENT
Enable/disable the transmission of CCM messages for a MEP

Modify the time interval used for the transmission of the CCM messages for a MEP
REMOTE MEP
TABLE
Verify the table of remote MEPs (RMep table)

Insert a remote MEP in the RMep table
Enable a remote MEP of the RMep table
Disable a remote MEP of the RMep table
Remove a remote MEP from RMep table
LBM
AND
LTM
MESSAGES MANAGEMENT
Send one or more LoopBack messages (LBM) to a remote MIP/MEP

Trace the path, through the LTM messages, between local MEP and remote MEP of the
same VLAN
GUI
OAM contextual area

See also
OAM-FM Ethernet functionality (info)
Verify the characteristics of the OAM-FM Domain of the equipment

1. Select Maintenance > OAM.

The Domain parameter indicates the name of the OAM-FM Domain of the equipment.
The Level parameter indicates the level of the OAM-FM Domain of the equipment.
455
If the fields are empty and available for the setting, this means that no OAM-FM Domain is defined for
the equipment.
Define an OAM-FM Domain for equipment

WARNING Before to define an OAM domain, checks that the control of the 802.1Q Tag for the LANs is ac-
tivated (802.1q Setting parameter- value different from Disabled).

2. Into the Domain box, type the OAM-FM Domain name of the equipment (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 20 characters).
3. Into the Level box, type a number between 0 and 7 according to the priority level you wish to assign
to the OAM-FM Domain (0: lowest priority, 7: highest priority).
4. Press Create and confirm.
The equipment is associated to the set OAM-FM Domain.
In the contextual area, the OAM-FM MA/MEP table is displayed.
Remove the OAM-FM Domain of equipment

WARNING An OAM-FM Domain cannot be removed if at least one MA is present.

The equipment is not associated to an OAM-FM Domain any more.
In the contextual area, the OAM-FM MA/MEP table is removed.
Verify the status of the VLANs as regards the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality
WARNING Operation available only if the OAM-FM Domain has been defined for the equipment.

The OAM-FM MA/MEP table displays the status of the VLANs in relation to the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality.
The empty table means that no VLAN has been defined for the equipment (see Verify the existing virtual
LANs).
The management VLAN and VLAN used for the Ring Protection mode (G.8032) or for the PWE3 function
are not displayed in the table.
Generally the static VLANs are not available in the list, except for the VLANs automatically created
after the configuration indicated here below:
456
A LAN and an Radio port are configured to allow the transit of the packets (Port Based VLAN).
The LAN is in Secure mode and with Provider Tag inserted in the packets in selective mode on
port basis (Selective Provider Tag: Port-Based).
Associate a MA to a VLAN
WARNING ALCplus2e equipment manages a MA for every single VLAN.
A MA can be associated to a VLAN even during the creation of a MEP (see Associate a MEP to a VLAN).
The definition of a MA for a VLAN, which a MEP is not defined for, corresponds to the automatic definition
of a MIP for every Switch port which the specific VLAN is enabled for.
2. Select the VLAN which you wish to associate the MA to.
3. Press Bind MA.
4. Set, in the MA Name box, the name you wish to assign to the Maintenance Association (alphanumeric
string of minimum 1 and maximum 15 characters).
The system suggests, in the box, the name of the VLAN to which you are assigning the MA. This name
can be changed at ones wish.
5. Press Ok and confirm.
In the OAM-FM MA/MEP table, for the selected VLAN, the MA just created is pointed out (MA Name column).
Associate a MEP to a VLAN

WARNING ALCplus2e equipment manages a single MEP per MA/VLAN and the maximum number of MEP is
32.
2. Select the VLAN which you wish to associate the MEP to.
A MEP can be associated to a VLAN which a MA has not been associated to yet or to a VLAN which a
MA is already associated to. In this last case, the port of the Ethernet Switch which the MEP will be
associated to, will be automatically converted from intermediate maintenance point (MIP) to end maintenance point (MEP).
3. Press Bind MEP.
4. Set, in the box MEP Id, the identifying number you wish to assign to MEP (value between 1 and 8191).
The system suggests, in the box, the identifying number of the VLAN which you are assigning the MEP
to. This value can be changed at ones wish.
The identifying number of MEP must be univocal in the network for every specific VLAN.
5. Set, in the box MA Name, the name you wish to assign to the MA which MEP belongs to (alphanumeric
string of minimum 1 and maximum 15 characters).
The system suggests, in the box, the name of the VLAN which you are assigning the MEP to. This name
can be changed at ones wish.
If a MA has been already assigned to the VLAN (see Associate a MA to a VLAN), the parameter will be
already set and cannot be changed.
6. Set, in the box CCM Interval, the time interval used for the transmission of the continuity check messages (CCM):
1s. 1 second.
10s. 10 seconds (default value).
1m. 1 minute.
10m. 10 minutes.
Remember that, for a correct operation of the continuity check, the set CCM interval must be the same
for the MEPs of the same VLAN.
7. Set, in the box LAN(s), the Ethernet port where you wish to map the MEP.
The description of the values the same depicted for the OAM-FM MA/MEP table.
457
The ports of the Ethernet Switch not enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of
the specific VLAN cannot be selected (disabled port).
If the equipment if an Ethernet element of a node, the LAN 1 and LAN 2, even if enabled to the transit
of the packets, cannot be selected because not available for the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality.
8. Set, in the box Direction, the direction where you wish to send the CCM messages:
Up ( ). CCM messages are sent, as they were in input from the considered port, to the other
Switch ports involved by the considered VLAN.
Down (
). CCM messages are sent in output from the selected port.

In the OAM-FM MA/MEP table, for the selected VLAN, the MA and/or MEP just created (MA Name, MEP
ID column).
The contextual area is expanded showing the RMEP tab, the LBM tab and the LTM tab.
If the message The selected port is neither aggregated (TRUNK/LAG) or electrically protected (ELP) is
displayed, the creation of MEP is failed because the Trunking modality (see Trunking mode (info)) or
the ELP modality (see Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) (info)) is enabled for the selected port.
Remove a MA/MEP from a VLAN


2. Select the VLAN to which you wish to remove the MA/MEP.
3. Press Unbind and confirm.
In the OAM-FM MA/MEP table, for the selected VLAN, the MA/MEP indication is removed.

WARNING Operation available only if a MEP is associated to the VLAN.

For the VLAN which a MEP is associated to, the CCM Status column (OAM-FM MA/MEP table) displays
the transmission status of the CCM messages.
2. To modify the transmission status of the CCM messages of a MEP, select the relevant box and then the
option:
Enable. The transmission of CCM messages is enabled.
Disable. The transmission of CCM messages is disabled.

For the VLAN which a MEP is associated to, the CCM Int. column (OAM-FM MA/MEP table) displays the
time interval used for the transmission of the CCM messages.
2. To modify the interval relevant of a MEP, select the relevant box and then the option:
458
1s. 1 second.
1m. 1 minute.
10m. 10 minutes.
Verify the table of remote MEPs (RMep table)


2. Select the VLAN to which is associated the local MEP whose relevant list of Remote MEPs you wish to
display.
The RMEP tab displays the RMep table.
Insert a remote MEP in the RMep table


display.
3. Press Add MEP.
4. Set, in the box MEP Id, the identifying number you wish to assign to the remote MEP (value between
1 and 8191).
The identifying number of a MEP must be univocal in the network for each specific VLAN.
A row with the new remote MEP in status Idle is added to the RMEP tab.
The operations the user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Idle and the conditions causing
the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another are depicted in Fig.15.
The MAC Address of the remote MEPs inserted by the operator is set to value zero.
Enable a remote MEP of the RMep table


display.
3. Select, in the RMEP tab, the remote MEPs in status Start or Idle you wish to enable.
4. Press Cross Check and confirm
The status of the selected remote MEPs changes from Start to Conn or from Idle to Start (see Fig.15).
If the operation is not executed (the status of the remote MEP continues to be Start or Idle) and the
alarm OAM-FM MA:<MA name> MEP Id: <local MEP identifier> Config. Mismatch Alarm is active, this
459
means that the considered remote MEP has raised or has contribute to raise the alarm because one of
its configuration parameters (Domain name, MA name or CCM interval) is different from the corresponding parameter set for the local MEP.
Align the configuration of remote MEP with that of the local MEP and repeat this procedure to enable
the remote MEP.
Disable a remote MEP of the RMep table


display.
3. Select, in the RMEP tab, the remote MEPs in status Conn. you wish to disable.
The status of the selected remote MEPs changes from Conn. to Start.
Remove a remote MEP from RMep table


display.
3. Select, in the RMEP tab, the remote MEPs in status Failed, Start or Idle you wish to remove.
The selected remote MEPs are removed from the RMep table.
Send one or more LoopBack messages (LBM) to a remote MIP/MEP


2. Select the VLAN to which is associated the MEP from which you wish to sent the LBM message.
3. Select the LBM tab.
4. Set the maintenance point, which you wish to send the LBM message, in one of the following modes:
Select the option Use Found MEP.

Select, in the Remote MEP Selection table, the remote MEP in status Conn. which you wish to
send the LTM messages to.
If you select a MEP in status Start or Failed, the operation is refused.
Select the option Use MAC Address.

Set, in the box MAC Address, the physical address of the equipment where there is the remote
MEP or the MIP which you wish to send the LoopBack message to.
460
5. Set, in the box Messages to Send, the number of LoopBack messages you wish to send (value between1
and 5).
6. Press Run Test and confirm.
During the operation, the box:
Test Status displays the wording Running.
Sent Messages displays the progress of the number of sent messages (meaningful if a value different from 1 is set in the box Messages to Send).
At the end of the operation, the box/area:
Statistics indicates the statistics of the LBRs messages (LoopBack Replies - LBM messages received by the maintenance point as reply to the sent LBM messages) (see LBM tab).
Test Status displays the test result (see LBM tab).
Sent Messages indicates the number of sent LBM messages.
same VLAN

2. Select the VLAN to which is associated the MEP from which you wish to sent the LTM messages to trace
the path between the local MEP and a remote MEP of the same VLAN.
3. Select the LTM tab.
The Link Trace area indicates, if available, the last traced Link Trace.
4. Set the remote MEP, which you wish to send the LTM messages to, in one of the following modes:
Select the option Use Found MEP.

Select, in the Found MEP(s) & Selection table, the remote MEP in status Conn. which you wish
to send the LTM messages to.
If you select a MEP in status Start or Failed, the operation is refused.
Select the option Use MAC Address.

Set, in the box MAC Address, the physical address of the equipment containing the remote MEP
which you wish to send the Link Trace messages to.
5. Press Run Test and confirm.

At the end of the operation, the Link Trace area displays the list of the MAC Addresses of MIP-MEP
crossed to reach the remote MEP with the indication of the distance in Hops from the source MEP.
461
OAM contextual area

The contextual area shows the OAM-FM Domain of the equipment, the maintenance points of the OAM-FM
Domain, which the equipment belongs to, and allows monitoring the path of a service instance (VLAN) by
using the Continuity Check (CCM), LoopBack (LBM) and Link Trace (LTM) messages.
Parameters/Tabs
OAM-FM Domain area. OAM-FM Domain configuration.

OAM-FM MA/MEP table. Status and configuration of the VLANs in relation to the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality.
RMEP tab. Remote MEPs table.
LBM tab. LoopBack messages configuration.
LTM tab. Link Trace messages configuration.
Push-button

See also
OAM-FM Domain area

The area shows the characteristics of the OAM-FM Domain of the equipment.
Parameters
Domain. Name of the OAM-FM Domain.

Level. Level of the OAM-FM Domain:
0. Lowest priority.
If the fields are empty and available for the setting, this means that no OAM-FM Domain is defined for the equipment.
Push-button
Create. Define an OAM-FM Domain for equipment.

Remote. Remove the OAM-FM Domain of equipment.
OAM-FM MA/MEP table

WARNING Table available only if the OAM-FM Domain has been defined.
The management VLAN and VLAN used for the Ring Protection mode (G.8032) or for the PWE3 function
are not displayed in the table.
Generally the static VLANs are not available in the list, except for the VLANs automatically created after
the configuration indicated here below:
462
A LAN and an Radio port are configured to allow the transit of the packets (Port Based VLAN).
The LAN is in Secure mode and with Provider Tag inserted in the packets in selective mode on
port basis (Selective Provider Tag: Port-Based).
The table shows the status of the VLANs in relation to the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality.
Every row of the table corresponds to one VLAN.
Parameters
Label. VLAN identifier and name.

MA Name. Name of the MA associated to the VLAN.
If the field has a valid value, a MA is associated to the VLAN (VLAN for which the control of the
service instance is active - intermediate maintenance point).
If the field has value ---, no MA/MEP is associated to the VLAN (VLAN for which the control of
the service instance is not active).
MEP ID. Identifier of the MEP associated to the VLAN.
If the field has a valid value, a MA and a MEP area associated to the VLAN (VLAN for which the
control of the service instance is active - end maintenance point).
If the field has value ---, no MEP is associated to the VLAN.
CCM Status. Transmission status of CCM messages:
Enable. The transmission of CCM messages is enabled.
Disable. The transmission of CCM messages is not enabled.
CCM Int. Transmission interval of CCM messages:
1s. 1 second.
1min. 1 minute.
10min. 10 minutes.
LAN.../Port.... Status of the ports of the Ethernet Switch as regards the transit of packets with
VLan ID equal to that of the VLAN:
----. The port is not enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that
of the virtual Lan.
Tagged. The port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that
of the virtual Lan. To the packets without Tag, in output from this port, is automatically added the Tag composed by the information:
Of priority; the value is defined in the box Default Priority of the origin port of
the packet itself.
Of Vlan ID which corresponds to the default Vlan ID (Default Vid box) of the
origin port of the packet.
Untagged. The port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that
of the virtual Lan. The Tag 802.1Q (information of priority and VLAN identifier) is removed to the packets in output from the port.
Unmodified. The port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to
that of the virtual Lan. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) are not removed
or added to the packets in output from the port.
If a MEP is mapped on a port, the direction where the CCM messages are transmitted is pointed
out:
( ). The CCM messages are sent as they were in input from the considered or to the
other Switch ports involved by the considered VLAN.
). The CCM messages are sent in output from the selected port.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the LAN 1 and LAN 2 will not be present as not
available for the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality.
Push-button
Bind MA. Associate a MA to a VLAN.

Bind MEP. Associate a MEP to a VLAN.
Unbind. Remove a MA/MEP from a VLAN.
The availability of the push-buttons depends on the status of the selected VLAN. If a MA or a
MEP is associated to the VLAN, only the Unbind push-button will be available. On the other
463
hand, if no MA or MEP is associated to the VLAN, the Bind MA and Bind MEP push-buttons will
be available.
The identifier and the name of the selected VLan are dynamically displayed next to the pushbuttons, between square brackets.
See also

RMEP tab
WARNING Tab available only if the selected VLAN has a MEP associated.
The tab shows the table of Remote MEPs (RMep table).

Every line of the table represents a remote MEP.
Parameters
MEP Id. Identifier of the remote MEP.

MAC Address. MAC address (Media Access Control) of the equipment where the remote MEP is
present.
The field value equal to zero means that remote MEP has been manually inserted by the operator
and local MEP has not received a CCM message from the specific remote MEP yet (see Fig.15).
MEP State. Status of the remote MEP:
Idle. Initial status of the remote MEP just after its manual insertion in table.
Start. Initial status of the remote MEP just after it is manually inserted in the table or
status assumed by the remote MEP after it is enabled (remote MEP manually inserted)
or disabled.
Conn. Status the remote MEP reaches after an enabling command or after the first
CCM message sent by the specific remote MEP.
Failed. Status the remote MEP reaches when local MEP does not receive (along a period of 2,5 times the CCM interval) a CCM message from the specific remote MEP.
The operations the user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Start, Conn. or Failed and
the conditions which cause the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another are depicted
in Fig.15.
RDI State. Alarm status of the remote MEP acquired from the field RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) present in the CCM messages:
Active. The remote MEP is alarmed.
Not Active. The remote MEP is not alarmed.
Parameter meaningful only for the remote MEPs in status Conn.

Push-button
Add MEP. Insert a remote MEP in the RMep table.

Cross Check. Enable a remote MEP of the RMep table.
Remove. Disable a remote MEP of the RMep table or Remove a remote MEP from RMep table.
Refresh. Update the information present in the table.
The identifier and the name of the selected VLan are dynamically displayed next to the pushbuttons, between square brackets.
464
LBM tab
The tab shows the parameters for the management of LoopBack (LBM) messages.
Parameters
Remote MEP Selection area. This area contains the parameters to set the maintenance point
which the LBM must be transmitted to:
Table. Each row of the table represents a remote MEP. For each remote MEP is displayed in the column:
ID. Identifier of the remote MEP.
MAC Address. MAC address of the equipment where the remote MEP is present.
State. Status of remote MEP. The description of the status of remote MEP is
the same depicted in Fig.15.
Table available only if the option Use Found MEP is selected.
MAC Address. Physical address of the equipment containing the remote maintenance
points.
Parameter available only if the option Use MAC Address is selected.
Selection. Maintenance point:
Use Found MEP. Remote MEP selected in the table present in the Remote MEP
Selection area.
Use MAC Address. Remote MEP or MIP present in the equipment whose physical address is set in MAC Address field.
Test area. This area contains the parameters necessary to set the test execution modality, the
result and the relevant statistics:
Messages to Send. Number of LoopBack messages you wish to send.
Sent Messages. During the test displays the progress of the number of sent messages
(meaningful if a value different from 1 is set in the box Messages to Send).
Statistics. At the end of the test, this area indicates the statistics of the LBRs messages (LoopBack Replies - LBM messages received by the maintenance point as reply
to the sent LBM messages):
Valid. Number of received valid packets.
Out Of Order. Number of packets received out of sequence.
Bad MSDU. Number of received packets with unknown format.
Test Status. Status/result of the test. Box with colour/wording:
Yellow - Running. Test in progress.
Green - OK. Test completed with positive result: the maintenance point has
correctly replied to the LBM messages (OAM-FM packets) sent by the local
MEP.
Red - Failed. Test completed with negative result: the maintenance point has
not correctly replied to the LBM messages (OAM-FM packets) sent by the local
MEP.
Grey - Stopped. Test not in progress.
Push-button
Run Test. Send one or more LoopBack messages (LBM) to a remote MIP/MEP.
The identifier and the name of the selected VLan are dynamically next to the push-buttons, between square brackets.
465
LTM tab
The tab shows the parameters for the management of Link Trace (LTM) messages.
Parameters
Found MEP(s) & Selection area. This area contains the parameters used to set the remote
MEP which the Link Trace messages must be transmitted to:
Table. Each row of the table represents a remote MEP. For each remote MEP is displayed in the column:
ID. Identifier of the remote MEP.
MAC Address. MAC address of the equipment where the remote MEP is present.
State. Status of remote MEP. The description of the status of remote MEP is
the same depicted in Fig.15.
Table available only if the option Use Found MEP is selected.
MAC Address. Physical address of the equipment containing the remote MEP.
Selection. Maintenance point:
Parameter available only if the option Use MAC Address is selected.
Use Found MEP. Remote MEP selected in the table present in the Found MEP(s)
& Selection area.
Use MAC Address. Remote MEP present in the equipment whose physical address is set in the MAC Address field.
Link Trace area. At the end of the operation, the Link Trace area displays the list of the MAC
Addresses of MIP-MEP crossed to reach the remote MEP with the indication of the distance in
Hops from the source MEP:
Table. List with the identifiers of the RMeps which has replied to the LTM message.
Column:
[RMEP] MAC. Type of maintenance point, identifier (only for MEPs) and physical address of the equipment where the maintenance point is present:
[*] <physical address>. Intermediate maintenance point (MIP) and MAC

address of the equipment where MIP is present.
[<identifier>] <physical address>. End maintenance point (MEP), relevant

identifier and MAC address of the equipment containing the MEP.
Hops. Position of the specific maintenance point with respect to the local MEP:
1. First maintenance point after the local MEP.
2. Second maintenance point after the local MEP.
3. Third maintenance point after the local MEP and so on.
When the heading of the column is selected, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing alphanumerical order with respect to the Hops column and the arrow with
the tip upwards is displayed. On the next selection, the rows are sorted in decreasing
order (the arrow with the tip downwards is displayed) an so on.
Destination MAC Address. Physical address of the equipment containing the remote
MEP.
Destination MEP ID. Identifier of the remote MEP.
Push-button
Run Test. Trace the path, through the LTM messages, between local MEP and remote MEP of
the same VLAN.
The identifier and the name of the selected VLan are dynamically next to the push-buttons, between square brackets.
466
OAM-FM Ethernet functionality

OAM-FM Ethernet functionality implemented in equipment managed by WEB LCT
OAM-FM
ELEMENTS
OAM-FM Domain
MA (Maintenance Association)
MEP (Maintenance End Point)
MIP (Maintenance Intermediate Point)
Remote MEPs
CCM (Continuity Check Message)
LBM (LoopBack Message)
LTM (Link Trace Message)
Example of configuration of a OAM-FM Domain for a set of ALCplus2e equipment
OAM-FM Ethernet functionality

The OAM (Operations, Administration and Maintenance) Ethernet functionality represents the set of processes, activities, rules, etc. which allow managing the operation, the monitoring and the fixing of troubles
in the Ethernet network.
These services are defined by the following reference specifications, which you must refer to for the detailed description of the OAM Ethernet functionality:
ITU-T Recommendation Y.1731 - OAM Functions and Mechanisms for Ethernet based Networks.
IEEE Standard 802.1ag - IEEE Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks Virtual
Bridged Local Area Networks Amendment 5: Connectivity Fault Management.
OAM-FM Ethernet functionality implemented in equipment managed by WEB LCT

Among the above mentioned specifications, ALCplus2e equipment implement the functionality relevant to
Connectivity Fault Management (CFM).
This functionality has the purpose to monitor, in a Layer-2 Ethernet network, the end to end availability of
a service (implemented by a VLAN) and to monitor, in case of out-of-service, tools (LoopBack and Link
Trace) helping the operator in the analysis of the trouble.
Through WEB LCT application of ALCplus2e, it is possible:
Define the network segment to monitor:
Define the OAM-FM Domain of maintenance (name and level).
Define, for each VLAN (service) configured on the equipment, the maintenance points necessary
to diagnostic the connection troubles within a maintenance Domain:
Define, for every service (VLAN), a Maintenance Association (MA) to monitor.
Define the end points to monitor the maintenance area (MEP).
Define the intermediate monitoring points of the maintenance area (MIP).
Manage, for every local MEP, the relevant table of Remote MEPs (RMep table).
Manage the Continuity Check Messages (CCM) which allow monitoring end-to-end a service instance (VLAN) pointing out any interruption.
Manage the LoopBack Messages (LBM) which, after the detection of a fault, allow isolating the
point where the fault occurred.
Manage the Link Trace Messages (LTM) which allow tracing the path followed by an OAM-FM
packet between two different MEPs within the same VLAN.
467
OAM-FM Domain
The term OAM-FM Domain defines a network or a part of a network owned and managed by a single entity
(operator) and where the connection troubles can be managed.
The OAM-FM Domain is characterized by a name and a layer.
The name identifies the Domain.
The layer is used to define the hierarchical relationship among Domains. Greatest is the Domain, highest
will be the layer. In fact, the layer corresponds to a value from 0 to 7, where 0 represents the lowest layer
(lowest priority) and 7 the highest layer (higher priority).
All the other entities defined by OAM refer to the Domain: MA, MIP and MEP.
ALCplus2e equipment manages a single OAM-FM Domain.
The OAM-FM Domain must be defined in any equipment you wish to belong to the same OAM-FM maintenance segment (see Define an OAM-FM Domain for equipment).
Once an OAM-FM Domain has been defined, its name or layer cannot be changed. To do this, the Domain
must be removed and a new one must be created with the new values.
An OAM-FM Domain cannot be removed if at least one VLAN exists, which one MA has been defined for.
This Domain is transparent as regards the OAM-FM messages with higher priority (messages to/from the
higher Domains), while stops all the messages with lower priority (messages to/from lower Domains).
MA
The term MA (Maintenance Association) identifies the service (VLAN) you wish to monitor.
Then, a Maintenance Association is coupled to a user-defined VLAN; creating a MA means enabling the control of the specified VLAN.
Within a specific OAM-FM Domain, there are as many MAs as the VLANs the user wishes to monitor.
ALCplus2e equipment manages one MA per each VLAN.
On equipment the definition of a MA can be executed by the user, through a specific command (see Associate a MA to a VLAN), or by the system, once the user has defined a MEP (see Associate a MEP to a VLAN).
The definition of a MA in a VLAN, which a MEP is not defined for, corresponds to the automatic definition
of a MIP per every single port of the Switch which the specific VLAN is enabled for.
Once a MA has been defined, its name cannot be changed. To do this, the MA must be removed from the
VLAN and a new MA must be created with the new values.
The removal of a MA involves even the automatic removal of the MEP, if present, from the VLAN.
MEP
The term MEP (Maintenance End Point) defines the entity, associated to a specific service instance (VLAN),
representing the end point of a MA.
Fig.14 shows an example.
MEP can generate and terminate OAM-FM messages regarding the fault management and the performance
monitoring.
In fact, MEP is the entity set for the control of the service (VLAN) as, within the OAM-FM maintenance segment, the set of MEPs created in the end points of a VLAN allows controlling the correct end to end operation of the VLANs.
The control is achieved by means of the periodic transmission, by each MEP, of the CCM messages and of
the control of the reception of the same messages by the Remote MEPs.
ALCplus2e equipment manages a single MEP per each MA (VLAN) and a maximum of 32 MEPs (32 MA/
VLAN).
MEP must be defined only in ALCplus2e equipment acting as end points of the same VLAN (see Associate
a MEP to a VLAN).
The definition of a MEP for a VLAN involves even the automatic definition of the MA, if this has not been
already done.
468
The definition of a MEP requires the setting of:
A numeric identifier, which must be univocal within the network for the specific VLAN.
The name of the relevant MA (only if not already defined).
The time interval used for the transmission of the continuity check messages (CCM).
Once MEP has been created, the transmission of the CCM messages is disabled. They must be
enabled by the user (see Enable/disable the transmission of CCM messages for a MEP).
The port of the Ethernet Switch, where you wish to map the MEP, and the direction to which you
wish to send the CCMs:
Up ( ). CCM messages are sent, as they were in input from the considered port, to the
other Switch ports involved by the considered VLAN.
Down (
). CCM messages are sent in output from the selected port.
Once a MEP has been defined, its configuration cannot be changed, exception of the interval (see Modify
the time interval used for the transmission of the CCM messages for a MEP). To do this, remove the MEP
from the VLAN and create a new one with the new configuration.
The removal of a MEP involves event the automatic removal of the relevant MA from the VLAN.
ALCplus2e equipment, for every single MEP, manages the following alarms:
MEP Fail - OAM-FM MA:<MA name> MEP Id:<local MEP identifier> Fail Alarm
The alarm becomes active when at least one of the remote MEPs present in the RMep table of
the specific local MEP is in status Start or Failed.
MEP Configuration Mismatch - OAM-FM MA:<MA name> MEP Id:<local MEP identifier> Config.
Mismatch Alarm.
The alarm becomes active when the local MEP receives at least one CCM message, containing
configuration data different from those set for the local MEP itself, from one of the remote MEPs.
With configuration data we mean: Domain name, MA name, CCM interval.
When this alarm is active, the remote MEP, which has raised the alarm, cannot be enabled in
the RMep table.
Fig.14 OAM-FM functionality - Maintenance points
Domain: Test
A.1
Switch
1
2
A
3
4
MEP 10
VLAN Id:20
MA: Vlan 20
A.2
A.3
Switch
1
2
3
4
MIP
A.6
Switch
MEP 11
1
2
A
3
4
A.5
1
2
3
4
Switch
MIP
Switch
1
2
A
3
4
A.4
Switch
1
2
3
4
MEP 12
A.7
Switch
1
2
3
4
MIP
The term MIP (Maintenance Intermediate Point) defines a passive entity, associated to a specific service
instance (VLAN).
MIPs are defined on transit equipment for the monitored VLAN, intermediate among the end MEPs.
Fig.14 shows an example.
469
MIP can reply to the LoopBack (LBM) messages, sent in unicast by a MEP (MAC Address), and to the Link
Trace (LTM) messages, sent by a MEP, but it cannot generate requests of LoopBack and Link Trace towards
other MIP or MEP.
MIP is defined by the operator in ALCplus2e equipment which acts as intermediate points of the same VLAN
and the same OAM-FM maintenance segment.
The definition of a MIP takes place after the definition of the MA (see Associate a MA to a VLAN).
In fact, the definition of a MA within a VLAN for which a MEP is not defined, corresponds to the automatic
definition of a MIP for every single port of the Switch for which the specific VLAN is enabled.
Once a MA/MIP has been defined, its name cannot be changed. To do this, remove the MA/MIP from the
VLAN and create a new one with the new name.
Remote MEPs
The term Remote MEP (Maintenance End Point) defines entities which represent the other end points (remote points) of a VLAN with respect to the local MEP.
Example. Referring to Fig.14, if you are connected by WEB LCT to equipment A.1, the local MEP will be
MEP 10 while the remote MEPs will be MEP 11 and MEP 12.
Otherwise, if you are connected by WEB LCT to equipment A.4, the local MEP will be MEP 11 while the
remote MEPs will be MEP 10 and MEP 12.
A table of the remote MEPs (RMep table) is associated to every local MEP (then to every MA/VLAN).
The system records, in this table, the remote MEPs from which the local MEP waits for a CCM message.
If the CCM message does not arrive within a timeout period equal to 2,5 CCM interval set for the local MEP,
the remote MEP is set to status Failed and the relevant alarm is activated (OAM-FM MA: MEP Id: Fail
Alarm).
Example. Referring to Fig.14, if you are connected by WEB LCT to equipment A.1, MEP 11 and MEP 12 will
be recorded in the RMep table (relevant to MEP 10).
The transmission of CCM messages is enabled at intervals of 10 sec between a transmission and the next
one.
If, after 25 sec. (2,5 times the CCM interval), MEP 10 does not receive a CCM message, for example from
MEP 11, in the RMep table MEP 11 will be set to status Failed and the alarm OAM-FM MA: Vlan 20 MEP Id:
10 Fail Alarm will be activated, pointing out that a Remote Mep in Failed is present in the RMep table of
the local MEP 10.
The remote MEP remains in status Failed until the local MEP receives a valid CCM message from the remote
MEP or the user removes the remote MEP from the table.
The recording of remote MEPs in the RMep table consists of two parts: the entry in the table and the enabling of the remote MEP (operation necessary so that the remote MEPs are acknowledged as valid end
points by the local MEP).
The entry of MEP in the table takes place:
a. AUTOMATICALLY, after the reception of the first CCM sent by a remote MEP.
For these remote MEPs, the table indicates the identifier of the remote MEP and the MAC Address
of the equipment which the remote MEP belongs to.
The enabling for this type of remote MEPs must be executed manually by the operator (see
Fig.15).
b. MANUALLY, after a command of the operator, who adds the remote MEP.
For these remote MEPs, the table indicates the identifier of the remote MEP (provided by the
operator) while the MAC Address is set to zero.
After the creation, the remote MEP must be manually set to status Start. The passage of Remote
MEP to the status connected (Conn) will take place when the equipment receives the first CCM
sent by the specific remote MEP (see Fig.15).
When the first CCM is received, the field MAC Address gets the value of the MAC Address of the
remote equipment, source of CCM.
The status of a remote MEP is pointed out in the table by the parameter MEP State and can be:
470
Idle. Initial status of the remote MEP just after its manual insertion in table.
The operations a user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Idle are pointed out in Fig.15.
Start. Initial status of the remote MEP just after it is automatically inserted in the table or status
assumed by the remote MEP after it is enabled (remote MEP manually inserted) or disabled.
The operations a user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Start and the conditions which
cause the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another one change depending on the
type of insertion of the MEP in the RMep table (automatic or manual) as depicted in Fig.15.
Conn. Status the remote MEP reaches from the status Start after an enabling command or at
the reception of the first CCM message sent by the specific remote MEP, if previously recorded
by the operator (see Fig.15).
The operations a user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Conn and the conditions which
cause the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another one are depicted in Fig.15.
Failed. Status the remote MEP reaches when the local MEP does not receive (for a period of 2,5
times the CCM interval) a CCM message from the specific remote MEP, as described at the beginning of the chapter.
The operations a user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Failed and the conditions
which cause the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another one are depicted in Fig.15.
After the (automatic or manual) insertion of a remote MEP in the table, it can be removed only manually
by the operator.
In WEB LCT, the RMep table of a local MEP can be displayed only after the local MEP has been associated
to a VLAN (see Associate a MEP to a VLAN).
Fig.15 OAM-FM - Management of the status of the Remote MEPs in the RMep table
The remote MEP is automatically inserted in

RMep table when the local MEP receives the first
CCM message sent by remote MEP
The remote MEP is manually

inserted in the RMep table by the user (1).
Remote MEP status: Idle
The user enables
the remote MEP
(2)
Remote MEP status

Start
The user
disables the
remote MEP
(3)
The user enables

the remote MEP
(2)
Remote MEP status

Start
The user
disables the
remote MEP
(3)
Remote MEP status

Conn.
Local MEP does
not receive the
CCMs from remote
MEP anymore
Local MEP
receives
again the
CCMs from
remote MEP
Remote MEP status

Failed
The user deletes
the remote MEP (4)
Removal of remote MEP

from the RMep table
Local MEP
receives the first
CCM sent by the
remote MEP
Remote MEP status
Conn.
Local MEP does
not receive the
CCMs from
remote MEP
anymore
Local MEP
receives
again the
CCMs from
remote MEP
The user
deletes the
remote MEP
(4)
Remote MEP status

Failed
The user deletes
the remote MEP (4)
Removal of remote MEP

from the RMep table
(1) Insert a remote MEP in the RMep table

(2) Enable a remote MEP of the RMep table
(3) Disable a remote MEP of the RMep table
471
(4) Remove a remote MEP from RMep table
CCM
The term CCM (Continuity Check Message) defines the messages which constantly monitor the path of the
service instance pointing out the connection troubles.
CCMs are multicast messages sent by a MEP entity to the other MEP entities belonging to the same MA
(Remote MEPs).
Moreover, CCMs are unidirectional messages (do not need a reply) and are periodically sent.
Within a MA which n MEPs belongs to, every MEP periodically sends a CCM in multicast; every MEP waits
to periodically receive n-1 CCMs.
The missed reception of a CCM by a MEP means the presence of a fault in the path of the service instance
(VLAN).
When a MEP does not receive a CCM message, it goes to status Failed: this status is notified to the other
MEPs setting the field RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) present in the sent CCM message.
In this way, all the MEP entities know the existence of a fault along their own path.
The CCM management in ALCplus2e equipment is strictly bound to the MEP management.
In fact, the configuration parameters of the CCM messages must be set when MEP is created. The user is
required to define:
The time interval used for the transmission of CCMs (CCM interval).
For a correct operation of the CCM messages, the CCM interval must be the same for all the
MEPs of the same VLAN.
The direction you wish to send the CCM messages to.
Once the MEP has been defined, the enabling of the transmission of CCMs is required.
Then, the user can disable and enable again the transmission of the CCM messages at his wish (see Enable/
disable the transmission of CCM messages for a MEP) and modify the interval (see Modify the time interval
used for the transmission of the CCM messages for a MEP).
The direction cannot be modified. To do this, remove the MEP from the VLAN and create a new one with
the new values.
In ALCplus2e equipment, the CCM messages (OAM-FM packets) are routed on the VLANs only if the control
of Tag VLan Id is active (Fallback or Secure).
In the CCM messages sent in multicast (OAM-FM packets) is used as:
Destination address (Destination MAC address): 01-80-C2-00-00-3x with x from 0 to 7 according to the layer of OAM-FM Domain
Source address (Source MAC address): physical address of the equipment which has generated
the CCM message (MAC Address associated to the management LAN of the controller).
LBM
The term LBM (LoopBack Message) defines the LoopBack messages which, once a fault has been detected
through the CCM messages, allow isolate the point where the fault has occurred.
The operation modalities of OAM-FM LoopBack is similar to IP ping.
From a MEP an OAM-FM packet is sent in unicast with a request of Echo Request (LoopBack Message) to a
MIP or MEP belonging to the same MA. The MEP waits for the relevant reply Echo Reply (Loopback Replies)
sent in unicast from the remote maintenance point.
The missed reply to a LBM message indicates the presence of a fault between the MEP which has sent the
message and the maintenance point which has not replied to the message.
The LBM messages are sent after a command from operator (see Send one or more LoopBack messages
(LBM) to a remote MIP/MEP).
The transmission of LoopBack messages requires the setting of:
472
The local MEP, which you wish to send the messages from.
The remote maintenance point, belonging to the same Domain and the same MA of the local
MEP, which you wish to send the messages to. The setting of a:
MEP can be done choosing the MEP in the RMep table or setting the MAC Address of the
equipment where the remote MEP is defined.
MIP can be done setting the MAC Address of the equipment where MIP is defined.
Number of messages (OAM-FM packets - Echo Request) you wish to send in sequence with a
single sending confirmation (minimum 1 maximum 5).
At the end of the operation, a statistics is available with the number of sent packets (Sent Messages), the
number of received correct packets (Valid), the number of packets received out of sequence (Out Of Order)
and the number of packets received with unknown format (Bad MSDU).
ALCplus2e equipment, in the LBM messages sent in unicast, uses as:
Destination address (Destination MAC address): physical address of the addressee of the LoopBack message.
the LoopBack message.
LTM
The term LTM (Link Trace Message) defines the Link Trace messages which allow determining the path
covered by an OAM-FM packet between the end-points of a service instance (VLAN).
The operating modality of OAM-FM Link Trace is similar to TraceRoute IP.
A Link Trace message is sent in multicast from a MEP (local) to a remote MEP, whose physical address must
be known.
In the Link Trace messages, the TTL (Time To Live) field, which indicates the number of equipment of the
specific OAM-FM Domain the packet can pass through before being declared expired, is properly configured.
The LTM messages are captured by all the MEPs-MIPs installed on the same VLAN on the equipment
touched to reach the destination MEP.
Every MEP-MIP, once the message has been intercepted, decreases the TTL field, replies to the originating
MEP with an unicast message and re-transmits the LTM message to the destination MEP.
This operation is repeated until the packet arrives to the addressee remote MEP.
At the end of the operation, the local MEP has acquired the list of the physical addresses (MAC Address) of
the equipment where the Link Trace messages have passed.
The LTM messages, to trace the path between two different MEPs of the same VLAN, are sent after a command by operator (see Trace the path, through the LTM messages, between local MEP and remote MEP of
the same VLAN).
To trace a path, the operator must set the two path ends:
Local MEP.
Remote MEP. This setting can be done choosing the MEP from the RMep table or setting the MAC
Address of the equipment whose remote MEP has been defined.
The remote MEP, to make the operation being successful, must be in status Conn. (see Fig.15).
Then the operator must send the LTM message (Run Test).
At the end of the operation, the Link Trace will contain the list of the MAC Addresses of the MIPs-MEPs
crossed to reach the remote MEP with the indication of the distance in Hops from the origin MEP.
The LTM messages are sent in multicast (OAM-FM packets), use as:
Destination address (Destination MAC address): 01-80-C2-00-00-3y with y from 80xF according to the layer of the OAM-FM Domain.
the Link Trace message.
473
Example of configuration of a OAM-FM Domain for a set of ALCplus2e equipment

Fig.16 shows an example of configuration of a maintenance OAM-FM area among four ALCplus2e equipment (A.1, A.2, A.3 and A.4). This area is used to monitor the end to end availability of VLAN 20.
Fig.16 OAM-FM - Example of configuration of a maintenance area
Domain: Test
A.1
Switch
1
2
A
3
4
MEP 10
VLAN Id:20
MA: Vlan 20
A.2
A.3
Switch
1
2
3
4
MIP
Switch
MEP 11
A.4
Switch
1
2
A
3
4
1
2
3
4
The steps to execute, through the WEB LCT application on every single equipment, are the following:
1. Configure the VLAN with identifier 20 on the 4 equipment (see Create a virtual Lan).
The VLAN must be operating, so beyond being created it is necessary:
Execute the suitable physical connections.
Activate the Ethernet ports involved by the VLAN (parameter Rate Control).
Configure properly the transit of the messages in input from the Ethernet port (parameter Port
Based VLAN).
Activate the control of Tag VLan Id (parameter Ingress Filtering Check).
2. Define the OAM-FM Domain with name Test (see Define an OAM-FM Domain for equipment) and layer
equal to 5.
The OAM-FM Domain must be defined in every equipment of the Domain Test and the name and the
layer of the Domain must be the same for all pieces of equipment.
3. Associate the MA with name Test 20 (see Associate a MA to a VLAN) to the VLAN.
The MA must be associated to VLAN 20 in every equipment of Domain Test and the name of MA must
be the same for all pieces of equipment.
4. Define the MEPs (see Associate a MEP to a VLAN) in the following way:
Only for equipment A.1, associate a MEP with the following characteristics to VLAN 20:
Identifier: 10
CCM Interval: 10 sec.
Ethernet port: LAN 3
Direction of CCMs: Down (
) - The CCM messages are sent in output from LAN 3.
Only for equipment A.4, associate a MEP with the following characteristics to VLAN 20:
Identifier: 11
CCM Interval: 10 sec.
Ethernet port: LAN 1
Direction of CCMs: Down (
) - Messages will be sent in output from LAN 1.
5. Enable the transmission of CCM messages for the MEPs created in the previous step (see Enable/
disable the transmission of CCM messages for a MEP).
After some seconds, the RMep table (see Remote MEPs) relevant to MEP 10 (equipment A.1) records
the MEP 11 in status Start and the alarm OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 10 Fail Alarm becomes active.
Differently, the RMep table relevant to MEP 11 (equipment A.4) records the MEP 10 in status Start and
the alarm OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 11 Fail Alarm becomes active.
6. In RMep tables, enable the remote MEPs (see Enable a remote MEP of the RMep table).
In the RMep table relevant to MEP 10 (equipment A.1), the remote MEP 11 changes to status Conn and
the OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 10 Fail Alarm alarm becomes inactive.
In similar mode, in the RMep table relevant to MEP 11 (equipment A.4), the remote MEP 10 changes
to status Conn and the OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 11 Fail Alarm alarm becomes inactive.
474
The configuration of the maintenance area depicted in Fig.16 is completed and the end to end monitoring
of VLAN 20 is active.
At this point, when a fault is detected (activation of the alarm OAM-FM Fail Alarm) or in order to execute
checks on the OAM-FM path, it is possible to use the LTM messages to verify the path of the VLAN or, when
the Fail alarm is detected, it is possible to use the LBM messages for the detection of the interruption point
of the VLAN.
475
S/N Meas
WARNING Command available only for equipment provided with radio.
The S/N Meas command displays the measure of the signal/noise ratio (S/N), which allows evaluating the
quality of the radio communication channel.
Operations
Verify the value of the S/N measure

Update the value of the S/N measure
GUI
S/N Meas. contextual area
Verify the value of the S/N measure

1. Select Maintenance > S/N Meas.

The S/N Meas. contextual area displays the value of the signal/noise ratio.
Update the value of the S/N measure

1. Select Maintenance > S/N Meas.

The S/N parameter indicates the value of the signal/noise ratio.
2. Press Refresh to update the value.
For the equipment in 1+0 configuration is present the Branch 1 area. For the equipment in 1+1 or
2x(1+0) configuration are present the Branch 1 (branch 1 S/N measure) and Branch 2 (branch 2 S/N
measure) areas.
When the measures of the two branches are present, the selection of the push-button updates both the
values.
476
S/N Meas. contextual area

The contextual area shows the value of the S/N measure.
Parameters
S/N. Value of the signal/noise ratio.

The measure is always in progress.
For the equipment in 1+0 configuration is present the Branch 1 area. For the equipment in 1+1
or 2x(1+0) configuration are present the Branch 1 (branch 1 S/N measure) and Branch 2
(branch 2 S/N measure) areas.
Push-button
Refresh. Update the value of the S/N measure

477
PRBS
The PRBS command manages the PRBS device.

Operations
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the PRBS measure
Activate/reset the PRBS measure
Deactivate the PRBS measure
Modify the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure
Enable/disable the used E1 signal for the measure
GUI
PRBS contextual area
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the PRBS measure
1. Select Maintenance > PRBS.

The PRBS contextual area displays the status and the configuration parameters of the PRBS measure.


2. Select the Start-Reset option (Start/Stop parameter).
The measure will be active until the user does not stop it.


2. Select the Stop option (Start/Stop parameter).


The Test Pattern parameter indicates the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure.
478
Fixed Word (AIS). A predefined fixed word is used for the measure.
2 ^ 15-1. The indicated algorithm is used for the measure.
2 ^ 23-1. The indicated algorithm is used for the measure.


The E1 Signal parameter indicates the status of the used E1 signal for the measure.
Enable. The PRBS is connected to one of the 2Mbit/s tributary of the IDU board (A or B) or of
the expansion (116 or 132).
The enabling of the E1 signal used for the measure determinates also the connector (2Mbit/s
tributary), which a measurement instrument can be connected to for the control of the error rate
by means of the PRBS functionality.
Disable. The PRBS is not physically connected to any stream/data channel.
3. ONLY if the enabled the E1 signal, set the tributary in the 2 Mbit/s Selection box.
If the Trib A or Trib B value is not available, the relevant tributary is used as synchronism in output
Only if the Enable option is selected a message is displayed informing that the set tributary is immediately enabled to the use and then a message warns you are executing a forcing and displays the current
setting of the timeout.
Enabling of the E1 signal activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on the forcing is inactive independently from the previous setting.
If the message Operation fail! Wrong user profile! is displayed, check that the user profile can enable
the tributary.
479
PRBS contextual area

The contextual area shows the status and the configuration parameters of the PRBS measure.
Parameters
BER. Dynamically updated BER value during the measure

Errors. Number of errors detected from the start of the measure
Elapsed Time. Time (expressed in day/hours/minutes/seconds) range after the measure active
Fail Alarms. Number of times that the Sync Loss Alarm activated from the start of the measure.
Sync Loss Alarm. Status of the PRBS Fail Alarm. The colour of the boxes represents the
alarm status and severity:
Start/Stop. Activation status of the measure:
Start-Reset. The PRBS measure is active.
Stop. The PRBS measure is deactivated.
Test Pattern. Type of pattern used for the measure:
Fixed Word (AIS). A predefined fixed word is used as pattern for the measure.
2 ^ 15-1. The indicated algorithm is used as pattern for the measure.
2 ^ 23-1. The indicated algorithm is used as pattern for the measure.
E1 Signal. Status of the E1 signal used for the measure:
Enable. The PRBS is connected to one of the 2Mbit/s tributary of the IDU board (A or
B) or of the expansion (116 or 132).
Disable. The PRBS is not physically connected to any stream.
2 Mbit/s Selection. Tributary used for the measure.

Parameter meaningful only if the Enable option (E1 Signal parameter) is active.
Push-button

See also

480
Radio Loop
WARNING Command available only for equipment provided with radio.
The Radio Loop command manages the radio loops.

Operations
Verify the radio loops status

Activate a radio loop
Deactivate a radio loop
Execute the test (RF Loop) for ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN
GUI
Radio Loop contextual area

See also
Radio loop (info)

Test (RF Loop) for ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN (info)
Verify the radio loops status

1. Select Maintenance > Radio Loop.

The Radio Loop contextual area displays the current status of the radio loops.

The activation of the radio loop can affect the traffic (see Radio loop (info).
If the equipment has the function PWE3 active (see Configurator), the loop of PWE3 stream after the activation of RF Loop (ETH not squelched) or of IF Loop (ETH not squelched) takes place at the expiry of MAC
Addr. Aging Time (see Verify/modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table).
In order to perform the loop immediately, without waiting for the expiry of Aging Time, it is suggested to
Reset the MAC Table before activating the loop.
If you do not reset MAC Table and decide to wait for the expiry of MAC Addr. Aging Time for the loop actuation, it is suggested to verify that the timeout of MAN OP is longer than the Aging Time value (see Verify/
modify the manual operation timeout). If the timeout is shorter than Aging Time value, the loop will be
deactivated before being actuated.
2. Select the option relevant to the loop that you want to activate.
It is not possible to preset more loops at the same time as the choice of a option automatically disables
the preceding one.
If next to the option there is the box Test Loop Result, this means the equipment is equipped with ODU
ASN. For this ODU type, a Test RF is available (see Execute the test (RF Loop) for ALCplus2e equipment
with ODU ASN).
The values RF Loop and RF Loop (ETH not squelched) are available only if the RF loop is supported by
the equipment hardware.
481
3. Press Apply.
The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned
on again, the loop results deactivated without taking into account the preceding setting.


2. Select the Loop OFF option present in the Loop Branch area, relevant to the loop that you want to
deactivate.
Operation available only for equipment provided with ODU ASN (see Test (RF Loop) for ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN (info).
2. Select the RF Loop option.
3. Press Apply.
The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm.
During the execution of the test, the Test Loop box shows the progression of the operation.
The status of the test is pointed out by the Test Loop Result box:
Grey box - wording None. Test to execute.
White box - wording Running. Test in progress.
Green box - wording Passed. Test executed correctly (ODU operating).
Red box - wording Fail. Test failed (ODU faulted).
Red box - wording Interrupted. Test interrupted by the system.

Possible cause: the set timeout of the MAN OP is lower than the time for the execution of the
test. It is suggested to set the timeout to a value greater than that of execution of the test.
5. Select the Loop OFF option.

482
Radio Loop contextual area

The contextual area shows the current status of the radio loops.
Parameters
Loop Branch <radio branch>. Current status of the radio loops of the specific radio branch:
Loop OFF. No loop active.
RF Loop. RF loop active: Ethernet traffic is not looped.

If next to the option there is the box Test Loop Result, this means the equipment is
equipped with ODU ASN. For this ODU type, a Test RF is available (see Test (RF Loop)
for ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN (info).
IF Loop. IF loop active: Ethernet traffic is not looped.
RF Loop (ETH not squelched). RF loop active: Ethernet traffic is looped.
IF Loop (ETH not squelched). IF loop active: Ethernet traffic is looped.
The values RF Loop and RF Loop (ETH not squelched) are available only if the RF loop is supported by the equipment hardware.
For the equipment in configuration 1+0, it is present the Loop Branch 1 area. For the equipment
in configuration 1+1 or 2x(1+0), there are present the Loop Branch 1 (loops branch 1) and Loop
Branch 2 (loops branch 2) areas.
Push-button

See also

Radio loop (info)
483
Radio loop (info)

In the 1+0 and 2x(1+0) systems, the activation of the radio loop affects the traffic.
In the 1+1 systems, the activation of the radio loop on the active branch affects the traffic. The activation
of the radio loop on the stand-by branch does not affects the traffic. However, in this case, before executing
the loop, the receiver must be forced to the active branch (see Radio Switch).
Anyway, before activating a loop, it is suggested to verify that the timeout of the manual operations is set.
If the timeout is not active, the loop will be active until its deactivation by the user, the switch-off/switchon of the equipment or the equipment reset.
484
The ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN of old generation was not provided with the RF loop, because not
designed to execute a loop in accordance with the specifications of emission of the spurious signals.
The ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN of new generation (ODU unit with Part. Number GE8xxx) is provided with an internal diagnostics functionality, based on a loop executed in preset operating condition in
such a way to verify the transceiver functionality.
The execution of the test is independent from the type of traffic (TDM, Ethernet, hybrid) and does not need
any external measurement tools.
At the end of the test, the result of the diagnosis is displayed: test executed correctly (ODU operating),
test failed (ODU faulted).
The test is a manual operation (MAN OP), so its execution is subjected to the timeout of the manual operations.
If the timeout:
Is enabled, at the end of the test the condition of Loop RF is preserved until the expiry of the
duration of the MAN OP unless it is removed immediately at the end of the test, as described in
the specific procedure.
Is not enabled, at the end of the test it is necessary to remove the condition of Loop RF, as described in the specific procedure.
If the test is interrupted by the system, a possible reason could be that the set timeout was lower than the
execution time of the test. It is suggested to set the timeout to a value greater than that of execution of
the test.
In case of 1+1 Hot Standby radio configuration systems, the activation of the test on the stand-by branch
involves the loss of the connection of the working branch, because the remote transmitter is switched off.
In case of 1+1 Freq. Div radio configuration systems, the activation of the test on the stand-by branch
involves the degradation or the loss of the connection of the working branch, because even on this one the
same modulation is (mandatory) set.
With:
ACM enabled: reduction of the traffic to the test profile.
ACM disable: loss of traffic.
In case of systems configured with constant peak, it is ensured that the rated power of the connection is
not exceeded during the execution of the test.
485
Radio Switch
WARNING Command available only for equipment provided with the radio in protected configuration.
The Radio Switch command manages the radio switch.

Operations
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switches
Modify the management of the switching in reception (Rx Forced Switch)
Modify the management of the switching in transmission (Tx Forced Switch)
Modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential)
Modify the Wait Time parameter
Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
GUI
Radio Switch contextual area

See also
Radio switch (info)
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switches
1. Select Maintenance > Radio Switch.

The Radio Switch contextual area displays the status and the configuration parameters of the radio
switch.


The Rx Forced Switch parameter indicates the management of the switching in reception.
Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms (normal
functioning mode of the equipment).
Branch-1. The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 for the service.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the Branch option) a message warns that you are
486

WARNING Operation available only for equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration (1+1 Hot Standby).

The Tx Forced Switch parameter indicates the management of the switching in transmission.
Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms (normal
functioning mode of the equipment).
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the Branch option) a message warns that you are

The Tx Preferential parameter indicates the management of the preferential branch in transmission.
Auto. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment does not use a
branch in a preferential manner with respect to the other one.
Branch-1. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment use the
branch 1.
Branch-2. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment use the
branch 2.


The Wait Time parameter indicates the value of Wait Time.
2. To change the parameter, type the time interval wished: value comprised between 0 and 150 sec.
487
Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration

2. Press Reset and confirm
488
Radio Switch contextual area

The contextual area shows the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switch.
Parameters
Rx Forced Switch. Mode used to manage, into the systems in 1+1 configuration, the switching
at reception between the service branch and the reserve one:
Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the

alarms.
Tx Forced Switch. Mode used to manage, into the systems in 1+1 configuration, the switching
at transmission between the service branch and the reserve one:
Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the

alarms.
Tx Preferential. Mode used to manage, into the systems in 1+1 configuration, the function of
preferential branch for the service at transmission:
Auto. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment does
not use a branch in a preferential manner with respect to the other one.
Branch-1. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment
use the branch 1.
Branch-2. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment
use the branch 2.
Wait Time (Tx Preferential). Time period during which the service is kept on the non-preferential branch before being restored to the preferential branch, in such a way to avoid the continue
switch between the two branches in case of fleeting alarms.
WARNING Tx Forced Switch, Tx Preferential and Wait Time parameters are available only for the equipment
in 1+1 isofrequential configuration (1+1 Hot Standby). For the 1+1 heterofrequential configuration (1+1
Freq. Div), the parameters are not available because the two branches (1 and 2) transmit at the same time
because the selection of the signal is executed at reception.
Push-button

Reset. Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
See also

Radio switch (info)
489
Radio switch (info)
Management of the radio switch

Forcing a radio branch to operate (switch in reception and switch in transmission)
Preferential radio branch (switch in transmission)
Management of the radio switch

The radio switches (reception and transmission), for the ALCplus2e equipment in protected configuration,
generally operate in automatic mode: the equipment executes a switch when specific alarms raises on the
operating radio branch.
The user can manage the radio switch executing some forcing operations and enabling the preferential
branch.
Forcing a radio branch to operate (switch in reception and switch in transmission)

This function foresees the user can force a radio branch to operate independently from alarms which can
be active (see Modify the management of the switching in reception (Rx Forced Switch)/Modify the management of the switching in transmission (Tx Forced Switch)
This function must not be used for the normal operation of the radio switch in reception and/or transmission. It is a maintenance operation and remains active until when the user deactivates it or the timeout
period of the manual operation expires (if set).
Preferential radio branch (switch in transmission)

This function provides the choice of a branch to be used in a preferential way in transmission when there
are not alarms that cause the switching (see Modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission
(Tx Preferential).
In fact, when the switching is automatically managed by the controller, it executes the switching when on
the branch on service there are present some specific alarms.
When the alarms have been reset, the controller does not execute again the switching. While, if it has been
set a preferential branch when the operator resets the alarms, if the branch on service is not the preferential one, the controller executes the switching and it uses for the service the branch set by the operator
as the preferential one (naturally if the branch does not have any alarms).
Besides a time period can be defined (Wait Time) during which the service is kept on the non-preferential
branch before being restored to the preferential branch, in such a way to avoid the continue switch between
the two branches in case of fleeting alarms.
For instance, suppose that an alarm occurs causing the switch of the service from the preferential branch
to the other branch. When the alarm clears, the preferential branch is not immediately restored to service
but postponed by n seconds (Wait Time period), during which the controller verifies that the same alarm
has not occurred again on the preferential branch. At the end of the Wait Time period, if the alarm has not
occurred again, the service is restored to the preferential branch. Otherwise, the switch is delayed by other
n seconds, during which the controller verifies that the same alarm has not occurred again and so on.
In any moment the user can Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time
expiration.
490
SWITCH
STM-1. It manages the switch of the protected STM-1.

Nodal. It manages the switch of the protected Nodal Bus.
491
STM-1
WARNING Command available only if the protection of the STM-1 is active (MSP mode - see Configurator).
The STM-1 command manages the switch of the protected STM-1.

Operations
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the STM-1 switch
Modify the management of the STM-1 switch
Modify the logic of STM-1 switch
Set the primary STM-1 as preferential
Force the switch on preferential STM-1 without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
GUI
STM-1 contextual area

See also
STM-1 switch (info)
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the STM-1 switch
1. Select Switch > STM-1.

The STM-1 contextual area displays the status and the configuration parameters of the STM-1 switch.


The MSP Protection parameter indicates the management mode of the STM-1 switch.
Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal operation of the switch).
Lock Out. The equipment is forced to use the primary STM-1.
Forced. The equipment is forced to use the secondary STM-1: the switch will be never executed,
independently from the type of alarm which can raise.
Manual. The equipment is forced to use the secondary STM-1: the switch is executed only in
case of alarms of type Signal Fail or Signal Degrade.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the Lock Out, Forced or Manual option) a message
warns that you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.
492


The Direction parameter indicates the modality of management of the logic of the STM-1 switch.
Unidirectional. The switch logic (MSP protection) is managed at level of local equipment, which
commands the switch without notifying this situation to the remote equipment.
Bidirectional. The switch logic is managed at Link level: the local equipment agrees the switch
with the remote equipment.


The Protection Mode parameter indicates if the primary STM-1 is set as preferential.
Not Revertive. The primary STM-1 is not preferential: after a switch (primary -> secondary) the
secondary STM-1 remains active even when the alarms that caused the switch clear.
Revertive. The primary STM-1 is preferential: after a switch (primary -> secondary), when the
alarms clear, the primary stream is restored as active STM-1.


The Wtr Time (Min) parameter indicates the time (expressed in minutes) during which a no alarm condition must persist on the main stream so that the service is restored on it.
2. To change the parameter, set a value between 0 and 12 minutes.

The main stream, after the clearing of the alarms that caused the switch, is immediately used for the
service. The Wtr Time period is considered elapsed.
493
STM-1 contextual area

The contextual area shows the status and the configuration parameters of the STM-1 switch.
Parameters
Switch Status area. Operating status of the switch. The STM-1 in operation is pointed out by
green box and wording Active, while the STM-1 in StandBy by the grey box and the wording
StandBy.
Primary STM-1 (Switch Status area.). Main STM-1.
Protection STM-1 (Switch Status area.). Secondary STM-1.
Wtr Time (Min.). Time (expressed in minutes) during which an alarm condition must persist
on the main stream so that the service is restored on it.
Protection Mode. Management mode of the primary STM-1 as preferential:
Not Revertive. The primary STM-1 is not preferential: after a switch (primary -> secondary) the secondary STM-1 remains active even when the alarms that caused the switch
clear.
Revertive. The primary STM-1 is preferential: after a switch (primary -> secondary),
when the alarms clear, the primary stream is restored as active STM-1
MSP Protection. management modality of the switch:
Lock Out. The equipment is forced to use the primary STM-1.
Forced. The equipment is forced to use the secondary STM-1: the switch is never executed, independently from the type of alarm that can raise.
Manual. The equipment is forced to use the secondary STM-1: the switch is executed
only in case of alarms of type Signal Fail or Signal Degrade.
Direction. Management modality of the switching logic:
Unidirectional. The switch logic (MSP protection) is managed at level of local equipment, which commands the switch without notifying this situation to the remote
equipment.
Bidirectional. The switch logic is managed at link level: the local equipment agrees
the switch with the remote equipment.
Push-button

Wtr Clear. Force the switch on preferential STM-1 without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
See also

STM-1 switch (info)
494
STM-1 switch (info)
Management of the STM-1 switch

STM-1 switching criteria
Forcing of the STM-1 to operation
Preferential primary STM-1
Management of the STM-1 switch

The ALCplus2e equipment that manage the STM-1 (see Tab.7) can be configured by the user to operate
with the STM-1 disabled, enabled or protected (see Modify the management of the STM-1 switch).
When the user enables the protection of the STM-1 (MSP mode - Multiplex Section Protection) even the
management of the STM-1 switch is enabled.
The switch generally operates automatically: the equipment executes the switch when specific alarms raise
on the operating STM-1.
STM-1 switching criteria

When the STM-1 switch operates in automatic mode, the user can set one of the following switching logics:
Unidirectional Logic. Only the local alarms are considered among the criteria which determine the
switch.
Bidirectional Logic. The local equipment agrees the switch of the STM-1 with the remote equipment: both the local and the remote alarms are considered among the criteria which determine the
switch.
Forcing of the STM-1 to operation

This function foresees the possibility for the user to force the primary or secondary STM-1 to operate, independently from the alarms which could be active (see Modify the management of the STM-1 switch).
This operation must not be used for the normal operation of the STM-1 switch. It is a maintenance operation and remains active until when the user disables it or the Timeout period of the manual operation
expires (if set).
Preferential primary STM-1

This function foresees the choice of the primary STM-1 to use in preferential mode when there are not
alarms which determine the switch (see Set the primary STM-1 as preferential).
In fact, when the switch operates in automatic mode, the equipment executes the switch when specific
alarms raises on the STM-1 in service.
When the alarms clear, the controller does not execute the switch again.
If the primary STM-1 is set as preferential, when the switch is executed, if the STM-1 in service is not the
primary, the controller executes the switch and uses the primary STM-1 for the service (naturally if the
stream is not alarmed).
Moreover it is possible to define a time period (Wait Time) during which the service is kept on the not preferential (secondary) STM-1 before this returns to the preferential (primary) STM-1, in such a way to avoid
the continue switch between the two STM-1 in case of fluctuating alarms.
For example, suppose an alarm raises which determines the switch of the service from the primary STM1 to the secondary. When the alarm clears, the service is not immediately restored on the primary (pref-
495
erential) STM-1, but this is postponed by n seconds (Wait Time period), during which the controller verifies
that the alarms has not raised again on the preferential STM-1. At the end of the Wait Time period, if the
alarm has not raised again, the service is restored on the primary STM-1. On the contrary, the switch is
postponed by other n seconds during which the system verifies the alarm has not raised again and so on.
In any moment the operator can Force the switch on preferential STM-1 without waiting for the Wait Time
expiration.
496
Nodal
WARNING Command available only if the protection of the Nodal Bus is active (see Configurator)
The Nodal command manages the switch of the protected Nodal Bus.
Operations
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the nodal switch
Modify the management of the nodal switch
Force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
GUI
Nodal contextual area

See also
Nodal switch (info)
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the nodal switch
1. Select Switch > Nodal.

The Nodal contextual area displays the status and the configuration parameters of the nodal switch.


The Forced Switch parameter indicates the management mode of the nodal switch.
NBUS1. The equipment is forced to use the primary Nodal Bus.
NBUS2. The equipment is forced to use the secondary Nodal Bus.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the NBUS1 or NBUS2 option) a message warns that
you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.
497


The Wtr Time (s) parameter indicates the time during which a no alarm condition must persist on the
preferential NBUS connection so that the service is restored on it.
2. To change the parameter, set a value between 0 and 12 seconds.
Force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for the Wait
Time expiration

2. Press Wtr Clear.
The primary Bus, after the clearing of the alarms that caused the switch, is immediately used for the
service. The Wtr Time period is considered elapsed.
498
Nodal contextual area

The contextual area shows the status and the configuration parameters of the nodal switch.
Parameters
Wtr Time. Time (expressed in seconds) during which an alarm condition must persist on the
preferential NBUS connection so that the service is restored on it.
Forced Switch. Management modality of the switch:
NBUS1. The equipment is forced to use the primary Nodal Bus.
NBUS2. The equipment is forced to use the secondary Nodal Bus.
Push-button

Wtr Clear. Force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for the Wait
Time expiration
See also

Nodal switch (info)
499
Nodal switch (info)
Management of the nodal switch

Forcing of the Nodal Bus to operation
Preferential NBUS (Nodal Bus) connection
Management of the nodal switch

The ALCplus2e equipment that manage the nodal Bus (see Tab.7), can be configured by the user to operate
with the Nodal Bus disabled, enabled or protected (see Configurator).
When the user enables the protection of the Nodal Bus even the management of the nodal switch is enabled.
The switch generally operates automatically: the equipment executes the switch when specific alarms raise
on the operating Nodal Bus.
Forcing of the Nodal Bus to operation

This function foresees the possibility for the user to force the primary or secondary Nodal Bus to operate,
independently from the alarms which could be active (see Modify the management of the nodal switch).
This operation must not be used for the normal operation of the nodal switch. It is a maintenance operation
and remains active until when the user disables it or the Timeout period of the manual operation expires
(if set).
Preferential NBUS (Nodal Bus) connection

When the user executes a single connection, which involves a protected NBUS channel, the matrix automatically executes the protection connection creating, in fact, a protected connection.
In this case, the connection created by the user is the preferential connection (preferential NBUS connection) while the connection created by the matrix is the protection connection (protection NBUS connection).
When the switch operates in automatic modality, the equipment executes the switch when specific alarms
are present on the working NBUS connection.
When the alarms clear, the controller, if the working NBUS connection is not the preferential one, executes
the switch and uses the preferential NBUS connection to work (of course if alarms are not present on the
connection).
In this condition it is possible to define a time period (Wait Time) during which the service is kept on the
not preferential NBUS connection before this returns to the preferential NBUS connection, in such a way
to avoid the continue switch between the two connections in case of fluctuating alarms.
For example, suppose an alarm occurs causing the switch from the preferential NBUS connection to the
protection one. When the alarm clears, the service is not immediately switched to the preferential NBUS
connection, but postponed of n seconds (Wait Time period), during which the controller verifies that the
alarm on the preferential NBUS connection has not occurred again. At the end of the Wait Time period, if
the alarm has not occurred again, the switch takes place. Otherwise, the switch is postponed of other n
seconds, during which the system verifies that the alarm has not occurred again and so on.
In any moment the operator can Force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for
the Wait Time expiration.
500
USER INPUT
Local User Input. It manages the local User Input.

Remote User Input. It manages the remote User Input.
501
Local User Input

The Local User Input command manages the local User Input configuration.
Operations
Verify the local User Input status and configuration

Modify the name of a local User Input
Modify the rest condition of a local User Input
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a local User Input
GUI
Local User Input contextual area

See also
Enabling the User Input alarms (info)
Verify the local User Input status and configuration

1. Select User Input > Local User Input.

The Local User Input contextual area displays the status and the configuration of local User Inputs.


The Label column displays the name of the Local User Inputs.
2. To change the name of a User Input, double-click on the relevant box and type an alphanumeric string
with minimum 1 and maximum 31 characters.


The Input Operation column shows the rest condition of the local User Inputs.
2. To change the rest condition of a User Input, double-click on the relevant box and set the value:
Normally Open. The User Input will be considered active (creation of the alarm event) when its
terminal is referred to ground.
Normally Close. The User Input will be considered active (creation of the alarm event) when its
terminal is open.

502

The Severity column shows the status/severity of the local User Inputs alarms.
2. To change the status/severity of a User Input, double-click on the relevant box and set the value:
Disable, to disable the alarm created by the activation of the User Input.
Status, to:
Enable the alarm created at the activation of the User Input.
Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to a status signal.
Warning, to:
Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with
Warning level.
Minor, to:
Minor level.
Major, to:
Major level.
Critical, to:
Critical level.

503
Local User Input contextual area

The context displays the status and the configuration of local User Inputs.
Every row of the table corresponds to one User Input.
Parameters
Label. User Input name.

Status. User Input status:
Inactive (green box). User Input alarm not activated.
Active (green box). User Input status signal activated.
Active (light blue box). User Input alarm activated and with Warning severity level.
Active (yellow box). User Input alarm activated and with Minor severity level.
Active (orange box). User Input alarm activated and with Major severity level.
Active (red box). User Input alarm activated and with Critical severity level.
Severity. Status/seriousness of the alarm created at the activation of the User Input:
Disable. The alarm is disabled.
Status. The alarm is enabled; its severity is equivalent to a status signalling.
Warning, Minor, Major, Critical. The alarm is enabled; its severity is respectively of
level Warning, Minor, Major, Critical.
Input Operation. Rest condition of the User Input:
Normally Open. The User Input is considered active when its terminal is referred to
ground.
Normally Close. The User Input is considered active when its terminal is open.
Push-button

See also

504

Disabling an User Input alarm means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is not recorded in the equipment controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program: as the
alarm has never occurred.
On the other hand, enabling an User Input alarm means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is recorded
in the equipment controller and communicated to the management program which displays it in the current
alarms and in the alarm history.
505
Remote User Input

The Remote User Input command manages the remote User Input configuration.
Operations
Verify the remote User Input status and configuration

Modify the name of a remote User Input
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a remote User Input
GUI
Remote User Input contextual area

See also
Verify the remote User Input status and configuration

1. Select User Input > Remote User Input.

The Remote User Input contextual area displays the status and the configuration of remote User Inputs.


The Label column shows the name of the remote User Inputs.
2. To change the name of a User Input, double-click on the relevant box and type an alphanumeric string
with minimum 1 and maximum 31 characters.

The Severity column shows the status/severity of the remote User Inputs alarms.
2. To change the status/severity of a User Input, double-click on the relevant box and set the value:
Disable, to disable the alarm created by the activation of the User Input.
Status, to:
Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to a status signal.
Warning, to:
506
Warning level.
Minor, to:
Minor level.
Major, to:
Major level.
Critical, to:
Critical level.

507
Remote User Input contextual area

The context displays the status and the configuration of remote User Inputs.
Every row of the table corresponds to one User Input.
The remote User Input changes according to the equipment radio configuration:
1+0 or 1+1 configuration. 4 remote User Input.
2x(1+0) configuration. 8 remote User Input.
Parameters
Label. User Input name.

Status. User Input status:
Inactive (green box). User Input alarm not activated.
Active (green box). User Input status signal activated.
Active (light blue box). User Input alarm activated and with Warning severity level.
Active (yellow box). User Input alarm activated and with Minor severity level.
Active (orange box). User Input alarm activated and with Major severity level.
Active (red box). User Input alarm activated and with Critical severity level.
Severity. Status/seriousness of the alarm created at the activation of the User Input:
Disable. The alarm is disabled.
Status. The alarm is enabled; its severity is equivalent to a status signalling.
Warning, Minor, Major, Critical. The alarm is enabled; its severity is respectively of
level Warning, Minor, Major, Critical.
Push-button

See also

508
USER OUTPUT
The User Output command manages the User Output configuration.

Operations
Verify the User Output status and configuration

Modify the name of an User Output
Modify the functioning mode of the relay contacts of an User Output
Verify/modify the signals coupled to the User Output
Force the User Output activation
Remove the forcing of the User Output
GUI
User Output contextual area
Verify the User Output status and configuration

1. Select User Output.

The User Output contextual area displays the status and the configuration of the User Outputs.


The Label column shows the name of the User Outputs.
2. To modify the name of an User Output, double click on the relevant box and type an alphanumeric
string of minimum 1 and maximum 31 characters.


The Active Status column shows the operating modality of the relay contacts of the User Output.
2. To modify the operation mode of an User Output, double click on the relevant box and select the option:
Open. With absence of signal (alarm or User Input or manual forcing), the relays contacts are
closed (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are open
Closed. With absence of signal (alarm or User Input or manual forcing), the relays contacts are
open (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are closed.

509
Verify/modify the signals coupled to the User Output


The User Output contextual area displays the signals associated to the User Output (UO).
2. Double click on the Linked To box and select the Map option
3. Press Mapping.
The signals are subdivided in groups. The selection of a group expands or compresses the list of the
underlaying signals. At each selection, the list takes the status complementary to the previous one (if
compressed it becomes expanded, or vice versa). The symbol:
identifies an expanded group.
identifies a compressed group.
4. Activate the check-box of the:
Alarm Synthesis box, to associate the group of alarms, which a specific severity level corresponds to, to the UO. Select the wished severity level or the levels:
Alarm Synthesis Warning. Alarms, which the Warning severity corresponds to.
Alarm Synthesis Minor. Alarms, which the Minor severity corresponds to.
Alarm Synthesis Major. Alarms, which the Major severity corresponds to.
Alarm Synthesis Critical. Alarms, which the Critical severity corresponds to.
Radio Branch box, to associate to the UO the group of local or remote equipment alarms (ODU).
Select the group or the groups of wished alarms:
Radio Branch Local Odu <radio branch>. Alarms relevant to the specific radio branch of
the ODU section of the local equipment.
Radio Branch Remote Odu <radio branch>. Alarms relevant to the specific radio branch
of the ODU section of the remote equipment.
Signals available only for equipment with the radio equipped (see Configurator).
Radio Equipment box, to associate to the UO the group of local or remote equipment alarms
(IDU). Select the group or the groups of wished alarms:
Radio Equipment Local IDU A. Alarms relevant to LIM section of the local equipment.
Radio Equipment Remote IDU <radio branch>. Alarms relevant to the LIM section of the
remote equipment connected with the specific radio branch.
User Input box, to associated to the UO one or more local (User Input ) and/or remote (User
Input Remote) User Inputs. Select the wished User Inputs.
The selection of a signal is indicated by the check sign inside the box. Its deactivation removes the
check sign.
The selection/deselection of a group automatically selects/deselects all the relevant signals.
5. Press Ok.


2. Double click on the Linked To box and select the Forced by Op. option.
3. Double click on the Force Status box and select the Force option.
The User Output will remain activated until the removal of the forcing.
510


2. Double click on the Force Status box and select the Unforce option.
511
User Output contextual area

The table present in the context displays the status and the configuration of the User Outputs.
Every row of the table corresponds to one User Output.
Parameters
Label. User Output name.

Status. User Output status:
Inactive (green box). User Output not activated.
Active (red box). User Output activated (relay contacts activated).
State. User Output setting:
Forced by Op. The UO is enabled to force the activation by operator.
Unmapped. No signal is associated to UO.
Mapped. One or more signals are associated to UO (group of alarms and/or User Input). Press Mapping to verify the signals.
Active State. Functioning mode of the relay contacts:
Open. With absence of signal (alarm or User Input or manual forcing), the relays contacts are closed (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are open
Closed. With absence of signal (alarm or User Input or manual forcing), the relays
contacts are open (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are closed.
Linked To. Activation modality associated to the User Output:
Forced by Op. UO is enabled to the forcing of the activation by the operator.
Map. UO is enabled to the association of one or more signals (group of alarms and/
or User Inputs).
Force Status. Status of the forcing of the User Output:
Unforce. UO is not active after the forcing by the operator.
Force. UO is active after the forcing by operator.
Push-button

Mapping. Verify/modify the signals coupled to the User Output. Push-button not available when
the forcing of the activation by the operator is enabled (Linked To column - Forced by Op value).
See also

512
ALARMS LIST
Tab.21 indicates the list of the alarms relevant to the equipment.
The alarms are not listed in alphabetical order but they are grouped according to the corresponding parts
of the equipment.
Equipment
User Input
Common
Eth Lan
IDU
Node
P.M. G.828
P.M. G.829 B1
P.M. G.829 B2-M1
P.M. Rx Power
P.M. Tx Power
P.M. VC-12 G.828
P.M. ACM
Plug-in module
Radio
RIM
RT
SETS
SNTP
STM-1
Unit
Vc4
Vc12
For each alarm, the wording present in the Events area (see Equipment status area) of the WEB LCT page
and the wording present in the Alarm Severity Config. contextual area are displayed.
Some alarms have some wordings in italic contained between the symbols < >. They, in the alarm displayed in the Events area, represent a variable.
The symbol -means that the alarm is not meaningful for the Alarm Severity Config. contextual area.
513
Tab.21 Alarms list

Events alarms
Alarm Severity Config. alarms
Equipment
Equip. Alarm Synthesis Critical
Equip. Alarm Synthesis Major
Equip. Alarm Synthesis Minor
Equip. Alarm Synthesis Warning
User Input
User Input - <UI number> <UI name> Alarm Status
Common
IDU E1-<E1 number> G.704 Line side AIS Alarm
radioEquipE1G.704LineAisAlarm
IDU E1-<E1 number> G.704 Line side Fail Alarm
radioEquipE1G.704LineFailAlarm
IDU E1-<E1 number> G.704 Internal side AIS Alarm
radioEquipE1G.704RadioAisAlarm
IDU E1-<E1 number> G.704 Internal side Fail Alarm
radioEquipE1G.704RadioFailAlarm
Communication EOC (E1/Stm1) Data Link Alarm
radioEquipEoc(E1/Stm1)Alarm
Equip Manual Operation
equipManualOperation
Fan Alarm
radioEquipFanAlarm
MNGT/1 cable Fail
equipMngt1CableFailAlarm
MNGT/2 cable Fail
equipMngt2CableFailAlarm
RMON Alarm <alarm description>
equipRmonAlarm
WAKE UP Manager IP address: <IP address>
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Communication Radio EOC Data Link Alarm
radioEquipEOCRadioLinkAlarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Local-Remote Terminal Setup Mismatch Alarm
radioEquipLocalRemoteSetupMismatchAlarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rescue Setup Active Alarm
radioEquipRescueSetupActiveAlarm
OAM-FM MA:<MA name> MEP Id:<MEP identifier> Fail Alarm
OamFmMepFailAlarm
OAM-FM MA:<MA name> MEP Id:<MEP identifier> Config. Mismatch Alarm
OamFmMepConfigurationMismatchAlarm
One Plus One IDU Active Status
radioEquipOnePlusOneActiveStatus
One Plus One Configuration Mismatch Alarm
radioEquipOnePlusOneMismatchAlarm
One Plus One Twin Alarmed
radioEquipOnePlusOneTwinFailAlarm
Xpic Procedure: RADIO <1A, 2A> Xpic disable
radioEquipmentXpicProcedureBlock
Remote Xpic Procedure: TX-<1A, 2A> Off
radioEquipmentXpicRemRemTxOff
Ethernet Traffic Concatenation fail on radio link
radioEquipConcatenationAlarm
Ethernet Compression/Fragmentation Configuration Mismatch
radioEquipCompressFragmentConfigMismatchAlarm
One Plus One Preferential IDU is not active
radioEquipOnePlusOnePreferentialAlarm
One Plus One Transmitter Switch on Remote Terminal BER
radioEquipOnePlusOneTxFailCheckAlarm
G.8032 Ring: <Ring label> Port: <Lan-1, Lan-2, Port A> Alarm Status
G8032PortOperatingStatusAlarm
IEEE 1588 PTP Configuration Mismatch
radioEquipIEEE1588ConfigMismatchAlar
m
IEEE 1588 PTP PPS Unlock
radioEquipIEEE1588PtpPpsUnlockAlarm
514
Events alarms
PWE3: Local TDM Down channel <channel label>
pwe3ChannelLocalTdmDown
PWE3: Remote TDM Down channel <channel label>
pwe3ChannelRemoteTdmDown
PWE3: Local PSN Down channel <channel label>
pwe3ChannelLocalPsnDown
PWE3: Remote PSN Down channel <channel label>
pwe3ChannelRemotePsnDown
Eth Lan
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Link Loss Forwarding Alarm
ethLanPhyLinkLossForwarding
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Loss of Signal Alarm
ethLanPhyLinkLoss
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Master-Slave Configuration fault Alarm
ethLanPhyMasterSlaveConfigurationFault
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Physical Coding Sublayer Sync Alarm
ethLanPhySync
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Unresolved Autonegotiation Alarm
ethLanPhyAutoNegotiation
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Link Aggregation LACP protocol down
ethLanPhyLagLacpProtocolDown
IDU
IDU Board IDU Temperature
radioEquipIDUTemperatureAlarm
IDU Board Trib. <tributary number> [<tributary label>] Rx AIS Alarm
ppiRxAisAlarm
IDU Board Trib. <tributary number> [<tributary label>] Signal loss Alarm
ppiLosAlarm
IDU BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Demodulator Fail Alarm
radioBranchDemodulatorFailAlarm
IDU BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Modulator Fail Alarm
radioBranchModulatorFailAlarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] ODU-IDU Communication fail Alarm
radioBranchRtOduIduCommAlarm
Local IDU Alarm Synthesis
radioEquipLocalIduAlarmSynthesis
REMOTE IDU Radio <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Alarm Synthesis
radioEquipRemoteIduAlarmSynthesis
IDU Trib.-<tributary number> [<tributary label>] Re-Timing Alarm
ppiE1SynchAlarm
IDU <tributary number> [<tributary label>] Protection Alarm
switchE1ProtectionAlarm
IDU <tributary label> Ais Alarm
ppiAisAlarm
IDU <tributary label> Ber5 Alarm
ppiBer5Alarm
IDU <tributary label> Out of Frame Alarm
ppiOOFAlarm
IDU <tributary label> Out of Multiframe Alarm
ppiOOMAlarm
Node
Node <bus number> Signal loss Alarm
nodeLinkLosAlarm
Node <bus number> Loss of frame Alarm
nodeLinkLofAlarm
Node <bus number> MS AIS Alarm
nodeLinkMsAisAlarm
Node <bus number> Check identifier Alarm
nodeLinkCheckAlarm
Ethernet Nodal Configuration Mismatch <Lan1, Lan2, Lan1&Lan2, Nodal Config. Parameters> nodeEthConfigMismatchAlarm
P.M. G.828
P.M. G.828-<measure type>(1) 15Mcounter ES threshold cross Alarm
pmG828-15MEsAlarm
type>(1)
15Mcounter SEP threshold cross Alarm
pmG828-15MSepAlarm
P.M. G.828-<measure type>
(1)
15Mcounter SES threshold cross Alarm
pmG828-15MSesAlarm
(1)
24Hcounter ES threshold cross Alarm
pmG828-24HEsAlarm
24Hcounter SEP threshold cross Alarm
pmG828-24HSepAlarm
P.M. G.828-<measure
P.M. G.828-<measure
type>(1)
515
Events alarms
(1)
24Hcounter SES threshold cross Alarm
pmG828-24HSesAlarm
(1)
UAS Alarm
pmG828-UASAlarm
P.M. G.829 B1
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt ES thr. cross Alarm
P.M: G829-B1 <measure
15M cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm
pmG829RstB1-15MSepAlarm
(1)
15M cnt SES thr. cross Alarm
pmG829RstB1-15MSesAlarm
(1)
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>
24H cnt ES thr. cross Alarm
pmG829RstB1-24HEsAlarm
type>(1)
24H cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm
pmG829RstB1-24HSepAlarm
(1)
24H cnt SES thr. cross Alarm
pmG829RstB1-24HSesAlarm
(1)
UAS Alarm
pmG829RstB1-UASAlarm

P.M: G829-B1 <measure
pmG829RstB1-15MEsAlarm
type>(1)

P.M. G.829 B2-M1
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt ES thr. cross Alarm
pmG829MstB2-M1-15MEsAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt ES-FE thr. cross Alarm
pmG829MstB2-M1-15MEsFEAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm
pmG829MstB2-M1-15MSepAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt SEP-FE thr. cross Alarm
pmG829MstB2-M1-15MSepFEAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt SES thr. cross Alarm
pmG8298SMstB2-M1-15MSesAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt SES-FE thr. cross Alarm
pmG829MstB2-M1-15MSesFEAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt ES thr. cross Alarm
pmG829MstB2-M1-24HEsAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt ES-FE thr. cross Alarm
pmG829MstB2-M1-24HEsFEAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm
pmG829MstB2-M1-24HSepAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt SEP-FE thr. cross Alarm
pmG829MstB2-M1-24HSepFEAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt SES thr. cross Alarm
pmG829MstB2-M1-24HSesAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt SES-FE thr. cross Alarm
pmG829MstB2-M1-24HSesFEAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) UAS Alarm
pmG829MstB2-M1-UASAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) UAS-BIDI Alarm
pmG829MstB2-M1-UASBIDIAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) UAS-FE Alarm
pmG829MstB2-M1-UASFEAlarm
P.M. Rx Power
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts1 threshold cross Alarm
pmRxPwr-15MRltsAlarm
pmRxPwr-15MRlts2Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 24Hcounter Rlts1 threshold cross Alarm
pmRxPwr-24HRltsAlarm
pmRxPwr-24HRlts2Alarm
P.M. Tx Power
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 15Mcounter Tlts1 threshold cross Alarm
516
pmTxPwr-15MTltsAlarm
Events alarms
pmTxPwr-15MTlts2Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 24Hcounter Tlts1 threshold cross Alarm
pmTxPwr-24HTltsAlarm
pmTxPwr-24HTlts2Alarm
P.M. VC-12 G.828

P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt ES thr.
cross Alarm
pmG828Vc12Path15MEsAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt ES-FE
thr. cross Alarm
pmG828Vc12Path15MEsFEAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt SEP thr.
cross Alarm
pmG828Vc12Path15MSepAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt SEP-FE
thr. cross Alarm
pmG828Vc12Path15MSepFEAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt SES thr.
cross Alarm
pmG828Vc12Path15MSesAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt SES-FE
thr. cross Alarm
pmG828Vc12Path15MSesFEAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt ES thr.
cross Alarm
pmG828Vc12Path24HEsAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt ES-FE
thr. cross Alarm
pmG828Vc12Path24HEsFEAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt SEP thr.
cross Alarm
pmG828Vc12Path24HSepAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt SEP-FE
thr. cross Alarm
pmG828Vc12Path24HSepFEAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt SES thr.
cross Alarm
pmG828Vc12Path24HSesAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt SES-FE
thr. cross Alarm
pmG828Vc12Path24HSesFEAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 UAS Alarm
pmG828Vc12PathUASAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 UAS-BIDI Alarm pmG828Vc12PathUASBIDIAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 UAS-FE Alarm
pmG828Vc12PathUASFEAlarm
P.M. ACM
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 4QAM Strong threshold cross Alarm
pmACM-15M-Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 4QAM threshold cross Alarm
pmACM-15M-4QAMAlarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 8PSK threshold cross Alarm
pmACM-15M-8PSKAlarm
pmACM-15M-16QAMAlarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 4QAM Strong threshold cross Alarm
pmACM-24H-Alarm
517
Events alarms
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 4QAM threshold cross Alarm
pmACM-24H-4QAMAlarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 8PSK threshold cross Alarm
pmACM-24H-8PSKAlarm
pmACM-24H-16QAMAlarm
Plug-in module
IDU Board <Stm-1 1, Stm-1 2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Plug-in module Fail Alarm
plug-inModuleAlarm
IDU Board <Stm-1 1, Stm-1 2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Plug-in module Loss of Signal Alarm
plug-inLosAlarm
IDU Board <Stm-1 1, Stm-1 2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Plug-in module Mismatch Alarm
plug-inModuleMismatchAlarm
IDU Board <Stm-1 1, Stm-1 2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Plug-in module Status
plug-inStatusChange
Radio
IDU PRBS Fail Alarm
radioEquipPrbsFailAlarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Adaptive Modulation Reduced Capacity Notification radioEquipReducedCapacityAlarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Link Id. Alarm
radioEquipLinkIdAlarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Link Telemetry Fail Alarm
radioEquipLinkTelemetryFailAlarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Transmitter Switch on Remote Terminal BER
radioEquipTxFailCheckAlarm
RADIO SWITCH 1A [<radio branch label>] Reserve Radio Branch Selected in Revertive Mode radioEquipRevertiveAlarm
RIM
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] REMOTE RIM Alarm Synthesis
radioBranchRemoteRimAlarmSynthesis
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] IDU-ODU Cable Open Alarm
radioBranchCableOpenAlarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] IDU-ODU Cable Short Alarm
radioBranchCableShortAlarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] LOCAL RIM Alarm Synthesis
radioBranchLocalRimAlarmSynthesis
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RIM Power Supply Alarm
radioBranchRimPsuFailAlarm
RT
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT IDU-ODU Communication fail Alarm
radioBranchIduOduCommunicationAlarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT If Fail Alarm
radioBranchRtIfFail
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT LOCAL ODU Alarm Synthesis
radioBranchLocalOduAlarmSynthesis
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT REMOTE ODU Alarm Synthesis
radioBranchRemoteOduAlarmSynthesis
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT Vco Fail Alarm
radioBranchRtVcoFail
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT Rx Power Low Alarm
radioBranchRxPowerLowAlarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT Tx Power Alarm
radioBranchTxPowerAlarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx If Out Alarm
radioBranchRxIfOutalarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx Quality Low Alarm
radioBranchRxQualityLowAlarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx Quality Low Warning
radioBranchRxQualityLowWarning
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx Active Status
radioBranchRxActiveStatus
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Tx Active Status
radioBranchTxActiveStatus
518
Events alarms
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] XPIC Fail

radioBranchXpicFail
SETS
IDU Sets <name of the synchronism signal> Active Status
timingSynkActiveStatus
IDU Sets <name of the synchronism signal> Drift Alarm
timingSynkDriftAlarm
IDU Sets <name of the synchronism signal> LTI Alarm
timingSynkLossAlarm
IDU Sets Free Running Status
timingGeneratorFreeRunningStatus
IDU Sets Holdover Status
timingGeneratorHoldoverStatus
BASE BAND Sets T0 Fail Alarm
timingGeneratorT0FailAlarm
BASE BAND Sets T4 Fail Alarm
timingGeneratorT4FailAlarm
SNTP
SNTP servers lost Alarm
sntpClientUnicastServerLost
STM-1
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> B2 Excessive Ber Alarm
stm1B2ExcessiveBerAlarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> B2 Signal Degrade Alarm
stm1B2SignalDegradeAlarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> J0 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm
stm1J0TraceIdentifierMismatchAlarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> Loss of Frame Alarm
stm1LofAlarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> Loss of Signal Alarm
stm1LosAlarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> Ms Ais Alarm
stm1MsAisAlarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> Ms Rdi Alarm
stm1MsRdiAlarm
Unit
<unit name> Unit Fail Alarm
unitFailAlarm
<unit name> Unit Hw Mismatch Alarm
unitHwMismatchAlarm
<unit name> Unit Missing Alarm
unitMissingAlarm
<unit name> Unit Not Responding Alarm
unitNotRespondingAlarm
<unit name> Unit Sw Mismatch Alarm
unitSwMismatchAlarm
Vc4
IDU VC4-Stm1-<1, 2> AU-4 AIS Alarm
vc4Au4AisAlarm
IDU VC4-Stm1-<1, 2> AU-4 Loss of Pointer Alarm
vc4Au4LossPointerAlarm
IDU VC4-Stm1-<1, 2> B3 Excessive Ber Alarm
vc4B3ExcessiveBerAlarm
IDU VC4-Stm1-<1, 2> B3 Signal Degrade Alarm
vc4B3SignalDegradeAlarm
IDU VC4-Stm1-<1, 2> J1 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm
vc4J1TraceIdentifierMismatchAlarm
IDU VC4-Stm1-<1, 2> RDI Alarm
vc4HpRdiAlarm
IDU VC4-Stm1-<1, 2> Signal Label Mismatch Alarm
vc4SignalLabelMismatchAlarm
IDU VC4-Stm1-<1, 2> Unequipped Alarm
vc4UnequippedAlarm
IDU VC4-Stm1-<1, 2> Loss Of Multiframe Alarm
vc4LossOfMultiframeAlarm
Vc12
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 Excessive BER Alarm
vc12ExcessiveBerAlarm
519
Events alarms
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 RDI Alarm
vc12RdiAlarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 Signal Degrade Alarm
vc12SignalDegradeAlarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 Signal Label Mismatch Alarm
vc12SignalLabelMismatchAlarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm
vc12TraceIdentifierMismatchAlarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 TU LOP Alarm
vc12TuLopAlarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 TU Path AIS Alarm
vc12TuPathAisAlarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 Unequipped Alarm
vc12UnequippedAlarm
(1)
520
See Performance Monitoring
OPERATIONS LIST
A
ACL
Add a rule to the IP Access Control List ................................................................................. 61
Enable/disable the use of the IP Access Control List ................................................................ 62
Remove a rule from the IP Access Control List ........................................................................ 62
Verify the rules used by the IP Access Control List .................................................................. 61
ACM profile 4QAM Strong, enable/disable ..................................................................................188
Adaptive modulation configuration parameters, verify .................................................................186
Alarms
Change the severity level of an alarm ..................................................................................153
Enable/disable an alarm .....................................................................................................152
Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm .............................................................152
Verify the severity level and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms .................................152
Alarms stored into the equipment controller
Delete ..............................................................................................................................100
Save to file .......................................................................................................................100
ATPC
Functioning status, verify/modify .........................................................................................424
Intervention threshold, verify/modify ...................................................................................425
Maximum output power value at the transmitter, verify/modify ...............................................425
Range of the ATPC regulation, verify/modify .........................................................................425
Table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/reception for every ACM profile,
display .............................................................................................................................426
C
Communication stack
Modify .............................................................................................................................122
Verify ..............................................................................................................................122
D
Default Gateway
Running Default Gateway
Delete .......................................................................................................................... 74
Set/modify ................................................................................................................... 74
Verify ........................................................................................................................... 73
Stored Default Gateway
Delete .......................................................................................................................... 78
521
Set/modify ................................................................................................................... 78
Verify ........................................................................................................................... 77
E
E1
Label, modify ....................................................................................................................351
Loop, activate/deactivate ...................................................................................................352
Management status of LOS alarm, modify .............................................................................352
Status and configuration, verify ...........................................................................................351
Use, activate/deactivate .....................................................................................................351
ELP
Verify the status of the LANs ...............................................................................................338
Enable a new equipment feature ............................................................................................... 49
Equipment addresses (Ethernet port, LCT port, MAC address, IP Over OSI port, NSAP), verify ........... 49
Equipment configuration
Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last operation of
configuration restore (configuration revert) ...........................................................................129
Save the whole equipment configuration (configuration backup) ..............................................128
Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (configuration restore) ..........................128
Equipment firmware
Switch the memory benches ...............................................................................................121
Update .............................................................................................................................120
Verify the version ..............................................................................................................120
Equipment identifier, modify ..................................................................................................... 48
Equipment properties (type, ID, SNMP IP address, firmware version, etc.), verify ............................ 48
Equipment reference date/time, align to the PC date/time ............................................................ 49
Equipment software reset .............................................................................................50, 62, 123
Equipment units (type, code, version and functional status), verify ................................................ 50
Ethernet Switch
Address learning modality in MAC Table, verify/modify ...........................................................244
Aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table ..............................................................244
Compression of the headers of Ethernet packets in input from LANs, verify/modify .....................269
Correspondence between MPLS priority and 802.1p priority of the packets if input from LANs and in
output from Radio ports, verify/modify .................................................................................264
Criterion used to analyze 1588 packets, verify/modify ............................................................249
Display the MAC Table .......................................................................................................244
Emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue of the LANs, verify/modify ..........259
Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field, verify/modify ............................................................243
Hysteresis of the LLF modality, verify/modify ........................................................................246
Maximum size of the accepted packet, verify/modify ..............................................................243
Priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LANs to the output queue of the Radio
ports, verify/modify ...........................................................................................................264
Priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LANs to the output queue, verify/modify ...................................................................................................................................258
522
Reset the MAC Table ..........................................................................................................245

Restore Factory Default of the Ethernet Switch ......................................................................245
Status of fragmentation of Ethernet packets, verify/modify .....................................................248
Status of the 1588 Pass Through functionality, verify/modify ...................................................248
Value for Port Default and 802.1p priority, verify/modify .........................................................265
Value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the LANs which, in output, the Tag is
added to, verify/modify ......................................................................................................258
Verify/assign the output queue (LANs) to a packet according to its 802.1p Tag ..........................257
Verify/assign the output queue (LANs) to a packet according to its PTOS/DSCP field ...................257
Verify/assign the output queue (Radio ports) to a packet according to its native 802.1p Tag ........263
Verify/assign the output queue (Radio ports) to a packet according to its native MPLS
priority Tag ......................................................................................................................263
Verify/assign the output queue (Radio ports) to a packet according to its PTOS/DSCP field ..........264
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLans .........................................................258
VLan
Create a virtual Lan ......................................................................................................246
Delete a virtual Lan ......................................................................................................247
Modify a virtual Lan ......................................................................................................247
Verify the existing virtual LANs .......................................................................................246
Execute the test (RF Loop) for ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN ..............................................482
F
Fade Margin
Delete the results ..............................................................................................................444
Execute the calculation .......................................................................................................444
Verify the results ...............................................................................................................444
Verify the values of the Ptx parameters stored in the equipment controller and used for the
calculation ........................................................................................................................446
G
G.8032
Associate a VLAN to an ERP instance ....................................................................................346
Change the configuration of the parameters common to the two ERP instances ..........................342
Change the configuration of the parameters relevant to every single ERP instance .....................343
Enable/disable the manual commands to block a port of an ERP instance ..................................345
Enable/disable the Ring Protection modality for an ERP instance ..............................................344
Restore manually the RPL link for an ERP instance .................................................................345
Restore the factory values for the parameters of an ERP instance ............................................345
Verify the configuration of the parameters common to the two ERP instances ............................342
Verify the configuration of the parameters relevant to every single ERP instance ........................343
Verify to which ERP instance the traffic of each equipment VLAN is routed .................................346
523
I
IP address of remote users, set ................................................................................................159
IP address of the agent SNMP, modify ........................................................................................ 48
L
LAN
Activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line synchronism for the LAN, verify/
modify .............................................................................................................................276
Automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the LAN, verify/modify .......................275
Connection cost of the eLAN (STP/ELP), verify/modify ............................................................291
Current management modality of protocol 802.1Q, verify/modify .............................................281
C-VID value of the packets in input from the LAN and forwarded to the Radio, with a different VID,
verify/overwrite ................................................................................................................287
Default VID value of the LAN, verify/modify ..........................................................................285
ELP for the LAN, enable/disable ...........................................................................................291
Emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue of the LAN, verify/modify ...........284
Enable manually the laser transmission ................................................................................295
Enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation modality
and the transmission speed used by the LAN, verify/modify ....................................................274
Enabling status of the flow control of the LAN, verify/modify ...................................................274
Enabling status of the LAN, verify/modify .............................................................................273
Enabling status of the laser, modify .....................................................................................294
Enabling status of the LLF modality of the LAN, verify/modify ..................................................293
Execute the test laser functioning status ...............................................................................295
Force the value of VID of the LAN to the default value ............................................................285
Interface type of the LAN, verify/modify ...............................................................................277
Inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the LAN, verify/modify .............................................274
List of VID registered in VLAN Table Unit associated to the LAN, verify ......................................288
Loop on line side of the LAN, activate/deactivate ...................................................................293
Management of Provider Tag in the packets in input to the LAN in selective mode, verify/modify ..286
Management of the 802.1Q field on the messages in input from the LAN, verify/modify ..............285
Management of the LAN in Provider mode, verify/modify ........................................................289
Management of the Tag of the packets (in origin without Tag) in input from the LAN,
verify/modify ....................................................................................................................287
Maximum throughput of data in output from LAN port, verify/modify ........................................276
Modality and the criteria used to limit the traffic in input from the LAN, verify/modify .................279
Operating modality of the line synchronism (role) for the LAN, verify/modify .............................276
Ports through which the messages in input from the LAN, verify/modify ....................................289
Priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LAN to the output queue of the Radio
ports, verify/modify ...........................................................................................................282
Priority of the LANS (STP/ELP), verify/modify ........................................................................290
Rate Limiter
Create a PIRL instance ..................................................................................................277
Delete a PIRL instance ..................................................................................................279
Enable/disable a PIRL instance .......................................................................................278
Modify a PIRL instance ..................................................................................................278
Verify the existing PIRL instances ...................................................................................277
524
Remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the LAN ....................................................283
Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the LAN ................................................................276
Rule to forwarding the input packets from the LAN, verify/modify ............................................275
Service Tag List table, verify/modify ....................................................................................283
Status and configuration of the laser, verify ..........................................................................293
Status of the LAN in relation to the ELP, verify ......................................................................291
Status of the LAN in relation to the STP, verify ......................................................................290
Status of the LAN in relation to the Trunking mode, verify .......................................................292
STP for the LAN, enable/disable ...........................................................................................290
Traffic transport modality (point-point or Bridge), verify/modify ...............................................286
Transit of Untagged packets via LAN (802.1q - Secure), verify/modify ......................................289
Transmission mode of the laser, modify ................................................................................294
Trunking for the LAN, enable/disable ....................................................................................292
Value for Port Default and 802.1p priority, verify/modify .........................................................283
Value of S-VID added to the packets in input to the LAN (independently from the presence of the Tag),
verify/modify ....................................................................................................................288
Lan Statistics
Activate/deactivate the division by 1000 of the counter results ................................................430
Reset the counters results ......................................................................................... 430, 433
Verify the counters of the Ethernet ports subdivided by each port ............................................430
Verify the summary of the main counters of the Ethernet ports ................................................433
Verify/manage the main counters of an Ethernet port whose traffic is filtered according to the C-VID
identifier ..........................................................................................................................439
Verify/manage the main counters of an Ethernet port whose traffic is filtered according to the Internal
Priority value ....................................................................................................................437
Verify/manage the main counters of an Ethernet port whose traffic is filtered according to the S-VID
and C-VID identifiers .........................................................................................................441
Link identification number, verify/modify ...................................................................................189
LLF modality (equipment with two radio directions and Ethernet traffic concatenation),
verify/modify .........................................................................................................................175
Local User Input
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity ...............................................................503
Name, modify ...................................................................................................................502
Rest condition, modify ........................................................................................................502
Lower threshold of the modulation, verify/ modify ......................................................................188
M
MAN. OP
Verify the active manual operations ...................................................................................... 43
Verify/modify the manual operation timeout ........................................................................... 43
Management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality, verify/modify ....................................................172
Management of STM-1, verify/modify ........................................................................................174
Management of synchronisation, verify/modify ...........................................................................173
Management of the East-West modality, verify/modify ................................................................175
525
Mapping of tributaries A and B with Radio E1, verify/modify .........................................................178

MCM
Enable/disable the MCM function for each LAN .......................................................................199
Modify the management parameters of the BW-VSM messages ................................................199
Verify the enabling status and the configuration of the MCM function ........................................199
Modulation status of the RF carrier, verify/modify .......................................................................423
Monitoring of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH ring, verify/modify ..................174
N
Network password and timeout, modify .....................................................................................158
Nodal switch
Force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for the Wait Time
expiration .........................................................................................................................498
Modify the switch management ...........................................................................................497
Modify the Wait Time parameter ..........................................................................................498
Verify the configuration parameters .....................................................................................497
Verify the switch status ......................................................................................................497
Node
Belonging of the equipment to a node, verify/modify ..............................................................175
Enabling of Spanning Tree at level of node, verify/modify .......................................................177
Identifier of the equipment in the node, verify/modify ............................................................177
Number of elements of the node interconnected with Ethernet nodal Bus (Ethernet elements), verify/
modify .............................................................................................................................176
Number of elements of the node interconnected with TDM nodal Bus (TDM elements),
verify/modify ....................................................................................................................176
Protection of the TDM nodal Bus in the node, verify/modify .....................................................177
Transit of the packets of the ports (Ethernet Switch and CPU) of the local IDU to/from the ports (Ethernet Switch and CPU) of the other IDUs of the node, verify/modify ............................................178
Number of E1 assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams), verify/modify ...............................188
Number of high priority E1, verify/modify ..................................................................................188
O
OAM
Associate a MA to a VLAN ...................................................................................................457
Associate a MEP to a VLAN ..................................................................................................457
Characteristics of the OAM-FM Domain, verify .......................................................................455
Disable a remote MEP of the RMep table ...............................................................................460
Enable a remote MEP of the RMep table ................................................................................459
Enable/disable the CCM messages for a MEP .........................................................................458
Insert a remote MEP in RMep table ......................................................................................459
Modify the time interval used for the transmission of the CCM messages for a MEP .....................458
OAM-FM Domain of equipment, define ..................................................................................456
526
OAM-FM Domain of equipment, remove ................................................................................456

Remove a MA/MEP from a VLAN ..........................................................................................458
Remove a remote MEP from RMep table ...............................................................................460
Send one or more Loop Back messages (LBM) to a remote MIP/MEP ........................................460
same VLAN .......................................................................................................................461
Verify the table of the remote MEPs (RMep table) ..................................................................459
VLAN
Vlan, verify the status as regards the OAM Ethernet functionality ........................................456
Operating status of the adaptive modulation
Modify .............................................................................................................................187
Verify ..............................................................................................................................186
Operation of the RT power supply, verify/modify ........................................................................423
Operation of the transmitter, verify/modify ................................................................................423
Operations stored into the equipment controller
Delete ..............................................................................................................................101
Save to file .......................................................................................................................100
P
Password and timeout of the NMS5UX user, change ....................................................................158
Password and timeout of the System user, modify ......................................................................157
PM
Activate a measure ............................................................................................................. 81
Activate all measures in a group ........................................................................................... 81
Deactivate a measure ......................................................................................................... 81
Deactivate all measure in a group ......................................................................................... 82
Display the results and the threshold exceeding alarms ........................................................... 82
Modify the modality used to increase the counters (ACM Radio) ................................................ 92
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms ................................................................................... 85
Reset the values of the records daily and primary ................................................................... 84
Set the 2Mbit/s tributary used for the measure (G828 E1 Line Side/G828 E1 Internal Side) .......... 91
Set the thresholds of the control parameters and of the alarms ................................................ 85
Verify the status of the measures ......................................................................................... 80
Port Configuration
Ethernet port configuration, verify/modify .............................................................................. 54
IP over OSI port configuration, verify/modify ......................................................................... 60
LCT PPP port configuration, verify/modify .............................................................................. 56
Line EOC port configuration, verify/modify ............................................................................. 59
Radio 1A port configuration, verify/modify ............................................................................. 58
Radio 2A port configuration, verify/modify ............................................................................. 58
Radio port configuration, verify/modify .................................................................................. 57
Power profile of the RF transmitter, verify/modify .......................................................................187
PRBS
527
Activate/reset the measure .................................................................................................478

Deactivate the measure .....................................................................................................478
Enable/disable the used E1 signal for the measure .................................................................479
Modify the pattern type used for the measure .......................................................................478
Verify the configuration parameters of the measure ...............................................................478
Verify the status of the measure ..........................................................................................478
Priority of the dynamic E1, verify/modify ...................................................................................189
PWE3
Activate the Provider modality for all the Bundles ..................................................................409
Associate one or more PWE3 channels to a Bundle .................................................................411
Create a PWE3 Bundle .......................................................................................................408
Deactivate the Provider modality for all the Bundles ...............................................................410
Delete a PWE3 Bundle ........................................................................................................411
Delete one or more PWE3 channel .......................................................................................413
Modify the configuration of a PWE3 Bundle ...........................................................................410
Modify the configuration of a PWE3 channel ..........................................................................412
Reset the counters results of the PWE3 channels ...................................................................435
Verify the counters of the PWE3 channels .............................................................................435
Verify the existing PWE3 Bundles and PWE3 channels .............................................................408
Verify/modify the management of the PWE3 function .............................................................173
R
Radio branch label, verify/modify .............................................................................................197
Radio configuration, verify/modify ............................................................................................171
Radio loop
Activate ...........................................................................................................................481
Deactivate ........................................................................................................................482
Verify the status ................................................................................................................481
Radio port
Automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the Radio port, verify/modify ..............320
Configuration of the output queues of the Radio port, verify/modify .........................................322
Connection cost of the Radio port (STP), verify/modify ...........................................................328
Control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the Radio port, verify/modify ....................325
Default VID value of the Radio port, verify/modify .................................................................326
Enabling status of the flow control of the Radio port, verify/modify ..........................................322
Enabling status of the Radio port, verify/modify .....................................................................320
Enabling status of the S_Gentle functionality of the Radio port, verify/modify ............................322
Force the value of Vid of the Radio port to the default value ....................................................326
Integration constant on the drop possibility in a RED context (Radio port), verify/modify ............322
Ports through which the messages in input from the Radio port, verify/modify ...........................327
Priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the Radio port to the output queue of the
LANs, verify/modify ...........................................................................................................321
Priority of the Radio port (STP), verify/modify .......................................................................328
Status of the Radio port in relation to the STP, verify .............................................................327
Status of the Radio port in relation to the Trunking mode, verify ..............................................328
528
STP for the Radio port, enable/disable ..................................................................................328

Trunking for the Radio port, enable/disable ...........................................................................329
Value for Port Default, verify/modify ....................................................................................321
Verify/overwrite the C-VID value of the packets in input from the Radio port and forwarded to a LAN,
with a different C-VID ........................................................................................................326
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the Radio port ..................................321
Radio switch
Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration .............488
Modify the management of the switching in reception .............................................................486
Modify the management of the switching in transmission ........................................................487
Modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission ..................................................487
Verify the configuration parameters of the switches ...............................................................486
Verify the switches status ...................................................................................................486
Reference band/modulation
Modify .............................................................................................................................187
Verify ..............................................................................................................................186
Remote equipment list
Add a station ..................................................................................................................... 37
Add equipment .................................................................................................................. 38
Open the WEB page of equipment (Remote Link) .................................................................... 39
Remove a station ............................................................................................................... 38
Remove equipment ............................................................................................................. 39
Rename a station ............................................................................................................... 37
Reset ................................................................................................................................ 39
Remote User Input
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity ...............................................................506
Name, modify ...................................................................................................................506
Resolution of the received power (Prx), verify/modify ..................................................................424
Resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx), verify/modify .............................................................424
Restore Factory Default of the equipment .......................................................................... 122, 123
RF channel, verify/modify ........................................................................................................422
RMon
Activate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port ..........................................449
Collection status of the statistic counters of the Ethernet ports, verify ......................................449
Deactivate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port ......................................449
Display the values of statistical counters of an Ethernet port ...................................................450
Routing Table
Running Routing Table
Add an element ............................................................................................................. 73
Remove one or more elements ........................................................................................ 74
Verify ........................................................................................................................... 73
Add an element ............................................................................................................. 77
Remove one or more elements ........................................................................................ 78
529
Verify ........................................................................................................................... 77
S
S/N measure
Update the value ...............................................................................................................476
Verify the value .................................................................................................................476
Save to file the equipment configuration ....................................................................................100
SD
Automatic equipment restart from SD in case of replacement of IDU ........................................111
Automatic update of the equipment sw from SD memory ........................................................113
Copy the equipment sw from SD memory to controller (Sw Dwl SD) .........................................114
Delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from SD memory .................................114
Disable the automatic equipment restart from SD memory (data + sw) ....................................114
Disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the standby memory bench after an
automatic sw update from SD memory .................................................................................114
Force the restore, from SD memory to controller, of the configuration data and of the
equipment sw ...................................................................................................................114
Security
Activate the equipment management in Not Secure Mode .......................................................133
Activate the equipment management in Secure Mode .............................................................133
Active the equipment management in mixed mode (Secure Mode/Not Secure Mode) ..................134
Change the FTP access credentials .......................................................................................138
Change the SFTP access credentials (SNMPv1/v2c) ................................................................137
Configure the SSH protocol .................................................................................................134
Migrate from FTP protocol to SFTP protocol ...........................................................................136
Migrate from HTTP protocol to HTTPS protocol .......................................................................135
Migrate from HTTPS protocol to HTTP protocol .......................................................................136
Migrate from SFTP protocol to FTP protocol ...........................................................................137
Migrate from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol ..........................................................138
Migrate from SNMPv3 protocol to SNMPv1/v2c protocol ..........................................................139
Set the SFTP access credentials (SNMPv3) ............................................................................137
Update the certificates (HTTPS) ...........................................................................................136
Verify the security protocols of the equipment (SSH, SFTP, HTTPS, SNMPv3) .............................132
SNMPv3 user list
Add a user ........................................................................................................................161
Delete a user ....................................................................................................................163
Modify a user ....................................................................................................................162
Verify ..............................................................................................................................161
SNTP functionality
Activate ...........................................................................................................................104
Deactivate ........................................................................................................................105
Set the execution parameters .............................................................................................104
Status of the local/remote synchronization protocol, verify/modify ................................................198
530
Status of the STM-1 Bulk function, verify/modify ........................................................................209

STM-1
Alarms, verify ...................................................................................................................356
B2 Excessive BER alarm threshold, verify/modify ...................................................................357
B2 Signal Degrade alarm threshold, verify/modify ..................................................................357
Enable manually the laser transmission ................................................................................359
Enabling status of the J0 Trace Identifier byte, verify/modify ...................................................356
Enabling status of the laser, modify .....................................................................................358
Execute the laser functioning status test ...............................................................................359
Loop, verify/modify ...........................................................................................................355
Sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J0 Trace Identifier, verify/modify ............356
Status and configuration of the laser, verify ..........................................................................357
Status, verify/modify .........................................................................................................355
Transmission mode of the laser, modify ................................................................................358
Transport status of the bytes of SOH frame on an E1 Radio channel, verify/modify .....................359
STM-1 switch
Force the switch on preferential STM-1 without waiting for the Wait Time expiration ...................493
Modify the logic of switch ...................................................................................................493
Modify the switch management ...........................................................................................492
Set the primary STM-1 stream as preferential .......................................................................493
Verify the configuration parameters .....................................................................................492
Verify the switch status ......................................................................................................492
STP
Verify the MAC Address of a bridge ......................................................................................338
Verify the status of the ports ...............................................................................................338
Verify/modify the Forward Delay interval ..............................................................................338
Verify/modify the maximum lifetime of the BPDU packets .......................................................338
Verify/modify the priority of a bridge ....................................................................................338
Verify/modify the transmission interval of the BPDU packets ...................................................337
Verify/modify the version ...................................................................................................337
Structure of the Radio E1s, verify/modify ..................................................................................406
Synchronisation
Enable/disable the T4 Squelch .............................................................................................213
Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source ....................................................................215
Enable/disable the use of the source quality into the choice criterion of the synchronism .............214
Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source ......................................219
Force the status of the T0 synchronisation ............................................................................213
Force the use of a synchronism source .................................................................................216
Manage the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and set the interface (output/input)
of tributary A/B .................................................................................................................220
Modality to assign the role of the LANs (1000Base-T) used as synchronism sources,
verify/modify ....................................................................................................................221
Modify the use priority of a synchronism source .....................................................................216
Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without waiting for the expiry
of Wait Time .....................................................................................................................219
Re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation ...................220
Set a synchronism source as preferential ..............................................................................217
531
Set the Hold Off Time parameter .........................................................................................213

Set the minimum quality level of the source that generates the T4 synchronism ........................215
Set the modality from which the T4 synchronism is extracted ..................................................213
Set the signal used as synchronism source for T2/T3-2 input ...................................................217
Set the signal used as synchronism source for TE LAN-A or TE LAN-B input ...............................218
Set the source used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL A or STM-1/NODAL B input .....................218
Set the threshold levels of the LTI alarm ..............................................................................214
Set the WTR Time parameter ..............................................................................................214
Verify the status and configuration of the synchronism sources ................................................215
Verify the status and configuration of the T0 and T4 synchronism ............................................212
Verify/modify the management of SSM protocol for every single LAN ........................................222
Verify/modify the spare bit used for the coding of quality for T2/T3 E1 synchronism sources ........221
T
TDM matrix
Delete one or more connections ..........................................................................................380
Disable an Auto-Loop .........................................................................................................381
Display the connections of the equipment .............................................................................378
Enable the closing of a channel on itself (Auto-Loop) ..............................................................381
Execute a Pass Through connection ......................................................................................379
Execute a protected Tributary-Radio connection ....................................................................379
Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection ..............................................................................380
Execute an unprotected Tributary-Radio connection ...............................................................378
Force the switch on preferential connection without waiting for the Wait Time expiration .............383
Modify the connection label .................................................................................................381
Modify the modality used to manage the preferential connection ..............................................383
Modify the modality used to manage the switch in the protected connection ..............................382
Modify the structure of the Radio E1 involved by a connection .................................................384
Modify the Wait Time parameter (protected connection) .........................................................383
Verify the status and the configuration of a protected connection .............................................382
TDM matrix (PWE3)
Delete one or more connections ..........................................................................................397
Disable an Auto-Loop .........................................................................................................398
Display the connections of the equipment .............................................................................396
Enable the closing of a tributary channel on itself (Auto-Loop) .................................................397
Execute a Tributary-PWE3 connection ..................................................................................396
Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection ..............................................................................397
Modify the connection label .................................................................................................398
Threshold level of the signal at reception, verify/modify ..............................................................197
Tx Switch
Enabling status of the switch in transmission, verify/modify ....................................................198
Reset the Transmitter Switch on Remote... alarm ..................................................................199
T and N parameters, verify/modify ......................................................................................198
532
U
Upper threshold of the modulation, verify/modify .......................................................................188
User list
Add a user ........................................................................................................................156
Delete a user ....................................................................................................................157
Modify a user ....................................................................................................................157
Verify ..............................................................................................................................156
User Output
Force the activation ...........................................................................................................510
Functioning mode of the relay contacts, modify .....................................................................509
Name, modify ...................................................................................................................509
Remove the forcing ...........................................................................................................511
Signal coupled, modify .......................................................................................................510
Users list
Force the logout of a user .................................................................................................... 34
Verify the users connected to the equipment .......................................................................... 34
V
VC-12
Alarms status, verify ..........................................................................................................373
Enabling status of the J2 Trace Identifier byte, verify/modify ...................................................373
Signal Label value, verify/modify .........................................................................................374
VC-12 Excessive BER alarm threshold, verify/modify ..............................................................371
VC-12 Signal Degrade alarm threshold, verify/modify .............................................................371
VC-4
Alarms, verify ...................................................................................................................366
B3 Excessive BER alarm threshold, verify/modify ...................................................................366
B3 Signal Degrade alarm threshold, verify/modify ..................................................................366
Enabling status of the J1 Trace Identifier, verify/modify ..........................................................365
Signal Label value, verify/modify .........................................................................................366
Verify the equipment feature .................................................................................................... 49
W
Wake Up functionality
Activate ...........................................................................................................................105
Deactivate ........................................................................................................................106
Set the execution parameters .............................................................................................105
533
WEB LCT
Update .............................................................................................................................122
Verify the version ..............................................................................................................122
WEB LCT page
Close the page ................................................................................................................... 28
Display the page of equipment (Remote Link) ........................................................................ 35
Open more pages ............................................................................................................... 28
Open the page from Browser (Ethernet connection) ................................................................ 26
Open the page from Browser (USB connection) ...................................................................... 27
Open the page from SCT/LMT .............................................................................................. 27
X
Xpic
Disable temporarily the function XPIC for a single branch ........................................................205
Enable/disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP) .........................................................206
Restore the function XPIC after a fault detection ....................................................................206
Restore the XPIC function of the single branch ......................................................................205
Verify the configuration parameters of the XPIC function ........................................................205
534
PARAMETERS LIST
Received Byte ...................... 437, 439, 441

Received Frame .................... 437, 439, 441
ACL
IP Address ........................................... 69
Mask .................................................. 69
Agent IP Address .................................. 31, 51

Alarms ....................................................155
Group/Alarm .......................................154
Name ................................................. 69
Severity .............................................154
Permission ........................................... 69
Trap Notification ..................................154
Status ................................................. 69
ACM Engine .............................................190
ATPC
ATPC Regulation ..................................428
ACM Table ...............................................191
Current ATPC Power .............................428
Ethernet Capacity ................................191
Max Ptx ..............................................428
Global Capacity ...................................191
Reference Modulation Tx Power Control ..428
Max TDM Cap ......................................191
Upper Modulation ATPC Thresholds

on Local PRx .......................................428
Profile ................................................191
TDM Capacity ......................................191
Advanced Stat. Mon.
1024 to Max Pkt size (Rx) Byte .............438
1024 to Max Pkt size (Tx + Rx)
Byte .......................................... 439, 441
B
Bandwidth & Modulation ............................190
1024 to Max Pkt size (Tx) Byte ..............438

128 to 255 (Rx) Byte ...........................437
128 to 255 (Tx + Rx) Byte ............ 439, 441
128 to 255 (Tx) Byte ...........................438
256 to 511 (Rx) Byte ...........................437
256 to 511 (Tx + Rx) Byte ............ 439, 441
C
Carrier Only .............................................427
Communication stack
256 to 511 (Tx) Byte ...........................438
Current Stack .....................................125
512 to 1023 (Rx) Byte .........................437

512 to 1023 (Tx + Rx) Byte .......... 439, 441
512 to 1023 (Tx) Byte ..........................438
64 (Rx) Byte .......................................437
64 (Tx + Rx) Byte ....................... 439, 441
Default Gateway ....................................... 76
64 (Tx) Byte .......................................438
Running Default Gateway ...................... 75
65 to 127 (Rx) Byte .............................437
Stored Default Gateway ........................ 79
65 to 127 (Tx + Rx) Byte ............. 439, 441

65 to 127 (Tx) Byte .............................438
Byte Sent ............................ 438, 439, 441
Dropped Frame .................... 437, 439, 441
Frame Sent ................................ 438, 441
Frames Sent .......................................439
E
E1
AIS Alarm ...........................................353
535
Enable ...............................................353
Unit ...................................................124
Internal Loop ......................................353
Equipment ID ...................................... 31, 51
Line Loop ...........................................353

LOS Alarm ..........................................353
Los Inversion ......................................353
Tributary Label ....................................353
East-West ...............................................181
Equipment unit
Expected Type ..................................... 53
HW Ver. .............................................. 53
Par Part Number ................................... 53
Equipment Date/Time ................................ 51
Part Number ........................................ 53
Equipment Feature
Real Type ............................................ 53
Built-in Fade Margin facility .................... 52
Serial Number ...................................... 53
E1 transport (PWE3) ............................. 53
Unit Alarms ......................................... 53
Enhanced Eth processing ....................... 52
Ethernet Enh ...........................................180
ETH OAM functionality ........................... 52

Eth ring protection ................................ 53
Header compression inhibit .................... 52
Ieee1588 support ................................. 52
OSPF functionality ................................ 52
SDH overhead and VC12 quality
management ....................................... 52
Ethernet IP Address ................................... 52

Ethernet IP NetMask .................................. 52
Ethernet MAC Address ................................ 52
Ethernet Switch
1588 Pass Through
C Vid ............................................253
Security package .................................. 53
Filter Type .....................................253
STM-1 transport ................................... 53
Interface Aware ..............................253
Sync eth support .................................. 52
S Vid ............................................253
Sync quality management ..................... 52

Upgrade up to 128QAM ......................... 52
Upgrade up to 14M ............................... 52
Upgrade up to 16QAM ........................... 52
Compression
Bytes Context+Dynamic ..................270
Bytes Header .................................270
C_TAG (802.1Q) .............................270
Control Word (RFC4385) ..................270
Upgrade up to 256QAM ......................... 52
EoMPLS (Ethernet over MPLS) ..........270
Upgrade up to 28M ............................... 52
Ethernet ........................................270
Upgrade up to 32QAM ........................... 52
IP+ ...............................................270
Upgrade up to 40M ............................... 52
Max Number of Labels .....................270
Upgrade up to 56M ............................... 52

Upgrade up to 64QAM ........................... 52
Upgrade up to 8PSK .............................. 52
XPIC activation .................................... 52
Equipment firmware
Max Number of S-TAG .....................270

MPLS ............................................270
Number of Labels and Tags ..............270
Q-in-Q (802.1ad) ............................270
UDP ..............................................270
LLF Hysteresis .....................................252
Actual Release ....................................124
MAC Addr. Aging Time .........................250
Bench Status ......................................124
MAC Learning Vid basis ........................250
Downloading Status .............................124
Max Packet size (Byte) .........................250
Release Bench 1 ..................................124
Priority towards LAN ports
Release Bench 2 ..................................124

Software ............................................124
Software Version .................................124
536
Equipment Type ................................... 31, 51
802.1p Priority ...............................260

Default Priority ...............................261
Egress Priority Policy .......................262
Priority Selection ............................261
PTOS/DSCP ...................................260
Priority towards Radio ports

802.1p Priority ...............................266
Help Web Server ....................................... 24

Internal Priority Selection ................268
MPLS Priority .................................266
Native MPLS ..................................267
PTOS/DSCP ...................................267
QinQ ETH type 0x ................................250
Radio Packet Frag.
Status ...........................................252
I
IP ...........................................................125
IP Over OSI .............................................. 52
IP/OSI Stack ............................................. 51
VLan
Default VLan ID ..............................252
Disable ..........................................251
Label ............................................251
Lan1 .............................................251
Lan2 .............................................251
Lan3 .............................................251
Lan4 .............................................251
Port B ...........................................252
Radio port .....................................251
Tagged .........................................251
L
LAN
802.1Q
802.1q Setting ...............................304
Default Vid ....................................303
Force Def. Vid ................................304
Lan to Radio C_Vid Rewrite ..............304
Unmodif. .......................................251
Lan to Radio C_Vid Rewrite &

Selective QinQ ...............................305
Untag. ..........................................251
LAN To Radio Rewrite ......................305
VLanID .........................................251
Port C_Vid .....................................305
Exclude 4QAM Strong ...............................190
Port S_Vid .....................................305

Provider Port ..................................304
Selective Provider Tag .....................304
Traffic Treatment ............................304
Untag to Tag ..................................304

Alarms ...............................................298
Fade Margin
Ext. Attenuation (dB) ...........................447
Fade Margin (dB) ................................447
Local IP ..............................................447
Remote IP ..........................................447
Firmware Version ...................................... 51
Frequency/Channel selection ......................427
FTP protocol ............................................. 24
Cable Crossover ..................................297

Duplex ...............................................298
Egress Priority Policy ............................307
Egress Shaping ...................................298
ELP
Priority ..........................................309
Recommended Max .........................309
Recommended Min .........................309
Role ..............................................308
Status ...........................................308
STP/ELP ........................................307
G
Gosip Address ........................................... 52
Value ............................................309
Version .........................................309
Flow Control Full Dplx/
Back Pressure Half Dplx ........................297
Forwarding Rule ..................................296
537
Input Filtering Policing

Mode ............................................299
Trunk/LACP ........................... 309, 336
Not Registered Traffic Default Color ..300
Tx Pck Cnt .....................................309
Interface Type ....................................297

Laser Control
Lan Stat.Summary
Byte Received .....................................434
Auto Restart Time ...........................311

Link Length ....................................311
Mode ............................................311
Module Type ..................................311
Byte Sent ...........................................434

CRC Err ..............................................434
Dropped Frame ...................................434
Test Time ......................................311
Frame Received ...................................434
Transmitter Control .........................310
Frame Sent .........................................434
Wave Length ..................................311

Line Loop ...........................................310
LLF ....................................................310
M/S Autoneg .......................................296
Mac Learning ......................................297
Master/Slave ......................................296
Port Based VLAN .................................307
Port Role ............................................298
Priority
Lan Statistics
Broadcast Frame Received ....................431
Byte Sent ...........................................432
Collisions ............................................431
CRC Align Errors ..................................431
Divide by 1000 ....................................431
Dropped Frame ...................................431
Fragments ..........................................431
Frame 1024 to max pck size .................432
Current 802.1Q Setting ...................301

Default Internal Priority ...................302
Internal Priority Selection ................302
Service Tag List ..............................302
Rate Control .......................................296
Frame 128 to 255 Oct ..........................431

Frame 256 to 511 Oct. .........................432
Frame 512 to 1023 Oct ........................432
Frame 64 Oct. .....................................431
Frame 65 to 127 Oct. ...........................431
Rate Limiter
ARP ..............................................299
Frame Sent .........................................432
Broadcast ......................................299
In Pause Frame ...................................432
Rate .............................................299
Jabbers ..............................................431
Status ...........................................298
Late Collisions .....................................432
Unicast .........................................299
Unknown Multicast ..........................299
Unknown Unicast ............................299
Speed ................................................298
Speed/Duplex .....................................297
Multicast Frame Received .....................431

Out Broadcast Frame ...........................432
Out Multicast Frame .............................432
Out Pause Frame .................................432
Out Unicast Frame ...............................432
STP
Priority ..........................................309
Oversize Frame ...................................431
Recommended Max .........................309
Total Byte Received .............................431
Recommended Min .........................309
Total Frame Received ...........................431
Role ..............................................308
Undersize Frame .................................431
Status ...........................................308
STP/ELP ........................................307
Value ............................................309
Version .........................................309
Valid Byte Received .............................432

Valid Frame Received ...........................432
LCT PPP IP Address .................................... 52
LCT PPP NetMask ....................................... 52
Trunking
Partner Id ......................................309
Rx Pck Cnt .....................................309
538
Status ...........................................309
Local Link ID ............................................191
Maintenance End Point - MEP ................468
Local User Input

Input Operation ..................................504
Maintenance Intermediate Point - MIP ....469
Label .................................................504
Remote MEP (RMep) ............................470
Severity .............................................504
RMEP
MAC Address ..................................464
Status ................................................504
MEP Id ..........................................464
Lower Modulation .....................................190
MEP State ......................................464

RDI State ......................................464
RMep table .........................................470
VLAN
CCM Int. ........................................463
MCM
CCM Status ....................................463
BW Tx Type ........................................202
Label ............................................463
Fading Hold Off ...................................202
LAN... ...........................................463
MCM Enable ........................................202
MA Name ......................................463
MEP ID ..........................................463
TX OAM Maint. Level ............................202
Port... ...........................................463
TX Period ...........................................202
TX VLan ID .........................................202
OSI ........................................................125
Measurements Resolution
Prx ....................................................427
Ptx ....................................................427
P
Permanent TDM Traffic ..............................191
Pipe los forwading ....................................181
Port Configuration
Nbr of Eth. Elements .................................181

Nbr of TDM Elements ................................182
Nodal switch
Ethernet
Alarm Severity - MNGT ..................... 63
Enable - MNGT ................................ 63
In Band Management - LAN .............. 64
Forced Switch .....................................499
In Band Management - VLan ID ......... 64
Wtr Time ............................................499
IP Address ...................................... 63
Node Element ID ......................................182

Node Type ...............................................181
MNGT VLan Tagging - MNGT ............. 64

MNGT VLan Tagging - VLan ID ........... 64
Net Mask ........................................ 63
Speed/Duplex - MNGT ...................... 63
IP Over OSI
EOC ............................................... 68
OAM .......................................................467
IP Address ...................................... 67
Gosip Address ................................. 68
Continuity Check Message - CCM ...........472

Domain ...................................... 462, 468
Level .................................................462
IP Net Mask .................................... 67

Line EOC ........................................ 67
Radio ............................................. 68
Radio 1A ........................................ 68
Link Trace Message - LTM .....................473
Radio 2A ........................................ 68
Loop Back Message - LBM .....................472
Signal Input .................................... 68
Maintenance Association - MA ...............468
LCT PPP
539
IP PPP Address ................................ 64
Time TDM Unavilable ...........................436
IP PPP NetMask ............................... 64

IP Unnumbered ............................... 65
PC IP Address ................................. 64
Line EOC
EOC ............................................... 67
IP Address ...................................... 67
Radio ......................................................180
IP NetMask ..................................... 67
Radio Branch Label ...................................201
IP Unnumbered ............................... 67
Radio port
PPP Mode ....................................... 67

Signal Input .................................... 67
Radio
802.1Q
C Vid/S Vid Rewrite .........................333
Default Vid ....................................333
IP Address ...................................... 65
Force default ID .............................333
IP NetMask ..................................... 65
Ingress Filtering Check ....................333
IP Unnumbered ............................... 65
PPP Mode ....................................... 65
Radio 1A
IP Address ...................................... 66
IP NetMask ..................................... 66
IP Unnumbered ............................... 66
PPP Mode ....................................... 66
Mac Learning ......................................330

Port ...................................................330
Port Based VLan ..................................334
Priority
Priority Selection ............................331
Queue Management Lan To Radio
Radio 2A
IP Address ...................................... 66
IP NetMask ..................................... 66
IP Unnumbered ............................... 66
PPP Mode ....................................... 66
Actual WFQ ....................................332

Current Queue Memory Usage ..........333
Drop Type .....................................332
Exp. Weighting Constant .................331
Flow Control ..................................331
PPP protocol ............................................. 24
Green Tokens .................................332
PRBS
P max (G) .....................................333
2 Mbit/s Selection ................................480

BER ...................................................480
E1 Signal ............................................480
P max (Y) ......................................333

Queue ...........................................331
Queue Length ................................332
S gentle (G) ...................................333
Elapsed Time ......................................480
S gentle (Y) ...................................333
Errors ................................................480
S max (G) .....................................332
Fail Alarms .........................................480
S max (Y) ......................................333
Start/Stop ..........................................480
S min (G) ......................................332
Sync Loss Alarm ..................................480
S min (Y) ......................................333
Test Pattern ........................................480
S-gentle ........................................331
Type .............................................332
PWE3 .....................................................181
View RED Curve .............................333
Lost Packets .......................................436
WFQ Weight ...................................332
Malformed Packets ..............................436
Yellow Tokens ................................332
Oof Packets ........................................436

Received Packets .................................436
Reordered Packets ...............................436
Repeated Packets ................................436
Sent Packets .......................................436
540
STP
Priority .................................. 335, 336
Recommended Max ................. 335, 336
Recommended Min ................. 335, 336
Role ...................................... 334, 336
Status ................................... 335, 336
STP ...................................... 334, 335
Running Routing Table ..................... 75, 76
Value .................................... 335, 336
Destination ..................................... 75
Version ................................. 335, 336
Hop ............................................... 75
Interface ........................................ 75
Radio switch
Net Mask ........................................ 75
Rx Forced Switch .................................489
Protocol .......................................... 75
Tx Forced Switch .................................489
Stored Routing Table ....................... 76, 79
Tx Preferential ....................................489
Destination ..................................... 79
Wait Time ...........................................489
Hop ............................................... 79
Radio System ........................................... 31
Interface ........................................ 79
Net Mask ........................................ 79
Remote Element Table ............................... 40

Remote equipment list ............................... 40
Remote User Input
RT PSU ...................................................427
Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold .................201
Label .................................................508
Severity .............................................508
Status ................................................508
Ring Protection
CFM/CCM Interval ...............................347
Domain
Level ............................................347
Name ............................................347
G.8032 Timers
S
S/N ........................................................477
SCT/LMT .................................................. 24
SD
Automatic data restore from SD ............115
Automatic SW download from SD ..........115
Guard (ms) ....................................347
EC serial number .................................115
WTB (ms) ......................................347
EC system version ...............................115
WTR (min) .....................................347

Not Assigned Traffic .............................347
Ring 1,Ring 2
ERP Revertive ................................348
Lan Port ........................................348
MA Name ......................................348
Not running Sw delete ..........................115

Status ................................................115
SW system version ..............................115
Type ..................................................115
Secure
Manual Command ...........................348
Authentication .....................................140
MEP ID ..........................................348
C.A Certificate .....................................141
Ring Name ....................................348
Certificate Status .................................141
Ring State .....................................348

RPL Role ........................................348
Status ...........................................348
VLan ID .........................................348
VLan/Ring Binding
Cipher Algorithm ......................... 140, 141

File name ...........................................141
HTTP Secure Server (HTTPS) ................140
Secure Protocols ..................................140
Label ............................................349
SSH Host Key .....................................140
Ring Binding ..................................349
SSH Public Key ....................................140
VLan ID .........................................349
SSH Version .......................................140
RMon
Lan Port .............................................451
SSL Certificate ....................................141

SNTP
Status ................................................451
Main Server IP Address ........................107
Routing Table ........................................... 76
NTP Server Lost Alarm .........................107
541
Polling Interval (Sec.) ..........................107
LAN 4 ................................................340
Polling Retries .....................................107
MAC Address ......................................341
Polling Timeout (Sec.) ..........................107
Max Age .............................................339
Reserve Server IP Addr ........................107
Port B ................................................340
Status signal ...........................................155
Priority ...............................................341
Radio port ..........................................340
STM-1
Alarms ...............................................361
Auto Restart Time ...............................363
Automatic Shutdown ............................363
Status ................................................340
Version ..............................................340
B2 Excessive BER Threshold ..................362
STP Mode ................................................182
B2 Signal Degrade Threshold ................362
Sync Enable .............................................181
Internal Side Loop ...............................361
Synchronisation
J0 Path Trace
Alarms ...............................................223
Expected .......................................361
Received .......................................361
Sent .............................................361
Type .............................................361
Laser Control ......................................362
Line Side Loop ....................................361
Module Type .......................................362
Radio E1 Selection ...............................363
STM-1 Status ......................................361
Test Time ...........................................363
E1 Retiming ........................................228
Enabled ..............................................224
Forced Switch .....................................226
Hold Off Time ......................................223
Internal ..............................................225
LTI Reset Time ....................................224
LTI Set Time .......................................224
Name ......................................... 225, 228
Nodal 1 ..............................................225
Nodal 2 ..............................................225
STM1 Bulk Config

Radio 1A ............................................210
Radio 2A ............................................210
STM-1 MST Mode .....................................181
STM-1 switch
Ovw Rx Qlty .......................................226

Ovw Tx Qlty ........................................227
Preferential Switch ...............................226
Priority ...............................................226
RADIO 1A ...........................................225
Direction ............................................494
RADIO 2A ...........................................225
MSP Protection ....................................494
Rx Quality ..........................................226
Primary STM-1 ....................................494
Source ...............................................225
Protection Mode ..................................494
Status Control .....................................223
Protection STM-1 .................................494
STM-1 ................................................225
Switch Status .....................................494
STM-1 1 .............................................225
Wtr Time (Min.) ..................................494
STM-1 2 .............................................225
STM-1/NODAL A ..................................225
STP
542
Role ...................................................340
Force Version ......................................339
STM-1/NODAL B ..................................225
Forward Delay ....................................339
Sync Alarm .........................................228
Hello Time ..........................................339
Sync Loss ...........................................226
LAN 1 ................................................340
T0 Current ..........................................224
LAN 2 ................................................340
T2/T3 1 ..............................................225
LAN 3 ................................................340
T2/T3-2 .............................................225
T4 Current ..........................................224
Linked Channel 1 option .......................402
T4 Minimum Quality .............................224
Name option .......................................401
T4 Squelch .........................................223
Stream ..............................................400
T4-T0 ................................................223
Type option ........................................402
TE LAN-A ...........................................225
TDM Nodal Bus Protection ..........................182
TE LAN-B ...........................................225
Tx Quality ..........................................226
WTR Time ..........................................224
Synchronization Setup Protocol ..................201
Translate PDH Into SDH Alarms ..................181

Tributary A Mapping .................................183
Tributary B Mapping .................................183
Tx Power Ramp ........................................190
Tx Switch on remote Alarms ......................201
Alarm Thres ........................................201
Check Period .......................................201
TDM Matrix
Tx Transmitter .........................................427
1st Radio option ..................................387

1st Trib. option ...................................387
2nd Radio option .................................387
2nd Trib. option ..................................387
Channel .............................................386
Channel option ....................................388
Connection .........................................386
Name option .......................................388
Path Protection
Active Link Alarms ..........................382
U
Upper Modulation .....................................190
User
NMS5UX .............................................165
Read & Write ......................................160
Read Only ..........................................160
Station Op. .........................................160
System ..............................................165
Forced Switch ................................382
User list ..................................................165
Preferential Switch ..........................382
Profile ................................................160
Primary Radio E1 Type ....................382
Timeout .............................................160
Secondary Radio E1 Type ................382
User Keep Alive ...................................160
Standby Link Alarms .......................382
User Name .........................................160
Switch Status .................................382

Wtr Time (min) ..............................382
Stream ..............................................386
Tributary option ..................................387
Tributary-Radio option .........................386
Tributary-Tributary option ....................387
Type option ........................................389
TDM Matrix (PWE3)
1st Trib. option ...................................400
2nd Trib. option ..................................400
Channel .............................................400
Channel option ....................................402
User Output
Active State ........................................512
Force Status .......................................512
Label .................................................512
Linked To ...........................................512
State .................................................512
Status ................................................512
Users list
SNMPv3
Authorization Protocol .....................164
Privacy Protocol ..............................164
Profile ...........................................164
Connection .........................................400
543
Product Code ....................................... 51
User .............................................164
Release ............................................... 19
Version ............................................... 51
WEB LCT Console ...................................... 24
VC-12
Alarms ...............................................375
Excessive BER Threshold ......................372
J2 Path Trace
Xpic
Expected .......................................375
Received .......................................375
Sent .............................................375
Status ...........................................375
Signal Degrade Threshold .....................372
Fault Management Procedure ................207

Radio 1A ............................................207
Radio 2A ............................................207
Remote Xpic Proc. Radio 1A Tx Off .........207
Remote Xpic Proc. Radio 2A Tx Off .........207
Signal Label
Expected .......................................375
Xpic Proc. Block on Radio 1A .................207
Sent .............................................375
Xpic Proc. Block on Radio 2A .................207
VC-4
Alarms ...............................................368
B3 Excessive BER Threshold ..................369
B3 Signal Degrade Threshold ................368
J1 Path Trace
Expected .......................................368
Received .......................................368
Sent .............................................368
Type .............................................368
Signal Label
Expected .......................................369
Received .......................................369
Sent .............................................369
W
Wake Up
Gosip Address .....................................108
NE Location ........................................108
NMS IP Address ..................................108
Status ................................................108
Timeout (Minutes) ...............................108
WEB LCT
Code ..................................................125
Current version ...................................125
Description .........................................125
544
ASSISTANCE SERVICE
For more information, refer to the section relevant to the technical support on the Internet site of the company manufacturing the product.
545
546

Mn00268e v12 WEB LCT ALCplus2e - 1.9 - Enh User Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mn00268e v12 WEB LCT ALCplus2e - 1.9 - Enh User Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WEB LCT

The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e

MANUAL CONTENT ................................................................................................................. 19

WEB LCT APPLICATION.......................................................................................................... 20

WEB LOCAL CRAFT TERMINAL (WEB LCT) PAGE..................................................................... 25

Reset the remote equipment list ............................................................................... 39

MENU AND COMMANDS (EQUIPMENT MENU) ......................................................................... 46

NSAP tab ......................................................................................................... 68

Report & Loggers Maint. contextual area ...................................................................102

Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (restore configuration)...............128

Delete a SNMPv3 user ............................................................................................163

Ethernet transport ...........................................................................................194

Set the source used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL A or STM-1/NODAL B input...............218

Verify/modify the criterion used to analyse 1588 packets ......................................249

Enable manually the laser transmission (LAN)............................................................295

Priority Management tab ...................................................................................330

Verify/modify the B2 Excessive BER alarm threshold .......................................357

Modify the Wait Time parameter (protected connection)........................................383

Radio Branch ..............................................................................................................422

Display the values of statistical counters of an Ethernet port........................................450

Forcing of the Nodal Bus to operation .................................................................500

ALARMS LIST ....................................................................................................................... 513

OPERATIONS LIST ............................................................................................................... 521

PARAMETERS LIST ............................................................................................................... 535

ASSISTANCE SERVICE.......................................................................................................... 545

In this manual, to make the writing easier, the wording:

ALCplus2e identifies the equipment of series ALS with ALCplus2e IDU.

WEB LCT APPLICATION

Help Web Server

Web Lct Console

WEB LCT page

WEB LCT page

Help Web Server

Web Lct Console

WEB LCT page

WEB LCT page

Through the WEB LCT application, it is possible to manage:

The measures of Performance Monitoring (Performance Monitoring).

The backup/restore of the whole equipment configuration (Backup/Restore Config.).

The equipment users list (User Manager/User Manager SNMP-V3).

The sources and the outputs of synchronism (Synchronisation).

The radio parameters (Radio).

The local and remote User Input (User Input).

The User output (User Output).

The remote element list (Remote elements list area)

The users connected to the equipment ([Logged Users] parameter).

Maximum number of...

Equipment into the remote equipment list

Stations into the remote equipment list

Equipment which can be connected contemporarily via a single WEB

Users (WEB LCT, SCT/LMT and NMS5UX) contemporarily connected to

Signals into the Events area

WEB LCT is an application resident in the equipment controller.

Manage the transfer of files between PC and equipment (FTP)

Manage the USB connection (PPP)

Manager the help online of WEB LCT (Help Web Server).

WEB LOCAL CRAFT TERMINAL (WEB LCT) PAGE

OPEN/CLOSE THE WEB LCT PAGE

Open the WEB LCT page from Browser (Ethernet connection)

Open the WEB LCT page from Browser (Ethernet connection)

For equipment using the protocol SNMPv3: